Posted: February 28th, 2023

H.W Chap.5 (Ph)

Kindly read the instructions

Book name for your reference : Fogelin & Sinnott-Armstrong, Understanding Arguments: An Introduction to Informal

Logic (lastest version)

P.S:Use simple english term for the assignment.

108

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

knowledge (“studies”) and to show that we have knowledge instead of just
a hunch. That point is lost if we drop the assuring terms.

Unfortunately, there is no mechanical method for determining when
guarding or assuring terms and phrases can be dropped, or whether certain
sentences are unnecessary tangents or repetition. We simply have to look
closely at what is being said and think hard about what is needed to support
the conclusion. It takes great skill, care, and insight to pare an argument
down to its essential core without omitting anything that would make it bet-
ter. And that is the goal: If you want to understand someone’s argument,
you should try to make that argument as good as it can be. You should in-
terpret it charitably. Distorting and oversimplifying other people’s argu-
ments might be fun at times and can win points in debates, but it cannot
help us understand or learn from other people’s arguments.

In the quotation above, is it fair to drop “I think” from the start of Edwards’s
sentences “I think these are decisions the states should have the power to make”
and “I think that’s wrong—that power should not be taken away from the
states“? Why or why not? Is this phrase “I think” used for guarding or assuring
or some other purpose in this context? Explain why Edwards adds these words.

Discussion Question

Put the following arguments into standard form and omit anything that does
not affect the validity of the argument or the truth of its premises.

1. Philadelphia is rich in history, but it is not now the capital of the United
States, so the United States Congress must meet somewhere else.

2. Not everybody whom you invited is going to come to your party. Some of
them won’t come. So this room should be big enough.

3. I know that my wife is at home, since I just called her there and spoke to
her. We talked about our dinner plans.

4. I’m not sure, but Joseph is probably Jewish. Hence, he is a rabbi if he is a
member of the clergy.

5. Some students could not concentrate on the lecture, because they did not
eat lunch before class, although I did.

6. The most surprising news of all is that Johnson dropped out of the race
because he thought his opponent was better qualified than he was for
the office.

7. The Democrat is likely to win, since experts agree that more women sup-
port him.

8. It seems to me that married people are happier, so marriage must be a
good thing, or at least I think so.

Exercise I

Note:
Remember that you may need
to revise claims when putting
the argument into Standard
Form – in fact, this exercise is
specifically targeting this!

115

Arrang ing Subarguments

premises) provide separate reasons for a conclusion, draw separate arrows
from each reason to the conclusion. When a conclusion of one argument is
a premise in another, put it in the middle of a chain. The whole diagram
together will then show how the parts of the argument fit together.

Put the following arguments into standard form. Break up the premises and
form chains of arguments wherever this can be done without distorting the
argument. Then diagram the argument.

1. Either Jack is a fool or Mary is a crook, because she ended up with all of
his money.

2. Our team can’t win this Saturday, both because they are not going to play,
and because they are no good, so they wouldn’t win even if they did play.

3. Mercury is known to be the only metal that is liquid at room temperature,
so a pound of mercury would be liquid in this room, which is at room
temperature, and it would also conduct electricity, since all metals do.
Therefore, some liquids do conduct electricity.

4. Since he won the lottery, he’s rich and lucky, so he’ll probably do well in
the stock market, too, unless his luck runs out.

5. Joe is not a freshman, since he lives in a fraternity, and freshmen are not
allowed to live in fraternities. He also can’t be a senior, since he has not
declared a major, and every senior has declared a major. And he can’t be a
junior, because I never met him before today, and I would have met him
before now if he were a junior. So Joe must be a sophomore.

6. Since many newly emerging nations do not have the capital resources
necessary for sustained growth, they will continue to need help from
industrial nations to avoid mass starvation.

Exercise II

In “A Piece of ‘God’s Handiwork’” (Exercise II in Chapter 4), Robert Redford
argues that the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) should not allow Conoco
to drill for oil in Utah’s Grand Staircase-Escalante National Monument. The
following passage is a crucial part where Redford answers an objection.
Arrange its subarguments in standard form so as to reveal the structure of his
argument. Then diagram the overall argument.

The BLM says its hands are tied. Why? Because these lands were set aside subject
to “valid existing rights,” and Conoco has a lease that gives it the right to drill.
Sure Conoco has a lease—more than one, in fact—but those leases were originally

Exercise III

(continued)

These arguments have a more
complex structure to them
because they have
subarguments. Sometimes it
can be tricky to sort out what
that structure is. There are 2 key
tools you have at your disposal:

o Rely on those explicit
argument markers to let you
know where inferential
relationships hold (they won’t
always be present, but when
they are use them!)

o Where there is ambiguity,
make a choice based on charity.
Attempt to put the argument in
what is the most sensible
arrangement.

122

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

The following arguments depend for their validity on suppressed premises of
various kinds. For each of them, list enough suppressed premises to make the
argument valid. This might require several suppressed premises of various
kinds. Then put the arguments into Standard Form and Diagram them.

1. Britney Spears is under age thirty-five. Therefore, she cannot run for
president of the United States.

2. Nixon couldn’t have been president in 1950 because he was still in the Senate.

3. There must not be any survivors, since they would have been found by now.
4. Lincoln could not have met Washington, because Washington was dead

before Lincoln was born.
5. That’s not modern poetry; you can understand it.
6. Harold can’t play in the Super Bowl, because he broke his leg.

7. Dan is either stupid or very cunning, so he must be stupid.
8. Susan refuses to work on Sundays, which shows that she is lazy and

inflexible.
9. Jim told me that Mary is a professor, so she can’t be a student, since

professors must already have degrees.
10. This burglar alarm won’t work unless we are lucky or the burglar uses the

front door, so we can’t count on it.

Exercise VI

THE METHOD OF RECONSTRUCTION

We can summarize the discussion so far by listing the steps to be taken in re-
constructing an argument. The first two steps were discussed in Chapters 4
and 3, respectively.

  • 5-I
  • 5-II
  • 5-VI

Understanding
Arguments

This page intentionally left blank

Walter Sinnott-Armstrong
Dartmouth College

Robert J. Fogelin
Dartmouth College

Understanding
Arguments

An Introduction to Informal Logic

EIGHTH EDITION

Australia • Brazil • Japan • Korea • Mexico • Singapore • Spain • United Kingdom • United States

Understanding Arguments:
An Introduction to Informal Logic,
Eighth Edition
Walter Sinnott-Armstrong and
Robert J. Fogelin

Publisher/Executive Editor: Clark Baxter

Senior Sponsoring Editor: Joann Kozyrev

Associate Media Editor: Diane Akerman

Assistant Editor: Nathan Gamache

Editorial Assistant: Michaela Henry

Marketing Manager: Mark Haynes

Marketing Coordinator: Josh Hendrick

Marketing Communications
Manager: Kim Soltero

Project Manager, Editorial
Production: Abigail Greshik

Creative Director: Rob Hugel

Art Director: Faith Brosnan

Print Buyer: Betsy Donaghey

Permissions Editors: Scott Bragg/
Karyn L. Morrison

Production Service: Pre-PressPMG

Photo Researcher: John Hill

Copy Editor: Pre-PressPMG

Cover Designer: RHDG

Cover Image: Getty Images/Stella Salazar

Compositor: Pre-PressPMG

For product information and technology assistance,
contact us at Cengage Learning

Academic Resource Center, 1-800-423-0563.

For permission to use material from this text or
product, submit all requests online at

www.cengage.com/permissions.
Further permissions questions can be emailed to

permissionrequest@cengage.com.

© 2010, 2005 Wadsworth, Cengage Learning

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by
the copyright herein may be reproduced, transmitted,
stored, or used in any form or by any means graphic,
electronic, or mechanical, including but not limited to
photocopying, recording, scanning, digitizing, taping, Web
distribution, information networks, or information storage
and retrieval systems, except as permitted under Section
107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.

Library of Congress Control Number: 2008939692

ISBN-13: 978-0-495-60395-5

ISBN-10: 0-495-60395-3

Wadsworth Cengage Learning
10 Davis Drive
Belmont, CA 94002-3098
USA

Cengage Learning products are represented in Canada by
Nelson Education, Ltd.
For your course and learning solutions, visit
academic.cengage.com.
Purchase any of our products at your local college store or
at our preferred online store www.ichapters.com.

Printed in the United States of America
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 11 10 09

www.cengage.com/permissions

www.ichapters.com

To Eric, John, Lars, Miranda, and Nicholas

and the colleges of their choice

This page intentionally left blank

PREFACE xv

PART I HOW TO ANALYZE ARGUMENTS 1

Chapter 1
USES OF ARGUMENTS 3

What Arguments Are 3

Justifications 4

Explanations 7

Combinations: An Example 10

CHAPTER 2
THE WEB OF LANGUAGE 17

Language and Convention 17

Linguistic Acts 19

Speech Acts 22

Performatives 23

Kinds of Speech Acts 26

Speech Act Rules 28

Conversational Acts 32

Conversational Rules 34

Conversational Implication 37

Violating Conversational Rules 40

Rhetorical Devices 42

Deception 45

Bronston v. United States 46

Summary 48

CHAPTER 3
THE LANGUAGE OF ARGUMENT 51

Argument Markers 51

If . . . , then . . . 53

CONTENTS

vi i

v i i i

Contents

Arguments in Standard Form 55

Some Standards for Evaluating Arguments 57

Validity 57

Truth 59

Soundness 60

A Tricky Case 60

A Problem and Some Solutions 62

Assuring 63

Guarding 65

Discounting 66

Evaluative Language 69

Spin Doctoring 72

CHAPTER 4
THE ART OF CLOSE ANALYSIS 77

An Extended Example 77

Clerk Hire Allowance, House of Representatives 77

CHAPTER 5
DEEP ANALYSIS 105

Getting Down to Basics 105

Clarifying Crucial Terms 109

Dissecting the Argument 109

Arranging Subarguments 111

Suppressed Premises 116

Contingent Facts 117

Linguistic Principles 119

Evaluative Suppressed Premises 120

Uses and Abuses of Suppressed Premises 121

The Method of Reconstruction 122

Digging Deeper 125

An Example of Deep Analysis: Capital Punishment 127

PART II HOW TO EVALUATE ARGUMENTS:
DEDUCTIVE STANDARDS 139

CHAPTER 6
PROPOSITIONAL LOGIC 141

The Formal Analysis of Arguments 141

i x

Contents

Basic Propositional Connectives 142

Conjunction 142

Disjunction 150

Negation 150

Process of Elimination 153

How Truth-Functional Connectives Work 154

Testing for Validity 156

Some Further Connectives 160

Conditionals 162

Truth Tables for Conditionals 163

Logical Language and Everyday Language 169

Other Conditionals in Ordinary Language 172

CHAPTER 7
CATEGORICAL LOGIC 179

Beyond Propositional Logic 179

Categorical Propositions 180

The Four Basic Categorical Forms 182

Translation into the Basic Categorical Forms 184

Contradictories 187

Existential Commitment 189

Validity for Categorical Arguments 190

Categorical Immediate Inferences 192

The Theory of the Syllogism 194

Appendix: The Classical Theory 203

The Classical Square of Opposition 205

The Classical Theory of Immediate Inference 209

The Classical Theory of Syllogisms 210

PART III HOW TO EVALUATE ARGUMENTS:
INDUCTIVE STANDARDS 213

CHAPTER 8
ARGUMENTS TO AND FROM GENERALIZATIONS 215

Induction versus Deduction 215

Statistical Generalizations 219

Should We Accept the Premises? 220

Is the Sample Large Enough? 220

Is the Sample Biased? 222

Is the Result Biased in Some Other Way? 223

Statistical Applications 225

x

Contents

CHAPTER 9
CAUSAL REASONING 231

Reasoning About Causes 231

Sufficient Conditions and Necessary Conditions 233

The Sufficient Condition Test 236

The Necessary Condition Test 237

The Joint Test 238

Rigorous Testing 240

Reaching Positive Conclusions 242

Applying These Methods to Find Causes 243

Normality 243

Background Assumptions 244

A Detailed Example 245

Calling Things Causes 249

Concomitant Variation 250

CHAPTER 10
INFERENCE TO THE BEST EXPLANATION AND

FROM ANALOGY 257

Inferences to the Best Explanation 257

Arguments from Analogy 267

CHAPTER 11
CHANCES 277

Some Fallacies of Probability 277

The Gambler’s Fallacy 277

Strange Things Happen 278

Heuristics 279

The Language of Probability 282

A Priori Probability 283

Some Rules of Probability 285

Bayes’s Theorem 291

CHAPTER 12
CHOICES 303

Expected Monetary Value 303

Expected Overall Value 306

Decisions Under Ignorance 308

x i

Contents

PART IV FALLACIES 315

CHAPTER 13
FALLACIES OF VAGUENESS 317

Uses of Unclarity 317

Vagueness 318

Heaps 320

Slippery Slopes 322

Conceptual Slippery-Slope Arguments 322

Fairness Slippery-Slope Arguments 325

Causal Slippery-Slope Arguments 327

CHAPTER 14
FALLACIES OF AMBIGUITY 333

Ambiguity 333

Equivocation 337

Definitions 343

CHAPTER 15
FALLACIES OF RELEVANCE 353

Relevance 353

Ad Hominem Arguments 354

Appeals to Authority 360

More Fallacies of Relevance 364

CHAPTER 16
FALLACIES OF VACUITY 369

Circularity 369

Begging the Question 370

Self-Sealers 375

CHAPTER 17
REFUTATION 381

What Is Refutation? 381

Counterexamples 382

Reductio Ad Absurdum 386

Straw Men and False Dichotomies 390

Refutation by Parallel Reasoning 392

x i i

Contents

PART V AREAS OF ARGUMENTATION 401

CHAPTER 18
LEGAL REASONING 403

Components of Legal Reasoning 404

Questions of Fact 404

Questions of Law 405

The Law of Discrimination 411

The Equal Protection Clause 411

Applying the Equal Protection Clause 412

The Strict Scrutiny Test 413

The Bakke Case 414

Regents of the University of California v. Bakke 416

Legal Developments Since Bakke 418

Grutter v. Bollinger 419

Gratz v. Bollinger 425

Burden of Proof 430

CHAPTER 19
MORAL REASONING 433

Moral Disagreements 433

The Problem of Abortion 434

The “Pro-Life” Argument 435

“Pro-Choice” Responses 437

Analogical Reasoning in Ethics 442

Weighing Factors 444

“A Defense of Abortion,” by Judith Jarvis Thomson 446

“An Argument that Abortion Is Wrong,”
by Don Marquis 459

CHAPTER 20
SCIENTIFIC REASONING 477

Standard Science 477

Scientific Revolutions 479

“Molecular Machines: Experimental Support for the
Design Inference,” by Michael J. Behe 481

“Living with Darwin,” by Philip Kitcher 494

x i i i

Contents

CHAPTER 21
RELIGIOUS REASONING 505

“Five Reasons to Believe in God,” by William Lane Craig 506

“Seven Deadly Objections to Belief in the Christian God,” by
Edwin Curley 512

CHAPTER 22
PHILOSOPHICAL REASONING 523

“Computing Machinery and Intelligence,” by A. M. Turing 524

“The Myth of the Computer,” by John R. Searle 536

Credits 543

Index 545

This page intentionally left blank

Traditionally, logic has been considered the most general science dealing
with arguments. The task of logic is to discover the fundamental principles
for distinguishing good arguments from bad ones.

For certain purposes, arguments are best studied as abstract patterns of
reasoning. Logic can then focus on these general forms rather than on par-
ticular arguments, such as your attempt to prove to the bank that they, not
you, made a mistake. The study of those general principles that make cer-
tain patterns of argument valid and other patterns of argument invalid is
called formal logic. Two chapters of this work are dedicated to formal logic.

A different but complementary way of viewing an argument is to treat it
as a particular use of language: Presenting arguments is one of the impor-
tant things we do with words. This approach stresses that arguing is a lin-
guistic activity. Instead of studying arguments as abstract patterns, it
examines them as they occur in concrete settings. It raises questions of the
following kind:

What is the place of argument within language as a whole?

What words or phrases are characteristic of arguments?

How do these words function?

What task or tasks are arguments supposed to perform?

When an approach to argument has this emphasis, the study is called infor-
mal logic. Though it contains a substantial treatment of formal logic, Under-
standing Arguments, as its subtitle indicates, is primarily a textbook in
informal logic.

The eighth edition of Understanding Arguments differs from the seventh
edition in a number of significant ways. The uses of arguments have been
brought right up front for emphasis. The chapters have been split up and re-
organized for clarity. Some of the more difficult and confusing topics have
been dropped to simplify and streamline the text. This edition also contains
new readings on scientific reasoning in Chapter 20 and on religious reason-
ing in Chapter 21. These new readings make the text more relevant to con-
temporary debates. Finally, this edition includes a large-scale updating of
examples, exercises, and discussion questions throughout the text, includ-
ing a liberal sprinkling of quotations from Jon Stewart and Stephen Colbert

PREFACE

xv

xv i

Preface

as well as Colin Powell’s argument that Iraq was seeking weapons of mass
destruction.

This new edition has been influenced by our teaching of this material
with various colleagues, including visitors, at Dartmouth College. In this re-
gard, we would like to thank three student assistants—Ben Rump, Jane
Tucker, and especially David Lamb—in addition to the many others who
helped us on previous editions. We are also indebted to the following re-
viewers: André Ariew, University of Missouri, Columbia; John Zillmer,
Michigan State University; K. D. Borcoman, Coastline College; Barbara A.
Brown, Community College of Allegheny County; Marina F. Bykova, North
Carolina State University; Eric Parkinson, Syracuse University; and Alison
Reiheld, Michigan State University. At Wadsworth and Cengage Learning,
we received expert advice and assistance from Worth Hawes, former Acqui-
sitions Editor for Wadsworth; Joann Kozyrev, Sponsoring Editor for Philoso-
phy and Religion; Sarah Perkins, Assistant Editor; Deborah Bader, copy
editor; and Abigail Greshik, Pre-PressPMG Project Manager. Finally, we owe
a great debt to Bill Fontaine (librarian) as well as Sarah Kopper and Kier
Olsen DeVries (research assistants). Without all of these people, this book
would contain many more mistakes than it undoubtedly still does.

Walter Sinnott-Armstrong
Robert J. Fogelin

How to Analyze
Arguments

Arguments are all around us. They bombard us constantly in advertisements; in

courtrooms; in political, moral, and religious debates; in academic courses on

mathematics, science, history, literature, and philosophy; and in our personal lives

when we make decisions about our careers, finances, and families. These crucial

aspects of our lives cannot be understood fully without understanding arguments.

The goal of this book, then, is to help us understand arguments and, thereby, to

understand our lives.

We will view arguments as tools. To understand a tool, we need to know the pur-

poses for which it is used, the material out of which it is made, and the forms that it

takes. For example, hammers are normally used to drive nails or to pound malleable

substances. Hammers are usually made out of a metal head and a handle of wood,

plastic, or metal. A typical hammer’s handle is long and thin, and its head is per-

pendicular to its handle. Similarly, in order to understand arguments, we need to

investigate their purposes, materials, and forms.

Chapter 1 discusses the main purposes or uses of arguments. The material from

which arguments are made is language, so Chapters 2–3 explore language in gen-

eral and then the language of argument in particular. Chapters 4–5 use the lessons

learned by then to analyze concrete examples of arguments in detail. The following

chapters turn to the forms of arguments, including deductive forms in Part II

(Chapters 6–7) and inductive forms in Part III (Chapters 8–12). Each form of argu-

ment comes with its own standards of adequacy. Part IV (Chapters 13–17) will then

consider the main ways in which arguments can go astray, including fallacies of

clarity, relevance, and vacuity. Finally, Part V (Chapters 18–22) will explore exam-

ples of arguments in different fields—law, morality, religion, science, and philosophy—

in order to see both how such arguments differ and how they share common features

of arguments in general. By the end of this journey, we should understand argu-

ments much better.

I

1

This page intentionally left blank

Uses of Arguments

What are arguments? In our view, arguments are tools, so the first step toward

understanding arguments is to ask what they are used for—what people are trying

to accomplish when they give arguments. This brief chapter will propose a defini-

tion of arguments and then explore two main purposes of arguments: justification

and explanation. Both justifications and explanations try to provide reasons, but

reasons of different kinds. Justifications are supposed to give reasons to believe their

conclusions, whereas explanations are supposed to give reasons why their conclu-

sions are true. Each of these purposes is more complicated and fascinating than is

usually assumed.

WHAT ARGUMENTS ARE

The word “argument“ may suggest quarrels or squabbles. That is what a
child means when she reports that her parents are having an argument.
Arguments of that sort often include abuse, name-calling, and yelling. That
is not what this book is about. The goal here is not to teach you to yell
louder, to be more abusive, or to beat your opponents into submission.

Our topic is the kind of argument defined by Monty Python in their justly
famous “Argument Clinic.” In this skit, a client enters a clinic and pays for
an argument. In the first room, however, all he gets is abuse, which is not
argument. When he finally finds the right room to get an argument, the per-
son who is supposed to give him an argument simply denies whatever the
client says, so the client complains that mere denial is different from argu-
ment, because “an argument is a connected series of statements to establish
a definite proposition.” This definition is almost correct. As we will see, the
purpose of an argument need not always be to “establish” its conclusion,
both because some conclusions were established in advance and because
many reasons are inconclusive. Nonetheless, Monty Python’s definition
needs to be modified only a little in order to arrive at an adequate definition:

An argument is a connected series of sentences, statements, or propositions
(called “premises”) that are intended to give reasons of some kind for a sentence,
statement, or proposition (called the “conclusion”).

1

3

This definition does not pretend to be precise, but it does tell us what
arguments are made of (sentences, statements, or propositions) and what
their purpose is (to give reasons).

Another virtue of this definition is that it is flexible enough to cover the
wide variety of arguments that people actually give. Different arguments
are intended to give reasons of very different sorts. These reasons might be
justificatory reasons to believe or to disbelieve some claim. They might, in-
stead, be explanatory reasons why something happened. They might even
be practical reasons to do some act. Because reasons come in so many kinds,
arguments are useful in a great variety of situations in daily life. Trying to
determine why your computer crashed, why your friend acted the way she
did, and whether it will rain tomorrow as well as trying to decide which
political candidate to vote for, which play to use at a crucial point in a foot-
ball game, where to go to college, and whether to support or oppose capital
punishment—all involve weighing and evaluating reasons.

It is inaccurate, therefore, to think of arguments as serving only one
single simple purpose. People often assume that you always use every
argument to make other people believe what you believe and what they did
not believe before hearing or reading the argument. Actually, however,
some arguments are used for that purpose, but others are not. To fully un-
derstand arguments in all their glory, then, we need to distinguish different
uses of argument. In particular, we will focus on two exemplary purposes:
justification and explanation.

JUSTIFICATIONS

One of the most prominent uses of arguments is to justify a disputed claim. For
example, if I claim that September 11, 2001, was a Tuesday, and you deny this
or simply express some doubt, then we might look for a calendar. But suppose
we don’t have a calendar for 2001. Luckily, we do find a calendar for 2002.
Now I can justify my claim to you by presenting this argument: The calendar
shows that September 11 was on Wednesday in 2002; 2002 was not a leap year,
since 2002 is not divisible by four; nonleap years have 365 days, which is 1
more day than 52 weeks; so September 11 must have been on Tuesday in 2001.
You should now be convinced.

What have I done? My utterance of this argument has the effect of chang-
ing your mind by getting you to believe a conclusion that you did not
believe before. Of course, I might also be able to change your mind by hyp-
notizing you. But normally I do not want to use hypnosis. I also do not want
to change your mind by manufacturing a fake calendar for 2002 with the
wrong dates. Such tricks would not satisfy my goals fully. This shows that
changing your mind is not all that I am trying to accomplish. What else do I
want? My additional aim is to show you that you should change your mind,

4

CHAPTER 1 ■ Uses of Arguments

5

Just if icat ions

and why. I want to give you a good reason to change your mind. I want my
argument not only to make you believe my conclusion but also to make you
justified in believing my conclusion.

The above example is typical of one kind of justification, but there are
other patterns. Suppose that I share your doubts about which day of the
week it was on September 11, 2001. Then I might use the same argument to
justify my belief as well as yours. Indeed, you don’t even need to be present.
If I am all alone, and I just want to figure out which day of the week it was
on September 11, 2001, then I might think in terms of this same argument.
Here the goal is not to convince anybody else, but the argument is still used
to find a good reason to believe the conclusion.

In cases like these, we can say that the argument is used for impersonal
normative justification. The justification is normative because the goal is to
find a reason that is a good reason. It is impersonal because what is sought
is a reason that is or should be accepted as a good reason by everyone ca-
pable of grasping this argument, regardless of who they are. The purpose
is to show that there is a reason to believe the conclusion, regardless of
who has a reason to believe it. Other arguments, in contrast, are aimed at
specific people, and the goal is to show that those particular people are
committed to the conclusion or have a reason to believe the conclusion.
Such individualized uses of arguments seek what can be called personal
justification.

There should be nothing surprising about different people having differ-
ent reasons. I might climb a mountain to appreciate the view at the top,
whereas you climb it to get exercise, and your friend climbs it to be able to
talk to you while you climb it. Different people can have different reasons
for the same action. Similarly, different people can have different reasons to
believe the same conclusion. Suppose that someone is murdered in the ball-
room with a revolver. I might have good reason to believe that Miss Peacock
did not commit the murder, because I saw her in the library at the time the
murder was committed. You might not trust me when I tell you that I saw
her, but you still might have good reason to believe that she is innocent, be-
cause you believe that Colonel Mustard did it alone. Even if I doubt that
Colonel Mustard did it, we still each have our own reasons to agree that
Miss Peacock is innocent.

When different people with different beliefs are involved, we need to
ask who is supposed to accept the reason that is given in an argument.
A speaker might give an argument to show a listener that the speaker has a
reason to believe something, even though the speaker knows that the audi-
ence does not and need not accept that reason. Suppose that you are an athe-
ist, but I am an evangelical Christian, and you ask me why I believe that
Jesus rose from the dead. I might respond that the Bible says that Jesus rose
from the dead, and what the Bible says must be true, so Jesus rose from the
dead. This argument tells you what my reasons are for believing what I
believe, even if you do not accept those reasons. My argument can be used

to show you that I have reasons and what my reasons are, regardless of
whether you believe that my reasons are good ones and also regardless of
whether my reasons really are good ones.

The reverse can also happen. A speaker might give an argument to show
a listener that the listener has a reason to believe something, even though
the speaker does not accept that reason. Suppose that you often throw loud
parties late into the night close to my bedroom. I want to convince you to
stop or at least quiet down. Fortunately, you think that every citizen ought
to obey the law. I disagree, for I am an anarchist bent on undermining all
governments and laws. Still, I want to get a good night’s sleep before the
protest tomorrow, so I might argue that it is illegal to make that much noise
so late, and you ought to obey the law, so you ought to stop throwing such
loud parties. This argument can show you that you are committed to its
conclusion, even if I believe that its premises are false.

Of course, whether I succeed in showing my audience that they have a
reason to believe my conclusion depends on who my audience is. My
argument won’t work against loud neighbors who don’t care about the law.
Consequently, we need to know who the audience is and what they believe
in order to be able to show them what reason they have to believe a
conclusion.

In all of these cases, arguments are used to show that someone has a
reason to believe the conclusion of the argument. That is why all of these
uses can be seen as providing different kinds of justification. The differences
become crucial when we try to evaluate such arguments. If my goal is to
show you that you have a reason to believe something, then I can be
criticized for using a premise that you reject. Your beliefs are no basis for
criticism, however, if all I want is to show my own reasons for believing the
conclusion. Thus, to evaluate an argument properly, we often need to deter-
mine not only whether the argument is being used to justify a belief but also
which kind of justification is sought and who the audience is.

6

CHAPTER 1 ■ Uses of Arguments

Write the best brief argument you can to justify each of the following claims to
someone who does not believe them.

1. Nine is not a prime number.

2. Seven is a prime number.

3. A molecule of water has three atoms in it.

4. Water is not made up of carbon.

5. The U.S. president lives in Washington.

6. The Earth is not flat.

7. Humans have walked on the moon.

8. Most bicycles have two wheels.

Exercise I

EXPLANATIONS

A different but equally important use of arguments is to provide explanations.
Explanations answer questions about how or why something happened. We
explain how a mongoose got out of his cage by pointing to a hole he dug
under the fence. We explain why Smith was acquitted by saying that he got
off on a technicality. The purpose of explanations is not to prove that some-
thing happened, but to make sense of things.

An example will bring out the difference between justification and expla-
nation. One person claims that a school’s flagpole is thirty-five feet tall, and
someone else asks her to justify this claim. In response, she might produce a
receipt from the Allegiance Flagpole Company acknowledging payment for a
flagpole thirty-five feet in height. Alternatively, she may put a stick straight
up into the ground, measure the stick’s length and its shadow’s length, then
measure the length of the flagpole’s shadow, and calculate the length of the
flagpole. Neither of these justifications, however, will answer a different ques-
tion: Why is the flagpole thirty-five feet tall? This new question could be
answered in all sorts of ways, depending on context: The school could not
afford a taller one. It struck the committee as about the right height for the
location. That was the only size flagpole in stock. There is a state law limiting
flagpoles to thirty-five feet. And so on. These answers help us understand
why the flagpole is thirty-five feet tall. They explain its height.

Sometimes simply filling in the details of a story provides an explanation.
For example, we can explain how a two-year-old girl foiled a bank robbery
by saying that the robber tripped over her while fleeing from the bank. Here
we have made sense out of an unusual event by putting it in the context of a
plausible narrative. It is unusual for a two-year-old girl to foil a bank robbery,
but there is nothing unusual about a person tripping over a child when run-
ning recklessly at full speed in a crowded area.

Although the narrative is probably the most common form of explanation
in everyday life, we also often use arguments to give explanations. We can
explain a certain event by deriving it from established principles and ac-
cepted facts. This argument then has the following form:

(1) General principles or laws
(2) A statement of initial conditions

(3) A statement of the phenomenon to be explained

The symbol “ ” is pronounced “therefore” and indicates that the premises
above the line are supposed to give a reason for the conclusion below the

7

Explanat ions

When, if ever, is it legitimate to try to convince someone else to believe something
on the basis of a premise that you yourself reject? Consider a variety of cases.

Discussion Question

line. By “initial conditions” we mean those facts in the context that, together
with appropriate general principles and laws, allow us to derive the result
that the event to be explained occurs.

This sounds quite abstract, but an example should clarify the basic idea.
Suppose we put an ice cube into a glass and then fill the glass with water to
the brim. The ice will stick out above the surface of the water. What will
happen when the ice cube melts? Will the water overflow? Will it remain at
the same level? Will it go down? Here we are asking for a prediction, and it
will, of course, make sense to ask a person to justify whatever prediction he
or she makes. Stumped by this question, we let the ice cube melt to see what
happens. We observe that the water level remains unchanged. After a few
experiments, we convince ourselves that this result always occurs. We now
have a new question: Why does this occur? Now we want an explanation of
this phenomenon. The explanation turns upon the law of buoyancy, which
says that an object in water is buoyed up by a force equal to the weight of
the water it displaces. This law implies that, if we put an object in water, it
will continue to sink until it displaces a volume of water whose weight is
equal to its own weight (or else the object hits the bottom of the container).
With this in mind, go back to the original problem. An ice cube is itself
simply water in a solid state. Thus, when it melts, it will exactly fill in the
volume of water it displaced, so the water level will remain unchanged.

We can now see how this explanation conforms to the argumentative
pattern mentioned above:

(1) General principles or laws (Primarily the law of buoyancy)
(2) Initial conditions (An ice cube in a glass of water filled to the brim)

(3) Phenomenon explained (The level of the water remaining
unchanged after the ice cube melts)

This explanation is fairly good. People with only a slight understanding of
science can follow it and see why the water level remains unchanged. We
should also notice that it is not a complete explanation, because certain things
are simply taken for granted—for example, that things do not change
weight when they pass from a solid to a liquid state. To put the explanation
into perfect argumentative form, this assumption and many others would
have to be stated explicitly. This is never done in everyday life and is only
rarely done in the most exact sciences.

Is this explanation any good? Explanations are satisfactory if they remove
bewilderment or surprise by telling us how or why something happened in a
way that is relevant to the concerns of a particular context. Our example
does seem to accomplish that much. However, it might seem that even the
best explanations are not very useful because they take so much for granted.
In explaining why the water level remains the same when the ice cube melts,
we cited the law of buoyancy. Now, why should that law be true? What ex-
plains it? To explain the law of buoyancy, we would have to derive it from
other laws that are more general and, perhaps, more intelligible. In fact, this
has been done. Archimedes simultaneously proved and explained the law

8

CHAPTER 1 ■ Uses of Arguments

of buoyancy by deriving it from the laws of the lever. How about the laws of
the lever? Can they be proved and explained by deriving them from still
higher and more comprehensive laws? Perhaps. Yet reasons give out, and
sooner or later explanation (like justification) comes to an end. It is the task
of science and all rational inquiry to move that boundary further and further
back. But even when there is more to explain, that does not show that a par-
tial explanation is totally useless. As we have seen, explanations can be use-
ful even when they are incomplete, and even though they are not used to
justify any disputed claim. Explanation is, thus, a separate use of arguments.

9

Explanat ions

Houses in Indonesia sometimes have their electrical outlets in the middle of
the wall rather than at floor level. Why? A beginning of an explanation is that
flooding is a danger in the Netherlands. Citing this fact does not help much,
however, unless one remembers that Indonesia was formerly a Dutch colony.
We can understand why the Dutch might put their electrical outlets above
floor level in the Netherlands. It is safer in a country where flooding is a dan-
ger. Is flooding, then, a similar danger in Indonesia? Apparently not; so why
did the Dutch continue this practice in Indonesia? The answer is that colonial
settlers tend to preserve their home customs, practices, and styles. The Dutch
continued to build Dutch-style houses with the electrical outlets where (for
them) they are normally placed—that is, in the middle of the wall rather than
at floor level. Restate this explanation in the form of an argument (that is, spec-
ify its premises and conclusion).

Exercise II

Write a brief argument to explain each of the following. Indicate what facts
and what general principles are employed in your explanations. (Do not for-
get those principles that may seem too obvious to mention.)

1. Why a lighter-than-air balloon rises.

2. Why there is an infield fly rule in baseball.

3. Why there is an international date line.

4. Why there are more psychoanalysts in New York City than in any other
city or, for that matter, in most countries in the world.

5. Why average temperatures tend to be higher closer to the equator.

6. Why there are usually more college freshmen who plan to go to medical
school than there are seniors who still plan to go to medical school.

7. Why almost no textbooks are more than eighteen inches high.

8. Why most cars have four tires (instead of more or fewer).

9. Why paintings by Van Gogh cost so much.

10. Why wages go up when unemployment goes down.

Exercise III

COMBINATIONS: AN EXAMPLE

Although justification and explanation are distinct uses of arguments, we
often want to know both what happened and also why it happened. Then we
need to combine justifications and explanations. We can see how this works
by considering a fictional example.

Imagine that Madison was arrested for murdering her husband, Victor.
Now she is on trial, and you are on the jury. Presumably, the police and the
prosecuting attorneys would not have arrested and prosecuted her if they
did not believe that Madison committed the murder, but are their beliefs
justified? Should she be convicted and sent to prison? That’s up to you and
the other jurors to decide.

You do not want to convict her arbitrarily, of course, so you need argu-
ments to justify you in believing that Madison is guilty. The goal of prose-
cuting attorneys is to provide such justification. Their means of reaching this
goal is to present evidence and arguments during the trial. Although their
ultimate conclusion is that you should find Madison guilty of murder, the
prosecutors need to justify lots of little claims along the way.

It might seem too obvious to mention, but the prosecution first needs an
argument to show that the victim died. After all, if nobody died, nobody
was killed. This first argument can be pretty simple: This person was walk-
ing and talking before he was shot in the head; now his heart has stopped
beating for a long time; so he must be dead. There can be complications,
since some gunshot victims can be revived, but let’s assume that an argu-
ment like this justifies the claim that the victim is dead.

We also want to know who the victim was. The body was identified by
several of Victor’s friends, we assume, so all the prosecution needs to argue
is that identifications like this are usually correct, so it was Victor who died.
This second argument also provides a justification, but it differs from the
first argument in several ways. The first argument referred directly to the
facts about Victor that show he died, whereas this second argument does not
say which features of the victim show that it was Victor. Instead, this argu-
ment relies on trusting other people—Victor’s friends—without knowing
what it was about the victim’s face that made them think it was Victor. Such
appeals to authority will be discussed in more detail in Chapters 3 and 15.

The third issue is the cause of death. Here it is common to appeal to a
medical authority. In our case, the coroner or medical examiner makes
observations or runs scientific tests that provide premises for another

10

CHAPTER 1 ■ Uses of Arguments

It is sometimes said that science tells us how things happen but does not tell us
why they happen. In what ways is this contention right, and in what ways is it
wrong?

Discussion Question

argument that is supposed to justify the conclusion that Victor’s death was
caused by a bullet to the head. This argument is also an appeal to an author-
ity, but here the authority is a scientific expert rather than a friend.

Yet another argument, possibly based on firing marks on the bullet, can
then justify you in believing that the bullet came from a certain gun. More
arguments, possibly based on eyewitnesses, then justify the claims that
Madison was the person who fired that gun at Victor. And so on.

All of these arguments depend on background assumptions. When you
see the marks on the bullet that killed Victor line up with the marks on
another bullet that was fired from the alleged murder weapon, you as-
sume that guns leave distinctive marks on bullets and that nobody
switched the bullets. A good prosecutor will provide arguments for these
assumptions, but nobody can prove everything. Arguments always start
from assumptions. This problem will occupy us at several points later, in-
cluding parts of Chapters 3 and 5. The point for now is just that the prose-
cution needs to produce several arguments of various kinds in order to
justify the claim that Madison killed Victor.

It is also crucial that killing violates the law. If not, then Madison should
not be found guilty for killing Victor. So, how can the prosecutor justify the
assumption that such killing is illegal? Prosecutors usually just quote a
statute or cite a common law principle and apply it to the case, but that ar-
gument assumes a lot of background information. In the case of a statute,
there must be a duly elected legislature, it must have jurisdiction over the
place and time where and when the killing occurred, it must follow required
procedures, and the content of the law must be constitutionally permissible.
Given such a context, if the legislature says that a certain kind of killing is il-
legal, then it is illegal. It is fascinating that merely announcing that some-
thing is illegal thereby makes it illegal. We will explore such performatives
and speech acts in Chapter 2. For now we will simply assume that all of
these arguments could be provided if needed.

Even so, Madison might have had some justification for killing Victor,
such as self-defense. This justification for her act can be presented in an ar-
gument basically like this: I have a reason to protect my own life, and I need
to kill Victor first in order to protect my own life, so I have a reason to kill
Victor. This justification differs in several ways from the kind of justification
that we have been discussing so far. For one thing, this argument provides a
reason for a different person—a reason for Madison—whereas the preced-
ing arguments provided a reason for you as a juror. This argument also pro-
vides a reason with a different kind of object, since it justifies an action
(killing Victor) whereas the previous arguments justified a belief (the belief
that Madison did kill Victor). It provides a practical reason instead of an in-
tellectual reason. Despite these differences, however, if her attorneys want
to show that Madison has this new kind of justification, they need to give an
argument to show that she was justified in doing what she did.

Even if Madison had no justification, she still might have had an excuse.
Whereas a justification is supposed to show that the act was the right thing

11

Comb inat ions : An Example

to do, an excuse admits that the act was wrong but tries to show that the
agent was not fully responsible for doing it. Madison might, for example,
argue that she honestly believed that Victor was going to kill her if she did
not kill him first. If she offers this only as an excuse, she can admit that her
belief was mistaken, so she had no justification for killing Victor. Her claim
is, instead, that she was not fully responsible for his death because she was
only trying to defend herself.

Excuses like this are, in effect, explanations. By citing her mistake, Madi-
son explains why she did what she did. If she had killed Victor because she
hated him or because she wanted to take his money, then she would have
no excuse. Her act is less blameworthy, however, if she was mistaken. Of
course, you should be careful before you shoot someone, so Madison could
still be guilty of carelessness or negligence. But that is not as bad as killing
someone out of hatred or for money. Her mistake might even be reasonable.
If Victor was aiming a gun at her, then, even if it turned out not to be loaded,
any rational person in her position might have thought that Victor was on
the attack. Such reasonable mistakes might reduce or even remove responsi-
bility. Thus, by explaining her act as a mistake, Madison puts her act in a
better light than it would appear without that explanation. In general, an
excuse is just an explanation of an act that puts that act in a better light by
reducing the agent’s responsibility.

To offer an excuse, then, Madison’s defense attorneys will need to give
arguments whose purpose is not justification but explanation. This excuse
will then determine what she is guilty of. Whether Madison is guilty of first-
degree murder or some lesser charge, such as second-degree murder or
manslaughter, or even no crime at all, depends on the explanation for her act
of killing Victor.

Several of the earlier arguments also provided explanations. The medical
examiner cited the head wound to explain why Victor stopped breathing.
The victim’s identity explained why his friends said he was Victor. The fact
that the bullet came out of a particular gun explained why it had certain
markings. The legislature’s vote explained why the killing was illegal. And
so on.

In this way, what appears appears at first to be a simple case actually
depends on a complex chain of arguments that mixes justifications with
explanations. All of these justifications and explanations can be understood
by presenting them explicitly in the form of arguments.

One final point is crucial. Suppose that Madison has no justification or
excuse for killing Victor. It is still not enough for the prosecutor to give any
old argument that Madison killed Victor. The prosecution must prove guilt
beyond a reasonable doubt. This burden of proof makes the strength of the
argument crucial. You as a juror should not convict, even if you think Madi-
son is guilty, unless the prosecution’s argument meets this high standard. In
this case, as in many others, it is not enough just to be able to identify the ar-
gument and to understand its purpose. You also need to determine how
strong it is.

12

CHAPTER 1 ■ Uses of Arguments

For such reasons, we all need to understand arguments and to be able to
evaluate them. This need arises not only in law but also in life, such as when
we decide which candidate to vote for, what course to take, whether to be-
lieve that your spouse is cheating on you, and so on. The goal of this book is
to teach the skills needed for understanding and assessing arguments about
important issues like these.

13

Comb inat ions : An Example

The following arguments mix justification with explanation. For each part of
the argument, determine whether it is a justification or an explanation. How
does each sub-argument work? How strong is it? How would you respond if
you disagreed? How would you defend that part against criticisms?

It will, of course, be difficult to answer these questions before studying the
rest of this book. However, it is worthwhile to reflect on how much you al-
ready understand at the start. It is also useful to have some concrete examples
to keep in mind as you study arguments in more depth.

1. Dinosaurs are fascinating, and we cannot help but wonder what killed
these magnificent creatures. The following argument tries to show that
they were killed when a giant meteor struck the earth, but first the authors
need to argue against alternatives to this impact hypothesis.

AN EXTRATERRESTRIAL IMPACT

by Walter Alvarez and Frank Asaro

from Scientific American (October 1990), pp. 78–92

About 65 million years ago something killed half of all the life on the earth.
This sensational crime wiped out the dinosaurs, until then undisputed mas-
ters of the animal kingdom, and left the humble mammals to inherit their
estate. Human beings, descended from those survivors, cannot avoid asking
who or what committed the mass murder and what permitted our distant
ancestors to survive. . . .

Murder suspects typically must have means, motive and opportunity. An
impact [of a giant meteor, probably in the Yucatan peninsula] certainly had the
means to cause the Cretaceous extinction, and the evidence that an impact
occurred at exactly the right time points to opportunity.

The impact hypothesis provides, if not motive, then at least a mechanism
behind the crime. How do other suspects in the killing of dinosaurs fare?

Some have an air-tight alibi: they could not have killed all the different
organisms that died at the KT boundary. The venerable notion that mammals
ate the dinosaurs’ eggs, for example, does not explain the simultaneous extinc-
tion of marine foraminifera and ammonites.

Discussion Questions

(continued)

Stefan Gartner of Texas A&M University once suggested that marine life
was killed by a sudden huge flood of fresh water from the Arctic Ocean, which
apparently was isolated from other oceans during the late Cretaceous and
filled with fresh water. Yet this ingenious mechanism cannot account for the
extinction of the dinosaurs or the loss of many species of land plants.

Other suspects might have had the ability to kill, but they have alibis
based on timing. Some scientific detectives have tried to pin the blame for
mass extinction on changes in climate or sea level, for example. Such changes,
however, take much longer to occur than did the extinction; moreover, they do
not seem to have coincided with the extinction, and they have occurred repeat-
edly throughout the earth’s history without accompanying extinctions.

Others consider volcanism a prime suspect. The strongest evidence impli-
cating volcanoes is the Deccan Traps, an enormous outpouring of basaltic lava
in India that occurred approximately 65 million years ago. Recent paleomag-
netic work by Vincent E. Courtillot and his colleagues in Paris confirms previ-
ous studies. They show that most of the Deccan Traps erupted during a single
period of reversed geomagnetic polarity, with slight overlaps into the preced-
ing and succeeding periods of normal polarity. The Paris team has found that
the interval in question is probably 29R, during which the KT extinction
occurred, although it might be the reversed-polarity interval immediately be-
fore or after 29R as well.

Because the outpouring of the Deccan Traps began in one normal interval
and ended in the next, the eruptions that gave rise to them must have taken
place over at least 0.5 Myr. Most workers interested in mass extinction there-
fore have not considered volcanism a serious suspect in a killing that evidently
took place over 0.001 Myr or less. . . .

Moreover, basaltic spherules in the KT boundary argue against explosive
volcanism in any case; spherules might be generated by quieter forms of vol-
canism, but then they could not be transported worldwide. The apparent global
distribution of the iridium anomaly, shocked quartz and basaltic spherules is
strong evidence exonerating volcanism and pointing to impact. Eruptions take
place at the bottom of the atmosphere; they send material into the high strato-
sphere at best. Spherules and quartz grains, if they came from an eruption,
would quickly be slowed by atmospheric drag and fall to the ground.

Nevertheless, the enormous eruptions that created the Deccan Traps did
occur during a period spanning the KT extinction. Further, they represent the
greatest outpouring of lava on land in the past quarter of a billion years (al-
though greater volumes flow continually out of mid-ocean ridges). No investi-
gator can afford to ignore that kind of coincidence.

It seems possible that impact triggered the Deccan Traps volcanism. A few
minutes after a large body hit the earth the initial crater would be 40 kilome-
ters deep, and the release of pressure might cause the hot rock of the underly-
ing mantle to melt. Authorities on the origin of volcanic provinces, however,
find it very difficult to explain in detail how an impact could trigger large-
scale basaltic volcanism.

In the past few years the debate between supporters of each scenario has
become polarized: impact proponents have tended to ignore the Deccan Traps

14

CHAPTER 1 ■ Uses of Arguments

as irrelevant, while volcano backers have tried to explain away evidence for
impact by suggesting that it is also compatible with volcanism.

Our sense is that the argument is a Hegelian one, with an impact thesis and
a volcanic antithesis in search of a synthesis whose outlines are as yet unclear. . . .

2. In his famous testimony to the United Nations Security Council on Febru-
ary 5, 2003, which was 42 days before U.S. troops entered Iraq, Secretary of
Defense Colin Powell gave several arguments for his main conclusion that
Saddam Hussein was at that time still trying to obtain fissile material for a
nuclear weapons program.

. . . Let me turn now to nuclear weapons. We have no indication that Saddam
Hussein has ever abandoned his nuclear weapons program. On the contrary,
we have more than a decade of proof that he remains determined to acquire
nuclear weapons.

To fully appreciate the challenge that we face today, remember that in 1991
the inspectors searched Iraq’s primary nuclear weapons facilities for the first
time, and they found nothing to conclude that Iraq had a nuclear weapons pro-
gram. But, based on defector information, in May of 1991, Saddam Hussein’s
lie was exposed. In truth, Saddam Hussein had a massive clandestine nuclear
weapons program that covered several different techniques to enrich uranium,
including electromagnetic isotope separation, gas centrifuge and gas diffusion.

We estimate that this illicit program cost the Iraqis several billion dollars.
Nonetheless, Iraq continued to tell the IAEA that it had no nuclear weapons
program. If Saddam had not been stopped, Iraq could have produced a nuclear
bomb by 1993, years earlier than most worst case assessments that had been
made before the war.

In 1995, as a result of another defector, we find out that, after his invasion of
Kuwait, Saddam Hussein had initiated a crash program to build a crude nuclear
weapon, in violation of Iraq’s UN obligations. Saddam Hussein already pos-
sesses two out of the three key components needed to build a nuclear bomb. He
has a cadre of nuclear scientists with the expertise, and he has a bomb design.

Since 1998, his efforts to reconstitute his nuclear program have been fo-
cused on acquiring the third and last component: sufficient fissile material to
produce a nuclear explosion. To make the fissile material, he needs to develop
an ability to enrich uranium. Saddam Hussein is determined to get his hands
on a nuclear bomb.

He is so determined that he has made repeated covert attempts to acquire
high-specification aluminum tubes from 11 different countries, even after in-
spections resumed. These tubes are controlled by the Nuclear Suppliers Group
precisely because they can be used as centrifuges for enriching uranium.

By now, just about everyone has heard of these tubes and we all know
that there are differences of opinion. There is controversy about what these
tubes are for. Most U.S. experts think they are intended to serve as rotors in
centrifuges used to enrich uranium. Other experts, and the Iraqis themselves,
argue that they are really to produce the rocket bodies for a conventional
weapon, a multiple rocket launcher.

15

Comb inat ions : An Example

(continued)

16

CHAPTER 1 ■ Uses of Arguments

Let me tell you what is not controversial about these tubes. First, all the
experts who have analyzed the tubes in our possession agree that they can be
adapted for centrifuge use.

Second, Iraq had no business buying them for any purpose. They are
banned for Iraq.

I am no expert on centrifuge tubes, but this is an old army trooper. I can
tell you a couple things.

First, it strikes me as quite odd that these tubes are manufactured to a tol-
erance that far exceeds U.S. requirements for comparable rockets. Maybe
Iraqis just manufacture their conventional weapons to a higher standard than
we do, but I don’t think so.

Second, we actually have examined tubes from several different batches
that were seized clandestinely before they reached Baghdad. What we notice in
these different batches is a progression to higher and higher levels of specifica-
tion, including in the latest batch an anodized coating on extremely smooth
inner and outer surfaces.

Why would they continue refining the specifications? Why would they go
to all that trouble for something that, if it was a rocket, would soon be blown
into shrapnel when it went off?

The high-tolerance aluminum tubes are only part of the story. We also
have intelligence from multiple sources that Iraq is attempting to acquire mag-
nets and high-speed balancing machines. Both items can be used in a gas cen-
trifuge program to enrich uranium.

In 1999 and 2000, Iraqi officials negotiated with firms in Romania, India,
Russia and Slovenia for the purchase of a magnet production plant. Iraq
wanted the plant to produce magnets weighing 20 to 30 grams. That’s the
same weight as the magnets used in Iraq’s gas centrifuge program before the
Gulf War.

This incident, linked with the tubes, is another indicator of Iraq’s attempt
to reconstitute its nuclear weapons program.

Intercepted communications from mid-2000 through last summer showed
that Iraqi front companies sought to buy machines that can be used to balance
gas centrifuge rotors. One of these companies also had been involved in a
failed effort in 2001 to smuggle aluminum tubes into Iraq.

People will continue to debate this issue, but there is no doubt in my
mind. These illicit procurement efforts show that Saddam Hussein is very
much focused on putting in place the key missing piece from his nuclear
weapons program, the ability to produce fissile material. . . .

The Web of Language

Arguments are made up of language, so we cannot understand arguments without

first understanding language. This chapter will examine some of the basic features

of language, stressing three main ideas. First, language is conventional. Words

acquire meaning within a rich system of linguistic conventions and rules. Second,

the uses of language are diverse. We use language to communicate information, but

we also use it to ask questions, issue orders, write poetry, keep score, formulate

arguments, and perform an almost endless number of other tasks. Third, meaning is

often conveyed indirectly. To understand the significance of many utterances, we

must go beyond what is literally said to examine what is conversationally implied

by saying it.

LANGUAGE AND CONVENTION

The preceding chapter stressed that arguing is a practical activity. More
specifically, it is a linguistic activity. Arguing is one of the many things that
we can do with words. In fact, unlike things that we can accomplish both
with words and without words (like making people happy, angry, and so
forth), arguing is something we can only do with words or other meaningful
symbols. That is why nonhuman animals never give arguments. To under-
stand how arguments work, then, it is crucial to understand how language
works.

Unfortunately, our understanding of human language is far from
complete, and linguistics is a young science in which disagreement exists on
many important issues. Still, certain facts about language are beyond
dispute, and recognizing them will provide a background for understand-
ing how arguments work.

As anyone who has bothered to think about it knows, language is con-
ventional. There is no reason why we, as English speakers, use the word
“dog” to refer to a dog rather than to a cat, a tree, or the number of planets
in our solar system. It seems that any word might have been used to stand
for anything. Beyond this, there seems to be no reason why we put words
together the way we do. In English, we put adjectives before the nouns they
modify. We thus speak of a “green salad.” In French, adjectives usually

2

17

follow the noun, and so, instead of saying “verte salade,” the French say
“salade verte.” The conventions of our own language are so much with us
that it strikes us as odd when we discover that other languages have differ-
ent conventions. A French diplomat once praised his own language because,
as he said, it followed the natural order of thought. This strikes English
speakers as silly, but in seeing why it is silly, we see that the word order in
our own language is conventional as well.

Although it is important to realize that language is conventional, it is also
important not to misunderstand this fact. From the idea that language is
conventional, it is easy to conclude that language is totally arbitrary. If
language is totally arbitrary, then it might seem that it really does not matter
which words we use or how we put them together. It takes only a little
thought to see that this view, however daring it might seem, misrepresents
the role of conventions in language. If we wish to communicate with others,
we must follow the system of conventions that others use. Grapefruits are
more like big lemons than like grapes, so you might want to call them
“mega-lemons.” Still, if you order a glass of mega-lemon juice in a restau-
rant, you will get stares and smirks but no grapefruit juice. The same point
lies behind this famous passage in Through the Looking Glass, by Lewis
Carroll:

“There’s glory for you!”
“I don’t know what you mean by ‘glory’,” Alice said.
Humpty Dumpty smiled contemptuously.
“Of course you don’t—till I tell you. I meant ‘there’s a nice knock-down
argument for you!’”
“But ‘glory’ doesn’t mean ‘a nice knock-down argument’,” Alice objected.
“When I use a word,” Humpty Dumpty said, in a rather scornful tone, “it means
just what I choose it to mean—neither more nor less.”
“The question is,” said Alice, “whether you can make words mean so many dif-
ferent things.”

The point, of course, is that Humpty Dumpty cannot make a word mean
whatever he wants it to mean, and he cannot communicate if he uses words
in his own peculiar way without regard to what those words themselves
mean. Communication can take place only within a shared system of
conventions. Conventions do not destroy meaning by making it arbitrary;
conventions bring meaning into existence.

A misunderstanding of the conventional nature of language can lead to
pointless disputes. Sometimes, in the middle of a discussion, someone will
declare that “the whole thing is just a matter of definition” or “what you say
is true by your definition, false by mine.” There are times when definitions
are important and the truth of what is said turns on them, but usually this is
not the case. Suppose someone has fallen off a cliff and is heading toward
certain death on the rocks below. Of course, it is a matter of convention that
we use the word “death” to describe the result of the sudden, sharp stop
at the end of the fall. We might have used some other word—perhaps

18

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

“birth“—instead. But it certainly will not help a person who is falling to his
certain death to shout out, “By ‘birth’ I mean death.” It will not help even if
everyone agrees to use these words in this new way. If we all decided to
adopt this new convention, we would then say, “He is falling from the cliff
to his certain birth” instead of “He is falling from the cliff to his certain
death.” But speaking in this way will not change the facts. It will not save
him from perishing. It will not make those who care for him feel better.

The upshot of this simple example is that the truth of what we say is
rarely just a matter of definition. Whether what we have said is true or not
will depend, for the most part, on how things stand in the world. Abraham
Lincoln, during his days as a trial lawyer, is reported to have cross-examined
a witness like this:

“How many legs does a horse have?”
“Four,” said the witness.
“Now, if we call a tail a leg, how many legs does a horse have?”
“Five,” answered the witness.
“Nope,” said Abe, “calling a tail a leg don’t make it a leg.”

In general, then, though the meaning of what we say is dependent on conven-
tion, the truth of what we say is not.

In the preceding sentence we used the qualifying phrase, “in general.” To
say that a claim holds in general indicates that there may be exceptions. This
qualification is needed because sometimes the truth of what we say is
simply a matter of definition. Take a simple example: The claim that a trian-
gle has three sides is true by definition, because a triangle is defined as “a
closed figure having three sides.” Again, if someone says that sin is wrong,
he or she has said something that is true by definition, for a sin is defined as,
among other things, “something that is wrong.” In unusual cases like these,
things are true merely as a matter of convention. Still, in general, the truth of
what we say is settled not by appealing to definitions but, instead, by
looking at the facts. In this way, language is not arbitrary, even though it is
conventional.

LINGUISTIC ACTS

In the previous section we saw that a language is a system of shared conven-
tions that allows us to communicate with one another. If we examine lan-
guage, we will see that it contains many different kinds of conventions.
These conventions govern what we will call linguistic acts, speech acts, and
conversational acts. We will discuss linguistic acts first.

We have seen that words have meanings conventionally attached to
them. The word “dog” is used conventionally to talk about dogs. Given
what our words mean, it would be incorrect to call dogs “airplanes.” Proper
names are also conventionally assigned, for Harry Jones could have been

19

Lingu ist ic Acts

named Wilbur Jones. Still, given that his name is not Wilbur, it would be
improper to call him Wilbur. Rules like these, which govern meaning and
reference, can be called semantic rules.

Other conventions concern the ways words can be put together to form
sentences. These are often called syntactic or grammatical rules. Using the
three words “John,“ “hit,” and “Harry,” we can formulate sentences with
very different meanings, such as “John hit Harry” and “Harry hit John.” We
recognize that these sentences have different meanings, because we under-
stand the grammar of our language. This grammatical understanding also
allows us to see that the sentence “Hit John Harry” has no determinate
meaning, even though the individual words do. (Notice that “Hit John,
Harry!” does mean something: It is a way of telling Harry to hit John.) Gram-
matical rules are important, for they play a part in giving a meaning to com-
binations of words, such as sentences.

Some of our grammatical rules play only a small role in this important
task of giving meaning to combinations of words. It is bad grammar to say,
“If I was you, I wouldn’t do that,” but it is still clear what information the
person is trying to convey. What might be called stylistic rules of grammar
are of relatively little importance for logic, but grammatical rules that affect
the meaning or content of what is said are essential to logical analysis.
Grammatical rules of this kind can determine whether we have said one
thing rather than another, or perhaps failed to say anything at all and have
merely spoken nonsense.

It is sometimes hard to tell what is nonsense. Consider “The horse raced
past the barn fell.” This sentence usually strikes people as nonsense when
they hear it for the first time. To show them that it actually makes sense, all
we need to do is insert two words: “The horse that was raced past the barn
fell.” Since English allows us to drop “that was,” the original sentence
means the same as the slightly expanded version. Sentences like these are
called “garden path sentences,” because the first few words “lead you down
the garden path” by suggesting that some word plays a grammatical role
that it really does not play. In this example, “The horse raced . . .” suggests
at first that the main verb is “raced.” That makes it hard to see that the main
verb really is “fell.”

Another famous example is “Buffalo buffalo buffalo.” Again, this
seems like nonsense at first, but then someone points out that “buffalo”
can be a verb meaning “to confuse.” The sentence “Buffalo buffalo buf-
falo” then means “North American bison confuse North American bison.”
Indeed, we can even make sense out of “Buffalo buffalo Buffalo buffalo
buffalo buffalo Buffalo buffalo Buffalo buffalo buffalo.” This means
“North American bison from Buffalo, New York, that North American
bison from Buffalo, New York, confuse also confuse North American
bison from Buffalo, New York, that North American bison from Buffalo,
New York, confuse.”

Examples like these show that sentences can have linguistic meaning
when they seem meaningless. To be meaningful, sentences need to follow

20

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

both semantic conventions that govern meanings of individual words and
also syntactic or grammatical conventions that lay down rules for combining
words into meaningful wholes. When a sentence satisfies essential semantic
and syntactic conventions, we will say that the person who uttered that
sentence performed a linguistic act: The speaker said something meaningful
in a language.1 The ability to perform linguistic acts shows a command of a
language. What the speaker says may be false, irrelevant, boring, and so on;
but, if in saying it linguistic rules are not seriously violated, then that person
can be credited with performing a linguistic act.

Later, in Chapters 13–14, we will look more closely at semantic and
syntactic conventions, for they are common sources of fallacies and other
confusions. In particular, we shall see how these conventions can generate
fallacies of ambiguity and fallacies of vagueness. Before examining the
defects of our language, however, we should first appreciate that language
is a powerful and subtle tool that allows us to perform a wide variety of jobs
important for living in the world.

21

Lingu ist ic Acts

Read each of the following sentences aloud. Did you perform a linguistic act?
If so, explain what the sentence means and why it might not seem meaningful.

1. The old man the ship.

2. Colorless green ideas sleep furiously.

3. Time flies like an arrow. Fruit flies like bananas.

4. The cotton clothing is made of grows in Mississippi.

5. The square root of pine is tree.

6. The man who whistles tunes pianos.

7. To force heaven, Mars shall have a new angel. (from Monk)

8. “’Twas brillig, and the slithy toves did gyre and gimble in the wabe.”
(from Lewis Carroll)

And now some weird examples from Dan Wegner’s Hidden Brain Damage
Scale. If these make sense to you, it might be a sign of hidden brain damage.
If they don’t make sense, explain why:

9. People tell me one thing one day and out the other.

10. I feel as much like I did yesterday as I do today.

11. My throat is closer than it seems.

12. Likes and dislikes are among my favorites.

13. I’ve lost all sensation in my shirt.

14. There’s only one thing for me.

15. I don’t like any of my loved ones.

Exercise I

SPEECH ACTS

When we are asked about the function of language, it is natural to reply that we
use language to communicate ideas. This is, however, only one of the purposes
for which we use language. Other purposes become obvious as soon as we
look at the ways in which our language actually works. Adding up a column of
figures is a linguistic activity—though it is rarely looked at in this way—but it
does not communicate any ideas to others. When I add the figures, I am not
even communicating anything to myself: I am trying to figure something out.
A look at our everyday conversations produces a host of other examples of

22

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

1. When an actor on a stage says lines such as “To be or not to be, that is the
question,” does the actor perform a linguistic act?

2. When someone hums (but does not sing) the “Star-Spangled Banner,” does
she perform a linguistic act? Why or why not?

3. Can a speaker mispronounce a word in a sentence without performing any
linguistic act? Why or why not?

Discussion Questions

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

language being used for different purposes. Grammarians, for example, have
divided sentences into various moods, among which are:

Indicative: Barry Bonds hit a home run.

Imperative: Get in there and hit a home run, Barry!

Interrogative: Did Barry Bonds hit a home run?

Expressive: Hurray for Barry Bonds!

The first sentence states a fact. We can use it to communicate information
about something that Barry Bonds did. If we use it in this way, then what we
say will be either true or false. Notice that none of the other sentences can be
called either true or false even though they are all meaningful.

PERFORMATIVES

The different types of sentences recognized by traditional grammarians
indicate that we use language to do more than convey information. But this
traditional classification of sentences gives only a small idea of the wide
variety of things that we can accomplish using language. Sometimes, for
example, in using language we actually do things in the sense of bringing
something about. In one familiar setting, if one person says, “I do,” and
another person says, “I do,” and finally a third person says, “I now pro-
nounce you husband and wife,” the relationship between the first two peo-
ple changes in a fundamental way: They are thereby married. With luck,
they begin a life of wedded bliss, but they also alter their legal relationship.
For example, they may now file joint income tax returns and may not legally
marry other people without first getting divorced.

In uttering sentences of this kind, the speaker thereby does something more
than merely stating something. The philosopher J. L. Austin labeled such utter-
ances performatives in order to contrast performing an action with simply
describing something.2 For example, if an umpire shouts, “You’re out!” then
the batter is out. The umpire is not merely describing the situation but declaring
the batter out. By way of contrast, if someone in the stands shouts, “He’s out!”
the batter is not thereby out, although the person who shouts this may be en-
couraging the umpire to call the batter out or complaining because he didn’t.

Performatives come in a wide variety of forms. They are often in the first
person (like “I do”), but not always. “You’re all invited to my house after the
game” is in the second person, but uttering it performs the act of inviting. In
some circumstances, one person can speak for another person, a group, or
an institution. At political conventions, heads of delegations say things like
this: “The delegates from Kentucky, the Bluegrass State and the home of the
Kentucky Derby, cast their votes for the next President of the United States,
Joe W. Blodgett.” In saying this, the speaker performs the act of casting
Kentucky’s votes in favor of Blodgett. Even silence can amount to a perfor-
mative act in special situations. When the chairperson of a meeting asks if
there are any objections to a ruling and none is voiced, then the voters,
through their silence, have accepted the ruling.

23

Speech Acts

Because of this diversity of forms that performatives can take, it is not easy
to formulate a definition that covers them all. To avoid this difficulty, we will
not even try to define performatives here. Instead, we will concentrate on one
particularly clear subclass of performatives, what J. L. Austin called explicit
performatives. All explicit performatives are utterances in the first-person
singular indicative noncontinuous3 present. But not all utterances of that
form are explicit performatives. There is one more requirement:

An utterance of that form is an explicit performative if and only if it yields a true
statement when plugged into the following pattern:
In saying “I _____” in appropriate circumstances, I thereby _____.

For example, “I congratulate you” expresses an explicit performative, be-
cause, in saying “I congratulate you,” I thereby congratulate you. Here a
quoted expression occurs on the left side of the word “thereby” but not on
the right side. This reflects the fact that the formula takes us from the words
(which are quoted) to the world (the actual act that is performed). The say-
ing, which is referred to on the left side of the pattern, amounts to the doing
referred to on the right side of the word “thereby.” We will call this the
thereby test for explicit performatives. It provides a convenient way of identi-
fying explicit performatives.

The thereby test includes an important qualification: The context of the ut-
terance must be appropriate. You have not congratulated anyone if you say, “I
congratulate you,” when no one is around, unless you are congratulating
yourself. Congratulations said by an actor in a play are not real congratula-
tions, and so on. Later in this chapter, we will try to clarify what makes a
context appropriate.

Assuming an appropriate context, all of the following sentences meet the
thereby test:

I promise to meet you tomorrow.

I bid sixty-six dollars. (said at an auction)

I bid one club. (said in a bridge game)

I resign from this club.

I apologize for being late.

Notice that it doesn’t make sense to deny any of these performatives. If someone
says, “I bid sixty-six dollars,” it is not appropriate for someone to reply “No,
you don’t” or “That’s false.” It could, however, be appropriate for someone to
reply, “You can’t bid sixty-six dollars, because the bidding is already up to sev-
enty dollars.” In this case, the person tried to make a bid, but failed to do so.

Several explicit performatives play important roles in constructing argu-
ments. These include sentences of the following kind:

I conclude that this bill should be voted down.

I base my conclusion on the assumption that we do not want to hurt
the poor.

24

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

I stipulate that anyone who earns less than $10,000 is poor.

I assure you that this bill will hurt the poor.

I concede that I am not absolutely certain.

I admit that there is much to be said on both sides of this issue.

I give my support to the alternative measure.

I deny that this alternative will hurt the economy.

I grant for the sake of argument that some poor people are lazy.

I reply that most poor people contribute to the economy.

I reserve comment on other issues raised by this bill.

We will call this kind of performative an argumentative performative.
Studying such argumentative performatives can help us to understand what
is going on in arguments (which is one main reason why we are studying
performatives here).

In contrast to the above utterances, which pass the thereby test, none of
the following utterances does:

I agree with you. (This describes one’s thoughts or beliefs, so, unlike a
performative, it can be false.)

I am sorry for being late. (This describes one’s feelings and could be false.)

Yesterday I bid sixty dollars. (This is a statement about a past act and
might be false.)

I’ll meet you tomorrow. (This utterance may only be a prediction that can
turn out to be false.)

Questions, imperatives, and exclamations are not explicit performatives,
because they cannot sensibly be plugged into the thereby test at all. They do
not have the right form, since they are not in the first-person singular indica-
tive noncontinuous present.

25

Speech Acts

Using the thereby test as described above, indicate which of the following sen-
tences express explicit performatives (EP) and which do not express explicit
performatives (N) in appropriate circumstances:

1. I pledge allegiance to the flag.

2. We pledge allegiance to the flag.

3. I pledged allegiance to the flag.

4. I always pledge allegiance at the start of a game.

5. You pledge allegiance to the flag.

Exercise II

(continued)

KINDS OF SPEECH ACTS

Recognizing explicit performatives helps break the spell of the idea that lan-
guage functions only to transmit information. It also introduces us to a kind
of act distinct from linguistic acts. We will call them speech acts.4 They in-
clude such acts as stating, promising, swearing, and refusing. A speech act is
the conventional move that a remark makes in a language exchange. It is
what is done in saying something.

It is difficult to give a precise definition of a speech act, but we can begin
by contrasting speech acts with linguistic acts. A linguistic act, we said, is the
act of saying something meaningful in a language. It is important to see that
the same linguistic act can play different roles as it occurs in different con-
texts. This is shown by the following brief conversations.

A: Is there any pizza left?

B: Yes.

A: Do you promise to pay me back by Friday?

B: Yes.

A: Do you swear to tell the truth?

B: Yes.

A: Do you refuse to leave?

B: Yes.

26

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

6. He pledges allegiance to the flag.

7. He doesn’t pledge allegiance to the flag.

8. Pledge allegiance to the flag!

9. Why don’t you pledge allegiance to the flag?

10. Pierre is the capital of South Dakota.

11. I state that Pierre is the capital of South Dakota.

12. I order you to leave.

13. Get out of here!

14. I didn’t take it.

15. I swear that I didn’t take it.

16. I won’t talk to you.

17. I refuse to talk to you.

18. I’m out of gas.

19. I feel devastated.

20. Bummer!

21. I claim this land for England.

22. I bring you greetings from home.

Here the same linguistic act, uttering the word “yes,” is used to do four dif-
ferent things: to state something, to make a promise, to take an oath, and to
refuse to do something.

We can make this idea of a speech act clearer by using the notion of an ex-
plicit performative. Explicit performatives provide a systematic way of identify-
ing different kinds of speech acts. The basic idea is that different speech acts are
named by the different verbs that occur in explicit performatives. We can thus
use the thereby test to search for different kinds of speech acts. For example:

If I say, “I promise,” I thereby promise. So “I promise” is a performative,
and promising is a kind of speech act.

If I say, “I resign,” I thereby resign. So “I resign” is a performative, and
resigning is a kind of speech act.

If I say, “I apologize,” I thereby apologize. So “I apologize” is a performative,
and apologizing is a kind of speech act.

If I say, “I question his honesty,” I thereby question his honesty. So “I
question his honesty” is a performative, and questioning is a kind of
speech act.

If I say, “I conclude that she is guilty,” I thereby conclude that she is
guilty. So “I conclude that she is guilty” is a performative, and conclud-
ing is a kind of speech act.

The main verbs that appear in such explicit performatives can be called
performative verbs. Performative verbs name kinds of speech acts.5

Still, the same speech act can also be performed without any performa-
tive verb. I can deny my opponent’s claim by saying either “I deny that” or
simply “No way!” Both utterances perform the speech act of denying, even
though only the former is a performative. The latter is not a performative
and does not contain any performative verb, but it still performs a speech
act. Similarly, I can assure you by saying either “I assure you that I am right”
or “There’s no doubt about it.” Both utterances perform the speech act of as-
suring, even though only the former is a performative.

Thus far, we have emphasized that we do a great deal more with lan-
guage than make statements, assert facts, and describe things—that is, we
do more with language than put forward claims that are either true or false.
But we also use language to do these things, so stating, asserting, and
describing are themselves kinds of speech acts. This can be shown by using
the thereby test:

If I say, “I state that I am a U.S. citizen,” I thereby state that I am a U.S.
citizen.

If I say, “I assert that the defendant was in Detroit at the time of the
crime,” I thereby assert that the defendant was in Detroit at that time.

If I say, “I describe him as being dark haired and just over six feet tall,” I
thereby describe him as being dark haired and just over six feet tall.

27

Speech Acts

We now have a more accurate conception of the way in which language
functions than the common conception that the function of language is to
convey ideas. Making claims that are either true or false is one important
kind of speech act, but we perform a great many other kinds of speech acts
that are also important.

28

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

Which of the following verbs names a speech act?

1. capture the suspect 6. punish the defendant

2. assert that the suspect is guilty 7. revoke the defendant’s driver’s license

3. stare accusingly at the suspect 8. welcome the prisoner to prison

4. find the defendant guilty 9. order the prisoner to be silent

5. take the defendant away 10. lock the cell door

Exercise III

Using a dictionary, find ten verbs that can be used to construct explicit perfor-
matives that have not yet been mentioned in this chapter.

Exercise IV

SPEECH ACT RULES

The distinctive feature of a performative utterance is that, in a sense we have
tried to make clear, the saying constitutes a doing of something. In saying,
“I pronounce you husband and wife,” a minister is not simply describing a
marriage ceremony, she is performing it. Here, however, an objection might
arise. Suppose someone who is a supporter of family values goes about the
streets pronouncing random couples husband and wife. Unless this person
is a member of the clergy, a justice of the peace, a ship’s captain, or the like,
that person will have no right to make such pronouncements. Furthermore,
even if this person is, say, a crazed member of the clergy, the pronouncement
will still not come off—that is, the utterance will not succeed in making any-
one husband and wife. The parties addressed have to say, “I do,” they must
have a proper license, and so on. This example shows that a speech act will
fail to come off or will be void unless certain rules or conventions are satisfied.
These rules or conventions that must be satisfied for a speech act to come off
and not be void will be called speech act rules.

The main types of speech act rules can be discovered by considering the
following questions:

1. Must the speaker use any special words or formulas to perform the speech act?

Sometimes a speech act will come off only if certain words or formulas are
used. In baseball the umpire must say, “Strike two,” or something very close

to this, in order to call a second strike. In a pickup game it might be all right to
say instead, “Hey, that’s two bad ones on you, baby!” but that way of calling
strikes is not permitted in serious play. Similarly, certain legal documents are
not valid if they are not properly signed, endorsed, notarized, and so forth.

2. Is any response or uptake by the audience needed in order to complete the
speech act?

Sometimes a speech act will come off only if there is an uptake by another
person. A person can offer a bet by saying, “I bet you ten dollars that the An-
gels will win today,” but this person will have made a bet only if the other
person says, “Done” or “You’re on,” shakes hands, or in some other way ac-
cepts the bet. A marriage ceremony is completely void if one of the parties
does not say, “I do,” but instead says, “Well, maybe I should think about this
for a while.”

3. Must the (a) speaker or (b) audience hold any special position or role in order
for the speaker to perform the speech act?

Sometimes a speech act will come off only if it is performed by someone with
an official position. We have already seen that, for someone to make two peo-
ple husband and wife by pronouncing them husband and wife, that person
must hold a certain official position. Similarly, even if a body is plainly dead
when it arrives at the hospital, a janitor cannot pronounce it dead on arrival.
That is the job of a doctor or a coroner. In the same way, although a shortstop
can perform the linguistic act of shouting, “You’re out,” a shortstop cannot
perform the speech act of calling someone out. Only an umpire can do that.
Moreover, even an umpire cannot call out the catcher or a spectator, so some-
times the audience of the speech also needs to have some special position.

4. Are any other special circumstances required for the speech act?

Most speech acts also involve assumptions or presuppositions that certain
facts obtain. A father cannot bequeath an antique car to his son if he does not
own such a car. You cannot resign from the American Civil Liberties Union
or the Veterans of Foreign Wars if you are not a member. These special cir-
cumstances might sometimes include the audience’s desires. In promising
someone to do something, for example, we usually do so in the belief that the
person wants us to do it. For example, I will promise to drive someone to the
airport only if I believe that person wants to go the airport and would like me
to drive her there. Sometimes, however, we do promise to do things a person
does not want done. I can promise to throw someone out if he doesn’t behave
himself. Here, however, I am making a threat, not a promise. Different an-
swers to this question, thus, reveal differences among speech acts.

5. What feelings, desires, or beliefs is the speaker expected to have?

If we apologize for something, we are expected to feel sorry for what we
have done. If we congratulate someone, we are usually supposed to be
pleased with that person’s success. If we state something, we are expected

29

Speech Acts

to believe what we say. In all these cases—in apologizing, congratulating,
and stating—if the speaker lacks the expected feelings, desires, or beliefs, the
speaker still does succeed in performing the speech act, but that speaker and
speech act are subject to criticism. In this respect, this rule differs from the
preceding rules. Those preceding rules reflected conventions that must be
satisfied for the speech act to come off (for it not to be void). In contrast, the
person who says, “I apologize,” has apologized even if he or she does not
feel sorry. The speech act does come off and is not void, even though the
apology can be criticized as insincere.

6. What general purpose or purposes are served by this kind of speech act?

This final question asks why a certain kind of speech act exists at all. Why,
for example, is there the speech act of promising? That is a rather compli-
cated question, but the primary reason for the institution of promising is
that it helps people coordinate their activities. People who make promises
place themselves under an obligation to do something. When promises are
contractual, this obligation is a legal obligation. Promise making, then, in-
creases the confidence we can have that someone will do what they said
they will do, and, for legal promises at least, provides remedies when they
do not. To cite another example of the purpose of a speech act, apologizing
expresses regret for harming or insulting someone. One of its purposes is to
normalize relations between the speaker and the person harmed or insulted.

Answering the six questions listed above for a particular kind of speech
act is called giving a speech act analysis. For example, here is a brief speech act
analysis of “to appoint,” as in, “I appoint you to the judiciary committee“:

1. Appointments are usually made by using the word “appoint,” but
other words can be used as well; for example, “name” and “designate”
can also be used to do this job. You cannot, however, say, “I wish you
were on the judiciary committee.”

2. Sometimes further actions by others are necessary for an appointment
to come off. Perhaps ratification is needed. Before ratification, the
word “nominate” is often used. In such cases, only after the nomination
is ratified has the appointment been made. Usually the appointment
does not come off if the person declines the appointment.

3. Normally, someone who appoints a person to something must have
the power to make such appointments. For example, Queen Elizabeth
II does not have the power to appoint the commissioner of baseball.

4. This speech act presupposes a wide variety of facts, for example, that
a position exists, that the person appointed to it is eligible for this
appointment, and so on.

5. Appointments are often made with the belief that the person appointed
will do a good job. This is not always the case, however, as appointments
are made for all sorts of different reasons—rewarding an important
supporter, for example.

30

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

6. An important purpose of an appointment is to explicitly designate
someone to play a particular role. For example, it is often important to
know who is in charge. It can also be important that the person who
gains this role does so through regular, authorized procedures.

31

Speech Acts

1. Imagine that an actor on stage during a modern play screams, “Fire! No, I
really mean it. ” The audience realizes that he is just acting, so they laugh.
Then the actor sees a real fire behind the stage out of view of the audience.
The actor again screams, “Fire! No, I really mean it. Fire!” Which speech
act, if any, does the actor perform in uttering these words the second
time? Why? What does this show about speech acts?

2. Do the speech acts in which people get married presuppose that the peo-
ple who are getting married are of different sexes? Should these speech
acts presuppose this fact? Why or why not?

3. The importance of deciding what kind of speech act has been performed
is illustrated by a classic case from the law of contracts, Hawkins v. McGee.6

McGee performed an operation on Hawkins that proved unsuccessful,
and Hawkins sued for damages. He did not sue on the basis of malprac-
tice, however, but on the basis of breach of contract. His attorney argued
that the doctor initiated a contractual relationship in that he tried to per-
suade Hawkins to have the operation by saying things such as “I will
guarantee to make the hand a hundred percent perfect hand.” He made
statements of this kind a number of times, and Hawkins finally agreed to
undergo the operation on the basis of these remarks. Hawkins’s attorney
maintained that these exchanges, which took place in the doctor’s office
on a number of occasions, constituted an offer of a contract that Hawkins
explicitly accepted. The attorney for the surgeon replied that these words,
even if uttered, would not constitute an offer of a contract, but merely

Discussion Questions

Give a speech act analysis of the ten verbs below by writing two or three sen-
tences in response to each of the six questions above. Speech act analyses can
go on much longer, but your goal here is just to bring out the most interesting
features of the speech act named by each verb.

1. to bet 6. to deny

2. to promise 7. to vote

3. to congratulate 8. to give up (in a fight)

4. to state 9. to thank

5. to apologize 10. to invite

Exercise V

(continued)

CONVERSATIONAL ACTS7

In examining linguistic acts (saying something meaningful in a language)
and then speech acts (doing something in using words), we have largely ig-
nored some central features of language: It is usually—though not always—
a social activity that takes place among people. It is also normally a practical
activity with certain goals. We use language in order to inform people of
things, get them to do things, amuse them, calm them down, and so on. We
can capture these social and practical aspects of language by introducing the
notion of a conversational exchange, that is, a situation where various speak-
ers use speech acts in order to bring about some effects in each other. We
will call this act of using a speech act to cause a standard effect in another a
conversational act.

Suppose, for example, Amy says to Bobbi, “Someone is following us.” In
this case, Amy has performed a linguistic act; that is, she has uttered a mean-
ingful sentence in the English language. Amy has also performed a speech
act—specifically, she has stated that they are being followed. The point of
performing this speech act is to produce in Bobbi a particular belief—
namely, that they are being followed. (Amy’s utterance might also have
other purposes, such as to alert Bobbi to some danger, but it accomplishes
those other purposes by means of getting Bobbi to believe they are being fol-
lowed.) If Amy is successful in this, then Amy has successfully performed
the conversational act of producing this belief in Bobbi. Amy, of course,
might fail in her attempt to do this. Amy’s linguistic act could be successful
and her speech act successful as well, yet, for whatever reason, Bobbi might
not accept as true what Amy is telling her. Perhaps Bobbi thinks that Amy is

32

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

expressed a strong belief, and that reasonable people should know that
doctors cannot guarantee results.

It is important to remember that contracts do not have to be written
and signed to be binding. A proper verbal offer and acceptance are usually
sufficient to constitute a contract. The case, then, turned on two questions:
(1) Did McGee utter the words attributed to him? In other words, did
McGee perform the linguistic act attributed to him? The jury decided
that he did. (2) The second, more interesting question was whether these
words, when uttered in this particular context, amounted to an offer of a
contract, as Hawkins’s attorney maintained, or merely were an expression
of strong belief, as McGee’s attorney held. In other words, the fundamen-
tal question in this case was what kind of speech act McGee performed
when trying to convince Hawkins to have the operation.

Explain how you would settle this case. (The court actually ruled in
favor of Hawkins, but you are free to disagree.)

paranoid or just trying to frighten her as some kind of joke. In that case,
Amy failed to perform her intended conversational act, even though she did
perform her intended linguistic and speech acts.

Here are some other examples of the difference between performing a
speech act and performing a conversational act:

We can warn people about something in order to put them on guard
concerning it.

Here warning is the speech act; putting them on guard is the intended
conversational act.

We can urge people to do things in order to persuade them to do these
things.

Here urging is the speech act; persuading is the intended conversational act.

We can assure people concerning something in order to instill confidence
in them.

Here assuring is the speech act; instilling confidence is the intended
conversational act.

We can apologize to people in order to make them feel better about us.
Here apologizing is the speech act; making them feel better about us is

the intended conversational act.

In each of these cases, our speech act may not succeed in having its intended
conversational effect. Our urging, warning, and assuring may, respectively,
fail to persuade, put on guard, or instill confidence. Indeed, speech acts may
bring about the opposite of what was intended. People who brag (a speech
act) in order to impress others (the intended conversational act) often actu-
ally make others think less of them (the actual effect). In many ways like
these, we can perform a speech act without performing the intended conver-
sational act.

The relationship between conversational acts and speech acts is confus-
ing, because both of them can be performed at once by the same utterance.
Suppose Carl says, “You are invited to my party.” By means of this single ut-
terance, he performs a linguistic act of uttering this meaningful sentence, a
speech act of inviting you, and perhaps also a conversational act of getting
you to come to his party. Indeed, he would not be able to perform this con-
versational act without also performing such a speech act, assuming that
you would not come to his party if you were not invited. He would also not
be able to perform this speech act without performing this linguistic act or
something like it, since he cannot invite you by means of an inarticulate
grunt or by asking, “Are you invited to my party?”

As a result, we cannot sensibly ask whether Carl’s utterance of “You are
invited to my party” is a linguistic act, a speech act, or a conversational act.
That single utterance performs all three acts at once. Nonetheless, we can
distinguish those kinds of acts that Carl performs in terms of the verbs that
describe the acts. Some verbs describe speech acts; other verbs describe

33

Conversat ional Acts

conversational acts. We can tell which verbs describe which kinds of acts by
asking whether the verb passes the thereby test (in which case the verb de-
scribes a speech act) or whether, instead, it describes a standard effect of the
utterance (in which case the verb describes a conversational act).

34

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

Indicate whether the verbs in the following sentences name a speech act, a con-
versational act, or neither. Assume a standard context. Explain your answers.

1. She thought that he did it. 11. He praised her lavishly.

2. She asserted that he did it. 12. His praise made her happy.

3. She convinced them that he did it. 13. He threatened to reveal her secret.

4. She condemned him in front of 14. He submitted his resignation.
everyone. 15. Her news frightened him half to

5. She challenged his integrity. death.

6. She embarrassed him in front 16. He advised her to go into another
of them. line of work.

7. He denied doing it. 17. She blamed him for her troubles.

8. They believed her. 18. His lecture enlightened her.

9. They encouraged him to admit it. 19. His jokes amused her.

10. She told him to get lost. 20. His book confused her.

Exercise VI

CONVERSATIONAL RULES

Just as there are rules that govern linguistic acts and other rules that govern
speech acts, so too there are rules that govern conversational acts. This
should not be surprising, because conversations can be complicated inter-
personal activities in need of rules to make them effective in attaining their
goals. These underlying rules are implicitly understood by users of the lan-
guage, but the philosopher Paul Grice was the first person to examine them
in careful detail.

We can start by examining standard or normal conversational exchanges
where conversation is a cooperative venture—that is, where the people in-
volved in the conversation have some common goal they are trying to
achieve in talking with one another. (A prisoner being interrogated and a
shop owner being robbed are not in such cooperative situations.) According
to Grice, such exchanges are governed by what he calls the Cooperative Prin-
ciple. This principle states that the parties involved should use language in a
way that contributes toward achieving their common goal. It tells them to
cooperate.8

This general principle gains more content when we consider other forms
of cooperation. Carpenters who want to build a house need enough nails

and wood, but not too much. They need the right kinds of nails and wood.
They also need to put the nails and wood together in the relevant way—that
is, according to their plans. And, of course, they also want to perform their
tasks quickly and in the right order. Rational people who want to achieve
common goals must follow similar general restrictions in other practical ac-
tivities. Because cooperative conversations are one such practical activity,
speakers who want to cooperate with one another must follow rules analo-
gous to those for carpenters.

Grice spells out four such rules. The first he calls the rule of Quantity. It
tells us to give the right amount of information. More specifically:

1. Make your contribution as informative as is required (for the current
purposes of the exchange).

and possibly:

2. Do not make your contribution more informative than is required.

Here is an application of this rule: A person rushes up to you and asks,
“Where is a fire extinguisher?” You know that there is a fire extinguisher five
floors away in the basement, and you also know that there is a fire extin-
guisher just down the hall. Suppose you say that there is a fire extinguisher
in the basement. Here you have said something true, but you have violated
the first part of the rule of Quantity. You have failed to reveal an important
piece of information that, under the rule of Quantity, you should have pro-
duced. A violation of the second version of the rule would look like this: As
smoke billows down the hall, you say where a fire extinguisher is located on
each floor, starting with the basement. Eventually you will get around to
saying that there is a fire extinguisher just down the hall, but you bury the
point in a mass of unnecessary information.

Grice’s second rule is called the rule of Quality. In general: Try to make
your contribution one that is true. More specifically:

1. Do not say what you believe to be false.

2. Do not say that for which you lack adequate evidence.

In a cooperative activity, you are not supposed to tell lies. Beyond this, you
are expected not to talk off the top of your head either. When we make a
statement, we can be challenged by someone asking, “Do you really believe
that?” or “Why do you believe that?” That a person has the right to ask such
questions shows that statement making is governed by the rule of Quality.

In a court of law, witnesses promise to tell the whole truth and nothing
but the truth. The demand for nothing but the truth reflects the rule of Qual-
ity. The demand for the whole truth roughly reflects the rule of Quantity. Ob-
viously, nobody really tells every truth he or she knows. Here the whole truth
concerns all the known truths that are relevant in the context.

This brings us to our next rule, the rule of Relevance. Simply stated, the
rule of Relevance says:

Be relevant!

35

Conversat ional Acts

Though easy to state, the rule is not easy to explain, because relevance
itself is a difficult notion. It is, however, easy to illustrate. If someone asks
me where he can find a doctor, I might reply that there is a hospital on the
next block. Though not a direct answer to the question, it does not violate
the rule of Relevance because it provides a piece of useful information.
If, however, in response I tell the person that I like his haircut, then I have
violated the rule of Relevance. Clear-cut violations of this principle often
involve changing the subject.

Another rule concerns the manner of our conversation. We are expected
to be clear in what we say. Under the general rule of Manner come various
special rules:

1. Avoid obscurity of expression.

2. Avoid ambiguity.

3. Be brief.

4. Be orderly.

As an example of the fourth part of this rule, when describing a series of
events, it is usually important to state them in the order in which they oc-
curred. It would certainly be misleading to say that two people had a child
and got married when, in fact, they had a child after they were married.

Many other rules govern our conversations. “Be polite!” is one of them.
“Be charitable!” is another. That is, we should put the best interpretation on
what others say, and our replies should reflect this. We should avoid quib-
bling and being picky. For the most part, however, we will not worry about
these other rules.

36

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

Indicate which, if any, of Grice’s conversational rules are violated by the itali-
cized sentence of each of the following conversations. Assume a standard con-
text. More than one rule might be violated.

1. “What did you get on the last test?” “A grade.”

2. “Did you like her singing?” “Her costume was beautiful.”

3. “The governor has the brains of a three-year-old.”

4. “The Lone Ranger rode into the sunset and jumped on his horse.”

5. “Without her help, we’d be up a creek without a paddle.”

6. “Where is Palo Alto?” “On the surface of the Earth.”

7. “It will rain tomorrow.” “How do you know?” “I just guessed.”

8. “Does the dog need to go out for a W-A-L-K [spelled out]?”

9. “Why did the chicken cross the road?” “To get to the other side.”

10. Psychiatrist: “You’re crazy.” Patient: “I want a second opinion.”
Psychiatrist: “Okay. You’re ugly, too.”

Exercise VII

CONVERSATIONAL IMPLICATION

In a normal setting where people are cooperating toward reaching a shared
goal, they often conform quite closely to Grice’s conversational rules. If, on
the whole, people did not do this, we could not have the linguistic practices
we do. If we thought, for example, that people very often lied (even about
the most trivial matters), the business of exchanging information would be
badly damaged.

Still, people do not always follow these conversational rules. They withhold
information, they elaborate needlessly, they assert what they know to be false,
they say the first thing that pops into their heads, they wander off the subject,
and they talk vaguely and obscurely. When we observe actual conversations, it
is sometimes hard to tell how any information gets communicated at all.

The explanation lies in the same conversational rules. Not only do we
usually follow these conventions, we also (1) implicitly realize that we are
following them, and (2) expect others to assume that we are following them.
This mutual understanding of the commitments involved in a conver-
sational act has the following important consequence: People are able to
convey a great deal of information without actually saying it.

A simple example will illustrate this point. Again suppose that a person,
with smoke billowing behind him, comes running up to you and asks,

37

Conversat ional Acts

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

“Where’s a fire extinguisher?” You reply, “There’s one in the lobby.” Through
a combination of conversational rules, notably relevance, quantity, and man-
ner, this commits you to the claim that this is the closest, or at least the most
accessible, fire extinguisher. Furthermore, the person you are speaking to
assumes that you are committed to this. Of course, you have not actually
said that it is the closest fire extinguisher; but you have, we might say, implied
this. When we do not actually say something but imply it by virtue of a mutu-
ally understood conversational rule, the implication is called a conversational
implication.

It is important to realize that conversational implication is a pervasive
feature of human communication. It is not something we employ only occa-
sionally for special effect. In fact, virtually every conversation relies on these
implications, and most conversations would fall apart if people refused to
go beyond literal meanings to take into account the implications of saying
things. In the following conversation, B is literal-minded in just this way:

A: Do you know what time it is?

B: Not without looking at my watch.

B has answered A’s question, but it is hard to imagine that A has received
the information she was looking for. Presumably, she wanted to know what
time it was, not merely whether B, at that very moment, knew the time.
Finding B rather obtuse, A tries again:

A: Can you tell me what time it is?

B: Oh, yes, all I have to do is look at my watch.

Undaunted, A gives it another try:

A: Will you tell me what time it is?

B: I suppose I will as soon as you ask me.

Finally:

A: What time is it?

B: Two o’clock. Why didn’t you ask me that in the first place?

Notice that in each of these exchanges B gives a direct and accurate answer
to A’s question; yet, in all but the last answer, B does not provide A with
what A wants. Like a computer in a science-fiction movie, B is taking A’s
questions too literally. More precisely, B does nothing more than take A’s
remarks literally. In a conversational exchange, we expect others to take our
remarks in the light of the obvious purpose we have in making them. We
expect them to share our commonsense understanding of why people ask
questions. At the very least, we expect people to respond to us in ways that
are relevant to our purposes. Except at the end, B seems totally oblivious to
the point of A’s questions. That is what makes B unhelpful and annoying.

Though all the conversational rules we have examined can be the basis of
conversational implication, the rule of Relevance is particularly powerful in
this respect. Normal conversations are dense with conversational implications

38

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

that depend on the rule of Relevance. Someone says, “Dinner’s ready,” and
that is immediately taken to be a way of asking people to come to the table.
Why? Because dinner’s being ready is a transparent reason to come to the
table to eat. This is an ordinary context that most people are familiar with.
Change the context, however, and the conversational implications can be en-
tirely different. Suppose the same words, “Dinner’s ready,” are uttered
when guests have failed to arrive on time. In this context, the conversational
implication, which will probably be reflected in an annoyed tone of voice,
will be quite different.

To cite another example of context dependence, if someone says, “I broke
a finger,” people will naturally assume that it is the speaker’s own finger
that was broken. Why? Because when people break fingers, it is almost al-
ways their own fingers that they break. That is the standard context in which
this remark is made. If, however, we shift the context, that conversational
implication can be lost and another can take its place. Suppose the speaker
is a mobster in an extortion racket, that is, someone who physically harms
people who do not pay protection money. Among his fellow extortionists,
the conversational implication of “I broke a finger” is likely to be that it was
someone who refused to pay up who had his finger broken. (We can imag-
ine the extortionist canceling this implication by saying, “No, no, it was my
finger that got broken when I slugged the guy.”)

39

Conversat ional Acts

Assuming a natural conversational setting, what might a person intend to con-
versationally imply by making the following remarks? Briefly explain why
each of these conversational implications holds; that is, explain the relation-
ship between what the speaker literally says and what the speaker intends to
convey through conversational implication. Finally, for each example, find a
context where the standard conversational implication would fail and another
arise in its place.

1. It’s getting a little chilly in here. (Said by a visitor in your home)

2. Do you mind if I borrow your pen? (Said to a friend while studying)

3. We are out of soda. (Said by a child to her parents)

4. I got here before he did. (Said in a ticket line)

5. Don’t blame me if you get in trouble. (Said by someone who advised you
not to do it)

6. Has this seat been taken? (Said in a theater before a show)

7. These sweet potatoes are very filling. (Said when the cook asks if you
want more)

8. Don’t ask me. (Said in response to a question)

9. Does your dog bite? (Said to a man standing next to a dog)

10. I will be out of town that day. (Said in response to a party invitation)

Exercise VIII

VIOLATING CONVERSATIONAL RULES

If we look at basic conversational rules, we notice that these rules sometimes
clash, or at least push us in different directions. The rule of Quantity encour-
ages us to give as much information as possible, but this is constrained by
the rule of Quality, which restricts our claims to things we believe to be true
and can back up with good reasons. The demands of the rule of Quantity
can also conflict with the demand for brevity. In order to be brief, we must
sometimes simplify and even falsify, and this can come into conflict with the
rule of Quality, which demands that we say only what we believe to be true.
Sometimes it is not important to get things exactly right; sometimes it is. An
ongoing conversation can be a constant series of adjustments to this back-
ground system of rules.

Because conversational rules can come into conflict with one another,
speakers can sometimes seem to be violating the Cooperative Principle by
violating one of its maxims. This can happen when one conversational
rule is overridden by another. Grasping the resolution of such a conflict
can generate interesting conversational implications. This may sound
complicated, but an example from Grice should make it clear. Suppose A
tells B, “I’m planning to visit C; where does he live?” B replies, “Some-
where in the south of France.” If A is interested in visiting C, then B’s reply
really does not give her the information she needs and thus seems to vio-
late the first part of the rule of Quantity. We can explain this departure on
the assumption that B does not know exactly where C lives and would
thus violate the rule of Quality if he said anything more specific. In this
case, B’s reply conversationally implies that he does not know exactly
where C lives.

In a more extreme case, a person may even flout one of these conventions,
that is, may openly violate a conversational rule without, as in the previous
example, there being any other conversational rule that overrides it. Here is
an adaptation of one of Grice’s examples and his explanation of it:

A is writing a letter of recommendation about one of his students who is
applying to law school, and the letter reads as follows: “Dear Sir: Mr. X’s
command of English is excellent, and his attendance in class has been
regular. Yours, etc.” (Gloss: A cannot be opting out, since if he wished to be
uncooperative, why write at all? He cannot be unable, through ignorance, to
say more, since the person is his student; moreover, he knows that more
information is wanted. He must, therefore, be wishing to impart information
he is reluctant to write down. This supposition is only tenable on the assump-
tion that he thinks that Mr. X is not a good student. This, then, is what he is
implicating.)

This is a case of damning with faint praise. Faint praise can be damning because,
under the first part of the rule of Quantity, it conversationally implies that no
stronger praise is warranted.

40

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

We can intentionally violate the rule of Relevance by pointedly changing
the subject. Here is variation on another one of Grice’s examples:

Standing outside a classroom, A says, “Professor X is a moron.” There is a
moment of shocked silence; then B says, “Nice day, isn’t it?”

A would have to be fairly dim not to realize that Professor X, whom he has
just called a moron, may be somewhere nearby. Why else would B reply in
such an irrelevant manner? So in saying, “Nice day, isn’t it?” B conversation-
ally implies that Professor X is nearby.

Winston Churchill reportedly provided a famous example of intention-
ally violating the rule of Manner. When criticized for ending a sentence with
a preposition, he is said to have replied, “That is the type of criticism up
with which I will not put.”

41

Conversat ional Acts

These sentences appeared in Exercise VII. For each, explain what the speaker is
conversationally implying and how that conversational implication is generated.

1. “What did you get on the last test?” “A grade.”

2. “Did you like her singing?” “Her costume was beautiful.”

3. “The governor has the brains of a three-year-old.”

4. “Does the dog need to go out for a W-A-L-K [spelled out]?”

Exercise IX

For each of the following paired questions and answers, what do the answers
conversationally imply in a normal context? Explain why these conversational
implications hold. (Try to rely on the content of what is said, rather than on the
tone of voice in which it is uttered. In particular, don’t think of these remarks
being uttered with heavy sarcasm.)

1. Are you going to vote for a Republican? I just might.

2. Are you going to vote for a Republican? You can bet on it.

3. Are you going to vote for a Republican? Not unless hell freezes over.

4. Are you going to vote for a Republican? Don’t be silly.

5. Are you going to vote for a Republican? I am voting for an independent.

6. Are you going to vote for a Republican? There is no other choice.

7. Did you vote for a Republican? Maybe yes, maybe no.

8. Did you vote for a Republican? I voted for the winner.

Exercise X

RHETORICAL DEVICES

Many rhetorical devices work by flouting conversational rules in order to
generate conversational implications. Consider exaggeration. When some-
one claims to be hungry enough to eat a horse, it does not dawn on us
to treat this as a literal claim about how much she can eat. To do so would
be to attribute to the speaker a blatant violation of Grice’s first rule of
Quality—namely, do not say what you believe to be false. Consequently,
her audience will naturally interpret her remark figuratively, rather than
literally. They will assume that she is exaggerating the amount she can eat
in order to conversationally imply that she is very hungry. This rhetorical
device is called overstatement or hyperbole. It is commonly employed, often
in heavy-handed ways.

We sometimes use the opposite ploy and attempt to achieve rhetorical ef-
fect by understating things. We say that something is pretty good or not too
bad when, as all can see, it is terrific. In these cases the speaker is violating
something akin to the rule of Quantity. He is not saying just how good
something really is. He expects his audience to recognize this and say
(inwardly, at least) something like this: “Oh, it is much better than that.”
Understatement is often used as a way of fishing for compliments.

Sometimes, then, we do not intend to have others take our words at face
value. Even beyond this, we sometimes expect our listeners to interpret us
as claiming just the opposite of what we assert. This occurs, for example, with
irony and sarcasm. Suppose at a crucial point in a game, the second baseman
fires the ball ten feet over the first baseman’s head, and someone shouts,
“Great throw.” Literally, it was not a great throw; it was the opposite of
a great throw, and this is just what the person who says “Great throw” is
indicating. How do the listeners know they are supposed to interpret it in
this way? Sometimes this is indicated by tone of voice. A sarcastic tone of
voice usually indicates that the person means the opposite of what he or she
is saying. Even without the tone of sarcasm, the remark “Great throw” is not
likely to be taken literally. The person who shouts this knows that it was
not a great throw, as do the people who hear it. Rather than attributing an
obviously false belief to the shouter, we assume that the person is blatantly
violating the rule of Quality to draw our attention to just how bad the throw
really was.

42

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

Metaphors and similes are perhaps the most common forms of figurative
language. A simile is, roughly, an explicit figurative comparison. A word
such as “like” or “as” makes the comparison explicit, and the comparison is
figurative because it would be inappropriate if taken literally. To say that the
home team fought like tigers does not mean that they clawed the opposing
team and took large bites out of them. To call someone as dumb as a post is
not to claim that they have no brain at all.

With a metaphor, we also compare certain items, but without words such
as “like” or “as.” Metaphorical comparisons are still figurative because the
vocabulary, at a literal level, is not appropriate to the subject matter. George
Washington was not literally the father of his country. Taken literally, it
hardly makes sense to speak of someone fathering a country. But the
metaphor is so natural (or so familiar) that it does not cross our minds to
treat the remark literally, asking, perhaps, who the mother was.

Taken literally, metaphors are usually obviously false, and then they
violate Grice’s rule of Quality. Again, as with irony, when someone says
something obviously false, we have to decide what to make of that person’s
utterance. Perhaps the person is very stupid or a very bad liar, but often
neither suggestion is plausible. In such a situation, sometimes the best sup-
position is that the person is speaking metaphorically rather than literally.

Not all metaphors, however, are literally false. In John Donne’s Medita-
tion XVII, “No man is an island” is literally true. We treat this remark as
a metaphor because, taken literally, it is so obviously and boringly true
that we cannot imagine why anyone would want to say it. Taken literally,
it would make no greater contribution to the conversation than any other ir-
relevant, obvious truth—for example, that no man is a socket wrench. Taken
literally, this metaphor violates the rule of Relevance and, perhaps, the sec-
ond part of the rule of Quantity. Taken figuratively, it is an apt, if somewhat
overworked, way of indicating that no one is isolated and self-contained.

43

Conversat ional Acts

Here are some more true metaphors. Explain what they mean and how they work.

1. “Blood is thicker than water.”

2. “Cream rises to the top.”

3. “People who live in glass houses should not throw stones.”

4. Robert Frost’s poem “The Road Not Taken” begins, “Two roads diverged
in a yellow wood.”

5. China’s Chairman Mao Tse-tung is reported to have said, “A revolution is
not the same as inviting people to dinner, or writing an essay, or painting
a picture, or doing fancy needle-work.”

6. Cuba’s Fidel Castro is supposed to have said, “A revolution is not a bed of
roses. A revolution is a struggle between the future and the past.” (Is this
different from item 5?)

Exercise XI

44

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

Metaphors do not appear only in statements. They also appear in imperatives.
For example, “Don’t rock the boat” can be employed literally in a context where
someone is moving around in a canoe in a way that could tip it. It can also be
used metaphorically to tell someone not to do something that will cause a fuss.
For each of the following metaphors, find a context where the imperative can
be used in its literal way and another context where it is used metaphorically.

1. Keep your eye on the ball.

2. Don’t put all your eggs in one basket.

3. Look before you leap.

4. Make hay while the sun shines.

5. Don’t count your chickens before they hatch.

6. Don’t change horses in midstream.

Exercise XIII

Unpack the following political metaphors by giving their literal content.

1. We can’t afford a president who needs on-the-job training.

2. It’s time for people on the welfare wagon to get off and help pull.

3. If you can’t stand the heat, get out of the kitchen.

4. We need to restore a level playing field.

5. The special interests have him in their pockets.

6. The bill was passed through typical horse trading.

7. He’s a lame duck.

Exercise XIV

Identify each of the following sentences as irony, metaphor, or simile. For each
sentence, write another expressing its literal meaning.

1. He missed the ball by a mile.

2. He acted like a bull in a china shop.

3. The exam blew me away.

4. He had to eat his words.

5. It was a real team effort. (Said by a coach after his team loses by forty points.)

6. They are throwing the baby out with the bathwater.

7. The concert was totally awesome.

8. A midair collision can ruin your whole day.

9. This is a case of the tail wagging the dog.

10. “Religion is the opiate of the masses.” (Marx)

Exercise XII

45

Conversat ional Acts

1. A classic example of rhetoric occurs in Marc Antony’s funeral oration in
William Shakespeare’s play, Julius Caesar (act III, scene ii). Brutus and
other conspirators had killed Julius Caesar. At Caesar’s funeral, Brutus
first argued that they needed to kill Caesar to prevent him from becoming
too powerful and taking away the freedoms of Roman citizens. Brutus
concludes, “As Caesar loved me, I weep for him; as he was fortunate, I re-
joice in it; as he was valiant, I honor him. But as he was ambitious, I slew
him.” On the other side, Marc Antony sees Brutus as a traitor, but Brutus
now has power, so Antony does not dare to call Brutus a traitor openly.
The central part of Antony’s speech is reprinted below. Indicate which
lines are ironic, and comment on any other rhetorical devices in this
speech. Why was it so effective (and famous) as a speech?

Come I to speak in Caesar’s funeral.

He was my friend, faithful and just to me.

But Brutus says he was ambitious,

And Brutus is an honorable man.

He hath brought many captives home to Rome,

Whose ransoms did the general coffers fill.

Did this in Caesar seem ambition?

When that the poor have cried, Caesar hath wept—

Ambition should be made of sterner stuff.

Yet Brutus says he was ambitious,

And Brutus is an honorable man.

You all did see that on the Lupercal

I thrice presented him a kingly crown,

Which he did thrice refuse. Was this ambition?

Yet Brutus says he was ambitious,

And, sure, he is an honorable man.

I speak not to disprove what Brutus spoke,

But here I am to speak what I do know.

You all did love him once, not without cause.

What cause withholds you then to mourn for him?

2. At the start of the U.S. war with Iraq in 2003, some described Iraq as another
Vietnam, while others described Saddam Hussein (Iraq’s president) as
another Hitler. Which metaphor was used by supporters of the war? Which
was used by opponents? How can you tell? How do these metaphors work?

Discussion Questions

DECEPTION

In the preceding examples, a speaker openly violates a conversational rule.
The listeners recognize that a rule is being intentionally broken, and the

speaker knows that the listeners recognize the violation. At other times,
however, speakers intentionally break conversational rules because they are
trying to mislead their listeners. A speaker may violate the first part of
Grice’s rule of Quality by uttering something she knows to be false with the
intention of producing a false belief in her listeners. That is called lying. No-
tice that lying depends on the general acceptance of the Cooperative Princi-
ple. Because audiences generally assume that speakers are telling the truth,
speakers can sometimes get away with lying.

Flat-out lying is not the only way (and often not the most effective way)
of intentionally misleading people. We can say something literally true that,
at the same time, conversationally implies something false. This is some-
times called making a false suggestion. If a son tells his parents that he “has
had some trouble with the car,” that could be true but deeply misleading if,
in fact, he had totaled it. It would be misleading because it would violate the
rule of Quantity. In saying only that he has had some trouble with the car, he
conversationally implies that nothing very serious happened. He conversa-
tionally implies this because, in this context, he is expected to come clean
and reveal all that actually happened.

A more complex example of false suggestion arose in a lawsuit that
reached the United States Supreme Court.

BRONSTON V. UNITED STATES

(409 U.S. 352, 1973)

MR. CHIEF JUSTICE BURGER delivered the opinion of the Court:

Petitioner’s perjury conviction was founded on the answers given by him as
a witness at that bankruptcy hearing, and in particular on the following col-
loquy with a lawyer for a creditor of Bronston Productions:

Q. Do you have any bank accounts in Swiss banks, Mr. Bronston?

A. No, sir.

Q. Have you ever?

A. The company had an account there for about six months, in Zurich.

Q. Have you any nominees who have bank accounts in Swiss banks?

A. No, sir.

Q. Have you ever?

A. No, sir.

It is undisputed that for a period of nearly five years, between October 1959
and June 1964, petitioner had a personal bank account at the International
Credit Bank in Geneva, Switzerland, into which he made deposits and
upon which he drew checks totalling more than $180,000. It is likewise
undisputed that petitioner’s answers were literally truthful. (i) Petitioner
did not at the time of questioning have a Swiss bank account. (ii) Bronston

46

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

Productions, Inc., did have the account in Zurich described by petitioner.
(iii) Neither at the time of questioning nor before did petitioner have nomi-
nees who had Swiss accounts. The government’s prosecution for per-
jury went forward on the theory that in order to mislead his questioner,
petitioner answered the second question with literal truthfulness but unre-
sponsively addressed his answer to the company’s assets and not to his
own—thereby implying that he had no personal Swiss bank account at the
relevant time.

It is hard to read the witness’s response to the second question in any other
way than as a deliberate attempt to mislead the Court, for his response
plainly suggests that he did not have a personal account in a Swiss bank,
when, in fact, he did. But the issue before the Court was not whether he in-
tentionally misled the Court, but whether in doing so he committed perjury.
The relevant statute reads as follows:

Whoever, having taken an oath before a competent tribunal . . . that he will testify
. . . truly, . . . willfully and contrary to such oath states or subscribes to any mate-
rial matter which he does not believe to be true, is guilty of perjury.

(18 U.S.C. 1621)

The lower courts ruled that Bronston violated this statute and, thus, commit-
ted perjury. The Supreme Court reversed this decision, in part for the follow-
ing reasons:

It should come as no surprise that a participant in a bankruptcy proceeding may
have something to conceal and consciously tries to do so, or that a debtor may be
embarrassed at his plight and yield information reluctantly. It is the responsibility
of the lawyer to probe; testimonial interrogation, and cross-examination in partic-
ular, is a probing, prying, pressing form of inquiry. If a witness evades, it is the
lawyer’s responsibility to recognize the evasion and to bring the witness back to
the mark, to flush out the whole truth with the tools of adversary examination.

(409 U.S. 352 at 358–359 [1973])

In other words, in a courtroom, where the relationship is typically adversar-
ial rather than cooperative, not all the standard conversational rules are in
force or fully in force. In particular, it would be unrealistic to assume that the
rule of Quantity will be consistently honored in a courtroom clash; therefore,
it becomes the task of the cross-examiner to force the witness to produce all
the relevant facts.

47

Conversat ional Acts

Refer back to the dialogue quoted in Bronston v. United States. Because it is dif-
ficult to read the witness’s second response as anything but a willful attempt
to deceive, why should this case be treated differently from lying? Alterna-
tively, why not even drop the demand that witnesses tell the truth and make it
the responsibility of the lawyers to get at the truth itself (rather than just the
whole truth) through “probing, prying, pressing” inquiry?

Discussion Questions

SUMMARY

In this chapter we have developed a rather complex picture of the way our
language functions. In the process, we have distinguished three kinds or lev-
els of acts that are performed when we employ language. We have also ex-
amined the rules associated with each kind or level of act. The following
table summarizes this discussion:

Three Levels Of Language

Kinds of Acts Governing Rules

A LINGUISTIC ACT is an act of saying something Semantic rules (such as definitions) and
meaningful in a language. It is the basic act that syntactic rules (as in grammar).
is needed to make anything part of language.

A SPEECH ACT concerns the move a person makes Speech act rules about special agents,
in saying something. Different kinds of speech acts formulas, circumstances, responses,
are indicated by the various verbs found in explicit and feelings appropriate to different
performatives. kinds of speech acts, discovered by

speech act analysis.

A CONVERSATIONAL ACT is a speaker’s act of Conversational rules (the Cooperative
causing a standard kind of effect in the listener; Principle; Quantity, Quality, Relevance,
it is what I do by saying something—for example, and Manner).
I persuade someone to do something.

48

CHAPTER 2 ■ The Web of Language

1. It is late, and A is very hungry. A asks B, “When will dinner be ready?”
Describe the linguistic act, the speech act, and some of the conversational
acts this person may be performing in this context.

2. Someone is trying to solve the following puzzle: One of thirteen balls is
heavier than the others, which are of equal weight. In no more than three
weighings on a balance scale, determine which ball is the heavier one. The
person is stumped, so someone says to her: “Begin by putting four balls in
each pan of the scale.” Describe the linguistic act, the speech act, and the
conversational act of the person who makes this suggestion.

Exercise XV

NOTES
1 J. L. Austin used the phrase “locutionary act” to refer to a level of language closely related to
what we refer to as a “linguistic act.” See J. L. Austin, How to Do Things with Words, 2nd ed.
(Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1975), 94–109.

2 See, for example, J. L. Austin’s How to Do Things with Words.

3 An example of the continuous present is “I bet ten dollars every week in the lottery.” Since this
sentence is not used to make a bet, this sentence and others with the continuous present do not
pass the thereby test or express explicit performatives.

4 Austin calls speech acts “illocutionary acts.” See How to Do Things with Words, 98–132.

5Although performative verbs name kinds of speech acts, not every kind of speech act has a cor-
responding performative verb. For example, insulting seems to be a kind of speech act, but “in-
sult” is not a performative verb, because you cannot insult someone simply by saying, “I insult
you.” We might have had a convention that enabled us to insult people just by saying, “I insult
you.” In English, however, we do not.

6Supreme Court of New Hampshire, 1929, 84 N.H. 114, A. 641.

7This discussion of conversational rules and implications is based on Paul Grice’s important es-
say, “Logic and Conversation,” which appears as the second chapter of his Studies in the Way of
Words (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1989). To avoid British references that an
American reader might find perplexing, we have sometimes altered Grice’s wording.

8Grice states the Cooperative Principle in these words: “Make your conversational contribution
such as is required, at the stage at which it occurs, by the accepted purpose or direction of the
talk exchange in which you are engaged.”

49

Summary

This page intentionally left blank

THE LANGUAGE OF ARGUMENT

Using the techniques developed in Chapter 2, this chapter will examine the use of lan-

guage to formulate arguments and will provide methods to analyze genuine arguments

in their richness and complexity. The first stage in analyzing an argument is the dis-

covery of its basic structure. To do this, we will examine the words, phrases, and special

constructions that indicate the premises and conclusions of an argument. The second

stage is to explore the standards that arguments are supposed to meet. Here we will

focus on validity, truth, and soundness. The third stage is the study of techniques used

to protect an argument. These include guarding premises so that they are less subject

to criticism, offering assurances concerning debatable claims, and discounting possi-

ble criticisms in advance.

ARGUMENT MARKERS

In Chapter 2, we saw that language is used for a great many different pur-
poses. One important thing that we do with language is construct arguments.
Arguments are constructed out of statements, but arguments are not just lists
of statements. Here is a simple list of statements:

Socrates is a man.

All men are mortal.

Socrates is mortal.

This list is not an argument, because none of these statements is presented as
a reason for any other statement. It is, however, simple to turn this list into an
argument. All we have to do is to add the single word “therefore“:

Socrates is a man.

All men are mortal.

Therefore, Socrates is mortal.

Now we have an argument. The word “therefore” converts these sentences
into an argument by signaling that the statement following it is a conclusion,
and the statement or statements that come before it are offered as reasons
on behalf of this conclusion. The argument we have produced in this way

3

51

52

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

is a good one, because the conclusion follows from the reasons stated on
its behalf.

There are other ways of linking these sentences to form an argument.
Here is one:

Since Socrates is a man,

and all men are mortal,

Socrates is mortal.

Notice that the word “since” works in roughly the opposite way that
“therefore” does. The word “therefore” is a conclusion marker, because it
indicates that the statement that follows it is a conclusion. In contrast, the
word “since” is a reason marker, because it indicates that the following state-
ment or statements are reasons. In our example, the conclusion comes at the
end, but there is a variation on this. Sometimes the conclusion is given at
the start:

Socrates is mortal, since all men are mortal and Socrates is a man.

“Since” flags reasons; the remaining connected statement is then taken to
be the conclusion, whether it appears at the beginning or at the end of the
sentence.

Many other terms are used to introduce an argumentative structure into
language by marking either reasons or conclusions. Here is a partial list:

REASON MARKERS CONCLUSION MARKERS

since therefore

because hence

for thus

as then

We shall call such terms “argument markers,” because each presents one
or more statements as part of an argument or backing for some other
statement.

It is important to realize that these words are not always used as argument
markers. The words “since” and “then” are often used as indicators of time, as
in, “He’s been an American citizen since 1973” and “He ate a hot dog, then a
hamburger.” The word “for” is often used as a preposition, as in “John works
for IBM.” Because some of these terms have a variety of meanings, it is not pos-
sible to identify argument markers in a mechanical way just by looking at
words. It is necessary to examine the function of words in the context in which
they occur. One test of whether a word is functioning as an argument marker
in a particular sentence is whether you can substitute another argument
marker without changing the meaning of the sentence. In the last example, it
makes no sense to say, “John works since IBM.”

Many phrases are also available to signal that an argument is being given.
Here is just a small sample:

53

Argument Markers

from which it follows that . . .

from which we may conclude that . . .

from which we see that . . .

which goes to show that . . .

which establishes that . . .

We can also indicate conclusions and reasons by using argumentative perfor-
matives, which we examined briefly in Chapter 2. If someone says, “I conclude
that . . . ,” the words that follow are given the status of a conclusion. More pre-
tentiously, if someone says, “Here I base my argument on the claim that . . . ,”
what comes next has the status of a reason.

Examination of actual arguments will show that we have a great many
ways of introducing an argumentative structure into our language by using
the two forms of argument markers: reason markers and conclusion mark-
ers. The first, and in many ways the most important, step in analyzing an
argument is to identify the conclusion and the reasons given on its behalf.
We do this by paying close attention to these argument markers.

IF . . . , THEN . . .

If-then sentences, which are also called conditionals, often occur in arguments,
but they do not present arguments by themselves. To see this, consider the
following conditional:

If the Dodgers improve their hitting, then they will win the
Western Division.

The sentence between the “if” and the “then” is called the antecedent of the
conditional. The sentence after the “then” is called its consequent. In utter-
ing such a conditional, we are not asserting the truth of its antecedent,
and we are not asserting the truth of its consequent either. Thus, the per-
son who makes the above remark is not claiming that the Dodgers will
win the Western Division. All she is saying is that if they improve their
hitting, then they will win. Furthermore, she is not saying that they will
improve their hitting. Because the speaker is not committing herself to
either of these claims, she is not presenting an argument. This becomes
clear when we contrast this conditional with a statement that does formu-
late an argument:

Conditional: If the Dodgers improve their hitting, then they will win the
Western Division.

Argument: Since the Dodgers will improve their hitting, they will win the
Western Division.

The sentence that follows the word “since” is asserted. That is why “since”
is an argument marker, whereas the connective “if . . . then . . .” is not an
argument marker.

54

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

Even though conditionals by themselves do not mark arguments, there
is a close relationship between conditionals and arguments: Indicative
conditionals provide patterns that can be converted into an argument
whenever the antecedent is said to be true. (We also get an argument when
the consequent is said to be false, but we will focus here on the simpler
case of asserting the antecedent.) Thus, we often hear people argue in the
following way:

If inflation continues to grow, there will be an economic crisis. But
inflation will certainly continue to grow, so an economic crisis is on
the way.

The first sentence is an indicative conditional. It makes no claims one way or
the other about whether inflation will grow or whether an economic crisis
will occur. The next sentence asserts the antecedent of this conditional and
then draws a conclusion signaled by the argument marker “so.” We might
say that when the antecedent of an indicative conditional is found to be true,
the conditional can be cashed in for an argument.

Often the antecedent of a conditional is not asserted explicitly but is con-
versationally implied. When asked which player should be recruited for a
team, the coach might just say, “If Deon is as good as our scouts say he is,
then we ought to go for Deon.” This conditional does not actually assert that
Deon is as good as the scouts report. Nonetheless, it would be irrelevant and
pointless for the coach to utter this conditional alone if he thought that the
scouts were way off the mark. The coach might immediately add that he
disagrees with the scouting reports. But unless the coach cancels the conver-
sational implication in some way, it is natural to interpret him as giving an
argument that we ought to pick Deon. In such circumstances, then, an
indicative conditional can conversationally imply an argument, even though
it does not state the argument explicitly.

This makes it easy to see why indicative conditionals are a useful fea-
ture of our language. By providing patterns for arguments, they prepare
us to draw conclusions when the circumstances are right. Much of our
knowledge of the world around us is contained in such conditionals. Here is
an example: If your computer does not start, the plug might be loose. This is
a useful piece of practical information, for when your computer does not
start, you can immediately infer that the plug might be loose, so you know
to check it out.

Other words function in similar ways. When your computer fails to
start, a friend might say, “Either the plug is loose or you are in deep
trouble.” Now, if you also assert, “The plug is not loose,” you can conclude
that you are in deep trouble. “Either . . . or . . .” sentences thus provide
patterns for arguments, just as conditionals do. However, neither if-then
sentences nor either-or sentences by themselves explicitly assert enough to
present a complete argument, so “if . . ., then . . .” and “either . . . or . . .”
should not be labeled as argument markers.

55

Arguments in Standard Form

Indicate which of the following italicized words or phrases is a reason marker,
a conclusion marker, or neither.

1. He apologized, so you should forgive him.

2. He apologized. Accordingly, you should forgive him.

3. Since he apologized, you should forgive him.

4. Provided that he apologized, you should forgive him.

5. In view of the fact that he apologized, you should forgive him.

6. He apologized. Ergo, you should forgive him.

7. Given that he apologized, you should forgive him.

8. He apologized, and because of that you should forgive him.

9. After he apologizes, you should forgive him.

10. He apologized. As a result, you should forgive him.

11. Seeing as he apologized, you should forgive him.

12. He apologized. For that reason alone, you should forgive him.

Exercise I

Indicate whether each of the following sentences is an argument.

1. Charles went bald, and most men go bald.

2. Charles went bald because most men go bald.

3. My roommate likes to ski, so I do, too.

4. My roommate likes to ski, and so do I.

5. I have been busy since Tuesday.

6. I am busy, since my teacher assigned lots of homework.

Exercise II

ARGUMENTS IN STANDARD FORM

Because arguments come in all shapes and forms, it will help to have a
standard way of presenting arguments. For centuries, logicians have used
a format of the following kind:

(1) All men are mortal.
(2) Socrates is a man.

(3) Socrates is mortal. (from 1–2)

56

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

The reasons (or premises) are listed and numbered. Then a line is drawn be-
low the premises. Next, the conclusion is numbered and written below the
line. The symbol “ “, which is read “therefore,” is then added to the left of
the conclusion in order to indicate the relation between the premises and the
conclusion. Finally, the premises from which the conclusion is supposed to
be derived are indicated in parentheses. Arguments presented in this way
are said to be in standard form.

The notion of a standard form is useful because it helps us see that the
same argument can be expressed in different ways. For example, the follow-
ing three sentences formulate the argument that was given in standard form
above.

Socrates is mortal, since all men are mortal, and Socrates is a man.

All men are mortal, so Socrates is mortal, because he is a man.

All men are mortal, and Socrates is a man, which goes to show that
Socrates is mortal.

More important, by putting arguments into standard form, we perform
the most obvious, and in some ways most important, step in the analysis of
an argument: the identification of its premises and conclusion.

Identify which of the following sentences expresses an argument. For each that
does, (1) circle the argument marker (or markers), (2) indicate whether it is a
reason marker or a conclusion marker, and (3) restate the argument in stan-
dard form.

1. Since Chicago is north of Boston, and Boston is north of Charleston,
Chicago is north of Charleston.

2. Toward evening, clouds formed and the sky grew darker; then the storm
broke.

3. Texas has a greater area than Topeka, and Topeka has a greater area than
the Bronx Zoo, so Texas has a greater area than the Bronx Zoo.

4. Both houses of Congress may pass a bill, but the president may still
veto it.

5. Other airlines will carry more passengers, because United Airlines is on
strike.

6. Since Jesse James left town, taking his gang with him, things have been a
lot quieter.

7. Things are a lot quieter, because Jesse James left town, taking his gang
with him.

8. Witches float because witches are made of wood, and wood floats.

9. The hour is up, so you must hand in your exams.

10. Joe quit, because his boss was giving him so much grief.

Exercise III

57

Some Standards for Evaluat ing Arguments

SOME STANDARDS FOR EVALUATING ARGUMENTS

Not all arguments are good arguments; so, having identified an argument,
the next task is to evaluate the argument. Evaluating arguments is a complex
business. In fact, this entire book is aimed primarily at developing proce-
dures for doing so. There are, however, certain basic terms used in evaluat-
ing arguments that should be introduced from the start. They are validity,
truth, and soundness. Here they will be introduced informally. Later (in
Chapters 6–7) they will be examined with more rigor.

VALIDITY

In some good arguments, the conclusion is said to follow from the premises.
However, this commonsense notion of following from is hard to pin down
precisely. The conclusion follows from the premises only when the content
of the conclusion is related appropriately to the content of the premises, but
which relations count as appropriate?

To avoid this difficult question, most logicians instead discuss whether an
argument is valid. Calling something “valid” can mean a variety of things,
but in this context validity is a technical notion. Here “valid” does not mean
“good,” and “invalid” does not mean “bad.” This will be our definition of
validity:

An argument is valid if and only if it is not possible that all of its premises
are true and its conclusion false.

Alternatively, one could say that its conclusion must be true if its premises
are all true (or, again, that at least one of its premises must be false if its con-
clusion is false). The point is that a certain combination—true premises and
a false conclusion—is ruled out as impossible.

The following argument passes this test for validity:

(1) All senators are paid.
(2) Sam is a senator.

(3) Sam is paid. (from 1–2)

Clearly, if the two premises are both true, there is no way for the conclu-
sion to fail to be true. To see this, just try to tell a coherent story in which
every single senator is paid and Sam is a senator, but Sam is not paid. You
can’t do it.

Contrast this example with a different argument:

(1) All senators are paid.
(2) Sam is paid.

(3) Sam is a senator. (from 1–2)

Here the premises and the conclusion are all in fact true, let’s assume,
but that is still not enough to make the argument valid, because validity

58

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

concerns what is possible or impossible, not what happens to be true. This
conclusion could be false even when the premises are true, for Sam could
leave the Senate but still be paid for some other job, such as lobbyist. That
possibility shows that this argument is invalid.

Another very common form of argument is called modus ponens:

(1) If it is snowing, then the roads are slippery.
(2) It is snowing.

(3) The roads are slippery. (from 1–2)

This argument is valid, because it is not possible for its premises to be true
when its conclusion is false. We can show that by assuming that the con-
clusion is false and then reasoning backwards. Imagine that the roads are
not slippery. Then there are two possibilities. Either it is snowing or it
is not snowing. If it is not snowing, then the second premise is false. If it
is snowing, then the first premise must be false, since we are supposing
that it is snowing and that the roads are not slippery. Thus, at least one
premise has to be false when the conclusion is false. Hence, this argument
is valid.

This argument might seem similar to another:

(1) If it is snowing, then the roads are slippery.
(2) It is not snowing.

(3) The roads are not slippery. (from 1–2)

This argument is clearly invalid, because there are several ways for its prem-
ises to be true when its conclusion is false. It might have just stopped snow-
ing or ice might make the roads slippery. Then the roads are slippery, so the
conclusion is false, even if both premises are true.

Yet another form of argument is often called process of elimination:

(1) Either Joe or Jack or Jim or Jerry committed the murder.
(2) Joe didn’t do it.
(3) Jack didn’t do it.
(4) Jim didn’t do it.

(5) Jerry committed the murder. (from 1–4)

The first premise asserts that at least one of these four suspects is guilty. That
couldn’t be true if all of the other premises were true and the conclusion were
false, because that combination would exclude all four of these suspects.
So this argument is valid.

Now compare this argument:

(1) Either Joe or Jack or Jim or Jerry committed the murder.
(2) Joe did it.

(3) Jerry did not commit the murder. (from 1–2)

59

Some Standards for Evaluat ing Arguments

To show that this argument is invalid, all we have to do is explain how the
premises could be true and the conclusion false. Here’s how: Joe and Jerry
did it together. In that case, Jerry did it, so the conclusion is false; Joe also
did it, so the second premise is true; and the first premise is true, because it
says that at least one of these four suspects did it, and that is true when more
than one of the suspects did it. That possibility of complicity, thus, makes
this argument invalid.

We will explore many more forms of argument in Chapters 6–7. The
goal for now is just to get a feel for how to determine validity. In all of these
examples, an argument is said to be valid if and only if there is no possible
situation in which its premises are true and its conclusion is false. You need
to figure out whether there could be any situation like this in order to deter-
mine whether an argument is valid. If so, the argument is invalid. If not, it
is valid.

This definition shows why validity is a valuable feature for an argument
to possess: There can be no valid argument that leads one from true prem-
ises to a false conclusion. This should square with your commonsense ideas
about reasoning. If you reason well, you should not be led from truth into
error.

What are known as deductive arguments are put forward as meeting this
standard of validity, so validity is one criterion for a good deductive argu-
ment. Other arguments—so-called inductive arguments—are not presented
as meeting this standard. Roughly, an inductive argument is presented as
providing strong support for its conclusion. The standards for evaluating in-
ductive arguments will be examined in Chapter 8. For now we will concen-
trate on deductive arguments.

TRUTH

Although a deductive argument must be valid in order to be a good
argument, validity is not enough. One reason is that an argument can be
valid even when some (or all) of the statements it contains are false. For
example:

(1) No fathers are female.
(2) Sam is a father.

(3) Sam is not female. (from 1–2)

Suppose that Sam has no children or that Sam is female, so premise 2 is false.
That would be a serious defect in this argument. Nonetheless, this argument
satisfies our definition of validity: If the premises were true, then the conclu-
sion could not be false. There is no way that Sam could be female if Sam is a
father and no fathers are female. This example makes it obvious that validity
is not the same as truth. It also makes it obvious that another requirement of
a good argument is that all of its premises must be true.

60

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

SOUNDNESS

We thus make at least two demands of a deductive argument:

1. The argument must be valid.

2. The premises must be true.

When an argument meets both of these standards, it is said to be sound. If it
fails to meet either one or the other, then it is unsound. Thus, an argument is
unsound if it is invalid, and it is also unsound if at least one of its premises
is false.

ALL PREMISES TRUE AT LEAST ONE FALSE PREMISE

Valid Sound Unsound

Invalid Unsound Unsound

Soundness has one great benefit: A sound argument must have a true con-
clusion. We know this because its premises are true and, since it is valid,
it is not possible that its premises are true and its conclusion is false. This
is why people who seek truth want sound arguments, not merely valid
arguments.

A TRICKY CASE

Our definition of validity yields a surprising result. Consider the following
argument:

(1) Frogs are green.
(2) Frogs are not green.

(3) I am president. (from 1–2)

It is obviously not possible for both premises to be true, so it is also not pos-
sible that both premises are true when the conclusion is false. Consequently,
this argument fits our definition of validity. So does any other argument
whose premises cannot be true. Such arguments cannot ever take us from
truths to falsehoods, because they never start with truths.

This weird example illustrates some of the ways in which the technical
notion of validity differs from the commonsense notion of following from.
The content of its premises has no relation to the content of the conclusion.
Frogs have nothing to do with who is president. Hence, the conclusion does
not follow from the premises. But that does not prevent the argument from
being valid.

This example also shows the importance of distinguishing validity from
soundness. Any argument whose premises cannot all be true is valid, no
matter how ridiculous its conclusion. However, an argument cannot be
sound if its premises can’t be true, and a valid argument that is unsound can-
not show that its conclusion is true. Consequently, this strange case won’t
cause any trouble.

61

Some Standards for Evaluat ing Arguments

Indicate whether each of the following arguments is valid and whether it is
sound. Explain your answers where necessary.

1. Most professors agree that they are paid too little, so they are.

2. David Letterman is over four feet tall, so he is over two feet tall.

3. Lee can’t run a company right, because he can’t do anything right.

4. Barack Obama is smart and good-looking, so he is smart.

5. Barack Obama is either a Democrat or a Republican, so he is a Democrat.

6. Since Jimmy Carter was president, he must have won an election.

7. Since Gerald Ford was president, he must have won an election.

8. Pat is either a mother or a father. If Pat is a mother, then she is a parent. If
Pat is a father, he is a parent. So, either way, Pat is a parent. (Assume that
this conclusion is true.)

9. People who live in the Carolinas live in either North Carolina or
South Carolina. Hillary Clinton does not live in North Carolina or
South Carolina. Hence, she does not live in the Carolinas.

10. If all of Illinois were in Canada, then Chicago would be in Canada. But
Chicago is not in Canada. Therefore, not all of Illinois is in Canada.

11. If George lives in Crawford, then George lives in Texas. If George lives in
Texas, then George lives in the United States. Hence, if George lives in
Crawford, he lives in the United States.

12. There can’t be a largest six-digit number, because six-digit numbers are
numbers, and there is no largest number.

Exercise IV

Assume that the following sentences are either true (T) or false (F) as indicated.

All my children are teenagers. (T)

All teenagers are students. (T)

All teenagers are my children. (F)

All my children are students. (T)

Using these assigned values, label each of the following arguments as (a) ei-
ther valid or invalid, and (b) either sound or unsound.

1. All my children are teenagers.

All teenagers are students.

All my children are students.

2. All my children are students.

All teenagers are students.

All my children are teenagers.

Exercise V

(continued)

62

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

A PROBLEM AND SOME SOLUTIONS

Although soundness guarantees a true conclusion, we usually expect even
more from an argument than soundness. In the first place, an argument can
be sound but trivially uninteresting:

(1) Nigeria is in Africa.

(2) Nigeria is in Africa. (from 1)

Compare these arguments:

(1) Al Gore was president. (1*) George W. Bush was president.

(2) Frogs are frogs. (2*) Frogs are frogs.

Are these arguments valid? Why or why not? Are they sound? Why or why
not? Is anything wrong with the argument on the right side? If so, what?

Discussion Question

3. All teenagers are my children.

All my children are students.

All teenagers are students.

4. All teenagers are students.

All my children are students.

All my children are students.

Indicate whether each of the following sentences is true. For those that are
true, explain why they are true. For those that are false, show why they are
false by giving a counterexample.

1. Every argument with a false conclusion is invalid.

2. Every argument with a false premise is invalid.

3. Every argument with a false premise and a false conclusion is invalid.

4. Every argument with a false premise and a true conclusion is invalid.

5. Every argument with true premises and a false conclusion is invalid.

6. Every argument with a true conclusion is sound.

7. Every argument with a false conclusion is unsound.

Exercise VI

63

A Problem and Some Solut ions

Here the premise is true. The argument is also valid, because the premise
cannot be true without the conclusion (which repeats it) being true as well. Yet
the argument is completely worthless as a proof that Nigeria is in Africa. The
reason is that this argument is circular. We will examine circular arguments
in detail in Chapter 16, but it should already be clear why such arguments
are useless. If A is trying to justify something to B that B has doubts about,
then citing the very matter in question will not do any good. Explanations of
a phenomenon that cite that very phenomenon itself also fail to increase our
understanding. In general, for A to argue successfully, A must marshal facts
that B accepts and then show that they justify or explain the conclusion. In
circular arguments, the worries about the conclusion immediately turn into
worries about the premise as well.

Now, however, A seems to run into a problem. A cannot cite a proposition
as a reason for itself, for that would be circular reasoning. If, however, A cites
some other propositions as premises leading to the conclusion, then the
question naturally arises why these premises should be accepted. Does A
not have to present arguments for them as well? Yet if A does that, then A
will introduce further premises that are also in need of proof, and so on in-
definitely. It now looks as if every argument, to be successful, will have to
be infinitely long.

This potential regress causes deep problems in theoretical philosophy. In
everyday life, however, we try to avoid these problems by relying on shared
beliefs—beliefs that will not be challenged. Beyond this, we expect people to
believe us when we cite information that only we possess. But there are lim-
its to this expectation, for we all know that people sometimes believe things
that are false and sometimes lie about what they know to be true. This pres-
ents a practical problem: How can we present our reasons in a way that does
not produce just another demand for an argument—a demand for more rea-
sons? Here we use three main strategies:

1. Assuring: Indicating that there are backup reasons even though we are
not giving them fully right now.

2. Guarding: Weakening our claims so that they are less subject to attack.

3. Discounting: Anticipating criticisms and dismissing them.

In these three ways we build a defensive perimeter around our premises.
Each of these defenses is useful, but each can also be abused.

ASSURING

When will we want to give assurances about some statement we have made?
If we state something that we know everyone believes, assurances are not nec-
essary. For that matter, if everyone believes something, we may not even state
it at all; we let others fill in this step in the argument. We offer assurances
when we think that someone might doubt or challenge what we say.

64

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

There are many ways to give assurances. Sometimes we cite authorities:

Doctors agree . . .

Recent studies have shown . . .

An unimpeachable source close to the White House says . . .

It has been established that . . .

Here we indicate that authorities have these reasons without specifying
what their reasons are. We merely indicate that good reasons exist, even if
we ourselves cannot—or choose not to—spell them out. When the authority
cited can be trusted, this is often sufficient, but authorities often can and
should be questioned. This topic will be discussed more fully in Chapter 15.

Another way to give assurances is to comment on the strength of our own
belief:

I’m certain that . . .

I’m sure that . . .

I can assure you that . . .

I’m not kidding. . . .

Over the years, I have become more and more convinced that . . .

Again, when we use these expressions, we do not explicitly present
reasons, but we conversationally imply that there are reasons that back
our assertions.

A third kind of assurance abuses the audience:

Everyone with any sense agrees that . . .

Of course, no one will deny that . . .

It is just common sense that . . .

There is no question that . . .

Nobody but a fool would deny that . . .

These assurances not only do not give any reason; they also suggest that
there is something wrong with you if you ask for a reason. We call this the
trick of abusive assurances.

Just as we can give assurances that something is true, we can also give as-
surances that something is false. For example,

It is no longer held that . . .

It is wholly implausible to suppose that . . .

No intelligent person seriously maintains that . . .

You would have to be pretty dumb to think that . . .

The last three examples clearly involve abusive assurances.
Although many assurances are legitimate, we as critics should always

view assurances with some suspicion. People tend to give assurances only

65

A Problem and Some Solut ions

when they have good reasons to do so. Yet assuring remarks often mark the
weakest parts of the argument, not the strongest. If someone says “I hardly
need argue that . . . ,” it is often useful to ask why she has gone to the trou-
ble of saying this. When we distrust an argument—as we sometimes do—
this is precisely the place to look for weakness. If assurances are used, they
are used for some reason. Sometimes the reason is a good one. Sometimes,
however, it is a bad one. In honest argumentation, assurances save time and
simplify discussion. In a dishonest argument, they are used to paper over
cracks.

GUARDING

Guarding represents a different strategy for protecting premises from attack.
We reduce our claim to something less strong. Thus, instead of saying “all,”
we say “many.” Instead of saying something straight out, we use a qualify-
ing phrase, such as “it is likely that . . .” or “it is very possible that. . . .” Law
school professors like the phrase “it is arguable that. . . .” This is wonderfully
noncommittal, for it does not indicate how strong the argument is, yet it
does get the statement into the discussion.

Broadly speaking, there are three main ways of guarding what we say:

1. Weakening the extent of what has been said: retreating from “all” to
“most” to “a few” to “some,” and so on.

2. Introducing probability phrases such as “It is virtually certain that . . . ,”
“It is likely that . . . ,” “It might happen that . . . ,” and so on.

3. Reducing our level of commitment: moving from “I know that . . .” to “I
believe that . . .” to “I suspect that . . . ,” and so on.

Such terms guard premises when they are used in place of stronger alter-
natives. “Madison probably quit the volleyball team” is weaker than “She
definitely quit” but stronger than “She could have quit.” Thus, if the con-
text makes one expect a strong claim, such as “I know she quit,” then it is
guarding to say, “She probably quit.” In contrast, if the context is one of
speculating about who might have quit the team, then it is not guarding to
say, “She probably quit.” That is a relatively strong claim when others are
just guessing. Thus, you need to pay careful attention to the context in
order to determine whether a term has the function of guarding. When a
term is used for guarding, you should be able to specify a stronger claim
that the guarding term replaces and why that stronger term would be
expected in the context.

Guarding terms and phrases are often legitimate and useful. If you want
to argue that a friend needs fire insurance for her house, you do not need to
claim that her house will burn down. All you need to claim is that there is a
significant chance that her house will burn down. Your argument is better if
you start with this weaker premise, because it is easier to defend and it is
enough to support your conclusion.

66

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

If we weaken a claim sufficiently, we can make it completely immune to
criticism. What can be said against a remark of the following kind: “There
is some small chance that perhaps a few politicians are honest on at least
some occasions“? You would have to have a very low opinion of politicians
to deny this statement. On the other hand, if we weaken a premise too
much, we pay a price. The premise no longer gives strong support to the
conclusion.

The goal in using guarding terms is to find a middle way: We should
weaken our premises sufficiently to avoid criticism, but not weaken them so
much that they no longer provide strong enough evidence for the conclu-
sion. Balancing these factors is one of the most important strategies in mak-
ing and criticizing arguments.

Just as it was useful to zero in on assuring terms, so it is also useful to
keep track of guarding terms. One reason is that, like assuring terms, guard-
ing terms are easily corrupted. A common trick is to use guarding terms to
insinuate things that cannot be stated explicitly in a conversation. Consider
the effect of the following remark: “Perhaps the secretary of state has not
been candid with the Congress.” This does not actually say that the secre-
tary of state has been less than candid with the Congress, but, by the rule of
Relevance, clearly suggests it. Furthermore, it suggests it in a way that is
hard to combat.

A more subtle device for corrupting guarding terms is to introduce a
statement in a guarded form and then go on to speak as if it were not
guarded at all.

Perhaps the secretary of state has not been candid with the Congress. Of
course, he has a right to his own views, but this is a democracy where
officials are accountable to Congress. It is time for him to level with us.

The force of the guarding term “perhaps” that begins this passage disappears
at the end, where it is taken for granted that the secretary of state has not
been candid. This can be called the trick of the disappearing guard.

What is commonly called hedging is a sly device that operates in the op-
posite direction from our last example. With hedging, one shifts ground
from a strong commitment to something weaker. Things, as they say, get
“watered down” or “taken back.” Strong statements made at one stage of an
argument are later weakened without any acknowledgment that the posi-
tion has thereby been changed in a significant way. A promise to pass a piece
of legislation is later whittled down to a promise to bring it to a vote.

DISCOUNTING

The general pattern of discounting is to cite a possible criticism in order to
reject it or counter it. Notice how different the following statements sound:

The ring is beautiful, but expensive.

The ring is expensive, but beautiful.

67

A Problem and Some Solut ions

Both statements assert the same facts—that the ring is beautiful and that the
ring is expensive. Both statements also suggest that there is some opposition
between these facts. Yet these statements operate in different ways. We might
use the first as a reason for not buying the ring; we can use the second as
a reason for buying it. The first sentence acknowledges that the ring is
beautiful, but overrides this by pointing out that it is expensive. In reverse
fashion, the second statement acknowledges that the ring is expensive, but
overrides this by pointing out that it is beautiful. Such assertions of the form
“A but B” thus have four components:

1. The assertion of A

2. The assertion of B

3. The suggestion of some opposition between A and B

4. The indication that the truth of B is more important than the truth of A

The word “but” thus discounts the statement that comes before it in favor of
the statement that follows it.

“Although” is also a discounting connective, but it operates in reverse
fashion from the word “but.” We can see this, using the same example:

Although the ring is beautiful, it is expensive.

Although the ring is expensive, it is beautiful.

Here the statement following the word “although” is discounted in favor of
the connected statement.

A partial list of terms that typically function as discounting connectives
includes the following conjunctions:

although even if but nevertheless

though while however nonetheless

even though whereas yet still

These terms are not always used to discount. The word “still,” for example, is
used for discounting in (a) “He is sick; still, he is happy” but not in (b) “He is
still happy” (or “Sit still”). We can tell whether a term is being used for dis-
counting by asking whether the sentence makes sense when we substitute
another discounting term: It makes sense to say, “He is sick, but he is happy.”
It makes no sense to say, “He is but happy.” It is also illuminating to try to spec-
ify the objection that is being discounted. If you cannot say which objection is
discounted, then the term is probably not being used for discounting.

The clearest cases of discounting occur when we are dealing with facts
that point in different directions. We discount the facts that go against the
position we wish to take. But discounting is often more subtle than this. We
sometimes use discounting to block certain conversational implications of
what we have said. This comes out in examples of the following kind:

Jones is an aggressive player, but he is not dirty.

The situation is difficult, but not hopeless.

68

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

The Republicans have the upper hand in Congress, but only for the
time being.

A truce has been declared, but who knows for how long?

Take the first example. There is no opposition between Jones being aggres-
sive and his not being dirty. Both would be reasons to pick Jones for our
team. However, the assertion that Jones is aggressive might suggest that he
is dirty. The “but” clause discounts this suggestion without, of course, deny-
ing that Jones is aggressive.

The nuances of discounting terms can be subtle, and a correct analysis is
not always easy. All the same, the role of discounting terms is often impor-
tant. It can be effective in an argument to beat your opponents to the punch
by anticipating and discounting criticisms before your opponents can raise
them. The proper use of discounting can also help you avoid side issues and
tangents.

Still, discounting terms, like the other argumentative terms we have
examined, can be abused. People often spend time discounting weak objec-
tions to their views in order to avoid other objections that they know are
harder to counter. Another common trick is to discount objections no one
would raise. This is called attacking straw men. Consider the following re-
mark: “A new building would be great, but it won’t be free.” This does not
actually say that the speaker’s opponents think we can build a new building
for free, but it does conversationally imply that they think this, because oth-
erwise it would be irrelevant to discount that objection. The speaker is thus
trying to make the opponents look bad by putting words in their mouths
that they would never say themselves. To counter tricks like this, we need to
ask whether a discounted criticism is one that really would be raised, and
whether there are stronger criticisms that should be raised.

For each of the numbered words or expressions in the following sentences, in-
dicate whether it is an argument marker, an assuring term, a guarding term, a
discounting term, or none of these. For each argument marker, specify what
the conclusion and the reasons are, and for each discounting term, specify
what criticism is being discounted and what the response to this criticism is.

1. Although [1] no mechanism has been discovered, most [2] researchers in the
field agree [3] that smoking greatly increases the chances [4] of heart disease.

2. Since [5] historically [6] public debt leads to inflation, I maintain [7] that,
despite [8] recent trends, inflation will return.

3. Take it from me [9], there hasn’t been a decent center fielder since [10] Joe
DiMaggio.

4. Whatever anyone tells you [11], there is little [12] to the rumor that Queen
Elizabeth II will step down for [13] her son, Prince Charles.

Exercise VII

69

E V A L U A T I V E L A N G U A G E

EVALUATIVE LANGUAGE

Arguments are often filled with evaluation. The clearest cases of evaluative
language occur when we say that something is good or bad, that some course
of action is right or wrong, or that something should or should not (or ought to
or ought not to) be done. The meaning of such evaluative terms is very con-
troversial, but we can begin to understand evaluative language by asking
which acts—linguistic, speech, and conversational—it is used to perform.

Evaluative terms often come into play when one is faced with a choice or
decision. If you are deciding which shirt to buy, and a friend tells you, “That
one’s nice,” your friend would normally be taken to be prescribing that
you buy it. A passenger who says, “That’s the wrong turn,” is telling the
driver not to turn that way. In such contexts, evaluative statements are
action guiding—that is, they are used to direct someone to do or refrain
from doing some action. Evaluative terms do not, however, have such direct
prescriptive force when applied to things in remote times or places. Saying
that it was wrong for James Earl Ray to assassinate Martin Luther King does
not tell Ray not to do anything, for it is idle to address imperatives to people
in the past. Someone who says that it would be wrong for the president to
pursue a particular policy is not telling the president not to pursue it, unless
she happens to be speaking or writing to the president. Nevertheless, even

5. The early deaths of Janis Joplin and Jimi Hendrix show [14] that drugs are
really [15] dangerous.

6. I think [16] he is out back somewhere.

7. I think [17], therefore [18] I am.

8. I concede [19] that the evidence is hopelessly [20] weak, but [21] I still think
he is guilty.

9. I deny [22] that I had anything [23] to do with it.

10. The wind has shifted to the northeast, which means [24] that snow is
likely [25].

1. Construct three new and interesting examples of statements containing
assuring terms.

2. Do the same for guarding terms.

3. Do the same for discounting terms, and indicate which statement is being
discounted in favor of the other.

4. Do the same for argument markers, and indicate what is presented as a
reason for what.

Exercise VIII

70

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

in cases where evaluations lack direct prescriptive force, they sometimes
have prescriptive force indirectly. Calling Ray’s past action bad or wrong
might, through analogy, be a way of telling someone not to do future acts
like it. Evaluative language is, in these ways, used to perform speech acts of
prescribing action.

Evaluative language is also often used for other speech acts. When a fan
says, “That band is great,” this usually expresses admiration for their music
and a desire to hear more. After a meal, someone who announces, “That was
horrible,” is often expressing aversion or even disgust at the food. To say,
“That’s too bad,” is often to express disappointment or sadness. In these ways,
evaluative language is used to perform speech acts of expressing emotion.

These speech acts do not, however, exhaust the meaning of evaluative
language. For one thing, evaluative language is typically also used to bring
about certain effects. When a mother tells her son that that he ought to keep
his promises, she not only prescribes that her son not lie; she also standardly
intends to have an effect on his behavior—she tries to get him to keep his
promises. And when war protesters express their disapproval by calling a
war immoral, they are normally trying to get anyone listening to feel the
same way about the war. Thus, evaluative language is used to perform con-
versational acts of changing people’s behavior and feelings.

There is still more to the meaning of evaluative language. Our lives con-
sist of a constant stream of choices of varying kinds and of various levels
of importance. Because we often have to make these choices or decisions
under time pressure, it is not possible to make all of them on a case-by-case
basis. It is for this reason, among others, that we come to rely on standards
in making evaluations. In most cases, we call something “good” or “right”
because we believe that it meets or satisfies relevant standards, and we call
something “bad” or “wrong” because we believe that it violates some rele-
vant standard. This is, roughly, the content of the linguistic act of uttering
evaluative language.

On this account, calling something good or bad by itself can be fairly
empty of content. Such remarks gain content—sometimes a very rich
content—by virtue of the particular standards they invoke. This explains
why the word “good” can be applied to so many different kinds of things.
When we say that Hondas are good cars, we are probably applying stan-
dards that involve reliability, efficiency, comfort, and so on. We call someone
a good firefighter because we think the person is skilled at the tasks of a fire-
fighter, is motivated to do those tasks, works well with other firefighters,
and so on. Our standards for calling someone an ethically good person con-
cern honesty, generosity, fairness, and so on. The standards we have for call-
ing something a good car, a good firefighter, and an (ethically) good person
have little in common. Even so, the word “good” functions in the same way
in all three cases: It invokes the standards that are relevant in a given con-
text and indicates that something adequately satisfies these standards.

Because evaluative statements invoke standards, they stand in con-
trast to utterances that merely express personal feelings. If I say that I like

71

E V A L U A T I V E L A N G U A G E

a particular singer, then I am expressing a personal taste. Unless I were
being accused of lying or self-deception, it would be very odd for some-
one to reply, “No, you don’t like that singer.” On the other hand, if I call
someone a good singer (or the best singer in years), then I am going beyond
expressing my personal tastes. I am saying something that others may
accept or reject. Of course, the standards for judging singers may be impre-
cise, and they may shift from culture to culture. Still, to call someone a good
singer is to evaluate that person as a singer, which goes beyond merely
expressing feelings, because it invokes standards and indicates that the
person in question meets them.

The words “good” and “bad” are general evaluative terms. Other eval-
uative terms are more restrictive in their range of application. The word
“delicious” is usually used for evaluating the taste of foods; it means “good-
tasting.” A sin is a kind of wrong action, but, more specifically, it is an action
that is wrong according to religious standards. A bargain has a good price.
An illegal action is one that is legally wrong. Our language contains a great
many specific terms of evaluation like these. Here are a few more examples:

beautiful dangerous wasteful sneaky cute

murder prudent nosy sloppy smart

Each of these words expresses either a positive or a negative evaluation of a
quite specific kind.

Positive and negative evaluations can be subtle. Consider a word like
“clever.” It presents a positive evaluation in terms of quick mental ability. In
contrast, “cunning” often presents a negative evaluation of someone for
misusing mental abilities. It thus makes a difference which one of these
words we choose. It also makes a difference where we apply them. When
something is supposed to be profound and serious, it is insulting to call it
merely clever. Prayers, for example, should not be clever.

Sometimes seemingly innocuous words can shift evaluative force. The
word “too” is the perfect example of this. This word introduces a negative
evaluation, sometimes turning a positive quality into a negative one. Com-
pare the following sentences:

John is smart. John is too smart.

John is honest. John is too honest.

John is ambitious. John is too ambitious.

John is nice. John is too nice.

John is friendly. John is too friendly.

The word “too” indicates an excess, and thereby contains a criticism. If you
look at the items in the second column, you will see that the criticism is some-
times rather brutal—for example, calling someone “too friendly.”

The difference between an evaluative term and a descriptive term is not
always obvious. To see this, consider the terms “homicide” and “murder.”
The words are closely related but do not mean the same thing. “Homicide”

72

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

is a descriptive term meaning “the killing of a human being.” “Murder” is
an evaluative term meaning, in part at least, “the wrongful killing of a human
being.” It takes more to show that something is a murder than it does to
show that something is a homicide.

Just as it is easy to miss evaluative terms because we fail to recognize the
evaluative component built into their meanings, it is also possible to inter-
pret neutral words as evaluative because of positive or negative associations
that the words might evoke. The word “nuclear,” for example, has bad con-
notations for some people because of its association with bombs and wars,
but the word itself is purely descriptive. To call people nuclear scientists is
not to say that they are bad in any way. The test for an evaluative term is
this: Does the word mean that something is good or bad (right or wrong) in
a particular way?

SPIN DOCTORING

Evaluation need not be problematic, but it is often hidden and abused, most
notoriously in spin doctoring. The expression “spin doctor” seems to combine
two metaphors. The first concerns putting the right spin on things—that is,
presenting things in ways that make them look good or bad, depending on
how one wants them to be perceived. The second concerns doctoring things

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

73

E V A L U A T I V E L A N G U A G E

up to accomplish this. Spin doctoring often involves trying to find the right
way of labeling something.

A classic example comes from Shakespeare’s play, Julius Caesar (act III,
scene i). After Brutus and others killed Caesar, Brutus announced, “So are
we Caesar’s friends that have abridged his time of fearing death.” By re-
describing his act in terms of a minor benefit to Caesar, Brutus tries to make
people see his treacherous act of killing his friend as a generous act of doing
his friend a favor!

Spin doctoring is still rampant in politics today. Referring to the Iraq
war, those who favored it spoke of the “liberation” of Iraq, whereas those
who opposed it called it an “invasion” or an “occupation.” Each label in-
volves evaluation, so the disagreement over what to call it was really
about how to evaluate it. This verbal dispute is not purely verbal, because
the label can affect attitudes and behaviors by associating the Iraq war
with good military actions (liberations) or bad military actions (invasions
and occupations).

Often spin doctoring involves attributing questionable views or atti-
tudes to opponents. Supporters of President Bush sometimes refer to his de-
tractors as “the blame-America-first crowd” and describe their policies for
getting out of Iraq as “cut and run.” These negative labels are applied even
to policies, such as partial staged redeployment, that are far from cowardly
in the way suggested by “cut and run.” Similarly, in 2006, conservative com-
mentator David Brooks described opposition to Joe Lieberman’s campaign
as a “liberal inquisition.” Stephen Colbert lampooned this label in a segment
of “The Word” where he joked that, if incumbents like Lieberman continued
to be attacked so harshly, then they would actually be forced to defend their
records. Colbert concluded, “There is only one word for that—inquisition.”
But the sidebar read “democracy.” Sometimes parody is the most effective
response to spin doctoring.

Of course, liberal democrats are often just as guilty of spin doctoring.
When discussing a measure that would repeal a large number of envi-
ronmental regulations, President Clinton sarcastically referred to it as the
“Polluter’s Bill of Rights“—not exactly a generous way of describing a bill
based on the belief that environmental regulations had gone too far. And, to
quote Stephen Colbert again, “Affirmative action is a prime example of
the Leftist campaign to make ideas seem less dangerous than they are,
through the strategic use of positive words. Think about it. How can
something be bad if it is ‘affirmative’? and how can we ignore it if is it
‘action’?” [from I Am America (and So Can You!), New York: Grand Central
Publishing, 2007, p. 174].

Spin doctoring like this makes it harder to discuss the real benefits
and costs of such laws and policies, because nobody wants to argue against
liberation or affirmation or in favor of invasion, inquisition, or pollution.
The task of critical analysis is to see through such slogans to the important
issues that lie behind them, so that we can intelligently address the real val-
ues at stake.

74

CHAPTER 3 ■ The Language of Argument

For each of the following sentences, construct two others—one that reverses
the evaluative force, and one that is as neutral as possible. The symbol “0”
stands for neutral, “+” for positive evaluative force, and “–” for negative eval-
uative force. Try to make as little change as possible in the descriptive content
of the sentence.

Example: – Professor Conrad is rude.

+ Professor Conrad is uncompromisingly honest in his criticisms.

0 Professor Conrad often upsets people with his criticisms.

1. – Larry is a lazy lout. 6. – Walter is a weenie.

2. + Brenda is brave. 7. + Carol is caring.

3. – Sally is a snob. 8. – Bill is bossy.

4. + Bartlett is a blast. 9. – Oprah is opinionated.

5. – George is a goody-goody. 10. – This is a Mickey Mouse
exercise.

Exercise X

Be a spin doctor yourself by writing upbeat, good-sounding titles or descrip-
tions for the following proposals. Remember that, as a professional spin doc-
tor, you should be able to make things you personally hate sound good.

1. Imposing a $1,000 fee on graduating seniors

2. Requiring all students to participate in a twenty-one-meal-per-week food
plan

Exercise XI

Indicate whether the following italicized terms are positively evaluative (E+),
negatively evaluative (E–), or simply descriptive (D). Remember, the evalua-
tions need not be moral evaluations.

1. Janet is an excellent golfer.

2. The group was playing very loudly.

3. The group was playing too loudly.

4. William was rude to his parents.

5. William shouted at his parents.

6. They mistakenly turned right at
the intersection.

7. Fascists ruled Italy for almost
twenty years.

8. That’s a no-no.

Exercise IX

9. Bummer.

10. Debbie lied.

11. Debbie said something false.

12. Joe copped out.

13. Jake is a bully.
14. Mary Lou was a gold medalist.

15. She is sick.

16. He suffers from a hormonal
imbalance.

75

E V A L U A T I V E L A N G U A G E

3. Abolishing coed dormitories

4. Abolishing fraternities

5. Requiring women students to return to their dormitories by midnight
(such rules were once quite common)

6. Abolishing failing grades

7. Restoring failing grades

8. Requiring four years of physical education

9. Abolishing intercollegiate football

10. Introducing a core curriculum in Western civilization

11. Abolishing such a curriculum

12. Abolishing faculty tenure

1. What precisely does “That’s too bad” mean?

2. In the Democratic presidential candidate debate on September 26, 2007,
Representative Dennis Kucinich was asked the following question by
MSNBC correspondent Tim Russert. Was Kucinich’s answer spin
doctoring? Was it legitimate or illegitimate? Why?

Russert: . . . Congressman Kucinich, when you were mayor of Cleveland,
you let Cleveland go into bankruptcy, the first time that happened since
the Depression. The voters of Cleveland rewarded you by throwing you
out of office and electing a Republican mayor of Cleveland. How can you
claim that you have the ability to manage the United States of America,
when you let Cleveland go bankrupt?

Rep. Kucinich: You know, Tim, that was NBC’s story. Now I want the peo-
ple to know what the real story was. I took a stand on behalf of the peo-
ple of Cleveland to save a municipal electric system. The banks and the
utilities in Cleveland, the private utilities, were trying to force me to sell
that system. And so on December 15th, 1978, I told the head of the
biggest bank, when he told me I had to sell the system in order to get the
city’s credit renewed, that I wasn’t going to do it. . . . I put my job on the
line. How many people would be willing to put their job on the line in
the face of pressure from banks and utilities? As this story gets told, peo-
ple will want me to be their next president because they’ll see in me not
only the ability to take a stand, but the ability to live with integrity.

Discussion Questions

This page intentionally left blank

THE ART OF CLOSE ANALYSIS

This chapter will largely be dedicated to a single purpose: the close and careful analy-

sis of a speech drawn from the Congressional Record, using argumentative devices

introduced in Chapter 3. The point of this chapter is to show in detail how these meth-

ods of analysis can be applied to an actual argument of some richness and complexity.

AN EXTENDED EXAMPLE

It is now time to apply all of our previously discussed notions to a genuine
argument. Our example will be a debate that occurred in the House of Rep-
resentatives on the question of whether there should be an increase in the al-
lowance given to members of the House for clerical help—the so-called clerk
hire allowance. The argument against the increase presented by Representa-
tive Kyl (Republican, Iowa) will be examined in detail. We will put it under
an analytic microscope.

The choice of this example may seem odd, for the question of clerk hire
allowance is not one of the burning issues of our time. This, in fact, is one
reason for choosing it. It will be useful to begin with an example about
which feelings do not run high to learn the habit of objective analysis. Later
on we shall examine arguments about which almost everyone has strong
feelings and try to maintain an objective standpoint even there.

The example is good for two other reasons: 1. It contains most of the ar-
gumentative devices we have listed, and 2. relatively speaking, it is quite a
strong argument. This last remark may seem ironic after we seemingly tear
the argument to shreds. However, in comparison to other arguments we
shall examine, it stands up well.

We begin by reading through a section of the Congressional Record (vol.
107, part 3, March 15, 1961, pp. 4059–60) without comment:

CLERK HIRE ALLOWANCE,
HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES

Mr. FRIEDEL. Mr. Speaker, by direction of the Committee on House Admin-
istration, I call up the resolution (H. Res. 219) to increase the basic clerk hire
allowance of each Member of the House, and for other purposes, and ask for
its immediate consideration.

4

77

78

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

The Clerk read the resolution as follows:

Resolved, That effective April 1, 1961, there shall be paid out of the contingent
fund of the House, until otherwise provided by law, such sums as may be neces-
sary to increase the basic clerk hire allowance of each Member and the Resident
Commissioner from Puerto Rico by an additional $3,000 per annum, and each
such Member and Resident Commissioner shall be entitled to one clerk in addi-
tion to those to which he is otherwise entitled by law.

Mr. FRIEDEL. Mr. Speaker, this resolution allows an additional $3,000
per annum for clerk hire and an additional clerk for each Member of the
House and the Resident Commissioner from Puerto Rico. Our subcommit-
tee heard the testimony, and we were convinced of the need for this provi-
sion to be made. A few Members are paying out of their own pockets for
additional clerk hire. This $3,000 is the minimum amount we felt was nec-
essary to help Members pay the expenses of running their offices. Of
course, we know that the mail is not as heavy in some of the districts as it is
in others, and, of course, if the Member does not use the money, it remains
in the contingent fund.

Mr. KYL. Mr. Speaker, will the gentleman yield?
Mr. FRIEDEL. I yield to the gentleman from Iowa [Mr. Kyl] for a statement.
Mr. KYL. Mr. Speaker, I oppose this measure. I oppose it first because it is

expensive. I further oppose it because it is untimely.
I do not intend to belabor this first contention. We have been presented a

budget of about $82 billion. We have had recommended to us a whole series
of additional programs or extensions of programs for priming the pump, for
depressed areas, for the needy, for the unemployed, for river pollution proj-
ects, and recreation projects, aid to education, and many more. All are listed
as “must” activities. These extensions are not within the budget. Furthermore,
if business conditions are as deplorable as the newspapers indicate, the
Government’s income will not be as high as anticipated. It is not enough to
say we are spending so much now, a little more will not hurt. What we spend,
we will either have to recover in taxes, or add to the staggering national debt.

The amount of increase does not appear large. I trust, however, there is no
one among us who would suggest that the addition of a clerk would not entail
allowances for another desk, another typewriter, more materials, and it is not
beyond the realm of possibility that the next step would then be a request for
additional office space, and ultimately new buildings. Some will say, “All the
Members will not use their maximum, so the cost will not be great.” And this
is true. If the exceptions are sufficient in number to constitute a valid argument,
then there is no broad general need for this measure. Furthermore, some Mem-
bers will use these additional funds to raise salaries. Competition will force all
salaries upward in all offices and then on committee staffs, and so on. We may
even find ourselves in a position of paying more money for fewer clerks and in
a tighter bind on per person workload.

This measure proposes to increase the allowance from $17,500 base clerical
allowance to $20,500 base salary allowance. No member of this House can tell

79

An Extended Example

us what this means in gross salary. That computation is almost impossible.
Such a completely absurd system has developed through the years on salary
computations for clerical hire that we have under discussion a mathematical
monstrosity. We are usually told that the gross allowed is approximately
$35,000. This is inaccurate. In one office the total might be less than $35,000 and
in another, in complete compliance with the law and without any conscious
padding, the amount may be in excess of $42,000. This is possible because of a
weird set of formulae which determines that three clerks at $5,000 cost less
than five clerks at $3,000. Five times three might total the same as three times
five everywhere else in the world—but not in figuring clerk hire in the House.

This is an application of an absurdity. It is a violation of bookkeeping
principles, accounting principles, business principles and a violation of com-
mon sense. Listen to the formula:

First, 20 percent increase of first $1,200; 10 percent additional from $1,200
to $4,600; 5 percent further additional from $4,600 to $7,000.

Second, after applying the increases provided in paragraph 1, add an ad-
ditional 14 percent or a flat $250, whichever is the greater, but this increase
must not exceed 25 percent.

Third, after applying the increases provided in both paragraphs 1 and 2,
add an additional increase of 10 percent in lieu of overtime.

Fourth, after applying the increases provided in paragraphs 1, 2, and 3,
add an additional increase of $330.

Fifth, after applying the increases provided in paragraphs 1, 2, 3, and 4,
add an additional increase of 5 percent.

Sixth, after applying the increases provided in paragraphs 1, 2, 3, 4, and
5, add an additional increase of 10 percent but not more than $800 nor less
than $300 a year.

Seventh, after applying the increases provided in paragraphs, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 6, add an additional increase of 71⁄2 percent.

Eighth, after applying the increases provided in paragraphs, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, and 7, add an additional increase of 10 percent.

Ninth, after applying the increases provided in paragraphs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, and 8, add an additional increase of 71⁄2 percent.

The Disbursing Office has a set of tables to figure House salaries for office
staffs and for about 900 other employees. It contains 45 sheets with 40
entries per sheet. In the Senate, at least, they have simplified the process
some by figuring their base in multiples of 60, thus eliminating 11 cate-
gories. Committee staffers, incidentally, have an $8,880 base in comparison
to the House $7,000 base limitation.

Now, Mr. Speaker, I have planned to introduce an amendment or a substi-
tute which would grant additional clerk hire where there is a demonstrable
need based on heavier than average population or “election at large” and
possible other factors. But after becoming involved in this mathematical maze,
I realize the folly of proceeding one step until we have corrected this situation.
We can offer all kinds of excuses for avoiding a solution. We cannot offer rea-
sonable arguments that it should not be done or that it cannot be done.

80

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

Someone has suggested that the Members of this great body prefer to
keep the present program because someone back in the home district might
object to the gross figures. I know this is not so. When a Representative is
busy on minimum wage, or aid to education, or civil rights, such matters of
housekeeping seem too picayune to merit attention. The Member simply
checks the table and hires what he can hire under the provisions and then
forgets the whole business. But I know the Members also want the people
back home to realize that what we do here is open and frank and accurate,
and that we set an example in businesslike procedures. The more we can
demonstrate responsibility the greater will be the faith in Congress.

May I summarize. It is obvious that some Members need more clerical help
because of large population and large land area. I have been working for some
time with the best help we can get, on a measure which would take these items
into consideration. Those Members who are really in need of assistance should
realize that this temporary, hastily conceived proposition we debate today will
probably obviate their getting a satisfactory total solution.

First, we should await redistricting of the Nation.
Second, we should consider appropriate allowance for oversize districts

considering both population and total geographic area.
Finally, I hope we can develop a sound and sensible formula for computing

salaries of office clerks and other statutory employees in the same category.

Before going any further, it will be useful to record your general reactions
to this speech. Perhaps you think that on the whole Kyl gives a well-reasoned
argument on behalf of his position. Alternatively, you might think that he is
making a big fuss over nothing, trying to confuse people with numbers, and
just generally being obnoxious. When you are finished examining this argu-
ment in detail, you can look back and ask yourself why you formed this orig-
inal impression and how, if at all, you have changed your mind.

The first step in the close analysis of an argument is to go through the
text, labeling the various argumentative devices we have examined. Here
some abbreviations will be useful:

argument marker M

assuring term A

guarding term G

discounting term D

argumentative performative AP

evaluative term E (+ or –)

rhetorical device R

The last label is a catchall for the various rhetorical devices discussed in
Chapter 1, such as overstatement, understatement, irony or sarcasm,
metaphor, simile, rhetorical questions, and so on.

If you want to make your analysis extra close, it is illuminating to specify
which rhetorical device is deployed whenever you mark something with “R.”

81

An Extended Example

It is also useful to specify whether each argument marker marks a reason or a
conclusion (and what the argument is), which stronger term is replaced by
each guarding term marked “G,” and which objection is discounted whenever
you mark a discounting term with “D.”

This simple process of labeling brings out features of an argument that
could pass by unnoticed. It also directs us to ask sharp critical questions. To
see this, we can look at each part of the argument in detail.

Mr. KYL. Mr. Speaker, I oppose this measure. I oppose it

first because it is expensive. I further oppose it because it is

untimely.

This is a model of clarity. By the use of a performative utterance in the open-
ing sentence, Kyl makes it clear that he opposes the measure. Then by twice
using the argument marker “because,” he gives his two main reasons for
opposing it: It is expensive and it is untimely. We must now see if he makes
good on each of these claims.

The next paragraph begins the argument for the claim that the measure is
expensive:

I do not intend to belabor this first contention. We have been

presented a budget of about $82 billion. We have had recom-

mended to us a whole series of additional programs or ex-

tensions of programs for priming the pump, for depressed

areas, for the needy, for the unemployed, for river pollution

projects, and recreation projects, aid to education, and many

more. All are listed as “ must ” activities. These extensions are

not within the budget. Furthermore , if business conditions

are as deplorable as the newspapers indicate, the Govern-

ment’s income will not be as high as anticipated. It is not

enough to say we are spending so much now, a little more

will not hurt. What we spend, we will either have to recover

in taxes, or add to the staggering national debt.

a. “I do not intend to belabor this first contention.” This is an example of
assuring. The conversational implication is that the point is so obvious that
little has to be said in its support. Yet there is something strange going on
here. Having said that he will not belabor the claim that the bill is expensive,
Kyl actually goes on to say quite a bit on the subject. It is a good idea to look
closely when someone says that he or she is not going to do something, for
often just the opposite is happening. For example, saying “I am not suggest-
ing that Smith is dishonest” is one way of suggesting that Smith is dishon-
est. If no such suggestion is being made, why raise the issue at all?

b. Kyl now proceeds in a rather flat way, stating that the proposed budget
comes to $82 billion and that it contains many new programs and extensions

AP

A

M

R

D

AP
M

M

82

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

of former programs. Because these are matters of public record and nobody
is likely to deny them, there is no need for guarding or assuring. Kyl also
claims, without qualification, that these extensions are not within the
budget. This recital of facts does, however, carry an important conversa-
tional implication: Since the budget is already out of balance, any further ex-
tensions should be viewed with suspicion.

c. Putting the word “must” in quotation marks, or saying it in a sarcastic
tone of voice, is a common device for denying something. The plain sugges-
tion is that some of these measures are not must activities at all. Kyl here
suggests that some of the items already in the budget are not necessary. He
does this, of course, without defending this suggestion.

d. “Furthermore, if business conditions are as deplorable as the newspa-
pers indicate, the Government’s income will not be as high as anticipated.”
The word “furthermore” suggests that an argument is about to come. How-
ever, the following sentence as a whole is an indicative conditional (with the
word “then” dropped out). As such, the sentence does not produce an argu-
ment, but instead provides only a pattern for an argument.

To get an argument from this pattern, one would have to assert the an-
tecedent of the conditional. The argument would then come to this:

(1) If business conditions are as deplorable as the newspapers indicate,
then the Government’s income will not be as high as anticipated.

(2) Business conditions are as deplorable as the newspapers indicate.

(3) The Government’s income will not be as high as anticipated.

The first premise seems perfectly reasonable, so, if Kyl could establish the
second premise, then he would have moved the argument along in an im-
portant way. Yet he never explicitly states that business conditions are so
deplorable. All he says is that “the newspapers indicate” this. Moreover, this
appeal to authority (see Chapter 15) does not mention any specific newspa-
per, so he does not endorse any specific authority. Still, Kyl never questions
what the newspapers claim, and it would be misleading to bring up these
newspaper reports without questioning them if he thought they were way
off the mark. So Kyl does seem to have in mind something like the argu-
ment (1)–(3).

e. “It is not enough to say we are spending so much now, a little more will
not hurt.” The opening phrase is, of course, used to deny what follows it.
Kyl is plainly rejecting the argument that, since we are spending so much
now, a little more will not hurt. Yet his argument has a peculiar twist, for
who would come right out and make such an argument? If you stop to think
for a minute, it should be clear that nobody would want to put it that way.
An opponent, for example, would use quite different phrasing. He might
say something like this: “Considering the large benefits that will flow from
this measure, it is more than worth the small costs.” What Kyl has done is
attribute a bad argument to his opponents and then reject it in an indignant
tone. This is a common device, and when it is used, it is often useful to ask

83

An Extended Example

whether anyone would actually argue or speak in the way suggested. When
the answer to this question is no, as it often is, we have what was called “the
trick of discounting straw men” in Chapter 3 (see also Chapter 17). In such
cases, it is useful to ask what the speaker’s opponent would have said in-
stead. This leads to a further question: Has the arguer even addressed him-
self to the real arguments of his opponents?

So far, Kyl has not addressed himself to the first main point of his argu-
ment: that the measure is expensive. This is not a criticism, because he is re-
ally making the preliminary point that the matter of expense is significant.
Here he has stated some incontestable facts—for example, that the budget is
already out of balance. Beyond this he has indicated, with varying degrees
of strength, that the financial situation is grave. It is against this background
that the detailed argument concerning the cost of the measure is actually
presented in the next paragraph.

The amount of increase does not appear large. I trust,

however, there is no one among us who would suggest that

the addition of a clerk would not entail allowances for

another desk, another typewriter, more materials, and it is

not beyond the realm of possibility that the next step would

then be a request for additional office space, and ultimately

new buildings. Some will say , “All the Members will not

use their maximum, so the cost will not be great.” And this is

true. If the exceptions are sufficient in number to constitute a

valid argument, then there is no broad general need for this

measure. Furthermore, some Members will use these addi-

tional funds to raise salaries. Competition will force all

salaries upward in all offices and then on committee staffs,

and so on. We may even find ourselves in a position of pay-

ing more money for fewer clerks and in a tighter bind on per

person workload.

a. “The amount of increase does not appear large.” Words like “appear”
and “seem” are sometimes used for guarding, but we must be careful not to
apply labels in an unthinking way. The above sentence is the beginning of a
discounting argument. As soon as you hear this sentence, you can feel that a
word like “but” or “however” is about to appear. Sure enough, it does.

b. “I trust, however, there is no one among us who would suggest that the
addition of a clerk would not entail allowances for another desk, another
typewriter, more materials. . . .” This is the beginning of Kyl’s argument that
is intended to rebut the argument that the increase in expenses will not be
large. Appearances to the contrary, he is saying, the increase will be large. He
then ticks off some additional expenses that are entailed by hiring new
clerks. Notice that the whole sentence is covered by the assuring phrase

D A

D

M

G

G

G

84

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

“I trust . . . there is no one among us who would suggest. . . .” This implies
that anyone who would make such a suggestion is merely stupid. But the
trouble with Kyl’s argument so far is this: He has pointed out genuine addi-
tional expenses, but they are not, after all, very large. It is important for him
to get some genuinely large sums of money into his argument. This is the
point of his next remark.

c. “. . . and it is not beyond the realm of possibility that the next step
would then be a request for additional office space, and ultimately new
buildings.” Here, at last, we have some genuinely large sums of money in
the picture, but the difficulty is that the entire claim is totally guarded by the
phrase “it is not beyond the realm of possibility.” There are very few things
that are beyond the realm of possibility. Kyl’s problem, then, is this: There
are certain additional expenses that he can point to without qualification,
but these tend to be small. On the other hand, when he points out genuinely
large expenses, he can only do so in a guarded way. So we are still waiting
for a proof that the expense will be large. (Parenthetically, it should be
pointed out that Kyl’s prediction of new buildings actually came true.)

d. “Some will say, ‘All the Members will not use their maximum, so the
cost will not be great.’ And this is true. If the exceptions are sufficient in
number to constitute a valid argument, then there is no broad general need
for this measure.” This looks like a “trick” argument, and for this reason
alone it demands close attention. The phrase “some will say” is a standard
way of beginning a discounting argument. This is, in fact, a discounting ar-
gument, but its form is rather subtle. Kyl cites what some will say, and then
he adds, somewhat surprisingly: “And this is true.” To understand what is
going on here, we must have a good feel for conversational implication. Kyl
imagines someone reasoning in the following way:

All the Members will not use their maximum.
So, the cost will not be great.
Therefore, we should adopt the measure.

Given the same starting point, Kyl tries to derive just the opposite conclusion
along the following lines:

All the Members will not use their maximum.
If the exceptions are not sufficient, then the cost will be too great.
But if the exceptions are sufficient, there is no broad general need for this

measure.
Therefore, whether it is expensive or not, we should reject this measure.

In order to get clear about this argument, we can put it into schematic form:

Kyl’s argument:

If (1) the measure is expensive, then reject it.
If (2) the measure is inexpensive, then, because that shows there is no

general need, reject it.

85

An Extended Example

The opposite argument:

If (1) the measure is inexpensive, then accept it.

If (2) the measure is expensive, then, because that demonstrates a general
need, accept it.

When the arguments are spread out in this fashion, it should be clear that
they have equal strength. Both are no good. The question that must be set-
tled is this: Does a genuine need exist that can be met in an economically
sound manner? If there is no need for the measure, then it should be re-
jected, however inexpensive. Again, if there is a need, then some expense is
worth paying. The real problem is to balance need against expense and then
decide on this basis whether the measure as a whole is worth adopting.

Kyl’s argument is a sophistry, because it has no tendency to answer the
real question at hand. A sophistry is a clever but fallacious argument intended
to establish a point through trickery. Incidentally, it is one of the marks of a
sophistical argument that, though it may baffle, it almost never convinces.
We think that few readers will have found this argument persuasive even if
they cannot say exactly what is wrong with it. The appearance of a sophisti-
cal argument (or even a complex and tangled argument) is a sign that the
argument is weak. Remember, when a case is strong, people usually argue in
a straightforward way.

e. “Furthermore, some Members will use these additional funds to raise
salaries. Competition will force all salaries upward in all offices and then
on committee staffs, and so on.” The word “furthermore” signals that fur-
ther reasons are forthcoming. Here Kyl returns to the argument that the
measure is more expensive than it might appear at first sight. Although
Kyl’s first sentence is guarded by the term “some,” he quickly drops his
guard and speaks in an unqualified way about all salaries in all offices. Yet
the critic is bound to ask whether Kyl has any right to make these projec-
tions. Beyond this, Kyl here projects a parade of horrors. (See Chapter 13.) He
pictures this measure leading by gradual steps to quite disastrous conse-
quences. Here the little phrase “and so on” carries a great burden in the
argument. Once more, we must simply ask ourselves whether these projec-
tions seem reasonable.

f. “We may even find ourselves in a position of paying more money for
fewer clerks and in a tighter bind on per person workload.” Once more, the
use of a strong guarding expression takes back most of the force of the argu-
ment. Notice that if Kyl could have said straight out that the measure will
put us in a position of paying more money for fewer clerks and in a tighter
bind on per-person workload, that would have counted as a very strong ob-
jection. You can hardly do better in criticizing a position than showing that
it will have just the opposite result from what is intended. In fact, however,
Kyl has not established this; he has only said that this is something that we
“may even find.”

Before we turn to the second half of Kyl’s argument, which we shall see
in a moment is much stronger, we should point out that our analysis has not

86

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

been entirely fair. Speaking before the House of Representatives, Kyl is in an
adversarial situation. He is not trying to prove things for all time; rather, he is
responding to a position held by others. Part of what he is doing is raising
objections, and a sensitive evaluation of the argument demands a detailed
understanding of the nuances of the debate. But even granting this, it should
be remembered that objections themselves must be made for good reasons.
The problem so far in Kyl’s argument is that the major reasons behind his
objections have constantly been guarded in a very strong way.

Turning now to the second part of Kyl’s argument—that the measure is
untimely—we see that he moves along in a clear and direct way with little
guarding.

This measure proposes to increase the allowance from

$17,500 base clerical allowance to $20,500 base salary

allowance. No member of this House can tell us what this

means in gross salary. That computation is almost impossi-

ble. Such a completely absurd system has developed

through the years on salary computations for clerical hire

that we have under discussion a mathematical monstrosity.

We are usually told that the gross allowed is approximately

$35,000. This is inaccurate. In one office the total might be

less than $35,000 and in another, in complete compliance

with the law and without any conscious padding, the

amount may be in excess of $42,000. This is possible because

of a weird set of formulae which determines that three

clerks at $5,000 cost less than five clerks at $3,000. Five times

three might total the same as three times five everywhere

else in the world—but not in figuring clerk hire in the House.

This is an application of an absurdity. It is a violation of

bookkeeping principles, accounting principles, business prin-

ciples and a violation of common sense. Listen to the formula.

The main point of the argument is clear enough: Kyl is saying that the present
system of clerk salary allowance is utterly confusing, and this matter should
be straightened out before any other measures in this area are adopted. There
is a great deal of negative evaluation in this passage. Notice the words and
phrases that Kyl uses:

a completely absurd system

weird set of formulae

violation of common sense

mathematical monstrosity

an absurdity

G

E–

E–

E–

E–

E–

R

87

An Extended Example

There is also a dash of irony in the remark that five times three might total
the same as three times five everywhere else in the world, but not in figur-
ing clerk hire in the House. Remember, there is nothing wrong with using
negative evaluative and expressive terms if they are deserved. Looking at
the nine-step formula in Kyl’s speech, you can decide for yourself whether
he is on strong grounds in using this negative language.

Now, Mr. Speaker, I have planned to introduce an amend-

ment or a substitute which would grant additional clerk hire

where there is a demonstrable need based on heavier than

average population or “election at large” and possible other

factors.

a. This passage discounts any suggestion that Kyl is unaware that a gen-
uine problem does exist in some districts. It also indicates that he is willing
to do something about it.

b. The phrase “and possible other factors” is not very important, but it
seems to be included to anticipate other reasons for clerk hire that should at
least be considered.

But after becoming involved in this mathematical maze, I

realize the folly of proceeding one step until we have cor-

rected this situation.

a. Here Kyl clearly states his reason for saying that the measure is un-
timely. Notice that the reason offered has been well documented and is not
hedged in by qualifications.

b. The phrases “mathematical maze” and “folly” are again negatively
evaluative.

We can offer all kinds of excuses for avoiding a solution.

We cannot offer reasonable arguments that it should not be

done or that it cannot be done.

Notice that the first sentence ridicules the opponents’ arguments by calling
them excuses, a term with negative connotations. The second sentence gives
assurances that such a solution can be found.

Someone has suggested that the Members of this great body

prefer to keep the present program because someone back in

the home district might object to the gross figures. I know

this is not so. When a Representative is busy on minimum

wage, or aid to education, or civil rights, such matters of

housekeeping seem too picayune to merit attention. The

Member simply checks the table and hires what he can hire

under the provisions and then forgets the whole business.

D

E–A

E–

E–

A

A

88

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

But I know the Members also want the people back home

to realize that what we do here is open and frank and accu-

rate, and that we set an example in businesslike procedures.

The more we can demonstrate responsibility the greater will

be the faith in Congress.

a. Once more the seas of rhetoric run high. Someone (though not Kyl him-
self) has suggested that the members of the House wish to conceal informa-
tion. He disavows the very thought that he would make such a suggestion
by the sentence “I know this is not so.” All the same, he has gotten this sug-
gestion into the argument.

b. Kyl then suggests another reason why the members of the House
will not be concerned with this measure: It is “too picayune.” The last two
sentences rebut the suggestion that it is too small to merit close attention.
Even on small matters, the more the House is “open and frank and accu-
rate,” the more it will “set an example in businesslike procedures” and
thus “demonstrate responsibility” that will increase “the faith in Con-
gress.” This is actually an important part of Kyl’s argument, for presum-
ably his main problem is to get the other members of the House to take
the matter seriously.

May I summarize. It is obvious that some Members need

more clerical help because of large population and large

land area. I have been working for some time with the best

help we can get, on a measure which would take these items

into consideration. Those Members who are really in need of

assistance should realize that this temporary, hastily con-

ceived proposition we debate today will probably obviate

their getting a satisfactory total solution.

a. This is a concise summary. Kyl once more assures the House that he is
aware that a genuine problem exists. He also indicates that he is working on it.

b. The phrase “temporary, hastily conceived proposition we debate to-
day” refers back to his arguments concerning untimeliness.

c. The claim that “it will probably obviate their getting a satisfactory total
solution” refers back to the economic argument. Notice, however, that, as
before, the economic claim is guarded by the word “probably.”

First, we should await redistricting of the Nation.

Second, we should consider appropriate allowance for

oversize districts considering both population and total

geographic area.

Finally, I hope we can develop a sound and sensible for-

mula for computing salaries of office clerks and other statu-

tory employees in the same category.

D

E+

A

E–

G

A

A

M

A

E+

E+

E+

89

An Extended Example

This is straightforward except that a new factor is introduced: We should
await redistricting of the nation. This was not mentioned earlier in the argu-
ment, and so seems a bit out of place in a summary. Perhaps the point is so
obvious that it did not need any argument to support it. On the other hand,
it is often useful to keep track of things that are smuggled into the argument
at the very end. If redistricting was about to occur in the near future, this
would give a strong reason for delaying action on the measure. Because the
point is potentially so strong, we might wonder why Kyl has made so little
of it. Here, perhaps, we are getting too subtle.

Now that we have looked at Representative Kyl’s argument in close de-
tail, we can step back and notice some important features of the argument
as a whole. In particular, it is usually illuminating to notice an argument’s
purpose, audience, and standpoint.

First, Kyl’s overall purpose is clear. As his opening sentence indicates,
he is presenting an argument intended to justify his opposition to an in-
crease in the clerk hire allowance. Virtually everything he says is directed
toward this single goal. In other cases, arguers pursue multiple goals, and
sorting things out can be a complex matter. Sometimes it is hard to tell
what an argument is even intended to establish. This is usually a sign that
the person presenting the argument is confused or, perhaps, trying to con-
fuse his audience.

Second, Kyl’s argument is addressed to a specific audience. He is not
speaking to an enemy of the United States who would love to see our gov-
ernment waste its money. Nor is he speaking to clerks or to those U.S.
citizens who might be hired as clerks if the clerk hire allowance were
raised. He is presenting his argument to other representatives in Con-
gress. He is trying to show this group that they and he have reasons to
oppose this increase in the clerk hire allowance. His task, then, is to pres-
ent reasons that they accept—or should accept—for rejecting an increase
in the clerk hire allowance.

Third, Kyl not only addresses his argument to a particular audience, he
also adopts a particular standpoint to it. Good arguments are usually pre-
sented not only to specific audiences but also from particular standpoints.
Kyl’s standpoint is clear and powerful. He puts himself across as a tough-
minded, thoroughly honest person who is willing to stand up against
majority opinion. This, in fact, may be an accurate representation of his
character, but by adopting this standpoint he gains an important argumen-
tative advantage: He suggests that those who disagree with him are a bit
soft-minded, not altogether candid, and, anyway, mere tools of the Demo-
cratic majority that runs the Congress. By adopting this stance, Kyl casts
his opponents in a light that is hardly flattering.

By specifying the purpose, audience, and standpoint of an argument,
we get a clearer sense of what the argument needs to accomplish in order
to succeed in its goals. By looking closely at special words in the argument,
as well as at what is conversationally implied, we get a better idea of how
the argument is supposed to achieve its goals. All of this together helps us
understand the argument. It will sometimes remain unclear how well the

90

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

argument succeeds. It will always require care and skill to apply these
methods. Still, the more you practice, the more you will be able to under-
stand arguments.

Read the following passage. Then, for each of the numbered expressions,
either answer the corresponding question or label the main argumentative
move, if any, using these abbreviations:

M = argument marker

A = assuring term

G = guarding term

D = discounting term

E = negative evaluative term

E+ = positive evaluative term

R = rhetorical device

N = none of the above

This letter to the editor appeared in The Dartmouth on September 23, 1992,
although references to the author’s college have been removed. The author
was president of the student assembly and a member of a single-sex frater-
nity at the time.

GREEKS SHOULD BE CO-ED

by Andrew Beebe

For some time now, people have been asking the question “Why should the
Greek [fraternity and sorority] system go co-ed?” To them, I pose an answer [1]
in a question, “Why not?“ [2]

Learning in college extends beyond the classrooms, onto the athletic fields, into the
art studios, and into our social environs. [3] In fact [4], some [5] say that most [6] of
what we learn at college comes from interaction with people and ideas during
time spent outside of the lecture halls. The concept of segregating students in
their social and residential environments by gender directly contradicts the
ideals [7] of a college experience. This is exactly [8] what the fraternity and
sorority system does.

With all the benefits [9] of a small, closely-bonded group, the poten-
tial for strong social education would seem obvious [10]. But [11] is it fair [12]
for us to remove the other half of our community from that education? [13]
In many colleges, this voluntary segregation exists in fraternities and
sororities.

Exercise I

91

An Extended Example

From the planning of a party or involvement in student activities to the
sharing of living and recreational space, the fraternity and sorority system is a
social environment ripe [14] with educational potential [15]. The idea that
women and men would receive as complete an experience from these environ-
ments while virtually [16] separated is implausible [17].

But [18] what do women and men learn from one another that they don’t already
know? [19] Problems in gender relations between all ages prove [20] that our so-
ciety is plagued by gender-based prejudice [21]. Since [22] prejudice is the ignorance
of one group by another [23], it will best be addressed by education. The ques-
tion then [24] becomes: Which way is best to educate one another?

Sexism, homophobia, date rape, eating disorders, and other social problems
[25] are often [26] connected to gender-relation issues. As campus experience
shows [27], we have a long way to go in combating these problems. Defenders
of fraternities and sororities may [28] argue that they do not, solely by nature
of being single sex, promote sexism or other prejudices. But [29], if we can rec-
ognize that these problems exist in our society, it is not important to find the
blame, but [30] rather to offer a solution. It is clear [31] that separating people
by gender is not the right [32] way to promote better [33] understanding be-
tween the sexes. To the contrary, bringing different people together is the only
way prejudice, no matter what the cause (or result) may be [34], can be overcome.

Acknowledging that breaking down walls of separation may [35] help foster
better understanding, it is important to look at what might [36] change for the
worse. There would be some [37] obvious [38] logistical changes in rush, pledg-
ing, relationships with national organization, and house leadership. But [39]
where are the real consequences? [40] Men could [41] still cultivate strong bonds
with other men. Women could [42] still bond with other women. The difference
is that there would be a well-defined [43] environment where men and women
could [44] create strong, lasting bonds and friendships between one another.

There are many more benefits [45] to a co-ed system than there are sacri-
fices [46]. Men and women could share the responsibilities of running what
is now a predominantly [47] male-controlled social structure. First-year men
and women could interact with older students in a social environment be-
yond the classroom or the dining halls. People in a co-ed system could find a
strong support group that extends beyond their own sex. With these advan-
tages [48] and more, it is clear [49] that the all-co-ed system offers everything
found in a single-sex organization and more. Although [50] there are some [51]
minor sacrifices to be made, they are insignificant in comparison to the gain
[52] for all.

College is the last place we want to isolate ourselves. The entire idea of the
“holistic education” is based on [53] expanding our knowledge, not separating
ourselves from one another. Our fraternity and sorority system includes many
[54] different types of students. So [55] why should some houses refuse women
simply because [56] they are women? Why do some houses refuse men solely
because [57] they are men? The only solution is desegregation of the fraternity
and sorority system. After all [58], when it comes to challenging one another to
learn, what are we afraid of? [59]

(continued)

92

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

QUESTIONS:

[1]: Is this sentence an explicit performative?

[2]: Explain the difference between asking “Why?” and asking “Why
not?” in this context.

[3]: Why does the author begin with this point?

[4]–[12]: Write labels.

[13]: What is the expected answer to this rhetorical question?

[14]: What kind of rhetorical device is this? What is its point?

[15]–[18]: Write labels.

[19]: Who is supposed to be asking this question?

[20]–[22]: Write labels.

[23]: What is the point of this definition?

[24]–[33]: Write labels.

[34]: Why does this author add this dependent clause?

[35]–[39]: Write labels.

[40]: What does this question imply in this context?

[41]–[58]: Write labels.

[59]: What is the expected answer to this rhetorical question?

Read the following passage from The Washington Post (November 25, 1997),
page A19. Then, for each of the numbered expressions, label the main argu-
mentative move, if any, using the same abbreviations as in Exercise I:

A PIECE OF “GOD’S HANDIWORK”

by Robert Redford

Just over a year ago, President Clinton created the Grand Staircase-Escalante Na-
tional Monument to [1] protect [2] once and for all some [3] of Utah’s extraordinary
red rock canyon country. In response to [4] plans of the Dutch company Andalex to
mine coal on the Kaiparowits Plateau, President Clinton used his authority under
the Antiquities Act to establish the new monument, setting aside for protection
what he described as “some of the most remarkable land in the world.” I couldn’t
agree more. [5] For over two decades, many have fought battle after battle [6] to keep
mining conglomerates from despoiling [7] the unique treasures [8] of this stunning
red rock canyon country. Now [9], we thought at least some of it was safe.

Not so. Shocking [10] as it sounds, Clinton’s Bureau of Land Management
(BLM) has approved oil drilling within the monument. BLM has given Conoco
Inc., a subsidiary of the corporate giant DuPont, permission to drill for oil and

Exercise II

93

An Extended Example

gas in the heart [11] of the new monument. You may [12] wonder, as I do, how can
this happen? [13] Wasn’t the whole purpose of creating the monument to
preserve its colorful cliffs, sweeping arches and other extraordinary resources
[14] from large-scale mineral development? Didn’t the president say he was sav-
ing [15] these lands from mining companies for our children and grandchildren?

The BLM says its hands are tied. [16] Why? Because [17] these lands were set aside
subject to “valid existing rights,” and Conoco has a lease that gives it the right to
drill. Sure [18] Conoco has a lease—more than one, in fact [19]—but [20] those leases
were originally issued without sufficient environmental study or public input. As
a result [21], none of them conveyed a valid right to drill. What’s more [22], in decid-
ing to issue a permit to drill now, the BLM did not conduct a full analysis of the en-
vironmental impacts of drilling in these incomparable lands, but instead [23]
determined there would be no significant environmental harm on the basis of an
abbreviated review that didn’t even look at drilling on the other federal leases.

Sounds like [24] Washington double-speak [25] to me. I’ve spent considerable
time on these extraordinary lands for years, and I know [26] that an oil rig in
their midst would have a major impact. What’s more [27], Conoco wants to drill
a well to find oil. Inevitably [28], more rigs, more roads, new pipelines, toxic [29]
wastes and bright lights would follow to get the oil out. The BLM couldn’t see
this, but [30] the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency did. Both of those agencies recognized [31] the devastating [32] ef-
fects extensive oil drilling would have on this area and urged the BLM to refuse
to allow it, in order to [33] protect the monument.

Maybe [34] the problem [35] comes from giving management responsibility
for this monument to the BLM. This is the BLM’s first national monument;
almost [36] all the others are managed by the National Park Service. The Park
Service’s mission is to protect the resources [37] under its care while the bureau
has always sought to accommodate economic uses of those under its. Even so
[38], the BLM seemed [39] to be getting off to a good [40] start by enlisting broad
[41] public involvement in developing a management plan for the area. Yet
[42] the agency’s decision to allow oil drilling in the monument completely un-
dercuts [43] this process just as it is beginning.

What we’re talking about is, in the words of President Clinton, a small
piece of “God’s handiwork.” Almost [44] 41/2 million acres of irreplaceable red
rock wilderness remain outside the monument. Let us at least protect what is
within it. The many roadless [45] areas within the monument should [46] remain
so—protected as wilderness. The monument’s designation means little if [47] a
pattern of exploitation is allowed to continue.

Environmentalists—including the Southern Utah Wilderness Alliance, the
Natural Resources Defense Council, and the Wilderness Society—appealed
BLM’s decision to the Interior Department’s Board of Land Appeals. This ap-
peal, however [48], was rejected earlier this month. This is a terrible mistake [49].
We shouldn’t be drilling in our national monuments. Period. As President
Clinton said when dedicating the new monument, “Sometimes progress is
measured in mastering frontiers, but sometimes [50] we must measure progress
in protecting frontiers for our children and children to come.”

Allowing drilling to go forward in the Grand Staircase-Escalante Monu-
ment would permanently stain what might otherwise have been a defining
legacy of the Clinton presidency.

94

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

Read the following advertisement from Equal Exchange (Copyright © 1997,
1998, 1999). For each of the numbered expressions, label the main argumenta-
tive move, if any, using the same abbreviations as in Exercise I. Then state
what you take to be the central conclusions and premises. What criticisms, if
any, do you have of this argument?

It may [1] be a little early in the morning to bring this up, but [2] if [3] you buy

coffee from large corporations [4], you are inadvertently maintaining the system

which keeps small farmers poor [5] while [6] lining the pockets [7] of rich cor-

porations. By [8] choosing Equal Exchange coffee, you can [9] help to make a

change. We believe in trading directly with small farming cooperatives at mutu-

ally agreed-upon prices with a fixed minimum rate. Then [10], should [11] the cof-

fee market decline, the farmers are still guaranteed a fair [12] price. So [13] have a

cup of Equal Exchange Coffee and make a small farmer happy [14]. Of course [15],

your decision to buy Equal Exchange need not be completely altruistic. For [16]

we take as much pride in refining the taste of our gourmet [17] coffees as [18] we

do in helping [19] the farmers who produce them. For [20] more information about

Equal Exchange or to order our line of gourmet, organic, and shade-grown coffee

directly, call 1 800 406 8289.

Exercise III

From Equal Exchange. Advertisement. Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999.

95

An Extended Example

This advertisement appeared in various national magazines in 2008. Circle
and label each of its key argumentative terms. State its central premises and
conclusion, and then put them into standard form. Is the result a good argu-
ment? Why or why not?

Exercise IV

96

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

Provide a close analysis of the following passages by circling and labeling each
of the key argumentative terms. Then state what you take to be the central con-
clusions and premises. What criticisms, if any, do you have of each argument?

PASSAGE 1

The following encomium was written by an art critic for the New York Times, in
which this review appeared (June 6, 1992, pp. 1, 31). If you are not familiar
with Eakins’s work, looking at some reproductions might help you appreciate
this argument. You might also look up the rest of the essay, as only a small part
is reproduced here.

IS EAKINS OUR GREATEST PAINTER?

by John Russell

There never was a painter like Thomas Eakins, who was born in 1844, died in
1916, and is the subject of a great exhibition that has just opened in the
Philadelphia Museum of Art. It is not simply that in his hands painting be-
came an exact science, so that if he paints two men rowing on a river, we can
tell the month, day, and the hour that they passed under a certain bridge. We
admire Eakins for that, but we prize him above all for the new dimension of
moral awareness that he brought to American painting.

The question that he asks is not “What do we look like?” It is “What have
we done to one another?” And it is because he gives that question so full and
so convincing an answer that we ask ourselves whether Thomas Eakins was
not the greatest American painter who ever lived. Even if the question strikes
us as meaningless, we find it difficult after an exhibition such as this to think
of a convincing rival. . . .

PASSAGE 2

The following passage is an excerpt from an essay that appeared in the Boston
Review (vol. 7, no. 5 [October 1982], pp. 13–19), which is funded by the National
Endowment for the Humanities, a government agency that supports scholarship
and the arts. Its author was professor of drama at Stanford University.

BEYOND THE WASTELAND: WHAT AMERICAN
TV CAN LEARN FROM THE BBC

by Martin Esslin

What are the advantages and disadvantages of a public TV service as compared
to a completely commercial system? One of the dangers inherent in a public
service system is paternalism: Some authority decides what the viewers should

Exercise V

97

An Extended Example

see and hear simply on the basis of what it arbitrarily feels would be good for
them. Yet in countries where a highly developed public system exists alongside
a commercial one, that danger is minimized because of the market pressure on
the commercial system to give its audience what it wants. Indeed, in a dual sys-
tem the danger is often that the public service may be tempted to ignore its
stated purpose to serve the public interest and instead pander to mass prefer-
ences because of a sense of competition with the commercial networks.

Another problem that plagues public TV service is that it may run short of
money, which in turn can increase its dependence on the government. The ex-
tent of government dependence is intimately connected to how the public
broadcasting service is financed. In West Germany and Italy, for example, the
public broadcasting service takes advertising, but it is usually confined to a
clearly delimited area of the network’s programming. In Britain the BBC . . .
relies entirely on its annual license fee, which guarantees it a steady income
and allows long-term planning. In periods of severe inflation, the license-fee
system leaves the BBC in a dangerous position vis-a-vis the government, and
the network’s income may decline in real terms. In countries where the public
broadcasting service is financed by an annual allocation in the national
budget, long-term planning becomes more difficult and the dependence on the
government is far greater. Nevertheless, public TV services financed on that
pattern, such as the ABC in Australia and the CBC in Canada, provide pro-
grams of high quality that are genuine alternatives to the fare on the numer-
ous popular and prosperous commercial networks. In Canada, this includes
programs from the three commercial American networks.

One of the most important positive features of services under public con-
trol is their ability to provide planned, high-quality viewing alternatives. The
BBC, for example, has two television channels, BBC 1 and BBC 2. The program
planning on these two networks is closely coordinated so that highly popular
material on one channel is regularly paired with more specialized or demand-
ing fare on the other. And though the percentage of the audience that tunes in
to the challenging programming may be small, the scale of magnitude opera-
tive in the mass media is such that even a small percentage of the viewing au-
dience represents a very large number of people indeed. A popular dramatic
series on BBC 1, for instance, may reach an audience of 20 percent of the adult
population of Britain—about ten million people. A play by Shakespeare on
BBC 2 that may attract an audience of only 5 percent nonetheless reaches
about two-and-a-half million people—a substantial audience for a work of art.
It would take a theater with a seating capacity of 1,000 about seven years, or
2,500 performances, to reach an equivalent number of people! Nor should it be
overlooked that this audience will include people whose influence may be
greater in the long run than that of the ten million who watched the entertain-
ment program. In this system, no segment of the viewing public is forced to
compromise with any other. In our example, not only did BBC 1 provide a
popular entertainment program as an alternative to the Shakespeare, but, in
addition, the commercial network offered still another popular program. By
careful—perhaps paternalistic—planning the general audience satisfaction
was substantially increased.

(continued)

98

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

One of the difficulties of the American situation is that the size of the
United States favors decentralization and the fragmentation of initiatives for
the more ambitious programming of the public service network. A revitalized
PBS would need a strong central governing body that could allocate to local
producing stations the substantial sums of money they require for ambitious
projects—projects that could compete with the best offerings of the rich com-
mercial competitors.

Using existing satellite technology, such a truly national network of public
service television could be made available to the entire country. If a public
service television organization was able to provide simultaneous, alternative
programming along the lines of BBC 1 and BBC 2, the cultural role of televi-
sion in the United States could be radically improved, and the most powerful
communication medium in history could realize its positive potential to in-
form, educate, and provide exposure to diverse cultural ideas.

PASSAGE 3

This article was published in the New York Times (January 15, 2004, p. A33).

LIFE (AND DEATH) ON MARS

by Paul Davies

Sydney, Australia—President Bush’s announcement yesterday that the United
States will soon be pointing its rockets toward Mars will doubtless be greeted
with delight by space scientists. . . . And yet the scientific community’s enthu-
siasm will surely be tempered by skepticism. Scientists, it’s worth remember-
ing, rejoiced when President George H. W. Bush unveiled a Mars project in
1989. The same scientists then despaired when the plan quickly evaporated
amid spiraling projected costs and shifting priorities. . . .

Why is going to Mars so expensive? Mainly it’s the distance from Earth. At
its closest point in orbit, Mars lies 35 million miles away from us, necessitating
a journey of many months, whereas reaching the Moon requires just a few
days’ flight. On top of this, Mars has a surface gravity that, though only 38
percent of Earth’s, is much greater than the Moon’s. It takes a lot of fuel to
blast off Mars and get back home. If the propellant has to be transported there
from Earth, costs of a launching soar. . . .

There is, however, an obvious way to slash the costs and bring Mars within
reach of early manned exploration. The answer lies with a one-way mission.

Most people react with instinctive horror at the suggestion. I recall my own
sense of discomfort when I met an aging American scientist who claimed to
have trained for a one-way mission to the Moon in the pre-Apollo days. And
in the case of the barren Moon, that reaction is largely justified. There is little
on the Moon to sustain human life. Mars, however, is a different story. Because
of the planet’s relatively benign environment, it is theoretically able to support
a permanent human presence. If provided with the right equipment, astronauts

99

An Extended Example

would have a chance of living there for years. A one-way trip to Mars need not
mean a quick demise.

Every two years the orbit of Mars creates a window of opportunity to send
fresh supplies at a reasonable cost. An initial colony of four astronauts, equipped
with a small nuclear reactor and a couple of rover vehicles, could make their
own oxygen, grow some food and even initiate building projects using local raw
materials. Supplemented by food shipments, medical supplies and replacement
gadgets from home, the colony could be sustained indefinitely. To be sure, the
living conditions would be uncomfortable, but the colonists would have the op-
portunity to do ground-breaking scientific work and blaze a trail that would en-
sure them a permanent place in the annals of discovery.

Obviously this strategy carries significant risks in addition to those faced by
a conventional Mars mission. Major equipment failure could leave the colony
without enough power, oxygen or food. An accident might kill or disable an as-
tronaut who provided some vital expertise. A supply drop might fail, condemn-
ing the colonists to starve in a very public way. Even if nothing went wrong, the
astronauts’ lives would certainly be shortened by the harsh conditions. . . .

Would it be right to ask people to accept such conditions for the sake of sci-
ence, or even humanity? The answer has to be yes. We already expect certain
people to take significant risks on our behalf, such as special forces operatives
or test pilots. Some people gleefully dice with death in the name of sport or ad-
venture. Dangerous occupations that reduce life expectancy through exposure
to hazardous conditions or substances are commonplace. . . .

Who would put their hand up for a one-way ticket to Mars? I work among
people who study astrobiology and planetary science, and there is no lack of
eager young scientists who would sign up right now, given half a chance. But
it would make more sense to pick mature, older scientists with reduced life ex-
pectancy. Other considerations, like weight, emotional stability and scientific
credentials, would of course have to be factored in.

The early outpost wouldn’t be left to wither and die. Rather, it would form
the basis for a much more ambitious colonization program. Over the years
new equipment and additional astronauts would be sent to join the original
crew. In time, the colony would grow to the point of being self-sustaining.

When this stage was reached, humanity would have a precious insurance
policy against catastrophe at home. During the next millennium there is a
significant chance that civilization on Earth will be destroyed by an asteroid,
a killer plague or a global war. A Martian colony could keep the flame of civ-
ilization and culture alive until Earth could be reverse-colonized from Mars.

Would NASA entertain a one-way policy for human Mars exploration?
Probably not. But other, more adventurous space agencies in Europe or Asia
might. The next giant leap for mankind won’t come without risk.

PASSAGE 4

The following letter to the editor was written by Charlie Buttrey, a lawyer, and
published in the White River Junction, Vermont, Valley News on Wednesday,
August 29, 2001.

(continued)

100

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

THREE FALLACIES ABOUT GUN RIGHTS

by Charlie Buttrey

In the never-ending debate on these pages over gun ownership, those who fa-
vor expansive gun rights appear to have adopted one (or more) of three lines
of argument:

The Constitution protects the individual right to gun ownership.

The crime rate in Great Britain (where gun ownership is strictly controlled)
is “skyrocketing.”

In colonial days, the vast majority of people owned guns.

Each premise, however, is erroneous.
In our constitutional system, the ultimate arbiter of what the Constitution

says is the Supreme Court. One may not agree with its rulings (for example,
many people do not approve of its ruling extending First Amendment protec-
tions to flag burning or Fourth Amendment protections to the decision to ter-
minate a pregnancy), but, under our system of government, once the Supreme
Court has ruled a certain way, that ruling stands as the law of the land. On the
issue of whether the Second Amendment encompasses an individual’s right to
possess firearms, the Supreme Court has spoken. And the answer is that it
does not. Like it or not, that is the law of the land. It is true that the state con-
stitutions in both Vermont and New Hampshire provide for the protection of
individual gun ownership. In neither instance, however, is such a right ab-
solute. For example, the New Hampshire Supreme Court has ruled that a law
prohibiting felons from possessing firearms is not unconstitutional. Similarly,
a Vermont law prohibiting people from carrying loaded firearms in their vehi-
cles was held to be permissible.

The notion that Great Britain’s crime rate is skyrocketing is belied by the
facts. British government statistics reveal a steady increase in most crime cate-
gories between 1980 and 1995 and a gradual leveling off in the last five years.
Of course, gun-related crimes are minuscule when compared with those in the
United States. Guns are used in robberies in Great Britain less than 5 percent
of the time. And from 1980 to 1999, annual gun-related homicides in Britain
ranged from a low of 7 to a high of 42. In comparison, according to U.S. Bureau
of Justice statistics, an average of 10,000 gun-related homicides occurred each
year in this country during the same period.

Finally, the suggestion that our colonial forebears were almost universally
armed has been thoroughly repudiated. In his recent book, Arming America,
Emory University historian Michael Bellesiles reveals that the average colonial
citizen had virtually no access to or training in the use of firearms, and that the
few guns that did exist were kept under strict control. The fewer than 10 per-
cent of Americans who did possess guns in the years prior to the Civil War
were generally neglectful of the weapons and those guns were expensive,
clumsy, unreliable, and hard to maintain.

There may be sound policy grounds that can be advanced in favor of rela-
tively unrestricted gun ownership. Those arguments should be made, how-
ever, from a perspective of historical truth and legal accuracy.

101

An Extended Example

PASSAGE 5

The following extract comes from Compulsory Mis-Education and the Community
of Scholars (New York: Vintage Books, 1966). Copyright © 1962, 1964 by Paul
Goodman. Used by permission of Random House, Inc.

A PROPOSAL TO ABOLISH GRADING

by Paul Goodman

Let half a dozen of the prestigious universities—Chicago, Stanford, the Ivy
League—abolish grading, and use testing only and entirely for pedagogic pur-
poses as teachers see fit.

Anyone who knows the frantic temper of the present schools will understand
the transvaluation of values that would be effected by this modest innovation.
For most of the students, the competitive grade has come to be the essence. The
naïve teacher points to the beauty of the subject and the ingenuity of the re-
search; the shrewd student asks if he is responsible for that on the final exam.

Let me at once dispose of an objection whose unanimity is quite fascinating.
I think that the great majority of professors agree that grading hinders teaching
and creates a bad spirit, going as far as cheating and plagiarizing. I have before
me the collection of essays, Examining in Harvard College, and this is the consen-
sus. It is uniformly asserted, however, that the grading is inevitable; for how
else will the graduate schools, the foundations, the corporations know whom to
accept, reward, hire? How will the talent scouts know whom to tap? By testing
the applicants, of course, according to the specific task-requirements of the in-
ducting institution, just as applicants for the Civil Service or for licenses in
medicine, law, and architecture are tested. Why should Harvard professors do
the testing for corporations and graduate schools? . . .

There are several good reasons for testing, and kinds of test. But if the aim
is to discover weakness, what is the point of down-grading and punishing,
and thereby inviting the student to conceal his weakness, by faking and
bulling, if not cheating? The natural conclusion of [education] is the insight it-
self, not a grade for having had it. For the important purpose of placement, if
one can establish in the student the belief that one is testing not to grade and
making invidious comparisons but for his own advantage, the student should
normally seek his own level, where he is challenged and yet capable, rather
than trying to get by. If the student dares to accept himself as he is, a teacher’s
grade is a crude instrument compared with a student’s self-awareness. But it
is rare in our universities that students are encouraged to notice objectively
their vast confusion. Unlike Socrates, our teachers rely on power-drives rather
than shame and ingenuous idealism.

Many students are lazy, so teachers try to goad or threaten them by grad-
ing. In the long run this must do more harm than good. Laziness is a character-
defense. It may be a way of avoiding learning, in order to protect the conceit
that one is already perfect. . . . It may be a way of avoiding just the risk of

(continued)

102

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

failing and being down-graded. Sometimes it is a way of politely saying, “I
won’t.” But since it is the authoritarian grown-up demands that have created
such attitudes in the first place, why repeat the trauma? There comes a time
when we must treat people as adults, laziness and all. It is one thing coura-
geously to fire a do-nothing out of your class; it is quite another thing to eval-
uate him with a lordly F.

Most important of all, it is often obvious that balking in doing the work,
especially among bright young people who get to great universities, means
exactly what it says: The work does not suit me, not this subject, or not at this
time, or not in this school, or not in school altogether. The student might not
be bookish; he might be school-tired; perhaps his development ought now to
take another direction. Yet, unfortunately, if such a student is intelligent and is
not sure of himself, he can be bullied into passing, and this obscures every-
thing. My hunch is that I am describing a common situation. What a grim
waste of young life and teacherly effort! Such a student will retain nothing of
what he has “passed” in. Sometimes he must get mononucleosis to tell his
story and be believed.

And, ironically, the converse is also probably commonly true. A student
flunks and is mechanically weeded out, who is really ready and eager to learn
in a scholastic setting, but he has not quite caught on. A good teacher can rec-
ognize the situation, but the computer wreaks its will.

PASSAGE 6

The following op-ed appeared in The Dartmouth on April 30, 2007. The author
was a college student at the time.

MAKE IT 18

by Ben Selznick

Did you get wasted this weekend? Are you under the age of 21? Don’t fret, my
underage friends, you are not alone. Across America, hundreds of thousands
of underage men and women enjoyed booze this weekend—illegally. In re-
sponse to a recent news article in The Dartmouth (“Ex-Middlebury president:
lower drinking age to 18,” April 25), I would like to agree with the former
president of Middlebury College that states should try once again lowering
the drinking age to 18.

We must first get our facts straight. The drinking age is not set by the fed-
eral government; it is set by the states. Currently, each state has its law set at
21. However, this figure neither necessarily reflects research and careful con-
sideration nor appeals to constituents. Instead, it reflects the fact that drinking
age became tied to highway funds somewhere along the way. Because of this,
were a state to lower their drinking age, they would also have to significantly

103

An Extended Example

raise taxes to offset the lost highway funds from the government. This hand-
tying is asinine. If the drinking age is a state decision, it should be made by
states independently of funds for highways. Before any progress can be made,
lawmakers must sever this illogical connection.

Were drinking age to become a true state consideration, states could engage
in open debate about the issue. Several arguments could then be made in
favor of lowering the age to 18.

First: A fair portion of drinkers between the ages of 18 and 21 are at colleges
where alcohol can be easily obtained. Just think about this weekend and all the
people without wristbands—because they forgot their IDs at home I’m sure—
who were able to obtain alcohol. This easy availability leads to a very danger-
ous game of cat and mouse between colleges and their students. In this game,
colleges know full well that underage drinking exists. Students know that they
are drinking underage and therefore illegally. And yet, the game continues
with colleges trying to make sure that no alcohol-related tragedies occur. This
game isn’t the fault of colleges, nor is it the fault of students. Instead, it is the
fault of our law, which classifies part of this college-age set as “underage” and
the rest as “of age.” When it comes to colleges, our law simply doesn’t reflect
reality. It must therefore be changed.

Second: At present, keeping the drinking age at 21 prevents America from
having an open and honest conception of alcohol the way, say, continental
Europe does. In France, where the drinking age is 16, alcohol is understood as a
complement to a meal as well as an intoxicant. Though people certainly drink to
get drunk, the concept of binge drinking beer through a funnel is seen as a bar-
baric abuse of alcohol. More importantly, France’s policy reflects the understand-
ing that people are going to drink alcohol whether the activity is legal or not.
America stubbornly refuses to accept this fact. Perhaps it is our long history of
teetotalers, prohibition and general dislike of alcohol by various groups. What-
ever our past, our present situation is one where binge drinking is the norm and
alcohol education to college students reeks of being too little too late.

Third: The main concern against lowering the drinking age comes from
Mothers Against Drunk Driving. MADD has statistics to back up their claim
that a lower drinking age yields more drunk driving accidents. But if the
drinking age were lowered and then supplemented with honest, not pander-
ing, alcohol education programs in schools, perhaps over time our approach
towards alcohol as a culture would change.

America has the highest drinking age of any country on Earth. Although in-
tended to protect us, in the end this high barrier leads to unsafe abuse of alco-
hol nationwide. States must engage in true conversation with their
constituents and consider arguments from frustrated college administrators as
well as MADD.

In the end, a state may conclude that 21 is a good age. But they may also
conclude that lowering the drinking age is a practical solution to a pressing
problem. After all, by changing the definition of “underage drinking,” we
could alleviate its negative effects.

104

CHAPTER 4 ■ The Art of Close Analys is

Describe the purpose of, intended audience for, and standpoint in each of the
arguments in Exercises I-VI.

Exercise VII

Practice close analysis some more by doing close analyses of:

1. one of the passages in the Discussion Questions at the end of Chapter 1,

2. one of the articles in Part V of this book,

3. an editorial or advertisement from your local paper,

4. something that you read for another course,

5. a lecture by your professor in another course (or this course!), or

6. a paper by you or by a friend in another course.

Exercise VI

1. If, as some social critics have maintained, the pervasive nature of television
has created generation upon generation of intellectually passive
automatons, why study close analysis?

2. Television commercials are often arguments in miniature. Recount several
recent television commercials and identify the argumentative devices at
work.

Discussion Questions

DEEP ANALYSIS

Arguments in everyday life rarely occur in isolation. They usually come in the mid-

dle of much verbiage that is not essential to the argument itself. Everyday arguments

are also rarely complete. Essential premises are often omitted. Many such omissions

are tolerable because we are able to convey a great deal of information indirectly by

conversational implication. Nevertheless, to give a critical evaluation of an argu-

ment, it is necessary to isolate the argument from extraneous surroundings, to make

explicit unstated parts of the argument, and to arrange them in a systematic order.

This puts us in a better position to decide on the soundness or unsoundness of the

argument in question. This chapter will develop methods for reconstructing argu-

ments so that they may be understood and evaluated in a fair and systematic fashion.

These methods will then be illustrated by applying them to a disagreement that

depends on fundamental principles.

GETTING DOWN TO BASICS

To understand an argument, it is useful to put it into standard form. As we
saw in Chapter 3, this is done simply by writing down the numbered prem-
ises, drawing a line, adding “ ” followed by the conclusion, and indicating
which premises are supposed to be reasons for the conclusion. That is all we
write down in standard form, but there is often a lot more in the passage
that includes the argument. It is not uncommon for the stated argument to
stretch over several pages, whereas the basic argument has only a few prem-
ises and a single conclusion.

One reason for this is that people often go off on tangents. They start to
argue for one claim, but that reminds them of something else, so they talk
about that for a while; then they finally return to their original topic. One ex-
ample occurred during the Republican presidential candidates’ debate on
October 9, 2007, when Governor Mitt Romney said,

. . . We’re also going to have to get serious about treating Ahmadinejad [the
President of Iran] like the rogue and buffoon that he is. And it was outrageous
for the United Nations to invite him to come to this country. It was outrageous
for Columbia to invite him to speak at their university. This is a person who
denied the Holocaust, a person who has spoken about genocide, is seeking the

5

105

106

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

means to carry it out. And it is unacceptable to this country to allow that individ-
ual to have control of launching a nuclear weapon. And so we will take the
action necessary to keep that from happening . . .

Romney’s criticisms of the United Nations and Columbia are not really part
of his argument, because they do not support his conclusion that the United
States needs to keep nuclear weapons out of the hands of Ahmadinejad.

Such tangents can be completely irrelevant or unnecessary, and they
often make it hard to follow the argument. Some people even go off on tan-
gents on purpose to confuse their opponents and hide gaping holes in their
arguments. The irrelevant diversion is sometimes called a red herring (after a
man who, when pursued by hounds, threw them off his scent by dragging a
red herring across his trail). More generally, this maneuver might be called
the trick of excess verbiage. It violates the conversational rules of Quantity,
Relevance, or Manner, which were discussed in Chapter 2.

To focus on the argument itself, we need to look carefully at each parti-
cular sentence to determine whether it affects the validity or strength of the
argument or the truth of its premises. If we decide that a sentence is not nec-
essary for the argument, then we should not add it when we list the prem-
ises and conclusion in standard form. Of course, we have to be careful not to
omit anything that would improve the argument, but we also do not want
to include too much, because irrelevant material simply makes it more diffi-
cult to analyze and evaluate the argument.

Another source of extra material is repetition. Consider Senator John
Edwards’s response to a question about the Defense of Marriage Act in the
Democratic presidential candidates’ debate on January 22, 2004:

These are issues that should be left [to the states]. Massachusetts, for example,
has just made a decision—the Supreme Court at least has made a decision—that
embraces the notion of gay marriage. I think these are decisions the states should
have the power to make. And the Defense of Marriage Act, as I understand it—
you’re right, I wasn’t there when it was passed—but as I understand it, would
have taken away that power. And I think that’s wrong—that power should not
be taken away from the states. . . .

Now compare:

These are issues that should be left to the states.

These are decisions that states should have the power to make.

That power should not be taken away from the states.

All three of these sentences say pretty much the same thing, so we do not
need them all.

Why do people repeat themselves like this? Sometimes they just forget that
they already made the point before, but often repetition accomplishes a goal.
Good speakers regularly repeat their main points to remind their audience of
what was said earlier. Repetition is subtler when it is used to explain some-
thing. A point can often be clarified by restating it in a new way. Repetition

107

Gett ing Down to Bas ics

can also function as a kind of assurance, as an expression of confidence, or as
an indication of how important a point is. Some writers seem to think that if
they say something often enough, people will come to believe it. Whether or
not this trick works, if two sentences say equivalent things, there is no need to
list both sentences when the argument is put into standard form. Listing the
same premise twice will not make the argument any better from a logical
point of view.

Sometimes guarding terms can also be dropped. If I say, “I think Miranda
is at home, so we can probably meet her there,” this argument might be rep-
resented in standard form thus:

(1) I think Miranda is at home.

(2) We can probably meet her there. (from 1)

This is misleading. My thoughts are not what make us able to meet Miranda
at home. My thoughts do not even increase the probability that she is at
home or that we can meet her there. It is the fact that Miranda is at home that
provides a reason for the conclusion. Thus, it is clearer to drop the guarding
phrase (“I think”) when putting the argument into standard form. But you
have to be careful, for not all guarding phrases can be dropped. When I say
“We can probably meet her there,” I might not want to say simply, “We can
meet her there.” After all, even if she is there now, we might not be able to
get there before she leaves. Then to drop “probably” from my conclusion
would distort what I meant to say and would make my argument more
questionable, so you should not drop that guarding term if you want to un-
derstand my argument charitably and accurately.

Here’s another example: If a friend says that you ought to buckle your
seat belt because you could have an accident, it would distort her argument
to drop the guarding term (“could”), because she is not claiming that you
definitely will have an accident, or even that you probably will have one.
The chance of an accident is significant enough to show that you ought to
buckle your seat belt, so this guarding term should be kept when the argu-
ment is put into standard form.

It is also possible to drop assuring terms in some cases. Suppose someone
says, “You obviously cannot play golf in Alaska in January, so there’s no
point in bringing your clubs.” There is no need to keep the assuring term
(“obviously”) in the premise. It might even be misleading, because the issue
is whether the premise is true, not whether it is obvious. The argument can-
not be refuted by showing that, even though you in fact cannot play golf in
Alaska in January, this is not obvious, since there might be indoor golf
courses. In contrast, assuring terms cannot be dropped in some other cases.
For example, if someone argues, “We know that poverty causes crime, be-
cause many studies have shown that it does,” then the assuring terms (“We
know that . . .” and “studies have shown that . . .”) cannot be dropped with-
out turning the argument into an empty shell: “Poverty causes crime, be-
cause it does.” The point of this argument is to cite the sources of our

108

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

knowledge (“studies”) and to show that we have knowledge instead of just
a hunch. That point is lost if we drop the assuring terms.

Unfortunately, there is no mechanical method for determining when
guarding or assuring terms and phrases can be dropped, or whether certain
sentences are unnecessary tangents or repetition. We simply have to look
closely at what is being said and think hard about what is needed to support
the conclusion. It takes great skill, care, and insight to pare an argument
down to its essential core without omitting anything that would make it bet-
ter. And that is the goal: If you want to understand someone’s argument,
you should try to make that argument as good as it can be. You should in-
terpret it charitably. Distorting and oversimplifying other people’s argu-
ments might be fun at times and can win points in debates, but it cannot
help us understand or learn from other people’s arguments.

In the quotation above, is it fair to drop “I think” from the start of Edwards’s
sentences “I think these are decisions the states should have the power to make”
and “I think that’s wrong—that power should not be taken away from the
states“? Why or why not? Is this phrase “I think” used for guarding or assuring
or some other purpose in this context? Explain why Edwards adds these words.

Discussion Question

Put the following arguments into standard form and omit anything that does
not affect the validity of the argument or the truth of its premises.

1. Philadelphia is rich in history, but it is not now the capital of the United
States, so the United States Congress must meet somewhere else.

2. Not everybody whom you invited is going to come to your party. Some of
them won’t come. So this room should be big enough.

3. I know that my wife is at home, since I just called her there and spoke to
her. We talked about our dinner plans.

4. I’m not sure, but Joseph is probably Jewish. Hence, he is a rabbi if he is a
member of the clergy.

5. Some students could not concentrate on the lecture, because they did not
eat lunch before class, although I did.

6. The most surprising news of all is that Johnson dropped out of the race
because he thought his opponent was better qualified than he was for
the office.

7. The Democrat is likely to win, since experts agree that more women sup-
port him.

8. It seems to me that married people are happier, so marriage must be a
good thing, or at least I think so.

Exercise I

109

Dissect ing the Argument

CLARIFYING CRUCIAL TERMS

After the essential premises and conclusion are isolated, we often need to clar-
ify these claims before we can begin our logical analysis. The goal here is not
perfect clarity, for there probably is no such thing. It is, however, often neces-
sary to eliminate ambiguity and reduce vagueness before we can give an ar-
gument a fair assessment. In particular, it is usually helpful to specify the
referents of pronouns, because such references can depend on a context that is
changed when the argument is put into standard form. “You are wrong” or
“That’s wrong” can be perfectly clear when said in response to a particular
claim, but they lose their clarity when they are moved into the conclusion of
an argument in standard form. We also often need to specify whether a claim
is about all, most, many, or just some of its subject matter. When people say,
“Blues music is sad,” do they mean all, most, some, or typical blues music?

Another common problem arises when someone argues like this:

You should just say “No” to drugs, because drugs are dangerous.

What counts as a drug? What about penicillin or aspirin? The speaker might
seem to mean “drugs like cocaine,” but “like” them in which respects? Maybe
what is meant is “addictive drugs,” but what about alcohol and nicotine
(which are often addictive)? You might think that the speaker means “danger-
ous drugs,” but then the premise becomes empty: “Dangerous drugs are dan-
gerous.” Or maybe the idea is “illegal drugs,” but that seems to assume that
the law is correct about what is dangerous. In any case, we cannot begin to
evaluate this argument if we do not know the extent of what it claims.

Of course, we should not try to clarify every term in the argument. Even
if this were possible, it would make the argument extremely long and bor-
ing. Instead, our goal is to clarify anything that seems likely to produce con-
fusion later if it is not cleared up now. As our analysis continues, we can
always return and clarify more if the need arises, but it is better to get the
most obvious problems out of the way at the start.

Some problems, however, just won’t go away. Don’t get frustrated if you
cannot figure out how to clarify a crucial term in someone else’s argument.
The fault might lie with the person who gave the argument. Often an argu-
ment leaves a crucial term vague or ambiguous, because serious defects in
the argument would become apparent if its terms were made more precise.
We will discuss such tricks in detail in Chapters 13–14. For now, we just need
to try our best to understand and clarify the essential terms in the argument.

DISSECTING THE ARGUMENT

A single sentence often includes several clauses that make separate claims.
When this happens, it is usually useful to dissect the sentence into its small-
est parts, so that we can investigate each part separately. Because simpler

110

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

steps are easier to follow than complex ones, we can understand the argu-
ment better when it is broken down. Dissection makes us more likely to no-
tice any flaws in the argument. It also enables us to pinpoint exactly where
the argument fails, if it does.

The process of dissecting an argument is a skill that can be learned only
by practice. Let’s start with a simple example:

Joe won his bet, because all he had to do was eat five pounds of oysters,
and he ate nine dozen oysters, which weigh more than five pounds.

The simplest unpacking of this argument yields the following restatement
in standard form:

(1) All Joe had to do was eat five pounds of oysters, and he ate nine
dozen oysters, which weigh more than five pounds.

(2) Joe won his bet. (from 1)

If we think about the premise of this argument, we see that it actually
contains three claims. The argument will be clearer if we separate these
claims into independent premises and add a few words for the sake of clar-
ity. The following, then, is a better representation of this argument:

(1) All Joe had to do (to win his bet) was eat five pounds of oysters.
(2) Joe ate nine dozen oysters.
(3) Nine dozen oysters weigh more than five pounds.

(4) Joe won his bet. (from 1–3)

With the premise split up in this way, it becomes obvious that there are three
separate ways in which the argument could fail. One possibility is that the
first premise is false because Joe had to do more than just eat five pounds of
oysters to win his bet: Maybe what he bet was that he could eat five pounds
in five minutes. Another possibility is that the second premise is false because
Joe did not really eat nine dozen oysters: Maybe he really ate one dozen
oysters cut into nine dozen pieces. A final way in which the argument could
fail is if the third premise is false because nine dozen oysters do not weigh
more than five pounds: Maybe the oysters that Joe ate were very small, or
maybe nine dozen oysters weigh more than five pounds only when they are
still in their shells, but Joe did not eat the shells. In any case, breaking down
complex premises into simpler ones makes it easier to see exactly where the
argument goes wrong, if it does. Consequently, we can be more confident
that an argument does not go wrong if we do not see any problem in it even
after we have broken it down completely.

Although it is a good idea to break down the premises of an argument
when this is possible, we have to be careful not to do this in a way that
changes the logical structure of the argument. Suppose someone argues
like this:

Socialism is doomed to failure because it does not provide the incentives
that are needed for a prosperous economy.

111

Arrang ing Subarguments

The simplest representation of this argument yields the following standard
form:

(1) Socialism does not provide the incentives that are needed for a
prosperous economy.

(2) Socialism is doomed to failure. (from 1)

It is tempting to break up the first premise into two parts:

(1) Socialism does not provide incentives.
(2) Incentives are needed for a prosperous economy.

(3) Socialism is doomed to failure. (from 1–2)

In this form, the argument is open to a fatal objection: Socialism does provide
some incentives. Workers often get public recognition and special privileges
when they produce a great deal in socialist economies. But this does not re-
fute the original argument. The point of the original argument was not that
socialism does not provide any incentives at all, but only that socialism does
not provide enough incentives or the right kind of incentives to create a
prosperous economy. This point is lost if we break up the premise in the way
suggested. A better attempt is this:

(1) Socialism does not provide adequate incentives.
(2) Adequate incentives are needed for a prosperous economy.

(3) Socialism is doomed to failure. (from 1–2)

The problem now is to specify when incentives are adequate. What kinds of
incentives are needed? How much of these incentives? The answer seems to
be “enough for a prosperous economy.” But then premise 2 reduces to
“Enough incentives for a prosperous economy are needed for a prosperous
economy.” This is too empty to be useful. Thus, we are led back to some-
thing like the original premise:

(1) Socialism does not provide enough incentives for a prosperous
economy.

(2) Socialism is doomed to failure. (from 1)

In this case, we cannot break the premise into parts without distorting
the point.

ARRANGING SUBARGUMENTS

When the premises of an argument are dissected, it often becomes clear that
some of these premises are intended as reasons for others. The premises
then form a chain of simpler arguments that culminate in the ultimate con-
clusion, but only after some intermediate steps. Consider this argument:

There’s no way I can finish my paper before the 9 o’clock show, since I have
to do the reading first, so I won’t even start writing until at least 9 o’clock.

112

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

It might seem tempting to put this argument into standard form as:

(1) I have to do the reading first.
(2) I won’t even start writing until at least 9 o’clock.

(3) I can’t finish my paper before the 9 o’clock show. (from 1–2)

This reformulation does include all three parts of the original argument, but it
fails to indicate the correct role for each part. The two argument markers in
the original argument indicate that there are really two conclusions. The word
“since” indicates that what precedes it is a conclusion, and the word “so”
indicates that what follows it is also a conclusion. We cannot represent this
as a single argument in standard form, because each argument in standard
form can have only one conclusion. Thus, the original sentence must have
included two arguments. The relationship between these arguments should
be clear: The conclusion of the first argument functions as a premise or reason
in the second argument. To represent this, we let the two arguments form a
chain. This is the first argument:

(1) I have to do the reading first.

(2) I won’t even start writing until at least 9 o’clock. (from 1)

This is the second argument:

(2) I won’t even start writing until at least 9 o’clock.

(3) I can’t finish my paper before the 9 o’clock show. (from 2)

If we want to, we can then write these two arguments in a chain like this:

(1) I have to do the reading first.

(2) I won’t even start writing until at least 9 o’clock. (from 1)

(3) I can’t finish my paper before the 9 o’clock show. (from 2)

This chain of reasoning can also be diagrammed like this:

(1)

(2)

(3)

The arrows indicate which claims are supposed to provide reasons for
which other claims.

Although it is often illuminating to break an argument into stages and
arrange them in a single series, this can be misleading if done incorrectly. For
example, the first sentences of Kyl’s speech cited in Chapter 4 read as follows:

Mr. Speaker, I oppose this measure. I oppose it first because it is expensive.
I further oppose it because it is untimely.

113

Arrang ing Subarguments

If we try to force this into a simple chain, we might get this:

(1) This measure is expensive.

(2) This measure is untimely. (from 1)

(3) I oppose this measure. (from 2)

This reconstruction suggests that the measure’s being expensive is what
makes it untimely. That might be true (say, during a temporary budget crisis),
but it is not what Kyl actually says. Instead, Kyl is giving two separate reasons
for the same conclusion. First,

(1) This measure is expensive.

(2) I oppose this measure. (from 1)

Second,

(1*) This measure is untimely.

(2) I oppose this measure. (from 1*)

The structure of this argument can now be diagrammed as a branching
tree:

(1) (1*)

(2)

The two arrows indicate that there are two separate reasons for the conclu-
sion. We have to be careful not to confuse branching arguments like this
with chains of arguments that do not branch.

We also need to distinguish this branching structure from cases where
several premises work together to support a single conclusion. Consider
this:

My keys must be either at home or at the office. They can’t be at the
office, because I looked for them there. So they must be at home.

With some clarifications, we can put this argument in standard form:

(1) My keys are either at my home or at my office.
(2) My keys are not at my office.

(3) My keys are at my home. (from 1–2)

Although this argument has two premises, it does not give two separate rea-
sons for its conclusion. Neither premise by itself, without the other, is
enough to give us any reason to believe the conclusion: “My keys are either
at my home or at my office” alone is not enough to support “My keys are at
my home,” and “My keys are not at my office” alone is also not enough to
support “My keys are at my home.” The premises work only when they
work together. Thus, it would be misleading to diagram this argument in the
same way as Kyl’s argument.

114

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

Instead, we need to indicate that the premises work together. Here’s a
simple way:

(1) � (2)

(3)

The symbol “+” with a single arrow indicates that the two premises together
provide a single reason for the conclusion. The line under the premises that
are joined together makes it clear that those are the premises that lead to the
conclusion at the end of the arrow. If three or more premises provided a single
reason, then we could simply add to the list—(1) + (2) + (3), and so on—then
draw a line under the premises to show which ones work together.

The argument that we are diagramming included one part that we have
not incorporated yet:

They can’t be at the office, because I looked for them there.

The standard form is this:

(2*) I looked for my keys at my office.

(2) My keys can’t be at my office. (from 2*)

By itself, this argument has this diagram:

(2*)

(2)

Since the conclusion of this background argument is a premise in the other
part of the argument, we can put the diagrams together like this:

(2*)

(1) � (2)

(3)

The fact that the arrow goes from (2*) to (2) but not to (1) indicates that this
background argument supports premise (2), but not the other premise. In
cases like this, you need to be careful where you draw your arrows.

Argument structures can get very complex, but we can diagram most
arguments by connecting the simple forms that we illustrated. Begin by iden-
tifying the premises and conclusions. Give each different claim a different
number. When two premises work together to support a single conclusion,
put a “+” between the premises and a line under them connected to a single
arrow that points to the conclusion. When two or more premises (or sets of

115

Arrang ing Subarguments

premises) provide separate reasons for a conclusion, draw separate arrows
from each reason to the conclusion. When a conclusion of one argument is
a premise in another, put it in the middle of a chain. The whole diagram
together will then show how the parts of the argument fit together.

Put the following arguments into standard form. Break up the premises and
form chains of arguments wherever this can be done without distorting the
argument. Then diagram the argument.

1. I know that Pat can’t be a father, because she is not a male. So she can’t be
a grandfather either.

2. Either Jack is a fool or Mary is a crook, because she ended up with all of
his money.

3. Our team can’t win this Saturday, both because they are not going to play,
and because they are no good, so they wouldn’t win even if they did play.

4. Mercury is known to be the only metal that is liquid at room temperature,
so a pound of mercury would be liquid in this room, which is at room
temperature, and it would also conduct electricity, since all metals do.
Therefore, some liquids do conduct electricity.

5. Since he won the lottery, he’s rich and lucky, so he’ll probably do well in
the stock market, too, unless his luck runs out.

6. Joe is not a freshman, since he lives in a fraternity, and freshmen are not
allowed to live in fraternities. He also can’t be a senior, since he has not
declared a major, and every senior has declared a major. And he can’t be a
junior, because I never met him before today, and I would have met him
before now if he were a junior. So Joe must be a sophomore.

7. Since many newly emerging nations do not have the capital resources
necessary for sustained growth, they will continue to need help from
industrial nations to avoid mass starvation.

Exercise II

In “A Piece of ‘God’s Handiwork’” (Exercise II in Chapter 4), Robert Redford
argues that the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) should not allow Conoco
to drill for oil in Utah’s Grand Staircase-Escalante National Monument. The
following passage is a crucial part where Redford answers an objection.
Arrange its subarguments in standard form so as to reveal the structure of his
argument. Then diagram the overall argument.

The BLM says its hands are tied. Why? Because these lands were set aside subject

to “valid existing rights,” and Conoco has a lease that gives it the right to drill.

Sure Conoco has a lease—more than one, in fact—but those leases were originally

Exercise III

(continued)

116

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

issued without sufficient environmental study or public input. As a result, none of

them conveyed a valid right to drill. What’s more, in deciding to issue a permit to

drill now, the BLM did not conduct a full analysis of the environmental impacts of

drilling in these incomparable lands, but instead determined there would be no

significant environmental harm on the basis of an abbreviated review that didn’t

even look at drilling on the other federal leases. Sounds like Washington double-

speak to me.

During the Republican candidates’ debate on October 9, 2007, Chris Matthews
asked Senator John McCain, “. . . Do you believe that Congress has to autho-
rize a strategic attack, not an attack on—during hot pursuit, but a strategic
attack on weaponry in Iran—do you need congressional approval as com-
mander and chief?” Read McCain’s response, then arrange its subarguments
in standard form so as to reveal the structure of his argument. Then diagram
the overall argument.

McCain: We’re dealing, of course, with hypotheticals. If the situation is that it

requires immediate action to ensure the security of the United States of America,

that’s what you take your oath to do, when you’re inaugurated as president of the

United States. If it’s a long series of build-ups, where the threat becomes greater and

greater, of course you want to go to Congress; of course you want to get approval, if

this is an imminent threat to the security of the United States of America. So it obvi-

ously depends on the scenario. But I would, at minimum, consult with the leaders of

Congress because there may come a time when you need the approval of Congress.

And I believe that this is a possibility that is, maybe, closer to reality than we are

discussing tonight.

Exercise IV

SUPPRESSED PREMISES

Arguments in everyday life are rarely completely explicit. They usually de-
pend on unstated assumptions that are understood by those involved in the
conversation. Thus, if we are told that Chester Arthur was a president of the
United States, we have a right to conclude a great many things about him—
for example, that at the time he was president, he was a live human being.
Appeals to facts of this kind lie behind the following argument:

Benjamin Franklin could not have been our second president, because he
died before the second election was held.

This argument obviously turns on a question of fact: Did Franklin die before
the second presidential election was held? (He did.) The argument would
not be sound if this explicit premise were not true. But the argument

117

Suppressed Prem ises

also depends on a more general principle that ties the premise and conclu-
sion together:

The dead cannot be president.

This new premise is needed to make the argument valid in the technical
sense.

This new premise is also needed to explain why the premise supports the
conclusion. You could have made the original argument valid simply by
adding this:

If Franklin died before the second election was held, then he could not
have been our second president.

Indeed, you can always make an argument valid simply by adding a con-
ditional whose antecedent is the premises and whose consequent is the
conclusion. However, this trick is often not illuminating; it does not reveal
how the argument works. In our example, there is nothing special about
Franklin, so it is misleading to add a conditional that mentions Franklin in
particular. In contrast, when we add the general principle, “The dead cannot
be president,” this new premise not only makes the argument valid but also
helps us understand how the conclusion is supposed to follow from the
premise.

Traditionally, logicians have called premises that are not stated but are
needed (to make the argument valid and explain how it works) suppressed prem-
ises. An argument depending on suppressed premises is called an enthymeme
and is said to be enthymematic. If we look at arguments that occur in daily life,
we discover that they are, almost without exception, enthymematic. Therefore,
to trace the pathway between premises and conclusion, it is usually necessary
to fill in these suppressed premises that serve as links between the stated prem-
ises and the conclusion.

CONTINGENT FACTS

Suppressed premises come in several varieties. They often concern facts
or conventions that might have been otherwise—that are contingent rather
than necessary. Our example assumed that the dead are not eligible for the
presidency, but we can imagine a society in which the deceased are elected to
public office as an honor (something like posthumous induction into the
Baseball Hall of Fame). Our national government is not like that, however,
and this is something that most Americans know. This makes it odd to come
right out and say that the deceased cannot hold public office. In most
settings, this would involve a violation of the conversational rule of Quantity,
because it says more than needs to be said.

Even though it would be odd to state it, this fact plays a central role in the
argument. To assert the conclusion without believing the suppressed premise
would involve a violation of the conversational rule of Quality, because the
speaker would not have adequate reasons for the conclusion. Furthermore, if

118

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

this suppressed premise were not believed to be true, then to give the explicit
premise as a reason for the conclusion would violate the conversational rule of
Relevance (just as it would be irrelevant to point out that Babe Ruth is dead
when someone asks whether he is in the Baseball Hall of Fame). For these
reasons, anyone who gives the original argument conversationally implies
a commitment to the suppressed premise.

Suppressed premises are not always so obvious. A somewhat more com-
plicated example is this:

Arnold Schwarzenegger cannot become president of the United States,
because he was born in Austria.

Why should being from Austria disqualify someone from being president?
It seems odd that the Founding Fathers should have something against that
particular part of the world. The answer is that the argument depends on a
more general suppressed premise:

Only a natural-born United States citizen may become president of the
United States.

It is this provision of the United States Constitution that lies at the heart of
the argument. Knowing this provision is, of course, a more specialized piece
of knowledge than knowing that you have to be alive to be president. For
this reason, more people will see the force of the first argument (about
Franklin) than the second (about Schwarzenegger). The second argument
assumes an audience with more specialized knowledge.

The argument still has to draw a connection between being born in Aus-
tria and being a natural-born United States citizen. So it turns out that the
argument has three stages:

(1) Schwarzenegger was born in Austria.
(2) Austria has never been part of the United States.

(3) Schwarzenegger was born outside of the United States. (from 1–2)
(4) Anyone who was born outside of the United States is not a natural-

born United States citizen.

(5) Schwarzenegger is not a natural-born United States citizen. (from 3–4)
(6) Only a natural-born United States citizen may become president of

the United States.

(7) Schwarzenegger cannot become president of the United States.
(from 5–6)

With the addition of suppressed premises (2), (4), and (6), the argument is
technically valid, for, if (1)–(2) are true, (3) must be true; if (3)–(4) are true,
(5) must also be true; and if (5)–(6) are true, then (7) must be true.

The argument is still not sound, however, because some of the suppressed
premises that were added are not true. In particular, there is an exception to
the suppressed premise about who is a natural-born United States citizen.
This exception is well known to United States citizens who live overseas.

119

Suppressed Prem ises

People who were born in Austria are United States citizens if their parents
were United States citizens. They also seem to count as natural-born citizens,
since they are not naturalized. This is not completely settled, but it does not
matter here, as Arnold Schwarzenegger’s parents were not United States citi-
zens when he was born. Thus, the second stage of the above argument can be
reformulated as follows:

(3) Schwarzenegger was born outside of the United States.
(4*) Schwarzenegger’s parents were not United States citizens when

he was born.
(4**) Anyone who was born outside of the United States and whose

parents were not United States citizens at the time is not a
natural-born United States citizen.

(5) Schwarzenegger is not a natural-born United States citizen.
(from 3, 4*, and 4**)

This much of the argument is now sound.
An argument with a single premise has grown to include three stages

with at least four suppressed premises. Some of the added premises are ob-
vious, but others are less well known, so we cannot assume that the person
who gave the original argument had the more complete argument in mind.
Many people would be convinced by the original argument even without all
these added complexities. Nonetheless, the many suppressed premises are
necessary to make the argument sound. Seeing this brings out the assump-
tions that must be true for the conclusion to follow from the premises. This
process of making everything explicit enables us to assess these background
assumptions directly.

There is one obscure exception to the premise that only a natural-born citizen
may become president of the United States. The Constitution does allow a
person who is not a natural-born citizen to become president if he or she was
“a citizen of the United States at the time of the adoption of this Constitution.”
This exception is said to have been added to allow Alexander Hamilton to run
for president, but it obviously does not apply to Schwarzenegger or to anyone
else alive today. Nonetheless, this exception keeps the argument from being
sound in its present form. Reformulate the final stage of the argument to make
it sound.

Exercise V

LINGUISTIC PRINCIPLES

Often an argument is valid, but it is still not clear why it is valid. It is not clear
how the conclusion follows from the premises. Arguments are like pathways
between premises and conclusions, and some of these pathways are more
complicated than others. Yet even the simplest arguments reveal hidden

120

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

complexities when examined closely. For example, there is no question that
the following argument is valid:

(1) Harriet is in New York with her son.

(2) Harriet’s son is in New York.

It is not possible for the premise to be true and the conclusion false. If asked
why this conclusion follows from the premise, it would be natural to reply that:

You cannot be someplace with somebody unless that person is there, too.

This is not something we usually spell out, but it is the principle that takes
us from the premise to the conclusion.

One thing to notice about this principle is that it is quite general—that is,
it does not depend on any special features of the people or places involved. It
is also true that if Benjamin is in St. Louis with his daughter, then Benjamin’s
daughter is in St. Louis. Although the references have changed, the general
pattern that lies behind this inference will seem obvious to anyone who
understands the words used to formulate it. For this reason, principles of this
kind are basically linguistic in character.

If we look at arguments as they occur in everyday life, we will discover that
almost all of them turn on unstated linguistic principles. To cite just one more
example: Alice is taller than her husband, so there is at least one woman who
is taller than at least one man. This inference relies on the principles that hus-
bands are men and wives are women. We do not usually state these linguistic
principles, for to do so will often violate the rule of Quantity. (Try to imagine a
context in which you would come right out and say, “Husbands, you know,
are men.” Unless you were speaking to someone just learning the language,
this would be a peculiar remark.) Nonetheless, even if it would usually be pe-
culiar to come right out and state such linguistic principles, our arguments
still typically presuppose them. This observation reveals yet another way in
which our daily use of language moves within a rich, though largely unno-
ticed, framework of linguistic rules, as we emphasized in Chapter 2.

EVALUATIVE SUPPRESSED PREMISES

We have examined two kinds of suppressed premises, factual and linguistic.
Many arguments also contain unstated evaluative premises. As we saw in
Chapter 3, evaluation comes in many kinds. The following argument involves
moral evaluation:

It is immoral to buy pornography, because pornography leads to
violence toward women.

This argument clearly relies on the moral principle that it is immoral to buy
anything that leads to violence toward women. A different example contains
religious premises:

You shouldn’t take the name of the Lord in vain, for this shows disrespect.

121

Suppressed Prem ises

The suppressed premise here is that you should not do anything that
shows disrespect (to the Lord). One more example is about economics:

It is unwise to invest all of your money in one stock, since this increases
the risk that you will lose everything.

The suppressed premise here is that it is unwise to increase the risk that you
will lose everything. More examples could be given, but the point should be
clear. Most arguments depend on unstated assumptions, and many of these
assumptions are evaluative in one way or another.

USES AND ABUSES OF SUPPRESSED PREMISES

Talk about suppressed premises may bring to mind suppressing a rebellion
or an ugly thought, and using hidden premises may sound somewhat
sneaky. However, the way we are using them, these expressions do not
carry such negative connotations. A suppressed or hidden premise is sim-
ply an unstated premise. It is often legitimate to leave premises unstated. It
is legitimate if (1) those who are given the argument can easily supply these
unstated premises for themselves, and (2) the unstated premises are not
themselves controversial. If done properly, the suppression of premises can
add greatly to the efficiency of language. Indeed, without the judicious
suppression of obvious premises, many arguments would become too cum-
bersome to be effective.

On the other hand, suppressed premises can also be used improperly.
People sometimes suppress questionable assumptions so that their
opponents will not notice where an argument goes astray. For example,
when election debates turn to the topic of crime, we often hear arguments
like this:

My opponent is opposed to the death penalty, so he must be soft on
crime.

The response sometimes sounds like this:

Since my opponent continues to support the death penalty, he must not
have read the most recent studies, which show that the death penalty
does not deter crime.

The first argument assumes that anyone who is opposed to the death penalty
is soft on crime, and the second argument assumes that anyone who read the
studies in question would be convinced by them and would turn against
the death penalty. Both of these assumptions are questionable, and the ques-
tions they raise are central to the debate. If we want to understand these
issues and address them directly, we have to bring out these suppressed
premises openly.

122

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

The following arguments depend for their validity on suppressed premises of
various kinds. For each of them, list enough suppressed premises to make the
argument valid and also to show why it is valid. This might require several
suppressed premises of various kinds.

Example: Carol has no sisters, because all her siblings are
brothers.

Suppressed Premises: A sister would be a sibling.

A brother is not a sister.

1. Britney Spears is under age thirty-five. Therefore, she cannot run for
president of the United States.

2. Nixon couldn’t have been president in 1950 because he was still in the Senate.

3. 81 is not a prime number, because 81 is divisible by 3.

4. There’s no patient named Rupert here; we have only female patients.

5. Columbus did not discover the New World because the Vikings explored
Newfoundland centuries earlier.

6. There must not be any survivors, since they would have been found by now.

7. Lincoln could not have met Washington, because Washington was dead
before Lincoln was born.

8. Philadelphia cannot play Los Angeles in the World Series, since they are
both in the National League.

9. Mildred must be over forty-three, since she has a daughter who is thirty-
six years old.

10. He cannot be a grandfather because he never had children.

11. That’s not modern poetry; you can understand it.

12. Harold can’t play in the Super Bowl, because he broke his leg.

13. Shaquille must be a basketball player, since he is so tall.

14. Dan is either stupid or very cunning, so he must be stupid.

15. Susan refuses to work on Sundays, which shows that she is lazy and
inflexible.

16. Jim told me that Mary is a professor, so she can’t be a student, since
professors must already have degrees.

17. This burglar alarm won’t work unless we are lucky or the burglar uses the
front door, so we can’t count on it.

18. His natural talents were not enough; he still lost the match because he had
not practiced sufficiently.

Exercise VI

THE METHOD OF RECONSTRUCTION

We can summarize the discussion so far by listing the steps to be taken in re-
constructing an argument. The first two steps were discussed in Chapters 4
and 3, respectively.

123

The Method of Reconstruct ion

1. Do a close analysis of the passage containing the argument.

2. List all explicit premises and the conclusion in standard form.

3. Clarify the premises and the conclusion where necessary.

4. Break up the premises and the conclusion into smaller parts where this
is possible.

5. Arrange the parts of the argument into a chain or tree of subarguments
where this is possible.

6. Assess each argument and subargument for validity.1

7. If any argument or subargument is not valid, or if it is not clear why
it is valid, add suppressed premises that will show how to get from the
premises to the conclusion.

8. Assess the truth of the premises.

Remember that the goal of reconstruction is not just technical validity but is,
instead, to understand why and how the conclusion is supposed to follow
from the premises.

After reconstructing the argument, it is often helpful to add some indica-
tion of its structure. This can be done by numbering the premises and then,
after each conclusion, listing the premises from which that conclusion
follows. (We did this in our examples.) The argument’s structure can also be
shown by a diagram like those discussed above. Either way, we need to
make it clear exactly how the separate parts of the argument are supposed
to fit together.

This method is not intended to be mechanical. Each step requires care and
intelligence. As a result, a given argument can be reconstructed in various
ways with varying degrees of illumination and insight. The goal of this
method is to reveal as much of the structure of an argument as possible and
to learn from it as much as you can. Different reconstructions approach this
goal more or less closely.

The whole process is more complex than our discussion thus far has sug-
gested. This is especially clear in the last three steps of reconstruction, which
must be carried out simultaneously. In deciding whether an argument is
acceptable, we try to find a set of true suppressed premises that, if added
to the stated premises, yields a sound argument for the conclusion. Two
problems typically arise when we make this effort:

1. We find a set of premises strong enough to support the conclusion, but
at least one of these premises is false.

2. We modify the premises to avoid falsehood, but the conclusion no
longer follows from them.

The reconstruction of an argument typically involves shifting back and forth
between the demand for a valid argument and the demand for true prem-
ises. Eventually, either we show the argument to be sound or we abandon
the effort. In the latter case, we conclude that the argument in question has
no sound reconstruction. It is still possible that we were at fault in not

124

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

finding a reconstruction that showed the argument to be sound. Perhaps we
did not show enough ingenuity in searching for a suppressed premise that
would do the trick. There is, in fact, no purely formal or mechanical way of
dealing with this problem. A person presenting an argument may reason-
ably leave out steps, provided that they can easily be filled in by those to
whom the argument is addressed. So, in analyzing an argument, we should
be charitable, but our charity has limits. After a reasonable search for those
suppressed premises that would show the argument to be sound, we should
not blame ourselves if we fail to find them. Rather, the blame shifts to the
person who formulated the argument for not doing so clearly.

Reconstruct and diagram the main arguments in:

1. The passages in the Discussion Questions at the end of Chapter 1.

2. The passages in Exercises I and V in Chapter 4.

3. An editorial from your local paper.

4. Your last term paper or a friend’s last term paper.

5. Part of one of the readings in Part V.

Exercise VII

Not all arguments are serious or good. The following silly argument comes
from a famous scene in Monty Python and the Holy Grail. Reconstruct the argu-
ment that is supposed to show that the woman is a witch.

Crowd: We have found a witch. May we burn her? . . .

Woman: I’m not a witch! I’m not a witch! . . .

Leader: What makes you think she is a witch?

Man #1: She turned me into a newt!

Leader: A newt?

Man #1: I got better.

Crowd: Burn her anyway!

Leader: Quiet! Quiet! There are ways of telling whether she is a witch.

Crowd: Are there? What are they? Tell us. Do they hurt?

Leader: Tell me, what do you do with witches?

Crowd: Burn them!

Leader: And what do you burn apart from witches?

Man #2: More witches!

Man #3: Wood.

Leader: So, why do witches burn?

Exercise VIII

125

Digg ing Deeper

Man #1: ’Cause they’re made of wood.

Leader: Good! . . . So, how do we tell whether she is made of wood?

Crowd: Build a bridge out of her.

Leader: Ah, but can you not also make bridges out of stone?

Crowd: Oh yeah.

Leader: Does wood sink in water?

Crowd: No, it floats. Throw her into the pond!

Leader: What also floats in water?

Crowd: Bread. Apples. Very small rocks. Cider! Great gravy. Cherries.
Mud. Churches. Lead.

Arthur: A duck!

Leader: Exactly. So, logically, —

Man #3: If she weighs the same as a duck, she’s made of wood.

Leader: And therefore?

Crowd: A witch! . . . A duck. A duck. Here’s a duck!

Leader: We shall use my largest scales.

Crowd: Burn the witch! (Woman is placed on scales opposite a duck.)

Leader: Remove the supports. (Woman balances duck.)

Crowd: A witch!

Woman: It’s a fair cop.

DIGGING DEEPER

After we have reconstructed an argument as well as we can, doubts still might
arise about its premises. If we agree with its premises, others might deny them
or ask why they are true. If we disagree with its premises, we might be able to
understand the source of our disagreement better if we determine why those
premises are believed by other people—including the person who gave the ar-
gument. Either way, it is useful to try to construct supporting arguments for
the premises that may be questioned. These supporting arguments are not
parts of the explicit argument or even of its reconstruction, but are arguments
further back in a chain of arguments.

When we look for further arguments to support the premises in an argu-
ment, we might then wonder whether the premises of each new argument can
be accepted without supporting arguments as well. We seem faced with the
unpleasant task of producing endless chains of argument. (A similar problem
was mentioned in Chapter 3.) When pressed in this way to give reasons for
our reasons, and reasons for our reasons for our reasons, we eventually come
upon fundamental principles—principles for which we cannot give any more
basic argument. These fundamental principles can concern morality, religion,

126

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

politics, or our general views concerning the nature of the world. We often ar-
gue within a framework of such principles without actually stating them, be-
cause we assume (sometimes incorrectly) that others accept them as well.
When someone argues that environmental destruction should be stopped
because it will lead to the annihilation of the human race, he or she will
not feel called on to say explicitly, “And the annihilation of the human race
would be a very bad thing.” That, after all, is something that most people take
for granted.

Though fundamental principles are often obvious and generally accepted,
at times it is not clear which principles are being assumed and just how accept-
able they really are. Then we need to make our assumptions explicit and look
for deeper arguments, continuing the process as far as we can. There is a limit
to how far we can go, but the deeper we go, the better we will understand both
our own views and the views of our opponents.

The following arguments depend on suppressed premises for their validity.

(a) State what these underlying premises might be. In some cases, there might

be more than one. (b) Indicate whether these premises are fundamental princi-

ples in the sense just described. (c) For each premise that is not fundamental,

give a supporting argument that is as plausible as you can make it. Remember,

you do not have to accept an argument to detect its underlying principles and

to understand the kind of argument that could be used to support it.

Example: General Snork has no right to rule, because he
came to power by a military coup.

Suppressed Premise: Someone who came to power by a military coup
has no right to rule.

Supporting Argument: Someone has a right to rule only if he or she has
been elected by the people.

Someone who comes to power by a military coup
has not been elected by the people.

Someone who came to power by a military coup
has no right to rule.

(Further support for the first premise might be provided by some general theory
of democracy, such as that all rights to use power come from the people, and the
only legitimate way for the people to delegate these rights is in elections.)

1. You shouldn’t call Kirk guilty, because he has not even been tried yet.

2. Cows cannot live in a desert, because they eat grass.

3. The liquid in this glass must not be water, since the sugar I put in it isn’t
dissolving.

4. People can vote and be drafted at age eighteen, so they should also be al-
lowed to drink at eighteen.

Exercise IX

127

An Example of Deep Analys is : Cap ital Pun ishment

5. We have no right to attack Muslim dictatorships if we support Christian
dictatorships. So we should not attack Muslim dictatorships.

6. That chair won’t hold you, since it almost broke a few minutes ago when
your little sister sat in it.

7. Bringing down our deficits should be a high priority, because inflation
will return if high deficits continue.

8. The thought of eating ostrich meat will seem strange to most people, so
your ostrich farm is bound to go broke.

9. Getting good grades must be hard, since, if it were easy, more people
would get good grades.

10. Morris does not deserve his wealth, for he merely inherited it.

11. Frank should not be punished, because it is wrong to punish someone just
to make an example of him.

12. There can’t be UFOs (unidentified flying objects), because there is no life
on other planets.

13. The sky is red tonight, so it isn’t going to rain tomorrow.

14. Parents take care of their children when they are young, so their children
should take care of them when they get old.

How can you tell when you have reached a fundamental principle? Must
every argument start with some basic claim for which no further argument can
be given or for which you can give no argument? Why or why not?

Discussion Question

AN EXAMPLE OF DEEP ANALYSIS:
CAPITAL PUNISHMENT

We can illustrate these methods of deep analysis by examining the difficult
question of the constitutionality of capital punishment. It has been argued
that the Supreme Court should declare the death penalty unconstitutional
because it is a cruel and unusual punishment. The explicitly stated argu-
ment has the following basic form:

(1) The death penalty is a cruel and unusual punishment.

(2) The death penalty should be declared unconstitutional. (from 1)

The argument plainly depends on two suppressed premises:

SP1: The Constitution prohibits cruel and unusual punishments.

SP2: Anything that the Constitution prohibits should be declared
unconstitutional.

128

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

So the argument, more fully spelled out, looks like this:

(1) The death penalty is a cruel and unusual punishment.
(2) SP: The Constitution prohibits cruel and unusual punishments.

(3) The Constitution prohibits the death penalty. (from 1–2)
(4) SP: Anything that the Constitution prohibits should be declared

unconstitutional.

(5) The death penalty should be declared unconstitutional. (from 3–4)

This reconstruction seems to be a fair representation of the intent of the
original argument.

We can now turn to an assessment of this argument. First, the argument
is valid: Given the premises, the conclusion does follow. All that remains is
to determine the truth of the premises one by one.

Premise 4 seems uncontroversial. Indeed, it might sound like a truism to
say that anything that violates a constitutional provision should be declared
unconstitutional. But in fact, this notion was once controversial, for nothing
in the Constitution explicitly gives the courts the right to declare acts of legis-
lators unconstitutional and hence void. The courts have acquired and consol-
idated this right in the years since 1789, and it is still sometimes challenged
by those who think that it gives the courts too much power. But even if the
judiciary’s power to declare laws unconstitutional is not itself a constitution-
ally stated power, it is so much an accepted part of our system that no one
would challenge it in a courtroom proceeding today.

The second premise is clearly true, for the Constitution does, in fact,
prohibit cruel and unusual punishments. Its Eighth Amendment reads,
“Excessive bail shall not be required, nor excessive fines imposed, nor cruel
and unusual punishments inflicted.” It is not clear, however, just what this
prohibition amounts to. In particular, does the punishment have to be both
cruel and unusual to be prohibited, or is it prohibited whenever it is either
cruel or unusual? This would make a big difference if cruel punishments
were usual, or if some unusual punishments were not cruel. For the moment,
let us interpret the language as meaning “both cruel and unusual.”

The first premise—“The death penalty is a cruel and unusual punish-
ment“—obviously forms the heart of the argument. What we would expect,
then, is a good supporting argument to be put forward on its behalf. The
following argument by Supreme Court Justice Potter Stewart (in Furman v.
Georgia, 408 U.S. 239 at 309–310 [1972]) was intended to support this claim in
particular cases in which the death penalty was imposed for rape and murder:

In the first place, it is clear that these sentences are “cruel” in the sense that they
excessively go beyond, not in degree but in kind, the punishments that the state
legislatures have determined to be necessary. . . . In the second place, it is equally
clear that these sentences are “unusual” in the sense that the penalty of death
is infrequently imposed for murder, and that its imposition for rape is extraordi-
narily rare. But I do not rest my conclusion upon these two propositions alone.
These death sentences are cruel and unusual in the same way that being struck

129

An Example of Deep Analys is : Cap ital Pun ishment

by lightning is cruel and unusual. For, of all the people convicted of rapes and
murders in 1967 and 1968, many just as reprehensible as these, the petitioners
are among a capriciously selected random handful upon whom the sentence of
death has in fact been imposed. My concurring brothers [the Justices who agree
with Stewart] have demonstrated that, if any basis can be discerned for the selec-
tion of these few to be sentenced to die, it is the constitutionally impermissible
basis of race.

The first sentence argues that the death penalty is cruel. The basic idea is that
punishments are cruel if they inflict harms that are much worse than what is
necessary for any legitimate and worthwhile purpose. Stewart then seems to
accept the state legislatures’ view that the death penalty does go far beyond
what is necessary. This makes it cruel.

Now let us concentrate on the part of this argument intended to show that
the death penalty is an unusual punishment. Of course, in civilized nations,
the death penalty is reserved for a small range of crimes, but this is hardly the
point at issue. The point of the argument is that the death penalty is unusual
even for those crimes that are punishable by death, including first-degree
murder. Moreover, Stewart claims that, among those convicted of crimes
punishable by death, who actually receives a death sentence is determined
either capriciously or on the basis of race. The point seems to be that whether
a person who is convicted of a capital crime will be given the death penalty
depends on the kind of legal aid he or she receives, the prosecutor’s willing-
ness to offer a plea bargain, the judge’s personality, the beliefs and attitudes
of the jury, and many other considerations. At many points in the process,
choices that affect the outcome could be based on mere whim or caprice,
or even on the race of the defendant or the victim. Why are these factors
mentioned? Because, as Stewart says, it is unconstitutional for sentencing to
be based on caprice or race.

We can then restate this supporting argument more carefully:

(1) Very few criminals who were found guilty of crimes that are
punishable by death are actually sentenced to death.

(2) Among those found guilty of crimes punishable by death, who is
sentenced to death depends on caprice or race.

(3) It is unconstitutional for sentencing to depend on caprice or race.
(4) A punishment is unusual if it is imposed infrequently and on an

unconstitutional basis.

(5) The death penalty is an unusual punishment. (from 1–4)

This conclusion is part of the first premise in our original argument. Now
we can spread the entire argument out before us:

(1) An act is cruel if it inflicts harms that are much worse than what is
necessary for any legitimate and worthwhile purpose.

(2) The death penalty inflicts harms that are much worse than what is
necessary for any legitimate and worthwhile purpose.

(3) The death penalty is cruel. (from 1–2)

130

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

(4) Very few criminals who were found guilty of crimes that are
punishable by death are sentenced to death.

(5) Among those found guilty of crimes punishable by death, who is
sentenced to death depends on caprice or race.

(6) It is unconstitutional for sentencing to depend on caprice or race.
(7) A punishment is unusual if it is imposed infrequently and on an

unconstitutional basis.

(8) The death penalty is an unusual punishment. (from 4–7)

(9) The death penalty is both cruel and unusual. (from 3 and 8)
(10) The Constitution prohibits cruel and unusual punishments.

(11) The Constitution prohibits the death penalty. (from 9–10)
(12) Anything that the Constitution prohibits should be declared

unconstitutional.

(13) The death penalty should be declared unconstitutional. (from 11–12)

These propositions provide at least the skeleton of an argument with some
force. The conclusion does seem to follow from the premises, and the prem-
ises themselves seem plausible. We have produced a charitable reconstruc-
tion of the argument.

We can now see how an opponent might respond to it. One particularly
probing objection goes like this:

It is sadly true that caprice and race sometimes determine who, among those
found guilty of crimes punishable by death, is given the death sentence.
However, this fact reflects badly not on the law but on its administration.
If judges and juries met their obligations, these factors would not affect who
receives the death penalty, and this punishment would no longer be unusual
in any relevant sense. What is needed, then, is judicial reform and not the
removal of the death penalty on constitutional grounds.

This response is probing because it insists on a distinction between a law it-
self and the effects of its application—or, more pointedly, its misapplication.
Because this distinction was not drawn in the argument above, it is not clear
which premise is denied in this response. Probably the best interpretation is
that this response denies premise 7, because it is not the death penalty itself
that is unusual in the relevant sense when the conditions in premise 7 are
met. Instead, it is the present administration of the death penalty that is
problematic.

To meet this objection, the original argument could be strengthened in the
following way:

A law should not be judged in isolation from the likely effects of implementing it.
Because of the very nature of our system of criminal justice, for the foreseeable
future, the death penalty will almost certainly continue to be applied in a capri-
cious and racially discriminatory manner, and who receives it will be determined
partly by factors that the Constitution forbids as a basis for sentencing. The death
penalty will therefore remain an unusual punishment, so it should be declared
unconstitutional.

131

An Example of Deep Analys is : Cap ital Pun ishment

This argument suggests ways to avoid the above objection by strengthening
premises 5–7 of the above argument. The new versions of these premises can
be spelled out in the following way:

(5*) It is very likely in the foreseeable future that, among those found
guilty of crimes punishable by death, who is given the death
sentence will continue to depend on either caprice or race.

(6) It is unconstitutional for sentencing to depend on caprice or race.
(7*) A punishment is unusual if it is very likely in the foreseeable

future that it will continue to be imposed infrequently and on
an unconstitutional basis.

(8) The death penalty is an unusual punishment. (from 5*–7*)

Of course, an opponent can still respond that these premises are false if he
or she can show that there is some way to avoid the problems that are raised
by premise (5*). This will not be easy to show, however, if the argument is
right about “the very nature of our system of criminal justice.”

Another kind of question is raised by premise (7*). Should a law be
declared unconstitutional whenever there is a good chance that it will
be abused in ways that infringe on constitutional rights? Many laws have this
potential—for example, all laws involving police power. This is why certain
police powers have been limited by court rulings. Strict rules governing in-
terrogations and wiretaps are two results. But only an extremist would sug-
gest that we should abolish all police powers because of the inevitable risk of
unconstitutional abuse. Accordingly, those who argue in favor of the death
penalty might try to show that the problems in the application of the death
penalty are not sufficiently important to be constitutionally intolerable.

The supporter of the death penalty also might take a very different tack:

Those who argue against the constitutionality of the death penalty on the grounds
that it is a cruel and unusual punishment use the expression “cruel and unusual” in a
way wholly different from that intended by the framers of the Eighth Amendment.
By “cruel” they had in mind punishments that involved torture. By “unusual” they
meant bizarre or ghoulish punishments of the kind that often were part of public
spectacles in barbaric times. Modern methods of execution are neither cruel nor un-
usual in the constitutionally relevant senses of these words. Therefore, laws demand-
ing the death penalty cannot be declared unconstitutional on the grounds that they
either directly or indirectly involve a punishment that is cruel and unusual.

The core of this counterargument can be expressed as follows:

(1) In appeals to the Constitution, its words should be taken as they
were originally intended.

(2) Modern methods of carrying out a death penalty are neither
“cruel” nor “unusual” if these words are interpreted as they
were originally intended.

(3) The death penalty should not be declared unconstitutional on the
ground that it violates the prohibition against cruel and unusual
punishments. (from 1–2)

132

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

The second premise of this argument states a matter of historical fact that
might not be altogether easy to verify. Chances are, however, that it comes
close to the truth, because the Constitution refers to the death penalty with-
out criticism, and the death penalty was rarely questioned at the time. Given
this, the opponent of the death penalty must either attack the first premise
or find some other grounds for holding that the death penalty should be de-
clared unconstitutional.

The first premise might seem like a truism, for how can a document
guide conduct if anyone can reinterpret its words regardless of what was
intended? Isn’t the literal meaning of the document simply what was meant
at the time, with everything else being interpretation? Of course, there are
times when it is not easy to discover what its meaning was. (In the present
case, for example, it is not clear whether the Eighth Amendment prohibits
punishments that are either cruel or unusual or only those that are both
cruel and unusual.) It seems unlikely, however, that those who drafted the
Eighth Amendment used either the word “cruel” or the word “unusual” in
the ways in which they are employed in the argument against the death
penalty.

Does this last concession end the debate in favor of those who reject the
anti–capital punishment argument that we have been examining? The argu-
ment certainly seems to be weakened, but there are those who would take
a bold course by simply denying the first premise of the argument used to
refute them. They would deny, that is, that we are bound to read the Constitu-
tion in the way intended by its framers. An argument in favor of this position
might look something like this:

The great bulk of the Constitution was written in an age almost wholly
different from our own. To cite just two examples: Women were denied
fundamental rights of full citizenship, and slavery was a constitutionally
accepted feature of national life. The Constitution has remained a live and
relevant document just because it has undergone constant reinterpretation.
So, even if it is true that the expression “cruel and unusual” meant something
quite special to those who framed the Eighth Amendment, plainly a humane
desire to make punishment more civilized lay behind it. The present reading
of this amendment is in the spirit of its original intention and simply makes it
applicable to our own times.

The argument has now moved to an entirely new level, one concerning
whether the Constitution should be read strictly in accord with the original
intentions of those who wrote it or more freely to accommodate modern
realities.

We shall not pursue the discussion further into these complex areas. In-
stead, we should consider how we were led into them. Recall that our
original argument did not concern the general question of whether capi-
tal punishment is morally right or wrong. The argument turned on a
much more specific point: Does the death penalty violate the prohibition
against cruel and unusual punishments in the Eighth Amendment to the

133

An Example of Deep Analys is : Cap ital Pun ishment

Constitution? The argument with which we began seemed to be a
straightforward proof that it does. Yet as we explored principles that lay
in back of this deceptively simple argument, the issue became broader
and more complex. We finally reached a point at which the force of the
original argument was seen to depend on what we consider the proper
way to interpret the Constitution—strictly or more freely. If we now go on
to ask which method of interpretation is best, we will have to look at the
role of the courts and, more generally, the purpose of government. Even-
tually we will come to fundamental principles for which we can give no
further argument.

In examining the question of the constitutionality of capital punishment,
we have had to compress a complicated discussion into a few pages. We
have only begun to show how the issues involved in this complex debate
can be sorted out and then addressed intelligently. There is, however, no
guarantee that these procedures, however far they are carried out, will even-
tually settle this or any other fundamental dispute. It is entirely possible that
the parties to a dispute may reach a point where they encounter a funda-
mental or rock-bottom disagreement that they cannot resolve. They simply
disagree and cannot conceive of any deeper principles that could resolve
their disagreement. But even if this happens, they will at least understand
the source of their disagreement. They will not be arguing at cross-purposes,
as so often happens in the discussion of important issues. Finally, even
if they continue to disagree, they may come to appreciate that others
may view things quite differently from the way they do. This may in turn
help them deal with their basic disagreements in an intelligent, humane, and
civilized way.

What is the best argument that Justice Stewart could give in support of the
premise that the death penalty “excessively go[es] beyond” what is necessary
for any legitimate and worthwhile purpose? Is this argument adequate to jus-
tify this premise? (For one such argument, see Justice Brennan’s opinion in
Furman v. Georgia.)

Exercise X

How could one best argue in support of premise (5*), that it is very likely in
the foreseeable future that, among those found guilty of crimes punishable by
death, who is given the death sentence will continue to depend on either
caprice or race? How could defenders of the death penalty try to refute this
argument?

Exercise XI

134

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

Formulate the best argument you can in support of the premise that, in appeals
to the Constitution, its words should be taken as they were originally intended.
Is this argument adequate to justify this premise? Why or why not?

Exercise XII

The final argument in our examination of whether or not the death penalty vio-
lates the Constitution attempts to show that the Constitution must be read in a
free or liberal way that makes it relevant to present society. Filling in suppressed
premises where necessary, restate this argument as a sequence of explicit steps.
After you have given the argument the strongest restatement you can, evaluate
it for soundness.

Exercise XIII

To solve a mystery, you need to determine which facts are crucial and then
argue from those facts to a solution. Solve the following mysteries and recon-
struct your own argument for your solution. These stories come from Five-
Minute Whodunits, by Stan Smith (New York: Sterling, 1997). The first passage
introduces our hero:

Even those acquainted with Thomas P. Stanwick are often struck by his ap-
pearance. A lean and lanky young man, he stands six feet two inches tall.
His long, thin face is complemented by a full head of brown hair and a droopy
mustache. Though not husky in build, he is surprisingly strong and enjoys
ruggedly good health. His origins and early life are obscure. He is undeniably
well educated, however, for he graduated with high honors from Dartmouth
College as a philosophy major. . . .

MYSTERY 1: A MERE MATTER OF DEDUCTION

Thomas P. Stanwick, the amateur logician, removed a pile of papers from
the extra chair and sat down. His friend Inspector Matthew Walker had just
returned to his office from the interrogation room, and Stanwick thought he
looked unusually weary.

“I’m glad you dropped by, Tom,” said Walker. “We have a difficult case on
hand. Several thousand dollars’ worth of jewelry was stolen from Hoffman’s
Jewel Palace yesterday morning. From some clues at the scene and a few
handy tips, we have it narrowed down to three suspects: Addington, Burke,
and Chatham. We know that at least one of them was involved, and possibly
more than one.”

Exercise XIV

135

An Example of Deep Analys is : Cap ital Pun ishment

“Burke has been suspected in several other cases, hasn’t he?” asked Stanwick
as he filled his pipe.

“Yes, he has,” Walker replied, “but we haven’t been able to nail him yet.
The other two are small potatoes, so what we really want to know is whether
Burke was involved in this one.”

“What have you learned about the three of them?”
“Not too much. Addington and Burke were definitely here in the city

yesterday. Chatham may not have been. Addington never works alone, and
carries a snub-nosed revolver. Chatham always uses an accomplice, and he
was seen lurking in the area last week. He also refuses to work with Adding-
ton, who he says once set him up.”

“Quite a ragamuffin crew!” Stanwick laughed. “Based on what you’ve said,
it’s not too hard to deduce whether Burke was involved.”

Was Burke involved or not?

MYSTERY 2: MURDER IN A LONDON FLAT

Lord Calinore was gunned down in his London flat by a robber, who then
ransacked the flat. The case was placed in the capable hands of Inspector
Gilbert Bodwin of Scotland Yard. Bodwin’s investigation revealed that one
man had planned the crime, another had carried it out, and a third had acted
as lookout.

Bodwin discussed the case at length one evening over dinner at his club with
an old friend, Thomas P. Stanwick, the amateur logician, visiting from America.

“It’s quite a case,” Stanwick remarked. “Have you any suspects?”
Bodwin sliced his roast beef with relish. “Yes, indeed. Four. We have con-

clusive evidence that three of those four were responsible for the crime.”
“Really! That’s remarkable progress. What about the fourth?”
“He had no prior knowledge of the crime and is completely innocent. The

problem is that we’re not sure which of the four are the planner, the gunman, the
lookout, and the innocent bystander.”

“I see.” Stanwick took more Yorkshire pudding. “What do you know about
them at this point?”

“Well, the names of the four are Merrick, Cross, Llewellyn, and Halifax.
Halifax and Cross play golf together every Saturday. They’re an odd pair!
Halifax can’t drive, and Cross has been out of Dartmoor Prison for only a
year.”

“What was he in for?”
“Forgery. We know that Merrick and Halifax kept the flat under surveil-

lance for several days just before the day the crime was committed, the 17th.
Llewellyn and Merrick, with their wives, had dinner together on the Strand
on the 12th.”

“An interesting compilation,” said Stanwick, “but hardly conclusive. Is that
all of it?”

(continued)

136

CHAPTER 5 ■ Deep Analys is

“Not quite. We know that the gunman spent the week before the crime in
Edinburgh, and that the innocent bystander was acquainted with the plan-
ner and the gunman, but not with the lookout.”

“That is very helpful,” said Stanwick with a smile. He raised his wine
glass. “Bodwin, old fellow, your case is complete.”

Who are the planner, the gunman, and the lookout?

MYSTERY 3: A THEFT AT THE ART MUSEUM

The theft of several valuable paintings from the Royston Art Museum created
a sensation throughout New England. Two days after Stanwick’s return from
a visit to Scotland, he was visited by Inspector Matt Walker, who was in charge
of the case. As Stanwick poured tea, Walker quickly brought his friend up to
date on the case.

“We’ve identified the gang of five thieves who must have done this job,”
Walker reported. “Archie McOrr, who never finished high school, is married
to another one of the five, Charlayne Trumbull. The other three are Beverly
Cuttle, Ed Browning, and Douglas Stephens.”

“I thought you told me earlier that only four people were involved in the
robbery,” said Stanwick.

“That’s right. One stayed in the car as the driver, another waited outside and
acted as lookout, and two others entered the museum and carried out the actual
theft. One of the five gang members was not involved in this particular job at all.”

“And the question, I hope,” said Stanwick with a smile, “is who played
what part, if any, in the theft.”

“Exactly.” Walker flipped open his notebook. “Though I’m glad to say that
our investigation is already bearing some fruit. For example, we have good
reason to believe that the lookout has a Ph.D. in art history, and that the
driver was first arrested less than two years ago.”

“A remarkable combination,” Stanwick chuckled.
“Yes, indeed. We know that Douglas was on the scene during the robbery.

One of the actual thieves (who entered the museum) is the sister of Ed Brown-
ing. The other thief is either Archie or his wife.”

“What else do you have on Douglas?” asked Stanwick.
“Not much. Although he’s never learned to drive, he used to be a security

guard at the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York.”
“Interesting. Please go on.”
“The rest is mainly odds and ends.” Walker thumbed through a few more

pages of notes. “Charlayne, an only child, is very talented on the saxophone. Bev-
erly and Ed both have criminal records stretching back a decade or more. We’ve
also learned that the driver has a brother who is not a member of the gang.”

“Most interesting indeed,” remarked Stanwick. He handed Walker a mug
of tea and sat down with his own. “Your investigation has made excellent
progress. So much, in fact, that you already have enough to tell who the
thieves, the lookout, and the driver are.”

Who are they?

137

An Example of Deep Analys is : Cap ital Pun ishment

MYSTERY 4: TRIVIA AND SIGNIFICA

“For April, this is starting out to be a pretty quiet month,” remarked Inspector
Walker as he rummaged in his desk drawer for a cigar.

Thomas P. Stanwick, the amateur logician, finished lighting his pipe and
leaned back in his chair, stretching his long legs forward.

“That is indeed unusual,” he said. “Spring usually makes some young fan-
cies turn to crime. The change is welcome.”

“Not that we police have nothing to do.” Walker lit his cigar. “A couple of
the youth gangs, the Hawks and the Owls, have been screeching at each other
lately. In fact, we heard a rumor that they were planning to fight each other
this Wednesday or Thursday, and we’re scrambling around trying to find out
whether it’s true.”

“The Hawks all go to Royston North High, don’t they?” asked Stanwick.
“That’s right. The Owls are the street-smart dropouts who hang out at

Joe’s Lunch Cafe on Lindhurst. You know that only those who eat at Joe’s col-
lect green matchbooks?”

Stanwick blinked and smiled. “I beg your pardon?”
“That’s right.” Walker picked up a few papers from his desk. “That’s the

sort of trivia I’m being fed in my reports. Not only that, but everyone at Roys-
ton North High wears monogrammed jackets. What else have I got here? Only
kids who hang out on Laraby Street fight on weekdays. Laraby is three blocks
from Lindhurst. The Hawks go out for pizza three times a week.”

“Keep going,” chuckled Stanwick. “It’s wonderful.”
“A hog for useless facts, eh? No one who eats at Joe’s wears a mono-

grammed jacket. The Owls elect a new leader every six months, the Hawks
every year. Elections! Furthermore, everyone who hangs out on Laraby
Street collects green matchbooks. Finally, the older (but not wiser) Owls buy
beer at Johnny’s Package Store.”

Stanwick laughed heartily. “Lewis Carroll,” he said, “the author of Symbolic
Logic and the ‘Alice in Wonderland’ books, taught logic at Oxford, and he used
to construct soriteses, or polysyllogisms [that is, chains of categorical syllo-
gisms], out of material like that. In fact, his were longer and much wilder and
more intricate, but of course they were fiction.

“As it is, the information you’ve cited should ease your worries. Those
gangs won’t get together to fight until at least Saturday.”

How does he know?

NOTE
1 We assess inductive arguments for strength instead of validity, but here we focus on deductive
arguments. Inductive arguments will be examined in Part III, Chapters 8–12.

How to Evaluate
Arguments: Deductive
Standards

After isolating, laying out, and filling in an argument, the next step is to determine

whether that uncovered argument is any good. This assessment, like other evalua-

tions, requires standards. There are two main standards for evaluating arguments:

the deductive standard of validity and the inductive standard of strength. Part II

(which includes Chapters 6 and 7) will investigate the deductive standard of valid-

ity. Part III (which includes Chapters 8–12) will then explore the inductive stan-

dard of strength.

We already saw in Chapter 3 that an argument is valid in our technical sense if

and only if it is not possible that its premises are true and its conclusion false. That

standard sounds simple, but it is not so easy to say how to determine whether this

combination of truth values is or is not possible in a particular case. Sometimes the

validity of an argument can be seen simply by looking at the premises and conclu-

sion viewed as whole propositions. That is the approach of propositional (or senten-

tial) logic, which is the topic of Chapter 6. Another possibility is that the validity of

an argument can be seen only by looking inside premises and conclusions to their

parts, including their subjects and predicates. That is the approach of categorical (or

syllogistic) logic, which is the topic of Chapter 7.

These relatively simple examples of formal logic do not, of course, exhaust the

possibilities. There are many more kinds of formal logic. Many arguments remain

valid, even though their validity is not captured by either propositional or categori-

cal logic. That creates problems that we will face throughout Chapters 6 and 7. Still,

by exploring some simple ways in which arguments can be valid by virtue of their

form alone, we can gain greater insight into the nature of validity and, thereby, into

the standards for assessing arguments.

II

139

This page intentionally left blank

PROPOSITIONAL LOGIC

This chapter begins our investigation of evaluating arguments by means of formal

deductive logic. The first part of the chapter will show how the crucial standard of

validity, which was introduced in Chapter 3, can be developed rigorously in one

area—what is called propositional logic. This branch of logic deals with connectives

such as “and” and “or,” which allow us to build up compound propositions from

simpler ones. Throughout most of the chapter, the focus will be theoretical rather

than immediately practical. It is intended to provide insight into the concept of

validity by examining it in an ideal setting. The chapter will close with a discussion

of the relationship between the ideal language of symbolic logic and the language we

ordinarily speak.

THE FORMAL ANALYSIS OF ARGUMENTS

When we carry out an informal analysis of an argument, we pay close at-
tention to the key words used to present the argument and then ask our-
selves whether these key terms have been used properly. So far, we have
no exact techniques for answering the question of whether a word is used
correctly. We rely, instead, on linguistic instincts that, on the whole, are
fairly good.

In a great many cases, people can tell whether an argument marker, such
as “therefore,” is used correctly in indicating that one claim follows from an-
other. However, if we go on to ask the average intelligent person why one
claim follows from the other, he or she will probably have little to say except,
perhaps, that it is just obvious. In short, it is often easy to see that one claim
follows from another, but to explain why can be difficult. The purpose of this
chapter is to provide such an explanation for some arguments.

This quality of “following from” is elusive, but it is related to the techni-
cal notion of validity, which was introduced in Chapter 3. The focus of our
attention will be largely on the concept of validity. We are not, for the time be-
ing at least, interested in whether this or that argument is valid; we want to
understand validity itself. To this end, the arguments we will examine are so
simple that you will not be able to imagine anyone not understanding them

6

141

142

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

at a glance. Who needs logic to deal with arguments of this kind? There is,
however, good reason for dealing with simple—trivially simple—arguments
at the start. The analytic approach to a complex issue is first to break it down
into subissues, repeating the process until we reach problems simple enough
to be solved. After these simpler problems are solved, we can reverse the
process and construct solutions to larger and more complex problems. When
done correctly, the result of such an analytic process may seem dull and
obvious—and it often is. The discovery of such a process, in contrast, often
demands the insight of genius.

The methods of analysis to be discussed here are formal in a specific way.
In Chapter 3, we gave the following argument as an example of a valid ar-
gument: “All Senators are paid, and Sam is a Senator, so Sam is paid.” The
point could have been made just as well with many similar examples:
(a) “All Senators are paid, and Sally is a Senator, so Sally is paid.” (b) “All
plumbers are paid, and Sally is a plumber, so Sally is paid.” (c) “All
plumbers are dirty, and Sally is a plumber, so Sally is dirty.” These argu-
ments are all valid (though not all are sound). Thus, we can change the per-
son we are talking about, the group that we say the person is in, and the
property that we ascribe to the person and to the group, all without affect-
ing the validity of the argument at all. That flexibility shows that the valid-
ity of this argument does not depend on the particular content of its
premises and conclusion. Instead, the validity of this argument results
solely from its form. Formal validity of this kind is what formal logics try
to capture.

BASIC PROPOSITIONAL CONNECTIVES

CONJUNCTION

The first system of formal logic that we will examine concerns proposi-
tional (or sentential) connectives. Propositional connectives are terms that
allow us to build new propositions from old ones, usually combining two
or more propositions into a single proposition. For example, given the
propositions “John is tall” and “Harry is short,” we can use the term “and”
to conjoin them, forming a single compound proposition: “John is tall and
Harry is short.”

Let us look carefully at the simple word “and” and ask how it functions.
“And” is a curious word, for it does not seem to stand for anything, at least
in the way in which a proper name (“Churchill”) and a common noun
(“dog”) seem to stand for things. Instead of asking what this word stands for,
we can ask a different question: What truth conditions govern this connective?
That is, under what conditions are propositions containing this connective
true? To answer this question, we imagine every possible way in which the
component propositions can be true or false. Then, for each combination, we

143

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

decide what truth value to assign to the entire proposition. This may sound
complicated, but an example will make it clear:

John is tall. Harry is short. John is tall and Harry is short.

T T T

T F F

F T F

F F F

Here the first two columns cover every possibility for the component propo-
sitions to be either true or false. The third column states the truth value of
the whole proposition for each combination. Clearly, the conjunction of two
propositions is true if both of the component propositions are true; other-
wise, it is false.

Our reflections have not depended on the particular propositions in our
example. We could have been talking about dinosaurs instead of people, and
we still would have come to the conclusion that the conjunction of two propo-
sitions is true if both propositions are true, but false otherwise. This neglect of
the particular content of propositions is what makes our account formal.

To reflect the generality of our concerns, we can drop the reference to par-
ticular sentences altogether and use variables instead. Just as the lowercase
letters “x,” “y,” and “z” can be replaced by any numbers in mathematics, so
we can use the lowercase letters “p,” “q,” “r,” “s,” and so on as variables that
can be replaced by any propositions in logic. We will also use the symbol
“&” (called an ampersand) for “and.”

Consider the expression “p & q.” Is it true or false? There is obviously no
answer to this question. This is not because we do not know what “p” and
“q” stand for, for in fact “p” and “q” do not stand for any proposition at all.
Just as “x + y” is not any particular number in mathematics, so “p & q” is not
a proposition. Instead, “p & q” is a pattern for a whole series of propositions.
To reflect this, we will say that “p & q” is a propositional form. It is a pattern,
or form, for a whole series of propositions, including “John is tall and Harry
is short” as well as many other propositions.

To specify precisely which propositions have the form “p & q,” we need a
little technical terminology. The central idea is that we can pass from a propo-
sition to a propositional form by replacing propositions with propositional
variables.

Proposition Propositional Form

John is tall and Harry is short. p & q

When we proceed in the opposite direction by uniformly substituting
propositions for propositional variables, we get what we will call a substitu-
tion instance of that propositional form.

Propositional Form Substitution Instance

p & q Roses are red and violets are blue.

144

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

Thus, “John is tall and Harry is short” and “Roses are red and violets are
blue” are both substitution instances of the propositional form “p & q.”

To get clear about these ideas, it is important to notice that “p” is also a
propositional form, with every proposition, including “Roses are red and
violets are blue,” among its substitution instances. There is no rule against
substituting compound propositions for propositional variables. Perhaps a
bit more surprisingly, our definitions allow “Roses are red and roses are
red” to be a substitution instance of “p & q.” This example makes sense if
you compare it to variables in mathematics. Using only positive integers,
how many solutions are there to the equation “x + y = 4“? There are three:
3 + 1, 1 + 3, and 2 + 2. The fact that “2 + 2” is a solution to “x + y = 4” shows
that “2” can be substituted for both “x” and “y” in the same solution.
That’s just like allowing “Roses are red” to be substituted for both “p” and
“q,” so that “Roses are red and roses are red” is a substitution instance of
“p & q” in propositional logic.

In general, then, we get a substitution instance of a propositional form by
uniformly replacing the same variable with the same proposition throughout,
but different variables do not have to be replaced with different propositions.
The rule is this:

Different variables may be replaced with the same proposition, but
different propositions may not be replaced with the same variable.

According to this rule:

“Roses are red and violets are blue” is a substitution instance of “p & q.”

“Roses are red and violets are blue” is also a substitution instance of “p.”

“Roses are red and roses are red” is a substitution instance of “p & q.”

“Roses are red and roses are red” is a substitution instance of “p & p.”

“Roses are red and violets are blue” is not a substitution instance of “p & p.”

“Roses are red” is not a substitution instance of “p & p.”

We are now in a position to give a perfectly general definition of conjunction
with the following truth table, using propositional variables where previously
we used specific propositions.

p q p & q

T T T

T F F

F T F

F F F

There is no limit to the number of propositions we can conjoin to form a new
proposition. “Roses are red and violets are blue; sugar is sweet and so are you”
is a substitution instance of “p & q & r & s.” We can also use parentheses to

145

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

group propositions. This last example could be treated as a substitution instance
of “(p & q) & (r & s)“—that is, as a conjunction of two conjunctions. Later we will
see that, just as in mathematics, parentheses can make an important difference
to the meaning of a total proposition.

One cautionary note: The word “and” is not always used to connect two
distinct sentences. Sometimes a sentence has to be rewritten for us to see
that it is equivalent to a sentence of this form. For example,

Serena and Venus are tennis players.

is simply a short way of saying

Serena is a tennis player, and Venus is a tennis player.

At other times, the word “and” is not used to produce a conjunction of
propositions. For example,

Serena and Venus are playing each other.

does not mean that

Serena is playing each other, and Venus is playing each other.

That does not even make sense, so the original sentence cannot express a
conjunction of two propositions. Instead, it expresses a single proposition
about two people taken as a group. Consequently, it should not be symbol-
ized as “p & q.” Often, unfortunately, it is unclear whether a sentence ex-
presses a conjunction of propositions or a single proposition about a group.
The sentence

Serena and Venus are playing tennis.

could be taken either way. Maybe Serena and Venus are playing each other.
If that is what it means, then the sentence expresses a single proposition
about a group, so it should not be symbolized as “p & q.” But maybe Serena
is playing one match, while Venus is playing another. If that would make it
true, then the sentence expresses a conjunction of propositions, so it may be
symbolized as “p & q.”

When a sentence containing the word “and” expresses the conjunction of
two propositions, we will say that it expresses a propositional conjunction.
When a sentence containing “and” does not express the conjunction of two
propositions, we will say that it expresses a nonpropositional conjunction. In
this chapter we are concerned only with sentences that express proposi-
tional conjunctions. A sentence should be translated into the symbolic form
“p & q” only if it expresses a propositional conjunction. There is no mechani-
cal procedure that can be followed to determine whether a certain sentence
expresses a conjunction of two propositions. You must think carefully about
what the sentence means and about the context in which that sentence is
used. This takes practice.

146

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

Which of the following propositions is a substitution instance of “p & q & q“?

1. The night is young, and you’re so beautiful, and my flight leaves in thirty
minutes.

2. The night is young, and you’re so beautiful, and my flight leaves in thirty
minutes, and my flight leaves in thirty minutes.

3. You’re so beautiful, and you’re so beautiful, and you’re so beautiful.

Exercise II

For each of the following propositions, give three different propositional forms
of which that proposition is a substitution instance.

1. The night is young, and you’re so beautiful, and my flight leaves in thirty
minutes.

2. The night is young, and you’re so beautiful, and you’re so beautiful.

Exercise III

Indicate whether each of the following sentences expresses a propositional con-
junction or a nonpropositional conjunction—that is, whether or not it expresses
a conjunction of two propositions. If the sentence could be either, then specify a
context in which it would naturally be used to express a propositional conjunc-
tion and a different context in which it would naturally be used to express a
nonpropositional conjunction.

1. A Catholic priest married John and Mary.

2. Fred had pie and ice cream for dessert.

3. The winning presidential candidate rarely loses both New York
and California.

Exercise IV

The proposition “The night is young, and you’re so beautiful” is a substitution
instance of which of the following propositional forms?

1. p

2. q

3. p & q

4. p & r

Exercise I

5. p & q & r

6. p & p

7. p or q

147

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

Now we can look at an argument involving conjunction. Here is one that
is ridiculously simple:

Harry is short and John is tall.

Harry is short.

This argument is obviously valid. But why is it valid? Why does the conclusion
follow from the premise? The answer in this case seems obvious, but we will
spell it out in detail as a guide for more difficult cases. Suppose we replace
these particular propositions with propositional forms, using a different vari-
able for each distinct proposition throughout the argument. This yields what
we will call an argument form. For example:

p & q

p

This is a pattern for endlessly many arguments, each of which is called a sub-
stitution instance of this argument form. Every argument that has this general
form will also be valid. It really does not matter which propositions we put into
this schema; the resulting argument will be valid—so long as we are careful to
substitute the same proposition for the same variable throughout.

Let’s pursue this matter further. If an argument has true premises and a
false conclusion, then we know at once that it is invalid. But in saying that an
argument is valid, we are not only saying that it does not have true premises
and a false conclusion; we are also saying that the argument cannot have a
false conclusion when the premises are true. Sometimes this is true because
the argument has a structure or form that rules out the very possibility of true
premises and a false conclusion. We can appeal to the notion of an argument
form to make sense of this idea. A somewhat more complicated truth table
will make this clear:

PREMISE CONCLUSION

p q p & q p

T T T T

T F F T

F T F F

F F F F

4. Susan got married and had a child.

5. Jane speaks both French and English.

6. Someone who speaks both French and English is bilingual.

7. Ken and Naomi are two of my best friends.

8. Miranda and Nick cooked dinner.

9. I doubt that John is poor and happy.

148

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

The first two columns give all the combinations for the truth values of the
propositions that we might substitute for “p” and “q.” The third column
gives the truth value of the premise for each of these combinations. (This
column is the same as the definition for “&” given above.) Finally, the fourth
column gives the truth value for the conclusion for each combination. (Here,
of course, this merely involves repeating the first column. Later on, things
will become more complicated and interesting.) If we look at this truth table,
we see that no matter how we make substitutions for the variables, we never
have a case in which the premise is true and the conclusion is false. In
the first line, the premise is true and the conclusion is also true. In the re-
maining three lines, the premise is not true, so the possibility of the premise
being true and the conclusion false does not arise.

Here it is important to remember that a valid argument can have false
premises, for one proposition can follow from another proposition that is
false. Of course, an argument that is sound cannot have a false premise, be-
cause a sound argument is defined as a valid argument with true premises.
But our subject here is validity, not soundness.

Let’s summarize this discussion. In the case we have examined, validity
depends on the form of an argument and not on its particular content. A first
principle, then, is this:

An argument is valid if it is an instance of a valid argument form.

Hence, the argument “Harry is short and John is tall; therefore, Harry is
short” is valid because it is an instance of the valid argument form “p & q;

p.”
Next we must ask what makes an argument form valid. The answer to

this is given in this principle:

An argument form is valid if and only if it has no substitution instances
in which the premises are true and the conclusion is false.

We have just seen that the argument form “p & q; p” passes this test. The
truth table analysis showed that. Incidentally, we can use the same truth
table to show that the following argument is valid:

John is tall.
Harry is short.

John is tall and Harry is short.

p
q

p & q

The argument on the left is a substitution instance of the argument form on
the right. A glance at the truth table will show that there can be no cases for
which all the premises could be true and the conclusion false. This pretty
well covers the logical properties of conjunction.

Notice that we have not said that every argument that is valid is so in virtue
of its form. There may be arguments in which the conclusion follows from the
premises but we cannot show how the argument’s validity is a matter of logical

149

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

form. There are, in fact, some obviously valid arguments that have yet to be
shown to be valid in terms of their form. Explaining validity by means of logi-
cal form has long been an ideal of logical theory, but there are arguments—
many of them quite common—where this ideal has yet to be adequately
fulfilled. Many arguments in mathematics fall into this category. At present,
however, we will only consider arguments in which the strategy we used for
analyzing conjunction continues to work.

Are the following arguments valid by virtue of their propositional form? Why
or why not?

1. Donald owns a tower in New York and a palace in Atlantic City.
Therefore, Donald owns a palace in Atlantic City.

2. Tom owns a house. Therefore, Tom owns a house and a piece of land.

3. Ilsa is tall. Therefore, Ilsa is tall, and Ilsa is tall.

4. Bernie has a son and a daughter. Bernie has a father and a mother.
Therefore, Bernie has a son and a mother.

5. Mary got married and had a child. Therefore, Mary had a child and got
married.

6. Bess and Katie tied for MVP. Therefore, Bess tied for MVP.

Exercise V

For each of the following claims, determine whether it is true or false. Defend
your answers.

1. An argument that is a substitution instance of a valid argument form is
always valid.

2. An argument that is a substitution instance of an invalid argument form is
always invalid.

3. An invalid argument is always a substitution instance of an invalid argu-
ment form.

Exercise VI

Is a valid argument always a substitution instance of a valid argument form?
Why or why not?

Discussion Question

150

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

DISJUNCTION

Just as we can form a conjunction of two propositions by using the connective
“and,” we can form a disjunction of two propositions by using the connective
“or,” as in the following compound sentence:

John will win or Harry will win.

Again, it is easy to see that the truth of this whole compound proposition
depends on the truth of the component propositions. If they are both false,
then the compound proposition is false. If just one of them is true, then the
compound proposition is true. But suppose they are both true. What shall
we say then?

Sometimes when we say “either-or,” we seem to rule out the possibility of
both. When a waiter approaches your table and tells you, “Tonight’s dinner
will be chicken or steak,” this suggests that you cannot have both. In other
cases, however, it does not seem that the possibility of both is ruled out—for
example, when we say to someone, “If you want to see tall mountains, go to
California or Colorado.”

One way to deal with this problem is to say that the English word “or” has
two meanings: one exclusive, which rules out both, and one inclusive, which
does not rule out both. Another solution is to claim that the English word “or”
always has the inclusive sense, but utterances with “or” sometimes conversa-
tionally imply the exclusion of both because of special features of certain con-
texts. It is, for example, our familiarity with common restaurant practices that
leads us to infer that we cannot have both when the waiter says, “Tonight’s din-
ner will be chicken or steak.” If we may have both, then the waiter’s utterance
would not be as informative as is required for the purpose of revealing our op-
tions, so it would violate Grice’s conversational rule of Quantity (as discussed
in Chapter 2). That explains why the waiter’s utterance seems to exclude both.

Because such explanations are plausible, and because it is simpler as well
as traditional to develop propositional logic with the inclusive sense of
“or,” we will adopt that inclusive sense. Where necessary, we will define
the exclusive sense using the inclusive sense as a starting point. Logicians
symbolize disjunctions using the connective “ ” (called a wedge). The truth
table for this connective has the following form:

p q p q

T T T

T F T

F T T

F F F

We will look at some arguments involving this connective in a moment.

NEGATION

With conjunction and disjunction, we begin with two propositions and con-
struct a new proposition from them. There is another way in which we can
construct a new proposition from just one proposition—by negating it.

151

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

Given the proposition “John is clever,” we can get a new proposition, “John
is not clever,” simply by inserting the word “not” in the correct place in the
sentence.

What, exactly, does the word “not” mean? This can be a difficult question
to answer. Does it mean “nothing” or, maybe, “nothingness“? Although
some respectable philosophers have sometimes spoken in this way, it is im-
portant to see that the word “not” does not stand for anything at all. It has an
altogether different function in the language. To see this, think about how
conjunction and disjunction work. Given two propositions, the word “and”
allows us to construct another proposition that is true only when both origi-
nal propositions are true, and false otherwise. With disjunction, given two
propositions, the word “or” allows us to construct another proposition that is
false only when both of the original propositions are false, and true other-
wise. (Our truth table definitions reflect these facts.) Using these definitions
as models, how should we define negation? A parallel answer is that the
negation of a proposition is true just in the cases in which the original propo-
sition is false, and it is false just in the cases in which original proposition is
true. Using the symbol “~” (called a tilde) to stand for negation, this gives us
the following truth table definition:

p ~p

T F

F T

Negation might seem as simple as can be, but people quite often get con-
fused by negations. If Diana says, “I could not breathe for a whole minute,”
she might mean that there was a minute when something made her unable
to breathe (maybe she was choking) or she might mean that she was able to
hold her breath for a whole minute (say, to win a bet). If “A” symbolizes
“Diana could breathe sometime during this minute,” then “~A” symbolizes
the former claim (that Diana was unable to breathe for this minute). Conse-
quently, the latter claim (that Diana could hold her breath for this minute)
should not also be symbolized by “~A.” Indeed, this interpretation of the
original sentence is not a negation, even though the original sentence did in-
clude the word “not.” Moreover, some sentences are negations even though
they do not include the word “not.” For example, “Nobody owns Mars” is
the negation of “Somebody owns Mars.” If the latter is symbolized as “A,”
the former can be symbolized as “~A,” even though the former does not
include the word “not.”

The complexities of negation can be illustrated by noticing that the simple
sentence “Everyone loves running” can include negation at four distinct
places: “Not everyone loves running,“ “Everyone does not love running,“
“Everyone loves not running,“ and the colloquial “Everyone loves running—
not!” Some of these sentences can be symbolized in propositional logic as
negations of “Everyone loves running,“ but others cannot.

To determine whether a sentence can be symbolized as a negation in
propositional logic, it is often useful to reformulate the sentence so that it

152

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

starts with “It is not the case that . . . .” For example, “I did none of the
homework” would be reformulated as “It is not the case that I did any of the
homework.” If the resulting sentence means the same as the original (as it
does in this example), then the original sentence can be symbolized as a
propositional negation. In contrast, “I promise not to leave you” means
something very different from “It is not the case that I promise to leave
you,“ so “I promise not to leave you” should not be symbolized as a propo-
sitional negation.

Unfortunately, this test will not always work. There is no complete mechan-
ical procedure for determining whether an English sentence can be symbolized
as a negation. All you can do is think carefully about the sentence’s meaning
and context. The best way to get good at this is to practice.

Put each of the following sentences in symbolic form. Be sure to specify ex-
actly which sentence is represented by each capital letter, and pay special at-
tention to the placement of the negation. If the sentence could be interpreted

Exercise IX

Negative terms or prefixes can often be interpreted in more than one way.
Explain two ways to interpret each of the following sentences. Describe a con-
text in which it would be natural to interpret it in each way.

1. You may not go to the meeting.

2. I cannot recommend him too highly.

3. He never thought he’d go to the Himalayas.

4. Have you not done all of your homework?

5. All of his friends are not students.

6. I will not go to some football games next season.

7. No smoking section available.

8. The lock on his locker was unlockable.

Exercise VIII

Explain the differences in meaning among “Not everyone loves running,”
“Everyone does not love running,” “Everyone loves not running,” and
“Everyone loves running—not!” For each, is it a negation of “Everyone loves
running“? Why or why not?

Exercise VII

153

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

PROCESS OF ELIMINATION

Using only negation and disjunction, we can analyze the form of one common
pattern of reasoning, which is called process of elimination or, more technically,
disjunctive syllogism. As an example, consider this argument:

Her phone line is busy, so she must either be talking on the phone or using
her modem. She is not using her modem, since I just tried to e-mail her and
she did not respond. So she must be talking on the phone.

After trimming off assurances and subarguments that support the premises,
the core of this argument can be put in standard form:

(1) She is either using her modem or talking on the phone.
(2) She is not using her modem.

(3) She is talking on the phone. (from 1–2)

This core argument is then an instance of this argument form:

1. p q
~p

q

It does not matter if we change the order of the disjuncts so that the first
premise is “She must be either talking on the phone or using her modem.”
Then the argument takes this form:

2. p q
~q

p

Both of these argument forms are valid, so the core of the original argument is
also valid.

in more than one way, symbolize each interpretation and describe a context in
which it would be natural to interpret it in each way.

1. It won’t rain tomorrow.

2. It might not rain tomorrow.

3. There is no chance that it will rain tomorrow.

4. I believe that it won’t rain tomorrow.

5. Joe is not too smart or else he’s very clever.

6. Kristin is not smart or rich.

7. Sometimes you feel like a nut; sometimes you don’t. (from an advertisement
for Mounds and Almond Joy candies, which are made by the same company
and are exactly alike except that only one of them has a nut)

154

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

Process of elimination is sometimes confused with a similar but crucially
different pattern of reasoning, which can be called affirming a disjunct. This
pattern includes both of these forms:

3. p q
p

~q

Explain why argument forms 1–2 are valid. Use common language that would
be understandable to someone who has not read this chapter.

Exercise X

Give other instances of argument forms 3–4 that are not valid. Explain why
these instances are invalid and why they show that the general argument form
is invalid.

Exercise XI

HOW TRUTH-FUNCTIONAL CONNECTIVES WORK

We have now defined conjunction, disjunction, and negation. That, all by it-
self, is sufficient to complete the branch of modern logic called propositional
logic. The definitions themselves may seem peculiar. They do not look like the
definitions we find in a dictionary. But the form of these definitions is impor-
tant, for it tells us something interesting about the character of such words as
“and,” “or,” and “not.” Two things are worth noting: (1) These expressions are
used to construct a new proposition from old ones; (2) the newly constructed
proposition is always a truth function of the original propositions—that is, the

4. p q
q

~p

These forms of argument are invalid. This can be shown by the following
single instance:

She is either using her modem or talking on the phone.
She is using her modem.

She is not talking on the phone.

This argument might seem valid if one assumes that she cannot talk on the
phone while using her modem. The premises, however, do not specify that she
has only one phone line. If she talks on one phone line while using her modem
on a different phone line, then the premises are true and the conclusion is false.
Because this is possible, the argument is invalid, and so is its form, 3. Moreover,
this argument would remain invalid if the disjuncts were listed in a different
order, so that the argument took the form of 4. Thus, affirming a disjunct is a
fallacy.

155

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

truth value of the new proposition is always determined by the truth value of
the original propositions. For this reason, these connectives are called truth-
functional connectives. (Of course, with negation, we start with a single proposi-
tion, so there are not really two things to connect.) For example, suppose that
“A” and “B” are two true propositions and “G” and “H” are two false propo-
sitions. We can then determine the truth values of more complex propositions
built from them using conjunction, disjunction, and negation. Sometimes the
correct assignment is obvious at a glance:

A & B True
A & G False
~A False
~G True
A H True
G H False
~A & G False

As noted earlier, parentheses can be used to distinguish groupings. Some-
times the placement of parentheses can make an important difference, as in
the following two expressions:

~A & G

~(A & G)

Notice that in one expression the negation symbol applies only to the propo-
sition “A,” whereas in the other expression it applies to the entire proposition
“A & G.” Thus, the first expression above is false, and the second expression
is true. Only the second expression can be translated as “Not both A and G.”
Both of these expressions are different from “~A & ~G,” which means “Nei-
ther A nor G.”

As expressions become more complex, we reach a point where it is no
longer obvious how the truth values of the component propositions determine
the truth value of the entire proposition. Here a regular procedure is helpful.
The easiest method is to fill in the truth values of the basic propositions and
then, step-by-step, make assignments progressively wider, going from the in-
side out. For example:

~((A G) & ~(~H & B))

~((T F) & ~(~F & T))

~((T F) & ~(T & T))

~(T & ~(T))

~(T & F)

~(F)

T

With a little practice, you can master this technique in dealing with other
very complex examples.

156

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

TESTING FOR VALIDITY

What is the point of all this? In everyday life, we rarely run into an expres-
sion as complicated as the one in our example at the end of the previous
section. Our purpose here is to sharpen our sensitivity to how truth-
functional connectives work and then to express our insights in clear ways.
This is important because the validity of many arguments depends on the
logical features of these truth-functional connectives. We can now turn di-
rectly to this subject.

Earlier we saw that every argument with the form “p & q; p” will be
valid. This is obvious in itself, but we saw that this claim could be justified
by an appeal to truth tables. A truth table analysis shows us that an argu-
ment with this form can never have an instance in which the premise is true
and the conclusion is false. We can now apply this same technique to argu-
ments that are more complex. In the beginning, we will examine arguments
that are still easy to follow without the use of technical help. In the end, we
will consider some arguments that most people cannot follow without
guidance.

Consider the following argument:

Valerie is either a doctor or a lawyer.
Valerie is neither a doctor nor a stockbroker.

Valerie is a lawyer.

We can use the following abbreviations:

D = Valerie is a doctor.

L = Valerie is a lawyer.

S = Valerie is a stockbroker.

Given that “A,” “B,” and “C” are true propositions and “X,” “Y,” and “Z” are
false propositions, determine the truth values of the following compound
propositions:

1. ~X Y 9. ~(A (Z X))

2. ~(X Y) 10. ~(A ~(Z X))

3. ~(Z Z) 11. ~A ~(Z X)

4. ~(Z ~Z) 12. ~Z (Z & A)

5. ~ ~(A B) 13. ~(Z (Z & A))

6. (A Z) & B 14. ~((Z Z) & A)

7. (A X) & (B Z) 15. A ((~B & C) ~(~B ~(Z B)))

8. (A & Z) (B & Z) 16. A & ((~B & C) ~(~B ~(Z B)))

Exercise XII

157

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

Using these abbreviations, the argument and its counterpart argument
form look like this:

D L
~(D S)

L

PREMISE PREMISE CONCLUSION

p q r (p q) (p r) ~(p r) q

T T T T T F T

T T F T T F T

T F T T T F F

T F F T T F F

F T T T T F T

F T F T F T T OK

F F T F T F F

F F F F F T F

Notice that there is only one combination of truth values for which both
premises are true, and in that case the conclusion is true as well. So the origi-
nal argument is valid because it is an instance of a valid argument form—that
is, an argument form with no substitution instances for which true premises
are combined with a false conclusion.

This last truth table may need some explaining. First, why do we get eight
rows in this truth table where before we got only four? The answer to this is
that we need to test the argument form for every possible combination of truth
values for the component propositions. With two variables, there are four
possible combinations: (TT), (TF), (FT), and (FF). With three variables, there
are eight possible combinations: (TTT), (TTF), (TFT), (TFF), (FTT), (FTF),
(FFT), and (FFF). The general rule is this: If an argument form has n vari-
ables, the truth table used in its analysis must have 2n rows. For four vari-
ables there will be sixteen rows; for five variables, thirty-two rows; for six
variables, sixty-four rows; and so on. You can be sure that you capture all
possible combinations of truth values by using the following pattern in con-
structing the columns of your truth table under each individual variable:

First column Second column Third column . . .

First half Ts, First quarter Ts, First eighth Ts,

second half Fs. second quarter Fs, second eighth Fs,

and so on. and so on.

A glance at the earlier examples in this chapter will show that we have been
using this pattern, and it is the standard way of listing the possibilities.

p q
~(p r)

q

The expression on the right gives the argument form of the argument pre-
sented on the left. To test the argument for validity, we ask whether the argu-
ment form is valid. The procedure is cumbersome, but perfectly mechanical:

158

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

Of course, as soon as an argument becomes at all complex, these truth tables
become very large indeed. But there is no need to worry about this, because
we will not consider arguments with many variables. Those who do so turn
to a computer for help.

The style of the truth table above is also significant. The premises are
plainly labeled, and so is the conclusion. A line is drawn under every row
in which the premises are all true. (In this case, there is only one such row—
row 6.) If the conclusion on this line is also true, it is marked “OK.” If every
line in which the premises are all true is OK, then the argument form
is valid. Marking all this may seem rather childish, but it is worth doing.
First, it helps guard against mistakes. More importantly, it draws one’s
attention to the purpose of the procedure being used. Cranking out truth
tables without understanding what they are about—or even why they
might be helpful—does not enlighten the mind or elevate the spirit.

For the sake of contrast, we can next consider an invalid argument:

(1) Valerie is either a doctor or a lawyer.
(2) Valerie is not both a lawyer and a stockbroker.

(3) Therefore, Valerie is a doctor.

Using the same abbreviations as earlier, this becomes:

D L p q
~(L & S) ~(q & r)

D p

The truth table for this argument form looks like this:

PREMISE PREMISE CONCLUSION

p q r (p q) (q & r) ˜(q & r) p

T T T T T F T

T T F T F T T OK

T F T T F T T OK

T F F T F T T OK

F T T T T F F

F T F T F T F Invalid

F F T F F T F

F F F F F T F

This time, we find four rows in which all the premises are true. In three cases
the conclusion is true as well, but in one of these cases (row 6), the conclusion
is false. This line is marked “Invalid.” Notice that every line in which all of
the premises are true is marked either as “OK” or as “Invalid.” If even one
row is marked “Invalid,” then the argument form as a whole is invalid. The
argument form under consideration is thus invalid, because it is possible for
it to have a substitution instance in which all the premises are true and the
conclusion is false.

159

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

The labeling not only shows that the argument form is invalid, it also shows
why it is invalid. Each line that is marked “Invalid” shows a combination of
truth values that makes the premises true and the conclusion false. Row 6
presents the combination in which Valerie is not a doctor, is a lawyer, and is
not a stockbroker. With these assignments, it will be true that she is either a
doctor or a lawyer (premise 1), and also true that she is not both a lawyer and
a stockbroker (premise 2), yet false that she is a doctor (the conclusion). It is
this possibility that shows why the argument form is not valid.

In sum, we can test a propositional argument form for validity by following
these simple steps:

1. Provide a column for each premise and the conclusion.

2. Fill in truth values in each column.

3. Underline each row where all of the premises are true.

4. Mark each row “OK” if the conclusion is true on that row.

5. Mark each row “Invalid” if the conclusion is false on that row.

6. If any row is marked “Invalid,” the argument form is invalid.

7. If no row is marked “Invalid,” the argument form is valid.

Using the truth table technique outlined above, show that argument forms 1–2
in the above section on process of elimination are valid and that argument
forms 3–4 in the same section are invalid.

Exercise XIII

Using the truth table technique outlined above, explain why the “Tricky Case”
that was mentioned in Chapter 2 is valid.

Exercise XIV

Using the truth table technique outlined above, test the following argument
forms for validity:

1. ~ p q
p

~q

2. ~ (p q)

~q

Exercise XV

3. ~ (p q)
p

q

4. ~ (p q)
p

r

(continued)

160

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

SOME FURTHER CONNECTIVES

We have developed the logic of propositions using only three basic notions cor-
responding (perhaps roughly) to the English words “and,” “or,” and “not.”
Now let us go back to the question of the two possible senses of the word “or“:
one exclusive and the other inclusive. Sometimes “or” seems to rule out the
possibility that both alternatives are true; at other times “or” seems to allow this
possibility. This is the difference between exclusive and inclusive disjunction.

Suppose we use the symbol “ ” to stand for exclusive disjunction. This is
the same as the symbol for inclusive disjunction except that it is underlined.
(After this discussion, we will not use it again.) We could then give two truth
table definitions, one for each of these symbols:

INCLUSIVE EXCLUSIVE

p q p q p q

T T T F

T F T T

F T T T

F F F F

We could also define this new connective in the following way:

(p q) = (by definition) ((p q) & ~(p & q))

It is not hard to see that the expression on the right side of this definition
captures the force of exclusive disjunction. Because we can always define
exclusive disjunction when we want it, there is no need to introduce it into
our system of basic notions.

5. ~ (p & q)
q

~ p

6. ~ (p & q)
~q

p

7. (p & q) (p & r)

p & (q r)

Construct a truth table analysis of the expression on the right side of the pre-
ceding definition, and compare it with the truth table definition of exclusive
disjunction.

Exercise XVI

8. (p q) & (p r)

p & (q r)

9. p & q

(p r) & (q r)

10. p q

(p & r) (q & r)

161

Bas ic Propos it ional Connect ives

Actually, in analyzing arguments we have been defining new logical con-
nectives without thinking about it much. For example, “not both p and q” was
symbolized as “~(p & q).” “Neither p nor q” was symbolized as “~(p q).” Let
us look more closely at the example “~(p q).” Perhaps we should have sym-
bolized it as “~p & ~q.” In fact, we could have used this symbolization, because
the two expressions amount to the same thing. Again, this may be obvious, but
we can prove it by using a truth table in yet another way. Compare the truth
table analysis of these two expressions:

p q ˜p ˜q ˜p & ˜q (p q) ˜(p q)

T T F F F T F

T F F T F T F

F T T F F T F

F F T T T F T

Under “~p & ~q” we find the column (FFFT), and we find the same sequence
under “~(p q).” This shows that, for every possible substitution we make,
these two expressions will yield propositions with the same truth value. We
will say that these propositional forms are truth-functionally equivalent. The
above table also shows that the expressions “~q” and “~p & ~q” are not
truth-functionally equivalent, because the columns underneath these two
expressions differ in the second row, so some substitutions into these expres-
sions will not yield propositions with the same truth value.

Given the notion of truth-functional equivalence, the problem of more
than one translation can often be solved. If two translations of a sentence are
truth-functionally equivalent, then it does not matter which one we use in
testing for validity. Of course, some translations will seem more natural than
others. For example, “p q” is truth-functionally equivalent to

~((~p & ~p) & (~q ~q))

Despite this equivalence, the first form of expression is obviously more nat-
ural than the second when translating sentences, such as “It is either cloudy
or sunny.”

Use truth tables to test the following argument forms for validity:

1. p

p q

2. p q
p

~q

3. p & q

~(p q)

Exercise XVII

4. ~(p & q)

p q

5. p q

p q

6. p q

p q

162

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

Use truth tables to test which of the following propositional forms are truth-
functionally equivalent to each other:

1. ~(p q)

2. ~(~p ~q)

3. ~p & ~q

4. p & q

Exercise XVIII

Use truth tables to determine whether the expressions in each of the following
pairs are truth-functionally equivalent:

1. “p” and “p & p” 9. “~(p q)” and “~p q”

2. “p” and “p p” 10. “~(p q)” and “~p & ~q”

3. “p ~p” and “~(p & ~p)” 11. “~~(p q)” and “~~p & ~~q”

4. “p” and “p & (q ~q)“ 12. “~(p & q)” and “~p q”

5. “p” and “p & (q & ~q)” 13. “~~(p & q)” and “~~p ~~q”

6. “p” and “p (q & ~q)” 14. “~~p ~~q” and “~(~p & ~q)”

7. “p & (q r)” and “p (q & r)” 15. “~~p & ~~q” and “~(~p ~q)”

8. “p & (q & r)” and “(p & q) & r” 16. “p & ~~q” and “~~p & q”

Exercise XIX

CONDITIONALS

So far in this chapter we have seen that by using conjunction, disjunction,
and negation, it is possible to construct compound propositions out of sim-
ple propositions. A distinctive feature of compound propositions con-
structed in these three ways is that the truth of the compound proposition is
always a function of the truth of its component propositions. Thus, these
three notions allow us to construct truth-functionally compound proposi-
tions. Some arguments depend for their validity simply on these truth-
functional connectives. When this is so, it is possible to test for validity in a
purely mechanical way. This can be done through the use of truth tables.
Thus, in this area at least, we are able to give a clear account of validity and
to specify exact procedures for testing for validity.

This truth-functional approach might seem problematic in another area:
conditionals. We will argue that an important group of conditionals can be
handled in much the same way as negation, conjunction, and disjunction.
We separate conditionals from the other connectives only because a truth-
functional treatment of conditionals is more controversial and faces prob-
lems that are instructive.

163

Cond it ionals

Conditionals have the form “If , then .” What goes in the first
blank of this pattern is called the antecedent of the conditional; what goes in
the second blank is called its consequent. Sometimes conditionals appear in
the indicative mood:

If it rains, then the crop will be saved.

Sometimes they occur in the subjunctive mood:

If it had rained, then the crop would have been saved.

There are also conditional imperatives:

If a fire breaks out, then call the fire department first!

And there are conditional promises:

If you get into trouble, then I promise to help you.

Indeed, conditionals get a great deal of use in our language, often in argu-
ments. It is important, therefore, to understand them.

Unfortunately, there is no general agreement among experts concerning
the correct way to analyze conditionals. We will simplify matters and avoid
some of these controversies by considering only indicative conditionals. We
will not examine conditional imperatives, conditional promises, or subjunc-
tive conditionals. Furthermore, at the start, we will examine only what we
will call propositional conditionals. We get a propositional conditional by sub-
stituting indicative sentences that express propositions—something either
true or false—into the schema “If , then .” Or, to use technical
language already introduced, a propositional conditional is a substitution
instance of “If p, then q” in which “p” and “q” are propositional variables. Of
the four conditional sentences listed above, only the first is clearly a propo-
sitional conditional.

Even if we restrict our attention to propositional conditionals, this will not
avoid all controversy. Several competing theories claim to provide the correct
analysis of propositional conditionals, and no consensus has been reached
concerning which is right. It may seem surprising that theorists disagree
about such a simple and fundamental notion as the if-then construction, but
they do. In what follows, we will first describe the most standard treatment
of propositional conditionals, and then consider alternatives to it.

TRUTH TABLES FOR CONDITIONALS

For conjunction, disjunction, and negation, the truth table method provides
an approach that is at once plausible and effective. A propositional condi-
tional is also compounded from two simpler propositions, and this suggests
that we might be able to offer a truth table definition for these conditionals
as well. What should the truth table look like? When we try to answer this
question, we get stuck almost at once, for it is unclear how we should fill in
the table in three out of four cases.

164

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

p q If p, then q

T T ?

T F F

F T ?

F F ?

It seems obvious that a conditional cannot be true if the antecedent is true
and the consequent is false. We record this by putting “F” in the second row.
But suppose “p” and “q” are replaced by two arbitrary true propositions—
say, “Two plus two equals four” and “Chile is in South America.” Consider
what we shall say about the conditional:

If two plus two equals four, then Chile is in South America.

This is a very strange statement, because the arithmetical remark in the an-
tecedent does not seem to have anything to do with the geographical remark
in the consequent. So this conditional is odd—indeed, extremely odd—but is it
true or false? At this point, a reasonable response is bafflement.

Consider the following argument, which is intended to solve all these prob-
lems by providing reasons for assigning truth values in each row of the truth
table. First, it seems obvious that, if “If p, then q” is true, then it is not the case
that both “p” is true and “q” is false. That in turn means that “~(p & ~q)” must
be true. The following, then, seems to be a valid argument form:

If p, then q.

~(p & ~q)

Second, we can also reason in the opposite direction. Suppose we know that
“~(p & ~q)” is true. For this to be true, “p & ~q” must be false. We know this
from the truth table definition of negation. Next let us suppose that “p” is
true. Then “~q” must be false. We know this from the truth table definition of
conjunction. Finally, if “~q” is false, then “q” itself must be true. This line of
reasoning is supposed to show that the following argument form is valid:

~(p & ~q)

If p, then q.

The first step in the argument was intended to show that we can validly
derive “~(p & ~q)” from “If p, then q.” The second step was intended to
show that the derivation can be run in the other direction as well. But if each
of these expressions is derivable from the other, this suggests that they are
equivalent. We use this background argument as a justification for the
following definition:

If p, then q = (by definition) not both p and not q.

We can put this into symbolic notation using “)” (called a horseshoe) to
symbolize the conditional connective:

p ) q = (by definition) ~(p & ~q)

165

Cond it ionals

Given this definition, we can now construct the truth table for propositional
conditionals. It is simply the truth table for “~(p & ~q)“:

p q ~(p & ~q) p ) q ~p q

T T T T T

T F F F F

F T T T T

F F T T T

Notice that “~(p & ~q)” is also truth-functionally equivalent to the expres-
sion “~p q.” We have cited it here because “~p q” has traditionally been
used to define “p ) q.” For reasons that are now obscure, when a conditional
is defined in this truth-functional way, it is called a material conditional.

Let’s suppose, for the moment, that the notion of a material conditional cor-
responds exactly to our idea of a propositional conditional. What would fol-
low from this? The answer is that we could treat conditionals in the same way
in which we have treated conjunction, disjunction, and negation. A proposi-
tional conditional would be just one more kind of truth-functionally com-
pound proposition capable of definition by truth tables. Furthermore, the
validity of arguments that depend on this notion (together with conjunction,
disjunction, and negation) could be settled by appeal to truth table techniques.
Let us pause for a moment to examine this.

One of the most common patterns of reasoning is called modus ponens. It
looks like this:

If p, then q.
p

q

p ) q
p

q

The truth table definition of a material conditional shows at once that this
pattern of argument is valid:

PREMISE PREMISE CONCLUSION

p q p ) q q

T T T T OK

T F F F

F T T T

F F T F

The argument form called modus tollens looks like this:

p ) q
~q

~p

Use truth tables to show that this argument form is valid.

Exercise XX

166

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

A second standard fallacy is called affirming the consequent. It looks like this:

p ) q
q

p

Use truth tables to show that this argument form is invalid.

Exercise XXI

These same techniques allow us to show that one of the traditional falla-
cies is, indeed, a fallacy. It is called the fallacy of denying the antecedent, and it
has this form:

p ) q
~p

~q

The truth table showing the invalidity of this argument form looks like this:

PREMISE PREMISE CONCLUSION

p q p ) q ~p ~q

T T T F F

T F F F T

F T T T F Invalid

F F T T T OK

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

167

Cond it ionals

The relations among these last four argument forms can be seen in this
diagram:

Antecedent Consequent

Affirming Affirming the Antecedent = Affirming the Consequent
Modus Ponens (valid) (invalid)

Denying Denying the Antecedent Denying the Consequent =
(invalid) Modus Tollens (valid)

Another argument form that has been historically significant is called a
hypothetical syllogism:

p ) q
q ) r

p ) r

Because we are dealing with an argument form containing three variables, we
must perform the boring task of constructing a truth table with eight rows:

PREMISE PREMISE CONCLUSION

p q r p ) q q ) r p ) r

T T T T T T OK

T T F T F F

T F T F T T

T F F F T F

F T T T T T OK

F T F T F T

F F T T T T OK

F F F T T T OK

This is fit work for a computer, not for a human being, but it is important to
see that it actually works.

In his radio address to the nation on April 17, 1982, President Ronald Reagan ar-
gued that the United States should not accept a treaty with the Soviet Union that
would mutually freeze nuclear weapons at current levels, because he believed
that the United States had fallen behind. Here is a central part of his argument:

It would be wonderful if we could restore the balance of power with the Soviet Union

without increasing our military power. And, ideally, it would be a long step towards

assuring peace if we could have significant and verifiable reductions of arms on both

sides. But let’s not fool ourselves. The Soviet Union will not come to any conference

table bearing gifts. Soviet negotiators will not make unilateral concessions. To achieve

parity, we must make it plain that we have the will to achieve parity by our own effort.

Put Reagan’s central argument into standard form. Then symbolize it and its
form. Does his argument commit any fallacy? If so, identify it.

Exercise XXII

168

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

Why is it important to see that these techniques work? Most people, after all,
could see that hypothetical syllogisms are valid without going through all of
this tedious business. We seem only to be piling boredom on top of triviality.
This protest deserves an answer. Suppose we ask someone why he or she thinks
that the conclusion follows from the premises in a hypothetical syllogism. The
person might answer that anyone can see that—which, by the way, is false. Be-
yond this, he or she might say that it all depends on the meanings of the words
or that it is all a matter of definition. But if we go on to ask, “which words?”
and “what definitions?” then most people will fall silent. We have discovered
that the validity of some arguments depends on the meanings of such words
as “and,” “or,” “not,” and “if-then.” We have then gone on to give explicit defi-
nitions of these terms—definitions, by the way, that help us see how these
terms function in an argument. Finally, by getting all these simple things right,
we have produced what is called a decision procedure for determining the valid-
ity of every argument depending only on conjunctions, disjunctions, negations,
and propositional conditionals. Our truth table techniques give us a mechani-
cal procedure for settling questions of validity in this area. In fact, truth table
techniques have practical applications, for example, in computer program-
ming. But the important point here is that, through an understanding of how
these techniques work, we can gain a deeper insight into the notion of validity.

Using the truth table techniques employed above, test the following argument
forms for validity. (For your own entertainment, guess whether the argument
form is valid or invalid before working it out.)

1. p ) q

q ) p

2. p ) q

~q ) ~p

Exercise XXIV

Two more classic, common, and useful argument forms combine conditionals
with disjunction. Using truth tables, test them for validity.

Constructive Dilemma

p q
p ) r
q ) r

r

Exercise XXIII

Destructive Dilemma

~p ~q
r ) p
r ) q

~r

3. ~q ) ~p

p ) q

4. p ) q
q ) r

p ) (q & r)

5. p ) q
q ) r
~r

~p

6. p ) q
q ) r

~r ) ~p

7. p q
p ) q
q ) r

r

8. p ) (q r)
~q
~r

~p

9. (p q) ) r

p ) r

10. (p & q) ) r

p ) r

11. p ) (q ) r)

(p & q) ) r

12. (p & q) ) r

p ) (q ) r)

169

Cond it ionals

13. p ) (q ) r)
q
~r

~p

14. p ) (q ) r)
p ) q

r

15. (p q) & (p r)
~r

~q

16. (p ) q) & (p ) ~r)
q & r

~p

17. (p q) )p

~q

18. (p q) ) (p & q)

(p ) q) & (q ) p)

19. (p & q) ) (p q)

(p ) q) (q ) p)

20. r

(p ) q) (q ) p)

LOGICAL LANGUAGE AND EVERYDAY LANGUAGE

Early in this chapter we started out by talking about such common words as
“and” and “or,” and then we slipped over to talking about conjunction and
disjunction. The transition was a bit sneaky, but intentional. To understand
what is going on here, we can ask how closely these logical notions we have
defined match their everyday counterparts. We will start with conjunction,
and then come back to the more difficult question of conditionals.

At first sight, the match between conjunction as we have defined it and the
everyday use of the word “and” may seem fairly bad. To begin with, in
everyday discourse, we do not go about conjoining random bits of informa-
tion. We do not say, for example, “Two plus two equals four and Chile is in
South America.” We already know why we do not say such things, for unless

170

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

the context is quite extraordinary, this is bound to violate the conversational
rule of Relevance. But if we are interested in validity, the rule of Relevance—
like all other conversational (or pragmatic) rules—is simply beside the point.
When dealing with validity, we are interested in only one question: If the
premises of an argument are true, must the conclusion be true as well? Con-
versational rules, as we saw in Chapter 2, do not affect truth.

The truth-functional notion of conjunction is also insensitive to another im-
portant feature of our everyday discourse: By reducing all conjunctions to
their bare truth-functional content, the truth-functional notion often misses
the argumentative point of a conjunction. As we saw in Chapter 3, each of the
following remarks has a different force in the context of an argument:

The ring is beautiful, but expensive.

The ring is expensive, but beautiful.

These two remarks point in opposite directions in the context of an actual
argument, but from a purely truth-functional point of view, we treat them
as equivalent. We translate the first sentence as “B & E” and the second as
“E & B.” Their truth-functional equivalence is too obvious to need proof.
Similar oddities arise for all discounting terms, such as “although,”
“whereas,” and “however.”

It might seem that if formal analysis cannot distinguish an “and” from a
“but,” then it can hardly be of any use at all. This is not true. A formal analysis
of an argument will tell us just one thing: whether the argument is valid or
not. If we expect the analysis to tell us more than this, we will be sorely disap-
pointed. It is important to remember two things: (1) We expect deductive ar-
guments to be valid, and (2) usually we expect much more than this from an
argument. To elaborate on the second point, we usually expect an argument
to be sound as well as valid; we expect the premises to be true. Beyond this,
we expect the argument to be informative, intelligible, convincing, and so
forth. Validity, then, is an important aspect of an argument, and formal analy-
sis helps us evaluate it. But validity is not the only aspect of an argument that
concerns us. In many contexts, it is not even our chief concern.

We can now look at our analysis of conditionals, for here we find some
striking differences between the logician’s analysis and everyday use. The
following argument forms are both valid:

1. p

q )p

2. ~p

p ) q

Though valid, both argument forms seem odd—so odd that they have actu-
ally been called paradoxical. The first argument form seems to say this: If a

Check the validity of the argument forms above using truth tables.

Exercise XXV

171

Cond it ionals

proposition is true, then it is implied by any proposition whatsoever. Here is an
example of an argument that satisfies this argument form and is therefore valid:

Lincoln was president.

If the moon is made of cheese, Lincoln was president.

This is a peculiar argument to call valid. First, we want to know what the moon
has to do with Lincoln’s having been president. Beyond this, how can his
having been president depend on a blatant falsehood? We can give these ques-
tions even more force by noticing that even the following argument is valid:

Lincoln was president.

If Lincoln was not president, then Lincoln was president.

Both arguments are instances of the valid argument form “p; q ) p.”
The other argument form is also paradoxical. It seems to say that a false

proposition implies any proposition whatsoever. The following is an instance
of this argument form:

Columbus was not president.

If Columbus was president, then the moon is made of cheese.

Here it is hard to see what the falsehood that Columbus was president has
to do with the composition of the moon.

At this point, nonphilosophers become impatient, whereas philosophers be-
come worried. We started out with principles that seemed to be both obvious
and simple. Now, quite suddenly, we are being overwhelmed with a whole se-
ries of peculiar results. What in the world has happened, and what should be
done about it? Philosophers remain divided in the answers they give to these
questions. The responses fall into two main categories: (1) Simply give up the
idea that conditionals can be defined by truth-functional techniques and search
for a different and better analysis of conditionals that avoids the difficulties in-
volved in truth-functional analysis; or (2) take the difficult line and argue that
there is nothing wrong with calling the aforementioned argument forms valid.

The first approach is highly technical and cannot be pursued in detail in
this book, but the general idea is this: Instead of identifying “If p, then q”
with “Not both p and not q,” identify it with “Not possibly both p and not q.”
This provides a stronger notion of a conditional and avoids some—though
not all—of the problems concerning conditionals. This theory is given a sys-
tematic development by offering a logical analysis of the notion of possibil-
ity. This branch of logic is called modal logic, and it has shown remarkable
development in recent decades.

The second line has been taken by Paul Grice, whose theories played a
prominent part in Chapter 2. He acknowledges—as anyone must—that the
two argument forms above are decidedly odd. He denies, however, that this
oddness has anything to do with validity. Validity concerns one thing and
one thing only: a relationship between premises and conclusion. An argu-
ment is valid if the premises cannot be true without the conclusion being
true as well. The above arguments are valid by this definition of “validity.”

172

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

Of course, arguments can be defective in all sorts of other ways. Look at the
first argument form: (1) p; q ) p. Because “q” can be replaced by any propo-
sition (true or false), the rule of Relevance will often be violated. It is worth
pointing out violations of the rule of Relevance, but, according to Grice, this
issue has nothing to do with validity. Beyond this, arguments having this form
can also involve violations of the rule of Quantity. A conditional will be true
whenever the consequent is true. Given this, it does not matter to the truth of
the whole conditional whether the antecedent is true or false. Yet it can be mis-
leading to use a conditional on the basis of this logical feature. For example, it
would be misleading for a museum guard to say, “If you give me five dollars,
then I will let you into the exhibition,” when, in fact, he will admit you in any
case. For Grice, this is misleading because it violates the rule of Quantity. Yet
strictly speaking, it is not false. Strictly speaking, it is true.

The Grice line is attractive because, among other things, it allows us to ac-
cept the truth-functional account of conditionals, with all its simplicity. Yet
sometimes it is difficult to swallow. Consider the following remark:

If God exists, then there is evil in the world.

If Grice’s analysis is correct, even the most pious person will have to admit that
this conditional is true provided only that he or she is willing to admit that
there is evil in the world. Yet this conditional plainly suggests that there is some
connection between God’s existence and the evil in the world—presumably,
that is the point of connecting them in a conditional. The pious will wish
to deny this suggestion. All the same, this connection is something that is con-
versationally implied, not asserted. So, once more, this conditional could be
misleading—and therefore is in need of criticism and correction—but it is still,
strictly speaking, true.

Philosophers and logicians have had various responses to Grice’s posi-
tion. No consensus has emerged on this issue. The authors of this book find
it adequate, at least in most normal cases, and therefore have adopted it.
This has two advantages: (1) The appeal to conversational rules fits in well
with our previous discussions, and (2) it provides a way of keeping the logic
simple and within the range of a beginning student. Other philosophers and
logicians continue to work toward a definition superior to the truth table
definition for indicative conditionals.

OTHER CONDITIONALS IN ORDINARY LANGUAGE

So far we have considered only one form in which propositional condition-
als appear in everyday language: the conditional “If p, then q.” But proposi-
tional conditionals come in a variety of forms, and some of them demand
careful treatment.

We can first consider the contrast between constructions using “if” and
those using “only if“:

1. I’ll clean the barn if Hazel will help me.

2. I’ll clean the barn only if Hazel will help me.

173

Cond it ionals

Adopting the following abbreviations:

B = I’ll clean the barn

H = Hazel will help me

the first sentence is symbolized as follows:

H ) B

Notice that in the prose version of item 1, the antecedent and consequent
appear in reverse order; “q if p” means the same thing as “If p, then q.”

How shall we translate the second sentence? Here we should move
slowly and first notice what seems incontestable: If Hazel does not help me,
then I will not clean the barn. This is translated in the following way:

~H ) ~B

And that is equivalent to:

B ) H

If this equivalence is not obvious, it can quickly be established using a
truth table.

A more difficult question arises when we ask whether an implication runs
the other way. When I say that I will clean the barn only if Hazel will help
me, am I committing myself to cleaning the barn if she does help me? There
is a strong temptation to answer the question “yes” and then give a fuller
translation of item 2 in the following way:

(B ) H) & (H ) B)

Logicians call such two-way implications biconditionals, and we will discuss
them in a moment. But adding this second conjunct is almost surely a mistake,
for we can think of parallel cases where we would not be tempted to include
it. A government regulation might read as follows:

A student may receive a New York State Scholarship only if the student
attends a New York State school.

From this it does not follow that anyone who attends a New York State school
may receive a New York State Scholarship. There may be other requirements
as well—for example, being a New York State resident.

Why were we tempted to use a biconditional in translating sentences
containing the connective “only if“? Why, that is, are we tempted to think
that the statement “I’ll clean the barn only if Hazel will help me” implies
“If Hazel helps me, then I will clean the barn“? The answer turns on the
notion of conversational implication first discussed in Chapter 2. If I am
not going to clean the barn whether Hazel helps me or not, then it will be
misleading—a violation of the rule of Quantity—to say that I will clean the
barn only if Hazel helps me. For this reason, in many contexts, the use of a
sentence of the form “p only if q” will conversationally imply a commitment
to “p if and only if q.”

174

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

We can next look at sentences of the form “p if and only if q“—so-called
biconditionals. If I say that I will clean the barn if and only if Hazel will help
me, then I am saying that I will clean it if she helps and I will not clean it if
she does not. Translated, this becomes:

(H ) B) & (~H ) ~B)

This is equivalent to:

(H ) B) & (B ) H)

We thus have an implication going both ways—the characteristic form of a
biconditional. In fact, constructions containing the expression “if and only if”
do not often appear in everyday speech. They appear almost exclusively in
technical or legal writing. In ordinary conversation, we capture the force of a
biconditional by saying something like this:

I will clean the barn, but only if Hazel helps me.

The decision whether to translate a remark of everyday conversation into a
conditional or a biconditional is often subtle and difficult. We have already
noticed that the use of sentences of the form “p only if q” will often conversa-
tionally imply a commitment to the biconditional “p if and only if q.” In the
same way, the use of the conditional “p if q” will often carry this same impli-
cation. If I plan to clean the barn whether Hazel helps me or not, it will cer-
tainly be misleading—again, a violation of the rule of Quantity—to say that I
will clean the barn if Hazel helps me.

We can close this discussion by considering one further, rather difficult
case. What is the force of saying “p unless q“? Is this a biconditional, or just a
conditional? If it is just a conditional, which way does the implication go?
There is a strong temptation to treat this as a biconditional, but the follow-
ing example shows this to be wrong:

McCain will lose the election unless he carries the South.

To appreciate the complexities of the little word “only,” it is useful to notice
that it fits at every point in the sentence “I hit him in the eye“:

Only I hit him in the eye.

I only hit him in the eye.

I hit only him in the eye.

I hit him only in the eye.

I hit him in only the eye.

I hit him in the only eye.

I hit him in the eye only.

Explain what each of these sentences means.

Exercise XXVI

175

Cond it ionals

This sentence clearly indicates that McCain will lose the election if he does
not carry the South. Using abbreviations, we get the following:

N = McCain will carry the South.

L = McCain will lose the election.

~N ) L

The original statement does not imply—even conversationally—that McCain
will win the election if he does carry the South. Thus,

p unless q = ~q ) p

In short, “unless” means “if not.” We can also note that “~p unless q” means
the same thing as “p only if q,” and they both are translated thus:

p ) q

Our results can be diagrammed as follows:

Translates As Often Conversationally Implies

p if q q ) p (p ) q) & (q ) p)

p only if q p ) q (p ) q) & (q ) p)

p unless q ~q ) p (p ) ~q) & (~q ) p)

Translate each of the following sentences into symbolic notation, using the
suggested symbols as abbreviations.

1. The Reds will win only if the Dodgers collapse. (R, D)

2. The Steelers will win if their defense holds up. (S, D)

3. If it rains or snows, the game will be called off. (R, S, O)

4. If she came home with a trophy and a prize, she must have won the
tournament. (T, P, W)

5. If you order the dinner special, you get dessert and coffee. (S, D, C)

6. If you order the dinner special, you get dessert; but you can have coffee
whether or not you order the dinner special. (S, D, C)

7. If the house comes up for sale, and if I have the money in hand, I will bid
on it. (S, M, B)

8. If you come to dinner, I will cook you a lobster, if you want me to. (D, L, W)

9. You can be a success if only you try. (S, T)

10. You can be a success only if you try. (S, T)

11. Only if you try can you be a success. (S, T)

12. You can be a success if you are the only one who tries. (S, O)

Exercise XXVII

(continued)

176

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

13. Unless there is a panic, stock prices will continue to rise. (P, R)

14. I won’t scratch your back unless you scratch mine. (I, Y)

15. You will get a good bargain provided you get there early. (B, E)

16. You cannot lead a happy life without friends. (Let H = You can lead a
happy life, and let F = You have friends.)

17. The only way that horse will win the race is if every other horse drops
dead. (Let W = That horse will win the race, and let D = Every other horse
drops dead.)

18. You should take prescription drugs if, but only if, they are prescribed for
you. (T, P)

19. The grass will die without rain. (D, R = It rains.)

20. Given rain, the grass won’t die. (R, D = The grass will die.)

21. Unless it doesn’t rain, the grass won’t die. (R, D = The grass will die.)

Exercise XXVIII

(a) Translate each of the following arguments into symbolic notation. Then (b)
test each argument for truth-functional validity using truth table techniques,
and (c) comment on any violations of conversational rules.

Example: Harold is clever; so, if Harold isn’t clever, then Anna isn’t clever either. (H, A)

(a) H

~H )~A

p

~p )~q

(b) PREMISE CONCLUSION

p q ~p ~q ~p ) ~q

T T F F T OK

T F F T T OK

F T T F F

F F T T T

(c) The argument violates the rule of Relevance, because Anna’s cleverness is
irrelevant to Harold’s cleverness.

1. Jones is brave, so Jones is brave or Jones is brave. (J )

2. The Republicans will carry either New Mexico or Arizona; but, since they
will carry Arizona, they will not carry New Mexico. (A, N)

3. The Democrats will win the election whether they win Idaho or not.
Therefore, they will win the election. (D, I)

4. The Democrats will win the election. Therefore, they will win the election
whether they win Idaho or not. (D, I)

5. The Democrats will win the election. Therefore, they will win the election
whether they win a majority or not. (D, M)

177

Cond it ionals

6. If Bobby moves his queen there, he will lose her. Bobby will not lose his
queen. Therefore, Bobby will not move his queen there. (M, L)

7. John will play only if the situation is hopeless. But the situation is
hopeless. So John will play. (P, H)

8. Although Brown will pitch, the Rams will lose. If the Rams lose, their
manager will get fired. So their manager will get fired. (B, L, F)

9. America will win the Olympics unless China does. China will win the
Olympics unless Germany does. So America will win the Olympics unless
Germany does. (A, R, E)

10. If you dial 0, you will get the operator. So, if you dial 0 and do not get the
operator, then there is something wrong with the telephone. (D, O, W)

11. The Democrats will run either Jones or Borg. If Borg runs, they will lose
the South. If Jones runs, they will lose the North. So the Democrats will
lose either the North or the South. (J, B, S, N)

12. I am going to order either the fish special or the meat special. Either way, I
will get soup. So I’ll get soup. (F, M, S)

13. The grass will die if it rains too much or it does not rain enough. If it does
not rain enough, it won’t rain too much. If it rains too much, then it won’t
not rain enough. So the grass will die. (D = The grass will die, M = It rains
too much, E = It rains enough.)

14. If you flip the switch, then the light will go on. But if the light goes on,
then the generator is working. So if you flip the switch, then the generator
is working. (F, L, G) (This example comes from Charles L. Stevenson.)

1. If “~p unless q” is translated as “p ) q,” then “p unless q” can be translated
as “p q.” Why?

2. Symbolize the following argument and give its form. Does this example
show that modus ponens is not always valid? Why or why not?

Opinion polls taken just before the 1980 election showed the Republican Ronald

Reagan decisively ahead of the Democrat Jimmy Carter, with the other Republican

in the race, John Anderson, a distant third. Those apprised of the poll results

believed, with good reason:

1. If a Republican wins the election, then if it’s not Reagan who wins it will be
Anderson.

2. A Republican will win the election.

Yet they did not have reason to believe:

3. If it’s not Reagan who wins, it will be Anderson.1

Discussion Questions

(continued)

178

CHAPTER 6 ■ Propos it ional Log ic

3. Symbolize the following argument and give its form. Does this example
show that modus tollens is not always valid? Why or why not?

(1) If it rained, it didn’t rain hard.
(2) It rained hard.

(3) It didn’t rain.2

4. In order to avoid logical mistakes, it is useful to study our own psychologi-
cal tendencies. One experiment asked subjects whether the following argu-
ments are valid:

If the card has an “A” on the left, then it has a “3” on the right. The card has an “A”
on the left. Therefore, the card has a “3” on the right. (95–100 percent)

If the card has an “A” on the left, it has a “3” on the right. The card does not have a
“3” on the right. Therefore, it does not have an “A” on the left. (70–75 percent)

If the card does not have an “A” on the left, then it has a “3” on the right. The card
does not have a “3” on the right. Therefore, it has an “A” on the left. (40–50 percent)

The figures in parentheses give the percentage of people who correctly identi-
fied that argument as valid. In another experiment, the indicated percentage
of subjects gave the correct answer to these questions:

If she meets her friend, she will go to a play. She meets her friend. What follows?
(96 percent)

If she meets her friend, she will go to a play. If she has enough money, she will go
to a play. She meets her friend. What follows? (38 percent)

Again, subjects often deny the validity of arguments with implausible conclu-
sions, like this:

If her pet is a fish, then it is a phylone. If her pet is a phylone, then it is a whale. So, if
her pet is a fish, then it is a whale.

Finally, the Wason Selection Task uses cards with a capital letter on one side and a
single-figure number on the other side. Four such cards are placed on a table with,
say, “B,” “L,” “2,” and “9” on the top side in this order, then subjects are asked:

Which cards need to be turned over to check whether the following rule is true or false?
(1) If a card has a “B” on one side, it has a “2” on other side. (10 percent)
(2) If a card has a “B” on one side, it does not have a “2” on other side. (100 percent)

The figure in parentheses indicates how many subjects on average give the
correct answer for each of the rules. What are the correct answers?

How can you explain why so many people make these mistakes? How can
you avoid making these mistakes yourself?

NOTES
1 Vann McGee, “A Counterexample to Modus Ponens,” Journal of Philosophy 82, no. 9 (September
1985): 462. See also Walter Sinnott-Armstrong, James Moor, and Robert Fogelin, “A Defense of
Modus Ponens,” Journal of Philosophy 83, no. 5 (May 1986): 296–300.

2 Ernest Adams, “Modus Tollens Revisited,” Analysis 48, no. 3 (1988): 122–28. See also Walter
Sinnott-Armstrong, James Moor, and Robert Fogelin, “A Defense of Modus Tollens,” Analysis 50,
no. 1 (1990): 9–16.

Categorical Logic

In Chapter 6, we saw how validity can depend on the external connections among

propositions. This chapter will demonstrate how validity can depend on the internal

structure of propositions. In particular, we will examine two types of categorical

arguments—immediate inferences and syllogisms—whose validity or invalidity

depends on relations among the subject and predicate terms in their premises and

conclusions. Our interest in these kinds of arguments is mostly theoretical. Under-

standing the theory of the syllogism deepens our understanding of validity, even if this

theory is, in some cases, difficult to apply directly to complex arguments in daily life.

BEYOND PROPOSITIONAL LOGIC

Armed with the techniques developed in Chapter 6, let’s look at the follow-
ing argument:

All squares are rectangles.
All rectangles have parallel sides.

All squares have parallel sides.

It is obvious at a glance that the conclusion follows from the premises, so
this argument is valid. Furthermore, it seems to be valid in virtue of its form.
But it is not yet clear what the form of this argument is. To show the form of
this argument, we might try something of the following kind:

p ) q
q ) r

p ) r

But this is a mistake—and a bad mistake. We have been using the letters
“p,” “q,” and “r” as propositional variables—they stand for arbitrary proposi-
tions. But the proposition “All squares are rectangles” is not itself composed
of two propositions. Nor does it contain “if,” “then” or any other proposi-
tional connective. In fact, if we properly translate the above argument into
the language of propositional logic, we get the following result:

p
q

r

7

179

180

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

This, of course, is not a valid argument form. But if we look back at the
original argument, we see that it is obviously valid. This shows that propo-
sitional logic—however adequate it is in its own area—is not capable of
explaining the validity of all valid arguments. There is more to logic than
propositional logic.

CATEGORICAL PROPOSITIONS

To broaden our understanding of the notion of validity, we will examine a
modern version of a branch of logic first developed in ancient times—
categorical logic. Categorical logic concerns immediate inferences and
syllogisms that are composed of categorical propositions, so we need to
begin by explaining what a categorical proposition is.

In the argument above, the first premise asserts some kind of relation-
ship between squares and rectangles; the second premise asserts some kind
of relationship between rectangles and things with parallel sides; finally, in
virtue of these asserted relationships, the conclusion asserts a relationship
between squares and things having parallel sides. Our task is to understand
these relationships as clearly as possible so that we can discover the basis
for the validity of this argument. Again, we shall adopt the strategy of start-
ing from simple cases and then use the insights gained there for dealing
with more complicated cases.

A natural way to represent the relationships expressed by the proposi-
tions in an argument is through diagrams. Suppose we draw one circle
standing for all things that are squares and another circle standing for all
things that are rectangles. The claim that all squares are rectangles may be
represented by placing the circle representing squares completely inside the
circle representing rectangles.

Rectangles Squares

Squares Rectangles1 2 3

Another way of representing this relationship is to begin with overlapping
circles.

We then shade out the portions of the circles in which nothing exists, ac-
cording to the proposition we are diagramming. If all squares are rectangles,

181

Categor ical Propos it ions

Squares Rectangles1 2 3

Aliens Spies1 2 3

Triangles Squares1 2 3

Either method of representation seems plausible. Perhaps the first seems more
natural. We shall, however, use the system of overlapping circles, because
they will work better when we get to more complex arguments. They are
called Venn diagrams, after their inventor, John Venn, a nineteenth-century
English logician.

Having examined one relationship that can exist between two classes, it is
natural to wonder what other relationships might exist. Going to the opposite
extreme from our first example, two classes may have nothing in common.
This relationship could be expressed by saying, “All triangles are not
squares,” but it is more common and natural to say, “No triangles are
squares.” We diagram this claim by indicating that there is nothing in the
overlapping region of things that are both triangles and squares:

This is one of the relationships that could not be diagrammed by putting one
circle inside another. (Just try it!)

In these first two extreme cases, we have indicated that one class is either
completely included in another (“All squares are rectangles”) or completely
excluded from another (“No triangles are squares”). Sometimes, however,
we claim only that two classes have at least some things in common. We
might say, for example, “Some aliens are spies.” How shall we indicate this
relationship in the following diagram?

In this case, we do not want to cross out any whole region. We do not want to
cross out region 1 because we are not saying that all aliens are spies. Plainly,
we do not want to cross out region 2, for we are actually saying that some per-
sons are both aliens and spies. Finally, we do not want to cross out region 3,
for we are not saying that all spies are aliens. Saying that some aliens are spies

there is nothing that is a square that is not a rectangle—that is, there is noth-
ing in region 1. So our diagram looks like this:

182

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

does not rule out the possibility that some spies are homegrown. So we need
some new device to represent claims that two classes have at least some mem-
bers in common. We shall do this in the following way:

Aliens Spies*

Here the asterisk indicates that there is at least one person who is both an alien
and a spy. Notice, by the way, that we are departing a bit from an everyday
way of speaking. “Some” is usually taken to mean “more than one“; here we
let it mean “at least one.” This makes things simpler and will cause no trouble,
so long as we remember that this is what we are using “some” to mean.

Given this new method of diagramming class relationships, we can
immediately think of other possibilities. The following diagram indicates
that there is someone who is an alien but not a spy. In more natural lan-
guage, it represents the claim that some aliens are not spies.

Aliens Spies*

Next we can indicate that there is someone who is a spy but not an alien.
More simply, the claim is that some spies are not aliens, and it is represented
like this:

Aliens Spies*

These last three claims are, of course, compatible, because there might be
some aliens who are spies, some aliens who are not spies, and some spies
who are not aliens.

THE FOUR BASIC CATEGORICAL FORMS

Although two classes can be related in a great many different ways, it is pos-
sible to examine many of these relationships in terms of four basic proposi-
tional forms:

A: All S is P. E: No S is P.

I: Some S is P. O: Some S is not P.

183

Categor ical Propos it ions

These forms are called categorical forms, and propositions with these forms
are called categorical propositions.

As with the propositional forms discussed in the previous chapter, the
A, E, I, and O forms for categorical propositions are not themselves
propositions, so they are neither true nor false. Instead, they are patterns
for whole groups of propositions. We get propositions from these forms
by uniformly replacing the variables S and P with terms that refer to
classes of things. For example, “Some spies are not aliens” is a substitu-
tion instance of the O propositional form. Nonetheless, we will refer to
propositions with the A, E, I, or O form simply as A, E, I, or O proposi-
tions, except where this might cause confusion.

A and E propositions are said to be universal propositions (because they
are about all S), and I and O propositions are called particular propositions
(because they are about some S). A and I propositions are described as
affirmative propositions (because they say what is P), and E and O propo-
sitions are referred to as negative propositions (because they say what is not
P). Thus, these four basic propositional forms can be described this way:

A = Universal Affirmative E = Universal Negative

I = Particular Affirmative O = Particular Negative

These four forms fit into the following table:

Affirmative Negative

Universal A: All S is P. E: No S is P.

Particular I: Some S is P. O: Some S is not P.

Here are the Venn diagrams for the four basic categorical forms:

S P S P

S P*

A: All S is P. E: No S is P.

I: Some S is P. O: Some S is not P.

S P*

These basic categorical forms, together with their labels, classifications, and
diagrams, should be memorized, because they will be referred to often in
the rest of this chapter.

184

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

Using just the four basic categorical forms, indicate what information is given
in each of the following diagrams:

Example:

S P

No S is P.
Some S is not P.
Some P is not S.
No P is S.

* *

Exercise I

S P S P

S P*

1. 2.

S P*

* * *

*

3. 4.

* *

S P

5.

S P

6.

*

S P

7.

S P

8.

*

TRANSLATION INTO THE BASIC
CATEGORICAL FORMS

Propositions with the specific A, E, I, and O forms do not appear often in
everyday conversations. Normal people rarely say things like “All whales are
mammals. All mammals breathe air. Therefore, all whales breathe air.” Most
people talk more like this: “Whales breathe air, since they’re mammals.” Thus,

185

Categor ical Propos it ions

if our logical apparatus could be applied only to propositions with the explicit
forms of A, E, I, and O, then it would apply to few arguments in everyday life.

Fortunately, however, many common statements that are not explicitly
in a categorical form can be translated into a categorical form. For example,
when someone says, “Whales are mammals,” the speaker presumably
means to refer to all whales, so this statement can be translated into “All
whales are mammals,” which is an A proposition. We need to be careful,
however. If someone says, “Whales are found in the North Atlantic,” the
speaker probably does not mean to refer to all whales, because there are
many whales in the Pacific as well. Similarly, if someone says, “A whale is a
mammal,” this can usually be translated as “All whales are mammals,”
which is an A proposition, but this translation would be inappropriate for
“A whale is stranded on the beach,” which seems to mean “One whale is
stranded on the beach.” Thus, we can be misled badly if we look only at the
surface structure of what people say. We also need to pay attention to the
context when we translate everyday talk into the basic categorical forms.

Despite these complications, it is possible to give some rough-and-ready
guides to help in translating many common forms of expression into propo-
sitions with the A, E, I, and O forms. Let’s begin with one problem that arises
for all these categorical forms: They all require a class of things as a predicate.
Thus, “All whales are big” and “No whales live on land” should strictly be
reformulated as “All whales are big things” and “No whales are things that
live on land” or “No whales are land dwellers.” This much is easy.

Things get more complicated when we look at the word “all” in A proposi-
tions. We have already seen that the word “all” is sometimes dropped in every-
day conversation, as in “Whales are mammals.” The word “all” can also be
moved away from the start of a sentence. “Democrats are all liberal” usually
means “All Democrats are liberal,” which is an A proposition. Moreover, other
words can be used in place of “all.” Each of the following claims can, in stan-
dard contexts, be translated into an A proposition with the form “All S is P“:

Every Republican is conservative.

Any investment is risky.

Anyone who is human is mortal.

Each ant is precious to its mother.

To translate such claims, we sometimes need to construct noun phrases out of
adjectives and verbs. These transformations are often straightforward, but
sometimes they require ingenuity, and even then they can seem somewhat
contorted. For example, both “Only a fool would bungee jump” and “Nobody
but a fool would bungee jump” can usually be translated into “All people
who bungee jump are fools.” This translation might not seem as natural as the
originals, but, since the translation has the A form, it explicitly shows that this
claim has the logical properties shared by other A propositions.

With some stretching, it is also possible to translate statements about indi-
viduals into categorical form. The standard method is to translate “Socrates is
a man” as the A proposition “All things that are Socrates are men.” Similarly,

186

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

“The cannon is about to go off” in a typical context must not be translated as
the I proposition “Some cannon is about to go off,” because the original state-
ment is about a particular cannon. Instead, the original statement should be
translated as the A proposition “All things that are that cannon are about to go
off.” These translations might seem stilted, but they are necessary in order to
apply syllogistic logic to everyday forms of expression.

Similar difficulties arise with the other basic propositional forms. If a
woman says, “I am looking for a man who is not attached,” and a friend
responds, “All of the men in my church are not attached,” then this response
should probably be translated as “No men in my church are attached,” which
is an E proposition. In contrast, “All ocean dwellers are not fish” should us-
ually be translated not as the E proposition “No ocean dwellers are fish” but
rather as “Not all ocean dwellers are fish.” This means “Some ocean dwellers
are not fish,” which is an O proposition. Thus, some statements with the form
“All S are not P” should be translated as E propositions, but others should be
translated as O propositions. (This ambiguity in the form “All S are not P”
explains why it is standard to give E propositions in the less ambiguous form
“No S is P.”) Other sentences should also be translated as E propositions even
though they do not explicitly contain the word “no.” “Underground cables
are not easy to repair” and “If a cable is underground, it is not easy to repair”
and “There aren’t any underground cables that are easy to repair” can all be
translated as the E proposition “No underground cables are easy to repair.”

Similar complications also arise for I and O propositions. We already saw
that “Whales are found in the North Atlantic” should be translated as the I
proposition “Some whales are found in the North Atlantic.” In addition,
some common forms of expression can be translated as O propositions even
though they do not contain either the word “not” or the word “some.” For
example, “There are desserts without chocolate” can be translated as “Some
desserts are not chocolate,” which is an O proposition.

Because of such complications, there is no mechanical procedure for
translating common English sentences into A, E, I, and O propositions. To
find the correct translation, you need to think carefully about the sentence
and its context.

Translate each of the following sentences into an A, E, I, or O proposition. Be
sure that the subjects and predicates in your translations use nouns that refer
to classes of things (rather than adjectives or verbs). If the sentence can be
translated into different forms in different contexts, give each translation and
specify a context in which it seems natural.

1. Real men eat ants. 3. The hippo is charging.

2. Bats are not birds. 4. The hippo is a noble beast.

Exercise II

187

Categor ical Propos it ions

CONTRADICTORIES

Once we understand A, E, I, and O propositions by themselves, the next step
is to ask how they are related to each other. From their diagrams, some rela-
tionships are immediately evident. Consider the Venn diagrams for the E
and I propositional forms:

S P S P

E: No S is P. I: Some S is P.

*

The first diagram has shading in the very same region that contains an as-
terisk in the second diagram. This makes it obvious that an E proposition
and the corresponding I proposition (that is, the I proposition that has the
same subject and predicate terms as the E proposition) cannot both be true.
For an E proposition to be true, there must be nothing in the central region.

5. Not all crabs live in water.

6. All crabs do not live in water.

7. Movie stars are all rich.

8. If anybody hits me, I will
hate them.

9. If anything is broken, it does
not work.

10. Somebody loves you.

11. Somebody does not love you.

12. Nobody loves me but my mother.

13. Anybody who is Mormon
believes in God.

14. My friends are the only ones
who care.

15. Only seniors may take this
course.

16. Our pit bull is a good pet.

17. Everything that is cheap is
no good.

18. Some things that are expensive
are no good.

19. Some things that are cheap are
good.

20. Some things that are not cheap
are good.

21. Some things that are cheap are
not good.

22. Some things that are not cheap
are not good.

23. Not all cars have four wheels.

24. There are couples without
children.

25. There are no people who hate
chocolate.

26. There are people who hate
chocolate.

27. Nothing that is purple is an apple.

28. Nothing that is not white is snow.

29. There aren’t any runners who are
slow.

30. Flamingos aren’t friendly.

188

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

But for the corresponding I proposition to be true, there must be something
in the central region. Thus, they cannot both be true. They also cannot both
be false. The only way for an E proposition to be false is for there to be
something in the central region, but then the corresponding I proposition is
not false but true. The only way for the I proposition to be false is if there is
nothing in the central region, and then the E proposition is not false but
true. Thus, they cannot both be true, and they cannot both be false. In other
words, they always have opposite truth values. This relation is described
by saying that these propositions are contradictories.

More generally, we can produce a diagram for the denial of a proposition
by a simple procedure. The only information given in a Venn diagram is
represented either by shading out some region, thereby indicating that
nothing exists in it, or by putting an asterisk in a region, thereby indicating
that something does exist in it. We are given no information about regions
that are unmarked. To represent the denial of a proposition, we simply re-
verse the information in the diagram. That is, where there is an asterisk, we
put in shading; where there is shading, we put in an asterisk. Everything
else is left unchanged. Thus, we can see at once that corresponding E and I
propositions are denials of one another, so they must always have opposite
truth values. This makes them contradictories.

The same relation exists between an A proposition and its corresponding
O proposition. Consider their forms:

S P S P

A: All S is P. O: Some S is not P.

*

The diagram for an A proposition has shading exactly where the correspon-
ding O proposition has an asterisk, and they contain no other information.
Consequently, corresponding A and O propositions cannot both be false and
cannot both be true, so they are contradictories.

1. Is an A proposition a contradictory of its corresponding E proposition?
Why or why not?

2. Is an I proposition a contradictory of its corresponding O proposition?
Why or why not?

3. If one proposition is the contradictory of another, is the latter always the
contradictory of the former? Why or why not?

Exercise III

189

Categor ical Propos it ions

EXISTENTIAL COMMITMENT

It might also seem that an A proposition (with the form “All S is P”) implies
the corresponding I proposition (with the form “Some S is P”). This, how-
ever, raises a difficult problem that logicians have not fully settled. Usually
when we make a statement, we are talking about certain specific things. If
someone claims that all whales are mammals, that person is talking about
whales and mammals and stating a relationship between them. In making
this statement, the person seems to be taking the existence of whales and
mammals for granted. The remark seems to involve what logicians call exis-
tential commitment to the things referred to in the subject and predicate
terms. In the same way, stating an E proposition often seems to commit the
speaker to the existence of things in the subject and predicate classes and,
thus, to imply an O proposition. For example, someone who says, “No
whales are fish” seems committed to “Some whales are not fish.”

In other contexts, however, we seem to use universal (A and E) proposi-
tions without committing ourselves to the existence of the things referred to
in the subject and predicate terms. For example, if we say, “All trespassers
will be fined,” we are not committing ourselves to the existence of any tres-
passers or to any actual fines for trespassing; we are only saying, “If there are
trespassers, then they will be fined.” Similarly, if we tell a sleepy child, “No
ghosts are under your bed,” we are not committing ourselves to the existence
of ghosts or anything under the bed. Finally, when Newton said, “All bodies
that are acted on by no forces are at rest,” he did not commit himself to the
existence of bodies that are acted on by no forces. Given these examples of A
and E propositions that carry no commitment to the things referred to, it is
easy to think of many others.

The question then arises whether we should include existential commitment
in our treatment of universal propositions or not. Once more, we must make a
decision. (Remember that we had to make decisions concerning the truth-table
definitions of both disjunction and conditionals in Chapter 6.) Classical logic
was developed on the assumption that universal (A and E) propositions carry
existential commitment. Modern logic makes the opposite decision, treating the
claim “All men are mortal” as equivalent to “If someone is a man, then that
person is mortal,” and the claim “No men are islands” as equivalent to
“If someone is a man, then that person is not an island.” This way of speaking
carries no commitment to the existence of any men.

Which approach should we adopt? The modern approach is simpler and
has proved more powerful in the long run. For these reasons, we will adopt
the modern approach and not assign existential commitment to universal
(A and E) propositions, so these propositions do not imply particular (I and
O) propositions. All the same, there is something beautiful about the classi-
cal approach, and it does seem appropriate in some contexts to some people,
so it is worth exploring in its own right. The Appendix to this chapter will
show how to develop the classical theory by adding existential commitment
to the modern theory.

190

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

Give two new examples of contexts in which:

1. Stating an A proposition does not seem to commit the speaker to the
existence of the things to which the subject term refers.

2. Stating an A proposition does not seem to commit the speaker to the
existence of the things to which the predicate term refers.

3. Stating an E proposition does not seem to commit the speaker to the
existence of the things to which the subject term refers.

4. Stating an E proposition does not seem to commit the speaker to the
existence of the things to which the predicate term refers.

Exercise IV

VALIDITY FOR CATEGORICAL ARGUMENTS

We have introduced Venn diagrams because they provide an efficient and
illuminating way to test the validity of arguments made up of categorical
(A, E, I, and O) propositions. The basic idea is simple: An argument made
up of categorical propositions is valid if all the information contained
in the Venn diagram for the conclusion is already contained in the Venn
diagram for the premises. There are only two ways to put information into
a Venn diagram: We can either shade out an area or put an asterisk in an
area. Hence, to test the validity of an argument made up of categorical
propositions, we need only examine the diagram of the conclusion for its
information (its shading or asterisks) and then check to see if the diagram
for the premises contains this information (the same shading or asterisks).

The following simple example will give a general idea of how this works:

Diagrams

whales mammals

mammals whales

Argument

*

*

Some whales are mammals.

Some mammals are whales.

Notice that the only information contained in the diagram for the conclusion is
the asterisk in the overlap between the two circles, and that information is
already included in the diagram for the premise. Thus, the argument is valid.

191

Val id i ty for Categor ical Arguments

This argument form is valid, because all the information contained in the
Venn diagram for the conclusion is contained in the Venn diagram for the
premise. And any argument that is a substitution instance of a valid argu-
ment form is valid.

Notice that we did not say that an argument is invalid if it fails these tests—
that is, if some of the information in the Venn diagram for the conclusion (or its
form) is not contained in the Venn diagram for the premises (or their forms).
As with truth tables in propositional logic (see Chapter 6), Venn diagrams test
whether arguments are valid by virtue of a certain form, but some arguments
will be valid on a different basis, even though they are not valid by virtue of
their categorical form. Here is one example:

Diagrams

S P

P S

Argument Form

Some S are P.

Some P are S.

*

*

The same method can be used to test argument forms for validity. The form
of the previous argument and the corresponding diagrams look like this:

Diagrams

fathers male parents

male parents fathers

Argument

All fathers are male parents.

All male parents are fathers.

The Venn diagram for the conclusion includes shading in the circle for male
parents, whereas the Venn diagram for the premise includes shading in the
circle for fathers, so the premise does not contain the information for the

192

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

conclusion. Thus, this form of argument is not valid, and some arguments of
this form are not valid. Nonetheless, this particular argument is clearly
valid, since it is not possible for the premise to be true when the conclusion
is false, for the simple reason that the conclusion cannot be false. Because of
such cases, Venn diagrams can show us that an argument is valid, but they
cannot prove that an argument is invalid.

Despite this limitation, the method of Venn diagrams can be used to test
many different kinds of arguments and argument forms for validity. We will
show how this method works for two main kinds of argument: immediate
inferences and syllogisms.

CATEGORICAL IMMEDIATE INFERENCES

A categorical immediate inference is an argument with the following features:

1. It has a single premise. (That is why the inference is called immediate.)

2. It is constructed from A, E, I, and O propositions. (That is why the
inference is called categorical.)

These arguments deserve attention because they occur quite often in everyday
reasoning.

We will focus on the simplest kind of immediate inference, which is con-
version. We convert a proposition (and produce its converse) simply by revers-
ing the subject term and the predicate term. By the subject term, we mean the
term that occurs as the grammatical subject; by the predicate term, we mean
the term that occurs as the grammatical predicate. In the A proposition “All
spies are aliens,” “spies” is the subject term and “aliens” is the predicate
term; the converse is “All aliens are spies.”

In this case, identifying the predicate term is straightforward because
the grammatical predicate is a noun—a predicate nominative. Often, how-
ever, we have to change the grammatical predicate from an adjective to a
noun phrase in order to get a noun that refers to a class of things. “All
spies are dangerous” becomes “All spies are dangerous things.” Here
“spies” is the subject term and “dangerous things” is the predicate term.
Although this change is a bit artificial, it is necessary because, when we
convert a proposition (that is, reverse its subject and predicate terms), we
need a noun phrase to take the place of the grammatical subject. In English
we cannot say, “All dangerous are spies,” but we can say, “All dangerous
things are spies.”

Having explained what conversion is, we now want to know when this
operation yields a valid immediate inference. To answer this question, we
use Venn diagrams to examine the relationship between each of the four
basic categorical propositional forms and its converse. The immediate infer-
ence is valid if the information contained in the conclusion is also contained
in the premise—that is, if any region that is shaded in the conclusion is
shaded in the premise, and if any region that contains an asterisk in the con-
clusion contains an asterisk in the premise.

193

Val id i ty for Categor ical Arguments

Two cases are obvious: Both I and E propositions validly convert. From
an I proposition with the form “Some S is P,” we may validly infer its con-
verse, which has the form “Some P is S.”

S P*

I: Some S is P. Converse of I: Some P is S.

P S*

From an E proposition with the form “No S is P,” we may validly infer its
converse, which has the form “No P is S.”

S P

E: No S is P. Converse of E: No P is S.

P S

Notice that in both these cases, the information (the asterisk or shading) is
in the center of the original diagram, and the diagram for the converse flips
the original diagram. Thus, the two diagrams contain the same information,
since the diagram for the converse has exactly the same markings in the
same areas as does the diagram for the original propositional form. This
shows that E and I propositions not only logically imply their converses but
are also logically implied by them. Because the implication runs both ways,
these propositions are said to be logically equivalent to their converses, and
they always have the same truth values as their converses.

The use of a Venn diagram also shows that an O proposition cannot always
be converted validly. From a proposition with the form “Some S is not P,” we
may not always infer its converse, which has the form “Some P is not S.”

S P*

O: Some S is not P. Converse of O: Some P is not S.

P S*

Notice that in this case the information is not in the center but is instead off
to one side. As a result, the information changes when the diagram is
flipped. The asterisk is in a different circle—it is in the circle for S in the dia-
gram for an O proposition, but it is in the circle for P in the diagram for the
converse of the O proposition. That shows that an argument from an O
proposition to its converse is not always valid.1

194

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

Finally, we can see that A propositions also do not always validly convert.
From a proposition with the form “All S is P,” we may not always infer its
converse, which has the form “All P is S.”

S P P S

A: All S is P. Converse of A: All P is S.

Since the diagram is not symmetrical, the information changes when the
diagram is flipped; the shading ends up in a different circle. That shows
why this form of argument is not always valid.

Traditionally, other immediate inferences have also been studied, but we
will not run through them all here. The single example of conversion is
enough to illustrate how Venn diagrams can be used to test some arguments
for validity.

Use Venn diagrams to determine whether the following immediate inferences
are valid:

1. All dinosaurs are animals. Therefore, all animals are dinosaurs.

2. Some pterodactyls can fly. Therefore, some flying things are pterodactyls.

3. Some eryopses are not meat eaters. Therefore, some things that eat meat
are not eryopses.

4. No tyrannosaurus is a king. Therefore, no king is a tyrannosaurus.

5. Some dinosaurs are reptiles. Therefore, all dinosaurs are reptiles.

6. Some dinosaurs are not alive today. Therefore, no dinosaurs are alive today.

7. All dimetrodons eat meat. Therefore, some dimetrodons eat meat.

8. No dinosaurs are warm-blooded. Therefore, some dinosaurs are not
warm-blooded.

Exercise V

THE THEORY OF THE SYLLOGISM

In an immediate inference, we draw a conclusion directly from a single A,
E, I, or O proposition. Moreover, when two categorical propositions are
contradictories, the falsity of one can be validly inferred from the truth of
the other, and the truth of one can be validly inferred from the falsity of the
other. All these forms of argument contain only one premise. The next step
in understanding categorical propositions is to consider arguments with
two premises.

An important group of such arguments is called categorical syllogisms. The
basic idea behind these arguments is commonsensical. Suppose you wish to

195

Val id i ty for Categor ical Arguments

prove that all squares have four sides. A proof should present some link or con-
nection between squares and four-sided figures. This link can be provided by
some intermediate class, such as rectangles. You can then argue that, because
the set of squares is a subset of the set of rectangles and rectangles are a subset
of four-sided figures, squares must also be a subset of four-sided figures.

Of course, there are many other ways to link two terms by means of a third
term. All such arguments with categorical propositions are called categorical
syllogisms. More precisely, a categorical syllogism is any argument such that:

1. The argument has exactly two premises and one conclusion;

2. The argument contains only basic A, E, I, and O propositions;

3. Exactly one premise contains the predicate term;

4. Exactly one premise contains the subject term; and

5. Each premise contains the middle term.

The predicate term is simply the term in the predicate of the conclusion. It is
also called the major term, and the premise that contains the predicate term
is called the major premise. The subject term is the term in the subject of the
conclusion. It is called the minor term, and the premise that contains the sub-
ject term is called the minor premise. It is traditional to state the major prem-
ise first, the minor premise second.

Our first example of a categorical syllogism then looks like this:

All rectangles are things with four sides. (Major premise)
All squares are rectangles. (Minor premise)

All squares are things with four sides. (Conclusion)

Subject term = “Squares”

Predicate term = “Things with four sides”

Middle term = “Rectangles”

To get the form of this syllogism, we replace the terms with variables:

All M is P.
All S is M.

All S is P.

Of course, many other arguments fit the definition of a categorical syllogism.
Here is one with a negative premise:

No ellipses are things with sides.
All circles are ellipses.

No circles are things with sides.

The next categorical syllogism has a particular premise:

All squares are things with equal sides.
Some squares are rectangles.

Some rectangles are things with equal sides.

196

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

In each of the last two syllogisms, what is the subject term? The predicate
term? The middle term? The major premise? The minor premise? The form of
the syllogism (using S, P, and M)? Is the syllogism valid? Why or why not?

Exercise VI

Given the restrictions in the definition of a categorical syllogism, there are exactly
256 possible forms of categorical syllogism. Explain why.

Honors Exercise

VENN DIAGRAMS FOR SYLLOGISMS. In a previous section, we used Venn di-
agrams to test the validity of immediate inferences. Immediate inferences
contain only two terms or classes, so the corresponding Venn diagrams need
only two overlapping circles. Categorical syllogisms contain three terms or
classes. To reflect this, we will use diagrams with three overlapping circles.
If we use a bar over a letter to indicate that things in the area are not in the
class (so that S

_
indicates what is not in S), then our diagram looks like this:

S P
SPM

_ _

SPM

_

SPM
_

SPM

M

_ _ _

SPM

_ _

SPM

_ _ _
SPM SPM

This diagram has eight different areas, which can be listed in an order that
resembles a truth table:

S P M

S P M
-–

S

P M

S

P M

-–


S P M

S P M

-–


S


P M


S


P M

-–

Notice that, if something is neither an S nor a P nor an M, then it falls com-
pletely outside the system of overlapping circles. In every other case, a
thing is assigned to one of the seven compartments within the system of
overlapping circles.

197

Val id i ty for Categor ical Arguments

TESTING SYLLOGISMS FOR VALIDITY. To test the validity of a syllogism us-
ing a Venn diagram, we first fill in the diagram to indicate the information
contained in the premises. Remember that the only information contained
in a Venn diagram is indicated either by shading out an area or by putting
an asterisk in it. The argument is valid if the information expressed by the
conclusion is already contained in the diagram for the premises.2 To see
this, consider the diagrams for examples that we have already given:

All rectangles have four sides.
All squares are rectangles.

All squares have four sides.

Here’s the diagram for the premises:

Squares

Rectangles

Things having
four sides

This diagram for the conclusion contains only the information that nothing is
in the circle for squares that is not also in the circle for things having four
sides. In the diagram for the premises, all the things that are squares are cor-
ralled into the region of things that have four sides. Thus, the diagram for the
premises contains all of the information in the diagram for the conclusion.
That shows that this syllogism is valid.

Next, let’s try a syllogism with a negative premise:

No ellipses have sides.
All circles are ellipses.

No circles have sides.

Here’s the diagram for the premises:

Squares
Things having
four sides

Here’s the diagram for the conclusion:

Circles

Ellipses

Things having sides

The asterisk in the middle area of this diagram says that something is in
both circles, and that information already appears in the diagram for the
premises, so this argument is valid.

So far we have looked only at valid syllogisms. Let’s see how this method
applies to invalid syllogisms. Here is one:

All pediatricians are doctors.
All pediatricians like children.

All doctors like children.

We can diagram the premises at the left and the conclusion at the right:

198

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

We diagram the conclusion “No circles have sides” as follows:

That information is clearly already contained in the Venn diagram for the
premises, so this syllogism is also valid.

Let’s try a syllogism with a particular premise:

All squares have equal sides.
Some squares are rectangles.

Some rectangles have equal sides.

It is a good strategy to diagram a universal premise before diagramming a
particular premise. The diagram for the above argument then looks like this:

Circles Things having sides

Here’s the diagram for the conclusion—that there is something that is a
rectangle that has equal sides:

Rectangles

Squares

Things having
equal sides*

Rectangles
Things having
equal sides*

199

Val id i ty for Categor ical Arguments

It is evident that the information in the diagram for the conclusion is not
already contained in the diagram for the premises. The arrow shows dif-
ferences in informational content. Thus, this form of syllogism is not valid.

Notice that the difference between these diagrams not only tells us that this
form of syllogism is invalid; it also tells us why it is invalid. In the diagram for
the premises, there is no shading in the upper left area, which includes people
who are doctors but are not pediatricians and do not like children. This shows
that the premises do not rule out the possibility that some people are doctors
without being pediatricians or liking children. But if anyone is a doctor and
not a person who likes children, then it is not true that all doctors like chil-
dren. Because this is the conclusion of the syllogism, the premises do not rule
out all of the ways in which the conclusion might be false. As a result, this con-
clusion does not follow by virtue of categorical form.3

Here is an example of an invalid syllogism with particular premises:

Some doctors are golfers.
Some fathers are doctors.

Some fathers are golfers.

Doctors

Pediatricians

People who
like children

Doctors

Premises:
All pediatricians are doctors.
All pediatricians like children.

Conclusion:
All doctors like children.

People who
like children

Fathers Golfers

*

Fathers

Premises: Conclusion:

Golfers

* *

Doctors

Examine this diagram closely. Notice that in diagramming “Some doctors
are golfers,” we had to put an asterisk on the boundary of the circle for

200

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

fathers, because we were not given information saying whether anything
falls into the category of fathers or not. For the same reason, we had to put
an asterisk on the boundary of the circle for golfers when diagramming
“Some fathers are doctors.” The upshot was that we did not indicate that
anything exists in the region of overlap between fathers and golfers. But this
is what the conclusion demands, so the form of this syllogism is not valid.

Here is an invalid syllogism with negative premises:

No babies are golfers.
No fathers are babies.

No fathers are golfers.

Again, we see that the form of this syllogism is not valid, because the entire
area of overlap between the circles is shaded in the diagram for the conclu-
sion, but part of that area is not shaded in the diagram for the premises.

The method of Venn diagrams is adequate for deciding the validity or in-
validity of all possible forms of categorical syllogism. To master this method,
all you need is a little practice.

Fathers Golfers Fathers

Premises: Conclusion:

Golfers

Babies

Using Venn diagrams, test the following syllogistic forms for validity:

1. All M is P. 4. All P is M.

All M is S. Some M is S.

All S is P. Some S is P.

2. All P is M. 5. All P is M.

All M is S. Some S is M.

All S is P. Some S is P.

3. All M is P. 6. All P is M.

Some M is S. Some S is not M.

Some S is P. Some S is not P.

Exercise VII

201

Val id i ty for Categor ical Arguments

7. All M is P. 14. No P is M.

Some S is not M. No M is S.

Some S is not P. No S is P.

8. All M is P. 15. No P is M.

Some M is not S. All M is S.

Some S is not P. No S is P.

9. No M is P. 16. No P is M.

Some S is M. All S is M.

Some S is not P. No S is P.

10. No P is M. 17. All P is M.

Some S is M. No S is M.

Some S is not P. No S is P.

11. No P is M. 18. All M is P.

Some S is not M. No S is M.

Some S is not P. No S is P.

12. No M is P. 19. Some M is P.

Some S is not M. Some M is not S.

Some S is not P Some S is not P.

13. No P is M. 20. Some P is M.

Some M is not S. Some S is not M.

Some S is not P. Some S is P.

Explain why it is a good strategy to diagram a universal premise before dia-
gramming a particular premise in a syllogism with both.

Exercise VIII

PROBLEMS IN APPLYING THE THEORY OF THE SYLLOGISM. After mastering
the techniques for evaluating syllogisms, students naturally turn to argu-
ments that arise in daily life and attempt to use these newly acquired skills.
They are often disappointed with the results. The formal theory of the syllo-
gism seems to bear little relationship to everyday arguments, and there does
not seem to be any easy way to bridge the gap.

202

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

This gap between formal theory and its application occurs for a num-
ber of reasons. First, as we saw in Chapters 2 and 5, our everyday dis-
course leaves much unstated. Many things are conversationally implied
rather than explicitly asserted. We do not feel called on to say many
things that are matters of common agreement. Before we can apply the
theory of the syllogism to everyday arguments, these things that are sim-
ply understood must be made explicit. This is often illuminating, and
sometimes boring, but it usually involves a great deal of work. Second,
the theory of the syllogism applies to statements only in a highly stylized
form. Before we apply the theory of the syllogism to an argument, we
must cast its premises and conclusion into the basic A, E, I, and O forms.
As we saw earlier in this chapter, the needed translation is not always
simple or obvious. It may not always be possible. For these and related
reasons, modern logicians have largely abandoned the project of reducing
all reasoning to syllogisms.

Why study the theory of the syllogism at all, if it is hard to apply in
some circumstances and perhaps impossible to apply in others? The an-
swer to this question was given at the beginning of Chapter 6. The study
of formal logic is important because it deepens our insight into a central
notion of logic: validity. Furthermore, the argument forms we have stud-
ied do underlie much of our everyday reasoning, but so much else is go-
ing on in a normal conversational setting that this dimension is often
hidden. By examining arguments in idealized forms, we can study their
validity in isolation from all the other factors at work in a rich conversa-
tional setting.

There is a difference, then, between the techniques developed in Chapters
1–5 and the techniques developed in Chapters 6–7. The first five chapters
presented methods of informal analysis that may be applied directly to the
rich and complex arguments that arise in everyday life. These methods of
analysis are not wholly rigorous, but they do provide practical guides for
the analysis and evaluation of actual arguments. The chapters concerning
formal logic have the opposite tendency. In comparison with the first five
chapters, the level of rigor is very high, but the range of application is corre-
spondingly smaller. In general, the more rigor and precision you insist on,
the less you can talk about.

1. What are the chief differences between the logical procedures developed in
this chapter and those developed in the chapter on propositional logic?

2. If we evaluate arguments as they occur in everyday life by using the exact
standards developed in Chapters 6 and 7, we discover that our everyday
arguments rarely satisfy these standards, at least explicitly. Does this show
that most of our ordinary arguments are illogical? What else might it show?

Discussion Questions

203

Append ix : The Class ical Theory

APPENDIX: THE CLASSICAL THEORY

The difference between classical and modern logic is simply that the classi-
cal approach adds one more assumption—namely, that every categorical
proposition is about something. More technically, the assumption is that A,
E, I, and O propositions all carry commitment to the existence of something
in the subject class and something in the predicate class. To draw Venn dia-
grams for categorical propositions on the classical interpretation, then, all
we need to do is add existential commitment to the diagrams for their mod-
ern interpretations, which were discussed above.

But how should we add existential commitment to Venn diagrams? The
answer might seem easy: Just put an asterisk wherever there is existential
commitment. The story cannot be quite so simple, however, for the follow-
ing reason. The Venn diagram for the E propositional form on the modern
interpretation is this:

S P

Modern E: No S is P.

The classical interpretation adds existential commitment in both the subject
and the predicate, so if we represent existential commitment with an asterisk,
we get this diagram:

S P

Classical E: No S is P. (???)

* *

Although this diagram might seem to work, it breaks down when we perform
operations on it. We are supposed to be able to diagram the contradictory of a
proposition simply by substituting shading for asterisks and asterisks for shad-
ing. If we perform this operation on the previous diagram, we get this:

*S P

204

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

This diagram is very different from the Venn diagram for the I proposi-
tional form, which is the same on both classial and modern interpretations:

An I proposition, however, is supposed to be the contradictory of the corre-
sponding E proposition even on the classical interpretation. So something has
gone wrong. This problem shows that existential commitment cannot be
treated exactly like explicit existential assertion, as in I and O propositions. As
a result, we cannot use the same asterisk to represent existential commitment
in Venn diagrams. Instead, we will use a plus sign: “+.“ With this new sym-
bol, we can diagram the E propositional form on the classical interpretation
this way:

S P*

I: Some S is P.

The plus sign indicates that an E proposition carries commitment to the ex-
istence of something in each class, even though it does not explicitly assert
that something exists in either class.

From this new diagram, we can get the contradictory of a proposition by
substituting shading for asterisks and asterisks for shading, as long as we
also add plus signs to ensure that no class is empty, and drop plus signs that
are no longer needed to indicate this existential commitment. When this pro-
cedure is applied to the previous diagram, the shading becomes an asterisk
in the central area, and we can then drop the plus signs in the side areas be-
cause the central asterisk already assures us that something exists in both
circles. Thus, we get the (modern and classical) diagram for the I proposi-
tional form. Moreover, when this procedure is applied to the diagram for the
I propositional form, it yields the above diagram for the E propositional
form on the classical interpretation.

It might not be so clear, however, that E and I propositions are contra-
dictories on their classical interpretations; let us see why this is so. Two

S P

Classical E: No S is P.

+ +

205

Append ix : The Class ical Theory

propositions are contradictories if and only if they cannot both be true
and also cannot both be false. The diagram for an E proposition has
shading in the same area in which the diagram for its corresponding I
proposition has an asterisk, so they cannot both be true. It is harder to see
why these propositions cannot both be false on the classical interpreta-
tion, but this can be shown by the following argument. Suppose that an I
proposition is false. Then there is nothing in the central area, so that area
should be shaded. The classical interpretation insists that the subject and
predicate classes are not empty, so if there is nothing in the central area,
there must be something in each side area, which is indicated by a plus
sign in each side area. That gives us the diagram for the corresponding E
proposition, so that proposition is true. Thus, if an I proposition is false,
its corresponding E proposition is true. That means that they cannot both
be false. We already saw that they cannot both be true. So they are
contradictories.

The same procedure yields a classical O proposition when it is applied to
a classical A proposition, and a classical A proposition when it is applied to
a classical O proposition:

S P S P

Classical A: All S is P. Classical O: Some S is not P.

*+ +

(The plus sign on the line indicates that the commitment is to something in
the right-hand circle, but not to anything in either specific part of that circle.)
Propositions of these forms on their classical interpretations cannot both be
true and cannot both be false, so they are contradictories. Thus, this method
of diagramming seems to capture the classical interpretation of the basic
propositions.

Explain why an A proposition and its corresponding O proposition are contra-
dictories on their classical interpretations, using the diagrams above.

Exercise IX

THE CLASSICAL SQUARE OF OPPOSITION

In addition to the contradictories, there is a more extensive and elegant
set of logical relationships among categorical propositions on the classical

206

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

A: All S is P.

O: Some S is not P.

**

I: Some S is P.

E: No S is P.

+ +

+

+

Contraries

Subcontraries

Su
ba

lte
rn

s Subalterns

Contra dictoriesContra dicto
ries

S P PS

S P S P

The lines in this diagram show the logical relationships that each proposition
has to the other three. These relationships are explained below. Throughout
the discussion, it is important to remember that all of the basic propositions
are interpreted as carrying existential commitment in both their subjects and
their predicates.

CONTRADICTORIES. Two propositions are contradictories of each other (and
they contradict each other) when they are related in the following way:

1. They cannot both be true, and

2. They cannot both be false.

More simply, contradictory pairs of propositions always have opposite truth
values. We have already seen that the E and I propositions are contradicto-
ries of one another, as are the A and O propositions. This relationship holds
on both the modern interpretation and the classical interpretation.

CONTRARIES. Two propositions are said to be contraries of one another if
they are related in this way:

1. They cannot both be true, but

2. They can both be false.

interpretation. This system of relationships produces what has been called
the square of opposition.

207

Append ix : The Class ical Theory

On the classical interpretation (but not the modern interpretation), A and E
propositions with the same subject and predicate are contraries of one another.

In common life, the relationship between such corresponding A and E
propositions is captured by the notion that one claim is the complete opposite of
another. The complete opposite of “Everyone is here” is “No one is here.”
Clearly, such complete opposites cannot both be true at once. We see this read-
ily if we look at the diagrams for A and E propositions on the classical interpre-
tation. The middle region of the diagram for an A proposition shows the
existence of something that is both S and P, whereas the middle region of the
diagram for the corresponding E proposition is shaded, showing that nothing
is both S and P. It should also be clear that these A and E propositions can both
be false. Suppose that there is some S that is P and also some S that is not P:

S P**

Going from left to right, the first asterisk shows that the A proposition of the
form “All S is P” is false; the second asterisk shows that the corresponding E
proposition of the form “No S is P” is also false. Thus, these propositions can
both be false, but they cannot both be true. This makes them contraries.

SUBCONTRARIES. Propositions are subcontraries of one another when

1. They can both be true, and

2. They cannot both be false.

On the classical approach (but not the modern approach), corresponding I
and O propositions are subcontraries. To see how this works, compare the
diagrams for I and O propositions:

S P S P

I: Some S is P. O: Some S is not P.

** +

It should be clear that corresponding propositions with these forms can both
be true, since there can be some S that is P and another S that is not P. But
why can’t they both be false? Consider the left side of the following diagram:

S SP

208

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

S P S P

S P*

A: All S is P. E: No S is P.

I: Some S is P. O: Some S is not P.

S P*

Premise

Conclusion

+

+ + +

We know that, on the classical approach, there must be something in this
circle somewhere. If there is something in the overlapping region SP, then
the I proposition is true. If there is something in the nonoverlapping region
of S, then there must be something else in the circle for P, because P cannot
be empty on the classical approach; therefore, the O proposition is true.
Thus, either the I proposition or the corresponding O proposition must be
true, so they cannot both be false. We already saw that they can both be true.
Consequently, corresponding I and O propositions are subcontraries.

SUBALTERNS. Subalternation is the relationship that holds down the sides of
the classical square of opposition. Quite simply, an A proposition implies the
corresponding I proposition, and an E proposition implies the corresponding
O proposition. This relationship depends on the existential commitment found
on the classical approach and does not hold on the modern approach.

The validity of subalternation is illustrated by the following diagrams:

An A proposition includes a plus sign where the corresponding I proposi-
tion includes an asterisk, but both symbols indicate that something lies in
the middle area. Thus, the information for the I proposition is already
included in the diagram for the A proposition, which means that the A
proposition implies the I proposition.

The same point applies to the implication on the right-hand side, because
the diagram for an E proposition includes a plus sign in the same area as the
asterisk in the diagram for the corresponding O proposition. The diagram
for the E proposition also has a plus sign in the rightmost area. If something
exists in that area, then something exists in either that area or the middle
area, which is what is meant by the plus sign on the line in the diagram for
the O proposition. Thus, an E proposition implies its corresponding O
proposition.

The information given by the classical square of opposition can now be
summarized in two charts. We shall ask two questions. First, for each propo-
sitional form, if we assume that a proposition with that form is true, what

209

Append ix : The Class ical Theory

consequences follow for the truth or falsity of a corresponding proposition
with a different form?

A E I O

A T F T F

Assumed true E F T F T

I ? F T ?

O F ? ? T

“T” indicates that the corresponding proposition in that column is true, “F”
indicates that it is false, and “?” indicates that it might have either truth
value, because neither consequence follows.

Second, for each propositional form, if we assume that a proposition with
that form is false, what consequences follow for the truth or falsity of a corre-
sponding proposition with a different form?

A E I O

A F ? ? T

Assumed false E ? F T ?

I F T F T

O T F T F

THE CLASSICAL THEORY OF IMMEDIATE
INFERENCE

The difference between the modern and classical approaches is simply that
the classical approach assigns more information—specifically, existential
commitment—to the basic propositions than the modern interpretation
does. Because of this additional information, certain immediate inferences
hold on the classical approach that do not hold on the modern approach. In
particular, though conversion of an A proposition fails on both approaches,
what is known as conversion by limitation holds on the classical approach but
not on the modern approach. That is, from a proposition with the form “All
S is P,” we may not validly infer the proposition with the form “All P is S,”
but on the classical approach, we may validly infer “Some P is S.” The rea-
son is simple: From a proposition with the form “All S is P” on the classical
interpretation, we may infer a proposition with the form “Some S is P,” and
then we may convert this to get a proposition with the form “Some P is S.”

Using the Venn diagrams for the classical interpretation of the A propositional
form given above, show that conversion by limitation is classically valid for an
A proposition.

Exercise X

210

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

THE CLASSICAL THEORY OF SYLLOGISMS

As in the case of immediate inferences, the premises of syllogisms will con-
tain more information—specifically, existential commitment—on the classi-
cal interpretation than they do on the modern interpretation. This will make
some syllogisms valid on the classical approach that were not valid on the
modern approach.

We begin our study of this matter with an example that has had a curious
history:

All rectangles are four-sided.
All squares are rectangles.

Some squares are four-sided.

The argument is peculiar because its conclusion is weaker than it needs to
be. We could, after all, conclude that all squares are four-sided. The argu-
ment thus violates the conversational rule of Quantity. Perhaps for this rea-
son, this syllogism was often not included in traditional lists of valid
syllogisms. Yet the argument is valid on the classical interpretation of exis-
tential commitment, and our diagram should show this.

Squares

Rectangles

Four-sided things

Step I: Diagram the first premise

+

Squares

Rectangles

Four-sided things

Step II: Add the second premise

+ +

Notice that the plus sign is placed on the outer edge of the circle for squares,
because we are not in a position to put it either inside or outside that circle.
We now add the information for the second premise:

211

Append ix : The Class ical Theory

As expected, the conclusion that some squares are four-sided is already dia-
grammed, so the argument is valid—provided that we take A propositions
to have existential commitment.

Because classical logicians tended to ignore the previous argument, their
writings did not bring out the importance of existential commitment in eval-
uating it. There is, however, an argument that did appear on the classical
lists that makes clear the demand for existential commitment. These are syl-
logisms with the following form:

All M is P.
All M is S.

Some S is P.

This form of syllogism is diagrammed as follows:

S

M

P
+

Step II: Add the second premise

+S

M

P

Step I: Diagram the first premise

+

Again, we see that the conclusion follows, but only if we diagram A propo-
sitions to indicate existential commitment. This, then, is an argument that
was declared valid on the classical approach, but invalid on the modern
approach.

Use Venn diagrams to test the following syllogism forms for validity on the
classical approach:

1. All M is P. 3. No M is P.
No M is S. All S is M.

Some S is not P. Some S is not P.

2. No M is P. 4. No M is P.
All M is S. No M is S.

Some S is not P. Some S is not P.

Exercise XI

May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part.

212

CHAPTER ■ 7 Categor ical Log ic

NOTES
1 We say “not always” rather than simply “not,” because there are some strange cases—
logicians call them “degenerate cases“—for which inferences of this pattern are valid. For ex-
ample, from “Some men are not men,” we may validly infer “Some men are not men.” Here, by
making the subject term and the predicate term the same, we trivialize conversion. Keeping
cases of this kind in mind, we must say that the inference from an O proposition to its converse
is usually, but not always, invalid. In contrast, the set of valid arguments holds in all cases, in-
cluding degenerate cases.

2 We cannot say “only if” here because of degenerate cases of categorical syllogisms that are
valid, but not by virtue of their syllogistic form. Here is one example: “All numbers divisible by
two are even. No prime number other than two is divisible by two. Therefore, no prime num-
ber other than two is even.” This syllogism is valid because it is not possible that its premises
are true and its conclusion is false, but other syllogisms with this same form are not valid.

3 We need to add “by virtue of its categorical form,” because, as we saw above, it still might be
valid on some other basis. In this particular example, however, nothing else makes this argu-
ment valid.

Are the following claims true or false? Explain your answers.

1. Every syllogism that is valid on the modern approach is also valid on the
classical approach.

2. Every syllogism that is valid on the classical approach but not on the
modern approach has a particular conclusion that starts with “Some.”

Exercise XII

May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part.

How to Evaluate
Arguments: Inductive
Standards

Previous chapters have been concerned primarily with deductive arguments that

aim at validity. Many arguments encountered in daily life, however, are not

intended to meet this standard of validity. They are only supposed to provide rea-

sons (perhaps very strong reasons) for their conclusions. Such arguments are called

inductive and will be the focus of Part III. This part begins with a discussion of the

nature of inductive standards and arguments followed by a survey of five forms of

inductive argument: statistical generalizations, statistical applications, causal rea-

soning, inference to the best explanation, and arguments from analogy. The next

topic is probability, because, as we will see, the inductive standard of strength can

be understood in terms of probability. Part III will close by discussing how probabil-

ities get deployed in decision making.

III

213

May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part.

This page intentionally left blank

ARGUMENTS TO AND FROM

GENERALIZATIONS

This chapter begins our investigation of inductive arguments by distinguishing the

inductive standard of strength from the deductive standard of validity. Inductive

arguments are defined as arguments that are intended to be strong rather than valid.

Two common examples of inductive arguments are discussed next. In statistical

generalizations, a claim is made about a population on the basis of features of a sam-

ple of that population. In statistical applications, a claim is made about members of

a population on the basis of features of the population. Statistical generalizations

take us up from samples to general claims, and statistical applications then take us

back down to individual cases.

INDUCTION VERSUS DEDUCTION

The distinction between deductive arguments and inductive arguments can
be drawn in a variety of ways, but the fundamental difference concerns the
relationship that is claimed to hold between the premises and the conclusion
for each type of argument. An argument is deductive insofar as it is intended
or claimed to be valid. As we know from Chapter 3, an argument is valid if
and only if it is impossible for the conclusion to be false when its premises
are true. The following is a valid deductive argument:

All ravens are black.

If there is a raven on top of Pikes Peak, then it is black.

Because the premise lays down a universal principle governing all ravens, if it’s
true, then it must be true of all ravens (if any) on top of Pikes Peak. This same re-
lationship does not hold for invalid arguments. Nonetheless, arguments that are
not valid can still be deductive if they are intended or claimed to be valid.

In contrast, inductive arguments are not intended to be valid, so they
should not be criticized for being invalid. The following is an example of an
inductive argument:

All ravens that we have observed so far are black.

All ravens are black.

8

215

216

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

Here we have drawn an inductive inference from the characteristics of ob-
served ravens to the characteristics of all ravens, most of which we have not
observed. Of course, the premise of this argument could be true, yet the con-
clusion turn out to be false. A raven that has not yet been observed might
be albino. The obviousness of this possibility suggests that someone who
gives this argument does not put it forth as valid, so it is not a deductive ar-
gument. Instead, the premise is put forth as a reason or support for the con-
clusion. When an argument is not claimed to be valid but is intended only
to provide a reason for the conclusion, the argument is inductive.

Because inductive arguments are supposed to provide reasons, and rea-
sons vary in strength, inductive arguments can be evaluated as strong or
weak, depending on the strength of the reasons that they provide for their
conclusions. If we have seen only ten ravens, and all of them were in our
backyard, then the above argument gives at most a very weak reason to
believe that all ravens are black. But, if we have traveled around the world
and seen over half the ravens that exist, then the above argument gives a
strong reason to believe that all ravens are black. Inductive arguments are
usually intended to provide strong support for their conclusions, in which
case they can be criticized if the support they provide is not strong enough
for the purposes at hand.

The most basic distinction, then, is not between two kinds of argument
but is instead between two standards for evaluating arguments. The deduc-
tive standard is validity. The inductive standard is strength. Arguments
themselves are classified as either deductive or inductive in accordance with
the standard that they are intended or claimed to meet.

There are several important differences between deductive and inductive
standards. One fundamental feature of the deductive standard of validity is
that adding premises to a valid argument cannot make it invalid. The defi-
nition of validity guarantees this: In a valid argument, it is not possible for
the premises to be true without the conclusion being true as well. If any fur-
ther premises could change this, then it would be possible for this relation-
ship not to hold, so the argument would not be valid after all. Additional
information might, of course, lead us to question the truth of one of the
premises, but that is another matter.

The situation is strikingly different when we deal with inductive argu-
ments. To cite a famous example, before the time of Captain Cook’s voyage
to Australia, Europeans had observed a great many swans, and every one of
them was white. Thus, up to that time Europeans had very strong inductive
evidence to support the claim that all swans are white. Then Captain Cook
discovered black swans in Australia. What happens if we add this new piece
of information to the premises of the original inductive argument? Provided
that we accept Cook’s report, we now produce a sound deductive argument
in behalf of the opposite claim that not all swans are white; for, if some
swans are black, then not all of them are white. This, then, is a feature of the
inductive standard of strength: No matter how strong an inductive argu-
ment is, the possibility remains open that further information can undercut,

217

Induct ion versus Deduct ion

perhaps completely, the strength of the argument and the support that the
premises give to the conclusion. Because inductive strength and inductive argu-
ments can always be defeated in this way, they are described as defeasible. Valid
deductive arguments do not face a similar peril, so they are called indefeasible.

A second important difference between inductive and deductive standards
is that inductive strength comes in degrees, but deductive validity does not. An
argument is either valid or invalid. There is no question of how much validity
an argument has. In contrast, inductive arguments can be more or less strong.
The more varied ravens or swans we observe, the stronger the inductive argu-
ments above. Some inductive arguments are extremely strong and put their
conclusions beyond any reasonable doubt. Other inductive arguments are
much weaker, even though they still have some force.

Because of the necessary relationship between the premises and the conclu-
sion of a valid deductive argument, it is often said that the premises of valid
deductive arguments (if true) provide conclusive support for their conclusions,
whereas true premises of strong inductive arguments provide only partial sup-
port for their conclusions. There is something to this. Because the premises of a
valid deductive argument necessitate the truth of the conclusion, if those prem-
ises are definitely known to be true, then they do supply conclusive reasons for
the conclusion. The same cannot be said for inductive arguments.

It would be altogether misleading, however, to conclude from this that
inductive arguments are inherently inferior to deductive arguments in sup-
plying a justification or ground for a conclusion. In the first place, inductive
arguments often place matters beyond any reasonable doubt. It is possible
that the next pot of water will not boil at any temperature, however high,
but this is not something we worry about. We do not take precautions
against it, and we shouldn’t.

More important, deductive arguments normally enjoy no advantages
over their inductive counterparts. We can see this by comparing the two fol-
lowing arguments:

DEDUCTIVE INDUCTIVE

All ravens are black. All observed ravens are black.

If there is a raven on top If there is a raven on top of
of Pikes Peak, it is black. Pikes Peak, it is black.

Of course, it is true for the deductive argument (and not true for the induc-
tive argument) that if the premise is true, then the conclusion must be true.
This may seem to give an advantage to the deductive argument over the in-
ductive argument. But before we can decide how much support a deductive
argument gives its conclusion, we must ask if its premises are, after all, true.
That is not something we can just take for granted. If we examine the prem-
ises of these two arguments, we see that it is easier to establish the truth of
the premise of the inductive argument than it is to establish the truth of the
premise of the deductive argument. If we have observed carefully and kept
good records, then we might be fully confident that all observed ravens have

218

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

been black. On the other hand, how can we show that all ravens (observed
and unobserved—past, present, and future) are black? The most obvious way
(though there may be other ways) would be to observe ravens to see if they
are black or not. This, of course, involves producing an inductive argument
(called a statistical generalization) for the premise of the deductive argument.
Here our confidence in the truth of the premise of the deductive argument
should be no greater than our confidence in the strength of the inference in
the statistical generalization. In this case—and it is not unusual—the deduc-
tive argument provides no stronger grounds in support of its conclusion than
does its inductive counterpart, because any reservations we might have
about the strength of the inductive inference will be paralleled by doubts con-
cerning the truth of the premise of the deductive argument.

We will also avoid the common mistake of saying that deductive argu-
ments always move from the general to the particular, whereas inductive
arguments always move from the particular to the general. In fact, both sorts
of arguments can move in either direction. There are inductive arguments
intended to establish particular matters of fact, and there are deductive
arguments that involve generalizations from particulars. For example, when
scientists assemble empirical evidence to determine whether the extinction
of the dinosaurs was caused by the impact of a meteor, their discussions are
models of inductive reasoning. Yet they are not trying to establish a general-
ization or a scientific law. Instead, they are trying to determine whether a
particular event occurred some 65 million years ago. Inductive reasoning
concerning particular matters of fact occurs constantly in everyday life as
well, for example, when we check to see whether our television reception is
being messed up by someone using a hair dryer. Deductive arguments from
the particular to the general also exist, though they tend to be trivial, and
hence boring. Here’s one:

Benjamin Franklin was the first postmaster general; therefore, anyone who is
identical with Benjamin Franklin was the first postmaster general.

Of course, many deductive arguments do move from the general to the par-
ticular, and many inductive arguments do move from particular premises to
a general conclusion. It is important to remember, however, that this is not
the definitive difference between these two kinds of arguments. What makes
deductive arguments deductive is precisely that they are intended to meet
the deductive standard of validity, and what makes inductive arguments
inductive is just that they are not intended to be deductively valid but are,
instead, intended to be inductively strong.

Assuming a standard context, label each of the following arguments as deduc-
tive or inductive. Explain what it is about the words or form of argument that
indicates whether or not each argument is intended or claimed to be valid. If it
is not clear whether the argument is inductive or deductive, say why.

Exercise I

219

Stat ist ical General izat ions

STATISTICAL GENERALIZATIONS

One classic example of an inductive argument is an opinion poll. Suppose a
candidate wants to know how popular she is with voters. Because it would
be practically impossible to survey all voters, she takes a sample of voting
opinion and then infers that the opinions of those sampled indicate the over-
all opinion of voters. Thus, if 60 percent of the voters sampled say that they
will vote for her, she concludes that she will get around 60 percent of the
vote in the actual election. As we shall see later, inferences of this kind often

1. The sun is coming out, so the rain will probably stop soon.

2. It’s going to rain tomorrow, so it will either rain or be clear tomorrow.

3. No woman has ever been elected president. Therefore, no woman will
ever be elected president.

4. Diet cola never keeps me awake at night. I know because I drank it just
last night without any problems.

5. The house is a mess, so Jeff must be home from college.

6. If Harold were innocent, he would not go into hiding. Since he is hiding,
he must not be innocent.

7. Nobody in Paris seems to understand me, so either my French is rotten or
Parisians are unfriendly.

8. Because both of our yards are near rivers in Tennessee, and my yard has
lots of mosquitoes, there must also be lots of mosquitoes in your yard.

9. Most likely, her new husband speaks English with an accent, because he
comes from Germany, and most Germans speak English with an accent.

10. There is no even number smaller than 2, so 1 is not an even number.

1. The following arguments are not clearly inductive and also not clearly
deductive. Explain why.

a. All humans are mortal, and Socrates is a human, so Socrates is likely to
be mortal also.

b. We checked every continent there is, and every raven in every continent
was observed to be black, so every raven is black.

c. If there’s radon in your basement, this monitor will go off. The monitor
is going off, so there must be radon in your basement. (Said by an engi-
neer while running the monitor in your basement.)

2. In mathematics, proofs are sometimes employed using the method of
mathematical induction. If you are familiar with this procedure, determine
whether these proofs are deductive or inductive in character. Explain why.

Discussion Questions

220

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

go wrong, even when made by experts, but the general pattern of this rea-
soning is quite clear: Statistical features of a sample are used to make statis-
tical claims about the population as a whole.

Basically the same form of reasoning can be used to reach a universal con-
clusion. An example is the inductive inference discussed at the start of this
chapter: All observed ravens are black, so all ravens are black. Again, we
sample part of a population to draw a conclusion about the whole. Argu-
ments of this form, whether the conclusion is universal or partial (as when it
cites a particular percentage), are called statistical generalizations.

How do we assess such inferences? To begin to answer this question, we can
consider a simple example of a statistical generalization. On various occasions,
Harold has tried to use Canadian quarters in American payphones and found
that they have not worked. From this he draws the conclusion that Canadian
quarters do not work in American payphones. Harold’s inductive reasoning
looks like this:

In the past, when I tried to use Canadian quarters in American
payphones, they did not work.

Canadian quarters do not work in American payphones.

The force of the conclusion is that Canadian quarters never work in Ameri-
can payphones.

In evaluating this argument, what questions should we ask? We can start
with a question that we should ask of any argument.

SHOULD WE ACCEPT THE PREMISES?

Perhaps Harold has a bad memory, has kept bad records, or is a poor ob-
server. For some obscure reason, he may even be lying. It is important to ask
this question explicitly, because fairly often the premises, when challenged,
will not stand up to scrutiny.

If we decide that the premises are acceptable (that is, true and justified),
then we can shift our attention to the relationship between the premises and
the conclusion and ask how much support the premises give to the conclu-
sion. One commonsense question is this: “How many times has Harold tried
to use Canadian quarters in American payphones?” If the answer is “Once,”
then our confidence in his argument should drop to almost nothing. So, for
statistical generalizations, it is always appropriate to ask about the size of the
sample.

IS THE SAMPLE LARGE ENOUGH?

One reason we should be suspicious of small samples is that they can be af-
fected by runs of luck. Suppose Harold flips a Canadian quarter four times
and it comes up heads each time. From this, he can hardly conclude that
Canadian quarters always come up heads when flipped. He could not even
reasonably conclude that this Canadian quarter would always come up

221

Stat ist ical General izat ions

heads when flipped. The reason for this is obvious enough: If you spend a
lot of time flipping coins, runs of four heads in a row are not all that unlikely
(the probability is actually one in sixteen), and therefore samples of this size
can easily be distorted by chance. On the other hand, if Harold flipped the
coin twenty times and it continued to come up heads, he would have strong
grounds for saying that this coin, at least, will always come up heads. In fact,
he would have strong grounds for thinking that he has a two-headed coin.
Because an overly small sample can lead to erroneous conclusions, we need
to make sure that our sample includes enough trials.

How many is enough? On the assumption, for the moment, that our
sampling has been fair in all other respects, how many samples do we need
to provide the basis for a strong inductive argument? This is not always an
easy question to answer, and sometimes answering it demands subtle
mathematical techniques. Suppose your company is selling 10 million com-
puter chips to the Department of Defense, and you have guaranteed that no
more than 0.2 percent of them will be defective. It would be prohibitively
expensive to test all the chips, and testing only a dozen would hardly be
enough to reasonably guarantee that the total shipment of chips meets the
required specifications. Because testing chips is expensive, you want to test
as few as possible; but because meeting the specifications is crucial, you
want to test enough to guarantee that you have done so. Answering ques-
tions of this kind demands sophisticated statistical techniques beyond the
scope of this text.

Sometimes, then, it is difficult to decide how many instances are needed
to give reasonable support to inductive generalizations; yet many times it
is obvious, without going into technical details, that the sample is too small.
Drawing an inductive conclusion from a sample that is too small can lead
to the fallacy of hasty generalization. It is surprising how common this fal-
lacy is. We see a person two or three times and find him cheerful, and we
immediately leap to the conclusion that he is a cheerful person. That is,
from a few instances of cheerful behavior, we draw a general conclusion
about his personality. When we meet him later and find him sad, morose,
or grouchy, we then conclude that he has changed—thus swapping one
hasty generalization for another.

This tendency toward hasty generalization was discussed over 200 years
ago by the philosopher David Hume, who saw that we have a strong ten-
dency to “follow general rules which we rashly form to ourselves, and
which are the source of what we properly call prejudice.“1 More recently,
this tendency toward hasty generalization has been the subject of extensive
psychological investigation. The cognitive psychologists Amos Tversky and
Daniel Kahneman put the matter this way:

We submit that people view a sample randomly drawn from a population as
highly representative, that is, similar to the population in all essential characteristics.
Consequently, they expect any two samples drawn from a particular population to
be more similar to one another and to the population than sampling theory predicts,
at least for small samples.2

222

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

To return to a previous example, we make our judgments of someone’s
personality on the basis of a very small sample of his or her behavior and ex-
pect this person to behave in similar ways in the future when we encounter
further samples of behavior. We are surprised, and sometimes indignant,
when the future behavior does not match our expectations.

By making our samples sufficiently large, we can guard against distor-
tions due to “runs of luck,” but even very large samples can give us a poor
basis for a statistical generalization. Suppose that Harold has tried hun-
dreds of times to use a Canadian quarter in an American payphone, and it
has never worked. This will increase our confidence in his generalization,
but size of sample alone is not a sufficient ground for a strong inductive ar-
gument. Suppose that Harold has tried the same coin in hundreds of differ-
ent payphones, or tried a hundred different Canadian coins in the same
payphone. In the first case, there might be something wrong with this par-
ticular coin; in the second case, there might be something wrong with this
particular payphone. In neither case would he have good grounds for mak-
ing the general claim that no Canadian quarters work in any American pay-
phones. This leads us to the third question we should ask of any statistical
generalization.

IS THE SAMPLE BIASED?

When the sample, however large, is not representative of the population,
then it is said to be unfair or biased. Here we can speak of the fallacy of
biased sampling.

One of the most famous errors of biased sampling was committed by a
magazine named the Literary Digest. Before the presidential election of 1936,
this magazine sent out 10 million questionnaires asking which candidate the
recipient would vote for: Franklin Roosevelt or Alf Landon. It received
2.5 million returns, and on the basis of the results, confidently predicted that
Landon would win by a landslide: 56 percent for Landon to only 44 percent
for Roosevelt. When the election results came in, Roosevelt had won by an
even larger landslide in the opposite direction: 62 percent for Roosevelt to a
mere 38 percent for Landon.

What went wrong? The sample was certainly large enough; in fact, by
contemporary standards it was much larger than needed. It was the way the
sample was selected, not its size, that caused the problem: The sample was
randomly drawn from names in telephone books and from club member-
ship lists. In 1936 there were only 11 million payphones in the United States,
and many of the poor—especially the rural poor—did not have payphones.
During the Great Depression there were more than 9 million unemployed
in America; they were almost all poor and thus underrepresented on club
membership lists. Finally, a large percentage of these underrepresented
groups voted for Roosevelt, the Democratic candidate. As a result of these
biases in its sampling, along with some others, the Literary Digest underesti-
mated Roosevelt’s percentage of the vote by a whopping 18 percent.

223

Stat ist ical General izat ions

Looking back, it may be hard to believe that intelligent observers could
have done such a ridiculously bad job of sampling opinion, but the story re-
peats itself, though rarely on the grand scale of the Literary Digest fiasco. In
1948, for example, the Gallup poll, which had correctly predicted Roo-
sevelt’s victory in 1936, predicted, as did other major polls, a clear victory
for Thomas Dewey over Harry Truman. Confidence was so high in this
prediction that the Chicago Tribune published a banner headline declaring
that Dewey had won the election before the votes were actually counted.

What went wrong this time? The answer here is more subtle. The Gallup
pollsters (and others) went to great pains to make sure that their sample
was representative of the voting population. The interviewers were told to
poll a certain number of people from particular social groups—rural poor,
suburban middle class, urban middle class, ethnic minorities, and so on—
so that the proportions of those interviewed matched, as closely as pos-
sible, the proportions of those likely to vote. (The Literary Digest went
bankrupt after its incorrect prediction, so the pollsters were taking no
chances.) Yet somehow bias crept into the sampling; the question was,
“How?” One speculation was that a large percentage of those sampled did
not tell the truth when they were interviewed; another was that a large
number of people changed their minds at the last minute. So perhaps the
data collected were not reliable. The explanation generally accepted was
more subtle. Although Gallup’s workers were told to interview specific
numbers of people from particular classes (so many from the suburbs, for
example), they were not instructed to choose people randomly from within
each group. Without seriously thinking about it, they tended to go to
“nicer” neighborhoods and interview “nicer” people. Because of this, they
biased the sample in the direction of their own (largely) middle-class pref-
erences and, as a result, under-represented constituencies that would give
Truman his unexpected victory.

IS THE RESULT BIASED IN SOME OTHER WAY?

Because professionals using modern techniques can make bad statistical gen-
eralizations through biased sampling, it is not surprising that our everyday, in-
formal inductive generalizations are often inaccurate. Sometimes we go astray
because of small samples and biased samples. This happens, for example,
when we form opinions about what people think or what people are like by
asking only our friends. But bias can affect our reasoning in other ways as well.

One of the main sources of bias in everyday life is prejudice. Even if we
sample a wide enough range of cases, we often reinterpret what we hear or
see in light of some preconception. People who are prejudiced will find very
little good and a great deal bad in those they despise, no matter how these
people actually behave. In fact, most people are a mixture of good and bad
qualities. By ignoring the former and dwelling on the latter, it is easy enough
for a prejudiced person to confirm negative opinions. Similarly, stereo-
types, which can be either positive or negative, often persist in the face of

224

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

overwhelming counterevidence. Criticizing the beliefs common in Britain in
his own day, David Hume remarked:

An Irishman cannot have wit, and a Frenchman cannot have solidity; for which
reason, though the conversation of the former in any instance be very agreeable,
and of the latter very judicious, we have entertained such a prejudice against
them, that they must be dunces and fops in spite of sense and reason.3

Although common stereotypes have changed somewhat since Hume’s day,
prejudice continues to distort the beliefs of many people in our own time.

Another common source of bias in sampling arises from phrasing ques-
tions in ways that encourage certain answers while discouraging others.
Even if a fair sample is asked a question, it is well known that the way a
question is phrased can exert a significant influence on how people will an-
swer it. Questions like the following are not intended to elicit information,
but instead to push people’s answers in one direction rather than another.

Which do you favor: (a) preserving a citizen’s constitutional right to bear
arms or (b) leaving honest citizens defenseless against armed criminals?

Which do you favor: (a) restricting the sale of assault weapons or (b)
knuckling under to the demands of the well-financed gun lobby?

In both cases, one alternative is made to sound attractive, the other unattrac-
tive. When questions of this sort are used, it is not surprising that different
pollsters can come up with wildly different results.

Now we can summarize and restate our questions. Confronted with induc-
tive generalizations, there are four questions that we should routinely ask:

1. Are the premises acceptable?

2. Is the sample too small?

3. Is the sample biased?

4. Are the results affected by other sources of bias?

By asking the preceding questions, specify what, if anything, is wrong with
the following statistical generalizations:

1. This philosophy class is about logic, so most philosophy classes are
probably about logic.

2. Most college students like to ski, because I asked a lot of students at
several colleges in the Rocky Mountains, and most of them like to ski.

3. K-Mart asked all of their customers throughout the country whether they
prefer K-Mart to Walmart, and 90 percent said they did, so 90 percent of
all shoppers in the country prefer K-Mart.

4. A Swede stole my bicycle, so most Swedes are thieves.

Exercise II

225

Stat ist ical Appl icat ions

STATISTICAL APPLICATIONS

In a statistical generalization, we draw inferences concerning a population
from information concerning a sample of that population. If 60 percent of
the population sampled said that they would vote for candidate X, we
might draw the conclusion that roughly 60 percent of the population will
vote for candidate X. With a statistical application (sometimes called a statisti-
cal syllogism), we reason in the reverse direction: From information concern-
ing a population, we draw a conclusion concerning a member or subset of
that population. Here is an example:

Ninety-seven percent of the Republicans in California voted for McCain.
Marvin is a Republican from California.

Marvin voted for McCain.

Such arguments have the following general form:

X percent of Fs have the feature G.
a is an F.

a has the feature G.4

5. I’ve never tried it before, but I just put a kiwi fruit in a tub of water. It
floated. So most kiwi fruits float in water.

6. I have lots of friends. Most of them think that I would make a great
president. So most Americans would probably agree.

7. In exit polls after people had just voted, most people told our candidate
that they voted for her, so probably most people did vote for her.

8. Mary told me that all of her older children are geniuses, so her baby will
probably be a genius, too.

9. When asked whether they would prefer a tax break or a bloated budget,
almost everyone said that they wanted a tax break. So a tax break is over-
whelmingly popular with the people.

10. When hundreds of convicted murderers in states without the death
penalty were asked whether they would have committed the murder if
the state had a death penalty, most of them said that they would not have
done it. So most murders can be deterred by the death penalty.

It is often easy to see that a sample is biased, but how can you tell that a sam-
ple is not biased? How can you determine whether a sample is big enough?

Discussion Question

226

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

Obviously, when we evaluate the strength of a statistical application, the
percentage of Fs that have the feature G will be important. As the figure ap-
proaches 100 percent, the argument gains strength. Thus, our original argu-
ment concerning Marvin is quite strong. We can also get strong statistical
applications when the figure approaches 0 percent. The following is a strong
inductive argument:

Three percent of the socialists from California voted for McCain.
Maureen is a socialist from California.

Maureen did not vote for McCain.

Statistical applications of the kind considered here are strong only if the fig-
ures are close to 100 percent or 0 percent. When the percentages are in the
middle of this range, such statistical applications are weak.

A more interesting problem in evaluating the strength of a statistical
application concerns the relevance of the premises to the conclusion. In the
above schematic representation, F stands for what is called the reference class.
In our first example, being a Republican from California is the reference
class; in our second example, being a socialist from California is the refer-
ence class. A striking feature of statistical applications is that using different
reference classes can yield incompatible results. To see this, consider the fol-
lowing example:

Three percent of Obama’s relatives voted for McCain.
Marvin is a relative of Obama.

Marvin did not vote for McCain.

We now have a statistical application that gives us strong support for the
claim that Marvin did not vote for McCain. This is incompatible with our
first statistical application, which gave strong support to the claim that he
did. To overlook this conflict between arguments based on different refer-
ence classes would be a kind of fallacy. Which statistical application, if ei-
ther, should we trust? This will depend on which of the reference classes we
take to be more relevant. Which counts more, political affiliation or family
ties? That might be hard to say.

One way of dealing with competing statistical applications is to combine
the reference classes. We could ask, for example, what percentage of Repub-
licans from California who are relatives of Obama voted for McCain? The re-
sult might come out this way:

Forty-two percent of Republicans from California who were relatives
of Obama voted for McCain.

Marvin is a Republican from California who is a relative of Obama.

Marvin voted for McCain.

This statistical application provides very weak support for its conclusion. In-
deed, it supplies some weak support for the denial of its conclusion—that is,
for the claim that Marvin did not vote for McCain.

227

Stat ist ical Appl icat ions

This situation can be diagrammed with ellipses of varying sizes to repre-
sent the percentages of Californians and relatives of Obama who do or do
not vote for McCain. First, we draw an ellipse to represent Republicans from
California and place a vertical line so that it cuts off roughly (very
roughly!) 97 percent of the area of that ellipse to represent the premise that
97 percent of the Republicans from California voted for McCain:

Voted for McCain

Republicans from California

Did not Vote for McCain

Next, we add a second ellipse to represent Obama’s relatives:

Voted for McCain

Republicans from California
Obama’s
relatives

Did not Vote for McCain

Only about 3 percent of the small ellipse is left of the line to represent the
premise that 3 percent of Obama’s relatives voted for McCain. The area that
lies within both ellipses represents the people who are both Republicans
from California and also relatives of Obama. About 42 percent of that area is
left of the line to represent the premise that 42 percent of Republicans from
California who were relatives of Obama voted for McCain. The whole dia-
gram now shows how all of these premises can be true, even though they
lead to conflicting conclusions.

This series of arguments illustrates in a clear way what we earlier called
the defeasibility of inductive inferences: A strong inductive argument can be
made weak by adding further information to the premises. Given that Mar-
vin is a Republican from California, we seemed to have good reason to think
that he voted for McCain. But when we added to this the additional piece of
information that he was a relative of Obama, the original argument lost most
of its force. And new information could produce another reversal. Suppose
we discover that Marvin, though a relative of Obama, actively campaigned
for McCain. Just about everyone who actively campaigns for a candidate
votes for that candidate, so it seems that we again have good reason for
thinking that Marvin voted for McCain.

It is clear, then, that the way we select our reference classes will affect
the strength of a statistical application. The general idea is that we should
define our reference classes in a way that brings all relevant evidence to

228

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

bear on the subject. But this raises difficulties. It is not always obvious
which factors are relevant and which are not. In our example, party affilia-
tion is relevant to how people voted in the 2008 election; shoe size presum-
ably is not. Whether gender is significant, and, if so, how significant, is a
matter for further statistical research.

These difficulties concerning the proper way to fix reference classes re-
flect a feature of all inductive reasoning: To be successful, such reasoning
must take place within a broader framework that helps determine which
features are significant and which features are not. Without this framework,
there would be no reason not to consider shoe size when trying to decide
how someone will vote. This shows how statistical applications, like all of
the other inductive arguments that we will study, cannot work properly
without appropriate background assumptions.

Carry the story of Marvin two steps further, producing two more reversals in
the strength of the statistical application with the conclusion that Marvin
voted for McCain.

Exercise III

For each of the following statistical applications, identify the reference class,
and then evaluate the strength of the argument in terms of the percentages or
proportions cited and the relevance of the reference class.

1. Less than 1 percent of the people in the world voted for McCain.
Michelle is a person in the world.

Michelle did not vote for McCain.

2. Very few teams repeat as Super Bowl champions.
New England was the last Super Bowl champion.

New England will not repeat as Super Bowl champion.

3. A very high percentage of people in the Senate are men.
Hillary Clinton is in the Senate.

Hillary Clinton is a man.

4. Three percent of socialists with blue eyes voted for McCain.
Maureen is a socialist with blue eyes.

Maureen did not vote for McCain.

Exercise IV

229

Stat ist ical Appl icat ions

5. Ninety-eight percent of what John says is true.

John said that his father is also named John.

John’s father is named John.

6. Ninety-eight percent of what John says is true.

John said that the Giants are going to win.

The Giants are going to win.

7. Half the time he doesn’t know what he is doing.

He is eating lunch.

He does not know that he is eating lunch.

8. Most people do not understand quantum mechanics.

My physics professor is a person.

My physics professor probably does not understand quantum mechanics.

9. Almost all birds can fly.

This penguin is a bird.

This penguin can fly.

10. Most people who claim to be psychic are frauds.

Mary claims to be psychic.

Mary is a fraud.

Although both in science and in daily life, we rely heavily on the methods of
inductive reasoning, this kind of reasoning raises a number of perplexing
problems. The most famous problem concerning the legitimacy of induction
was formulated by the eighteenth-century philosopher David Hume, first in
his Treatise of Human Nature and then later in his Enquiry Concerning Human
Understanding. A simplified version of Hume’s skeptical argument goes as fol-
lows: Our inductive generalizations seem to rest on the assumption that unob-
served cases will follow the patterns that we discovered in observed cases. That
is, our inductive generalizations seem to presuppose that nature operates uni-
formly: The way things are observed to behave here and now are accurate
indicators of how things behave anywhere and at any time. But by what right
can we assume that nature is uniform? Because this claim itself asserts a con-
tingent matter of fact, it could only be established by inductive reasoning. But
because all inductive reasoning presupposes the principle that nature is uni-
form, any inductive justification of this principle would seem to be circular. It
seems, then, that we have no ultimate justification for our inductive reasoning
at all. Is this a good argument or a bad one? Why?

Discussion Question

230

CHAPTER 8 ■ Arguments To and From General izat ions

NOTES
1 David Hume, A Treatise of Human Nature, 2nd ed. (1739; Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1978), 146.

2 Amos Tversky and Daniel Kahneman, “Belief in the Law of Small Numbers,” Psychological
Bulletin 76, no. 2 (1971), 105.

3 Hume, A Treatise of Human Nature, 146–47.

4 We can also have a probabilistic version of the statistical syllogism:

Ninety-seven percent of the Republicans from California voted for McCain.
Marvin is a Republican from California.

There is a 97 percent chance that Marvin voted for McCain.

We will discuss arguments concerning probability in Chapter 11.

Causal Reasoning

Statistical generalization can tell us that all ravens are black and that most Texans

will vote for McCain, but these generalizations alone cannot tell us what makes

ravens black or what makes most Texans vote for McCain. To determine what

causes such phenomena, we need to engage in a new kind of inductive reasoning—

causal reasoning—which is the topic of this chapter. We will show how causal

reasoning is often based on negative and positive tests for necessary conditions

and for sufficient conditions. After developing these tests and applying them to a

concrete example, we will discuss concomitant variation as a method of drawing

causal conclusions from imperfect correlations. Our goal throughout this chapter

is to improve our ability to identify causes so that we can better understand why

certain effects happened and also make better predictions about whether similar

events will happen in the future.

REASONING ABOUT CAUSES

If our car goes dead in the middle of rush-hour traffic just after its 20,000-mile
checkup, we assume that there must be some reason why this happened.
Cars just don’t stop for no reason at all. So we ask, “What caused our car to
stop?” The answer might be that it ran out of gas. If we find, in fact, that it
did run out of gas, then that will usually be the end of the matter. We will
think that we have discovered why this particular car stopped running. This
reasoning is about a particular car on a particular occasion, but it rests on cer-
tain generalizations: We are confident that our car stopped running when it ran
out of gas, because we believe that all cars stop running when they run out of
gas. We probably did not think about this, but our causal reasoning in this
particular case appealed to a commonly accepted causal generalization: Lack
of fuel causes cars to stop running. Many explanations depend on causal
generalizations.

Causal generalizations are also used to predict the consequences of partic-
ular actions or events. A race car driver might wonder, for example, what
would happen if he added just a bit of nitroglycerin to his fuel mixture.
Would it give him better acceleration, blow him up, do very little, or what?

9

231

232

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

In fact, the driver may not be in a position to answer this question straight
off, but his thinking will be guided by the causal generalization that igniting
nitroglycerin can cause a dangerous explosion.

So a similar pattern arises for both causal explanation and causal prediction.
These inferences contain two essential elements:

1. The facts in the particular case. (For example, the car stopped and the
gas gauge reads empty; or I just put a pint of nitroglycerin in the gas
tank of my Maserati, and I am about to turn the ignition key.)

2. Certain causal generalizations. (For example, cars do not run without
gas, or nitroglycerin explodes when ignited.)

The basic idea is that causal inferences bring particular facts under causal
generalizations.

This shows why causal generalizations are important, but what exactly
are they? Although this issue remains controversial, here we will treat them
as a kind of general conditional. A general conditional has the following form:

For all x, if x has the feature F, then x has the feature G.

We will say that, according to this conditional, x’s having the feature F is a
sufficient condition for its having the feature G; and x’s having the feature G is
a necessary condition for its having the feature F.

Some general conditionals are not causal. Neither of these two general
conditionals expresses a causal relationship:

If something is a square, then it is a rectangle.

If you are eighteen years old, then you are eligible to vote.

The first conditional tells us that being a square is sufficient for being a rec-
tangle, but this is a mathematical (or a priori) relationship, not a causal one.
The second conditional tells us that being eighteen years old is a sufficient
condition for being eligible to vote. The relationship here is legal, not causal.

Although many general conditionals are not causal, all causal conditionals
are general, in our view. Consequently, if we are able to show that a causal
conditional is false just by virtue of its being a general conditional, we will
have refuted it. This will serve our purposes well, for in what follows we will
be largely concerned with finding reasons for rejecting causal generalizations.

It is important to weed out false causal generalizations, because they can
create lots of trouble. Doctors used to think that bloodletting would cure dis-
ease. They killed many people in the process of trying to heal them. Thus,
although we need causal generalizations for getting along in the world, we
also need to get them right. We will be more likely to succeed if we have
proper principles for testing and applying such generalizations.

In the past, very elaborate procedures have been developed for this pur-
pose. The most famous set of such procedures was developed by John Stuart
Mill and has come to be known as Mill’s methods.1 Though inspired by
Mill’s methods, the procedures introduced here involve some fundamental

233

Suff ic ient Cond it ions and Necessary Cond it ions

simplifications; whereas Mill introduced five methods, we will introduce
only three primary rules.

The first two rules are the sufficient condition test (SCT) and the necessary
condition test (NCT). We will introduce these tests first at an abstract level.
One advantage of formulating these tests abstractly is so that they can be
applied to other kinds of sufficient and necessary conditions, for example,
those that arise in legal and moral reasoning, the topics of Chapters 18 and 19.
Once it is clear how these tests work in general, we will apply them specifi-
cally to causal reasoning.

SUFFICIENT CONDITIONS AND NECESSARY
CONDITIONS

To keep our discussion as general as possible, we will adopt the following
definitions of sufficient conditions and necessary conditions:

Feature F is a sufficient condition for feature G if and only if anything that
has feature F also has feature G.

Feature F is a necessary condition for feature G if and only if anything that
lacks feature F also lacks feature G.

These definitions are equivalent to those in the previous section, because, if
anything that lacks feature F also lacks feature G, then anything that has feature
G must also have feature F; and if anything that has feature G must also have
feature F, then anything that lacks feature F also lacks feature G. It follows that
feature F is a sufficient condition for feature G if and only if feature G is a nec-
essary condition for feature F.

When F is sufficient for G, the relation between these features can be dia-
grammed like this:

The inside circle represents the sufficient condition, because anything inside
that inside circle must also be inside the outside circle. The outside circle repre-
sents the necessary condition, for anything outside the outside circle must also
be outside the inside circle.

These diagrams, along with the preceding definitions, should make it
clear that something can be a sufficient condition for a feature without
being a necessary condition for that feature, and vice versa. For example,

234

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

being the element mercury is a sufficient condition for being a metal, but it
is not a necessary condition for being a metal, since there are other metals.
Similarly, being a metal is a necessary condition for being mercury, but it is
not a sufficient condition for being mercury. Of course, some necessary
conditions are also sufficient conditions. Being mercury is both necessary
and sufficient for being a metallic element that is liquid at twenty degrees
Centigrade. Nonetheless, many necessary conditions are not sufficient
conditions, and vice versa, so we need to be careful not to confuse the two
kinds of conditions.

This distinction becomes complicated when conditions get complex. Our
definitions and tests hold for all features, whether positive or negative (such
as not having hair) and whether simple or conjunctive (such as having both
a beard and a mustache) or disjunctive (such as having either a beard or a
mustache). Thus, not having any hair (anywhere) on your head is a suffi-
cient condition of not having a beard, so not having a beard is a necessary
condition of not having any hair on your head. But not having any hair on
your head is not necessary for not having a beard, because you can have
some hair on the top of your head without having a beard. Negation can cre-
ate confusion, so we need to think carefully about what is being claimed to
be necessary or sufficient for what.

Even in simple cases without negation, conjunction, or disjunction, there
is a widespread tendency to confuse necessary conditions with sufficient
conditions. It is important to keep these concepts straight, for, as we will see,
the tests concerning them are fundamentally different.

Which of the following claims are true? Which are false?

1. Being a car is a sufficient condition for being a vehicle.

2. Being a car is a necessary condition for being a vehicle.

3. Being a vehicle is a sufficient condition for being a car.

4. Being a vehicle is a necessary condition for being a car.

5. Being an integer is a sufficient condition for being an even number.

6. Being an integer is a necessary condition for being an even number.

7. Being an integer is a sufficient condition for being either an even number
or an odd number.

8. Being an integer is a necessary condition for being either an even number
or an odd number.

9. Not being an integer is a sufficient condition for not being an odd number.

10. Not being an integer is a sufficient condition for not being an even
number.

11. Being both an integer and divisible by 2 without remainder is a sufficient
condition for being an even number.

Exercise I

235

Suff ic ient Cond it ions and Necessary Cond it ions

12. Being both an integer and divisible by 2 without remainder is a necessary
condition for being an even number.

13. Being an integer divisible by 2 without remainder is a necessary condition
for being an even number.

14. Driving seventy-five miles per hour (for fun) is a sufficient condition for
violating a legal speed limit of sixty-five miles per hour.

15. Driving seventy-five miles per hour (for fun) is a necessary condition for
violating a legal speed limit of sixty-five miles per hour.

16. Cutting off Joe’s head is a sufficient condition for killing him.

17. Cutting off Joe’s head is a necessary condition for killing him.

18. Cutting off Joe’s head and then holding his head under water for ten min-
utes is a sufficient condition for killing him.

Indicate whether the following principles are true or false and why.

1. If having feature F is a sufficient condition for having feature G, then
having feature G is a necessary condition for having feature F.

2. If having feature F is a sufficient condition for having feature G, then
lacking feature F is a necessary condition for lacking feature G.

3. If lacking feature F is a sufficient condition for having feature G, then
having feature F is a necessary condition for lacking feature G.

4. If lacking feature F is a sufficient condition for having feature G, then
lacking feature F is a necessary condition for having feature G.

5. If having either feature F or feature G is a sufficient condition for having
feature H, then having feature F is a sufficient condition for having
feature H.

6. If having either feature F or feature G is a sufficient condition for having
feature H, then having feature G is a sufficient condition for having
feature H.

7. If having either feature F or feature G is a sufficient condition for having
feature H, then not having feature F is a necessary condition for not having
feature H.

8. If having both feature F and feature G is a necessary condition for having
feature H, then lacking feature F is a sufficient condition for lacking feature H.

9. If not having both feature F and feature G is a sufficient condition for
having feature H, then lacking feature F is a sufficient condition for having
feature H.

10. If having either feature F or feature G is a sufficient condition for having
feature H, then having both feature F and feature G is a sufficient condition
for having feature H.

Exercise II

236

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

THE SUFFICIENT CONDITION TEST

We can now formulate tests to determine when something meets our defini-
tions of sufficient conditions and necessary conditions. It will simplify mat-
ters if we first state these tests formally using letters. We will also begin with
a simple case where we consider only four candidates—A, B, C, and D—for
sufficient conditions for a target feature, G. A will indicate that the feature is
present; ~A will indicate that this feature is absent. Using these conventions,
suppose that we are trying to decide whether any of the four features—A, B,
C, or D—could be a sufficient condition for G. To this end, we collect data of
the following kind:

TABLE 1

Case 1: A B C D G

Case 2: ~A B C ~D ~G

Case 3: A ~B ~C ~D ~G

We know by definition that, for something to be a sufficient condition of
something else, when the former is present, the latter must be present as
well. Thus, to test whether a candidate really is a sufficient condition of G,
we only have to examine cases in which the target feature, G, is absent, and
then check to see whether any of the candidate features are present. The suf-
ficient condition test (SCT) can be stated as follows:

SCT: Any candidate that is present when G is absent is eliminated as a
possible sufficient condition of G.

The test applies to Table 1 as follows: Case 1 need not be examined because G
is present, so there can be no violation of SCT in Case 1. Case 2 eliminates two
of the candidates, B and C, for both are present in a situation in which G is ab-
sent. Finally, Case 3 eliminates A for the same reason. We are thus left with D
as our only remaining candidate for a sufficient condition for G.

Now let’s consider feature D. Having survived the application of the SCT,
does it follow that D is a sufficient condition for G? No! On the basis of what
we have been told so far, it remains entirely possible that the discovery of a
further case will reveal an instance where D is present and G absent, thus
showing that D is also not a sufficient condition for G.

Case 4: ~A B C D ~G

In this way, it is always possible for new cases to refute any inference from a
limited group of cases to the conclusion that a certain candidate is a suffi-
cient condition. In contrast, no further case can change the fact that A, B, and
C are not sufficient conditions, because they fail the SCT.

This observation shows that, when we apply the SCT to rule out a candidate
as a sufficient condition, our argument is deductive. We simply find a counter-
example to the universal claim that a certain feature is sufficient. (See Chapter 17
on counterexamples.) However, when a candidate is not ruled out and we draw
the positive conclusion that that candidate is a sufficient condition, then our

237

Suff ic ient Cond it ions and Necessary Cond it ions

argument is inductive. Inductive inferences, however well confirmed, are always
defeasible. (Recall Captain Cook’s discovery of black swans at the start of Chap-
ter 8.) That is why our inductive inference to the conclusion that D is a sufficient
condition could be refuted by the new data in Case 4.

THE NECESSARY CONDITION TEST

The necessary condition test (NCT) is like the SCT, but it works in the reverse
fashion. With SCT we eliminated a candidate F from being the sufficient con-
dition for G, if F was ever present when G was absent. With the necessary
condition test, we eliminate a candidate F from being a necessary condition
for G if we can find a case where G is present, but F is not. This makes sense,
because if G can be present when F is not, then F cannot be necessary for the
occurrence of G. Thus, in applying the necessary condition test, we only have
to examine cases in which the target feature, G, is present, and then check to
see whether any of the candidate features are absent.

NCT: Any candidate that is absent when G is present is eliminated as a
possible necessary condition of G.

The following table gives an example of an application of this test:

TABLE 2

Case 1: A B C D ~G

Case 2: ~A B C D G

Case 3: A ~B C ~D G

Because Case 1 does not provide an instance where G is present, it cannot
eliminate any candidate as a necessary condition of G. Case 2 eliminates A
as a necessary condition of G, since it shows that G can be present without A
being present. Case 3 then eliminates both B and D, leaving C as the only
possible candidate for being a necessary condition for G.

From this, of course, it does not follow that C is a necessary condition for G,
for, as always, new cases might eliminate it as well. The situation is the same as
with the SCT. An argument for a negative conclusion that a candidate is not a
necessary condition, because that candidate fails the NCT, is a deductive argu-
ment that cannot be overturned by any further cases. In contrast, an argument
for a positive conclusion that a candidate is a necessary condition, because that
candidate passes the NCT, is an inductive argument that can be overturned
by a further case where this candidate fails the NCT. For example, suppose
we find:

Case 4: ~A ~B ~C ~D G

The information in this new Case 4 is enough to show that C cannot be a neces-
sary condition of the target feature G, regardless of what we found in Cases 1–3.

In applying both the SCT and the NCT, it is crucial to specify the target
feature. Case 4 shows that candidate C is not a necessary condition for target
feature G. Nonetheless, candidate C still might be necessary for the opposite

238

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

target feature, ~G. It also might be necessary for features A, B, and D. Nothing
in Cases 1–4 rules out these possibilities. Thus, even after Case 4, we cannot
say simply that C is not a necessary condition. Case 4 shows that candidate
feature C is not a necessary conditions for target feature G, but C still might be
necessary for something else. The same point applies to sufficient conditions
as well. In Table 1, Case 2 ruled out the possibility that candidate feature B
is sufficient for target feature G, but none of the cases in Table 1 show that B
is not sufficient for target feature C. To avoid confusion, then, it is always
important to specify the target feature when talking about what is or is not a
necessary or sufficient condition.

THE JOINT TEST

It is also possible to apply these rules simultaneously in the search for possible
conditions that are both sufficient and necessary. Any candidate cannot be both
sufficient and necessary if it fails either the SCT or the NCT. In Table 2, C is the
only possible necessary condition for G, and it is not also a possible sufficient
condition for G, since C fails the SCT in Case 1, where C is present and G is
absent. In Table 1, however, D is a possible sufficient condition of G, because D
is never present when G is absent; and D might also be a necessary condition
for G, since G is never present when D is absent. Thus, none of Cases 1–3 in
Table 1 eliminates D as a candidate for a condition that is both sufficient and
necessary for G. As before, this possibility still might be refuted by Case 4, so
any inference to a positive conclusion that some candidate is a necessary
and sufficient condition must be defeasible and, hence, inductive.

For each of the following tables determine

a. Which, if any, of the candidates—A, B, C, or D—is not eliminated by the
sufficient condition test as a sufficient condition for target feature G?

b. Which, if any, of the candidates—A, B, C, or D—is not eliminated by the
necessary condition test as a necessary condition for target feature G?

c. Which, if any, of the candidates—A, B, C, or D—is not eliminated by
either test?

EXAMPLE: Case 1: A B �C D �G

Case 2: �A B C D G

Case 3: A �B C D G

a. Only C passes the SCT.

b. Only C and D pass the NCT.

c. Only C passes both tests.

Exercise III

239

Suff ic ient Cond it ions and Necessary Cond it ions

1. Case 1: A B C D G
Case 2: �A B �C D �G
Case 3: A �B C �D G

2. Case 1: A B C �D G
Case 2: �A B C D G
Case 3: A �B C �D G

3. Case 1: A B C D �G
Case 2: �A B C D G
Case 3: A �B C �D G

4. Case 1: A B �C D G
Case 2: �A �B C D G
Case 3: A B �C �D �G

5. Case 1: A �B C D �G
Case 2: �A B C �D �G
Case 3: A �B �C D G

6. Case 1: A B �C D G
Case 2: �A �B C D �G
Case 3: A �B C �D �G

7. Case 1: A B �C D �G
Case 2: �A B �C D �G
Case 3: A B �C �D �G

8. Case 1: A B C D �G
Case 2: �A �B C D G
Case 3: A �B �C �D �G

Imagine that your desktop computer system won’t work, and you want to find
out why. After checking to make sure that it is plugged in, you experiment
with a new central processing unit (CPU), a new monitor (MON), and new
system software (SSW) in the combinations on the table below. The candidates
for necessary conditions and sufficient conditions of failure are the plug posi-
tion (in or out), the CPU (old or new), the monitor (old or new), and the soft-
ware (old or new). For each candidate, say (1) which cases, if any, eliminate it
as a sufficient condition of your computer’s failure and (2) which cases, if any,
eliminate it as a necessary condition of your computer’s failure. Which candi-
dates, if any, are not eliminated as a sufficient condition of failure? As a neces-
sary condition of failure? Does it follow that these candidates are necessary
conditions or sufficient conditions of failure? Why or why not?

Exercise IV

(continued)

240

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

Plug CPU Monitor Software Result

Case 1 ln Old CPU Old MO Old SW Works
Case 2 ln Old CPU Old MO New SW Works
Case 3 ln Old CPU New MO Old SW Fails
Case 4 ln Old CPU New MO New SW Works
Case 5 ln Old CPU Old MO Old SW Works
Case 6 ln Old CPU Old MO New SW Works
Case 7 ln Old CPU New MO Old SW Fails
Case 8 ln Old CPU New MO New SW Works
Case 9 ln New CPU Old MO Old SW Fails
Case 10 ln New CPU Old MO New SW Works
Case 11 ln New CPU New MO Old SW Fails
Case 12 ln New CPU New MO New SW Works

After a banquet, several diners get sick and die. You suspect that something they
ate or drank caused their deaths. The following table records their meals and
fates. The target feature is death. The candidates for necessary conditions and suf-
ficient conditions of death are the soup, entrée, wine, and dessert. For each candi-
date, say (1) which cases, if any, eliminate it as a sufficient condition of death and
(2) which cases, if any, eliminate it as a necessary condition of death. Which can-
didates, if any, are not eliminated as a sufficient condition of death? Which candi-
dates, if any, are not eliminated as a necessary condition of death? Does it follow
that these candidates are necessary conditions or sufficient conditions of death?
Why or why not?

Diners Soup Entrée Wine Dessert Result

Ann Tomato Chicken White Pie Alive
Barney Tomato Fish Red Cake Dead
Cathy Tomato Beef Red Ice Cream Alive
Doug Tomato Beef Red Cake Alive
Emily Tomato Fish Red Pie Dead
Fred Tomato Fish Red Cake Dead
Gertrude Leek Fish White Pie Alive
Harold Tomato Beef White Cake Alive
Irma Leek Fish Red Pie Dead
Jack Leek Beef Red Ice Cream Alive
Ken Leek Chicken Red Ice Cream Alive
Leslie Tomato Chicken White Cake Alive

Exercise V

RIGOROUS TESTING

Going back to Table 1, it is easy to see that candidates A, B, C, and D are not
eliminated by the NCT as necessary conditions of target G, as G is present in
only one case (Case 1) and A, B, C, and D are present there as well. So far, so

241

Suff ic ient Cond it ions and Necessary Cond it ions

good. But if we wanted to test these features more rigorously, it would be
important to find more cases in which target G was present and see whether
these candidates are also present and thus continue to survive the NCT.

The following table gives a more extreme example of nonrigorous testing:

TABLE 3

Case 1: A ~B C D G

Case 2: A ~B ~C ~D ~G

Case 3: A ~B C ~D ~G

Case 4: A ~B ~C D G

Here candidate feature A is eliminated by SCT (in Cases 2 and 3) but is
not eliminated by NCT, so it is a possible necessary condition but not a
possible sufficient condition for target feature G. B is not eliminated by
SCT but is eliminated by NCT (in Cases 1 and 4), so it is a possible suffi-
cient condition but not a possible necessary condition for target feature G.
C is eliminated by both rules (in Cases 3 and 4). Only D is not eliminated
by either test, so it is the only candidate for being both a necessary and a
sufficient condition for G.

The peculiarity of this example is that candidate A is always present
whether target G is present or not, and candidate B is always absent whether
target G is absent or not. Now if something is always present, as A is, then it
cannot possibly fail the NCT; for there cannot be a case where the target is
present and the candidate is absent if the candidate is always present. If we
want to test candidate A rigorously under the NCT, then we should try to find
cases in which A is absent and then check to see whether G is absent as well.

In reverse fashion, but for similar reasons, if we want to test candidate B
rigorously under the SCT, then we should try to find cases in which B is
present and then check to see if G is present as well. If we restrict our atten-
tion to cases where B is always absent, as in Table 3, then B cannot possibly
fail the SCT, but passing that test will be trivial for B and so will not even
begin to show that B is a sufficient condition for G.

Now consider two more sets of data just like Table 2, except with regard
to the target feature, G:

TABLE 4

Case 1: A B C D G

Case 2: ~A B C D G

Case 3: A ~B C ~D G

TABLE 5

Case 1: A B C D ~G

Case 2: ~A B C D ~G

Case 3: A ~B C ~D ~G

Because G is present in all of the cases in Table 4, no candidate can be
eliminated by the SCT as a sufficient condition for target feature G. This

242

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

result is trivial, however. Table 4 does not provide rigorous testing for a
sufficient condition of G, because our attention is restricted to a range of
cases that is too narrow. Nothing could possibly be eliminated as a suffi-
cient condition of G as long as G is always present.

Similarly, G is absent in all of the cases in Table 5, so no candidate can be
eliminated by the NCT as a necessary condition of target feature G. Still, be-
cause this data is so limited, its failure to eliminate candidates does not even
begin to show that anything is a necessary condition of G.

For both rules, then, rigorous testing involves seeking out cases in which
failing the test is a live possibility. For the SCT, this requires looking both at
cases in which the candidates are present and also at cases in which the target
is absent. For the NCT, rigorous testing requires looking both at cases in which
the candidates are absent and also at cases in which the target is present. With-
out cases like these, passing the tests is rather like a person bragging that he has
never struck out when, in fact, he has never come up to bat.

REACHING POSITIVE CONCLUSIONS

Suppose that we performed rigorous testing on candidate C, and it passed
the SCT with flying colors. Can we now draw the positive conclusion that C
is a sufficient condition for the target G? That depends on which kinds of
candidates and cases have been considered. Since rigorous testing was
passed, these three conditions are met:

1. We have tested some cases in which the candidate, C, is present.

2. We have tested some cases in which the target, G, is absent.

3. We have not found any case in which the candidate, C, is present and
the target, G, is absent.

For it to be reasonable to reach a positive conclusion that C is sufficient for
G, this further condition must also be met:

4. We have tested enough cases of the various kinds that are likely to
include a case in which C is present and G is absent if there is any
such case.

This new condition cannot be applied in the mechanical way that condi-
tions 1–3 could be applied. To determine whether condition 4 is met, we
need to rely on background information about how many cases are “enough”
and about which kinds of cases “are likely to include a case in which C is
present and G is absent, if there is any such case.” For example, if we are
trying to figure out whether our new software is causing our computer to
crash, we do not need to try the same kind of computer in different colors.
What we need to try are different kinds of CPUs, monitors, software, and
so on, because we know that these are the kinds of factors that can affect
performance. Background information like this is what tells us when we
have tested enough cases of the right kinds.

Of course, our background assumptions might turn out to be wrong. Even
if we have tested many variations of every feature that we think might be

243

Apply ing These Methods to F ind Causes

relevant, we still might be surprised and find a further case in which C and
~G are present. All that shows, however, is that our inference is defeasible,
like all inductive arguments. Despite the possibility that future discoveries
might undermine it, our inductive inference can still be strong if our back-
ground beliefs are justified and if we have looked long and hard without
finding any case in which C is present and G is absent.

Similar rules apply in reverse to positive conclusions about necessary
conditions. We have good reason to suppose that candidate C is a necessary
condition for target G, if the following conditions are met:

1. We have tested some cases in which the candidate, C, is absent.

2. We have tested some cases in which the target, G, is present.

3. We have not found any case in which the candidate, C, is absent and
the target, G, is present.

4. We have tested enough cases of the various kinds that are likely to
include a case in which C is absent and G is present, if there is any
such case.

This argument again depends on background assumptions in determining
whether condition 4 is met. This argument is also defeasible, as before.
Nonetheless, if our background assumptions are justified, the fact that
conditions 1–4 are all met can still provide a strong reason for the positive
conclusion that candidate C is a necessary condition for target G.

The SCT and NCT themselves are still negative and deductive; but that does
not make them better than the positive tests encapsulated in conditions 1–4.
The negative SCT and NCT are of no use when we need to argue that some
condition is sufficient or is necessary. Such positive conclusions can be reached
only by applying something like condition 4, which will require background
information. These inductive arguments might not be as clear-cut or secure
as the negative ones, but they can still be inductively strong under the right
circumstances. That is all they claim to be.

APPLYING THESE METHODS TO FIND CAUSES

In stating the SCT and NCT and applying these tests to abstract patterns of
conditions to eliminate candidates, our procedure was fairly mechanical. We
cannot be so mechanical when we try to reach positive conclusions that certain
conditions are necessary, sufficient, or both. Applying these rules to actual con-
crete situations introduces a number of further complications, especially when
using our tests to determine causes.

NORMALITY

First, it is important to keep in mind that, in our ordinary understanding of
causal conditions, we usually take it for granted that the setting is normal. It
is part of common knowledge that if you strike a match, then it will light.

244

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

Thus, we consider striking a match sufficient to make it light. But if someone
has filled the room with carbon dioxide, then the match will not light, no
matter how it is struck. Here one may be inclined to say that, after all, strik-
ing a match is not sufficient to light it. We might try to be more careful and
say that if a match is struck and the room is not filled with carbon dioxide,
then it will light. But this new conditional overlooks other possibilities—for
example, that the room has been filled with nitrogen, that the match has been
fireproofed, that the wrong end of the match was struck, that the match has
already been lit, and so forth. It now seems that the antecedent of our condi-
tional will have to be endlessly long in order to specify a true or genuine suf-
ficient condition. In fact, however, we usually feel quite happy with saying
that if you strike a match, then it will light. We simply do not worry about the
possibility that the room has been filled with carbon dioxide, the match has
been fireproofed, and so on. Normally we think that things are normal, and
give up this assumption only when some good reason appears for doing so.

These reflections suggest the following contextualized restatement of our
original definitions of sufficient conditions and necessary conditions:

F is a sufficient condition for G if and only if, whenever F is present in a
normal context, G is present there as well.

F is a necessary condition for G if and only if, whenever F is absent from
a normal context, G is absent from it as well.

What will count as a normal context will vary with the type and the aim of
an investigation, but all investigations into causally sufficient conditions
and causally necessary conditions take place against the background of
many factors that are taken as fixed.

BACKGROUND ASSUMPTIONS

If we are going to subject a causal hypothesis to rigorous testing with the SCT
and the NCT, we have to seek out a wide range of cases that might refute that
hypothesis. In general, the wider the range of possible refuters the better. Still,
some limit must be put on this activity or else testing will get hopelessly
bogged down. If we are testing a drug to see whether it will cure a disease, we
should try it on a variety of people of various ages, medical histories, body
types, and so on, but we will not check to see whether it works on people
named Edmund or check to see whether it works on people who drive Volvos.
Such factors, we want to say, are plainly irrelevant. But what makes them
irrelevant? How do we distinguish relevant from irrelevant considerations?

The answer to this question is that our reasoning about causes occurs within
a framework of beliefs that we take to be established as true. This framework
contains a great deal of what is called common knowledge—knowledge we
expect almost every sane adult to possess. We all know, for example, that
human beings cannot breathe underwater, cannot walk through walls, cannot
be in two places at once, and so on. The stock of these commonplace beliefs is
almost endless. Because they are commonplace beliefs, they tend not to be

245

Apply ing These Methods to F ind Causes

mentioned; yet they play an important role in distinguishing relevant factors
from irrelevant ones.

Specialized knowledge also contains its own principles that are largely
taken for granted by experts. Doctors, for example, know a great deal about
the detailed structure of the human body, and this background knowledge
constantly guides their thought in dealing with specific illnesses. Even if
someone claimed to discover that blood does not circulate, no doctor would
take the time to refute that claim.

It might seem close-minded to refuse to consider a possibility that some-
one else suggests. However, giving up our basic beliefs can be very costly. A
doctor who took seriously the suggestion that blood does not circulate, for
example, would have to abandon our whole way of viewing humans and
other animals, along with the rest of biology and science. It is not clear how
this doctor could go on practicing medicine. Moreover, there is usually no
practical alternative in real life. When faced with time pressure and limited
information, we have no way to judge new ideas without taking some back-
ground assumptions for granted.

A DETAILED EXAMPLE

To get a clearer idea of the complex interplay between our tests and the re-
liance on background information, it will be helpful to look in some detail at
actual applications of these tests. For this purpose, we will examine an at-
tempt to find the cause of a particular phenomenon, an outbreak of what
came to be known as Legionnaires’ disease. The example not only shows
how causal reasoning relies on background assumptions, it has another
interesting feature as well: In the process of discovering the cause of Legion-
naires’ disease, the investigators were forced to abandon what was previ-
ously taken to be a well-established causal generalization. In fact, until it
was discarded, this false background principle gave them no end of trouble.

The story began at an otherwise boring convention:

The 58th convention of the American Legion’s Pennsylvania Department was
held at the Bellevue-Stratford Hotel in Philadelphia from July 21 through 24,
1976. . . . Between July 22 and August 3, 149 of the conventioneers developed
what appeared to be the same puzzling illness, characterized by fever, coughing
and pneumonia. This, however, was an unusual, explosive outbreak of pneumo-
nia with no apparent cause. . . . Legionnaires’ disease, as the illness was quickly
named by the press, was to prove a formidable challenge to epidemiologists
and laboratory investigators alike.2

Notice that at this stage the researchers begin with the assumption that they
are dealing with a single illness and not a collection of similar but different
illnesses. That assumption could turn out to be wrong; but, if the symptoms
of the various patients are sufficiently similar, this is a natural starting as-
sumption. Another reasonable starting assumption is that this illness had
a single causative agent. This assumption, too, could turn out to be false,
though it did not. The assumption that they were dealing with a single

246

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

disease with a single cause was at least a good simplifying assumption, one
to be held onto until there was good reason to give it up. In any case, we
now have a clear specification of our target feature, G: the occurrence of a
carefully described illness that came to be known as Legionnaires’ disease.
The situation concerning it was puzzling because people had contracted a
disease with symptoms much like those of pneumonia, yet they had not
tested positive for any of the known agents that cause such diseases.

The narrative continues as follows:

The initial step in the investigation of any epidemic is to determine the character
of the illness, who has become ill and just where and when. The next step is to
find out what was unique about the people who became ill: where they were and
what they did that was different from other people who stayed well. Knowing
such things may indicate how the disease agent was spread and thereby suggest
the identity of the agent and where it came from.

Part of this procedure involves a straightforward application of the NCT:
Was there any interesting feature that was always present in the history of
people who came down with the illness? Progress was made almost at once
on this front:

We quickly learned that the illness was not confined to Legionnaires. An
additional 72 cases were discovered among people who had not been directly
associated with the convention. They had one thing in common with the sick
conventioneers: for one reason or another they had been in or near the
Bellevue-Stratford Hotel.

Strictly speaking, of course, all these people who had contracted the dis-
ease had more than one thing in common. They were, for example, all
alive at the time they were in Philadelphia, and being alive is, in fact, a
necessary condition for getting Legionnaires’ disease. But the researchers
were not interested in this necessary condition because it is a normal
background condition for the contraction of any disease. Furthermore, it
did not provide a condition that distinguished those who contracted the
disease from those who did not. The overwhelming majority of people
who were alive at the time did not contract Legionnaires’ disease. Thus,
the researchers were not interested in this necessary condition because it
would fail so badly when tested by the SCT as a sufficient condition. On
the basis of common knowledge and specialized medical knowledge, a
great many other conditions were also kept off the candidate list.

One prime candidate on the list was presence at the Bellevue-Stratford
Hotel. The application of the NCT to this candidate was straightforward.
Everyone who had contracted the disease had spent time in or near that
hotel. Thus, presence at the Bellevue-Stratford could not be eliminated as a
necessary condition of Legionnaires’ disease.

The application of the SCT was more complicated, because not everyone
who stayed at the Bellevue-Stratford contracted the disease. Other factors
made a difference: “Older conventioneers had been affected at a higher rate

247

Apply ing These Methods to F ind Causes

than younger ones, men at three times the rate for women.” Since some
young women (among others) who were present at the Bellevue-Stratford
did not get Legionnaires’ disease, presence at that hotel could be eliminated
as a sufficient condition of Legionnaires’ disease. Nonetheless, it is part of
medical background knowledge that susceptibility to disease often varies
with age and gender. Given these differences, some people who spent time
at the Bellevue-Stratford were at higher risk for contracting the disease than
others. The investigation so far suggested that, for some people, being at
the Bellevue-Stratford was connected with a sufficient condition for con-
tracting Legionnaires’ disease. Indeed, the conjunction of spending time at
the Bellevue-Stratford and being susceptible to the disease could not be
ruled out by the SCT as a sufficient condition of getting the disease.

As soon as spending time at the Bellevue-Stratford became the focus of
attention, other hypotheses naturally suggested themselves. Food poisoning
was a reasonable suggestion, since it is part of medical knowledge that diseases
are sometimes spread by food. It was put on the list of possible candidates, but
failed. Investigators checked each local restaurant and each function where
food and drink were served. Some of the people who ate in each place did not
get Legionnaires’ disease, so the food at these locations was eliminated by the
SCT as a sufficient condition of Legionnaires’ disease. These candidates were
also eliminated by the NCT as necessary conditions because some people who
did get Legionnaires’ disease did not eat at each of these restaurants and func-
tions. Thus, the food and drink could not be the cause.

Further investigation turned up another important clue to the cause of
the illness.

Certain observations suggested that the disease might have been spread through
the air. Legionnaires who became ill had spent on the average about 60 percent
more time in the lobby of the Bellevue-Stratford than those who remained well;
the sick Legionnaires had also spent more time on the sidewalk in front of the
hotel than their unaffected fellow conventioneers. . . . It appeared, therefore, that
the most likely mode of transmission was airborne.

Merely breathing air in the lobby of the Bellevue-Stratford Hotel still could not
be a necessary or sufficient condition, but the investigators reasoned that
something in the lobby air probably caused Legionnaires’ disease, since the
rate of the disease varied up or down in proportion to the time spent in the
lobby (or near it on the sidewalk in front). This is an application of the method
of concomitant variation, which will be discussed soon.

Now that the focus was on the lobby air, the next step was to pinpoint a
specific cause in that air. Again appealing to background medical knowl-
edge, there seemed to be three main candidates for the airborne agents
that could have caused the illness: “heavy metals, toxic organic substances,
and infectious organisms.” Examination of tissues taken from patients who
had died from the disease revealed “no unusual levels of metallic or toxic
organic substances that might be related to the epidemic,” so this left an
infectious organism as the remaining candidate. Once more we have an

248

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

application of NCT. If the disease had been caused by heavy metals or toxic
organic substances, then there would have been unusually high levels of
these substances in the tissues of those who had contracted the disease. Be-
cause this was not always so, these candidates were eliminated as necessary
conditions of the disease.

Appealing to background knowledge once more, it seemed that a bac-
terium would be the most likely source of an airborne disease with the
symptoms of Legionnaires’ disease. But researchers had already made a rou-
tine check for bacteria that cause pneumonia-like diseases, and they had
found none. For this reason, attention was directed to the possibility that
some previously unknown organism had been responsible but had some-
how escaped detection.

It turned out that an undetected and previously unknown bacterium had
caused the illness, but it took more than four months to find this out. The
difficulties encountered in this effort show another important fact about the
reliance on a background assumption: Sometimes it turns out to be false. To
simplify, the standard way to test for the presence of bacteria is to try to
grow them in culture dishes—flat dishes containing nutrients that bacteria
can live on. If, after a reasonable number of tries, a colony of a particular kind
of bacterium does not appear, then it is concluded that the bacterium is not
present. As it turned out, the bacterium that caused Legionnaires’ disease
would not grow in the cultures commonly used to detect the presence of
bacteria. Thus, an important background assumption turned out to be false.

After a great deal of work, a suspicious bacterium was detected using a
live-tissue culture rather than the standard synthetic culture. The task,
then, was to show that this particular bacterium in fact caused the disease.
Again to simplify, when people are infected by a particular organism, they
often develop antibodies that are specifically aimed at this organism. In
the case of Legionnaires’ disease, these antibodies were easier to detect
than the bacterium itself. They also remained in the patients’ bodies after
the infection had run its course. We thus have another chance to apply the
NCT: If Legionnaires’ disease was caused by this particular bacterium,
then whenever the disease was present, this antibody should be present as
well. The suspicious bacterium passed this test with flying colors and was
named, appropriately enough, Legionella pneumophila. Because the investi-
gators had worked so hard to test such a wide variety of candidates, they
assumed that the disease must have some cause among the candidates that
they checked. So, since only one candidate remained, they felt justified in
reaching a positive conclusion that the bacterium was a necessary condi-
tion of Legionnaires’ disease.

The story of the search for the cause of Legionnaires’ disease brings out
two important features of the use of inductive methods in the sciences. First,
it involves a complicated interplay between what is already established and
what is being tested. Confronted with a new problem, established principles
can be used to suggest theoretically significant hypotheses to be tested. The
tests then eliminate some hypotheses and leave others. If, at the end of the

249

Apply ing These Methods to F ind Causes

investigation, a survivor remains that fits in well with our previously estab-
lished principles, then the stock of established principles is increased. The
second thing that this example shows is that the inductive method is fallible.
Without the background of established principles, the application of induc-
tive principles like the NCT and the SCT would be undirected; yet sometimes
these established principles let us down, for they can turn out to be false. The
discovery of the false background principle that hindered the search for
the cause of Legionnaires’ disease led to important revisions in laboratory
techniques. The discovery that certain fundamental background principles
are false can lead to revolutionary changes in science. (See Chapter 20.)

CALLING THINGS CAUSES

After their research was finally completed, with the bacterium identified,
described, and named, it was then said that Legionella pneumophila was the
cause of Legionnaires’ disease. What was meant by this? To simplify a bit,
suppose L. pneumophila (as it is abbreviated) entered the bodies of all those
who contracted the disease: Whenever the disease was present, L. pneumophila
was present. Thus, L. pneumophila passes the NCT for the disease. We will
further suppose, as is common in bacterial infections, that some people’s
immune systems were successful in combating L. pneumophila, and they
never actually developed the disease. Thus, the presence of L. pneumophila
would not pass the SCT for the disease. This suggests that we sometimes call
something a cause of an effect if it passes the NCT for that effect, even if it
does not pass the SCT for that effect.

But even if we sometimes consider necessary conditions to be causes, we
certainly do not consider all necessary conditions to be causes. We have already
noted that to get Legionnaires’ disease, one has to be alive, yet no one thinks
that being alive is the cause of Legionnaires’ disease. To cite another example,
this time one that is not silly, it might be that another necessary condition for de-
veloping Legionnaires’ disease is that the person be in a run-down condition—
healthy people might always be able to resist L. pneumophila. Do we then want
to say that being in a run-down condition is the cause of Legionnaires’ disease?
As we have described the situation, almost certainly not, but we might want to
say that it is an important causal factor or causally relevant factor.

Although the matter is far from clear, what we call the cause rather than sim-
ply a causal factor or causally relevant factor seems to depend on a number of
considerations. We tend to reserve the expression “the cause” for changes that
occur prior to the effect, and describe permanent or standing features of the con-
text as “causal factors” instead. That is how we speak about Legionnaires’ dis-
ease. Being exposed to L. pneumophila, which was a specific event that occurred
before the onset of the disease, caused it. Being in a run-down condition, which
was a feature that patients possessed for some time before they contracted the
disease, was not called the cause, but instead called a causal factor.

It is not clear, however, that we always draw the distinction between
what we call the cause and what we call a causal factor based on whether

250

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

something is a prior event or a standing condition. For example, if we are
trying to explain why certain people who came in contact with L. pneu-
mophila contracted the disease whereas others did not, then we might say
that the former group contracted the disease because they were in a run-
down condition. Thus, by limiting our investigation only to those who
came in contact with L. pneumophila, our perspective has changed. We
want to know why some within that group contracted the disease and
others did not. Citing the run-down condition of those who contracted the
disease as the cause now seems entirely natural. These examples suggest
that we call something the cause when it plays a particularly important
role relative to the purposes of our investigation. Usually this will be an
event or change taking place against the background of fixed necessary
conditions; sometimes it will not.

Sometimes we call sufficient conditions causes. We say that short circuits
cause fires because in many normal contexts, a short circuit is sufficient to
cause a fire. Of course, short circuits are not necessary to cause a fire, because,
in the same normal contexts, fires can be caused by a great many other
things. With sufficient conditions, as with necessary conditions, we often
draw a distinction between what we call the cause as opposed to what we
call a causal factor, and we seem to draw it along similar lines. Speaking
loosely, we might say that we sometimes call the key components of sufficient
conditions causes. Then, holding background conditions fixed, we can use the
SCT to evaluate such causal claims.

In sum, we can use the NCT to eliminate proposed necessary causal con-
ditions. We can use the SCT to eliminate proposed sufficient causal condi-
tions. Those candidates that survive these tests may be called causal
conditions or causal factors if they fit in well with our system of other
causal generalizations. Finally, some of these causal conditions or causal
factors will be called causes if they play a key role in our causal investiga-
tions. Typically, though not always, we call something the cause of an event
if it is a prior event or change that stands out against the background of
fixed conditions.

Reread the passage on what killed the dinosaurs in the Discussion Question at
the end of Chapter 1. Where do the authors use the NCT? Where do they use
the SCT? Where do they rely on background assumptions?

Discussion Question

CONCOMITANT VARIATION

The use of the sufficient condition test and the necessary condition test de-
pends on certain features of the world being sometimes present and some-
times absent. Some features of the world, however, are always present to

251

Concomitant Var iat ion

some degree. Because they are always present, the NCT will never elimi-
nate them as possible necessary conditions of any event, and the SCT will
never eliminate anything as a sufficient condition for them. Yet the extent
or degree to which a feature exists in the world is often a significant phe-
nomenon that demands causal explanation.

An example should make this clear. In recent decades, a controversy has
raged over the impact of acid rain on the environment of the northeastern
United States and Canada. Part of the controversy involves the proper inter-
pretation of the data that have been collected. The controversy has arisen for
the following reason: The atmosphere always contains a certain amount of
acid, much of it from natural sources. It is also known that an excess of acid in
the environment can have severe effects on both plants and animals. Lakes are
particularly vulnerable to the effects of acid rain. Finally, it is also acknowl-
edged that industries, mostly in the Midwest, discharge large quantities of
sulfur dioxide (SO2) into the air, and this increases the acidity of water in the
atmosphere. The question—and here the controversy begins—is whether the
contribution of acid from these industries is the cause of the environmental
damage downwind of them.

How can we settle such a dispute? The two rules we have introduced pro-
vide no immediate help, for, as we have seen, they provide a rigorous test of a
causal hypothesis only when we can find contrasting cases with the presence
or the absence of a given feature. The NCT provides a rigorous test for a nec-
essary condition only if we can find cases in which the feature does not occur
and then check to make sure that the target feature does not occur either. The
SCT provides a rigorous test for a sufficient condition only when we can find
cases in which the target phenomenon is absent and then check whether the
candidate sufficient condition is absent as well. In this case, however, neither
check applies, for there is always a certain amount of acid in the atmosphere,
so it is not possible to check what happens when atmospheric acid is com-
pletely absent. Similarly, environmental damage, which is the target phenom-
enon under investigation, is so widespread in our modern industrial society
that it is also hard to find a case in which it is completely absent.

So, if there is always acid in the atmosphere, and environmental damage
always exists at least to some extent, how can we determine whether the SO2

released into the atmosphere is significantly responsible for the environmental
damage in the affected areas? Here we use what John Stuart Mill called the
Method of Concomitant Variation. We ask whether the amount of environmental
damage varies directly in proportion to the amount of SO2 released into the
environment. If environmental damage increases with the amount of SO2

released into the environment and drops when the amount of SO2 is lowered,
this means that the level of SO2 in the atmosphere is positively correlated with
environmental damage. We would then have good reason to believe that low-
ering SO2 emissions would lower the level of environmental damage, at least
to some extent.

Arguments relying on the method of concomitant variation are difficult
to evaluate, especially when there is no generally accepted background

252

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

theory that makes sense of the concomitant variation. Some such variations
are well understood. For example, most people know that the faster you
drive, the more gasoline you consume. (Gasoline consumption varies di-
rectly with speed.) Why? There is a good theory here: It takes more energy to
drive at a high speed than at a low speed, and this energy is derived from
the gasoline consumed in the car’s engine. Other correlations are less well
understood. There seems to be a correlation between how much a woman
smokes during pregnancy and how happy her children are when they reach
age thirty. The correlation here is not nearly as good as the correlation be-
tween gasoline consumption and speed, for many people are very happy at
age thirty even though their mothers smoked a lot during pregnancy, and
many others are very unhappy at age thirty even though their mothers
never smoked. Furthermore, no generally accepted background theory has
been found to explain the correlation that does exist.

This reference to background theory is important, because two sets of
phenomena can be correlated to a very high degree, even with no direct
causal relationship between them. A favorite example that appears in many
statistics texts is the discovered positive correlation in boys between foot
size and quality of handwriting. It is hard to imagine a causal relation hold-
ing in either direction. Having big feet should not make you write better
and, just as obviously, writing well should not give you big feet. The correct
explanation is that both foot size and handwriting ability are positively
correlated with age. Here a noncausal correlation between two phenomena
(foot size and handwriting ability) is explained by a third common correla-
tion (maturation) that is causal.

At times, it is possible to get causal correlations backward. For example, a
few years ago, sports statisticians discovered a negative correlation between
forward passes thrown and winning in football. That is, the more forward
passes a team threw, the less chance it had of winning. This suggested that
passing is not a good strategy, since the more you do it, the more likely you
are to lose. Closer examination showed, however, that the causal relation-
ship, in fact, went in the other direction. Toward the end of a game, losing
teams tend to throw a great many passes in an effort to catch up. In other
words, teams throw a lot of passes because they are losing, rather than the
other way around.

Finally, some correlations seem inexplicable. For example, a strong posi-
tive correlation reportedly holds between the birth rate in Holland and the
number of storks nesting in chimneys. There is, of course, a background the-
ory that would explain this—storks bring babies—but that theory is not fa-
vored by modern science. For the lack of any better background theory, the
phenomenon just seems weird.

So, given a strong correlation between phenomena of types A and B, four
possibilities exist:

1. A is the cause of B.

2. B is the cause of A.

253

Concomitant Var iat ion

3. Some third thing is the cause of both.

4. The correlation is simply accidental.

Before we accept any one of these possibilities, we must have good reasons
for preferring it over the other three.

One way to produce such a reason is to manipulate A or B. If we vary fac-
tor A up and down, but B does not change at all, this finding provides some
reason against possibility 1, since B would normally change along with A if
A did cause B. Similarly, if we manipulate B up and down, but A does not
vary at all, this result provides some reason against alternative 2 and for the
hypothesis that that B does not cause A. Together these manipulations can
reduce the live options to items 3 and 4.

Many scientific experiments work this way. When scientists first discov-
ered the correlation between smoking and lung cancer, some cigarette man-
ufacturers responded that lung cancer might cause the desire to smoke or
there might be a third cause of both smoking and lung cancer that explains
the correlation. Possibly, it was suggested, smoking relieves discomfort due
to early lung cancer or due to a third factor that itself causes lung cancer. To
test these hypotheses, scientists manipulated the amount of smoking by lab
animals. When all other factors were held as constant as possible, but smok-
ing was increased, lung cancer increased; and when smoking went down,
lung cancer went down. These results would not have occurred if some
third factor had caused both smoking and lung cancer but remained stable
as smoking was manipulated. The findings would also have been different
if incipient lung cancer caused smoking, but had remained constant as sci-
entists manipulated smoking levels. Such experiments can, thus, help us
rule out at least some of the options 1–4.

Direct manipulation like this is not always possible or ethically permis-
sible. The data would probably be more reliable if the test subjects were
human beings rather than lab animals, but that is not an ethical option.
Perhaps more complicated statistical methods could produce more reliable
results, but they often require large amounts and special kinds of data.
Such data is, unfortunately, often unavailable.

In each of the following examples a strong correlation, either negative or posi-
tive, holds between two sets of phenomena, A and B. Try to decide whether A
is the cause of B, B is the cause of A, both are caused by some third factor, C, or
the correlation is simply accidental. Explain your choice.

1. For a particular United States president, there is a negative correlation
between the number of hairs on his head (A) and the population of
China (B).

Exercise VI

(continued)

254

CHAPTER 9 ■ Causal Reason ing

1. After it became beyond doubt that smoking is dangerous to people’s health,
a new debate arose concerning the possible health hazards of secondhand
smoke on nonsmokers. Collect statements pro and con on this issue and
evaluate the strength of the inductive arguments on each side.

2. The high positive correlation between CO2 concentrations in the atmosphere
and the Earth’s mean surface temperatures is often cited as evidence that
increases in atmospheric CO2 cause global warming. This argument is
illustrated by the famous “hockey stick” diagram in Al Gore’s An Incon-
venient Truth. Is this argument persuasive? How could skeptics about global
warming respond?

3. In Twilight of the Idols, Nietzsche claims that the following examples
illustrate “the error of mistaking cause for consequence.” Do you agree?
Why or why not?

Everyone knows the book of the celebrated Cornaro in which he recommends
his meager diet as a recipe for a long and happy life—a virtuous one, too. . . . I
do not doubt that hardly any book (the Bible rightly excepted) has done so much
harm, has shortened so many lives, as this curiosity, which was so well meant.

Discussion Questions

2. My son’s height (A) increases along with the height of the tree outside my
front door (B).

3. It has been claimed that there is a strong positive correlation between
those students who take sex education courses (A) and those who contract
venereal disease (B).

4. At one time there was a strong negative correlation between the number
of mules in a state (A) and the salaries paid to professors at the state
university (B). In other words, the more mules, the lower professional
salaries.3

5. There is a high positive correlation between the number of fire engines in
a particular borough in New York City (A) and the number of fires that
occur there (B).4

6. “Washington (UPI)—Rural Americans with locked doors, watchdogs or
guns may face as much risk of burglary as neighbors who leave doors
unlocked, a federally financed study says. The study, financed in part by a
three-year $170,000 grant from the Law Enforcement Assistance Adminis-
tration, was based on a survey of nearly 900 families in rural Ohio. Sixty
percent of the rural residents surveyed regularly locked doors [A], but
were burglarized more often than residents who left doors unlocked [B].“5

7. The speed of a car (A) is exactly the same as the speed of its shadow (B).

8. The length of a runner’s ring finger minus the length of the runner’s
index finger (A) is correlated with the runner’s speed in the one-hundred-
yard dash. (B)

255

Concomitant Var iat ion

NOTES
1 Mill’s “methods of experimental inquiry” are found in book 3, chap. 8 of his A System of Logic
(London: John W. Parker, 1843). Mill’s method of difference, method of agreement, and joint
method parallel our SCT, NCT, and Joint Test, respectively. Our simplification of Mill’s methods
derives from Brian Skyrms, Choice and Chance, 3rd ed. (Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, 1986), chap. 4.

2 These excerpts are drawn from David W. Fraser and Joseph E. McDade, “Legionellosis,” Scientific
American, October 1979, 82–99.

3 From Gregory A. Kimble, How to Use (and Misuse) Statistics (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall, 1978), 182.

4 From Kimble, How to Use (and Misuse) Statistics, 182.

5 “Locked Doors No Bar to Crime, Study Says,” Santa Barbara [California] Newspress, Wednesday,
February 16, 1977. This title suggests that locking your doors will not increase safety. Is that a
reasonable lesson to draw from this study?

6 Friedrich Nietzsche, Twilight of the Idols and The Anti-Christ, trans. R. J. Hollingdale (1889;
Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1968), 47–48.

The reason: mistaking the consequence for the cause. The worthy Italian saw in
his diet the cause of his long life; while the prerequisite of long life, an extraordi-
narily slow metabolism, a small consumption, was the cause of his meager diet.
He was not free to eat much or little as he chose, his frugality was not an act of
“free will“: he became ill when he ate more. But if one is not a bony fellow of this
sort one does not merely do well, one positively needs to eat properly. A scholar
of our day, with his rapid consumption of nervous energy, would kill himself
with Cornaro’s regimen. . . .

Long life, a plentiful posterity is not the reward of virtue, virtue itself is rather
just that slowing down of the metabolism which also has, among other things, a
long life, a plentiful posterity, in short Cornarism, as its outcome.—The Church
and morality say: “A race, a people perishes through vice and luxury.” My re-
stored reason says: when a people is perishing, degenerating physiologically,
vice and luxury (that is to say the necessity for stronger and stronger and more
and more frequent stimulants, such as every exhausted nature is acquainted
with) follow therefrom. A young man grows prematurely pale and faded. His
friends say: this and that illness is to blame. I say: that he became ill, that he failed
to resist the illness, was already the consequence of an impoverished life, an
hereditary exhaustion. The newspaper reader says: this party will ruin itself if
it makes errors like this. My higher politics says: a party which makes errors
like this is already finished—it is no longer secure in its instincts. Every error,
of whatever kind, is a consequence of degeneration of instinct, degeneration of
will: one has thereby virtually defined the bad. Everything good is instinct—and
consequently easy, necessary, free. Effort is an objection, the god is typically
distinguished from the hero (in my language: light feet are the first attribute of
divinity).6

This page intentionally left blank

Inference to the Best
Explanation and from Analogy

Once we know the cause of a phenomenon, we can cite this cause in a premise of an

argument whose purpose is to explain the phenomenon (as we saw in Chapter 1).

Explanation and causation are also related in a different way, for explanations can be

used to pick out the cause from among various conditions correlated with the phe-

nomenon (a problem faced at the end of Chapter 9). The general strategy is then to

cite the explanatory value of a causal hypothesis as evidence for that hypothesis. This

form of argument, which is described as an inference to the best explanation, is

the first topic in this chapter. It requires us to determine which explanation is best, so

we will investigate common standards for assessing explanations, including falsifia-

bility, conservativeness, modesty, simplicity, power, and depth. After explaining

these standards, this chapter will turn to a related form of argument called an

argument from analogy, in which the fact that two things have certain features

in common is taken as evidence that they have further features in common. The

chapter ends by suggesting that many, or maybe even all, arguments from analogy

are ultimately based on implicit inferences to the best explanation.

INFERENCES TO THE BEST EXPLANATION

One of the most common forms of inductive argument is inference to the best
explanation.1 The general idea behind such inferences is that a hypothesis
gains inductive support if, when added to our stock of previously accepted
beliefs, it enables us to explain something that we observe or believe, and no
competing explanation works nearly as well.

To see how inferences to the best explanation work, suppose you return to
your home and discover that the lock on your front door is broken and some
valuables are missing. In all likelihood, you will immediately conclude that
you have been burglarized. Of course, other things could have produced the
mess. Perhaps the police mistakenly busted into your house looking for drugs
and took your valuables as evidence. Perhaps your friends are playing a
strange joke on you. Perhaps a meteorite struck the door and then vaporized

10

257

258

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

your valuables. In fact, all of these things could have happened (even the last),
and further investigation could show that one of them did. Why, then, do we
so quickly accept the burglary hypothesis without even considering these
competing possibilities? The reason is that the hypothesis that your home was
robbed is not highly improbable; and this hypothesis, together with other
things we believe, provides the best—the strongest and the most natural—
explanation of the phenomenon. The possibility that a meteorite struck your
door is so wildly remote that it is not worth taking seriously. The possibility
that your house was raided by mistake or that your friends are playing a
strange practical joke on you is not wildly remote, but neither fits the overall
facts very well. If it was a police raid, then you would expect to find a police
officer there or at least a note. If it is a joke, then it is hard to see the point of it.
By contrast, burglaries are not very unusual, and that hypothesis fits the facts
extremely well. Logically, the situation looks like this:

(1) OBSERVATION: Your lock is broken, and your valuables are missing.
(2) EXPLANATION: The hypothesis that your house has been burglarized,

combined with previously accepted facts and principles, provides a
suitably strong explanation of observation 1.

(3) COMPARISON: No other hypothesis provides an explanation nearly
as good as that in 2.

(4) CONCLUSION: Your house was burglarized.

The explanatory power of the conclusion gives us reason to believe it be-
cause doing so increases our ability to understand our observations and to
make reliable predictions. Explanation is important because it makes sense
out of things—makes them more intelligible—and we want to understand
the world around us. Prediction is important because it tests our theories
with new data and sometimes allows us to anticipate or even control future
events. Inference to the best explanation enables us to achieve such goals.

Here it might help to compare inferences to the best explanation with
other forms of argument. Prior to any belief about burglars, you were al-
ready justified in believing that your lock was broken and your valuables
were missing. You could see that much. What you could not see was why
your lock was broken. That question is what the explanation answers. Ex-
planations help us understand why things happen, when we are already jus-
tified in believing those things did happen. (Recall Chapter 1.)

Explanations often take the form of arguments. In our example, we could
argue:

(1) Your house was burglarized.
(2) When houses are burglarized, valuables are missing.

(3) Your valuables are missing.

This explanatory argument starts with the hypothesis that was the conclusion
of the inference to the best explanation, and it ends with the observation that
was the first premise in that inference to the best explanation. The difference

259

Inferences to the Best Explanat ion

is that this new argument explains why its conclusion is true—why the valu-
ables are missing—whereas the inference to the best explanation justified be-
lief in its conclusion that your house was burglarized.

More generally, in an explanatory use of argument, we try to make sense
of something by deriving it (sometimes deductively) from premises that are
themselves well established. With an inference to the best explanation, we
reason in the opposite direction: Instead of deriving an observation from its
explanation, we derive the explanation from the observation. That a hypoth-
esis provides the best explanation of something whose truth is already
known provides evidence for the truth of that hypothesis.

Once we grasp the notion of an inference to the best explanation, we can
see this pattern of reasoning everywhere. If you see your friend kick the wall,
you infer that he must be angry, because there is no other explanation of why
he would kick the wall. Then if he turns away when you say, “Hello,” you
might think that he is angry at you, if you cannot imagine any other reason
why he would not respond. Similarly, when your car goes dead right after a
checkup (as at the start of Chapter 9), you may conclude that it is out of fuel, if
that is the best explanation of why your car stopped. Psychologists infer that
people care what others think about them, even when they deny it, because
that explains why people behave differently in front of others than when they
are alone. Linguists argue that the original Indo-European language arose mil-
lennia ago in an area that was not next to the sea but did have lakes and rivers,
because that is the best explanation of why Indo-European languages have no
common word for seas but do share a common root “nav-” that connotes
boats or ships. Astronomers believe that our Universe began with a Big Bang,
because that hypothesis best explains the background microwave radiation
and spreading of galaxies. All of these arguments and many more are basi-
cally inferences to the best explanation.

Solutions to murder mysteries almost always have the form of an infer-
ence to the best explanation. The facts of the case are laid out and then the
clever detective argues that, given these facts, only one person could possi-
bly have committed the crime. In the story “Silver Blaze,” Sherlock Holmes
concludes that the trainer must have been the dastardly fellow who stole
Silver Blaze, the horse favored to win the Wessex Cup, which was to be run
the following day. Holmes’s reasoning, as usual, was very complex, but the
key part of his argument was that the dog kept in the stable did not bark
loudly when someone came and took away the horse.

I had grasped the significance of the silence of the dog, for one true inference
invariably suggests others. [I knew that] a dog was kept in the stables, and yet,
though someone had been in and fetched out a horse, he had not barked enough
to arouse the two lads in the loft. Obviously the midnight visitor was someone
whom the dog knew well.2

Together with other facts, this was enough to identify the trainer, Straker, as
the person who stole Silver Blaze. In this case, it is the fact that something
didn’t occur that provides the basis for an inference to the best explanation.

260

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

Of course, Holmes’s inference is not absolutely airtight. It is possible that
Straker is innocent and Martians with hypnotic powers over dogs commit-
ted the crime. But that only goes to show that this inference is neither valid
nor deductive in our sense. It does not show anything wrong with Holmes’s
inference. Since his inference is inductive, it is enough for it to be strong.

Inferences to the best explanation are also defeasible. No matter how
strong such an inference might be, it can always be overturned by future ex-
perience. Holmes might later find traces of a sedative in the dog’s blood or
someone else might confess or provide Straker with an alibi. Alternatively,
Holmes (or you) might think up some better explanation. Still, unless and un-
til such new evidence or hypothesis comes along, we have adequate reason
to believe that Straker stole the horse, because that hypothesis provides the
best available explanation of the information that we have now. The fact that
future evidence or hypotheses always might defeat inferences to the best ex-
planation does not show that such inferences are all bad. If it did show this,
then science and everyday life would be in trouble, because so much of sci-
ence and our commonsense view of the world depends on inferences to the
best explanation.

To assess such inferences, we still need some standards for determining
which explanation is the best. There is, unfortunately, no simple rule for
deciding this, but we can list some factors that go into the evaluation of
an explanation.3

First, the hypothesis should really explain the observations. A good expla-
nation makes sense out of that which it is intended to explain. In our origi-
nal example, the broken lock can be explained by a burglary but not by the
hypothesis that a friend came to see you (unless you have strange friends).
Moreover, the hypothesis needs to explain all of the relevant observations.
The hypothesis of a mistaken police raid might explain the broken lock but
not the missing valuables or the lack of any note or police officers when
you return home.

The explanation should also be deep. An explanation is not deep but shal-
low when the explanation itself needs to be explained. It does not help to ex-
plain something that is obscure by citing something just as obscure. Why
did the police raid your house? Because they suspected you. That explana-
tion is shallow if it immediately leads to another question: Why did they
suspect you? Because they had the wrong address. If they did not have the
wrong address, then we would wonder why they suspected you. Without
an explanation of their suspicions, the police raid hypothesis could not ade-
quately explain even the broken lock.

Third, the explanation should be powerful. It is a mark of excellence in
an explanation that the same kind of explanation can be used successfully
over a wide range of cases. Many broken locks can be explained by burglar-
ies. Explanatory range is especially important in science. One of the main
reasons why Einstein’s theory of relativity replaced Newtonian physics is
that Einstein could explain a wider range of phenomena, including very
small particles at very high speeds.

261

Inferences to the Best Explanat ion

Explanations go too far, however, when they could explain any possible
event. Consider the hypothesis that each particle of matter has its own indi-
vidual spirit that makes it do exactly what it does. This hypothesis might
seem to explain some phenomena that even Einstein’s theory cannot ex-
plain. But the spirit hypothesis really explains nothing, because it does not
explain why any particle behaves one way as opposed to another. Either be-
havior is compatible with the hypothesis, so neither is explained. To suc-
ceed, therefore, explanations need to be incompatible with some possible
outcome. In short, they need to be falsifiable. (See Chapter 16 on self-sealers.)

Moreover, explanations should be modest in the sense that they should not
claim too much—indeed, any more than is needed to explain the observa-
tions. When you find your lock broken and valuables gone, you should not
jump to the conclusion that there is a conspiracy against you or that gangs
have taken over your neighborhood. Without further information, there is
no need to specify that there was more than one burglar in order to explain
what you see. There is also no need to hypothesize that there was only one
burglar. For this reason, the most modest explanation would not specify any
number of burglars, so no inference to the best explanation could justify any
claim about the number of burglars, at least until more evidence comes
along.

Modesty is related to simplicity. One kind of simplicity is captured by the
celebrated principle known as Occam’s razor, which tells us not to multiply
entities beyond necessity. Physicists, for example, should not postulate new
kinds of subatomic particles or forces unless there is no other way to explain
their experimental results. Similar standards apply in everyday life. We
should not believe in ghosts unless they really are necessary to explain the
noises in our attic or some other phenomenon. Simplicity is not always a
matter of new kinds of entities. In comparison with earlier views, the theory
that gases are composed of particles too small to see was simpler insofar as
the particle theory allowed gas laws to be explained by the standard physi-
cal principles governing the motions of larger particles without having to
add any new laws. Simplicity is a mark of excellence in an explanation
partly because simple explanations are easier to understand and apply, but
considerations of plausibility and aesthetics are also at work in judgments
of which explanation is simplest.

The tests of modesty and simplicity might seem to be in tension with the
test of power. This tension can be resolved only by finding the right balance.
The best explanation will not claim any more than is necessary (so it will be
modest), but it will claim enough to cover a wide range of phenomena (so it
will be powerful). This is tricky, but the best explanations succeed in recon-
ciling and incorporating these conflicting virtues as much as possible.

Finally, an explanation should be conservative. Explanations are better when
they force us to give up fewer well-established beliefs. We have strong reasons
to believe that cats cannot break metal locks. This rules out the hypothesis that
your neighbor’s cat broke your front-door lock. Explanations should also not
contain claims that are themselves too unlikely to be true. A meteorite would

262

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

be strong enough to break your lock, but it is very unlikely that a meteorite
struck your lock. That makes the burglary hypothesis better, at least until we
find other evidence (such as meteorite fragments) that cannot be explained
except by a meteorite.

In sum, a hypothesis provides the best explanation when it is more ex-
planatory, powerful, falsifiable, modest, simple, and conservative than any
competing hypothesis. Each of these standards can be met to varying de-
grees, and they can conflict. As we saw, the desire for simplicity might have
to be sacrificed to gain a more powerful explanation. Conservatism also
might have to give way to explain some unexpected observations, and so
on. These standards are not always easy to apply, but they can often be used
to determine whether a particular explanation is better than its competitors.

Once we determine that one explanation is the best, we still cannot yet in-
fer that it is true. It might turn out that the best explanation out of a group of
weak explanations isn’t good enough. For centuries people were baffled by
the floods that occurred in the Nile River each spring. The Nile, as far as any-
one knew, flowed from an endless desert. Where, then, did the flood waters
come from? Various wild explanations were suggested—mostly about deities
of one kind or another—but none was any good. Looking for the best expla-
nation among these weak explanations would be a waste of time. It was only
after it was discovered that central Africa contains a high mountain range cov-
ered with snow in the winter that a reasonable explanation became possible.
That, in fact, settled the matter. So it must be understood that the best expla-
nation must also be a good enough explanation.

Even when an explanation is both good and best, what it explains might
be illusory. Many people believe that shark cartilage prevents cancer, be-
cause the best explanation of why sharks do not get cancer lies in their carti-
lage. One serious problem for this inference is that sharks do get cancer. They
even get cancer in their cartilage. So this inference to the best explanation
fails.

When a particular explanation is both good and much better than any
competitor, and when the explained observation is accurate, then an infer-
ence to the best explanation will provide strong inductive support. At other
times, no clear winner or even reasonable contender emerges. In such cases,
an inference to the best explanation will be correspondingly weak.

Whether an inference to the best explanation is strong enough depends on
the context. As contexts shift, standards of rigor can change. Evidence that is
strong enough to justify my belief that my spouse took our car might not be
strong enough to convict our neighbor of stealing our car. Good judgment is
often required to determine whether a certain degree of strength is adequate
for the purposes at hand.

Context can also affect the rankings of various factors. Many explanations,
for example, depend on universal premises. In such cases, compatibility with
observation is usually the primary test. The universal principle should not be
refuted by counterexamples (see Chapter 17). But sometimes explanatory

263

Inferences to the Best Explanat ion

power will take precedence: If a principle has strong explanatory power, we
may accept it even in the face of clear disconfirming evidence. We do not give
up good explanations lightly—nor should we. To understand why, recall
(from Chapter 9) that we do not test single propositions in isolation from
other propositions in our system of beliefs. When faced with counterevidence
to our beliefs, we often have a choice between what to give up and what to
continue to hold on to. A simple example will illustrate this. Suppose that we
believe the following things:

(1) Either John or Joan committed the crime.
(2) Whoever committed the crime must have had a motive for doing so.
(3) Joan had no motive to commit the crime.

From these three premises we can validly infer that John committed the
crime. Suppose, however, that we discover that John could not have com-
mitted the crime. (Three bishops and two judges swear that John was some-
where else at the time.) Now, from the fact that John did not commit the
crime, we could not immediately conclude that Joan committed it, for that
would lead to an inconsistency. If she committed the crime, then, according
to premise 3, she would have committed a motiveless crime, but that con-
flicts with premise 2, which says that motiveless crimes do not occur. So the
discovery that John did not commit the crime entails that at least one of the
premises in the argument must be abandoned, but it does not tell us which
one or which ones.

This same phenomenon occurs when we are dealing with counterevidence
to a complex system of beliefs. Counterevidence shows that there must be
something wrong somewhere in the system, but it does not show exactly
where the problem lies. One possibility is that the supposed counterevidence
is itself in error. Imagine that a student carries out an experiment and gets the
result that one of the fundamental laws of physics is false. This will not shake
the scientific community even a little, for the best explanation of the student’s
result is that she messed things up. Given well-established principles, she
could not have gotten the result she did if she had run the experiment cor-
rectly. Of course, if a great many reputable scientists find difficulties with a
supposed law, then the situation is different. The hypothesis that all of these
scientists, like the student, simply messed up is itself highly unlikely. But it is
surprising how much contrary evidence will be tolerated when dealing with
a strong explanatory theory. Scientists often continue to employ a theory in
the face of counterevidence. Sometimes this perpetuates errors. For years, in-
struments reported that the levels of ozone above Antarctica were lower than
before, but scientists attributed these measurements to bad equipment, until
finally they announced an ozone hole there. Still, there is often good reason
to hold on to a useful theory despite counterevidence, as long as its defects
do not make serious trouble—that is, give bad results in areas that count.
Good judgment is required to determine when it is finally time to shift to a
different explanation.

264

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

Imagine that you offer an explanation, and a critic responds in the following
way. Which virtue (explanatoriness, depth, power, falsifiability, modesty, sim-
plicity, or conservativeness) is your critic claiming that your explanation lacks?

1. But that won’t explain anything other than this particular case.

2. But that conflicts with everything we know about biology.

3. But you don’t have to claim all of that in order to explain what we see.

4. But that just raises new questions that you need to answer.

5. But that explains only a small part of the story.

6. But that would apply whatever happened.

Exercise I

For each of the following explanations, specify which standard of a good ex-
planation, if any, it violates. The standards require that a good explanation be
explanatory, deep, powerful, falsifiable, modest, simple, and conservative. A
single explanation might violate more than one standard.

1. Although we usually have class at this time in this room, I don’t see any-
body in the classroom, because a wicked witch made them all invisible.

2. Although we usually have class at this time in this room, I don’t see any-
body in the classroom, because they all decided to skip class today.

3. Although we usually have class at this time in this room, I don’t see any-
body in the classroom, because it’s Columbus Day.

4. My house fell down, because it was painted red.

5. My house fell down, because of a powerful earthquake centered on my
property that did not affect anything or anybody else.

6. My house fell down, because its boards were struck by a new kind of sub-
atomic particle.

7. Although I fished here all day, I didn’t catch any fish, because there are
no fish in this whole river.

8. Although I fished here all day, I didn’t catch any fish, because the river
gods don’t like me.

9. Although I fished here all day, I didn’t catch any fish, because I was
unlucky today.

10. That light far up in the night sky is moving quickly, because it is the daily
United Airlines flight from Boston to Los Angeles.

11. That light far up in the night sky is moving quickly, because it is an alien
space ship.

12. That light far up in the night sky looks like it is moving quickly, because
there’s something wrong with my eyes right now.

Exercise II

265

Inferences to the Best Explanat ion

Give two competing hypotheses that might be offered to explain each of the
following phenomena. Which of these hypotheses is better? Why?

1. You follow a recipe carefully, but the bread never rises.

2. Your house begins to shake so violently that pictures fall off your walls.

3. Your key will not open the door of your house.

4. People start putting television cameras on your lawn, and a man with a
big smile comes walking up your driveway.

5. Virtually all of the food in markets has suddenly sold out.

6. You put on a shirt and notice that there is no pocket on the front like there
used to be.

7. A cave is found containing the bones of both prehistoric humans and
now-extinct predators.

8. A cave is found containing the bones of both prehistoric humans and
now-extinct herbivores.

9. After being visited by lobbyists for cigarette producers, your senator votes
in favor of tobacco price supports, although he opposed them before.

10. Large, mysterious patterns of flattened wheat appear in the fields of Britain.
(Some people attribute these patterns to visitors from another planet.)

11. A palm reader foretells that something wonderful will happen to you
soon, and it does.

12. A neighbor sprinkles purple powder on his lawn to keep away tigers,
and, sure enough, no tigers show up on his lawn.

Exercise III

1. Put the following inference to the best explanation in standard form, and
then evaluate it as carefully as you can, using the tests discussed above.

[During the Archean Era, which extended from about 3.8 to 2.5 million years before
the present,] the sun’s luminosity was perhaps 25% less than that of today. . . . This
faint young sun has led to a paradox. There is no evidence from the scant rock record
of the Archean that the planetary surface was frozen. However, if Earth had no
atmosphere or an atmosphere of composition like that of today, the amount of
radiant energy received by Earth from the sun would not be enough to keep it from
freezing. The way out of this dilemma is to have an atmosphere present during the
early Archean that was different in composition that that of today. . . . For a variety
of reasons, it has been concluded, although still debated, that the most likely gases
present in greater abundance in the Archean atmosphere were carbon dioxide, water
vapor (the most important greenhouse gas) and perhaps methane. The presence of
these greenhouse gases warmed the atmosphere and planetary surface and pre-
vented the early Archean Earth from being frozen.4

Discussion Questions

(continued)

266

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

2. Reread the passage on what killed the dinosaurs in the Discussion Questions
at the end of Chapter 1. Reconstruct the argument as an inference to the best
explanation. How well does that argument meet the standards for assessing
explanations?

3. Also in the Discussion Questions at the end of Chapter 1, Colin Powell
gives several arguments that in 2003 Saddam Hussein was still trying to
obtain fissile material for a nuclear weapons program. Which of his argu-
ments is an inference to the best explanation? How well do these
arguments meet the standards for this form of argument?

4. Find three inferences to the best explanation in the readings on scientific
reasoning in Chapter 20. This should be easy because scientists use this
form of argument often. Put those inferences in standard form, and then
evaluate them using the tests discussed above.

5. Sherlock Holmes was lauded for his ability to infer a great deal of informa-
tion about strangers from simple observations of their clothing and behav-
ior. He displays this ability in the following exchange with his brother,
Mycroft, in front of his friend Dr. Watson, who is the first-person narrator.
Reconstruct and evaluate the inferences to the best explanation by Holmes
and Mycroft in the closing four paragraphs.

“THE GREEK INTERPRETER”

from The Memoirs of Sherlock Holmes

by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle

. . . The two sat down together in the bow-window of the club. “To anyone who
wishes to study mankind this is the spot,” said Mycroft. “Look at the magnifi-
cent types! Look at these two men who are coming towards us for example.”

“The billiard-marker and the other?”
“Precisely. What do you make of the other?”
The two men had stopped opposite the window. Some chalk marks over

the waistcoat pocket were the only signs of billiards which I could see in one
of them. The other was a very small, dark fellow, with his hat pushed back and
several packages under his arm.

“An old soldier, I perceive,” said Sherlock.
“And very recently discharged,” remarked the brother.
“Served in India, I see.”
“And a non-commissioned officer.”
“Royal Artillery, I fancy” said Sherlock.
“And a widower.”
“But with a child.”
“Children, my dear boy, children.”
“Come,” said I, laughing, “this is a little too much.”
“Surely,” answered Holmes, “it is not hard to say that a man with that

bearing, expression of authority, and sun-baked skin, is a soldier, is more than
a private, and is not long from India.”

267

Arguments from Analogy

“That he has not left the service long is shown by his still wearing his am-
munition boots, as they are called,” observed Mycroft.

“He had not the cavalry stride, yet he wore his hat on one side, as is shown
by the lighter skin on that side of his brow. His weight is against his being a
sapper [a soldier who builds and repairs fortifications]. He is in the artillery.”

“Then, of course, his complete mourning shows that he has lost someone
very dear. The fact that he is doing his own shopping looks as though it were
his wife. He has been buying things for children, you perceive. There is a rat-
tle, which shows that one of them is very young. The wife probably died in
childbed. The fact that he has a picture-book under his arm shows that there is
another child to be thought of.”

ARGUMENTS FROM ANALOGY

Another very common kind of inductive argument moves from a premise
that two things are similar in some respects to a conclusion that they must
also be analogous in a further respect. Such arguments from analogy can be
found in many areas of everyday life. When we buy a new car, how can we
tell whether it is going to be reliable? Consumer Reports might help if it is an
old model; but if it is a brand-new model with no track record, then all we
can go on is its similarities to earlier models. Our reasoning then seems to be
that the new model is like the old model in various ways, and the old model
was reliable, so the new model is probably reliable, too.

The same form of argument is used in science. Here’s an example from
geology:

Meteorites composed predominantly of iron provide evidence that parts of other
bodies in the solar system, presumably similar in origin to Earth, were composed
of metallic iron. The evidence from meteorite compositions and origins lends
support to the conclusion that Earth’s core is metallic iron.5

The argument here is that Earth is analogous to certain meteors in their ori-
gins, and those meteors have a large percentage of iron, so the Earth as a
whole probably contains about the same percentage of iron. Because a
smaller amount of iron is present in the Earth’s crust, the rest must lie in the
Earth’s core.

Similarly, archaeologists might argue that a certain knife was used in rit-
ual sacrifices because it resembles other sacrificial knives in its size, shape,
materials, carvings, and so on. The analogy in this case is between the newly
discovered knife and the other knives. This analogy is supposed to support
a conclusion about the function of the newly discovered knife.

Although such arguments from analogy have diverse contents, they share
a common form that can be represented like this:

(1) Object A has properties P, Q, R, and so on.
(2) Objects B, C, D, and so on also have properties P, Q, R, and so on.

268

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

(3) Objects B, C, D, and so on have property X.

(4) Object A probably also has property X.

In the archaeological example, object A is the newly discovered knife, and
objects B, C, D, and so on are previously discovered knives that are known
to have been used in sacrifices. Properties P, Q, R, and so on are the size,
shape, materials, and carvings that make A analogous to B, C, D, and so on.
X is the property of being used as a sacrificial knife. Premise 3 says that the
previously discovered artifacts have this property. The conclusion, on line 4,
says that the newly discovered artifact probably also has this property.

Since arguments from analogy are inductive, they normally aren’t valid.
It is possible that, even though this knife is analogous to other sacrificial
knives, this knife was used to shave the king or just to cut bread. These ar-
guments are also defeasible. The argument about knives obviously loses all
of its strength if we find “Made in China” printed on the newly discovered
knife. Still, none of this shows that arguments from analogy are no good. De-
spite being invalid and defeasible, some arguments from analogy can still
provide reasons—even strong reasons—for their conclusions.

How can we tell whether an argument from analogy is strong or weak? One
obvious requirement is that the premises must be true. If the previously discov-
ered knives were not really used in sacrifices, or if they do not really have the
same carvings on their handles as the newly discovered knife, then this argu-
ment from analogy does not provide much, if any, support for its conclusion.

In addition, the cited similarities must be relevant. Suppose someone ar-
gues that his old car was red with a black interior and had four doors and a
sunroof, and his new car also has these properties, so his new car is proba-
bly going to be as reliable as his old car. This argument is very weak because
the cited similarities are obviously irrelevant to reliability. Such assessments
of relevance depend on background beliefs, such as that reliability depends
on the drive train and the engine rather than on the color or the sunroof.

The similarities must also be important. Similarities are usually more im-
portant the more specific they are. Lots of cars with four tires and a motor
are reliable, but this is not enough to infer that, because this particular car
also has four tires and a motor, it will be reliable, too. The reason is obvious:
There are also lots of unreliable cars with four tires and a motor. In general,
if many objects have properties P, Q, and R, and many of those lack property
X, then arguments from these analogies will be weak. In contrast, if a
smaller percentage of objects that have properties P, Q, and R lack property
X, then the argument from these analogies will be strong.

If we are not sure which respects are important, we still might have some
idea of which respects might be important. Then we can try to cite objects
that are analogous in as many as possible of those respects. By increasing the
number of potentially relevant respects for which the analogy holds, we can
increase the likelihood that the important respects will be on our list. That
shows why arguments from analogy are usually stronger when they cite
more and closer analogies between the objects.

269

Arguments from Analogy

Another factor that affects the strength of an argument from analogy is
the presence of relevant disanalogies. Because arguments from analogy are de-
feasible, as we saw, a strong argument from analogy can become weak if we
add a premise that states an important disanalogy. Suppose my new car is
like my old cars in many ways, but there is one difference: The new car has
an electric motor, whereas the old cars were powered by gasoline. This one
difference is enough to weaken any argument to the conclusion that the new
car will be reliable. Of course, other disanalogies, such as a different color,
won’t matter to reliability; and it will often require background knowledge
to determine how important a disanalogy is.

We need to be careful here. Some disanalogies that are relevant do not un-
dermine an argument from analogy. If a new engine design was introduced
by top engineers to increase reliability, then this disanalogy might not un-
dermine the argument from analogy. Differences that point to more reliabil-
ity rather than less might even make the argument from analogy stronger.

Other disanalogies can increase the strength of an argument from anal-
ogy in a different way. If the same markings are found on very different
kinds of sacrificial knives, then the presence of those markings on the newly
discovered knife is even stronger evidence that this knife was also used in
sacrifices. Differences among the cases cited only in the premises as analo-
gies (that is, B, C, D, and so on) can strengthen an argument from analogy.

Finally, the strength of an argument from analogy depends on its conclu-
sion. Analogies to other kinds of cars provide stronger evidence for a weak
conclusion (such as that the new model will probably be pretty reliable)
and weaker evidence for a strong conclusion (such as that the new model
will definitely be just as reliable as the old model). As with other forms of
argument, an argument from analogy becomes stronger as its conclusion
becomes weaker and vice versa.

These standards can be summarized by saying that an argument from
analogy is stronger when:

1. It cites more and closer analogies that are more important.

2. There are fewer or less important disanalogies between the object in
the conclusion and the other objects.

3. The objects cited only in the premises are more diverse.

4. The conclusion is weaker.

After learning about arguments from analogy, it is natural to wonder how
they are related to inferences to the best explanation. Although this is some-
times disputed, it seems to us that arguments from analogy are often—if not
always—implicit and incomplete inferences to the best explanation. As we
pointed out, analogies don’t support any conclusion unless they are rele-
vant, and whether they are relevant depends on how they fit into explana-
tions. The color of a car is irrelevant to its reliability, because color plays no
role in explaining its reliability. What explains its reliability is its drive train
design, materials, care in manufacturing, and so on. That is why analogies

270

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

in those respects can support a conclusion about reliability. Similarly, the
markings on an artifact are relevant to whether it is a sacrificial knife if the
best explanation of why it has those markings is that it was used in sacri-
fices. What makes that explanation best is that it also explains similar mark-
ings on other sacrificial knives. Thus, such arguments from analogy can be
seen as involving an inference to the best explanation of why objects B, C, D,
and so on have property X followed by an application of that explanation to
the newly discovered object A.

Sometimes the explanation runs in the other direction. Whereas the con-
clusion about the knife’s use (X) is supposed to explain its shared markings
(P, Q, R), sometimes it is the shared features (P, Q, R) that are supposed to
explain the feature claimed in the conclusion (X). Here is a classic example:

We may observe a very great [similarity] between this earth which we inhabit,
and the other planets, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus, and Mercury. They all revolve
around the sun, as the earth does, although at different distances and in different
periods. They borrow all their light from the sun, as the earth does. Several of
them are known to revolve around their axis like the earth, and, by that means,
must have a like succession of day and night. Some of them have moons that
serve to give them light in the absence of the sun, as our moon does to us. They
are all, in their motions, subject to the same law of gravitation, as the earth is.
From all this similarity it is not unreasonable to think that those planets may, like
our earth, be the habitation of various orders of living creatures. There is some
probability in this conclusion from analogy.6

The argument here seems to be that some other planet probably supports
life, because Earth does and other planets are similar to Earth in revolving
around the sun and around an axis, getting light from the sun, and so on.
What makes certain analogies relevant is not, of course, that the motion of
Earth is explained by the presence of life here. Rather, certain features of
Earth explain why Earth is habitable. The argument suggests that the best
explanation of why there is life on our planet is that certain conditions make
life possible. That generalization can then be used to support the conclusion
that other planets with the same conditions probably support life as well.

In one way or another, many (or maybe even all) arguments from analogy
can be seen as inferences to the best explanation. But they are usually incom-
plete explanations. The argument for life on other planets did not have to com-
mit itself to any particular theory about the origin of life or about which
conditions are needed to support life. Nor did the car argument specify exactly
what makes cars reliable. Such arguments from analogy merely list a number
of similarities so that the list will be likely to include whatever factors are
needed for life or for reliability. In this way, arguments from analogy can avoid
depending on any complete theory about what is and what is not relevant.

This incompleteness makes arguments from analogy useful in situations
where we do not yet know enough to formulate detailed theories or even to
complete an inference to the best explanation. Yet the incompleteness of ar-
guments from analogy also makes them more vulnerable to refutation, since
the analogies that they list might fail to include a crucial respect. This does

271

Arguments from Analogy

not mean that arguments from analogy are never any good. They can be
strong. However, it does suggest that their strength will increase as they ap-
proach or approximate more complete inferences to the best explanation.

For each of the following arguments, state whether the indicated changes
would make the argument weaker or stronger, and explain why. The strength
of the argument might not be affected at all. If so, say why it is not affected.

1. My friend and I have seen many movies together, and we have always
agreed on whether they are good or bad. My friend liked the movie tril-
ogy The Lord of the Rings. So I probably will like it as well.

Would this argument be weaker or stronger if:

a. The only movies that my friend and I have watched together are come-
dies, and The Lord of the Rings is not a comedy.

b. My friend and I have seen very many, very different movies together.

c. My friend and I always watched movies together on Wednesdays, but
my friend watched The Lord of the Rings on a weekend.

d. The conclusion claims that I definitely will like The Lord of the Rings a lot.

e. The conclusion claims that I probably won’t totally dislike The Lord of
the Rings.

2. All the students from Joe’s high school with high grades and high board
scores did well in college. Joe also had high grades and board scores. So
he will probably do well in college.

Would this argument be weaker or stronger if:

a. The other students worked hard, but Joe’s good grades came easily to
him, so he never learned to work hard.

b. Joe is going to a different college than the students with whom he is
being compared.

c. Joe plans to major in some easy subject, but the other students were
pre-med.

d. Joe recently started taking drugs on a regular basis.

e. Joe needs to work full-time to pay his college expenses, but the others
had their expenses paid by their parents.

3. A new drug cures a serious disease in rats. Rats are similar to humans in
many respects. Therefore, the drug will probably cure the same disease in
humans.

Would this argument be weaker or stronger if:

a. The disease affects the liver, and rat livers are very similar to human livers.

Exercise IV

(continued)

272

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

b. The drug does not cure this disease in cats.

c. The drug has to be injected into the rat’s tail to be effective (that is, it
does not work if it is injected anywhere else in the rat).

d. No drug of this general type has been used on humans before.

e. The effects of the drug are enhanced by eating cooked foods.

Using the criteria mentioned above, evaluate each of the following arguments
as strong or weak. Explain your answers. Be sure to specify the properties on
which the analogy is based, as well as any background beliefs on which your
evaluation depends.

1. This landscape by Cézanne is beautiful. He did another painting of a
similar scene around the same time. So it is probably beautiful, too.

2. My aunt had a Siamese cat that bit me, so this Siamese cat will probably
bite me, too.

3. The students I know who took this course last year got grades of A. I am a
lot like them, since I am also smart and hardworking; and the course this
year covers very similar material. So I will probably get an A.

4. This politician was caught cheating in his marriage, and he will have to
face similarly strong temptations in his public duties, so he will probably
cheat in political life as well.

5. A very high minimum wage led to increased unemployment in one coun-
try. That country’s economy is similar to the economy in a different coun-
try. So a very high minimum wage will probably lead to increased
unemployment in the other country as well.

6. I feel pain when someone hits me hard on the head with a baseball bat.
Your body is a lot like mine. So you would probably feel pain if I hit you
hard on the head with a baseball bat. (This is related to the so-called
“Problem of Other Minds.”)

7. It is immoral for a doctor to lie to a patient about a test result, even if the
doctor thinks that lying is in the patient’s best interest. We know this
because even doctors would agree that it would be morally wrong for a
financial adviser to lie to them about a potential investment, even if the
financial advisor thinks that this lie is in the doctor’s best interests.

8. Chrysler was held legally liable for damages due to defects in the
suspension of its Corvair. The defects in the Pinto gas tank caused injuries
that were just as serious. Thus, Ford should also be held legally liable for
damages due to those defects.

Exercise V

273

Arguments from Analogy

1. As we will see in Chapter 18 of Part V, legal reasoning often uses analogies
to legal precedents. In the case of Plessy v. Ferguson (1896), Plessy cites
similarities to a laundry ordinance in Yick Wo v. Hopkins to argue against
segregation in public transportation. Later, in Grutter and Gratz (excerpted
below), critics argue that affirmative action is unconstitutional because of
analogies to other forms of racial discrimination that were found unconsti-
tutional in precedents. Reconstruct these arguments from analogy and then
evaluate them by applying the criteria discussed above.

2. As we will see in Chapter 19, moral reasoning also often depends on argu-
ments from analogies. One famous example occurs when Judith Jarvis
Thomson defends the morality of abortion by means of an analogy to a kid-
napped violinist (in the excerpt below). Reconstruct Thomson’s argument
from analogy and then evaluate it by applying the criteria discussed above.

3. The following excerpt presents evidence that Neanderthals were cannibals.
Put the central argument from analogy, which is italicized here, into stan-
dard form. Then reconstruct the argument as an inference to the best expla-
nation. Which representation best captures the force of the argument, or
are they equally good?

“A GNAWING QUESTION IS ANSWERED”

from The Toronto Star, October 10, 1999

by Michael Downey

Tim White is worried that he may have helped to pin a bad rap on the Nean-
derthals, the prehistoric Europeans who died out 25,000 years ago. “There is a
danger that everyone will think that all Neanderthals were cannibals and that’s
not necessarily true,” he says. White was part of a French-American team of pa-
leoanthropologists who recently found conclusive evidence that at least some
Neanderthals ate others about 100,000 years ago. But that doesn’t mean they
were cannibalistic by nature, he stresses. Most people don’t realize that cannibal-
ism is widespread throughout nature, says White, a professor at the University
of California at Berkeley and the author of a book on prehistoric cannibalism.

The question of whether the Neanderthals were cannibals had long been a
hotly debated topic among anthropologists. No proof had ever been found. That
debate ended, however, with the recent analysis by the team of stone tools and
bones found in a cave at Moula-Guercy in southern France. The cave is about
the size of a living room, perched about 80 metres above the Rhone River. “This
one site has all of the evidence right together,” says White. “It’s as if somebody
put a yellow tape around the cave for 100,000 years and kept the scene intact.”
The bones of deer and other fauna show the clear markings of the nearby stone
tools, indicating the deer had been expertly butchered; they were skinned, their
body parts cut off and the meat and tendons sliced from the bone. Long bones
were bashed open “to get at the fatty marrow inside,” says White.

Discussion Questions

(continued)

274

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

So what does all this have to do with cannibalism? The bones of the six (so
far) humans in the same locations have precisely the same markings made by the same
tools. That means these fairly modern humans were skinned and eaten in the same
manner as the deer.

And if you are thinking they were eaten after they just happened to die,
they do represent all age groups. Two were children about 6 years old, two
were teenagers and two were adults.

But maybe they were eaten at a time when food was unusually scarce,
right? Not so. There is a large number of animal bones at the same dig, indi-
cating that there were options to eating other Neanderthals.

Human bones with similar cut marks have been found throughout Europe,
from Spain to Croatia, providing tantalizing hints of Neanderthal cannibalism
activity over tens of thousands of years. But finding such clear evidence of the
same preparation techniques being used on deer in the same cave site in France,
will “necessitate reassessment of earlier finds,” always attributed to ritual burial
practices or some other explanation, says White.

It was not clear whether the Neanderthals ate human flesh of their own
tribe or exclusively from an enemy tribe, White stresses. Nor was there any in-
dication the purpose of the cannibalism involved nourishment. Eating human
flesh could have had another purpose altogether, he says. Surprising to some,
cannibalism has been found in 75 mammal species and in 15 primate groups.
White says it has often been practiced for reasons not associated with normal
hunger. White quotes an archeological maxim: “Actions fossilize, intentions
don’t.” In other words, the reason for the cannibalism remains unknown. He
notes that the flesh of other humans has sometimes been eaten to stave off star-
vation, to show contempt for an enemy or as part of a ritual of affection for the
deceased. “Were the victims already dead or killed to be eaten?” he asks,
“Were they enemies of the tribe or family members?” Learning these details is
the “important and extremely difficult part.”

This excavation represents a breakthrough in archeological practice. In a
series of papers, White has long advocated the importance of treating a dig site
like a crime scene, leaving every piece of evidence in place. In many earlier
digs, animal bones were frequently pulled out and thrown away as being irrel-
evant and human bones were often coated with shellac. The human bones were
all tossed into the same bag with no regard to their juxtaposition to each other
or precise location. This is one of the first times that modern forensic techniques
have been utilized in an archeological excavation, White says, and conclusions
drawn have been much more precise than in previous digs that used cruder
methods. The project team, which is headed by Alban Defleur of the Universite
du Mediterrane at Marseilles, has been digging in the cave since 1991.

4. In the following passage, William Paley argues for the existence of God on
the basis of an analogy to a watch. Reconstruct this argument from analogy
and then evaluate it by applying the criteria discussed above. Could
Paley’s argument also be reconstructed as an inference to the best explana-
tion? If so, would that reconstruction better capture the force of the
argument?

275

Arguments from Analogy

“THE WATCH AND THE WATCHMAKER”

from Natural Theology (New York: Hopkins, 1836)

by William Paley

. . . In crossing a heath, suppose I pitched my foot against a stone and were
asked how the stone came to be there, I might possibly answer that for any-
thing I knew to the contrary it had lain there forever; nor would it, perhaps, be
very easy to show the absurdity of this answer. But suppose I had found a
watch upon the ground, and it should be inquired how the watch happened to
be in that place, I should hardly think of the answer which I had before given,
that for anything I knew the watch might have always been there. Yet why
should not this answer serve for the watch as well as for the stone? Why is it
not as admissible in the second case as in the first? For this reason, and for no
other, namely, that when we come to inspect the watch, we perceive—what we
could not discover in the stone—that its several parts are framed and put to-
gether for a purpose, e.g., that they are so formed and adjusted as to produce
motion, and that motion so regulated as to point out the hour of the day; that
if the different parts had been differently shaped from what they are, of a dif-
ferent size from what they are, or placed after any other manner or in any
other order than that in which they are placed, either no motion at all would
have been carried on in the machine, or none which would have answered the
use that is now served by it. . . . This mechanism being observed—it requires
indeed an examination of the instrument, and perhaps some previous knowl-
edge of the subject, to perceive and understand it; but being once, as we have
said, observed and understood—the inference we think is inevitable, that the
watch must have had a maker—that there must have existed, at some time and
at some place or other, an artificer or artificers who formed it for the purpose
which we find it actually to answer, who comprehended its construction and
designed its use. . . .

[E]very indication of contrivance, every manifestation of design, which
existed in the watch, exists in the works of nature; with the difference, on the
side of nature, of being greater and more, and that in a degree which exceeds
all computation. I mean that the contrivances of nature surpass the con-
trivances of art, in the complexity, subtlety, and curiosity of the mechanism;
and still more, if possible, do they go beyond them in number and variety; yet
in a multitude of cases, are not less evidently mechanical, not less evidently
contrivances, not less evidently accommodated to their end, or suited to their
office, than are the most perfect productions of human ingenuity.

I know no better method of introducing so large a subject, than that of
comparing a single thing with a single thing: an eye, for example, with a tele-
scope. As far as the examination of the instrument goes, there is precisely the
same proof that the eye was made for vision, as there is that the telescope was
made for assisting it. They are made upon the same principles; both being ad-
justed to the laws by which the transmission and refraction of rays of light are
regulated. I speak not of the origin of the laws themselves; but such laws be-
ing fixed, the construction in both cases is adapted to them. . . .

(continued)

NOTES
1 Gilbert Harman deserves much credit for calling attention to the importance of inferences to
the best explanation; see, for example, his Thought (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press,
1973). A similar form of argument called abduction was analyzed long ago by Charles Sanders
Peirce; see, for example, his Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce (Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1931), 5: 189. A wonderful recent discussion is Peter Lipton, Inference to the Best
Explanation (London: Routledge, 1991).

2 Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, “Silver Blaze,” The Complete Sherlock Holmes (Garden City, NY: Dou-
bleday, 1930), 1: 349. The stories describe Holmes as a master of deduction, but his arguments
are inductive as we define the terms.

3 This discussion in many ways parallels and is indebted to the fifth chapter of W. V. Quine and
J. S. Ullian, The Web of Belief, 2nd ed. (New York: Random House, 1978).

4 From Fred T. Mackenzie, Our Changing Planet (Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1998), 192.

5 Mackenzie, Our Changing Planet, 42.

6 Thomas Reid, Essays on the Intellectual Powers of Man (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1969), essay
I, section 4, 48.

276

CHAPTER 10 ■ Inference to the Best Explanat ion and from Analogy

To some it may appear a difference sufficient to destroy all similitude be-
tween the eye and the telescope, that the one is a perceiving organ, the other
an unperceiving instrument. The fact is that they are both instruments. And as
to the mechanism, at least as to mechanism being employed, and even as to
the kind of it, this circumstance varies not the analogy at all. . . . The end is the
same; the means are the same. The purpose in both is alike; the contrivance for
accomplishing that purpose is in both alike. The lenses of the telescopes, and
the humors of the eye, bear a complete resemblance to one another, in their fig-
ure, their position, and in their power over the rays of light, viz. in bringing
each pencil to a point at the right distance from the lens; namely, in the eye, at
the exact place where the membrane is spread to receive it. How is it possible,
under circumstances of such close affinity, and under the operation of equal
evidence, to exclude contrivance from the one; yet to acknowledge the proof
of contrivance having been employed, as the plainest and clearest of all propo-
sitions, in the other? . . .

Were there no example in the world of contrivance except that of the eye,
it would be alone sufficient to support the conclusion, which we draw from it,
as to the necessity of an intelligent Creator. . . . The proof is not a conclusion
that lies at the end of a chain of reasoning, of which chain each instance of con-
trivance is only a link, and of which, if one link fail, the whole fails; but it is an
argument separately supplied by every separate example. An error in stating
an example affects only that example. The argument is cumulative in the
fullest sense of that term. The eye proves it without the ear; the ear without the
eye. The proof in each example is complete; for when the design of the part
and the conduciveness of its structure to that design is shown, the mind may
set itself at rest; no further consideration can detract anything from the force
of the example.

Chances

The kinds of arguments discussed in the preceding three chapters are all inductive, so

they need not meet the deductive standard of validity. They are, instead, intended to

meet the inductive standard of strength. Whereas deductive validity hinges on what is

possible, inductive strength hinges on what is probable. Roughly, an argument is in-

ductively strong to the extent that its premises make its conclusion more likely or prob-

able. Hence, just as we can get a better theoretical understanding of deductive validity

by studying formal logic, as we did in Chapters 6–7, so we can get a better theoretical

understanding of inductive strength by studying probability, as we will do in this chap-

ter. To complete our survey of inductive arguments, this chapter offers an elementary

discussion of probability. It begins by illustrating several common mistakes about prob-

ability. To help avoid these fallacies, we need to approach probability more carefully, so

formal laws of probability are presented along with Bayes’s theorem.

SOME FALLACIES OF PROBABILITY

Probability is pervasive. We all assume or make probability judgments
throughout our lives. We do so whenever we form a belief about which we are
not certain, as in all of the kinds of inductive arguments studied in Chapters
8–10. Such arguments do not pretend to reach their conclusions with certainty,
even if their premises are true. They merely try to show that a conclusion is
likely or probable. Judgments about probability are, thus, assumed in assess-
ing such arguments and beliefs. Probability also plays a crucial role in our
most important decisions. Mistakes about probability can then lead to disas-
ters. Doctors lose patients’ lives, stockbrokers lose clients’ money, and coaches
lose games because they overestimate or underestimate probabilities. Such
mistakes are common and fall into several regular patterns. It is useful to un-
derstand these fallacies, so that we can learn to avoid them.

THE GAMBLER’S FALLACY

Casinos thrive partly because so many gamblers misunderstand probability.
One mistake is so common that it has been dubbed the gambler’s fallacy.
When people have a run of bad luck, they often increase their bets because

11

277

278

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

they assume that they are due for a run of good luck to even things out.
Gambling systems are sometimes based on this fallacious idea. People keep
track of the numbers that come up on a roulette wheel, trying to discover a
number that has not come up for a long time. They then pile their money on
that number on the assumption that it is due. They usually end up losing a
bundle.

These gamblers seem to assume, “In the long run, things will even out
(or average out).” Interpreted one way, this amounts to what mathemati-
cians call the law of large numbers, and it is perfectly correct. When flipping
a coin, we expect it to come up heads half the time, so it should come up
heads five times in ten flips. If we actually check this out, however, we
discover that the number of times it comes up heads in ten flips varies
significantly from this predicted value—sometimes coming up heads
more than five times, sometimes coming up fewer. What the law of large
numbers tells us is that the actual percentage of heads will tend to come
closer to the theoretically predicted percentage of heads the more trials
we make. If you flipped a coin a million times, it would be very surpris-
ing if the percentage of heads were more than 1 percent away from the
predicted 50 percent.

This law of large numbers is often misunderstood in a way that leads to
the gambler’s fallacy. Some people assume that each possible outcome will
occur the average number of times in each series of trials. To see that this is
a fallacy, we can go back to flipping coins. Toss a coin until it comes up
heads three times in a row. (This will take less time than you might imagine.)
What is the probability that it will come up heads a fourth time? Put crudely,
some people think that the probability of it coming up heads again must be
very small, because it is unlikely that a fair coin will come up heads four
times in a row, so a tails is needed to even things out. That is wrong. The
chances of getting heads on any given toss is the same, regardless of what
happened on previous tosses. Previous results cannot affect the probabilities
on this new toss.

STRANGE THINGS HAPPEN

Another common mistake is to ignore improbable events. It is very unlikely
that a fair coin will come up heads nineteen times in a row, so you might
think it could never happen. You would be wrong. Of course, if you sat flip-
ping a single coin, you might spend a very long time before you hit a se-
quence of nineteen consecutive heads, but there is a way of getting this
result (with a little help from your friends) in a single afternoon. You start
out with $6,000 worth of pennies and put them in a large truck. (Actually,
the truck need not be very large.) Dump the coins out and then pick up all
the coins that come up heads. Put them back in the truck and repeat the pro-
cedure nineteen times, always returning only those coins that come up
heads to the truck. With tolerably good luck, on the nineteenth dump of the

279

Some Fallac ies of Probab il i ty

coins, you will get at least one coin that comes up heads again. Any such
coin will have come up heads nineteen times in a row.

What is the point of this silly exercise? It is intended to show that we often
attribute abilities or the lack of abilities to people when, in fact, their perfor-
mances may be statistically insignificant. When people invest with stockbro-
kers, they tend to shift to a new broker when they lose money. When they hit
on a broker who earns them money, they stay and praise this broker’s abili-
ties. In fact, some financial advisers seem to be better than others—they have
a long history of sound financial advice—but the financial community is, in
many ways, like the truckload of pennies we have just examined. There are
many brokers giving all sorts of different advice and, by chance alone, some
of them are bound to give good advice. Furthermore, some of them are
bound to have runs of success, just as some of the pennies dumped from the
truck will have long strings of coming up heads. Thus, in some cases, what
appears to be brilliance in predicting stock prices may be nothing more than
a run of statistically expected good luck.

The gambling casinos of the world are like the truck full of pennies as
well. With roulette wheels spinning in a great many places over a great deal
of time, startlingly long runs are bound to occur. For example, in 1918, black
came up twenty-six consecutive times on a roulette wheel in Monte Carlo.
The odds against this are staggering. But before we can decide what to make
of this event, we would have to judge it in the context of the vast number of
times that the game of roulette has been played.

Students familiar with computer programming should not find it difficult
to write a program that will simulate a Monte Carlo roulette wheel and keep
track long runs of black and long runs of red. On a Monte Carlo wheel, the
odds coming up black are 18/37. The same odds hold for coming up red. Write
a program; run it for a day; then report the longest runs.

Honors Exercise

HEURISTICS

In daily life, we often have to make decisions quickly without full informa-
tion. To deal with this overload of decisions, we commonly employ what
cognitive psychologists call heuristics. Technically, a heuristic is a general
strategy for solving a problem or coming to a decision. For example, a good
heuristic for solving geometry problems is to start with the conclusion you
are trying to reach and then work backward.

Recent research in cognitive psychology has shown, first, that human be-
ings rely very heavily on heuristics and, second, that we often have too
much confidence in them. The result is that our probability judgments often
go very wrong, and sometimes our thinking gets utterly mixed up. In this

280

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

regard, two heuristics are particularly instructive: the representativeness
heuristic and the availability heuristic.

THE REPRESENTATIVENESS HEURISTIC. A simple example illustrates how
errors can arise from the representativeness heuristic. Imagine that you are
randomly dealt five-card hands from a standard deck. Which of the follow-
ing two hands is more likely to come up?

HAND #1 HAND #2

Three of clubs Ace of spades

Seven of diamonds Ace of hearts

Nine of diamonds Ace of clubs

Queen of hearts Ace of diamonds

King of spades King of spades

A surprisingly large number of people will automatically say that the sec-
ond hand is much less likely than the first. Actually, if you think about it for
a bit, it should be obvious that any two specific hands have exactly the same
likelihood of being dealt in a fair game. Here people get confused because
the first hand is unimpressive; and, because unimpressive hands come up
all the time, it strikes us as a representative hand. In many card games, how-
ever, the second hand is very impressive—something worth talking about—
and thus looks unrepresentative. Our reliance on representativeness blinds
us to a simple and obvious point about probabilities: Any specific hand is as
likely to occur as any other.

Linda is thirty-one years old, single, outspoken, and very bright. As a student,
she majored in philosophy, was deeply concerned with issues of discrimina-
tion and social justice, and also participated in antinuclear demonstrations.
Rank the following statements with respect to the probability that they are also
true of Linda, then explain your rankings:

Linda is a teacher in elementary school.
Linda works in a bookstore and takes yoga classes.
Linda is active in the feminist movement.
Linda is a psychiatric social worker.
Linda is a bank teller.
Linda is an insurance salesperson.
Linda is a bank teller and is active in the feminist movement.1

Discussion Question

THE AVAILABILITY HEURISTIC. Because sampling and taking surveys is
costly, we often do it imaginatively, that is, in our heads. If you ask a base-
ball fan which team has the better batting average, Detroit or San Diego, that
person might just remember, might go look it up, or might think about each

281

Some Fallac ies of Probab il i ty

The point of examining these heuristics and noting the errors that they pro-
duce is not to suggest that we should cease relying on them. First, there is a
good chance that this would be psychologically impossible, because the use of
such heuristics seems to be built into our psychological makeup. Second, over a
wide range of standard cases, these heuristics give quick and largely accurate
estimates. Difficulties typically arise in using these heuristics when the situation
is nonstandard—that is, when the situation is complex or out of the ordinary.

To avoid such mistakes when making important judgments about proba-
bilities, we need to ask, “Is the situation sufficiently standard to allow the
use of heuristics?” Because this is a mouthful, we might simply ask, “Is this
the sort of thing that people can figure out in their heads?” When the answer
to that question is “No,” as it often is, then we need to turn to more formal
procedures for determining probabilities.

In a remarkable study,3 Thomas Gilovich, Robert Vallone, and Amos Tversky
found a striking instance of people’s tendency to treat things as statistically
significant when they are not. In professional basketball, certain players have
the reputation of being streak shooters. Streak shooters seem to score points in
batches, then go cold and are not able to buy a basket. Stated more precisely,
in streak shooting, “the performance of a player during a particular period is
significantly better than expected on the basis of the player’s overall record.”
To test whether streak shooting really exists, the authors made detailed study
of a year’s shooting record for the players on the Philadelphia 76ers. This team

Discussion Question

In four pages of a novel (about 2,000 words), how many words would you
expect to find that have the form _ _ _ _ _n_ (seven-letter words with “n” in
the sixth place)? Write down your answer. Now, how many words would
you expect to find that have the form _ _ _ _ing (seven-letter words that end
with “ing”)? Explain your answers.2

Discussion Question

team and try to decide which has the most good batters. The latter approach,
needless to say, would be a risky business, but many baseball fans have re-
markable knowledge of the batting averages of top hitters. Even with this
knowledge, however, it is easy to go wrong. The players that naturally come
to mind are the stars on each team. They are more available to our memory,
and we are likely to make our judgment on the basis of them alone. Yet such
a sample can easily be biased because all the batters contribute to the team
average, not just the stars. The fact that the weak batters on one team are
much better than the weak batters on the other can swing the balance.

(continued)

282

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

THE LANGUAGE OF PROBABILITY

The first step in figuring out probabilities is to adopt a more precise way of
talking. Our common language includes various ways of expressing proba-
bilities. Some of the guarding terms discussed in Chapter 3 provide exam-
ples of informal ways of expressing probability commitments. Thus,
someone might say that it is unlikely that the New England Patriots will win
the Super Bowl this year without saying how unlikely it is. We can also spec-
ify various degrees of probability. Looking out the window, we might say
that there is a fifty-fifty chance of rain. More vividly, someone might have
remarked that Ralph Nader does not have a snowball’s chance in hell of ever
winning a presidential election. In each case, the speaker is indicating the
relative strength of the evidence for the occurrence or nonoccurrence of
some event. To say that there is a fifty-fifty chance that it will rain indicates
that we hold that the evidence is equally strong that it will rain rather than
not rain. The metaphor in the third statement indicates that the person who
uttered it believed that the probability of Nader winning a presidential elec-
tion is essentially nonexistent.

We can make our probability claims more precise by using numbers.
Sometimes we use percentages. For example, the weather bureau might say
that there is a 75 percent chance of snow tomorrow. This can naturally be
changed to a fraction: The probability is 3/4 that it will snow tomorrow.
Finally, this fraction can be changed to a decimal expression: There is a 0.75
probability that it will snow tomorrow.

The probability scale has two end points: the absolute certainty that the
event will occur and the absolute certainty that it will not occur. Because you
cannot do better than absolute certainty, a probability can neither rise above
100 percent nor drop below 0 percent (neither above 1, nor below 0). (This
should sound fairly obvious, but it is possible to become confused when
combining percentages and fractions, as when Yogi Berra was supposed to
have said that success is one-third talent and 75 percent hard work.) Of
course, what we normally call probability claims usually fall between these
two endpoints. For this reason, it sounds somewhat peculiar to say that
there is a 100 percent chance of rain and just plain weird to say the chance of
rain is 1 out of 1. Even so, these peculiar ways of speaking cause no proce-
dural difficulties and rarely come up in practice.

included Andrew Toney, noted around the league as being streak shooter. The
authors found no evidence for streak shooting, not even for Andrew Toney.
How would you go about deciding whether streak shooting exists or not? If,
as Gilovich, Vallone, and Tversky have argued, belief phenomenon is a “cog-
nitive illusion,” why do so many people, including most professional athletes,
believe that it does exist?

283

A Pr ior i Probab il i ty

A PRIORI PROBABILITY

When people make probability claims, we have a right to ask why they assign
the probability they do. In Chapter 8, we saw how statistical procedures can be
used for establishing probability claims. Here we will examine the so-called a
priori approach to probabilities. A simple example will bring out the differences
between these two approaches. We might wonder what the probability is of
drawing an ace from a standard deck of fifty-two cards. Using the procedure
discussed in Chapter 8, we could make a great many random draws from the
deck (replacing the card each time) and then form a statistical generalization
concerning the results. We would discover that an ace tends to come up
roughly one-thirteenth of the time. From this we could draw the conclusion
that the chance of drawing an ace is one in thirteen.

But we do not have to go to all this trouble. We can assume that each of the
fifty-two cards has an equal chance of being selected. Given this assumption,
an obvious line of reasoning runs as follows: There are four aces in a standard
fifty-two-card deck, so the probability of selecting one randomly is four in
fifty-two. That reduces to one chance in thirteen. Here the set of favorable
outcomes is a subset of the total number of equally likely outcomes, and to
compute the probability that the favorable outcome will occur, we merely
divide the number of favorable outcomes by the total number of possible
outcomes. This fraction gives us the probability that the event will occur on a
random draw. Since all outcomes here are equally likely,

Probability of drawing an ace = = =

Notice that in coming to our conclusion that there is one chance in thirteen
of randomly drawing an ace from a fifty-two-card deck, we used only math-
ematical reasoning. This illustrates the a priori approach to probabilities. It is
called the a priori approach because we arrive at the result simply by reason-
ing about the circumstances.

In calculating the probability of drawing an ace from a fifty-two-card
deck, we took the ratio of favorable equally likely outcomes to total equally
likely outcomes. Generally, then, the probability of a hypothesis h, symbol-
ized “Pr(h),” when all outcomes are equally likely, is expressed as follows:

Pr(h) =

We can illustrate this principle with a slightly more complicated example.
What is the probability of throwing an eight on the cast of two dice? The
following table lists all of the equally likely ways in which two dice can turn
up on a single cast. Notice that five of the thirty-six possible outcomes produce
an eight. Hence, the probability of throwing an eight is 5/36.

favorable outcomes

total outcomes

1

13

4

52

number of aces

total number of cards

284

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

Using the above chart, answer the following questions about the total on
throw of two dice:

1. What is the probability of throwing a five?

2. Which number has the highest probability of being thrown? What is its
probability?

3. What is the probability of throwing an eleven?

4. What is the probability of throwing either a seven or an eleven?

5. Which is more likely: throwing either a five or an eight?

6. Which is more likely: throwing a five or an eight, or throwing a two or a
seven?

7. What is the probability of throwing a ten or above?

8. What is the probability of throwing an even number?

9. What is the probability of throwing an odd number?

10. What is the probability of throwing a value from four to six?

11. What is the probability of throwing either a two or a twelve?

12. What is the probability of throwing a value from two to twelve?

Exercise I

285

Some Rules of Probab il i ty

SOME RULES OF PROBABILITY

Suppose you have determined the probability that certain simple events will
occur; how do you go about applying this information to combinations of
events? This is a complex question and one that can be touched on only
lightly in this text. There are, however, some simple rules of probability that
are worth knowing because they can guide us in making choices when out-
comes are uncertain.

By convention, events are assigned probabilities between 0 and 1 (inclusive).
An event is going to either occur or not occur; that, at least, is certain (that is, it
has a probability of 1). From this it is easy to see how to calculate the probabil-
ity that the event will not occur given the probability that it will occur: We sim-
ply subtract the probability that it will occur from 1. This is our first rule:

RULE 1: NEGATION. The probability that an event will not occur is 1 minus
the probability that it will occur. Symbolically:

Pr(not h) = 1 Pr(h)

For example, the probability of drawing an ace from a standard deck is one
in thirteen, so the probability of not drawing an ace is twelve in thirteen.
This makes sense because there are forty-eight out of fifty-two ways of not
drawing an ace, and this reduces to twelve chances in thirteen.

RULE 2: CONJUNCTION WITH INDEPENDENCE. Given two independent events,
the probability of their both occurring is the product of their individ-
ual probabilities. Symbolically (where h1 and h2 are independent):

Pr(h1 & h2) = Pr(h1) × Pr(h2)

Here the word “independent” needs explanation. Suppose you randomly
draw a card from the deck, then put it back, shuffle, and draw again. In this
case, the outcome of the first draw provides no information about the out-
come of the second draw, so it is independent of it. What is the probability of
drawing two aces in a row using this system? Using Rule 2, we see that the
answer is 1/13 × 1/13, or 1 chance in 169.

The situation is different if we do not replace the card after the first draw.
Rule 2 does not apply to this case because the two events are no longer inde-
pendent. The chances of getting an ace on the first draw are still one in thir-
teen, but if an ace is drawn and not returned to the pack, then there is one
less ace in the deck, so the chances of drawing an ace on the next draw are
reduced to three in fifty-one. Thus, the probability of drawing two consecu-
tive aces without returning the first draw to the deck is 4/52 × 3/51, or 1 in
221, which is considerably lower than 1 in 169.

If we want to extend Rule 2 to cover cases in which the events are not in-
dependent, then we will have to speak of the probability of one event occur-
ring given that another has occurred. The probability that h2 will occur given
that h1 has occurred is called the conditional probability of h2 on h1 and is usu-
ally symbolized thus: Pr(h2|h1). This probability is calculated by considering

286

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

only those cases where h1 is true and then dividing the number of cases
within that group where h2 is also true by the total number of cases in that
group. Symbolically:

Pr(h2|h1) = �

Using this notion of conditional probability, Rule 2 can be modified as fol-
lows to deal with cases in which events need not be independent:

RULE 2G: CONJUNCTION IN GENERAL. Given two events, the probability of
their both occurring is the probability of the first occurring times
the probability of the second occurring, given that the first has
occurred. Symbolically:

Pr(h1 & h2) � Pr(h1) × Pr(h2|h1)

Notice that, in the event that h1 and h2 are independent, the probability of h2

is not related to the occurrence of h1, so the probability of h2 on h1 is simply
the probability of h2. Thus, Rule 2 is simply a special case of the more gen-
eral Rule 2G.

We can extend these rules to cover more than two events. For example, with
Rule 2, however many events we might consider, provided that they are inde-
pendent of each other, the probability of all of them occurring is the product of
each one of them occurring. For example, the chances of flipping a coin and
having it come up heads is one chance in two. What are the chances of flipping
a coin eight times and having it come up heads every time? The answer is:

1/2 × 1/2 × 1/2 × 1/2 × 1/2 × 1/2 × 1/2 × 1/2

which equals 1 chance in 256.
Our next rule allows us to answer questions of the following kind: What

are the chances of either an eight or a two coming up on a single throw of the
dice? Going back to the chart, we saw that we could answer this question by
counting the number of ways in which a two can come up (which is one)
and adding this to the number of ways in which an eight can come up
(which is five). We could then conclude that the chances of one or the other
of them coming up is six chances in thirty-six, or 1/6. The principle involved
in this calculation can be stated as follows:

RULE 3: DISJUNCTION WITH EXCLUSIVITY. The probability that at least one of
two mutually exclusive events will occur is the sum of the proba-
bilities that each of them will occur. Symbolically (where h1 and
h2 are mutually exclusive):

Pr(h1 or h2) � Pr(h1) + Pr(h2)

To say that events are mutually exclusive means that they cannot both occur.
You cannot, for example, get both a ten and an eight on the same cast of two
dice. You might, however, throw neither one of them.

outcomes where h1 and h2���
total outcomes where h1

favorable outcomes where h1����
total outcomes where h1

287

Some Rules of Probab il i ty

When events are not mutually exclusive, the rule for calculating disjunc-
tive probabilities becomes more complicated. Suppose, for example, that ex-
actly half the class is female and exactly half the class is over nineteen and
the age distribution is the same for females and males. What is the probabil-
ity that a randomly selected student will be either a female or over nineteen?
If we simply add the probabilities (1/2 + 1/2 � 1), we would get the result
that we are certain to pick someone who is either female or over nineteen.
But that answer is wrong, because a quarter of the class is male and not over
nineteen, and one of them might have been randomly selected. The correct
answer is that the chances are 3/4 of randomly selecting someone who is ei-
ther female or over nineteen.

We can see that this is the correct answer by examining the following table:

Over Nineteen Not over Nineteen

Female 25% 25%
Male 25% 25%

It is easy to see that in 75 percent of the cases, a randomly selected student
will be either female or over nineteen. The table also shows what went
wrong with our initial calculation. The top row shows that 50 percent of the
students are female. The left column shows that 50 percent of the students
are over nineteen. But we cannot simply add these figures to get the proba-
bility of a randomly selected student being either female or over nineteen.
Why not? Because that would double-count the females over nineteen. We
would count them once in the top row and then again in the left column. To
compensate for such double-counting, we need to subtract the students who
are both female and over nineteen. The upper left figure shows that this is
25%. So the correct way to calculate the answer is 50% + 50% – 25% = 75%.

This pattern is reflected in the general rule governing the calculation of
disjunctive probabilities:

RULE 3G: DISJUNCTION IN GENERAL. The probability that at least one of two
events will occur is the sum of the probabilities that each of
them will occur, minus the probability that they will both occur.
Symbolically:

Pr(h1 or h2) = Pr(h1) + Pr(h2) – Pr(h1 & h2)

If h1 and h2 are mutually exclusive, then Pr(h1 & h2) = 0, and Rule 3G reduces
to Rule 3. Thus, as with Rules 2 and 2G, Rule 3 is simply a special case of the
more general Rule 3G.

Before stating Rule 4, we can think about a particular example. What is the
probability of tossing heads at least once in eight tosses of a coin? Here it
is tempting to reason in the following way: There is a 50 percent chance of
getting heads on the first toss and a 50 percent chance of getting heads on the
second toss, so after two tosses it is already certain that we will toss heads
at least once, and thus after eight tosses there should be a 400 percent chance.

288

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

In other words, you cannot miss. There are two good reasons for thinking
that this argument is fishy. First, probability can never exceed 100 percent.
Second, there must be some chance, however small, that we could toss a coin
eight times and not have it come up heads.

The best way to look at this question is to restate it so that the first two rules
can be used. Instead of asking what the probability is that heads will come up
at least once, we can ask what the probability is that heads will not come up at
least once. To say that heads will not come up even once is equivalent to say-
ing that tails will come up eight times in a row. By Rule 2 we know how to
compute that probability: It is 1/2 multiplied by itself eight times, and that, as
we saw, is 1/256. Finally, by Rule 1 we know that the probability that this will
not happen (that heads will come up at least once) is 1 – (1/256). In other
words, the probability of tossing heads at least once in eight tosses is 255/256.
That comes close to a certainty, but it is not quite a certainty.

We can generalize these results as follows:

RULE 4: SERIES WITH INDEPENDENCE. The probability that an event will
occur at least once in a series of independent trials is 1 minus the
probability that it will not occur in that number of trials. Symbol-
ically (where n is the number of independent trials):

Pr(h at least once in n trials) = 1 – Pr(not h)n

Strictly speaking, Rule 4 is unnecessary, since it can be derived from Rules 1
and 2, but it is important to know because it blocks a common misunder-
standing about probabilities: People often think that something is a sure
thing when it is not.

Another common confusion is between permutations and combinations.
A permutation is a set of items whose order is specified. A combination is a
set of items whose order is not specified. Imagine, for example, that three
cards—the jack, queen, and king of spades—are facedown in front of you. If
you pick two of these cards in turn, there are three possible combinations:
jack and queen, jack and king, and queen and king. In contrast, there are six
possible permutations: jack then queen, queen then jack, jack then king, king
then jack, queen then king, and king then queen.

Rule 2 is used to calculate probabilities of permutations—of conjunctions
of events in a particular order. For example, if you flip a fair coin twice, what
is the probability of its coming up heads and tails in that order (that is, heads
on the first flip and tails on the second flip)? Since the flips are independent,
Rule 2 tells us that the answer is 1/2 × 1/2 = 1/4. This answer is easily con-
firmed by counting the possible permutations (heads then heads, heads then
tails, tails then heads, tails then tails). Only one of these four permutations
(heads then tails) is a favorable outcome.

We need to calculate probabilities of combinations in a different way. For
example, if you flip a fair coin twice, what is the probability of its landing
heads and tails in any order? There are two ways for this to happen. The coin
could come up either heads then tails or tails then heads. These alternatives

289

Some Rules of Probab il i ty

are mutually exclusive, so the probability of this disjunction by Rule 3 is
1/4 + 1/4 = 1/2. This is confirmed by counting two possibilities (heads then
tails, tails then heads) out of four (heads then heads, heads then tails, tails
then heads, tails then tails). Another way to calculate this probability is to
realize that the first flip doesn’t matter. Whatever you get on the first flip
(heads or tails), you need the opposite on the second flip. You are certain to
get either heads or tails on the first flip, so this probability is 1. Then, regard-
less of what happens on the first flip, the probability of getting the opposite
on the second flip is 1/2. These results are independent, so the probability
of their conjunction by Rule 2 is the product 1 × 1/2 = 1/2.

We can also use our rules to calculate probabilities of combinations with-
out independence. Rule 2G tells us that the probability of drawing an ace,
not putting this card back in the deck, and then drawing a king is 4/52 ×
4/51 = 16/2,652. But what is the probability of drawing an ace and a king in
any order? It is the probability of drawing either an ace or a king and then
drawing the other one given that you drew the first one. That probability by
Rule 2G is 8/52 × 4/51 = 32/2,652. The difference between this result and
the previous one, where the order was specified, shows why we need to de-
termine whether we are dealing with permutations or combinations.

Use the rules of probability to calculate these probabilities:

1. What is the probability of rolling a five on one throw of a fair six-sided die?

2. What is the probability of not rolling a five on one throw of a fair six-sided
die?

3. If you roll a five on your first throw of a fair six-sided die, what is proba-
bility of rolling another five on a second throw of that die?

4. If you roll two fair six-sided dice one time, what are the chances that both
of the dice will come up a five?

5. If you roll two fair six-sided dice one time, what are the chances that one or
the other (or both) of the dice will come up a five?

6. If you roll two fair six-sided dice one time, what are the chances that one
and only one of the dice will come up a five?

7. If you roll two fair six-sided dice one time, what are the chances that at
least one of the dice will come up a five?

8. If you roll two fair six-sided dice one time, what are the chances that at
least one of the dice will not come up a five?

9. If you roll six fair six-sided dice one time, what are the chances that at least
one of the dice will come up a five?

10. If you roll six fair six-sided dice one time, what are the chances that at least
one of the dice will not come up a five?

Exercise II

290

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

Compute the probability of making the following draws from a standard fifty-
two-card deck:

1. Drawing either a seven or a five on a single draw.

2. Drawing neither a seven nor a five on a single draw.

3. Drawing a seven and then, without returning the first card to the deck,
drawing a five on the next draw.

4. Same as 3, but the first card is returned to the deck and the deck is
shuffled after the first draw.

5. Drawing at least one spade in a series of three consecutive draws, when
the card drawn is not returned to the deck.

6. Drawing at least one spade in a series of four consecutive draws, when
the card drawn is not returned to the deck.

7. Same as 6, but the card is returned to the deck after each draw and the
deck is reshuffled.

8. Drawing a heart and a diamond in that order in two consecutive draws,
when the first card is returned to the deck and the deck is reshuffled
the first draw.

9. Drawing a heart and a diamond in any order in two consecutive draws,
when the first card is returned to the deck and the deck is reshuffled
the first draw.

10. Drawing a heart and a diamond in any order in two consecutive draws,
when the first card is not returned to the deck after the first draw.

Exercise III

Suppose there are two little lotteries in town, each of which sells exactly
100 tickets.

1. If each lottery has only one winning ticket, and you buy two tickets to the
same lottery, what is the probability that you will have a winning ticket?

2. If each lottery has only one winning ticket, and you buy one ticket to each
of the two lotteries, what is the probability that you will have at least
one winning ticket?

3. If each lottery has only one winning ticket, and you buy one ticket to each
of the two lotteries, what is the probability that you will have two winning
tickets?

4. If each lottery has two winning tickets, and you buy one ticket to each of
the two lotteries, what is the probability that you will have at least one
winning ticket?

5. If each lottery has two winning tickets, and you buy two tickets to the same
lottery, what is the probability that you will have two winning tickets?

6. If each lottery has two winning tickets, and you buy two tickets to the same
lottery, what is the probability that you will have at least one winning ticket?

Exercise IV

291

Bayes ’ s Theorem

1. You are presented with two bags, one containing two ham sandwiches
and the other containing a ham sandwich and a cheese sandwich. You
reach in one bag and draw out a ham sandwich. What is the probability
that the other sandwich in the bag is also a ham sandwich?

2. You are presented with three bags: two contain a chicken-fat sandwich
and one contains a cheese sandwich. You are asked to guess which bag
contains the cheese sandwich. You do so, and the bag you selected is set
aside. (You obviously have one chance in three of guessing correctly.)
From the two remaining bags, one containing a chicken-fat sandwich is
then removed. You are now given the opportunity to switch your
selection to the remaining bag. Will such a switch increase, decrease, or
leave unaffected your chances of correctly ending up with the bag with
the cheese sandwich in it?

Exercise V

In a fair lottery with a million tickets, the probability that ticket #1 will lose is
0.999999, the probability that ticket #2 will lose is also 0.999999, and so on for
each ticket. On this basis, you might seem justified in believing each premise
in the following argument:

Ticket #1 will lose.
Ticket #2 will lose.
Ticket #3 will lose.
[and so on, until:]
Ticket #1,000,000 will lose.
There are only 1,000,000 tickets.

Every ticket will lose.

This conclusion must be false, since the lottery is fair. However, the conclusion
follows from the premises, and each of the premises seems justified. Does this
argument justify us in believing its conclusion? Why or why not?

Discussion Question

BAYES’S THEOREM

Although dice and cards provide nice, simple models for learning how to
calculate probabilities, real life is usually more complicated. One particu-
larly interesting and important form of problem arises often in medicine.
Suppose that Wendy tests positive for colon cancer. The treatment for colon
cancer is painful and dangerous, so, before subjecting Wendy to that treat-
ment, her doctor wants to determine how likely it is that Wendy really has

292

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

colon cancer. After all, no test is perfect. Regarding the test that was used on
Wendy, previous studies have revealed the following probabilities:

The probability that a person in the general population has colon cancer
is 0.3 percent (or 0.003).

If a person has colon cancer, then the probability that the test is positive
is 90 percent (or 0.9).

If a person does not have colon cancer, then the probability that the test is
positive is 3 percent (or 0.03).

On these assumptions, what is the probability that Wendy actually has colon
cancer, given that she tested positive? Most people guess that this probabil-
ity is fairly high. Even most trained physicians would say that Wendy prob-
ably has colon cancer.4

What is the correct answer? To calculate the probability that a person
who tests positive actually has colon cancer, we need to divide the number
of favorable outcomes by the number of total outcomes. The favorable out-
comes include everyone who tests positive and really has colon cancer.
This outcome is not “favorable” to Wendy, so we will describe this group as
true positives. The total outcomes include everyone who tests positive.
This includes the true positives plus the false positives, which are those who
test positive but do not have colon cancer. Given the stipulated probabili-
ties, in a normal population of 100,000 people, there will be 270 true posi-
tives (100,000 × 0.003 × 0.9) and 2,991 false positives [(100,000 – 300) × 0.03].
Thus, the probability that Wendy has colon cancer is about 270/(270 +

2,991). That is only about 8.3 percent, when most people estimate above 50
percent!

Why do people, including doctors, overestimate these probabilities so
badly? Part of the answer seems to be that they focus on the rate of true
positives (90 percent) and forget that, because there are so many people
without colon cancer (99.7 percent of the total population), even a small
rate of false positives (3 percent) will yield a large number of false positives
(2,991) that swamps the much smaller number of true positives (270).
(When the question about probability was reformulated in terms of the
number of people in each group, most doctors come up with the correct an-
swer.) For whatever reason, people have a strong tendency to make mis-
takes in cases like these, so we need to be careful, especially when so much
is at stake.

One way to calculate probabilities like these uses a famous theorem that
was first presented by an English clergyman named Thomas Bayes
(1702–1761). A simple proof of this theorem applies the laws of probability
from the preceding section. We want to figure out Pr(h|e), that is, the proba-
bility of the hypothesis h (e.g., Wendy has colon cancer), given the evidence
e (e.g., Wendy tested positive for colon cancer). To get there, we start from
Rule 2G:

1. Pr(e & h) � Pr(e) × Pr(h |e)

293

Bayes ’ s Theorem

Dividing both sides by Pr(e) gives us:

2. Pr(h |e) � �
Pr

P

(e

r(

&

e)

h)

If two formulas are logically equivalent, they must have the same probabil-
ity. We can establish by truth tables (as in Chapter 6) that “e” is logically
equivalent to “(e&h) (e&~h).“ Consequently, we may replace “e” in the
denominator of item 2 with “(e&h) (e&~h)” to get:

3. Pr(h |e) �

Since “e&h” and “e&~h” are mutually exclusive, we can apply Rule 3 to the
denominator of item 3 to get:

4. Pr(h |e) �

Finally, we apply Rule 2G to item 4 and get:

BT: Pr(h|e) �

This is a simplified version of Bayes’s theorem.
This theorem enables us to calculate the desired probability in our origi-

nal example:

h = the patient has colon cancer

e = the patient tests positive for colon cancer

Pr(h) = 0.003

Pr(~h) = 1 – Pr(h) = 0.997

Pr(e|h) = 0.9

Pr(e|~h) = 0.03

If we substitute these values into Bayes’s theorem, we get:

Pr(h|e) � � about 0.083

In this way, we can calculate the conditional probability of the hypothesis
given the evidence from its reverse, that is, from the conditional probability
of the evidence given the hypothesis. That is what makes Bayes’s theorem
so useful.

Many people find a different method more intuitive. The first step is
to set up a table. The two factors to be related are (1) whether the patient
has colon cancer and (2) whether the patient tests positive for colon cancer.

0.003 × 0.9
[0.003 × 0.9] + [0.997 × 0.03]

Pr(h) × Pr(e|h)
[Pr(h) × Pr(e|h)] + [Pr(~h) × Pr(e|~h)]

Pr(e & h)
���
Pr(e & h) + Pr(e & �h)

Pr(e & h)
���
Pr[(e & h) (e & �h)]

Next we need to enter a population size in the lower right box. The prob-
abilities will not be affected by the population size, but it is cleaner to pick a
population that is large enough to get whole numbers when the population
is multiplied by the given probabilities. To determine the right size popula-
tion, add the number of places to the right of the decimal point in the two
most specific probabilities, then pick a population of 10 to the power of that
sum. In our example, the most specific probabilities are 0.003 and 0.03, and
3 + 2 = 5, so we can enter 105:

294

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

To chart all possible combinations of these two factors, we need a table
like this:

Colon Cancer Not Colon Cancer Total

Test Positive

Do Not Test Positive

Total

Colon Cancer Not Colon Cancer Total

Test Positive

Do Not Test Positive

Total 100,000

This population size represents the total number of people who are tested.
We have no information about the ones who are not tested, so they cannot
figure into our calculations.

The bottom row can now be filled in by dividing the total population into
those who have colon cancer and those who do not have colon cancer. Just
multiply the population size by the probability of colon cancer in the general
population [Pr(h)] to get a number for the second box on the bottom row. This
figure represents the total number of people with colon cancer in this popula-
tion. Then subtract that product from the population size and put the remain-
der in the remaining box. This represents the total number of people without
colon cancer in this population. Since these two groups exhaust the popula-
tion, they must add up to the total population size. In our case, we were given
that the probability that a person in the general population has colon cancer is
0.003. On this basis, we can fill in the bottom row of the table:

Colon Cancer Not Colon Cancer Total

Test Positive

Do Not Test Positive

Total 300 99,700 100,000

295

Bayes ’ s Theorem

Next, fill out the second column by dividing the total number of people
with colon cancer into those who test positive and those who do not test
positive. These numbers can be calculated with the given conditional proba-
bility of testing positive, given colon cancer [Pr(e|h)]. In our example, if a
person has colon cancer, the probability that the test is positive is 0.9. Thus,
270 (=0.9 × 300) of the people in the colon cancer column will test positive
and the rest (300 – 270 = 30) will not, so we get these figures:

Colon Cancer Not Colon Cancer Total

Test Positive 270

Do Not Test Positive 30

Total 300 99,700 100,000

Similarly, we can fill out the third column by dividing the total number of
people without colon cancer into those who test positive and those who do
not test positive. Here we use the conditional probability of a positive test,
given that a person does not have colon cancer [Pr(e|~h)]. This probability
was given as 0.03, and 0.03 × 99,700 = 2,991. This number means that, out of
a normal population of 99,700 without colon cancer, 2,991 will test positive.
Since the figures in this column must add up to a total of 99,700, the remain-
ing figure is 99,700 – 2,991 = 96,709:

Colon Cancer Not Colon Cancer Total

Test Positive 270 2,991

Do Not Test Positive 30 96,709

Total 300 99,700 100,000

Colon Cancer Not Colon Cancer Total

Test Positive 270 2,991 3,261

Do Not Test Positive 30 96,709 96,739

Total 300 99,700 100,000

Finally, we can fill out the fourth column by calculating total numbers of
people who test positive or do not test positive. Simply add across the rows:

Check your calculations by adding the right column: 3,261 + 96,739 = 100,000.
Now that our population is divided up, the solution is staring you in the

face. This table shows us that, in a normal population of 100,000 tested
people distributed according to the given probabilities, a total of 3,261 will

296

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

test positive. Out of those, 270 will have colon cancer. Thus, the probabil-
ity that the patient has colon cancer, given that this patient tested positive,
is 270/3,261, which is about 0.083 or 8.3 percent, just as before.

You can also read off other conditional probabilities. If you want to know
the conditional probability of not having colon cancer, given that your test did
not come out positive, then you need to look at the row for those who do not
test positive. The figure at the right of this row tells you that a total of 96,739
out of the total population do not test positive. The column under “Not Colon
Cancer” then tells you that 96,709 of these do not have colon cancer. Thus, the
conditional probability of not having colon cancer given your test did not
come out positive is 96,709/96,739 or about 0.9997. That means that, if you test
negative, the odds are extremely high that you do not have colon cancer.

Tables like these work by dividing the population into groups. We
already learned some names for these groups:

Hypothesis (h) Not Hypothesis (~h)

Evidence (e) True Positives False positives

Not Evidence (~e) False Negatives True Negatives

Population

False positives are sometimes also called false alarms, and false negatives are
sometimes called misses. A little more terminology is also common:

Pr(h) = base rate or prevalence or prior probability

Pr(h|e) = solution or posterior probability

Pr(e|h) = sensitivity of the test

Pr(~e|~h) = specificity of the test

1 – Pr(e|h) = 1 – sensitivity = false negative rate

1 – Pr(~e|~h) = 1 – specificity = false positive rate

You don’t need to use these terms in order to calculate the probabilities, but
it is useful to learn them so that you will be able to understand people who
discuss these issues.

One of the most important lessons of Bayes’s theorem is that the base rate
has big effects. To see how much it matters, let’s recalculate the solution
[Pr(h|e)] in our colon cancer example for different values of the base rate
[Pr(h)] using the same test with the same sensitivity (Pr(e|h) = 0.9) and
specificity [Pr(~e|~h) = 0.97]:

If Pr(h) = 0.003, then Pr(h|e) = 0.083

If Pr(h) = 0.03, then Pr(h|e) = 0.48

If Pr(h) = 0.3, then Pr(h|e) = 0.93

297

Bayes ’ s Theorem

These calculations show that a positive test result for a given test means a
lot more when the base rate is high than when it is low. Thus, if doctors use
the specified test as a screening test in the general population, and if the rate of
colon cancer in that general population is only 0.003, then a positive test result
by itself does not show that the patient has cancer. In contrast, if doctors in-
stead use the specified test as a diagnostic test only for people with certain
symptoms, and if the rate of colon cancer among people with those symptoms
is 0.3, then a positive test result does show that the patient probably has can-
cer, though the test still might be mistaken. Bayes’s theorem, thus, reveals the
right ways and the wrong ways to use and interpret such tests.

Notice also what happens to the probabilities when additional tests are per-
formed. In our original example, one positive test result raises the probability
of cancer from the base rate of 0.003 to our solution of 0.083. Now suppose that
the doctor orders an additional independent test, and the result is again posi-
tive. To apply Bayes’s theorem at this point, we can take the probability after
the original positive test result (0.083) as the prior probability or base rate in
calculating the probability after the second positive test result. This method
makes sense because we are now interested not in the general population but
only in the subpopulation that already tested positive on the first test. The so-
lution after two tests [Pr(h|e)], where “e” is now two independent positive test
results in a row, is 0.731. Next, if the doctor orders a third independent test,
and if the result is positive yet again, then Pr(h|e) increases to 0.988. Bayes’s
theorem, thus, reveals the technical rationale behind the commonsense prac-
tice of ordering additional tests. Problems arise only when doctors put too
much faith in a single positive test result without doing any additional tests.

Construct tables to confirm these calculations of Pr(h|e) for base rates of 0.03
and 0.3.

Exercise VI

Construct tables to confirm the above calculations of probabilities after a sec-
ond and third positive test result.

Exercise VII

1. What would Wendy’s chances of having colon cancer be if the other
probabilities remained the same as in the original example, except that
the probability that a person in the general population has colon cancer
only 0.1 percent (or 0.001)?

Exercise VIII

(continued)

298

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

2. What would Wendy’s chances of having colon cancer be if the other
probabilities remained the same as in the original example, except that
the probability that a person in the general population has colon cancer
1 percent (0.01)?

3. What would Wendy’s chances of having colon cancer be if the other
probabilities remained the same as in the original example, except that
the conditional probability that the test is positive, given that the patient
has colon cancer, is only 50 percent (or 0.5)?

4. What would Wendy’s chances of having colon cancer be if the other
probabilities remained the same as in the original example, except that
the conditional probability that the test is positive, given that the patient
has colon cancer, is 99 percent (or 0.99)?

5. What would Wendy’s chances of having colon cancer be if the other
probabilities remained the same as in the original example, except that
the conditional probability that the test is positive, given that the patient
does not have colon cancer, is 1 percent (or 0.01)?

6. What would Wendy’s chances of having colon cancer be if the other
probabilities remained the same as in the original example, except that
the conditional probability that the test is positive, given that the patient
does not have colon cancer, is 10 percent (0.1)?

7. Chris tested positive for cocaine once in a random screening test. This
test has a sensitivity and specificity of 95 percent, and 20 percent of the
students in Chris’s school use cocaine. What is the probability that Chris
really did use cocaine?

8. As in problem 7, 20 percent of the students in Chris’s school use cocaine,
but this time Chris tests positive for cocaine on two independent tests,
both of which have a sensitivity and specificity of 95 percent. Now what is
the probability that Chris really did use cocaine?

9. In your neighborhood, 20 percent of the houses have high levels of radon
gas in their basements, so you ask an expert to test your basement. An in-
expensive test comes out positive in 80 percent of the basements that actu-
ally have high levels of radon, but it also comes out positive in 10 percent
of the basements that do not have high levels of radon. If this inexpensive
test comes out positive in your basement, what is the probability that
there is a high level of radon gas in your basement?

10. A more expensive test for radon is also more accurate. It comes out posi-
tive in 99 percent of the basements that actually have high levels of radon.
It also tests positive in 2 percent of the basements that do not high levels
of radon. As in problem 7, 20 percent of the houses in your neighborhood
have radon in their basement. If the expensive test comes out positive in
your basement, what is the probability that there is a high level of radon
gas in your basement?

11. Late last night a car ran into your neighbor and drove away. In your town,
there are 500 cars, and 2 percent of them are Porsches. The only eyewitness
to the hit-and-run says the car that hit your neighbor was a Porsche. Tested

299

Bayes ’ s Theorem

under similar conditions, the eyewitness mistakenly classifies cars of other
makes as Porsches 10 percent of the time, and correctly classifies Porsches
as such 80 percent of the time. What are the chances that the car that hit
your neighbor really was a Porsche?

12. Late last night a dog bit your neighbor. In your town, there are 400 dogs,
95 percent of them are black Labrador retrievers, and the rest are pit bulls.
The only eyewitness to the event, a veteran dog breeder, says that the dog
who bit your neighbor was a pit bull. Tested under similar low-light con-
ditions, the eyewitness mistakenly classifies black Labs as pit bulls only 2
percent of the time, and correctly classifies pit bulls as pit bulls 90 percent
of the time. What are the chances that dog who bit your neighbor really
was a pit bull?

13. In a certain school, the probability that a student reads the assigned pages
before a lecture is 80 percent (or 0.8). If a student does the assigned read-
ing in advance, then the probability that the student will understand the
lecture is 90 percent (or 0.9). If a student does not do the assigned reading
in advance, then the probability that the student will understand the lec-
ture is 10 percent (or 0.1). What is the probability that a student did the
reading in advance, given that she did understand the lecture? What is the
probability that a student did not do the reading in advance, given that
she did not understand the lecture?

14. In a different school, the probability that a student reads the assigned pages
before a lecture is 60 percent (or 0.6). If a student does the assigned reading
in advance, then the probability that, when asked, the student will tell the
professor that he did the reading is 100 percent (or 1.0). If a student does not
do the assigned reading in advance, then the probability that, when asked,
the student will tell the professor that he did the reading is 70 percent (or
0.7). What is the probability that a student did the reading in advance, given
that, when asked, he told the professor that he did the reading? What is the
probability that a student did not do the reading in advance, given that,
when asked, he told the professor that he did not do the reading?

Should Sally Clark be found guilty of murder? Why or why not? The follow-
ing account of her case was extracted from http://pass.maths.org.uk/
issue21/features/clark (10/22/04):

Five years ago, a young couple from Cheshire suffered one of the most devas-
tating losses imaginable—their baby Christopher died in his sleep, aged 11
weeks. Doctors, neighbours, all were sympathetic, and the death was certified
as natural causes—there was evidence of a respiratory infection, and no sign
of any failure of care.

Discussion Question

(continued)

http://pass.maths.org.uk/issue21/features/clark

http://pass.maths.org.uk/issue21/features/clark

300

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

But just a year later, in what must have felt like a horribly familiar night-
mare, the Clarks’ second child Harry died, aged 8 weeks. This time, there was
no sympathy from the professionals. Four weeks after Harry’s death the cou-
ple were arrested, and eventually Sally Clark was charged with murdering
both children. She was tried and convicted in 1999 and is now almost three
years into a life sentence.

The forensic evidence was slim to nonexistent—certainly neither case would
have stood up alone. . . . So how come Sally Clark is serving life in prison?
Simply put, because [of] a seemingly authoritative statement by pediatrician
Sir Roy Meadow . . . that the chance of two children in the same (affluent non-
smoking) family both dying a cot death was 1 in 73 million. . . .

INDEPENDENCE

This statistic of 1 in 73 million came from the Confidential Enquiry for Still-
births and Deaths in Infancy (CESDI), an authoritative and detailed study of
deaths of babies in five regions of England between 1993 and 1996. There it is
estimated that the chances of a randomly chosen baby dying a cot death are
1 in 1,303. If the child is from an affluent, nonsmoking family, with the mother
over 26, the odds fall to around 1 in 8,500. The authors go on to say that if
there is no link between cot deaths of siblings (because we have eliminated
the biggest known and possibly shared factors influencing cot death rates)
then we would be able to estimate the chances of two children from such
a family both suffering a cot death by squaring 1/8,500—giving 1 chance in
73 million.

So far so good. But are cot deaths in the same family really independent?
The website for the Foundation for the Study of Infant Death (FSID) says
baldly that “second cot deaths in the same family are very rare.“ This is no
help, because so are first-sibling cot deaths—what we need to know is, how
comparatively rare? Does having one child die a cot death increase the
chances that you will have another do so?

Ray Hill . . . estimates that siblings of children who die of cot death are be-
tween 10 and 22 times more likely than average to die the same way. Using the
figure of 1 in 1,303 for the chance of a first cot death, we see that the chances of
a second cot death in the same family are somewhere between 1 in 60 and 1 in
130. There isn’t enough data to be more precise, or to take familial factors into
account, but it seems reasonable to use a ballpark figure of 1 in 100. Multiply-
ing 1/1,303 by 1/100 gives an estimate for the incidence of double cot death of
around 1 in 130,000. . . .

BAYES’S THEOREM

. . . Very possibly, as you’re reading this, you are . . . thinking “okay, so
the odds aren’t as extreme as 1 in 73 million, but they’re still astronomi-
cally high. There’s not that much difference between odds of 1 in 73 million

301

Bayes ’ s Theorem

and 1 in 100,000, so Sally Clark must still be guilty.” If so, you‘re commit-
ting the “Prosecutor’s Fallacy.“

Simply put, this is the incorrect belief that the chance of a rare event hap-
pening is the same as the chance that the defendant is innocent. Even with the
more accurate figure of 1 in 100,000 for the chance that a randomly chosen pair
of siblings will both die of cot death, this is not the chance that Sally Clark is
innocent. It is the chance that an arbitrary family will lose two children in cot
deaths. . . .

In mathematical language, we need to find the conditional probabilities of
the various possible causes of death, given the fact that the children died. If H
is some hypothesis (for example, that both of Sally Clark’s children died of
natural causes) and D is some data (that both children are dead), we want to
find the probability of the hypothesis given the data, which is written
P(H|D). Let’s write A for the alternate hypothesis—that Sally Clark mur-
dered both her children. We will discount all other possibilities, for example
that someone else murdered both children, or that Sally Clark murdered only
one of them.

P(H|D) �

This is not as complicated as it looks. We already have an estimate for P(H)
of 1/100,000. . . . Trivially, both P(D|H) and P(D|A) are equal to 1. These
numbers are the probabilities that two of the children are dead, given that
that two of the children have died of natural causes, or been murdered,
respectively.

A completely accurate version of Bayes’s Theorem would take into account
all sorts of factors—for example, the fact that social services had not been
involved with the Clark family, their income level, and so on—but there isn’t a
sufficient amount of data available to do this. However, if we are only looking
to analyse the case against Sally Clark, it is sufficient . . . to make reasonable
estimates and show that these lead to reasonable doubt.

P(A) is the most difficult figure to estimate. It is the probability that a
randomly chosen pair of siblings will both be murdered. Statistics on such
double murders are pretty much nonexistent, because child murders are
so rare (far, far more rare than cot deaths) and because in most cases,
someone known to have murdered once is not free to murder again. So
we fall back on the Home Office statistic that fewer than 30 children are
known to be murdered by their mother each year in England and Wales.
Since 650,000 are born each year, and murders of pairs of siblings are clearly
rarer than single murders, we should use a figure much smaller than
30/650,000 = 0.000046. We will put a number ten times as small here—
0.0000046—which is almost certainly overestimating the incidence rate of
double murder.

Now we get a rough and ready estimate of Sally Clark’s innocence:

P(H|D) � � >
2

3

0.00001

0.00001 + 0.0000046

P(H)

P(H) + P(A)

P(D|H)P(H)

P(D|H)P(H) + P(D|A)P(A)

302

CHAPTER 11 ■ Chances

I must warn the reader that this figure isn’t intended to be in any way an accu-
rate estimate of the likelihood that Sally Clark is innocent. It is only meant to
show that, with some reasonable estimates of the likelihoods of relevant
events, the scales come down on the side of her innocence rather than her
guilt. The only way to disagree with this analysis is to assume that literally
hundreds, or thousands, of mothers murder their children undetected every
year. The Campaign to Free Sally Clark say that nearly fifty families have con-
tacted them to say that they have suffered double cot deaths. Are we to believe
that the majority of these couples are murderers, confident or mad enough to
draw attention to themselves in this way? . . .

Plus readers may be interested to know that Sally Clark’s case has been referred to
the Appeal Court for a second time. Evidence, not made available to her original de-
fence team, has recently come to light that at the time of Harry’s death, he was suffer-
ing from a bacterial blood infection known to cause sudden infant death.

NOTES
1 Amos Tversky and Daniel Kahneman, “Extensional Versus Intuitive Reasoning: The Conjunc-
tion Fallacy in Probability Judgment.” Psychological Review 90 (1983): 297.

2 Ibid.

3 Thomas Gilovich, Robert Vallone, and Amos Tversky, “The Hot Hand in Basketball: The
Misperception of Random Sequences,” Cognitive Psychology 17 (1985): 295–314. The quotation is
from pages 295–6.

4 See Gerd Gigerenzer, Calculated Risk: How to Know When Numbers Deceive You (New York:
Simon & Schuster, 2003).

CHOICES

Probabilities are used not only when we determine what to believe but also when we

choose what to do. Although we sometimes assume that we know how our actions

will turn out, we often have to make decisions in the face of risk, when we do not

know what the outcomes of our options will be, but we do know the probabilities

of those outcomes. To help us assess reasoning about choices involving risk, this

chapter will explain the notions of expected monetary value and expected overall

value. Our most difficult choices arise, however, when we do not know even the

probabilities of various outcomes. Such decisions under ignorance or uncertainty

pose special problems, for which a number of rules have been proposed. Although

these rules are useful in many situations, their limitations will also be noted.

EXPECTED MONETARY VALUE

It is obvious that having some sense of probable outcomes is important for
running our lives. If we hear that there is a 95 percent chance of rain, this
usually provides a good enough reason to call off a picnic. But the exact re-
lationship between probabilities and decisions is complex and often misun-
derstood.

The best way to illustrate these misunderstandings is to look at lotteries
in which the numbers are fixed and clear. A $1 bet in a lottery might make
you as much as $10 million. That sounds good. Why not take a shot at $10
million for only a dollar? Of course, there is not much chance of winning the
lottery—say, only 1 chance in 20 million—and that sounds bad. Why throw
$1 away on nothing? So we are pulled in two directions. What we want to
know is just how good the bet is. Is it, for example, better or worse than a
wager in some other lottery? To answer questions of this kind, we need to
introduce the notion of expected monetary value.

The idea of expected monetary value takes into account three features
that determine whether a bet is financially good or bad: the probability
of winning, the net amount you gain if you win, and the net amount you
lose if you lose. Suppose that on a $1 ticket there is 1 chance in 20 million
of winning the New York State Lottery, and you will get $10 million from
the state if you do. First, it is worth noticing that, if the state pays you

12

303

304

CHAPTER 12 ■ Cho ices

$10 million, your net gain on your $1 ticket is only $9,999,999. The state,
after all, still has your original $1. So the net gain equals the payoff minus
the cost of betting. This is not something that those who win huge lotteries
worry about, but taking into account the cost of betting becomes important
when this cost becomes high relative to the size of the payoff. There is noth-
ing complicated about the net amount that you lose when you lose on a
$1 ticket: It is $1.1

We can now compute the expected monetary value or financial worth of
a bet in the following way:

Expected monetary value =

(the probability of winning times the net gain in money of winning) minus

(the probability of losing times the net loss in money of losing)

In our example, a person who buys a $1 ticket in the lottery has 1 chance in
20 million of a net gain of $9,999,999 and 19,999,999 chances in 20 million of
a net loss of a dollar. So the expected monetary value of this wager equals:

(1/20,000,000 × $9,999,999) (19,999,999/20,000,000 × $1)

That comes out to $0.50.
What does this mean? One way of looking at it is as follows: If you could

somehow buy up all the lottery tickets and thus ensure that you would win,
your $20 million investment would net you $10 million, or $0.50 on the
dollar—certainly a bad investment. Another way of looking at the situation
is as follows: If you invested a great deal of money in the lottery over many
millions of years, you could expect to win eventually, but, in the long run,
you would be losing fifty cents on every ticket you bought. One last way of
looking at the situation is this: You go down to your local drugstore and buy
a blank lottery ticket for $0.50. Since it is blank, you have no chance of win-
ning, with the result that you lose $0.50 every time you bet. Although almost
no one looks at the matter in this way, this is, in effect, what you are doing
over the long run when you buy lottery tickets.

We are now in a position to distinguish favorable and unfavorable ex-
pected monetary values. The expected monetary value is favorable when it
is greater than zero. Changing our example, suppose the chances of hitting a
$20 million payoff on a $1 bet are 1 in 10 million. In this case, the state still
has the $1 you paid for the ticket, so your gain is actually $19,999,999. The
expected monetary value is calculated as follows:

(1/10,000,000 × $19,999,999) (9,999,999/10,000,000 × $1)

That comes to $1. Financially, this is a good bet; for in the long run you will
gain $1 for every $1 you bet in such a lottery.

The rule, then, has three parts: (1) If the expected monetary value of the
bet is more than zero, then the expected monetary value is favorable. (2) If
the expected monetary value of the bet is less than zero, then the expected
monetary value is unfavorable. (3) If the expected monetary value of the bet
is zero, then the bet is neutral—a waste of time as far as money is concerned.

305

Expected Monetary Value

Compute the probability and the expected monetary value for the following
bets. Each time, you lay down $1 to bet that a certain kind of card will appear
from a standard fifty-two-card deck. If you win, you collect the amount indi-
cated, so your net gain is $1 less. If you lose, of course, you lose your $1.

Example: Draw a seven of spades. Win: $26.

Probability of winning = 1/52

Expected value: [1/52 × $(26 1)] – (51/52 × $1) = $0.50

1. Draw a seven of spades or a seven of clubs. Win: $26.

2. Draw a seven of any suit. Win: $26.

3. Draw a face card (jack, queen, or king). Win: $4.

4. Do not draw a face card (jack, queen, or king). Win: $2.

5. On two consecutive draws without returning the first card to the deck,
draw a seven of spades and then a seven of clubs. Win: $1,989.

6. Same as in problem 3, but this time the card is returned to the deck and
the deck is shuffled before the second draw. Win: $1,989.

7. On two consecutive draws without returning the first card to the deck,
do not draw a club. Win: $1.78.

8. Same as in problem 7, but this time the card is returned to the deck and
the deck is shuffled before the second draw. Win: $1.78.

9. On four consecutive draws without returning any cards to the deck, a
seven of spades, then a seven of clubs, then a seven of hearts, and then
seven of diamonds. Win: $1,000,001.

10. On four consecutive draws without returning any cards to the deck, draw
four sevens in any order. Win: $1,000,001.

Exercise I

Fogelin’s Palace in Border, Nevada, offers the following unusual bet. If you
win, you make a 50 percent profit on your bet; if you lose, you take a 40 per-
cent loss. That is, if you bet $1 and win, then you get back $1.50; if you bet $1
and lose, you get back $0.60. The chances of winning are fifty-fifty. This sounds
like a marvelous opportunity, but there is one hitch: To play, you must let your
bet ride with its winnings, or losses, for four plays. For example, with $100,
a four-bet sequence might look like this:

Win Win Lose Win

Total $150 $225 $135 $202.50

At the end of this sequence, you can pick up $202.50, and thus make a $102.50
profit. It seems that Fogelin’s Palace is a good place to gamble, but consider

Exercise II

(continued)

306

CHAPTER 12 ■ Cho ices

EXPECTED OVERALL VALUE

Given that lotteries usually have an extremely unfavorable expected mone-
tary value, why do millions of people invest billions of dollars in them each
year? Part of the answer is that some people are stupid, superstitious, or
both. People will sometimes reason, “Somebody has to win; why not me?”
They can also convince themselves that their lucky day has come. But that is
not the whole story, for most people who put down money on lottery tickets
realize that the bet is a bad bet, but think that it is worth doing anyway. Peo-
ple fantasize about what they will do with the money if they win, and fan-
tasies are fun. Furthermore, if the bet is only $1, and the person making the
bet is not desperately poor, losing is not going to hurt much. Even if the ex-
pected monetary value on the lottery ticket is the loss of fifty cents, this
might strike someone as a reasonable price for the fun of thinking about
winning. (After all, you accept a sure loss of $8 every time you pay $8 to see
a movie.) So a bet that is bad from a purely monetary point of view might be
acceptable when other factors are considered.

The reverse situation can also arise: A bet may be unreasonable, even
though it has a positive expected monetary value. Suppose, for example,
that you are allowed to participate in a lottery in which a $1 ticket gives you
1 chance in 10 million of getting a payoff of $20 million. Here, as noted
above, the expected monetary value of a $1 bet is a profit of $1, so from the
point of view of expected monetary value, it is a good bet. This makes it
sound reasonable to bet in this lottery, and a small bet probably is reason-
able. But under these circumstances, would it be reasonable for you to sell
everything you owned to buy lottery tickets? The answer to this is almost

the following argument on the other side. Because the chances of winning are
fifty-fifty, you will, on the average, win half the time. But notice what happens
in such a case:

Win Lose Lose Win

Total $150 $90 $54 $81

So, even though you have won half the time, you have come out $19 behind.
Surprisingly, it does not matter what order the wins and losses come in; if

two are wins and two are losses, you come out behind. (You can check this.)
So, because you are only going to win roughly half the time, and when you
win half the time you actually lose money, it now seems to be a bad idea to
gamble at Fogelin’s Palace.

What should you do: gamble at Fogelin’s Palace or not? Why?

307

Expected Overall Value

certainly no, for, even though the expected monetary value is positive, the
odds of winning are still low, and the loss of your total resources would be
personally catastrophic.

When we examine the effects that success or failure will have on a particu-
lar person relative to his or her own needs, resources, preferences, and so on,
we are then examining what we shall call the expected overall value or expected
utility of a choice. Considerations of this kind often force us to make adjust-
ments in weighing the significance of costs and payoffs. In the examples we
just examined, the immediate catastrophic consequences of a loss outweigh
the long-term gains one can expect from participating in the lottery.

Another factor that typically affects the expected overall value of a bet is
the phenomenon known as the diminishing marginal value or diminishing mar-
ginal utility of a payoff as it gets larger. Suppose someone offers to pay a debt
by buying you a hamburger. Provided that the debt matches the cost of a
hamburger and you feel like having one, you might go along with this. But
suppose this person offers to pay off a debt ten times larger by buying you
ten hamburgers? The chances are that you will reject the offer, for even
though ten hamburgers cost ten times as much as one hamburger, they are
not worth ten times as much to you. At some point you will get stuffed and
not want any more. After one or two hamburgers, the marginal value of one
more hamburger becomes pretty low. The notion of marginal value applies
to money as well. If you are starving, $10 will mean a lot to you. You might
be willing to work hard to get it. If you are wealthy, $10 more or less makes
little difference; losing $10 might only be an annoyance.

Because of this phenomenon of diminishing marginal value, betting on
lotteries is an even worse bet than most people suppose. A lottery with a
payoff of $20 million sounds attractive, but it does not seem to be twenty
times more attractive than a payoff of $1 million. So even if the expected
monetary value of your $1 bet in a lottery is the loss of $0.50, the actual value
to you is really something less than this, and so the bet is even worse than it
seemed at first.

In general, then, when payoffs are large, the expected overall value of the
payoff to someone is reduced because of the effects of diminishing marginal
value. But not always. It is possible to think of exotic cases in which expected
overall value increases with the size of the payoff. Suppose a witch told you
that she would turn you into a toad if you did not give her $10 million by
tomorrow. You believe her, because you know for a fact that she has turned
others into toads when they did not pay up. You have only $1 to your name,
but you are given the opportunity to participate in the first lottery described
above, where a $1 ticket gives you 1 chance in 20 million of hitting a $10 mil-
lion payoff. We saw that the expected monetary value of that wager was an
unfavorable negative $0.50. But now consider the overall value of $1 to you if
you are turned into a toad. Toads have no use for money, so to you, as a toad,
the value of the dollar would drop to nothing. Thus, unless some other, more
attractive alternatives are available, it would be reasonable to buy a lottery
ticket, despite the unfavorable expected monetary value of the wager.

308

CHAPTER 12 ■ Cho ices

1. Though the situation is somewhat far-fetched, suppose you are going to
the drugstore to buy medicine for a friend who will die without it. You
have only $10—exactly what the medicine costs. Outside the drugstore a
young man is playing three-card monte, a simple game in which the
dealer shows you three cards, turns them over, shifts them briefly from
hand to hand, and then lays them out, face down, on the top of a box. You
are supposed to identify a particular card (usually the ace of spades); and,
if you do, you are paid even money. You yourself are a magician and
know the sleight-of-hand trick that fools most people, and you are sure
that you can guess the card correctly nine times out of ten. First, what is
the expected monetary value of a bet of $10? In this context, would it be
reasonable to make this bet? Why or why not?

2. Provide an example of your own where a bet can be reasonable even
though the expected monetary value is unfavorable. Then provide
another example where the bet is unreasonable even though the expected
monetary value is favorable. Explain what makes these bets reasonable or
unreasonable.

Exercise III

Consider the following game: You flip a coin continuously until you get tails
once. If you get no heads (tails on the first flip), then you are paid nothing. If
you get one heads (tails on the second flip), then you are paid $2. If you get
two heads (tails on the third flip), then you are paid $4. If you get three heads,
then you are paid $8. And so on. The general rule is that for any number n,
if you get n heads, then you are paid $2n. What is the expected monetary value
of this game? What would you pay to play this game? Why that amount rather
than more or less?

Discussion Question

DECISIONS UNDER IGNORANCE

So far we have discussed choices where the outcomes of the various options
are not certain, but we know their probabilities. Decisions of this kind are
called decisions under risk. In other cases, however, we do not know the prob-
abilities of various outcomes. Decisions of this kind are called decisions under
ignorance (or, sometimes, decisions under uncertainty). If we do not have any
idea where the probabilities of various outcomes lie, the ignorance is com-
plete. If we know that these probabilities lie within some general range, the
ignorance is partial.

As an example of partial ignorance, suppose that, just after graduating
from college, you are offered three jobs. First, the Exe Company offers you a

309

Dec is ions Under Ignorance

salary of $20,000. Exe is well-established and secure. The next offer comes
from the Wye Company. Here the salary is $30,000, but Wye is a new com-
pany, so it is less secure. You think that this new company will probably do
well, but you don’t know how likely it is to last or for how long. Wye might
go bankrupt, and then you will be left without a job. The final offer comes
from the Zee Company, which is as stable as Exe and offers you a salary of
$40,000 per year. These offers are summarized in the following table:

Wye does not go bankrupt Wye goes bankrupt

Take job at Exe $20,000 $20,000
Take job at Wye $30,000 $0
Take job at Zee $40,000 $40,000

Let’s assume that other factors (such as benefits, vacations, location, interest,
working conditions, bonuses, raises, and promotions) are all equally desir-
able in the three jobs. Which job should you take?

The answer is clear: Take the job from the Zee Company. This decision is
easy because you end up better off regardless of whether or not Wye goes
bankrupt, so it doesn’t matter how likely Wye’s bankruptcy is. Everyone
agrees that you should choose any option that is best whatever happens.
This is called the rule of dominance.

The problem with the rule of dominance is that it can’t help you make
choices when no option is better regardless of what happens. Suppose you
discover that the letter from the Zee Company is a forgery—part of a cruel
joke by your roommate. Now your only options are Exe and Wye. The job
with Wye will be better if Wye does not go bankrupt, but the job with Exe
will be better if Wye does go bankrupt. Neither job is better no matter what
happens, so the rule of dominance no longer applies.

To help you choose between Exe and Wye, you might look for a rational
way to assign probabilities despite your ignorance of which assignments are
correct. One approach of this kind uses the rule of insufficient reason: When
you have no reason to think that any outcome is more likely than any other,
assume that the outcomes are equally probable. This assumption enables us
to calculate expected monetary value or utility, as in the preceding sections,
and then we can choose the option with the highest expected utility. In our
example, this rule of insufficient reason favors the job at Exe, because your
expected income in that job is $20,000, whereas your expected income in the
job at Wye is only $15,000 (= 0.5 × $30,000), assuming that the Wye company
has as much chance of going bankrupt as of staying in business.

The problem with the rule of insufficient reason is that it may seem arbi-
trary to assume that unknown probabilities are equal. Often we suspect that
the probabilities of various outcomes are not equal, even while we do not
know what the probabilities are. Moreover, the rule of insufficient reason
yields different results when the options are described differently. We can
distinguish four possibilities: Wye goes bankrupt, Wye stays the same size,
Wye increases in size, and Wye decreases in size but stays in business. If we

310

CHAPTER 12 ■ Cho ices

do not have any reason to see any of these outcomes as more likely than any
other, then the rule of insufficient reason tells us to assign them equal proba-
bilities. On that assumption, and if you will keep your job as long as Wye
stays in business, then you have only one chance in four of losing your job;
so your expected income in the job at Wye is now $22,500 (= 3⁄4 × $30,000).
Thus, if we stick with the rule of insufficient reason, the expected value of
the job at Wye and whether you should take that job seem to depend on how
the options are divided. That seems crazy in this case.

Another approach tries to work without any assumptions about probabil-
ity in cases of ignorance. Within this approach, several rules might be
adopted. One possibility is the maximax rule, which tells you to choose the op-
tion whose best outcome is better than the best outcome of any other option.
If you follow the maximax rule, then you will accept the job with the Wye
Company, because the best outcome of that job is a salary of $30,000 when
this new company does not go bankrupt, and this is better than any outcome
with the Exe Company. Optimists and risk takers will favor this rule.

Other people are more pessimistic and tend to avoid risks. They will favor
a rule more like the maximin rule, which says to choose the option whose worst
outcome is better than the worst outcome of any other option. If you follow
the maximin rule, you will accept the job with the Exe Company, because the
worst outcome in that job is a steady salary of $20,000, whereas the worst out-
come is unemployment if you accept the job with the Wye Company.

Each of these rules works by focusing exclusively on part of your infor-
mation and disregarding other things that you know. The maximax rule con-
siders only the best outcomes for each option—the best-case scenario. The
maximin rule pays attention to only the worst outcome for each option—the
worst-case scenario. Because they ignore other outcomes, the maximax rule
strikes many people as too risky (since it does not consider how much you
could lose by taking a chance), and the maximin rule strikes many people as
too conservative (since it does not consider how much you could have
gained if you had taken a small risk).

Another problem is that the maximax and maximin rules do not take
probabilities into account at all. This makes sense when you know nothing
about the probabilities. But when some (even if limited) information about
probabilities is available, then it seems better to use as much information as
you have. Suppose, for example, that each of two options might lead to dis-
aster, and you do not know how likely a disaster is after either option, but
you do know that one option is more likely to lead to disaster than another.
In such situations, some decision theorists argue that you should choose the
option that minimizes the chance that any disaster will occur. This is called
the disaster avoidance rule.

To illustrate this rule, consider a different kind of case:

A forty-year-old man is diagnosed as having a rare disease and consults the
world’s leading expert on the disease. He is informed that the disease is almost
certainly not fatal but often causes serious paralysis that leaves its victims

311

Dec is ions Under Ignorance

bedridden for life. (In other cases it has no lasting effects.) The disease is so rare
that the expert can offer only a vague estimate of the probability of paralysis: 20
to 60 percent. There is an experimental drug that, if administered now, would al-
most certainly cure the disease. However, it kills a significant but not accurately
known percentage of those who take it. The expert guesses that the probability of
the drug being fatal is less than 20 percent, and the patient thus assumes that he
is definitely less likely to die if he takes the drug than he is to be paralyzed if he
lets the disease run its course. The patient would regard bedridden life as prefer-
able to death, but he considers both outcomes as totally disastrous compared to
continuing his life in good health. Should he take the drug?2

Since the worst outcome is death, and this outcome will not occur unless
he takes the drug, the maximin rule would tell him not to take the drug. In
contrast, the disaster avoidance rule would tell him to take the drug, because
both death and paralysis are disasters and taking the drug minimizes his
chances that any disaster will occur. Thus, although the disaster avoidance
rule opposes risk taking, it does so in a different way than the maximin rule.

We are left, then, with a plethora of rules: dominance, insufficient reason,
maximax, maximin, and disaster avoidance. Other rules have been proposed
as well. With all of these rules in the offing, it is natural to ask which is cor-
rect. Unfortunately, there is no consensus on this issue. Each rule applies and
seems plausible in some cases but not in others. Many people conclude that
each rule is appropriate to different kinds of situations. It is still not clear,
however, which rule should govern decisions in which circumstances. The
important problem of decision under ignorance remains unsolved.

1. In the game of ignorance, you draw one card from a deck, but you do not
know how many cards or which kinds of cards are in the deck. It might be
a normal deck or it might contain only diamonds or only aces of spades or
any other combination of cards. It costs nothing to play. If you bet that the
card you draw will be a spade, and it is a spade, then you win $100. If you
bet that the card you draw will not be a spade, and it is not a spade, then
you win $90. You may make only one bet. Which bet would you make if
you followed the maximax rule? The maximin rule? The disaster
avoidance rule? The rule of insufficient reason? Which rule seems most
plausible this case? Which bet should you make? Why?

2. In which circumstances do you think it is appropriate to use the
dominance rule? The rule of insufficient reason? The maximax rule? The
maximin rule? The disaster avoidance rule? Why?

3. Suppose that you may choose either of two envelopes. You know that one
envelope contains twice as much money as the other, but you do not know
the amount of money in either envelope. You choose an envelope, open it,
and see that it contains $100. Now you know that the other envelope must

Discussion Questions

(continued)

312

CHAPTER 12 ■ Cho ices

contain either $50 or $200. At this point, you are given a choice: You may
exchange your envelope for the other envelope. Should you switch
envelopes, according to the rule of insufficient reason? Is this result
plausible? Why or why not?

4. The following article raises a problem in dealing with infinity. How would
you answer it?

PLAYING GAMES WITH ETERNITY:
THE DEVIL’S OFFER3

by Edward J. Gracely

Suppose Ms C dies and goes to hell, or to a place that seems like hell. The devil
approaches and offers to play a game of chance. If she wins, she can go to
heaven. If she loses, she will stay in hell forever; there is no second chance to
play the game. If Ms C plays today, she has a 1/2 chance of winning. Tomorrow
the probability will be 2/3. Then 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, etc., with no end to the series.
Thus, every passing day increases her chances of winning. At what point
should she play the game?

The answer is not obvious: after any given number of days spent waiting,
it will still be possible to improve her chances by waiting yet another day. And
any increase in the probability of winning a game with infinite stakes has an
infinite utility. For example, if she waits a year, her probability of winning the
game would be approximately 0.997268; if she waits one more day, the proba-
bility would increase to 0.997275, a difference of only 0.000007. Yet even
0.000007 multiplied by infinity is infinite.

On the other hand, it seems reasonable to suppose the cost of delaying for
a day to be finite—a day’s more suffering in hell. So the infinite expected ben-
efit from a delay will always exceed the cost.

This logic might suggest that Ms C should wait forever, but clearly such a
strategy would be self-defeating: why should she stay forever in a place in or-
der to increase her chances of leaving it? So the question remains: what should
Ms C do?

5. Pascal is famous for invoking infinite utilities to argue for belief in God.
Explain and evaluate his argument in the following passage.

THE WAGER4

by Blaise Pascal

. . . Let us weigh the gain and the loss in wagering that God is. Let us estimate
these two chances. If you gain, you gain all; if you lose, you lose nothing.

313

Dec is ions Under Ignorance

Wager, then, without hesitation that He is.—“That is very fine. Yes, I must
wager; but I may perhaps wager too much.“—Let us see. Since there is an
equal risk of gain and of loss, if you had only to gain two lives, instead of one,
you might still wager. But if there were three lives to gain, you would have to
play (since you are under the necessity of playing), and you would be impru-
dent, when you are forced to play, not to chance your life to gain three at a
game where there is an equal risk of loss and gain. But there is an eternity of
life and happiness. And this being so, if there were an infinity of chances, of
which one only would be for you, you would still be right in wagering one to
win two, and you would act stupidly, being obliged to play, by refusing to
stake one life against three at a game in which out of an infinity of chances
there is one for you, if there were an infinity of an infinitely happy life to gain.
But there is here an infinity of an infinitely happy life to gain, a chance of gain
against a finite number of chances of loss, and what you stake is finite. It is all
divided; wherever the infinite is and there is not an infinity of chances of loss
against that of gain, there is no time to hesitate, you must give all. And thus,
when one is forced to play, he must renounce reason to preserve his life, rather
than risk it for infinite gain, as likely to happen as the loss of nothingness. . . .

The end of this discourse.—Now, what harm will befall you in taking this
side? You will be faithful, honest, humble, grateful, generous, a sincere friend,
truthful. Certainly you will not have those poisonous pleasures, glory and lux-
ury; but will you not have others? I will tell you that you will thereby gain in this
life, and that, at each step you take on this road, you will see so great certainty of
gain, so much nothingness in what you risk, that you will at last recognize that
you have wagered for something certain and infinite, for which you have given
nothing.

6. In the following passage, James Cargile responds to Pascal’s argument. Ex-
plain Cargile’s point. How could Pascal best respond? Is this response ade-
quate? Why or why not?

Either (a) there is a god who will send only religious people to heaven or
(b) there is not. To be religious is to wager for (a). To fail to be religious is to wa-
ger for (b). We can’t settle the question whether (a) or (b) is the case, at least not at
present. But (a) is clearly vastly better than (b). With (a), infinite bliss is guaran-
teed, while with (b) we are still in the miserable human condition of facing death
with no assurance as to what lies beyond. So (a) is clearly the best wager. . . .

This argument just presented is formally similar to the following: Either
(a) there is a god who will send you to heaven only if you commit a painful rit-
ual suicide within an hour of first reading this, or (b) there is not. We cannot
settle the question whether (a) or (b) is the case or it is at least not settled yet.
But (a) is vastly preferable to (b), since in situation (a) infinite bliss is guaran-
teed, while in (b) we are left in the miserable human condition. So we should
wager for (a) by performing ritual suicide.

It might be objected that we can be sure that there is not a god who will
send us to heaven only if we commit suicide, but we can’t be sure that there is
not a god who will send us to heaven only if we are religious. However, a
sceptic would demand proof of this. . . .5

314

CHAPTER 12 ■ Cho ices

NOTES
1 If the lottery gave a consolation prize of a shiny new quarter to all losers, their net loss would
be only seventy-five cents. Since most lotteries do not give consolation prizes, the net loss
equals the cost of playing such lotteries.

2 Gregory Kavka, “Deterrence, Utility, and Rational Choice,” reprinted in Moral Paradoxes of
Nuclear Deterrence (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1987), 65–66. Kavka uses this
medical example to argue for his disaster avoidance rule and, by analogy, to defend the ration-
ality of nuclear deterrence.

3 From Analysis 48 (1988): 113.

4 From Pensées and the Provincial Letters, trans. W. F. Trotter (New York: Modern Library, 1941).

5 From “Pascal’s Wager,” Philosophy 41 (1966): 254.

Fallacies

When inferences are defective, they are called fallacious. When defective styles of

reasoning are repeated over and over, because people often get fooled by them, then

we have an argumentative fallacy that is worth flagging with a name. The number

and variety of argumentative fallacies are limited only by the imagination. Conse-

quently, there is little point in trying to construct a complete list of fallacies. What

is crucial is to get a feel for the most common and most seductive kinds of fallacy.

Once this is done, we should be able to recognize many other kinds as well. The goal

of Part IV is to develop that skill.

IV

315

This page intentionally left blank

FALLACIES OF VAGUENESS

This chapter examines one of the main ways in which arguments can be defective or

fallacious because language is not used clearly enough for the context. This kind of

unclarity is vagueness. Vagueness occurs when, in a given context, a term is used in

a way that allows too many cases in which it is unclear whether or not the term applies.

Vagueness underlies several common fallacies, including three kinds of slippery-slope

arguments.

USES OF UNCLARITY

In a good argument, a person states a conclusion clearly and then, with equal
clarity, gives reasons for this conclusion. The arguments of everyday life of-
ten fall short of this standard. Usually, unclear language is a sign of unclear
thought. There are times, however, when people are intentionally unclear.
They might use unclarity for poetic effect or to leave details to be decided
later. But often their goal is to confuse others. This is called obfuscation.

Before we look at the various ways in which language can be unclear, a
word of caution is needed: There is no such thing as absolute clarity.
Whether something is clear or not depends on the context in which it occurs.
A botanist does not use common vocabulary in describing and classifying
plants. At the same time, it would usually be foolish for a person to use
botanical terms in describing the appearance of her backyard. Aristotle said
that it is the mark of an educated person not to expect more rigor than the
subject matter will allow. Because clarity and rigor depend on context, it
takes judgment and good sense to pitch an argument at the right level.

13

317

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

318

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

VAGUENESS

Perhaps the most common form of unclarity is vagueness. It arises when a
concept applies along a continuum or a series of very small changes. The
standard example is baldness. A person with a full head of hair is not bald.
A person without a hair on his head is bald. In between, however, is a range
of cases in which we cannot say definitely whether the person is bald or not.
These are called borderline cases. Here we say something less definite, such
as that this person is “going bald.”

Our inability to apply the concept of baldness in a borderline case is not
due to ignorance of the number of hairs on the person’s head. It will not help
to count the number of hairs there. Even if we knew the exact number, we
would still not be able to say whether the person was bald or not. The same
is true of most adjectives that concern properties admitting of degrees—for
example, “rich,” “healthy,” “tall,” “wise,” and “ruthless.”

For the most part, imprecision—the lack of sharply defined limits—
causes little difficulty. In fact, this is a useful feature of our language, for
suppose we did have to count the number of grains of salt between our fin-
gers to determine whether or not we hold a pinch of salt. It would take a long
time to follow a simple recipe that calls for a pinch of salt.

Yet difficulties can arise when borderline cases themselves are at issue.
Suppose that a state passes a law forbidding all actions that offend a large
number of people. There will be many cases that clearly fall under this law
and many cases that clearly do not fall under it. There will also be many
cases in which it will not be clear whether or not they fall under this law.
Laws are sometimes declared unconstitutional for this very reason. Here we
shall say that the law is vague. In calling the law vague, we are criticizing it.
We are not simply noticing the existence of borderline cases, for there will
usually be borderline cases no matter how careful we are. Instead, we are
saying that there are too many borderline cases for this context. More pre-
cisely, we shall say that an expression in a given context is used vaguely if it
leaves open too wide a range of borderline cases for the successful and legit-
imate use of that expression in that context.

Vagueness thus depends on context. To further illustrate this context
dependence, consider the expression “light football player.” There are, of
course, borderline cases between those football players who are light and
those who are not light. But on these grounds alone, we would not say that the
expression is vague. It is usually a perfectly serviceable expression, and we
can indicate borderline cases by saying such things as “Jones is a bit light for a
football player.” Suppose, however, that Ohio State and Cal Tech wish to have
a game between their light football players. It is obvious that the previous un-
derstanding of what counts as being light is too vague for this new context. At
Ohio State, anyone under 210 pounds is considered light. At Cal Tech, anyone
over 150 pounds is considered heavy. What is needed, then, is a ruling, such
as that anyone under 175 pounds will be considered a lightweight. This exam-
ple illustrates a common problem and its solution. A term that works perfectly

319

V A G U E N E S S

well in one area becomes vague when applied in some other (usually more
specialized) area. This vagueness can then be removed by adopting more
precise rules in the problematic area. Vagueness is resolved by definition.

For each of the following terms, give one case to which the term clearly ap-
plies, one case to which the term clearly does not apply, and one borderline
case. Then try to explain why the borderline case is a borderline case.

Example: In the northern hemisphere, “summer month” clearly applies to
July; clearly does not apply to January; and June is a borderline case, because
the summer solstice is June 21, and schools usually continue into June, but
June, July, and August are, nonetheless, often described as the summer
months.

1. large animal

2. populous state

3. long book

4. old professor

5. popular singer

6. powerful person

7. difficult subject

8. late meeting

9. arriving late to a meeting

EXERCISE I

Each of the following sentences contains words or expressions that are poten-
tially vague. Describe a context in which this vagueness might make a difference,
and explain what difference it makes. Then reduce this vagueness by replacing
the italicized expression with one that is more precise.

Example: Harold has a bad reputation.

Context: If Harold applies for a job as a bank security guard, then some
but not all kinds of bad reputation are relevant. A reputation for doing bad
construction work is irrelevant, but a reputation for dishonesty is relevant.

Replacement: Harold is a known thief.

1. Ross has a large income.

2. Cocaine is a dangerous drug.

3. Ruth is a clever woman.

4. Andre is a terrific tennis player.

5. Mark is not doing too well (after his operation).

EXERCISE II

(continued)

320

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

HEAPS

The existence of borderline cases is essential to various styles of reasoning
that have been identified and used since ancient times. One such argument
was called the argument from the heap or the sorites argument (from the Greek
word “soros,” which means “heap”). The classic example was intended to
show that it is impossible to produce a heap of sand by adding one grain at
a time. As a variation on this, we will show that no one can become rich. The
argument can be formulated as a long series like this:

(1) Someone with only one cent is not rich.
(2) If someone with only one cent is not rich, then someone with

only two cents is not rich.

(3) Someone with only two cents is not rich.

(4) If someone with only two cents is not rich, then someone with only
three cents is not rich.

(5) Someone with only three cents is not rich.

(6) If someone with only three cents is not rich, then someone with
only four cents is not rich.

(7) Someone with only four cents is not rich.

[and so on, until:]

(199,999,999,999) Someone with only 100,000,000,000 cents is not rich.

The problem, of course, is that someone with 100,000,000,000 cents is rich. If
someone denies this, we can keep on going. Or we can just sum up the
whole argument like this:

(1*) Someone with only one cent is not rich.
(2*) For any number, n, if someone with only n cents is not rich, then

someone with n + 1 cents is not rich.

(3*) Someone with any number of cents is not rich.

Premise (2*) is, of course, just a generalization of premises (2), (4), (6), and so on.
Despite its plausibility, everyone should agree that there is something

wrong with these arguments. If we hand over enough pennies to Peter,

6. Shaq’s a big fellow.

7. Dan’s grades are low.

8. Walter can’t see well.

9. The earthquake was a disaster.

10. The news was wonderful.

321

h E A P S

previously poor Peter will become the richest person in the world. Another
sign of a problem is that a parallel argument runs in the other direction:
Someone with 100 billion cents is rich. For any number, n, if someone with n
cents is rich, then someone with n – 1 cents is also rich. Therefore, someone
with no cents at all is rich. This is absurd (since we are not talking about how
rich one’s life can be as long as one has friends).

We can see that these arguments turn on borderline cases in the following
way: The argument would fail if we removed borderline cases by laying
down a ruling (maybe for tax purposes) that anyone with a million dollars
or more is rich and anyone with less than this is not rich. A person with
$999,999.99 would then pass from not being rich to being rich when given a
single penny, so premise (2*) would be false at that point under this ruling.
Of course, we do not usually use the word “rich” with this much precision.
We see some people as clearly rich and others as clearly not rich, but in be-
tween there is a fuzzy area where we are not prepared to say that people ei-
ther are or are not rich. In this fuzzy area, as well as in the clear areas, a
penny one way or the other will make no difference.

That is how the argument works, but exactly where does it go wrong?
This question is not easy to answer and remains a subject of vigorous de-
bate. Here is one way to view the problem: Consider a person who is
80 pounds overweight, where we would all agree that that person would
pass from being fat to not being fat by losing over 100 pounds. If he or she
lost an ounce a day for five years, this would be equivalent to losing just
over 114 pounds. An argument from the heap denies that this person would
ever cease to be fat. (So what is the point of dieting?) Anyone who accepted
that conclusion, or (3*), would seem to claim that a series of insignificant
changes cannot be equivalent to a significant change. Surely, this is wrong.
Here we might be met with the reply that every change must occur at some
particular time (and place), but there would be no particular day on which
this person would pass from being fat to not being fat. The problem with
this reply is that, with concepts like this, changes seem to occur gradually
over long stretches of time without occurring at any single moment. Any-
way, however or whenever it occurs, the change does occur. Some people
do cease to be fat if they lose enough weight.

This tells us that conclusions of arguments from the heap, such as (3*), are
false, so these arguments cannot be sound. Almost everyone agrees to that
much. Moreover, if an appropriate starting point is chosen, then premises
like (1) and (1*) will also be accepted as true by almost everyone. So the
main debate focuses on premise (2*) and on whether the argument is valid.
Some philosophers reject premise (2*) and claim that there is a precise point
at which a person becomes rich, even though we don’t know where that
point is. Others try to avoid any sharp cutoff point by developing some kind
of alternative logic. Still others just admit that the premises seem true, and
the argument seems valid, but the conclusion seems false, so the argument
creates a paradox to which they have no solution. These views become com-
plicated and technical, so we will not discuss them here. Suffice it to say that
almost everyone agrees that conclusions like (3*) and (199,999,999,999) are

322

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

false, so arguments from the heap are unsound for one reason or another.
That is why such arguments are labeled fallacies.

Paris Hilton

Nonliving Living

Salt Crystal Virus

We all agree that a salt crystal is not alive. Yet a salt crystal is very similar to
other more complex crystals, and these crystals are similar to certain viruses.

Where exactly do you think arguments from the heap go astray?

DISCUSSION QUESTION

SLIPPERY SLOPES

Near cousins to arguments from the heap are slippery-slope arguments, but
they reach different conclusions. Whereas heap arguments conclude that
nothing has a certain property, such as baldness, a slippery-slope argu-
ment could be trotted out to try to show that there is no real or defensible
or significant or important difference between being bald and not being
bald. The claim is not that no change occurs because the person who loses
all his hair is still not bald, as in an argument from the heap. Instead,
the slippery-slope argument claims that we should not classify people as
either bald or not bald, because there is no significant difference between
these classifications.

Whether a difference is significant depends on a variety of factors. In
particular, what is significant for one purpose might not be significant for
other purposes. Different concerns then yield different kinds of slippery-
slope arguments. We will discuss three kinds, beginning with conceptual
slippery-slope arguments.

CONCEPTUAL SLIPPERY-SLOPE ARGUMENTS

Conceptual slippery-slope arguments try to show that things at opposite
ends of a continuum do not differ in any way that would be important
enough to justify drawing a distinction in one’s concepts or theories. As an
example, consider the difference between living and nonliving things.

323

S L I P P E R Y S L O P E S

Still, a virus is on the borderline between living and nonliving things. A
virus does not take nourishment and does not reproduce itself. Instead, a
virus invades the reproductive mechanisms of cells, and these cells then pro-
duce the virus. As viruses become more complex, the differences between
them and “higher” life forms become less obvious. Through a series of such
small transitions, we finally reach a creature who is obviously alive: Paris
Hilton. So far, we have merely described a series of gradual transitions along
a continuum. We get a conceptual slippery-slope argument when we draw
the following conclusion from these facts: There is no significant difference
between living things and nonliving things.

To avoid this conclusion, we need to figure out where the argument goes
wrong. Such arguments often seem to depend on the following principles:

1. We should not draw a distinction between things that are not
significantly different.

2. If A is not significantly different from B, and B is not significantly
different from C, then A is not significantly different from C.

This first principle is interesting, complicated, and at least generally true. We
shall examine it more closely in a moment. The second principle is obviously
false. As already noted, a series of insignificant differences can add up to a
significant difference. Senator Everett Dirksen put the point well when he
said, “A billion dollars here and a billion dollars there can add up to some
real money.” To the extent that conceptual slippery-slope arguments depend
on this questionable assumption, they provide no more support for their
conclusions than do arguments from the heap.

Unlike arguments from the heap, however, conceptual slippery-slope
arguments do often lead people to accept their conclusions. Slippery-slope
arguments have been used to deny the difference between sanity and insan-
ity (some people are just a little weirder than others) and between amateur
and professional athletics (some athletes just get paid a little more or more
directly than other athletes). When many small differences make a big
difference, such conceptual slippery-slope arguments are fallacious.

This fallacy is seductive, because it is often hard to tell when many small
differences do make a big difference. Here is a recent controversial example:
Some humans have very dark skin. Others have very pale skin. As members
of these different groups marry, their children’s skin can have any interme-
diate shade of color. This smooth spectrum leads some people to deny that
any differences among races will be important to developed theories in biol-
ogy. Their argument seems to be that the wealth of intermediate cases will
make it difficult or impossible to formulate precise and exceptionless laws
that apply to one racial group but not to others, so differences among races
will play no important role in sciences that seek such laws. Critics respond
that some scientific laws about races still might hold without exception even
if skin color and other features do vary in tiny increments.

Whichever side one takes, this controversy shows that, even if there is a
smooth spectrum between endpoints, this continuity is not enough by itself

324

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

Whenever we find one thing passing over into its opposite through a gradual
series of borderline cases, we can construct (a) an argument from the heap and
(b) a conceptual slippery-slope argument by using the following method: Find
some increase that will not be large enough to carry us outside the borderline
area. Then use the patterns of argument given above. Applying this method,
formulate arguments for the following claims. Then explain what is wrong
with these arguments.

1. a. There are no heaps.

b. There is no difference between a heap and a single grain of sand.

2. a. Nobody is tall.

b. There is no difference between being tall and being short.

3. a. Books do not exist.

b. There is no difference between a book and a pamphlet.

4. a. Heat is not real.

b. There is no difference between being hot and being cold.

5. a. Taxes are never high.

b. There is no difference between high taxes and low taxes.

6. a. Science is an illusion.

b. There is no difference between science and faith.

EXERCISE III

1. Do you think that differences among races have any role in developed
theories in biology or sociology or any other science? Why or why not?

2. If animals evolve gradually from one species to another, does that show
that there is no significant difference in biology between any species
(say, horses and dogs)? Why or why not? Does it show that there is no
important difference in moral theory between the rights of humans and
the rights of animals in other species? Why or why not?

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

to show that there are no scientifically significant differences among races.
That conclusion would need to be supported by more than just a conceptual
slippery-slope argument. To show that certain concepts are useless for the
purposes of a certain theory, one would need to add more information, par-
ticularly about the purposes of that theory and its laws. That is what deter-
mines which differences are important in that particular area. Conceptual
slippery-slope arguments might work in conjunction with such additional
premises, but they cannot work alone.

325

S L I P P E R Y S L O P E S

FAIRNESS SLIPPERY-SLOPE ARGUMENTS

When borderline cases form a continuum, if someone classifies a case at one
end of the continuum, an opponent often challenges this classification by
asking, “Where do you draw the line?” Sometimes this challenge is out of
place. If I claim that Babe Ruth was a superstar, I will not be refuted if I can-
not draw a sharp dividing line between athletes who are superstars and
those who are not. There are some difficult borderline cases, but Babe Ruth
is not one of them. Nor will we be impressed if someone tells us that the dif-
ference between Babe Ruth and the thousands of players who never made it
to the major leagues is “just a matter of degree.” What is usually wrong with
this phrase is the emphasis on the word “just,” which suggests that dif-
ferences of degree do not count. Of course, it is a matter of degree, but the
difference in degree is so great that it should be marked by a special word.

There are other occasions when a challenge to drawing a line is appropri-
ate. For example, most schools and universities have grading systems that
draw a fundamental distinction between passing grades and failing grades.
Of course, a person who barely passes a course does not perform very dif-
ferently from one who barely fails a course, yet they are treated very differ-
ently. Students who barely pass a course get credit for it; those who barely
fail it do not. This, in turn, can lead to serious consequences in an academic
career and even beyond. It is entirely reasonable to ask for a justification of a
procedure that treats cases that are so similar in such strikingly different
ways. We are not being tender-hearted; we are raising an issue of fairness or
justice. It seems unfair to treat very similar cases in strikingly different ways.

The point is not that there is no difference between passing and failing.
That is why this argument is not a conceptual slippery-slope argument. The
claim, instead, is that the differences that do exist (as little as one point out of
a hundred on a test) do not make it fair to treat people so differently (credit
versus no credit for the course). This unfairness does not follow merely from
the scores forming a continuum, but the continuum does put pressure on us
to show why small differences in scores do justify big differences in treatment.

Questions about the fairness of drawing a line often arise in the law. For
example, given reasonable cause, the police generally do not have to obtain
a warrant to search a motor vehicle, for the obvious reason that the vehicle
might be driven away while the police go to a judge to obtain a warrant. On
the other hand, with few exceptions, the police may not search a person’s
home without a search warrant. In the case of California v. Carney,1 the U.S.
Supreme Court had to rule on whether the police needed a warrant to search
for marijuana in an “oversized van, fully mobile,” parked in a downtown
parking lot in San Diego. Because the van was a fully mobile vehicle, it seemed
to fall under the first principle; but because it also served as its owner’s
home, it seemed to fall under the second. The difficulty, as the Court saw,
was that there is a gray area between those things that clearly are motor vehi-
cles and not homes (for example, motorcycles) and those things that clearly
are homes and not motor vehicles (for example, apartments). Chief Justice

326

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

Warren Burger wondered about a mobile home in a trailer park hooked up
to utility lines with its wheels removed. Justice Sandra Day O’Connor asked
whether a tent, because it is highly mobile, could also be searched without a
warrant. As the discussion continued, houseboats (with or without motors
or oars), covered wagons, and finally a house being moved from one place to
another on a trailer truck came under examination. In the end, our highest
court decided that the van in question was a vehicle and could be searched
without first obtaining a warrant to do so. The court did not fully explain
why it is fair to allow warrantless searches—and to send people to jail as a
result—in cases of vans used as homes but not in other very similar cases.

Questions about where to draw a line often have even more important im-
plications than in the case just examined. Consider the death penalty. Most
societies have reserved the death penalty for those crimes they consider the
most serious. But where should we draw the line between crimes punishable
by death and crimes not punishable by death? Should the death penalty be
given to murderers of prison guards? To rapists? To drug dealers? To drunk
drivers who cause death? Wherever we draw the line, it seems to be an un-
avoidable consequence of the death penalty that similar cases will be treated in
radically different ways. A defender of the death penalty can argue that it is not
unfair to draw a line because, once the line is drawn, the public will have fair
warning about which crimes are subject to the death penalty and which are
not. It will then be up to each person to decide whether to risk his or her life by
crossing this line. It remains a matter of debate, however, whether the law can
be administered in a predictable way that makes this argument plausible.

The finality of death raises a profoundly difficult problem in another area,
too: the legalization of abortion. There are some people who think abortion
is never justified and ought to be declared totally illegal. There are others
who think abortion does not need any justification at all and should be com-
pletely legalized. Between these extremes, there are many people who be-
lieve abortion is justified in certain circumstances but not in others (such as
when abortion is the only way to save the life of the mother but not when it
prevents only lesser harms to the mother). There are also those who think
abortion should be allowed for a certain number of months of pregnancy,
but not thereafter. People holding these middle positions face the problem
of deciding where to draw a line, and this makes them subject to criticisms
from holders of either extreme position.

This problem admits of no easy solution. Because every line we draw will
seem arbitrary to some extent, a person who holds a middle position needs
to argue that it is better to draw some line—even a somewhat arbitrary one—
than to draw no line at all. The recognition that some line is needed, and
why, can often help us locate the real issues. This is the first step toward a
reasonable position.

Of course, this still does not tell us where to draw the line. A separate argu-
ment is needed to show that the line should be drawn at one point, or in one
area, rather than another. In the law, such arguments often appeal to value judg-
ments about the effects of drawing the line at one place rather than another.

327

S L I P P E R Y S L O P E S

For example, it is more efficient to draw a line where it is easy to detect, and
drawing the line at one place will provide greater protection for some values
or some people than will drawing it at another place. Different values often
favor drawing different lines, and sometimes such arguments are not avail-
able at all. Thus, in the end, it will be difficult to solve many of these pro-
found and important problems.

Is it unfair for teachers to fail students who get one point out of a hundred less
than others students who pass? Why or why not? Would an alternative grading
system be fairer?

DISCUSSION QUESTION

CAUSAL SLIPPERY-SLOPE ARGUMENTS

Another common kind of argument is also often described as a slippery-
slope argument. In these arguments, the claim is made that, once a certain
kind of event occurs, other similar events will also occur, and this will lead

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

328

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

eventually to disaster. The most famous (or infamous) argument of this kind
was used by the U.S. government to justify its intervention in Vietnam in the
1960s. It was claimed that, if the communists took over Vietnam, they would
then take over Cambodia, the rest of Asia, and other continents, until they
ruled the whole world. This was called the domino theory, since the fall of
one country would make neighboring countries fall as well. Arguments of
this kind are sometimes called domino arguments. Such arguments claim that
one event, which might not seem bad by itself, would lead to other, more hor-
rible events, so such arguments can also be called parades of horrors.

Causal slippery slopes can also slide into good results. After all, someone
who wants communists to take over the world might use the above domino ar-
gument to show why the United States should not intervene in Vietnam. Such
optimistic slippery-slope arguments are, however, much less common than pa-
rades of horrors, so we will limit our discussion to the pessimistic versions.

These arguments resemble other slippery-slope arguments in that they de-
pend on a series of small changes. The domino argument does not, however,
claim that there is no difference between the first step and later steps—be-
tween Vietnam going communist and the rest of Asia going communist. Nor
is there supposed to be anything unfair about letting Vietnam go communist
without letting other countries also go communist. The point of a parade of
horrors is that certain events will cause horrible effects because of their simi-
larity or proximity to other events. Since the crucial claim is about causes and
effects, these arguments will be called causal slippery-slope arguments.

We saw another example in Chapter 4. While arguing against an increase
in the clerk hire allowance, Kyl says,

The amount of increase does not appear large. I trust, however, there is no one
among us who would suggest that the addition of a clerk would not entail
allowances for another desk, another typewriter, more materials, and it is not
beyond the realm of possibility that the next step would then be a request for
additional office space, and ultimately new buildings.

Although this argument is heavily guarded, the basic claim is that increasing
the clerk hire allowance is likely to lead to much larger expenditures that will
break the budget. The argument can be represented more formally this way:

(1) If the clerk hire allowance is increased, other expenditures will also
probably be increased.

(2) These other increases would be horrible.

(3) The clerk hire allowance should not be increased.

Opponents can respond in several ways. One response is to deny that the
supposedly horrible effects really are so horrible. One might argue, for exam-
ple, that additional office space and new buildings would be useful. This re-
sponse is often foreclosed by describing the effects in especially horrible terms.

A second possible response would be to deny that increasing the clerk
hire allowance really would have the horrible effects that are claimed in the
first premise. One might argue, for example, that the old offices already
have adequate room for additional clerks.

329

S L I P P E R Y S L O P E S

Often the best response is a combination of these. One can admit that certain
claimed effects would be horrible, but deny that these horrible effects really are
likely. Then one can acknowledge that some more minor problems will ensue,
but argue that these costs are outweighed by the benefits of the program.

To determine which, if any, of these responses is adequate, one must look
closely at each particular argument and ask the following questions:

Are any of the claimed effects really very bad?

Are any of these effects really very likely?

Do these dangers outweigh all the benefits of what is being criticized?

If the answers to all these questions are “Yes,” then the causal slippery-slope
argument is strong. But if any of these questions receives a negative answer,
then the causal slippery-slope argument is questionable on that basis.

Classify each of the following arguments as either (H) an argument from the
heap, (C) a conceptual slippery-slope argument, (F) a fairness slippery-slope
argument, or (S) a causal slippery-slope argument. Explain why you classify
each example as you do.

1. We have to take a stand against sex education in junior high schools. If we
allow sex education in the eighth grade, then the seventh graders will
want it, and then the sixth graders, and pretty soon we will be teaching
sex education to our little kindergartners.

2. People are found not guilty by reason of insanity when they cannot avoid
breaking the law. But people who are brought up in certain deprived
social circumstances are not much more able than the insane to avoid
breaking the law. So it would be unjust to find them guilty.

3. People are called mentally ill when they do very strange things, but many
so-called eccentrics do things that are just as strange. So there is no real
difference between insanity and eccentricity.

4. If you try to smoke one cigarette a day, you will end up smoking two and
then three and four and five, and so on, until you smoke two packs every
day. So don’t try even one.

5. A human egg one minute after fertilization is not very different from what
it is one minute later, or one minute after that, and so on. Thus, there is re-
ally no difference between just-fertilized eggs and adult humans.

6. Since no moment in the continuum of development between an egg and a
baby is especially significant, it is not fair to grant a right to life to a baby
unless one grants the same right to every fertilized egg.

7. If we let doctors kill dying patients who are in great pain, then they will
kill other patients who are in less pain and patients who are only slightly
disabled. Eventually, they will kill anyone who is not wanted by society.

EXERCISE IV

330

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

Explain the reasons, if any, for drawing a definite line in each of the following
cases. Then further explain how this line can be drawn, if at all, in a reasonable
way.

1. Minimum (or maximum?) age to drive a car

2. Minimum age to vote

3. Minimum age to enter (or be drafted into) the military

4. Minimum age to drink alcoholic beverages

5. Minimum age for election to the U.S. presidency

6. Maximum age before retirement becomes mandatory

EXERCISE V

Determine whether each of the following arguments provides adequate
support, or any support, for its conclusion. Explain why.

1. I shouldn’t get a speeding ticket for going fifty-six miles per hour, because
my driving did not all of a sudden get more dangerous when I passed the
speed limit of fifty-five.

2. No student should ever be allowed to ask a question during a lecture,
because once one student asks a question, then another one wants to ask a
question, and pretty soon the teacher doesn’t have any time left to lecture.

3. Pornography shouldn’t be illegal, because you can’t draw a line between
pornography and erotic art.

4. Marijuana should be legal, because it is no more dangerous than alcohol
or nicotine.

5. Marijuana should be illegal, because people who try marijuana are likely
to go on to try hashish, and then snorting cocaine, and then freebasing
cocaine or shooting heroin.

6. The government should not put any new restrictions on free trade,
because once they place some restrictions, they will place more and more
until foreign trade is so limited that our own economy will suffer.

7. Governments should never bargain with any terrorist. Once they do, they
will have to bargain with every other terrorist who comes along.

8. If assault weapons are banned, Congress will ban handguns next, and
then rifles. Eventually, hunters will not be able to hunt, and law-abiding
citizens will have no way to defend themselves against criminals.

EXERCISE VI

331

Sl ippery Slopes

1. Explain and evaluate the following argument against restrictions on hate
speech:

To attempt to craft free speech exceptions only for racist speech would create a sig-
nificant risk of a slide down the proverbial “slippery slope.” . . . Censorial conse-
quences could result from many proposed or adopted university policies, including
the Stanford code, which sanctions speech intended to “insult or stigmatize” on the
basis of race or other prohibited grounds. For example, certain feminists suggest that
all heterosexual sex is rape because heterosexual men are aggressors who operate in
a cultural climate of pervasive sexism and violence against women. Aren’t these fem-
inists insulting or stigmatizing heterosexual men on the basis of their sex and sexual
orientation? And how about a Holocaust survivor who blames all (“Aryan”) Ger-
mans for their collaboration during World War II? Doesn’t this insinuation insult and
stigmatize on the basis of national and ethnic origin? And surely we can think of nu-
merous other examples that would have to give us pause.2

2. Explain and evaluate the following response to critics of college
restrictions on hate speech:

[Defenders of such restrictions] will ask whether an educational institution does not
have the power . . . to enact reasonable regulations aimed at assuring equal person-
hood on campus. If one characterizes the issue this way, . . . a different set of slopes
will look slippery. If we do not intervene to protect equality here, what will the next
outrage be?3

3. When John Stewart interviewed William Bennett (former Secretary of
Education under President Ronald Reagan) about gay marriage, both of
them used slippery slopes and responded to each other’s slippery slopes
in the following exchange. What kinds of slippery slopes did they use?
Was either argument better than the other? Was either response better than
the other? Why or why not?

BENNETT: The question is: How do you define marriage? Where do you draw the
line? What do you say to the polygamist?

STEWART: You don’t say anything to the polygamist. That is a choice, to get three
or four wives. That is not a biological condition that “I gots to get laid by differ-
ent women that I am married to.” That’s a choice. Being gay is part of the human
condition. There’s a huge difference.

BENNETT: Well, some people regard their human condition as having three
women. Look, the polygamists are all over this.

STEWART: Then let’s go slippery slope the other way. If government says I can
define marriage as between a man and a woman, what says they can’t define it
between people of different income levels, or they can decide whether or not you
are a suitable husband for a particular woman?

BENNETT: Because gender matters in marriage, it has mattered to every human
society, it matters in every religion . . .

STEWART: Race matters in every society as well. Isn’t progress understanding?

4. What, if anything, is shown when slippery-slope arguments can be used
on both sides of an issue?

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

332

CHAPTER 13 ■ Fallac ies of Vagueness

NOTES
1 1471 U.S. 386 (1984). This case was reported by Linda Greenhouse, “Of Tents with Wheels and
Houses with Oars,” New York Times, May 15, 1985.

2 Nadine Strossen, “Regulating Racist Speech on Campus: A Modest Proposal?” Duke Law Jour-
nal (1990): 537–38. When she wrote this, Strossen was on the National Board of Directors of the
American Civil Liberties Union.

3 Richard Delgado, “Campus Antiracism Rules: Constitutional Narratives in Collision,” North-
western University Law Review 85 (1991): 346.

Fallacies OF Ambiguity

This chapter examines fallacies that arise from a second kind of unclarity: ambiguity.

Ambiguity occurs when it is unclear which meaning of a term is intended in a given

context. Ambiguity leads to the fallacy of equivocation, which will be defined and

illustrated. The chapter closes with a discussion of different kinds of definitions that

can be useful in avoiding or responding to fallacies of clarity.

AMBIGUITY

The idea of vagueness is based on a common feature of words in our language:
Many of them leave open a range of borderline cases. The notion of ambiguity
is also based on a common feature of our language: Words often have a num-
ber of different meanings. For example, the New Merriam-Webster Pocket Dictio-
nary has the following entry under the word “cardinal”:

cardinal adj. 1: of basic importance; chief, main, primary,
2: of cardinal red color.

n. 1: an ecclesiastical official of the Roman Catholic Church
ranking next below the pope,

2: a bright red,

3: any of several American finches of which the male is
bright red.

In the plural, “the Cardinals” is the name of an athletic team that inhabits
St. Louis; “cardinal” also describes the numbers used in simple counting.

It is not likely that people would get confused about these very different
meanings of the word “cardinal,” but we might imagine a priest, a bird-
watcher, and a baseball fan all hearing the remark “The cardinals are in
town.” The priest would prepare for a solemn occasion, the bird-watcher
would get out binoculars, and the baseball fan would head for the stadium.
In this context, the remark might be criticized as ambiguous. More precisely,
we shall say that an expression in a given context is used ambiguously if and
only if it is misleading or potentially misleading because it is hard to tell
which of a number of possible meanings is intended in that context.

14

333

334

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

Using this definition, the word “bank” is not used ambiguously in the fol-
lowing sentence:

Joan deposited $500 in the bank and got a receipt.

Some writers, however, call an expression ambiguous simply if it admits of
more than one interpretation, without adding that it is not possible to tell
which meaning is intended. With this definition, the above sentence is am-
biguous because it could mean that Joan placed $500 in a riverbank, and
someone, for whatever reason, gave her a receipt for doing so. On this second
definition of ambiguity, virtually every expression is ambiguous, because vir-
tually every expression admits of more than one interpretation. On our first
definition, only uses of expressions that are misleading or potentially mislead-
ing will be called ambiguous. In what follows, we will use the word “ambigu-
ous” in accordance with the first definition. Ambiguity then depends on the
context, because whether something is misleading also depends on context.

In everyday life, context usually settles which of a variety of meanings is
appropriate. Yet sometimes genuine misunderstandings do arise. An Ameri-
can and a European discussing “football” may have different games in mind.
The European is talking about what Americans call “soccer”; the American is
talking about what Europeans call “American football.” It is characteristic of
the ambiguous use of a term that when it comes to light, we are likely to say
something like, “Oh, you mean that kind of cardinal!” or “Oh, you were talk-
ing about American football!” This kind of misunderstanding can cause trou-
ble. When it does, if we want to criticize the expression that creates the
problem, we call it ambiguous.

Thus, “ambiguous” is both dependent on context and a term of criticism
in much the same ways as “vague.” But these kinds of unclarity differ in
other ways. In a context where the use of a word is ambiguous, it is not clear
which of two meanings to attach to a word. In a context where the use of a
word is vague, we cannot attach any precise meaning to the use of a word.

So far we have talked about the ambiguity of individual terms or words.
This is called semantic ambiguity. But sometimes we do not know which in-
terpretation to give to a phrase or a sentence because its grammar or syntax
admits of more than one interpretation. This is called syntactic ambiguity or
amphiboly. Thus, if we talk about the conquest of the Persians, we might be refer-
ring either to the Persians’ conquering someone or to someone’s conquering

Image not available due to copyright restrictions

335

Amb igu ity

the Persians. Sometimes the grammar of a sentence leaves open a great
many possible interpretations. For example, consider the following sentence
(from Paul Benacerraf):

Only sons marry only daughters.

One thing this might mean is that a person who is a male only child will
marry a person who is a female only child. Again, it might mean that sons
are the only persons who marry daughters and do not marry anyone else.
Other interpretations are possible as well.

The process of rewriting a sentence so that one of its possible meanings be-
comes clear is called disambiguating the sentence. One way of disambiguating a
sentence is to rewrite it as a whole, spelling things out in detail. That is how we
disambiguated the sentence “Only sons marry only daughters.” Another proce-
dure is to continue the sentence in a way that supplies a context that forces one
interpretation over others. Consider the sentence “Mary had a little lamb.” No-
tice how the meaning changes completely under the following continuations:

1. Mary had a little lamb; it followed her to school.

2. Mary had a little lamb and then some broccoli.

Just in passing, it is not altogether obvious how we should describe the am-
biguity in the sentence “Mary had a little lamb.” The most obvious sugges-
tion is that the word “had” is ambiguous, meaning “owned” on the first
reading and “ate” on the second reading. Notice, however, that this also
forces alternative readings for the expression “a little lamb.” Presumably, it
was a small, whole, live lamb that followed Mary to school, whereas it
would have been a small amount of cooked lamb that she ate. So if we try to
locate the ambiguity in particular words, we must say that not only the
word “had” but also the word “lamb” are being used ambiguously. This is a
reasonable approach, but another is available. In everyday speech, we often
leave things out. Thus, instead of saying “Mary had a little portion of meat de-
rived from a lamb to eat,” we simply say “Mary had a little lamb,” dropping
out the italicized words on the assumption that they will be understood. In
most contexts, such deletions cause no misunderstanding. But sometimes
deletions are misunderstood, and this can produce ambiguity.

Show that each of the following sentences admits of at least two interpretations
by (1) rewriting the sentence as a whole in two different ways and (2) expanding
the sentence in two different ways to clarify the context:

Example: Kenneth let us down.

Rewriting: Kenneth lowered us.

Kenneth disappointed us.

Expanding: Kenneth let us down with a rope.

Kenneth let us down just when we needed him.

EXERCISE I

(continued)

336

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

1. Barry Bonds (the baseball player) was safe at home.

2. I don’t know what state Meredith is in.

3. Where did you get bitten?

4. The president sent her congratulations.

5. Visiting professors can be boring.

6. Wendy ran a marathon.

7. The meaning of the term “altering” is changing.

8. I don’t want to get too close to him.

9. I often have my friends for dinner.

10. Slow Children Playing. (on a street sign.)

11. Save Soap and Waste Paper. (on a sign during World War II.)

12. In his will, he left $1,000 to his two sons, Jim and John.

13. There is some explanation for everything.

14. She is an Asian historian.

15. Nobody may be in the lounge this evening.

16. Nobody came to the concert at 8 PM.

Follow the same instructions for the following actual newspaper headlines, many
of which come from Columbia Journalism Review, editors, Squad Helps Dog Bite
Victim and Other Flubs from the Nation’s Press (Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1980).

1. Milk Drinkers Turn to Powder

2. Anti-busing Rider Killed by Senate

3. Mrs. Gandhi Stoned in Rally in India

4. College Graduates Blind Senior Citizen

5. Jumping Bean Prices Affect the Poor

6. Tuna Biting off Washington Coast

7. Time for Football and Meatball Stew

8. Police Kill Man with Ax

9. Squad Helps Dog Bite Victim

10. Child Teaching Expert to Speak

11. Prostitutes Appeal to Pope

12. Legalized Outhouses Aired by Legislature

13. Police Can’t Stop Gambling

14. Judge Permits Club to Continue Sex Bar

15. Greeks Fine Hookers

16. Survivor of Siamese Twins Joins Parents

EXERCISE II

337

Equ ivocat ion

EQUIVOCATION

Ambiguity can cause a variety of problems for arguments. Often it produces
hilarious or embarrassing side effects, and it is hard to get your arguments
taken seriously if your listeners are giggling over an unintended double en-
tendre in which one of the double meanings has risqué connotations.

Ambiguity can also generate bad arguments that involve the fallacy of
equivocation. An argument is said to commit this fallacy when it uses the
same expression in different senses in different parts of the argument, and
this ruins the argument. Here is a silly example (from Carl Wolf):

Six is an odd number of legs for a horse.
Odd numbers cannot be divided by two.

Six cannot be divided by two.

17. Caribbean Islands Drift to the Left

18. Teenage Prostitution Problem Is Mounting

19. Miners Refuse to Work After Death

20. Police Begin Campaign to Run Down Jaywalkers

21. Red Tape Holds Up New Bridges

22. Juvenile Court to Try Shooting Defendant

23. Kids Make Nutritious Snacks

24. Study of Obesity Looks for Larger Test Group

25. Hospitals Sued by Seven Foot Doctors

26. Local High School Dropouts Cut in Half

27. Iraqi Head Seeks Arms

28. Drunk Gets Nine Months in Violin Case

29. Teacher Strikes Idle Kids

30. British Left Waffles on Falkland Islands

31. Stolen Painting Found by Tree

32. New Vaccine May Contain Rabies

Poetry, songs, and jokes often intentionally exploit multiple meanings for effect.
Find examples in poems, songs, and jokes that you like. Are these examples of
ambiguity on the above definition? Why or why not?

EXERCISE III

338

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

Clearly, “odd” means “unusual” in the first premise, but it means “not
even” in the second premise. Consequently, both premises are true, even
though the conclusion is false, so the argument is not valid.

Let’s consider another, more serious, example. In Utilitarianism (1861),
John Stuart Mill claims to “prove” that “happiness is a good” with the fol-
lowing argument:

The only proof capable of being given that an object is visible is that people actu-
ally see it. The only proof that a sound is audible is that people hear it. In like
manner the sole evidence it is possible to produce that anything is desirable is
that people actually desire it. . . . [E]ach person, so far as he believes it to be
attainable, desires his own happiness. This, however, being a fact, we have not
only all the proof which the case admits of, but all which it is possible to require,
that happiness is a good.

Mill has sometimes been charged with committing a transparent fallacy in
this passage. Specifically, the following argument is attributed to him:

(1) If something is desired, then it is desirable.
(2) If it is desirable, then it is good.

(3) If something is desired, then it is good.

Mill never presents his argument in this form, and it may be uncharitable to
attribute it to him. Still, whether it is Mill’s way of arguing or not, it provides
a good specimen of a fallacy of equivocation.

The objection to this argument is that the word “desirable” is used in dif-
ferent senses in the two premises. Specifically, in the first premise, it is used to
mean “capable of being desired,” whereas in the second premise, it is used to
mean “worthy of being desired.” If so, the argument really amounts to this:

(1*) If something is desired, then it is capable of being desired.
(2*) If something is worthy of being desired, then it is good.

(3) If something is desired, then it is good.

This argument is clearly not valid. To make the charge of equivocation stick,
however, it has to be shown that the argument is not valid when the mean-
ing of the word “desirable” is used in the same sense in the two premises.
This produces two cases to be examined:

(1*) If something is desired, then it is capable of being desired.
(2**) If something is capable of being desired, then it is good.

(3) If something is desired, then it is good.

We now have a valid argument, but the second premise is not true, for some-
times people are capable of desiring things that are not good. The second
way of restoring validity takes the following form:

(1**) If something is desired, then it is worthy of being desired.
(2*) If something is worthy of being desired, then it is good.

(3) If something is desired, then it is good.

339

Equ ivocat ion

Again, we have a valid argument, but this time the first premise is false,
since sometimes people do desire things that they should not desire. Thus,
in both cases, altering the premises to produce a valid argument produces a
false premise, so the argument cannot be sound.

This is a pattern that emerges when dealing with arguments that involve
the fallacy of equivocation. When the premises are interpreted in a way that
produces a valid argument, then at least one of the premises is false. When
the premises are interpreted in a way that makes them true, then the argu-
ment is not valid. Here, then, is the strategy for dealing with arguments that
may involve a fallacy of equivocation:

1. Distinguish the possible meanings of the potentially ambiguous
expressions in the argument.

2. For each possible meaning, restate the argument so that each expression
clearly has the same meaning in all of the premises and the conclusion.

3. Evaluate the resulting arguments separately.

If the argument fails whenever each term has a consistent meaning through-
out the argument, then the argument is guilty of equivocation.

Each of the following arguments trades on an ambiguity. For each, locate the
ambiguity by showing that one or more of the statements can be interpreted in
different ways.

1. We shouldn’t hire Peter, because our company has a policy against hiring
drug users, and I saw Peter take aspirin, which is a drug.

2. Man is the only rational animal, and no woman is a man, so women are
not rational.

3. My doctor has been practicing medicine for thirty years, and practice
makes perfect, so my doctor must be nearly perfect.

4. Our cereal is all natural, for there is obviously nothing supernatural about it.

5. Ice cream is never all natural, since it never appears in nature without
human intervention.

6. I have a right to spend all my money on lottery tickets. Therefore, when
I spend all my money on lottery tickets, I am doing the right thing.

7. You passed no one on the road; therefore, you walked faster than no one.

8. Everything must have some cause; therefore, something must be the cause
of everything.

9. The apostles were twelve. Matthew was an apostle. Hence, Matthew was
twelve. (attributed to Bertrand Russell)

10. If I have only one friend, then I cannot say that I have any number of
friends. So one is not any number. (from Timothy Duggan)

EXERCISE IV

(continued)

340

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

11. “Our bread does have fiber, because it contains wood pulp.” (The Federal
Trade Commission actually ordered the Continental Baking Company to
indicate in their advertising that this is the kind of fiber in their Fresh
Horizons bread.)

12. Anyone who tries to violate a law, even if the attempt fails, should be pun-
ished. People who try to fly are trying to violate the law of gravity. So they
should be punished. (This argument is reported to have been used in an
actual legal case during the nineteenth century, but compare Stephen Col-
bert, “Physics is the ultimate Big Government interference—universal laws
meant to constrain us at every turn. . . . Hey, is it wrong that I sometimes
want to act without having to deal with an equal and opposite reaction?”1)

1. When a newspaper was criticized as a scandalous rumormonger, its editor
responded with the following argument (as paraphrased by Deni Elliot).
Does the editor’s argument commit the fallacy of equivocation?

It’s not wrong for newspapers to pass on rumors about sex scandals. Newspapers
have a duty to print stories that are in the public interest, and the public clearly
has a great interest in rumors about sex scandals, since, when newspapers print
such stories, their circulation increases, and they receive a large number of letters.

2. In the following passage, Tom Hill Jr. claims that a common argument
against affirmative action commits a fallacy of equivocation. Do you agree
that this argument equivocates? Why or why not?

Some think that the injustice of all affirmative action programs is obvious or eas-
ily demonstrated. [One argument] goes this way: “Affirmative action, by defini-
tion, gives preferential treatment to minorities and women. This is discrimination
in their favor and against non-minority males. All discrimination by public insti-
tutions is unjust, no matter whether it is the old kind or the newer ‘reverse dis-
crimination.’ So all affirmative action programs in public institutions are unjust.”

This deceptively simple argument, of course, trades on an ambiguity. In one
sense, to “discriminate” means to “make a distinction,” to pay attention to a differ-
ence. In this evaluatively neutral sense, of course, affirmative action programs do
discriminate. But public institutions must, and justifiably do, “discriminate” in this
sense, for example, between citizens and noncitizens, freshmen and seniors, the tal-
ented and the retarded, and those who pay their bills and those who do not.
Whether it is unjust to note and make use of a certain distinction in a given context
depends upon many factors: the nature of the institution, the relevant rights of the
parties involved, the purposes and effects of making that distinction, and so on.

All this would be obvious except for the fact that the word “discrimination” is
also used in a pejorative sense, meaning (roughly) “making use of a distinction in
an unjust or illegitimate way.” To discriminate in this sense is obviously wrong,
but now it remains an open question whether the use of gender and race distinc-
tions in affirmative action programs is really “discrimination” in this sense. The
simplistic argument uses the evaluatively neutral sense of “discrimination” to
show that affirmative action discriminates; it then shifts to the pejorative sense

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

341

Equ ivocat ion

when it asserts that discrimination is always wrong. Although one may, in the end,
conclude that all public use of racial and gender distinctions is unjust, to do so re-
quires more of an argument than the simple one (just given) that merely exploits an
ambiguity of the word “discrimination.”2

3. Many people argue that homosexuality is immoral because it is unnatural.
In the following reading,3 Burton Leiser criticizes this argument for equiv-
ocating on five meanings of the term “natural.” Does the argument really
equivocate? Why or why not?

HOMOSEXUALITY AND NATURAL LAW

by Burton Leiser

When theologians and moralists speak of homosexuality, contraception, abor-
tion, and other forms of human behavior as being unnatural and say that for
that reason such behavior must be considered to be wrong, in what sense are
they using the word unnatural? Are they saying that homosexual behavior and
the use of contraceptives are [1] contrary to the scientific laws of nature, are they
saying that they are [2] artificial forms of behavior, or are they using the terms
natural and unnatural in some third sense?

They cannot mean that homosexual behavior (to stick to the subject
presently under discussion) violates the laws of nature in the first sense [in-
cluding, for example, Boyle’s law that the volume of a gas varies inversely
with the pressure that is applied to it], for . . . in that sense it is impossible to
violate the laws of nature. Those laws, being merely descriptive of what actu-
ally does happen, would have to include homosexual behavior if such behav-
ior does actually take place. . . .

If those who say that homosexual behavior is unnatural are using the term
unnatural in the second sense as artificial, it is difficult to understand their ob-
jection. That which is artificial is often far better than what is natural. . . .
[Moreover,] homosexual behavior can hardly be considered unnatural in this
sense. There is nothing artificial about such behavior. On the contrary, it is
quite natural, in this sense, to those who engage in it. And, even if it were not,
this is not in itself a ground for condemning it.

It would seem, then, that those who condemn homosexuality as an unnatural
form of behavior must mean something else by the word unnatural, something
not covered by either of the preceding definitions. A third possibility is this:

3. Anything uncommon or abnormal is unnatural. If this is what is meant by
those who condemn homosexuality on the ground that it is unnatural, it is
quite obvious that their condemnation cannot be accepted without further
argument. The fact that a given form of behavior is uncommon provides no
justification for condemning it. . . . Great artists, poets, musicians, and scien-
tists are uncommon in this sense; but clearly the world is better off for having
them, and it would be absurd to condemn them or their activities for their
failure to be common and normal. If homosexual behavior is wrong, then, it
must be for some reason other than its unnaturalness in this sense of the word.

(continued)

342

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

4. Any use of an organ or an instrument that is contrary to its principal purpose or
function is unnatural. Every organ and every instrument—perhaps even every
creature—has a function to perform, one for which it is particularly designed.
Any use of those instruments and organs that is consonant with their purposes
is natural and proper, but any use that is inconsistent with their principal func-
tions is unnatural and improper, and to that extent evil or harmful. Human
teeth, for example, are admirably designed for their principal functions—biting
and chewing the kinds of food suitable for human consumption. But they are
not particularly well suited for prying the caps from beer bottles. If they are
used for that purpose, they are likely to crack or break under the strain. . . .

What are the sex organs peculiarly suited to do? . . . Our sexual organs are
uniquely adapted for procreation, but that is obviously not the only function for
which they are adapted. Human beings may—and do—use those organs for a
great many other purposes, and it is difficult to see why any one use should be
considered to be the only proper one. The sex organs seem to be particularly
well adapted to give their owners and others intense sensations of pleasure.
Unless one believes that pleasure itself is bad, there seems to be little reason to
believe that the use of the sex organs for the production of pleasure in oneself or
in others is evil. In view of the peculiar design of these organs, with their great
concentration of nerve endings, it would seem that they were designed (if they
were designed) with that very goal in mind, and that their use for such purposes
would be no more unnatural than their use for the purpose of procreation.

Nor should we overlook the fact that human sex organs may be and are used
to express, in the deepest and most intimate way open to man, the love of one
person for another. Even the most ardent opponents of “unfruitful” intercourse
admit that sex does serve this function. They have accordingly conceded that a
man and his wife may have intercourse even though she is pregnant, or past the
age of child bearing, or in the infertile period of her menstrual cycle. . . .

To sum up, then, the proposition that any use of an organ that is contrary to
its principal purpose or function is unnatural assumes that organs have a prin-
cipal purpose or function, but this may be denied on the ground that the pur-
pose or function of a given organ may vary according to the needs or desires
of its owner. It may be denied on the ground that a given organ may have
more than one principal purpose or function, and any attempt to call one use
or another the only natural one seems to be arbitrary, if not question-begging.
Also, the proposition suggests that what is unnatural is evil or depraved. This
goes beyond the pure description of things, and enters into the problem of the
evaluation of human behavior, which leads us to the fifth meaning of natural.

5. That which is natural is good, and whatever is unnatural is bad. . . . Clearly,
[people who say this] cannot have intended merely to reduce the word natural
to a synonym of good, right, and proper, and unnatural to a synonym of evil,
wrong, improper, corrupt, and depraved. If that were all they had intended to
do, . . . it would follow inevitably that whatever is good must be natural, and
vice versa, by definition. This is certainly not what the opponents of homosex-
uality have been saying when they claim that homosexuality, being unnatural,
is evil. For if it were, their claim would be quite empty. They would be saying
merely that homosexuality, being evil, is evil—a redundancy that could as
easily be reduced to the simpler assertion that homosexuality is evil. This

343

Def in it ions

DEFINITIONS

It is sometimes suggested that a great many disputes could be avoided if
people simply took the precaution of defining their terms. To some extent
this is true. People do sometimes seem to disagree just because they are us-
ing terms in different ways, even though they agree on the nonverbal issues.

Nonetheless, definitions will not solve all problems, and a mindless insis-
tence on definitions can turn a serious discussion into a semantic quibble. If
you insist on defining every term, you will never be satisfied, because every
definition will introduce new terms to be defined. Furthermore, definitions
themselves can be confusing or obfuscating as, for example, when an econo-
mist tells us:

I define “inflation” as too much money chasing too few goods.

Not only is this definition metaphorical and obscure, it also has a theory of
the causes of inflation built into it.

To use definitions correctly, we must realize that they come in various
forms and serve various purposes. There are at least five kinds of definitions
that need to be distinguished:

1. Lexical or dictionary definitions are the most common kind of definition.
We consult a dictionary when we are ignorant about the meaning of a word in
a particular language. If you do not happen to know what the words “jejune,”
“ketone,” or “Kreis” mean, then you can look these words up in an English, a
scientific, and a German dictionary, respectively.

Except for an occasional diagram, dictionaries explain the meaning of a
word by using other words that the reader presumably already under-
stands. These explanations often run in a circle, such as when the Oxford
American Dictionary defines “car” as “automobile” and “automobile” as
“car.” Circular definitions can still be useful, because if you know what one

assertion, however, is not an argument. . . . “Unnaturalness” and “wrongful-
ness” are not synonyms, then, but different concepts.

The problem with which we are wrestling is that we are unable to find a
meaning for unnatural that enables us to arrive at the conclusion that homosexu-
ality is unnatural or that if homosexuality is unnatural, it is therefore wrongful
behavior. We have examined [five] common meanings of natural and unnatural,
and have seen that none of them performs the task that it must perform if the
advocates of this argument are to prevail. Without some more satisfactory
explanation of the connection between the wrongfulness of homosexuality and
its alleged unnaturalness, the argument [that homosexuality is wrong because
it is unnatural] must be rejected.

344

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

of the terms in the circle means, you can use that background knowledge
plus the definition to figure out what the other terms mean.

The goal of dictionary definitions is to supply us with factual information
about the standard meanings of words in a particular language. As dictionary
definitions are, in effect, factual claims about how people in general actually
use certain words, dictionary definitions can be either accurate or inaccurate.
The Oxford American Dictionary defines one meaning of “fan” as “a device
waved in the hand or operated mechanically to create a current of air.” This is,
strictly speaking, incorrect because a bellows also meets these conditions but is
not a fan. Dictionary definitions can be criticized or defended on the basis of a
speaker’s sense of the language or, more formally, by empirical surveys of
what speakers accept as appropriate or reject as inappropriate uses of the term.

2. Disambiguating definitions specify a sense in which a word or phrase is or
might be being used by a particular speaker on a particular occasion. (“When I
said that the banks were collapsing, I meant river banks, not financial institu-
tions.”) Disambiguating definitions can tell us which dictionary definition ac-
tually is intended in a particular context, or they can distinguish several
meanings that might be intended. They can also be used to remove syntactic
ambiguity or amphiboly. (“When I said that all of my friends are not students,
I meant that not all of them are students, not that none of them are students.”)

Whether the ambiguity is semantic or syntactic, the goal of a disam-
biguating definition is to capture what the speaker intended, so such defini-
tions can be justified by asking the speaker what he or she meant. This is a
different question than asking what a word means. Whereas dictionary defi-
nitions say what words mean or how they are used by most speakers of the
language, a disambiguating definition focuses on a particular speaker and
specifies which meaning that speaker intended on a particular occasion.

Such disambiguating definitions can be used in response to arguments that
seem to commit the fallacy of equivocation. A critic can use disambiguating
definitions to distinguish possible meanings and then ask, “Did you mean this
or that?” The person who gave the argument can answer by picking one of
these alternatives or by providing another disambiguating definition to spec-
ify what was meant. Speakers are sometimes not sure which meaning they
intended, and then the critic needs to show that the argument cannot work if
a single disambiguating definition is followed throughout. Whether one sides
with the arguer or the critic, arguments that use terms ambiguously cannot be
evaluated thoroughly without the help of disambiguating definitions.

3. Stipulative definitions are used to assign a meaning to a new (usually
technical) term or to assign a new or special meaning to a familiar term.
They have the following general form: “By such and such expression I (or
we) will mean so and so.” Thus, mathematicians introduced the new term
“googol” to stand for the number expressed by 1 followed by 100 zeroes.
Physicists use words like “charm,” “color,” and “strangeness” to stand for
certain features of subatomic particles. Stipulative definitions do not report

345

Def in it ions

what a word means; they give a new word a meaning or an old word a new
meaning.

Notice that if I say, “I stipulate that . . . ” I thereby stipulate that . . . ; so such
utterances are explicit performatives, and stipulation is a speech act. (See
Chapter 2.) This explains why stipulative definitions cannot be false, since no
performatives can be false. Stipulative definitions can, however, be criticized in
other ways. They can be vague or ambiguous. They can be useless or confus-
ing. Someone who stipulates a meaning for a term might go on to use the term
with a different meaning (just as people sometimes fail to keep their promises).
Still, stipulative definitions cannot be false by virtue of failing to correspond to
the real meaning of a word, because they give that meaning to that word.

4. Precising definitions are used to resolve vagueness. They are used to
draw a sharp (or sharper) boundary around the things to which a term
refers, when this collection has a fuzzy or indeterminate boundary in ordi-
nary usage. For example, it is not important for most purposes to decide
how big a population center must be in order to count as a city rather than
as a town. We can deal with the borderline cases by using such phrases as
“very small city” or “quite a large town.” It will not make much difference
which phrase we use on most occasions. Yet it is not hard to imagine a situa-
tion in which it might make a difference whether a center of population is a
city or not. As a city, it might be eligible for development funds that are not
available to towns. Here a precising definition—a definition that draws a
sharp boundary where none formerly existed—would be useful.

Precising definitions are, in effect, combinations of stipulative definitions
and dictionary definitions. Like stipulative definitions, they involve a choice.
One could define a city as any population center with more than 50,000 peo-
ple, or one could decide to decrease the minimum to 30,000 people. Precising
definitions are not completely arbitrary, however, because they usually
should conform to the generally accepted meaning of a term. It would be un-
reasonable to define a city as any population center with more than seven-
teen people. Dictionary definitions, thus, set limits to precising definitions.

Precising definitions are also not arbitrary in another way: There can be
good reasons to prefer one precising definition over another, when adopting
the preferred definition will have better effects than the alternative. If devel-
opment funds are to be distributed only to cities, then to define cities as hav-
ing more than 50,000 people will deny those funds to smaller population
centers with, say, 10,000 people. Consequently, we need some reason to re-
solve the vagueness of the term “city” in one way rather than another. In this
case, the choice might be based on the amount of funds available for devel-
opment. In a more dramatic example, a precising definition of “death” might
be used to resolve controversial issues about euthanasia—about what doc-
tors may or must do to patients who are near death—and then our choices
between possible precising definitions might be based on our deepest value
commitments. In any case, we need some argument to show that one precis-
ing definition is better than other alternatives.

346

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

Such arguments often leave some leeway. Even if one can justify defining
cities as having a minimum of 50,000 people instead of 10,000, one’s reason
is not likely to justify a cutoff at 50,000 as opposed to 49,000. A different kind
of defense would be needed if someone used a slippery-slope argument to
show that it is unfair to provide development funds to one city with 50,000
people but to deny such funds to its neighbor with only 49,000 people.
Against this kind of charge, the only way to defend a precising definition
might be to show that some precising definition is needed, the cutoff should
lie inside a certain general area, one’s preferred definition does lie within
that area, and no alternative is any better. Such responses might also apply
to nearby alternatives, but they are still sometimes enough to support a pre-
cising definition. If responses like these are not available, then a precising
definition can be criticized as unjustified.

5. Systematic or theoretical definitions are introduced to give a systematic
order or structure to a subject matter. For example, in geometry, every term
must be either a primitive (undefined) term or a term defined by means of
these primitive terms. Thus, if we take points and distances as primitives, we
can define a straight line as the shortest distance between two points. Then,
assuming some more concepts, we can define a triangle as a closed figure
with exactly three straight lines as sides. By a series of such definitions, the
terms in geometry are placed in systematic relationships with one another.

In a similar way, we might try to represent family relationships using
only the primitive notions of parent, male, and female. We could then con-
struct definitions of the following kind:

“A is the brother of B.” = “A and B have the same parents and A is male.”

“A is B’s grandmother.” = “A is a parent of a parent of B and A is female.”4

Things become more complicated when we try to define such notions as
“second cousin once removed” or “stepfather.” Yet, by extending some basic
definitions from simple to more complicated cases, all family relationships
can be given a systematic presentation.

Formulating systematic definitions for family relationships is relatively
easy, but similar activities in science, mathematics, and other fields can de-
mand genius. It often takes deep insight into a subject to see which concepts
are genuinely fundamental and which are secondary and derivative. When
Sir Isaac Newton defined force in terms of mass and acceleration, he was not
simply stating how he proposed to use certain words; he was introducing a
fundamental conceptual relationship that improved our understanding of
the physical world.

Such theoretical definitions can be evaluated on the basis of whether they
really do help us formulate better theories and understand the world. Evalu-
ating theoretical definitions often requires a great deal of empirical investiga-
tion. When water was defined as H2O,5 this made it possible to formulate
more precise laws about how water interacted with other chemicals. Other
alternatives were available. Whereas molecules count as H2O, and hence as

347

Def in it ions

water, even if they contain unusual isotopes of hydrogen and oxygen,
chemists could define water so that it would have to contain only the most
common isotopes of hydrogen and oxygen. Why don’t they? Because they
discovered that differences among isotopes generally do not affect how mole-
cules of H2O react with other chemicals. As a result, the simplest and most
useful generalizations about the properties of water can be formulated in
terms of H2O without regard to certain isotopes of hydrogen and oxygen. This
illustrates one way in which choosing one theoretical definition over another
can lead to a better theory.

Definitions can play important roles in the presentation of arguments, but
demands for definitions can also hinder the progress of an argument. In the
middle of discussions people often ask for definitions or even state, usually
with an air of triumph, that everything depends on the way you define your
terms. We saw in Chapter 2 that definitions are not always needed, and most
issues do not turn on the way in which words are defined. When asked for a
definition, it is appropriate to reply: “What sort of definition do you want,
and why do you want it?” Of course, if you are using a word in a way that
departs from customary usage, or using it in some special way of your own,
or using a word that is too vague for the given context, or using a word in
an ambiguous way, then the request for a definition is perfectly in order. In
such cases, the demand for a definition represents an important move
within the argument rather than a distraction from it.

Look up lexical or dictionary definitions for the following words. (For fun, you
might try to guess the meanings of these words before you look them up, as in
the game “Balderdash.”)

1. jejune

2. ketone

3. fluvial

4. xebec

5. plangent

EXERCISE V

1. Give a stipulative definition for the word “klurg.”

2. Stipulate a word to stand for the chunks of ice that form under car fenders
in winter.

3. Describe something that does not have a common name, for which it would
be useful to stipulate a name. Explain how the name would be useful.

EXERCISE VI

348

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

Give precising definitions for the following words. In each case, supply a con-
text that gives your precising definition a point.

1. book

2. alcoholic beverage

3. crime

4. warm

5. fast

EXERCISE VII

Give disambiguating definitions for the following words. In each case, supply
a context in which your definition might be needed to avoid confusion.

1. run

2. pen

3. game

4. painting

5. fast

EXERCISE VIII

Using the notions of parents, male, and female as basic, give systematic defini-
tions of the following family relationships:

1. A and B are sisters.

2. A and B are siblings.

3. A is B’s half-brother.

4. A is B’s niece.

5. A is B’s cousin.

EXERCISE IX

1. The United States federal criminal prohibition against torture (18 U.S.C.
§§ 2340-2340A) prohibits conduct “specifically intended to inflict severe
physical or mental pain or suffering.” On August 1, 2002, the United
States attorney general’s office issued a statement that “severe” pain
under the statute was limited to pain “equivalent in intensity to the pain

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

349

Def in it ions

accompanying serious physical injury, such as organ failure, impairment
of bodily function, or even death.” (This interpretation was withdrawn in
2004.) What kind of a definition is this? Is it justified or not? What does
this controversy show about the nature and importance of definitions?

2. The definition of “sexual relations” was crucial to the issue of whether
President Bill Clinton committed perjury. Find and distinguish the various
definitions of “sexual relations” at play in the following selection from
President Clinton’s testimony before the independent counsel, Kenneth
Starr, on August 17, 1998.6 In your opinion, does either President Clinton
or the lawyers who are questioning him use definitions improperly? Why
or why not?

Q: (BY MR. BITTMAN): Mr. President, were you physically intimate with
Monica Lewinsky? . . .

A: (BY PRESIDENT CLINTON): When I was alone with Ms. Lewinsky on
certain occasions in early 1996 and once in early 1997, I engaged in con-
duct that was wrong. These encounters did not consist of sexual inter-
course. They did not constitute sexual relations as I understood that term
to be defined at my January 17th, 1998 deposition. . . .

Q: Let us then move to the definition that was provided you during your
deposition. We will have that marked as Grand Jury Exhibit WJC-2. . . .

[Definition of Sexual Relations] For the purposes of this deposition, a person
engages in “sexual relations” when the person knowingly engages in or
causes—(1) contact with the genitalia, anus, groin, breast, inner thigh, or but-
tocks of any person with an intent to arouse or gratify the sexual desire of
any person; (2) contact between any part of the person’s body or an object
and the genitals or anus of another person; or (3) contact between the geni-
tals or anus of the person and any part of another person’s body. “Contact”
means intentional touching, either directly or through clothing.

. . . I’m sure you remember from the deposition that paragraph (1) of the

definition remained in effect. Judge Wright ruled that that was to be the

guiding definition, and that paragraphs (2) and (3) were stricken. . . . I

suppose, since you have now read portions of the transcript again, that

you were reminded that you did not ask for any clarification of the

terms. Is that correct? Of the definition?

A: No, sir. I thought it was . . . a rather strange definition. But it was the
one the Judge decided on and I was bound by it. So, I took it. . . .

Q: And you remember that Ms. Lewinsky’s affidavit said that she had had

no sexual relationship with you. Do you remember that?

A: I do.

Q: And do you remember in the deposition that Mr. Bennett asked you . . .

whether the statement that Ms. Lewinsky made in her affidavit was . . .

true. And you indicated that it was absolutely correct.
(continued)

350

CHAPTER 14 ■ Fallac ies of Amb igu ity

A: I did. . . . I believe at the time that she filled out this affidavit, if she be-

lieved that the definition of sexual relationship was two people having

intercourse, then this is accurate. And I believe that is the definition that

most ordinary Americans would give it. If you said Jane and Harry have

a sexual relationship, and you’re not talking about people being drawn

into a lawsuit and being given definitions, and then a great effort to

trick them in some way, but you are just talking about people in ordi-

nary conversations, I’ll bet the grand jurors, if they were talking about

two people they know, and said they have a sexual relationship, they

meant they were sleeping together; they meant they were having inter-

course together. So, I’m not at all sure that this affidavit is not true and

was not true in Ms. Lewinsky’s mind at the time she swore it out. . . .

Q: (BY MR. WISENBERG): Mr. President, I want to, before I go into a new

subject area, briefly go over something you were talking about with

Mr. Bittman. The statement of your attorney, Mr. Bennett, at the Paula

Jones deposition, “Counsel is fully aware . . . that Ms. Lewinsky has

filed, has an affidavit which they are in possession of saying that there

is absolutely no sex of any kind in any manner, shape or form, with

President Clinton.” That statement is made by your attorney in front of

Judge Susan Webber Wright, correct?

A: That’s correct.

Q: That statement is a completely false statement. Whether or not Mr. Bennett

knew of your relationship with Ms. Lewinsky, the statement that there

was “no sex of any kind in any manner, shape or form, with President

Clinton,” was an utterly false statement. Is that correct?

A: It depends on what the meaning of the word “is” is. If . . . “is” means is

and never has been, . . . that is one thing. If it means there is none, that

was a completely true statement. . . .

Q: I just want to make sure I understand, Mr. President. Do you mean to-

day that because you were not engaging in sexual activity with Ms.

Lewinsky during the deposition that the statement of Mr. Bennett might

be literally true?

A: No, sir. I mean that at the time of the deposition, it had been—that was

well beyond any point of improper contact between me and Ms. Lewinsky.

So that anyone generally speaking in the present tense, saying there is

not an improper relationship, would be telling the truth if that person

said there was not, in the present tense; the present tense encompassing

many months. That’s what I meant by that. . . .

Q: If Monica Lewinsky has stated that her affidavit that she didn’t have a sex-

ual relationship with you is, in fact, a lie, I take it you disagree with that?

A: No. I told you before what I thought the issue was there. I think the issue

is how do you define sexual relationship. And there was no definition

351

Def in it ions

NOTES
1 Stephen Colbert, I Am America (And So Can You!) (New York: Grand Central Publishing, 2007), 201.

2 Thomas E. Hill Jr., “The Message of Affirmative Action,” in Autonomy and Self-Respect, ed.
Thomas E. Hill Jr., 193–94 (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991).

3 Burton Leiser, “Homosexuality and Natural Law,” in Liberty, Justice and Morals, 3rd ed., 52–57
(New York: Macmillan, 1986).

4 Notice that in these definitions an individual word is not defined in isolation. Instead, a whole
sentence containing the word is replaced by another whole sentence in which the defined word
does not appear. Definitions of this kind are called “contextual definitions” because a context
containing the word is the unit of definition. Dictionary, disambiguating, stipulative, and pre-
cising definitions can also be presented in this contextual form.

5 If you doubt that the identity “Water is H2O” is used as a definition, just consider how you
would react to someone who claims to have discovered some water that is not H2O. We would
dismiss this person as linguistically confused, as the discovered stuff cannot properly be called
“water” if it is not H2O.

6 Reprinted in Kenneth Starr, Appendices to the Referral . . . by the Office of the Independent Coun-
sel . . . (House Document 105-311) (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1998),
393, 460–61, 464, 466, 469–70, 472–74, 509–10, 571–72, 601–2.

imposed on her at the time she executed the affidavit. Therefore, she was

free to give it any reasonable meaning. . . .

Q: Well, the grand jury would like to know, Mr. President, why it is that

you think that oral sex performed on you does not fall within the defini-

tion of sexual relations as used in your deposition.

A: Because that is—if the deponent is the person who has oral sex per-

formed on him, then the contact is with—not with anything on that list,

but with the lips of another person. It seems to be self-evident that that’s

what it is. And I thought it was curious. . . .

This page intentionally left blank

FALLACIES OF RELEVANCE

This chapter will consider a different kind of defect in arguments. Fallacies of

relevance arise when a premise, true or not, is not adequately related to the conclu-

sion. Such irrelevance comes in endless varieties, but we will focus on two of the most

common forms: arguments ad hominem and appeals to authority. Arguments

of these kinds are not always fallacious, so we will discuss various factors that

determine when such arguments are defective and when they are not.

RELEVANCE

In a good argument, we present statements that are true in order to offer
support for some conclusion. One way to depart from this ideal is to state
things that are true themselves, but have no bearing on the truth of the
conclusion.

We might wonder why irrelevant remarks can have any influence at all.
The answer is that we generally assume that a person’s remarks are relevant,
for this is one of the conditions for smooth and successful conversation (as
Grice pointed out in his rule of Relevance, discussed in Chapter 2). That it is
possible to exploit people by violating this natural assumption is shown in
the following passage from The Catcher in the Rye.

The new elevator boy was sort of on the stupid side. I told him, in this very

casual voice, to take me up the Dicksteins’. . . .

He had the elevator doors all shut and all, and was all set to take me up, and

then he turned around and said, “They ain’t in. They’re at a party on the

fourteenth floor.”

“That’s all right,” I said. “I’m supposed to wait for them. I’m their nephew.”

He gave me this sort of stupid, suspicious look. “You better wait in the lobby,

fella,” he said.

“I’d like to—I really would,” I said. “But I have a bad leg. I have to hold it in a

certain position. I think I’d better sit down in the chair outside their door.”

He didn’t know what the hell I was talking about, so all he said was “oh” and

took me up. Not bad, boy. It’s funny. All you have to do is say something nobody

understands and they’ll do practically anything you want them to.1

15

353

354

CHAPTER 15 ■ Fallac ies of Relevance

It is clear what is going on here. When you offer something as a reason, it is
conversationally implied that there is some connection between it and the
thing you are arguing for. In most cases, the connection is obvious, and there
is no need to spell it out. In other cases, the connection is not obvious, but in
the spirit of cooperation others are willing to assume that the connection ex-
ists. In the present case, there seems to be no connection between having a
bad leg and sitting in one particular chair. Why, then, does the elevator op-
erator not challenge this statement? Part of the reason is that it is not easy to
challenge what people say; among other things, it is not polite. But polite-
ness does not seem to hold the elevator operator back; instead, he does not
want to appear stupid. The person who offers a reason conversationally im-
plies a connection, and we do not like to admit that we fail to see this con-
nection. This combination of generosity and fear of looking stupid leads us
to accept all sorts of irrelevant statements as reasons.

Fallacies of relevance are surprisingly common in everyday life. People
often introduce irrelevant details or tangents in order to mislead by divert-
ing attention from the real issue. The irrelevant distraction is sometimes de-
scribed as a red herring (after a man who dragged a red herring across his
trail in order to throw pursuing hounds off his scent). The best strategy for
dealing with such tricks is simply to cross out all irrelevant claims and then
see what is left. Sometimes nothing is left.

On the other hand, we should not be heavy-handed in making charges of
irrelevance. Sometimes the occurrence of irrelevance is innocent; good argu-
ments often contain irrelevant asides. More important, relevance is often se-
cured by way of a conversational implication, so we really have to know
what is going on in a given context to decide whether a remark is relevant
or not. We can illustrate this last point by examining two kinds of arguments
that often involve fallacies of irrelevance: arguments ad hominem and appeals
to authority.

AD HOMINEM ARGUMENTS

Literally, an argument ad hominem is an argument directed against a person
who is making a claim rather than against that person’s claim or argument for
it. On the face of it, this move seems to involve irrelevance, for the character or
social position or status of a person should have nothing to do with the truth
of what that person says or with the soundness or strength of that person’s
arguments. Even when protesters dress shabbily or fail to bathe, their clothing
and hygiene show nothing about the legitimacy of their protest. A speaker’s
ethnicity, race, sex, or sexual orientation almost never give us any good reason
to challenge the truth of what that person says or the soundness of his or her
argument. And the fact that a judge was appointed by a Democrat (or Republi-
can) does not show that the judge’s legal decisions are incorrect or unfounded.
Ad hominem fallacies very often deal in such irrelevant personal characteris-
tics. They are often introduced just to distract us from the real point at issue.

355

Ad Hominem Arguments

In rare and unusual cases, however, a speaker’s character or position
is a reason to doubt the truth of what he says. Suppose that Lucy is
suspected of committing murder, but Louie testifies that he was with her
at the time of the murder. Then the prosecution shows that Louie pro-
vided a similar alibi for an accused murderer at ten trials in the past year,
and every time he was found to have lied in exchange for money. Louie
never testifies without being paid, he says whatever he is paid to say, and
people do not hire him if they have any better defense. This background
about Louie provides some reason to believe that what Louie said was
false—that he was not with Lucy at the time of the murder. Lucy still
might not have committed the murder, but we can’t take Louie’s word for
it. Ad hominem arguments like this can be called deniers, since they deny
the truth of what is said or the strength or soundness of an argument.
Although most ad hominem deniers are fallacious, the case of Louie
shows that a few are not.

A different kind of ad hominem argument questions a person’s right to
make a claim or present an argument. Imagine that the Senate is debating
tax rates. During one session, Tad stands up and argues for a reduction in
taxes. Tad can be criticized if he is not a senator, because then he lacks the
status that confers the right to speak in this setting. Even outside of any for-
mal institution, if a neighbor tells someone that she ought to take her chil-
dren to a certain church, the mother might respond, “Mind your own
business, you busybody.” Responses like this can be called silencers, because
they revoke the right to speak without necessarily denying the truth of what
is said.

A third variety of ad hominem argument is more subtle. Consider the fol-
lowing exchange:

Norm: The cold war is over, and bad relations between Cuba and the
United States hurt both countries, so it is time for the United States to
develop normal relations with Cuba.

Cliff: Yeah, so you can make a bundle importing cigars from those
commies.

Cliff’s reply is an attack on the motives of Norm and not on the truth of
what Norm said. Nor is Cliff denying that Norm has a right to speak. Yet the
remark is not without some relevance—it is not off the wall. In a conversa-
tional exchange, we rely on the integrity of the person who is speaking, and
when we have reasons to believe that the person’s integrity is questionable,
we sometimes say so. This is the significance of Cliff’s remark. Cliff points
to a fact that gives some reason for us not to trust Norm’s integrity in a dis-
cussion of the United States’ relations with Cuba.

Cliff’s attack might or might not be justified. If the only reason why Norm
favors normal relations between the United States and Cuba is that this
would enable Norm to make more money, then Cliff’s ad hominem attack is
well founded. But if Norm’s real reason for saying what he does is that he
honestly believes that normal relations would be beneficial both to the

356

CHAPTER 15 ■ Fallac ies of Relevance

United States and to Cuba, then Norm’s position does not depend on any
lack of integrity. In that case, Cliff’s attack is not well founded, even if it so
happens that Norm would profit from normal relations.

Whether justified or not, ad hominem arguments of this third variety can
be called dismissers, because they dismiss the speaker as untrustworthy and
unreliable. Their point is not to deny the truth of the claim or the speaker’s
right to say it. Instead, a dismisser is supposed to show why the fact that this
speaker supports a claim is not a good reason to believe that claim (or to
deny it, for that matter).

These three variations are all ad hominem arguments because they start
from premises about the person’s character or status. Where they differ is in
their conclusions: Deniers conclude that a claim is untrue or that an argu-
ment is unsound or weak. Silencers conclude that someone lacks the right to
speak in a certain context. Dismissers conclude that someone is untrustwor-
thy or unreliable. Each can be either justified or unjustified, so there are six
kinds that can be diagrammed like this:

Ad Hominem Arguments Justified Not Justified

Deniers Louie, the hired perjurer Shabby protesters
Silencers Tad if he is not a senator Tad if he is a senator
Dismissers Cliff’s reply if Norm Cliff’s reply if Norm

lacks integrity does not lack integrity

What logicians usually call ad hominem fallacies are unjustified deniers.
Even when the premises of such an argument are true, they are irrelevant to
the conclusion. That makes them fallacies of relevance. Once you get used to
spotting ad hominem fallacies, they seem common and obvious.

When assessing an ad hominem argument, the first step is to determine
whether its conclusion is about someone’s right to speak, about someone’s
reliability, or about the truth, soundness, or strength of what is claimed. The
second step is to determine whether its premises provide adequate justifica-
tion for its conclusion. These steps will enable you to place the argument in
the above table, but they will often not be easy or obvious. Although perjur-
ers for hire almost always lie, most people exhibit some middling degree of
reliability. When people are known for passing on rumors without checking
their truth, this might be a reason to doubt what they say when they pass on
yet another rumor (even if it is not a reason to believe that what they say is
false). In assessing what they say, it would be best to look for additional evi-
dence. If none is available, then we need to ask how often their testimony is
true on matters of this kind. Only by careful inspection of individual cases
can we determine the strength of such ad hominem arguments.

A related case occurs when someone is accused of inconsistency over
time. If your neighbor says that the best time to prune roses is in the au-
tumn, but then the next spring she tells you that the spring is the best time
to prune roses, this inconsistency would give you some reason to doubt her
expertise as a gardener. Maybe over the winter she got new information that

357

Ad Hominem Arguments

changed her mind, but her reliability is in question until you have some ex-
planation of why she would say different things at different times. If she wa-
vers between contrary positions, no more than half of her views can be
correct, so you have reason to ask your neighbor, “Why should I trust you?”

What she is saying now still might be correct. Maybe spring is the right
time to prune roses. Moreover, if she gave an argument for her claim (such as
that pruned roses grow back more quickly in the spring, and it is better to
prune roses when they grow back more quickly), then that argument still
might be sound. Her current claim and argument do not depend on what she
said last fall. For this reason, it is normally a fallacy to reject people’s views
on the basis of an inconsistency with their views at other times. Their current
positions need to be assessed as they stand now. (Whether we want political
leaders whose views blow with the wind is, of course, another issue.)

A different kind of inconsistency occurs in the traditional fallacy called tu
quoque, a Latin term that means “you are another.” When a parent tells a child
to quit smoking, the child might respond, “Look who’s talking. You’ve been
smoking for years. If it’s so bad, why don’t you stop?” The force of this
charge might be just that the parent is hypocritical or that one has no right to
criticize others for doing something that one does oneself. If that is the point,
this response is a silencer, and it might or might not be justified. In any case,
the parent’s smoking does not give any reason at all to conclude that smok-
ing is not bad. To use a tu quoque argument to reach that conclusion would be
an unjustified denier (and an ad hominem fallacy). Even hypocrites can make
true claims and give good arguments. Thus, to show that someone’s claims
and arguments are defective, one normally needs to look at those claims and
arguments themselves, not at the behavior of the speaker.

Instead of citing past beliefs or acts of a speaker, some ad hominem argu-
ments aim at the source or origin of the speaker’s belief. Stephen Colbert, for
example, dismisses scientists by explaining how they got caught up in sci-
ence: “They’re physically awkward and lonely, so they spent their adoles-
cence down by the creek studying the creatures that live there. ‘I may be
ridiculed at school,’ they think, ‘but a crawfish would never judge me.’”2

This parody, of course, is supposed to show how silly it is to reject science
because of its origin (even if this origin were plausible). When its origin is
irrelevant to the truth of a claim, such arguments commit what is called the
genetic fallacy. Whole movements are sometimes accused of genetic fallacies.
Marxists often reject opposing views because those views arose under capi-
talism. Freudians sometimes dismiss critics on the basis of how those critics
were raised as children. Usually, the same kind of argument is available to
their opponents as well. Critics of Freud sometimes cite his childhood and
training to explain away his views. The fact that genetic arguments can be
used just as well for contrary conclusions suggests that they do not really
support either side.

The problem with genetic arguments is that lots of good ideas have ques-
tionable origins. Much mathematics originated within Pythagorean cults.
Gravity and much of chemical theory were first discussed by alchemists

358

CHAPTER 15 ■ Fallac ies of Relevance

who were trying to turn lead into gold. The structure of the benzene ring is
reported to have come to Kekule von Stradonitz in a dream about a snake
biting its tail. Early religions were close to magic and were used by rich and
powerful leaders to control their subordinates. In all of these cases, the ori-
gin of the ideas cannot be used to refute those views or the arguments for
them. Learning the genesis of an idea can help improve one’s understand-
ing of its content and of the process of discovery. Origins sometimes indicate
where to look for evidence or for objections. Still, to evaluate an idea or an
argument, one should focus on that idea or argument, not on its origin.

For each of the following arguments, indicate whether it involves (1) an ad
hominem denier against a speaker’s claim or argument, (2) an ad hominem si-
lencer against a person’s right to speak, (3) an ad hominem dismisser against
someone’s trustworthiness, or (4) none of these. Explain your answer. Be sure
to focus on what is explicitly said and not on what might be conversationally
implied in each example.

Example: Sure, Sara says she saw me cheat in the game, but Sara’s stupid,
so you shouldn’t pay any attention to her.

Answer: This is an ad hominem dismisser, since the point is that Sara is
unreliable. The speaker does not deny what Sara says or that she
has a right to say it.

1. Sure, Sadie says she saw me cheat, but it was very dark, and her vision is
horrible, so she must have seen something else and thought it was me
cheating.

2. Sure, Sam says he saw me cheat, but the only reason he says it is that he
wants to win the game. He’s a real jerk.

3. Sure, Steve says she saw me cheat, but he wasn’t even playing the game.
It’s not his place to accuse those of us who were playing.

4. Sure, Sybill says she saw me cheat, but I didn’t even take the exam, so I
couldn’t have cheated on it.

5. Sure, Sally says she saw me cheat, but she accuses everyone, and she’s al-
most always wrong, so you should know that she is wrong this time, too.

EXERCISE I

Explain the point of each of the following remarks. Indicate whether each
remark involves an ad hominem silencer, dismisser, denier, or none of these.
Then say whether the argument provides an adequate justification for its con-
clusion, and why or why not.

1. The American Tobacco Company has argued for years that smoking is not
really unhealthy, but what would you expect the company to say? It would
take the same position regardless of any evidence, so I can’t trust them.

EXERCISE II

359

Ad Hominem Arguments

2. The Joint Chiefs of Staff argue that the U.S. government needs to increase
its military budget, but an opponent responds, “Well, of course, they will
want as much money as they can get for their departments. They always
ask for more money even though most of the time they don’t really need
it. So this time, again, they probably don’t need it.”

3. After Congress passes a military draft during a war, an opponent says, “If
members of Congress were eligible for the draft, they would not vote for
it. So we must not really need a draft.”

4. Of course, the party in power is opposed to term limits. That’s just
because they want to stay in power.

5. The main opposition to tax reductions comes from people who depend on
government programs funded by taxes, so they can hardly be impartial,
but only those who are impartial should be allowed to speak on such a
crucial issue for our whole country.

6. The main support for tax reductions comes from people who pay taxes, so
their views can’t be a reliable indicator of what the best policy is.

7. Very few citizens have studied the entire tax code, and nobody
understands the effect of taxes on the economy, so we have little reason to
believe them when they say that present tax policies will destroy the
economy.

8. An economist cites recent trends in sales of raw materials as evidence of
an upturn in the economy, and then a critic, who doubts the economist’s
prediction, responds, “If you’re so smart, why ain’t you rich?”

9. As a criticism of pro-choice activists, Ronald Reagan said, “I’ve noticed
that everybody who is for abortion has already been born.”

10. Attacking male opponents of abortion, a feminist claims, “Most
opponents of abortion are men.”

11. When a member of a fraternity argued for co-ed houses in place of frater-
nities, a critic responded, “When he quits his fraternity in protest and
joins a co-ed house, then he will earn the right to criticize us.”

12. When Fred argues at a fraternity meeting that his house should admit
women, another member announces, “Let me remind you all that Fred
held exactly the opposite position last year.”

13. Let he who is without sin among you cast the first stone. (John 8:7)

1. In a heated discussion, people will sometimes ask an opponent, “Why are
you being so defensive?” This is obviously a rhetorical question. What is the
point of this question? Does it implicitly involve an ad hominem fallacy?

2. In the biblical story of Job, Job is described as a person who “was
blameless and upright, one who feared God and turned away from evil”
(Job 1:1). Satan challenges God to allow him to subject Job to the worst

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

(continued)

360

CHAPTER 15 ■ Fallac ies of Relevance

calamities to see if Job’s faith will remain unchanged. After the most
extreme misfortunes, Job finally cries out and asks why he should be made
to suffer so (Job 38:1–4):

Then the Lord answered Job out of the whirlwind:
Who is this that darkens counsel by words without knowledge?
Gird up your loins like a man.
I will question you, and you shall declare to me.
Where were you when I laid the foundation of the earth?
Tell me, if you have understanding.

Does God’s response to Job involve an ad hominem silencer, dismisser, or
denier? Is it justified? Why or why not?

3. Nietzsche is often accused of committing the genetic fallacy when he uses
speculation about the origin of Christian moral beliefs as part of his cri-
tique of what he called slave morality. In your opinion, does Nietzsche
commit a genetic fallacy in the following passage? Why or why not? Can
the origin of a moral belief ever show that that moral belief is false or
unjustified or indefensible? Why or why not?

Let us articulate this new demand: we need a critique of moral values, the value of
these values themselves must first be called into question—and for that there is
needed a knowledge of the conditions and circumstances in which they grew, un-
der which they evolved and changed, . . . a knowledge of a kind that has never yet
existed or even been desired. One has taken the value of these “values” as given, as
factual, as beyond all question; one has hitherto never doubted or hesitated in the
slightest degree in supposing “the good man” to be of greater value than “the evil
man,” of greater value in the sense of furthering the advancement and prosperity
of man in general (the future of man included). But what if the reverse were true?
What if a symptom of regression were inherent in the “good,” likewise a danger, a
seduction, a poison, a narcotic, through which the present was possibly living at the
expense of the future? Perhaps more comfortably, less dangerously, but at the same
time in a meaner style, more basely?—So that precisely morality would be to blame
if the highest power and splendor actually possible to the type man was never in
fact attained? So that precisely morality was the danger of dangers?3

APPEALS TO AUTHORITY

Often in the midst of an argument, we cite an authority to back up what we
say. As we saw in Chapter 3, this is a standard way of offering assurances.
In citing an authority, instead of giving reasons for what we say, we indicate
that someone (the authority cited) could give them.

Although logicians sometimes speak of the fallacy of appealing to author-
ities, there is often nothing wrong with citing authorities or experts to sup-
port what we say. An authority is a person or institution with a privileged
position concerning certain information. Through training, a doctor is an ex-
pert on certain diseases. A person who works in the Department of Agricul-
ture can be an expert on America’s soybean production. Someone who grew

361

Appeals to Author ity

up in the swamps might be an expert on trapping muskrats. Because some
people stand in a better position to know things than others, there is noth-
ing improper about citing them as authorities. In fact, an appeal to experts
and authorities is essential if we are to make up our minds on subjects out-
side our own range of competence.

At the same time, appeals to authority can be abused, and there are some
obvious questions we should ask whenever such an appeal is made. Most
obviously, we should always ask whether the person cited is, in fact, an au-
thority at all. Moreover, it is not enough to be an authority in some area or
other. We need to ask whether the person cited is an authority in the partic-
ular area under discussion. If the answer to this question is “No,” then we
are dealing with a fallacy of relevance. For example, being a movie star does
not qualify a person to speak on the merits of a particular brand of tooth-
paste. Endorsements by athletes of hair creams, deodorants, beer, and auto-
mobiles are in the same boat. Of course, we have to be careful in making this
charge. It is possible that certain athletes make systematic studies of deodor-
ants before giving one deodorant their endorsement. But it is not likely.

Most people realize that athletes, movie stars, and the like are featured in
advertisements primarily to attract attention and not because they are ex-
perts concerning the products they are endorsing. It is more surprising how
often the wrong authorities are brought in to judge serious matters. To cite
one example, Uri Geller had little difficulty convincing a group of distin-
guished British scientists that he possessed psychic powers. In particular, he
was able to convince them that he could bend spoons by mental powers
alone. In contrast, James Randi, a professional magician, had little difficulty
detecting and duplicating the tricks that bamboozled the scientific ob-
servers. The remarkable feature of this case was not that a group of scientists
could be fooled by a magician, but rather that these scientists assumed that
they had the expertise necessary to decide whether a paranormal phenome-
non had taken place or not. After all, the most obvious explanation of
Geller’s feats was that he had somehow cheated. To test this possibility,
what was needed was not a scientist with impeccable scholarly credentials,
but a magician who could do the same tricks himself and therefore knew
what to look for.4

It is, of course, difficult to decide whether someone is an expert in a field
when you yourself are not, but certain clues will help you make this deci-
sion. If the supposed authority claims to have knowledge of things that he
or she could not possibly possess (for example, about private conversations
the person could not have heard), then you have little reason to trust other
things that person has to say. You know that he or she has no qualms about
making things up. Furthermore, it is often possible to spot-check certain
claims in order to make sure that they are correct. It may take one expert to
determine another, but it often takes little more than good common sense
and an unwillingness to be fooled to detect a fraud.

Even when it is clear that the person cited is an expert in the appropriate
field, we can still ask whether the question is of the kind that can now be

362

CHAPTER 15 ■ Fallac ies of Relevance

settled by an appeal to experts. One sign that a question cannot yet be set-
tled by experts is that experts in that area do not agree with each other. It
does not do much good to cite one authority in support of a claim if another
authority with just as much expertise would endorse the opposite claim.
Moreover, even the best experts sometimes simply get things wrong. For ex-
ample, in 1932 Albert Einstein, who was surely an expert in the field, de-
clared, “There is not the slightest indication that [nuclear] energy will ever
be obtainable. It would mean that the atom would have to be shattered at
will.” Just a year later, the atom was, in fact, split. Even so, a leading British
physicist, Ernest Lord Rutherford, insisted that the splitting of the atom
would not lead to the development of nuclear power, saying, “The energy
produced by the atom is a very poor kind of thing. Anyone who expects a
source of power from the transformation of these atoms is talking moon-
shine.”5 Given the knowledge available at the time, both Einstein and
Rutherford may have been justified in their claims, but their assertions were,
after all, more speculations than scientifically supported statements of fact.
The lesson to be learned from this is that the best experts are sometimes fal-
lible, and become more fallible when they go beyond established facts in
their discipline to speculate about the future.

Although the next question may seem obvious, we often forget to ask
whether the authority has been cited correctly. When a person cites an au-
thority, he or she is making a factual claim that so-and-so holds some partic-
ular view. Sometimes the claim is false. If someone told you, “According to
medical authorities, the rash from poison ivy is contagious when it is oozing,”
you would probably believe it. In fact, the citation is incorrect. According to
medical authorities, the rash from poison ivy is never contagious. Yet many
people hold that it is contagious, and they think that they have medical opin-
ion on their side. It is hard to deal with people who cite authorities incorrectly,
for we do not carry an almanac or encyclopedia around with us. Yet, again, it
is a good idea to spot-check appeals to authority, for people often twist au-
thorities to support their own opinions.

It is also worth asking whether the authority cited can be trusted to tell
the truth. To put this more bluntly, we should ask whether a particular au-
thority has any good reason to lie or misrepresent facts. Presumably, the of-
ficials who know most about food production in China will be the heads of
the various agricultural bureaus. But it would be utterly naive to take their
reports at face value. Inadequate agricultural production has been a stand-
ing embarrassment of the Chinese economy. As a consequence, there is pres-
sure at every level to make things look as good as possible. Even if the state
officials were inclined to tell the truth, which is a charitable assumption, the
information they receive is probably not very accurate.

Experts also lie because it can bring fame and professional advancement.
Science, sometimes at the highest level, has been embarrassed by problems
of the falsification and misrepresentation of data. Consider the case of Sir Cyril
Burt’s research on the inheritance of intelligence. Burt wanted to show that
there is a significant correlation between the IQs of parents and their children.

363

Appeals to Author ity

The difficulty was to find a way to screen out other influences—for example,
that of home environment. To overcome this, Burt undertook a systematic
study of identical twins who had been separated at birth and raised in vari-
ous social settings. His study revealed a very high correlation between the
IQs of these twins, and that gave strong reason to believe that IQ, to some
significant extent, depends on heredity rather than environment.

Unfortunately, Burt’s data, or at least a significantly large portion of them,
were cooked—that is, made up. It is interesting that Burt’s bogus research
could go unchallenged for so long. It is also interesting how he was finally
unmasked. First, to many his results seemed too good to be true. He claimed
to have found more than fifty identical twins who had been separated at
birth and raised in contrasting environments. Given the rarity of such crea-
tures, that is a very large number to have found. Second, the correlations he
claimed to find were extremely high—indeed, much higher than those usu-
ally found in research in this area. Both of these facts raised suspicions.
Stephen Jay Gould describes Burt’s final undoing as follows:

Princeton psychologist Leon Kamin first noted that, while Burt had increased his
sample of twins from fewer than twenty to more than fifty in a series of publica-
tions, the average correlation between pairs for IQ remained unchanged to the
third decimal place—a statistical situation so unlikely that it matches the vernac-
ular definition of impossible. Then, in 1976, Oliver Gillie, medical correspondent
of the London Sunday Times, elevated the charge from inexcusable carelessness to
conscious fakery. Gillie discovered, among many other things, that Burt’s two
“collaborators” . . . the women who supposedly collected and processed his data,
either never existed at all, or at least could not have been in contact with Burt
while he wrote the papers bearing their names.6

Of course, Burt’s claims still might be correct: genes and IQ might be cor-
related. Nonetheless the point here is just that Burt and his studies should
not be trusted as authorities. Outright fraud of this kind by someone so
prominent is rare, but even a few cases provides a reason for being suspi-
cious of authorities, at least when their results have not been given inde-
pendent confirmation.

One last question we can ask is why the appeal to authority is being made
at all. To cite an authority is to give assurances. As we noticed in Chapter 3,
people usually give assurances to strengthen weak points in their argu-
ments. It is surprising how often we can see what is wrong with an argu-
ment just by noticing where it is backed by appeals to authority. Beyond
this, we should be suspicious of arguments that rely on too many authori-
ties. (We might call this the fallacy of excessive footnotes.) Good arguments
tend to stand on their own.

To summarize, reliance on experts and authorities is unavoidable in our
complicated and specialized world. Yet we still need to be critical of appeals
to authority by asking these questions:

1. Is the cited authority in fact an authority in the appropriate area?

2. Is this the kind of question that can now be settled by expert consensus?

364

CHAPTER 15 ■ Fallac ies of Relevance

3. Has the authority been cited correctly?

4. Can the cited authority be trusted to tell the truth?

5. Why is an appeal to authority being made at all?

If the answers to questions 1–4 are “Yes,” then the appeal to authority is proba-
bly justified. Still, even the best authorities make mistakes, so the conclusion of
any appeal to authority might turn out to be false. We can reduce errors by ap-
pealing to better authorities, but no authority can guarantee the truth.

Answer the five questions in the text about each of the following appeals to
authority, and then decide whether each appeal to authority is legitimate or
fallacious.

1. The surgeon general says that smoking is hazardous to your health, so it is.

2. The surgeon general says that abortion is immoral, so it is.

3. Michael Jordan says that Air Jordan sneakers are springier, so they must
be springier.

4. This must be a great movie, because the billboard says that Time magazine
called it “terrific.”

5. My friend Joe says that this new movie is hilarious, so it must be worth
watching.

6. Ben and Jerry’s ice cream must be the best, because Fat Fred eats more ice
cream than anyone else I know, and he says that Ben and Jerry’s is the best.

7. There must be life on other planets, because many great scientists are
looking for it, so they must think it is there.

8. Lefty Lopez must be the best pitcher of the year, because he won the Cy
Young Award (awarded by the Baseball Writers Association to the best
pitcher of the year).

9. Vanna must be the most beautiful woman in America, because she won
the Miss America contest.

10. There were 250,000 protesters at the rally, because organizers gave that figure.

11. There were 25,000 protesters at the rally, because its opponents said so.

12. True Christians ought to give away all their money, because the Bible says,
“Blessed are the poor.”

EXERCISE III

MORE FALLACIES OF RELEVANCE

Questions like those used to evaluate appeals to authority can also be used
to assess some other common styles of reasoning that are often accused of
being fallacious. Here is one example:

The American people are convinced that, if we get involved in North
Korea, we will be stuck there for a long time. So we shouldn’t invade in
the first place.

365

More Fallac ies of Relevance

This argument, of course, depends on suppressed premises. On one recon-
struction, the argument is that, because Americans fear getting stuck in
North Korea, they oppose American involvement, and a democratic govern-
ment should not do what the people oppose, so we should not get involved
in North Korea. The argument also seems to suggest another reason why
America should not get involved—namely, that if we do, our troops will be
stuck in North Korea. The only reason given for believing this is that lots of
American people believe it. So the argument seems to be that, because so
many Americans believe it, it must be true.

Such an argument is not an appeal to authority, since no person is claimed
to be an authority or an expert. Instead, the argument is an appeal to popular
opinion. When the popular opinion is supposed to have been shared for a
long time, the argument can be called an appeal to tradition. Such arguments
assume that, when many people agree on some issue or agree for a long time,
they are likely to be right. This assumption is often incorrect. An opinion
might be shared by many people just because they all learned it from a com-
mon source, such as television or some prominent politicians. Then the
shared opinion is not reliable unless its source is reliable. Of course, the
shared opinion might be true; America might get stuck in North Korea if it got
involved. But the argument for this conclusion is still fallacious, because the
mere fact that an opinion is widely held is not enough to show that the opin-
ion is true.

Although such appeals to popular opinion are often fallacious, there are
also some areas where popular opinion is evidence of truth. If most people
think that a book is entertaining and easy to understand, then it is entertain-
ing and easy to understand. If most people think that the sky looks blue, this
is evidence that the sky does look blue. Thus, not all appeals to popular
opinion are defective or fallacious.

To determine whether or not a particular appeal to popular opinion is fal-
lacious, we need to ask questions that are much like the questions we asked
about appeals to authority. These include:

1. Is this opinion actually widely held?

2. Is this the kind of area where popular opinion is likely to be right?

3. Why is an appeal to popular opinion being made at all?

Even when superficial examination reveals that an appeal to popular opin-
ion is fallacious, such arguments still seem to convince many people. This
might be because many people want to agree with others so that they will
be popular and will not have to think for themselves.

Other appeals are not to beliefs, but instead to emotions. One common form
of appeal to emotion is an appeal to pity. Defense lawyers often dwell on the sad
circumstances in which a defendant grew up or on how badly the defendant’s
family will be hurt if the defendant goes to prison. Such an appeal to pity
might show that the defendant should not receive the maximum sentence. But
when such an appeal to pity is used to argue that the defendant is not guilty or
should not be found guilty, then the argument is almost always fallacious.

366

CHAPTER 15 ■ Fallac ies of Relevance

Appeals to fear are also common, especially since al Qaeda’s destruction of
the World Trade Center towers in New York on September 11, 2001. After an-
other terrorist attack occurred in London in 2005, television news anchors
and talk-show hosts flashed headlines like “Who’s at risk?”, “Are we next in
America?”, “How safe are we in America?”, “How prepared are we?”, “Can
we prevent a subway or a bus attack in the US?”, and “You have to wonder,
will we ever truly feel safe again?” To be fair, televisions stations asked these
questions because they knew that their audiences wanted answers to those
very questions. A problem arises only when the media stirs up fears and
fails to provide a balanced estimation of the real dangers. Such fearmonger-
ing is parodied in Stephen Colbert’s segment, “The Threat Down,” which
lists more and more outrageous fears. An even more serious problem arises
when politicians use exaggerated fears to gain support for costly policies
that could not be justified by the actual threats that people face. Of course, it
is controversial how much fear and which policies are justified. Democrats
accuse Republicans of distortion when Republicans use fear of terrorism to
justify their counterterrorist policies; Republicans accuse Democrats of ex-
aggeration when Democrats paint a scary picture of the effects of global
warming. Defenders of any particular policy can reply that it really is needed
to ward off peril. Some fears are justified, including some fears of terrorism
and of global warming, of course. Appeals to fear are fallacious only when
they are overdone or exaggerated in order to lead people away from an accu-
rate assessment of the risks that really exist. But this happens all-too often;
so, whenever anyone appeals to fear, we need to ask whether those fears are
being amplified and abused.

Outrage is another emotion that many arguments appeal to. On Day 3 of
the 2004 Republican National Convention, for example, Democratic Senator
Zell Miller proclaimed, “Today’s Democratic leaders see America as an oc-
cupier, not a liberator; and nothing makes this marine madder than some-
one calling American troops occupiers rather than liberators!” This line
drew thunderous applause, even though Miller did not give any reason ei-
ther against calling American troops occupiers or for describing them as lib-
erators. Nonetheless, a receptive audience will tend to assume that, if such
an impressive speaker is that outraged (and if others in the audience share
that outrage), then there must be something terribly objectionable about
whatever the outrage is directed against. To assess such appeals to outrage,
as for other emotions, we need to become aware of these common assump-
tions so that they can be critically evaluated.

Appeals to emotion can also be positive. Many advertisements work by
linking a product to positive feelings. Everyone knows that a car does not be-
come better just because it is displayed in beautiful scenery, but it is amazing
how much the scenery in advertisements can affect people’s inclinations to buy
a certain car. Similarly, advocates of a treaty or government program often
paint pictures of how wonderful life will be if the treaty or program works out
well. Such appeals to emotion might provide some reason to adopt their plan,
but these arguments can be very misleading if it is unlikely that everything will
work out so well and if serious dangers will arise when something goes wrong.

367

More Fallac ies of Relevance

Thus, even when emotional reactions are relevant to some extent, one must be
careful not to let them cloud the other side of the issue.

For each of the following arguments, indicate whether it is an appeal to popular
opinion, an appeal to tradition, or an appeal to emotion. (The argument might
fit into more than one of these categories. If so, explain why.) Then determine
whether it is fallacious, and why.

1. For centuries throughout Europe, women were burned for being witches,
so there must have been lots of witches.

2. There must be life on other planets, because most people think there is. Just
read a few tabloids.

3. Most people who live in the United States think that it is the greatest country
ever, so it must be.

4. There are more Buddhists than followers of any other religion, so there
must be more truth in Buddhism.

5. Incest must be immoral, because people all over the world for many
centuries have seen it as immoral.

6. The Golden Rule is accepted in almost every system of ethics both in the
past and in the present, so there is probably something to it.

7. Chris must not be guilty, because twelve jurors, who saw all the evidence,
agreed on a verdict of not guilty.

8. “Polls show an overwhelming majority of the American people want a lot
less immigration or even an immigration moratorium. . . . These are
persistent results over time. Most of the people cannot be wrong all of the
time!” (from an advertisement placed by Federation for American
Immigration Reform, Atlantic Monthly [June 1995], 67)

EXERCISE IV

NOTES
1 J. D. Salinger, The Catcher in the Rye (New York: Bantam Books, 1951), 157–58.

2 Stephen Colbert, I Am America (and So Can You!) (New York: Grand Central Publishing,
2007), 193.

3 Friedrich Nietzsche, On the Genealogy of Morals, trans. Walter Kaufmann, in Basic Writings of
Nietzsche (New York: Random House, 1968), 456. Nietzsche goes on to argue that (slave) moral-
ity is the danger of dangers, so the reader is supposed to answer the rhetorical questions at the
end of the passage in the affirmative.

4 For an entertaining and instructive account of this case, see James Randi, The Magic of Uri
Geller (New York: Ballantine Books, 1975).

5 Both quotations are from Christopher Cerf and Victor Navasky, The Experts Speak (New York:
Pantheon Books, 1984), 215. This work contains a marvelous collection of false and sometimes
just plain stupid things that have been claimed by experts. One notable example is the remark
made by the Union general John B. Sedgwick just before being fatally shot in the head by a Con-
federate marksman: “They couldn’t hit an elephant at this dist—”(135).

6 Stephen Jay Gould, The Mismeasure of Man (New York: Norton, 1981), 235.

This page intentionally left blank

Fallacies of Vacuity

Arguments are vacuous when they don’t go anywhere. This happens in two main

ways. Sometimes an argument begins by assuming its conclusion or some inde-

pendent reason for its conclusion, so the argument makes no real progress beyond

its own assumptions. In other cases, the argument’s conclusion is empty, so the ar-

gument has nowhere in particular to go. Both kinds of argument are fallacious and

vacuous, so we call them fallacies of vacuity. Circular arguments and arguments

that beg the question fall into this category. So do positions that make themselves

immune to criticism by being self-sealing.

CIRCULARITY

One purpose of arguments is to establish the truth of a claim to someone
who doubts it. In a typical situation, one person, A, makes a claim; another
person, B, raises objections to it; then A tries to find arguments that respond
to the objections and justify the original statement. Schematically:

A asserts that p is true.

B raises objections x, y, and z against it.

A then offers reasons to overcome these objections.

What must A’s responses be like to meet B’s objections? To start with the
simplest case, A cannot meet B’s challenge simply by repeating the original
assertion. If someone is maintaining that terrorists can’t be stopped without
torture, it will not help to offer as a justification for this the very claim that is
in dispute—that terrorists can’t be stopped without torture. The argument
would look like this:

Terrorists can’t be stopped without torture.

Terrorists can’t be stopped without torture.

This argument is, of course, valid, since the premise cannot be true without
the conclusion being true as well. Furthermore, if the premise is true, then
the argument is also sound. All the same, the argument has no force in this
conversational setting because any objection that B has to the conclusion is
straight off an objection to the premise, since they are identical.

16

369

370

CHAPTER 16 ■ Fallac ies of Vacu ity

Unfortunately, people usually do not make it so easy to tell when they
reason in a circle. Often, circular reasoning is disguised by restating the con-
clusion in different words. Someone might argue that terrorists can’t be
stopped without torture, because, if you do not use torture, there is no other
way to stop terrorists. This premise means the same as the conclusion, so
this reasoning is still circular.

Another way to hide circularity is by suppressing the premise that re-
peats the conclusion. (See Chapter 5 on suppressed premises.) Suppose
someone argues that terrorists cannot be stopped without torture, because
they are so callous that their goal is to kill and maim innocent civilians.
This argument depends on the suppressed premise that anyone whose
goal is to kill and maim innocent civilians cannot be stopped without tor-
ture. If terrorists are then defined as people whose goal is to kill and maim
innocent civilians, then this suppressed premise reduces to the conclusion
that terrorists cannot be stopped without torture. So this argument is also
circular.

Yet another trick is to put forward a statement first as a conclusion to
be proved, and then only much later—after several subarguments or
tangents—use the same statement as a premise on its own behalf. Consider
this simple argument:

The only way to prevent terrorists from committing their horrible crimes is to
inflict enough pain on them either to scare them off or to force them to reveal infor-
mation that enables the police to head off terrorist attacks. Because these are the
only methods that work, we cannot reason with them or talk them into giving up.
We cannot make friends or sign a treaty with them. We cannot buy them off or sat-
isfy their demands. Therefore, terrorists cannot be stopped without torture.

If the first sentence is supposed to provide a reason for the next three sen-
tences, then those three sentences cannot later be used as a reason for the last
sentence without the whole argument becoming circular, because the last sen-
tence, “Terrorists can’t be stopped without torture,” means pretty much the
same as the first sentence, “The only way to prevent terrorists . . . is to inflict
enough pain on them. . . .” Although this trick is often harder to detect in a long
and complex argument, such reasoning is still indirectly circular if any premise
in a chain of arguments repeats or restates the eventual conclusion. Thus, we
have circular reasoning if and only if one of the premises that is used directly or
indirectly to support a conclusion is equivalent to the conclusion itself.

BEGGING THE QUESTION

Reasoning in a circle is normally bad reasoning, but it is not easy to say exactly
what is bad about it. The problem with circular reasoning becomes clearer
when we notice that the same basic defect is shared by arguments that are not
circular. Instead of arguing, “Terrorists can’t be stopped without torture, so

371

Begg ing the Quest ion

they can’t,” we could avoid circularity by adding a few words to get this new
argument:

If terrorists can be stopped without torture, then I’m a monkey’s
uncle.
I’m not a monkey’s uncle.

Terrorists can’t be stopped without torture.

This argument is not circular, because neither premise repeats the conclu-
sion. It is also valid, and it might even be sound. Still, it is no good as an ar-
gument for the same reason as “Terrorists can’t be stopped without torture,
so it can’t.” The problem lies in its first premise. The consequent of the first
premise (“I’m a monkey’s uncle”) is obviously false, so that first premise is
false unless its antecedent (“Terrorists can be stopped without torture.”) is
false. But that means that the conclusion must be true in order for the first
premise to be true. Thus, one could not have any reason to believe the first
premise if one did not already have the very same reason to believe the con-
clusion. One’s reason to believe the premise depends on one’s prior belief in
the conclusion or on one’s reason to believe the conclusion. In short, one has
no independent reason for the premise.

This is a problem if the conclusion is disputed and the argument is being
used to get someone who rejects the conclusion to change his or her mind
and accept it. Anyone who rejects the conclusion will simply reject the
premise. For the argument to show someone that he or she ought to accept
the conclusion, the arguer would need an independent reason to believe the
premise. But then that independent reason does all of the real work, and the
argument as stated does nothing to establish the conclusion. It is, in a word,
vacuous.

The point is not just that an opponent would deny the premise. If that
were enough to make an argument fail, then arguments would almost
never succeed. The point is instead that, when an opponent objects to a
premise, the arguer cannot show that the opponent has reason to accept
that premise simply by asserting what the opponent denies. Bare assertion
and reassertion do nothing to overcome objections. To show that the oppo-
nent has reason to accept the premise and, hence, the conclusion, the arguer
needs some independent evidence for the premise. Because there needs to
be—but cannot be—an independent reason for the premise, “If terrorists
can be stopped without torture, then I’m a monkey’s uncle,” the argument
with this premise must beg the question in any normal context.

More generally, we can say that an argument begs the question in a context
if and only if (1) it depends on a premise that is not supported by any rea-
son that is independent of the conclusion, and (2) there is a need for such an
independent reason.

To say that an argument begs the question in this sense is not, of course, to
say that it raises the question. That is what a sports announcer means, for ex-
ample, when she says, “His injury begs the question of whether he will return

372

CHAPTER 16 ■ Fallac ies of Vacu ity

in time for the playoffs.” This common use of the phrase “begs the question”
is separate from the fallacy, but they are not completely unrelated. An argu-
ment can also be seen as begging the question when its context raises the
question of why anyone who denies its conclusion should accept its premises
and when that question has no adequate answer.

More precisely, the need for an independent justification arises from the
context and the purpose for which the argument is being used. A premise
needs support from an independent reason, for example, when it is in dispute
or subject to objection and the arguer’s goal is to give an audience some rea-
son to accept the premise and, on that basis, to accept the conclusion. That
such a need for an independent reason exists but is not satisfied explains why
the argument can be criticized by saying that it commits the fallacy of begging
the question.

This fallacy is often very hard to detect, both because it is affected by the
context and because there are many ways to hide the fact that a premise
depends on the conclusion. Consequently, people often use arguments that
beg the question when they have nothing better to say, especially on a con-
troversial issue. It is common, for example, to hear an argument something
like the following:

It’s always wrong to murder human beings.
Capital punishment involves murdering human beings.

Capital punishment is wrong.

Here the first premise is true by definition, since calling something murder
implies that it is a wrongful killing. The second premise is, however, question
begging, for calling capital punishment murder assumes the point at issue—
that capital punishment is wrong. As a result, anyone who objects to the con-
clusion would or should raise exactly the same objections to the second
premise, and one could not give any adequate reason for the second premise
without first arguing for the conclusion.

More subtly than this, opponents of abortion typically refer to the human
fetus as an unborn baby or simply as a baby. It may seem a matter of indif-
ference how the fetus is referred to, but this is not true. One of the central
points in the debate over abortion is whether the fetus has the status of a
person and thus has the rights that any person has. It is generally acknowl-
edged in our society that babies are persons and therefore have the rights of
persons. By referring to the fetus as an unborn baby (or simply as a baby), a
point that demands argument is taken for granted without argument. That
counts as begging the question. Of course, many opponents of abortion
argue for the claim that a human fetus has the moral status of a person and
thus do not beg this central question in the debate. Still, if they give no such
independent argument, then they do beg the question.

Similarly, if someone argues for the pro-choice position simply on the
grounds that a woman has a right to control the destiny of her own body,
this also begs an important question, because it takes for granted the claim
that the fetus is part of a woman’s body, not an independent being with

373

Begg ing the Quest ion

rights of its own. Of course, defenders of the pro-choice position need not
beg the question in this way, but they often do. Whether a particular argu-
ment or premise is question begging will depend on whether there is a need
for an independent reason, which in turn depends on the context in which
the argument is given. One way for an argument to beg the question is for it
to rely, either explicitly or implicitly, on an unsupported premise that is a
matter of dispute in the particular argumentative context. Thus, referring to
a human fetus as a baby will be question begging in contexts in which the
moral status of the fetus is at issue, but it may not be question begging when
this is not an issue.

Because begging the question depends in this way on context, we should
be careful before charging opponents with begging the question. Some peo-
ple charge every opponent with begging the question, almost like a knee-jerk
reaction. However, even if an opponent uses a premise that you reject, this
does not yet show that the argument begs the question, since your opponent
might have plenty of independent evidence for the premise. Before you ac-
cuse people of begging the question, you should ask them to give you their
reasons for the disputed premise. If they can come up with an independent
reason, then they did not beg the question, and you might learn something
from them. However, if they do not have any independent reason for the
premise, then they did indeed beg the question.

For each of the following arguments, does it involve circular reasoning? Does it
beg the question in any context? If so, in which contexts? Explain your answers.

1. A student of mine told me that I am her favorite professor, and I know
that she is telling the truth, because no student would lie to her favorite
professor.

2. Intoxicating beverages should be banned, because they can make people
drunk.

3. Capitalism is the only correct economic system, because without it free
enterprise would be impossible.

4. Free trade is good for the country, because it brings the country all of the
advantages of an unimpeded flow of goods.

5. Gun-control laws are wrong, because they violate the citizen’s right to
bear arms.

6. When B applies for a job from A:

A: How can we know that you are trustworthy?

B: Mr. Davidson will write me a recommendation.

A: But why should we trust him?

B: I assure you that he is honest and accurate.

EXERCISE I

(continued)

374

CHAPTER 16 ■ Fallac ies of Vacu ity

7. The Bible is the inerrant word of God, because God speaks only the truth,
and repeatedly in the Bible God tells us that the Bible consists of His words.

8. We have to accept change, because without change there is no progress.

9. Premarital sex is wrong, because premarital sex is fornication, and
fornication is a sin.

10. The drinking age should be lowered to eighteen, because eighteen-year-
olds are mature enough to drink.

11. We should never give security clearances to homosexuals, because they
can be blackmailed into revealing classified information. They are subject
to blackmail, because we will revoke their security clearances if we find
out they are gay.

12. People with suicidal tendencies are insane, because they want to kill
themselves.

13. Jeffrey can’t really be insane, because he says he is.

1. Explanations are often presented in the form of arguments that sometimes
seem circular. Are the following arguments circular? Do they beg the ques-
tion? Are they defective in some other way? Why or why not? More gener-
ally, when, if ever, can circular arguments provide good explanations?

A. Tom: Why are so many people moving out of Claremont this year?

Sue: Because its economy is going down so fast.

Tom: But why is its economy going down so fast?

Sue: Because so many people are moving out of town.

B. Amy: Why is Jarred going down on the seesaw right now?

John: Because Jeremiah is going up on the other side of the seesaw.

Amy: But why is Jeremiah going up right now?

John: Because Jarred is going down.

2. Explain John Stuart Mill’s argument in the following passage (from A Sys-
tem of Logic [London, 1843], book 2, chapter 3, section 2). Do you agree?
Why or why not?

It must be granted that in every syllogism, considered as an argument to prove the
conclusion, there is a petitio principii [a begging of the question]. When we say,

All men are mortal.
Socrates is a man.

Socrates is mortal;

it is unanswerably urged by the adversaries of the syllogistic theory that the proposi-
tion, “Socrates is mortal,” is presupposed in the more general assumption, “All men
are mortal“; that we cannot be assured of the mortality of all men unless we are already

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS (ADVANCED)

375

Self -Sealers

certain of the mortality of every individual man. . . . That, in short, no reasoning from
generals to particulars can, as such, prove anything, since from a general principle we
cannot infer any particulars but those which the principle itself assumes as known.

3. Suppose Andrea asks, “How many days are there in November?” In response,
Cummings says, “Let’s see. How does that mnemonic go? Oh yeah: Thirty
days has September, April, June, and November. So November has thirty
days.” Is this argument circular? Does it beg the question? Why or why not?

4. Does the following argument (from Roy Sorensen) beg the question in any
contexts? If so, in which contexts? Why?

Some arguments beg the question.

Some arguments beg the question.

5. St. Thomas Aquinas gave the following argument for the existence of God:

In the world of sense we find there is an order of efficient causes. There is no case
known (neither is it, indeed, possible) in which a thing is found to be the efficient
cause of itself; for so it would be prior to itself, which is impossible. Now in efficient
causes it is not possible to go on to infinity, because in all efficient causes following
in order, the first is the cause of the intermediate cause, and the intermediate is the
cause of the ultimate cause, whether the intermediate cause be several, or only one.
Now to remove the cause is to remove the effect. Therefore, if there be no first cause
among efficient causes, there will be no ultimate, nor any intermediate cause. But if
in efficient causes it is possible to go on to infinity, there will be no first efficient
cause, neither will there be an ultimate effect, nor any intermediate efficient causes;
all of which is plainly false. Therefore it is necessary to admit a first efficient cause, to
which everyone gives the name of God.1

In response, John Mackie accused Aquinas of begging the question:

Unfortunately this argument is unsound. Although in a finite ordered series of causes
the intermediate (or the earliest intermediate) is caused by the first item, this would
not be so if there were an infinite series. In an infinite series, every item is caused by
an earlier item. The way in which the first item is “removed” if we go from a finite to
an infinite series does not entail the removal of the later items. In fact, Aquinas . . .
has simply begged the question against an infinite regress of causes. . . .2

Explain and evaluate Mackie’s objection. Does Aquinas beg the question?
Why or why not?

SELF-SEALERS

It is characteristic of certain positions that no evidence can possibly refute
them. This may seem to be a wonderful feature for a position to have. In fact,
however, it usually makes the position useless. We can start with a silly ex-
ample. A Perfect Sage claims to be able to predict the future in detail. The
Perfect Sage’s predictions take the following form:

Two weeks from today at 4:37 you are going to be doing exactly what you
will be doing.

376

CHAPTER 16 ■ Fallac ies of Vacu ity

Of course, whatever you are doing at that time will be exactly what you are
doing, so this prediction cannot possibly be wrong. But this is only because
it does not tell us anything in particular about the future. Whatever happens,
the prediction is going to be true, and this is just what is wrong with it. The
prediction is empty or vacuous.

People do not, of course, go around making predictions of this kind, but
they do sometimes hold positions that are empty or vacuous in much the
same way. A clairvoyant claims to be able to predict the future, but every
time a prediction fails, she says that this just proves that someone set up bad
vibrations that interfered with her visions. So, if the prediction turns out to
be true, she claims that this shows her clairvoyance; if it turns out to be false,
she cites this as evidence of interference. No matter what happens, then, the
clairvoyant’s claim to be clairvoyant cannot be refuted. Her claim to clair-
voyance is as empty and vacuous as the Perfect Sage’s prediction.

Positions that are set up in this way so that nothing can possibly refute
them are called self-sealers. A self-sealing position is one that is so constructed
that no evidence can possibly be brought against it no matter what happens.
This shows its vacuity, and it is precisely for this reason that we reject it.

People do not usually hold self-sealing positions in a blatant way; they
tend to back into them. A person who holds that the American economy is
controlled by an international Jewish conspiracy will point out people of
Jewish extraction (or with Jewish names) who occupy important positions
in financial institutions. This at least counts as evidence, though very weak
evidence. And there seems to be much stronger evidence on the other side:
There are a great many people in these institutions who are not Jews. To
counter this claim, the person now argues that many of these other people
are secretly Jews or are tools of the Jewish conspiracy. The Jews have al-
lowed some non-Jews to hold important positions in order to conceal their
conspiracy. What evidence is there for this? Well, none really, but that only
helps prove how sneaky the Jewish conspiracy is. At this point, the position
has become self-sealing, for all evidence cited against the existence of the
conspiracy will be converted into evidence for its cleverness.

Self-sealing arguments are hard to deal with, because people who use
them will often shift their ground. A person will begin by holding a signifi-
cant position that implies that facts are one way rather than another, but
under the pressure of criticism will self-seal the position so that no evidence
can possibly count against it. That is, the person will slide back and forth be-
tween two positions—one that is not self-sealed (and so is significant but
subject to refutation) and another that is self-sealed (and so is not subject to
criticism but is also not significant). The charge that is leveled against a the-
ory that vacillates in this way is that it is either vacuous or false. It is vacuous
if self-sealing, false if not.

One way of challenging a self-sealing position is to ask what possible
fact could prove it wrong. This is a good question to ask, but it can be mis-
understood and met with the triumphant reply: “Nothing can prove my
position wrong, because it is right.” A better way to show the insignificance

377

Self -Sealers

of a self-sealing theory is to put the challenge in a different form: “If your
position has any significance, it should tell us that certain things will occur
whereas certain other things will not occur. If it cannot do this, it really tells
us nothing at all; so please make some specific predictions, and we will see
how they come out.”

Ideologies and worldviews tend to be self-sealing. The Marxist ideol-
ogy sometimes has this quality. If you fail to see the truth of the Marxist
ideology, that just shows that your social consciousness has not been
raised. The very fact that you reject the Marxist ideology shows that you
are not yet capable of understanding it and that you are in need of re-
education. This is perfect self-sealing. Sometimes psychoanalytic theory
gets involved in this same kind of self-sealing. People who vigorously
disagree with certain psychoanalytic claims can be accused of repressing
these facts. If a boy denies that he wants to murder his father and sleep
with his mother, this itself can be taken as evidence of the strength of
these desires and of his unwillingness to acknowledge them. If this kind
of reasoning gets out of hand, then psychoanalytic theory also becomes
self-sealing and empty. Freud was aware of this danger and warned
against it.

So far, we have seen two ways in which an argument can be self-sealing:
(1) It can invent an ad hoc or arbitrary way of dismissing every possible
criticism. The clairvoyant can always point to interfering conditions with-
out going to the trouble of saying what they are. The anti-Semite can al-
ways cite Jewish cleverness to explain away counterevidence. We might
call this self-sealing by universal discounting. (2) A theory can also counter
criticism by attacking its critics. Critics of Marxism are charged with hav-
ing a decadent bourgeois consciousness that blinds them to the facts of
class conflict. The critic’s response to psychoanalytic theory is analyzed
(and then dismissed) as repression, a reaction formation, or something
similar. Here self-sealing is achieved through an ad hominem fallacy. We
might call this self-sealing by going upstairs, because the theorist is looking
down on the critic.

Yet another form of self-sealing is this: (3) Words are used in such a
way that a position becomes true by definition. For example, a person
makes the strong claim that all human actions are selfish. This is an inter-
esting remark, but it seems to be false, for it is easy to think of cases in
which people have acted in self-sacrificing ways. To counter these obvi-
ous objections, the argument takes the following turn: When a person acts
in a self-sacrificing way, what that person wants to do is help another even
at her own expense. This is her desire or her motive, and that is what she
acts to fulfill. So the action is selfish after all, because the person is acting
to achieve what she wants. This is a self-sealing move, for it will not help
to cite any behavior—even heroic self-destructive behavior—as coun-
terevidence. If a person desires to do something even if it involves the sac-
rifice of her life, then she acts to fulfill her desire, and the act is again
called selfish.

378

CHAPTER 16 ■ Fallac ies of Vacu ity

It is not hard to see what has happened in this case. The arguer has cho-
sen to use the word “selfish” in a new and peculiar way: A person is said to
act selfishly if she acts to do what she desires to do. This is not what we
usually mean by this word. We ordinarily say that a person acts selfishly if
she is too much concerned with her own interests at the expense of the in-
terests of others. On this standard use of the word “selfish,” there are any
number of counterexamples to the claim that all human actions are selfish.
But these counterexamples do not apply when the word “selfish” is used in
a new way, where “acting selfishly” comes close to meaning just “acting.”
The point is that under this new meaning of “selfish,” it becomes empty (or
almost empty) to say that all human actions are selfish. We are thus back to
a familiar situation. Under one interpretation (the ordinary interpretation),
the claim that all human actions are selfish is interesting but false. Under
another interpretation (an extraordinary interpretation), the claim is true
but vacuous. The position gets all its apparent interest and plausibility from
a rapid two-step back-and-forth between these positions.

Self-sealing arguments are not easy to handle, for they change their
form under pressure. One good strategy is to begin by charging a person
who uses such an argument with saying something trivial, vacuous, or
boring. If, to meet this charge, he or she says something quite specific and
important, then argument can proceed along normal lines. But it is not al-
ways easy to get down to brass tacks in this way. This becomes clear if you
examine an argument between a Marxist and an anti-Marxist, between a
psychoanalyst and a critic of psychoanalysis, or between individuals
with different religious views. Their positions are often sealed against ob-
jections from each other, and then their arguments are almost always at
cross-purposes.

Although we have emphasized how large-scale ideologies can become
self-sealing, small-scale claims in everyday life are also often sealed
against any possible refutation. In fact, a number of common words are
used to this end. If someone says, “All true conservatives support school
prayer,” and a critic points out a conservative who opposes school prayer,
then the original claim might be defended by saying, “He is not truly (or
really) a conservative.” If this response is trotted out in every case, it turns
out that the original claim does not exclude anything. Similarly, the claim
that “some students need to work harder than others, but if any student
works hard enough, he or she will get good grades” can be protected sim-
ply by declaring that any student who works hard but does not get good
grades does not work hard enough. Finally, someone who says, “If you
think it over thoroughly, you will agree with me” can dismiss anyone
who disagrees simply by denying that he thought it over thoroughly. Of
course, these terms—“true,” “real,” “thorough(ly),” and “enough“—do
not always make positions self-sealing. Nonetheless, these and other com-
mon terms are often used to seal positions against any possible criticism.
When these terms are used in these ways, the resulting positions are
empty and can be criticized in the same ways as self-sealing ideologies.

379

Self -Sealers

1. Antony Flew famously wrote:

Now it often seems to people who are not religious as if there was no conceivable
event or series of events the occurrence of which would be admitted by sophisticated
religious people to be a sufficient reason for conceding “There wasn’t a God after all”
or “God does not really love us then.” Someone tells us that God loves us as a father
loves his children. We are reassured. But then we see a child dying of inoperable can-
cer of the throat. His earthly father is driven frantic in his efforts to help, but his
Heavenly Father shows no obvious sign of concern. Some qualification is made—
God’s love is “not merely human love” or it is “an inscrutable love,” perhaps—and
we realize that such offerings are quite compatible with the truth of the assertion that
“God loves us as a father (but, of course . . .).” We are reassured again. But then per-
haps we ask: what is this assurance of God’s (appropriately qualified) love worth,
what is this apparent guarantee really a guarantee against? Just what would have to
happen not merely (morally and wrongly) to tempt us but also (logically and rightly)
to entitle us to say “God does not love us” or even “God does not exist“?3

How would you answer Flew’s question? If the answer to Flew’s question
were that nothing could entitle us to say this, as Flew suggests, then would
this show that religious positions like this are self-sealing? That they are
empty? Why or why not?

2. During the nineteenth century, evidence mounted that apparently showed
that the Earth had existed for millions, perhaps hundreds of millions, of
years. This seemed to contradict the account given in Genesis that holds
that the Earth was created less than 10,000 years ago. In response to this
challenge, Philip Henry Gosse, an English theist, replied roughly as
follows: In creating Adam and Eve, God would endow them with navels,
and thus it would seem that they had been born in the normal way, and
thus also seem that they had existed for a number of years before they
were created by God. Beyond this, their hair, fingernails, bones, and so on
would all show evidence of growth, again giving evidence of previous ex-
istence. The same would be true of the trees that surrounded them in the
Garden of Eden, which would have rings. Furthermore, the sediment in the
rivers should suggest that they had flowed for very many years in the past.
In sum, although the Earth was created fairly recently, God would have
created it in a way that would make it appear that it had existed for many
more years, perhaps millions of years in the past. Thus, the actual creation
of the Earth less than 10,000 years ago is compatible with scientific evidence
that suggests that it is much older than this. Evaluate this line of reasoning.

3. Some creationist critics of Darwin’s theory of natural selection argue as
follows:

Natural selection is a tautologous concept (circular reasoning) because it simply
requires the fittest organisms to leave the most offspring and at the same time it iden-
tifies the fittest organisms as those that leave the most offspring. Thus natural selec-
tion seemingly does not provide a testable explanation of how mutation would
produce more fit organisms.4

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

(continued)

380

CHAPTER 16 ■ Fallac ies of Vacu ity

NOTES
1 The Summa Theologica of St. Thomas Aquinas, Part I, Question 2, Article 3, 2nd and rev. ed., 1920,
trans. Fathers of the English Dominican Province. Online edition © 2002 by Kevin Knight,
http://www.newadvent.org/summa/100203.htm. We replaced the phrase “take away” with
the word “remove” to fit Mackie’s objection.

2 J. L. Mackie, “The Regress of Causes” in The Miracle of Theism (Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1982), 90.

3 Antony Flew, “Theology and Falsification,” in New Essays in Philosophical Theology, ed. A. Flew
and A. MacIntyre (New York: Macmillan, 1955), 98–99.

4 Duane T. Gish, Richard B. Bliss, and Wendell R. Bird, “Summary of Scientific Evidence for
Creation,” Impact 95–96 (May/June 1981).

5 Christina Hoff Sommers, Who Stole Feminism? How Women Have Betrayed Women (New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1994), 18.

Does this argument show that Darwin’s theory is self-sealing? How could
defenders of natural selection best respond?

4. Christina Hoff Sommers wrote:

The women currently manning—womanning—the feminist ramparts do not take well
to criticism. How could they? As they see it, they are dealing with a massive epidemic
of male atrocity and a constituency of benighted women who have yet to comprehend
the seriousness of their predicament. Hence, male critics must be “sexist” and “reac-
tionary,” and female critics “traitors,” “collaborators,” or “backlashers.” This kind of
reaction has had a powerful inhibiting effect. It has alienated and silenced women and
men alike.5

Do you agree? Why or why not? If feminists are guilty of what Sommers
claims, does this make their positions self-sealing? Does it make their posi-
tions empty?

http://www.newadvent.org/summa/100203.htm

REFUTATION

Chapter 1 showed how arguments can be used for justification and for explana-

tion, but arguments can also be used for another purpose: refutation. This chap-

ter will explain the nature of refutation and explore some of the main ways in

which arguments can refute another argument or claim. These methods of refuta-

tion include counterexamples, reductio ad absurdum, and parallel reasoning. This

last kind of refutation can reveal a large variety of fallacies in addition to those

studied in previous chapters.

WHAT IS REFUTATION?

In addition to justifying and explaining their conclusions, arguments are
also sometimes used to refute other arguments. To refute an argument is to
show that it is no good. Some writers, however, incorrectly use the term “re-
fute” to mean something much weaker. They say such things as that Bill
Clinton refuted the charges brought against him by those attempting to im-
peach him, meaning nothing more than that he rejected or replied to the
charges. This, however, is not what the word “refute” means. To refute the
charges brought against him, Clinton would have to give reason to believe that
these charges were erroneous. Refuting a charge requires giving an adequate
argument against it. This takes a lot more work than simply denying it.

On the other hand, it is also important to remember that we can refute an
argument without proving that its conclusion is false. A refutation of an ar-
gument is sufficient if it raises objections that cannot be answered. Conse-
quently, the patterns of successful refutations mirror the criteria for a good
argument, because the point of a refutation is to show that one of these crite-
ria has not been met. Refutations, then, take four main forms: (1) We can
argue that some of the premises are dubious or even false. (2) We can argue
that the conclusion of the argument leads to absurd results. (3) We can show
that the conclusion does not follow from the premises (or, in the case of an
inductive argument, that the premises do not provide strong enough sup-
port for the conclusion). (4) We can show that the argument begs the ques-
tion. This last charge was discussed in Chapter 16, so here we will focus on
the first three methods of refutation.

17

381

382

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

COUNTEREXAMPLES

The first main way to attack an argument is to challenge one of its premises.
We can argue that there is no good reason to accept a particular premise as
true, asking, for example, “How do you know that?” If the premise is not
justified, then the argument fails to justify its conclusion. More strongly, we
can argue that the premise is actually false. In this second case, we refute an
argument by refuting one of its premises.

One common way to refute a premise by showing that it is false is by
producing a counterexample. Counterexamples are typically aimed at uni-
versal claims. This is true because a single contrary instance will show that
a universal claim is false. If someone claims that all snakes lay eggs, then
pointing out that rattlesnakes bear their young alive is sufficient to refute
this universal claim. If the person retreats to the weaker claim that most
snakes lay eggs, the guarding term makes it much harder to refute the
claim. A single example of a snake that bears its young alive is not enough
to refute this claim; we would have to show that a majority of snakes do not
lay eggs. Here, instead of trying to refute the statement, we may ask the
person to produce his argument on behalf of it. We can then attack this argu-
ment. Finally, if the person retreats to the very weak claim that at least some
snakes lay eggs, then this statement becomes very difficult to refute. Even
if it were false (which it is not), to show this we would have to check every
single snake and establish that it does not lay eggs. So, as a rough-and-ready
rule, we can say that the stronger a statement is, the more subject it is to
refutation; the weaker it is, the less subject it is to refutation.

When a universal claim is refuted by a single case, that case is a counter-
example to the universal claim. The pattern of reasoning is perfectly simple:
To refute a claim that everything of a certain kind has a certain feature, we
need find only one thing of that kind lacking that feature. In response to a
counterexample, many people just repeat the misleading saying, “That’s the
exception that proves the rule.” What most people do not realize is that
“proves” originally meant “tests,” so all this saying means is that an apparent
exception can be used to test a rule or a universal claim. When the exception
is a true counterexample, the universal claim fails the test.

There are only two ways to defend a universal claim against a purported
counterexample. Because the universal claim says that all things of a certain
kind have a certain feature, (1) one can deny that the apparent counterexam-
ple really is a thing of that kind, or (2) one can deny that the supposed coun-
terexample really lacks that feature. For example, a defender of the claim

Is refuting an argument the same as justifying a belief that its conclusion is
false? Is it the same as justifying a belief that the argument is invalid or weak?
Why or why not?

DISCUSSION QUESTION

383

Counterexamples

that all snakes lay eggs might deny (1) that rattlesnakes are snakes, or (2)
that rattlesnakes bear their young alive. Neither of these responses is plausi-
ble in this case. That is what makes this counterexample decisive.

Other counterexamples are not decisive. Indeed, some purported coun-
terexamples miss their targets entirely. If a person claims that all snakes except
rattlesnakes lay eggs, someone might respond with another counterexample:
male snakes. This counterexample does not really refute the intended claim,
since that claim was meant to be about the methods by which female snakes
of various species give birth when they do give birth.

When a counterexample can be answered with a simple clarification or
modification that does not affect the basic force of the original claim, it is a
shallow counterexample. A deep counterexample is one that requires the orig-
inal claim to be modified in more important or interesting ways. Shallow
counterexamples can sometimes be fun as jokes, but they are usually not
much help in refuting arguments, since basically the same argument can be
resurrected in a slightly different form. Indeed, people who give too many
shallow counterexamples can be annoying. If you really want to understand
a subject matter, you should look for counterexamples that are deep.

Deep and decisive counterexamples are not always easy to think up, but
Socrates was a genius in this respect. In one dialogue by Plato, Theaetetus
and Socrates are trying to define “knowledge.” They notice an important
difference between knowledge and mere belief: It is possible for someone to
believe something that is false, but it is not possible for someone to know
something that is false. This leads Theaetetus to suggest a simple definition
of knowledge: Knowledge equals true belief. This proposed definition is re-
futed in the following exchange:

Socrates: [There is] a whole profession to prove that true belief is not
knowledge.

Theaetetus: How so? What profession?

Socrates: The profession of those paragons of intellect known as orators
and lawyers. There you have men who use their skill to produce con-
viction, not by instruction, but by making people believe whatever
they want them to believe. You can hardly imagine teachers so clever
as to be able, in the short time allowed by the clock, to instruct their
hearers thoroughly in the true facts of a case of robbery or other vio-
lence which those hearers had not witnessed.

Theaetetus: No, I cannot imagine that; but they can convince them.

Socrates: And by convincing you mean making them believe something.

Theaetetus: Of course.

Socrates: And when a jury is rightly convinced of facts which can be
known only by an eye-witness, then, judging by hearsay and accepting
a true belief, they are judging without knowledge, although, if they
find the right verdict, their conviction is correct?

384

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

Theaetetus: Certainly.

Socrates: But if true belief and knowledge were the same thing, the best
of jurymen could never have a correct belief without knowledge. It
now appears that they must be different things.1

One thing to notice about this discussion is that Theaetetus does not dig in his
heels and insist that the ignorant members of the jury do know that the per-
son is innocent provided only that they believe it and it is true. Faced with the
counterexample, he retreats at once. Why is this? Why not stay with the defi-
nition and reject the counterexample as false? The answer is that for many
concepts, there is general agreement about their application to particular
cases, even if there is no general agreement about a correct definition. To take
an extreme example, everyone agrees that Hitler was a dictator (even Hitler),
and no one supposes that Thomas Jefferson was a dictator (even his enemies).
So any definition of “dictator” must be wrong if it implies that Hitler was not
a dictator or that Thomas Jefferson was a dictator. Of course, people do dis-
agree about borderline cases, so there might be no perfectly exact definition of
“dictator.” Nonetheless, any definition that does not square with the clear
cases can be refuted by citing one of these clear cases as a counterexample.

Ethics is an area where arguments often turn on counterexamples. Con-
sider the traditional moral precept “Do unto others as you would have them
do unto you.” This principle captures an important moral insight, but, if taken
quite literally, it is also subject to counterexamples. Jones, a sadomasochist, en-
joys beating other people. When asked whether he would like to be treated in
that way, he replies, “Yes.” It is obvious that the Golden Rule was not in-
tended to approve of Jones’s behavior. The task, then, is to reformulate this
rule to avoid this counterexample. That is not as easy as it might seem.

No discussion of counterexamples is complete without a mention of the
Morgenbesser retort. Though the exact story is now shrouded in the mists of
time, it has come down to us from the 1950s in the following form: In a lec-
ture, a British philosopher remarked that he knew of many languages in
which a double negative means an affirmative, but not one language in
which a double affirmative means a negative. From the back of the room
came Morgenbesser’s retort: “Yeah, yeah.”

Find a counterexample to each of the following claims, if possible.

Example: Claim: “Sugar” is the only word in which an s is pronounced sh.

Counterexample: Oh, sure.

1. No prime number is even.

2. Three points always determine a plane.

EXERCISE I

385

Counterexamples

3. Balloons that are filled with helium always rise in the air.

4. All mammals bear their young live.

5. You can never get too much of a good thing.

6. What you don’t know can’t hurt you.

7. You can’t be too careful.

8. You should never look a gift horse in the mouth.

9. It is always wrong to tell a lie.

10. You should never ask someone else to do something that you are not will-
ing to do yourself.

11. If lots of people do something, then it must not be wrong for me to do it.

12. If it would be horrible for everyone to do something, then it would be
morally wrong for anyone to do it.

13. If it would not be horrible for everyone to do something, then it would
not be morally wrong for anyone to do it.

14. Wherever you use the word “nearly,” you could use the word “almost” in-
stead, without affecting the truth or the good sense of what you have said.

There cannot possibly be any counterexamples to the following claims. Explain
why.

1. There is life on the moon.

2. Killing is usually wrong.

3. Any short person is a person.

4. Every horse is an animal.

5. 2 + 2 = 4.

6. Everything with a size has a shape.

7. Everything that is green has a shape.

8. There’s no way to turn a right-hand glove around to get a left-hand glove.

EXERCISE II

1. How can the Golden Rule best be reformulated to avoid the above
counterexample of the sadomasochist? Can you think of any counterexam-
ples to this reformulation of the Golden Rule?

2. Is the Morgenbesser retort a shallow counterexample or a deep
counterexample? Why?

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

(continued)

386

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

REDUCTIO AD ABSURDUM

Particular counterexamples can normally be used to refute claims only if
those claims are universal, so how can we refute claims that are not univer-
sal? One method is to show that the claim to be refuted implies something
that is ridiculous or absurd in ways that are independent of any particular
counterexample. This mode of refutation is called a reductio ad absurdum,
which means a reduction to absurdity. Reductios, as they are called for
short, can refute many different kinds of propositions. They are sometimes
directed at a premise in an argument, but they can also be used to refute a
conclusion. This method of refutation will not show exactly what is wrong
with the argument for that conclusion, but it will show that something is
wrong with the argument, because it cannot be sound if its conclusion is
false. That might be enough in some situations.

For example, suppose someone argues that because there is a tallest moun-
tain and a heaviest human, there must also be a largest integer. We might
respond by arguing as follows: Suppose there is a largest integer. Call it N.
Since N is an integer, N + 1 is also an integer. Moreover, N + 1 is larger than N.
But it is absurd to think that any integer is larger than the largest integer.
Therefore, our supposition—that there is a largest integer—must be false.

In this mathematical example a contradiction is derived, but absurdity
also comes in other forms. Suppose a neighbor tells a parent, “The local
public schools are so bad that you ought to send your kids to private
school,” and the parent responds, “Do you think I’m rich?” The point of
this rhetorical question is that it is absurd to think that the parent is rich,
presumably because of her lifestyle or house, which the neighbor can easily
see. Without being rich, the parent cannot afford a private school, so the
neighbor’s advice is useless.

Often the absurdity is derived indirectly. A wonderful example occurred in
the English parliamentary debate on capital punishment. One member of

3. When theologians claim that God can do anything, atheists sometimes
respond that God cannot make a stone that is so large that God cannot
lift it, or that God cannot make a circle with four sides. Are these really
counterexamples to the theologians’ claim? Why or why not?

4. Suppose there are only two balls in a bag, and someone claims, “Most of the
balls in the bag are red.” Does a single black ball in the bag refute this claim?
Is it a counterexample to this claim? Is it also a counterexample to the claim
that no counterexamples can refute any claim that is not universal?

5. When people today respond to counterexamples by saying, “That’s the
exception that proves the rule,” they usually do not mean, “That’s the
exception that tests the rule,” which was its original meaning. What do
they mean?

387

Reduct io ad Absurdum

Parliament was defending the death penalty on the grounds that the
alternative—life in prison—was much more cruel than death. This claim was
met with the following reply: On this view, those found guilty of first-degree
murder ought to be given life in prison, and the death penalty should be given
to those who commit some lesser offense. The first speaker could respond in
several ways, because this reductio depends on background assumptions that
the first speaker could question. First, he might deny that the most severe
crime should receive the most severe penalty possible. If the first speaker sees
life in prison as too cruel to be inflicted on anyone, then he might call for the
abolition of life imprisonment and keep the death penalty as the most severe
punishment. Alternatively, the first speaker could claim that, even though the
death penalty is less severe than life in prison, it is still fitting in some other
way for the most severe crime, first-degree murder. Finally, of course, the first
speaker could simply accept the supposedly absurd result and apply life im-
prisonment to first-degree murder, while using the death penalty for lesser
crimes. In fact, however, the first speaker was unwilling to accept any of these
alternatives. He simply tried a rhetorical trick and got caught.

These reductios are fairly good, but other reductios fail for a variety of
reasons. To succeed in refuting a claim, a reductio ad absurdum argument
must meet two main requirements. First, the result must really be absurd.
Often opponents try to reduce a view to absurdity but really only draw
out implications of the view that are not absurd at all. For example, in a
famous debate in which Thomas Huxley defended a theory of evolution,
Bishop Wilberforce asked Huxley whether he had descended from apes
on his mother’s side or on his father’s side of the family. This question
was intended to draw laughter from the crowd, and it did, partly because
they and Wilberforce thought that any answer to the question would be
absurd. Nonetheless, Huxley could respond that he had descended from
apes on both sides of his family. Because that response was not really
absurd—regardless of how absurd it seemed to Wilberforce—the bishop’s
attempt did not really refute Huxley’s claim.

In other cases, one cannot deny that a certain result really would be ab-
surd, but the reductio still fails because the claim to be refuted does not re-
ally imply that absurdity. For example, opponents sometimes say that the
theory of evolution implies that animals are constantly evolving, so they
cannot be divided into separate species. This would be absurd, because it is
easy to observe distinct species. The theory of evolution, however, does not
really imply this absurdity, so this reductio fails to refute that theory. It fails
to meet the second requirement for successful reductios, which is that the
claim to be refuted must actually imply the absurdity.

Finally, it is important to notice that reductios can be deep or shallow in
much the same way as counterexamples. Sometimes a claim really does
imply a result that is absurd, but it can be modified in some minor way so as
to avoid the absurd result. For example, if a fan says, “Tiger Woods is better
than any golfer ever,” someone might respond that Woods is himself a golfer,
so this claim implies that Woods is better than himself, which is absurd.

388

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

Of course, the fan meant to say, “Woods is better than any other golfer ever,”
so this reductio is shallow. The reductio does refute the original form of the
claim, but the main force of the claim is restored by the minor modification.
A reductio ad absurdum is deep only if it reveals that a claim implies an
absurd result that cannot be avoided without modifying the claim in essen-
tial respects or giving it up entirely.

In sum, then, a reductio ad absurdum argument tries to show that one
claim, X, is false because it implies another claim, Y, that is absurd. To evalu-
ate such an argument, the following questions should be asked:

1. Is Y really absurd?

2. Does X really imply Y?

3. Can X be modified in some minor way so that it no longer implies Y?

If either of the first two questions is answered in the negative, then the re-
ductio fails; if the third question receives an affirmative answer, then the
reductio is shallow. Otherwise, the reductio ad absurdum argument is both
successful and deep.

EXERCISE III

Evaluate the following reductio ad absurdum arguments by asking the above
three questions.

1. CLAIM TO BE REFUTED: Even the worst of enemies can become friends.

REDUCTIO: If people are enemies, then they are not friends. If they do become
friends, then they are not enemies. So it’s absurd to think that enemies can
be friends.

2. CLAIM TO BE REFUTED: This ball is both red all over and green all over.

REDUCTIO: If it is red, it reflects light within a certain range of wavelengths.
If it is green, it reflects light within a different range of wavelengths. These
ranges do not overlap, so it is absurd to think that anything can reflect
both kinds of light. Thus, a ball cannot be both red and green all over.

3. CLAIM TO BE REFUTED: Most children in Lake Wobegon are above average
(in intelligence).

REDUCTIO: If so, the average (intelligence) would really be higher than it is;
and then it would not be true that most children in Lake Wobegon are
above the real average (intelligence).

4. ARGUMENT TO BE REFUTED: Your brain is mostly empty space, because the
subatomic particles in it are very far apart.

REDUCTIO: That’s absurd, because my brain is solid, and it works pretty
well.

5. CLAIM TO BE REFUTED: Some things are inconceivable.

REDUCTIO: Consider something that is inconceivable. Since you are consid-
ering it, you are conceiving it. But then it is conceivable as well as incon-
ceivable. That is absurd. So nothing is inconceivable.

389

Reduct io ad Absurdum

1. Marc Antony’s funeral oration, quoted in a Discussion Question in Chapter 2,
uses several reductio ad absurdum arguments to refute Brutus’s claim that
Caesar was ambitious. Are these reductios deep or shallow? How could
Brutus respond?

2. The legal case of Plessy v. Ferguson, 163 U.S. 537 (1896), questioned the
constitutionality of a law requiring racial segregation in railroad cars.
Opponents of the law gave the following reductio argument. How could
defenders of segregation respond to this argument? Is their response
adequate? Is any response adequate? Why or why not?

The same argument that will justify the state legislature in requiring railways to provide
separate accommodations for the two races will also authorize them to require separate
cars to be provided for people whose hair is of a certain color, or who are aliens, or who
belong to certain nationalities, or to enact laws requiring colored people to walk upon
one side of the street, and white people upon the other, or requiring white men’s houses
to be painted white, and colored men’s black, or their vehicles or business signs to be of
different colors, upon the theory that one side of the street is as good as the other, or that
a house or vehicle of one color is as good as one of another color.

3. Many atheists try to refute belief in God with the following reductio ad
absurdum argument: God is defined to be all-good and all-powerful (as
well as all-knowing). If God is all-good, then God prevents as much evil
as He can. If God is all-powerful (and all-knowing), then God can prevent
all evil. Thus, if a traditional God did exist, there would be no evil in the
world. But that’s absurd. There is obviously lots of evil in the world.
Therefore, God does not exist. (Compare Chapter 21 in Part V on
Religious Reasoning.) Evaluate this reductio argument. How could
religious believers best respond?

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Spell out a reductio ad absurdum argument to refute each of the following
claims. If no such reductio is possible, explain why.

1. Some sisters are nephews.

2. Some fathers were never children.

3. Most students scored better than the median grade on the last test.

4. Almost everyone in this class is exceptional.

5. There is an exception to every universal claim.

6. I know that I do not know anything.

7. Some morally wrong actions are morally permitted.

8. God exists outside of time, and we will meet Him someday.

9. There is a male barber in this town who shaves all and only the men in
this town who do not shave themselves. (Hint: Does he shave himself?)

10. Most of the sentences in this exercise are true.

EXERCISE IV

390

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

STRAW MEN AND FALSE DICHOTOMIES

Very often when trying to refute either by counterexample or by reductio, peo-
ple move too quickly. The general rule is this: Before trying to refute someone’s
claim, it is important to make sure that you understand his or her position. If
you misunderstand what your opponent is claiming, but you go ahead and at-
tack a specific claim anyway, then the claim you attack will not be the claim
that your opponent made. You might even fail to refute any position that any-
one ever really held. This is called the fallacy of attacking a straw man.

Sometimes people attack a straw man intentionally. They mischaracterize
their opponents’ position on purpose in order to make their opponents look
silly by associating their opponents with a position that really is silly. One ex-
ample comes from the 2004 presidential election, when John Kerry suggested
that the United States should have conferred more with its allies, including the
French, before attacking Iraq. In response, at the Republican National Conven-
tion Senator Zell Miller said that Kerry would “let Paris decide when America
needs defending.” Surely Miller knew that this mischaracterization of Kerry’s
position was unfair, but it achieved the desired reaction from the crowd.

The fallacy of attacking a straw man can also arise from an honest mis-
take. Some people get so wrapped up in their own arguments that they for-
get the view against which they are arguing. The opponent can also be
partly to blame. If someone states her position obscurely, it might not be
clear whether the speaker would go so far as to make a certain claim. Then
someone might attack that further claim, honestly believing that the speaker
had adopted it. Alternatively, a critic might refute that further claim simply
to make the speaker clarify her position by explicitly saying that that is not
what she meant to say. In such ways, it might be useful to refute a position
that the speaker does not really hold, even though, of course, doing so does
not refute any position that the speaker actually does hold.

In more insidious cases, straw men are often set up by means of a related
fallacy—false dichotomy. With regard to the Iraq war, President Bush often
said something like this: “I had a choice to make: Either take the word of a
madman [Saddam Hussein] or defend America. Given that choice, I will de-
fend America every time.” The crucial phrase, of course, is “given that
choice.” If those were the only options, then Bush’s critics would also defend
America every time. The problem lies in Bush’s suggestion that his oppo-
nents do not want to defend America and would instead “take the word of a
madman.” That insinuation sets up a straw man.

Political rhetoric is filled with such false dichotomies that set up straw men.
A cable news host is reported to have said, “Sure, it’s not great having the
government collect our telephone records, but it is better than having them
collect our body parts.” Let’s hope there is a third option! Opponents of the
government collecting phone records, of course, think that there is another
way to avoid having to collect body parts. But then they sometimes add,
“Either you are opposed to the government collecting phone records or you
don’t care about civil rights.” This is just a false dichotomy on the other side.

391

Straw Men and False D ichotom ies

Those who favor the government collecting phone records do care about civil
rights, even though they favor some intrusions (which they see as minor
intrusions) on those rights in order to fight terrorism.

False dichotomies like these are parodied by Stephen Colbert when he
says, “Either you are with us or you are with the terrorists,” “Either you’re
for the war [in Iraq] or you hate America,” and his best, “George W. Bush:
great president or the greatest president?” The trick here is obviously to give
you some choice, so that you end up committed to the option that you
choose, but your choices are limited to ones that Colbert gives you.

After listing his dichotomy, Colbert usually adds, “It’s that simple!” The best
response is to recognize that these issues are usually not simple at all. These
tricks work partly because many people long for simple choices or they fail to
notice any third option. Whenever someone tells you that you have only two
alternatives, you should look carefully for other possibilities. And whenever
your choice among the options seems obvious, you should ask whether the re-
jected options have been set up as straw men rather than characterized fairly.

Do the following arguments attack straw men? Why or why not?

1. Anyone who thinks that the United States should not have sent troops to
Iraq must think that the suffering Saddam Hussein inflicted on his own
citizens doesn’t matter much.

2. Anyone who thinks that the United States should have sent troops to Iraq
must think that they will only be there for a short time.

3. Humans could not have been created in the image of God, because God is
not a physical being, and only physical beings can have images.

4. Atheists think that God does not exist, so everything is permitted. But
even atheists must admit that I would not be permitted to kill them! So
atheism is nonsense.

5. The theory of evolution says that humans are no different from apes, but
humans are clearly smarter than apes, so the theory of evolution must be
wrong.

6. Stephen Colbert again: “Evolutionists’ main claim is that one day we decided
to stop being monkeys and turned ourselves into humans. Well, if that’s true,
why aren’t more monkeys escaping from zoos? Think about it. They could
turn into humans, then disguise themselves as janitors and walk out of their
cages. But I guess evolution doesn’t have an answer for that one.“2

EXERCISE V

Find five more examples of attacking straw men in your local newspaper, in a
talk show on television, or in a college course.

DISCUSSION QUESTION

392

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

REFUTATION BY PARALLEL REASONING

Even if its premises and conclusion cannot be refuted by any counterexam-
ple or reductio, a deductive argument can also be refuted by showing that it
is invalid. We know that an argument is not valid if it starts from true prem-
ises and leads to a false conclusion. Often, however, we cannot point this out
to refute an argument, because the truth or falsity of the conclusion is the
very thing at issue. When this problem arises, a typical device is to point out
that by arguing in the same way, or a similar way, we can reach a conclusion
that is unsatisfactory.

Here is a simple example:

Cary: Most of the people in this class are college students. Most college
students study hard. Therefore, most of the people in this class study
hard.

David: That’s just like arguing that most whales live in the sea, and most
animals that live in the sea are fish, so most whales are fish.

At first sight, it might not be clear how the second argument could show
anything about the first argument. What do whales have to do with stu-
dents? The point, however, is simply that the two arguments share a basic
form. Thus, if the second argument is not valid by virtue of that form, then
the first is also not valid by virtue of that same form. The second argument
is obviously not valid, since its premises are true but its conclusion is false.
This shows that the first argument is not valid, at least by virtue of this
shared form. Even though the first argument still might be valid on some
other basis, its defenders at least owe an alternative account of its validity.
Often there will be none.

Refuting an argument by showing that it is just like another argument that
is obviously no good is a common device in everyday discussions. Here’s
another example:

Matthew: If I had a higher salary, I could buy more things; so, if every-
one had higher salaries, everyone could buy more things.

Kirsty: That’s just like arguing that, if one person stands up at a ball
game, he will get a better view; so, if everyone stands up, everyone
will get a better view.

At first sight, it may not be obvious whether Matthew’s style of reasoning is
valid or not. Kirsty’s response shows that Matthew’s argument is invalid by
providing an instance in which the same style of reasoning takes us from
something true to something that is obviously false, because, if everyone
stands up at a ball game, only the tallest people will be able to see better.
Kirsty’s response also shows why Matthew’s argument is invalid: Just as one
person’s ability to see can be affected by other people standing up, because
this raises the height that is necessary to see, so one person’s ability to buy

393

Refutat ion by Parallel Reason ing

can be affected by other people having more money, if this raises prices and
thereby raises the amount of money that is necessary to buy things.

This fallacy is often called a fallacy of composition, because it rests on the
mistaken assumption that what is true of the parts is also true of the whole
that is composed out of those parts. Each person in a class has a mother, but
the whole class does not have a mother. The earth might be heating up on
average in the long run even if some locations on earth have a cool summer
one year. These obvious mistakes can be cited to show that and why poten-
tially misleading arguments with the same form are no better. Lots of new
fallacies can be revealed in this way by deploying this method of refutation
by parallel reasoning.

Of course, not every refutation of this kind is so simple or so successful.
To understand the criteria that must be met for such a refutation to work, it
will be useful to consider a more complex example that reveals some of the
ways to respond to a charge of “That’s just like arguing. . . .” The example
concerns proposed legal restrictions on gun ownership. The National Rifle
Association (NRA) feared that these restrictions would lead to a total ban
on guns, which they opposed, so they widely distributed a bumper sticker
that read:

(1) If guns are outlawed, only outlaws will have guns.

The point, presumably, was that most people would add the suppressed
premise:

(2) It would be bad if only outlaws had guns,

and then reach the conclusion:

(3) Therefore, guns should not be outlawed.

This argument is not completely clear, partly because it is not clear who
counts as an “outlaw.” Some critics poke fun at this bumper sticker because
(1) seems true by definition if outlaws include anyone who breaks any law,
because anyone with a gun breaks a law if guns are outlawed. But what the
NRA probably means by “outlaws” are people who commit violent crimes,
such as robbery and murder. It is not strictly true that these will be the only
people with guns if guns are outlawed, since police and some present gun
owners would keep their guns. Nonetheless, these exceptions do not touch
the NRA’s main claim, which is that law-abiding people who would give up
their guns if guns were outlawed would then not have guns to defend them-
selves against violent criminals.

How can an opponent try to refute this argument? There are several pos-
sibilities, but what defenders of gun control in fact did was distribute other
bumper stickers. One of them read:

(1*) If gum is outlawed, only outlaws will have gum.

The main point might be just to parody the NRA bumper sticker, but, if we
take it more seriously, (1*) also suggests an application of the method of

394

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

refutation by parallel reasoning. The parallel argument would continue like
this:

(2*) It would be bad if only outlaws had gum.

(3*) Therefore, gum should not be outlawed.

This conclusion, however, is not obviously false. Indeed, it seems true: Peo-
ple should be allowed to chew gum. Moreover, (2*) seems false, because
nothing particularly bad would happen if only outlaws chewed gum. For
these reasons, this bumper sticker cannot really refute the original argument.
This failure illustrates two general tests: A refutation by parallel reasoning
works only if the conclusion of the parallel argument really is unacceptable
and only if the premises of the parallel argument really are true.

But opponents of the NRA did not stop there. They distributed a third
bumper sticker:

(1**) If guns are outlawed, only outlaws will shoot their children by
mistake.

The argument behind this new bumper sticker is again not clear. If it is a
straightforward instance of refutation by parallel reasoning, then the paral-
lel argument would add, “It would be bad if only outlaws shot their chil-
dren by mistake” and conclude, “Guns should not be outlawed.” But that is
the very conclusion the NRA wants to reach; so this newest argument could
not refute the original one. Nonetheless, a different argument might lie
behind this third bumper sticker. The point seems to be that gun owners
sometimes shoot their children by mistake, and we can minimize such
tragedies by reducing the number of gun owners through laws against guns.
The argument then runs something like this:

(1**) If guns are outlawed, only outlaws will shoot their children by
mistake.

(2**) It would be good if outlaws were the only ones who shot their
children by mistake.

(3**) Therefore, guns should be outlawed.

This conclusion would seem false to the NRA, and this argument might also
seem to suggest that the same form of reasoning could lead to opposite con-
clusions: (3) and (3**). Moreover, (2**) seems true. This premise does not say
that it is good for outlaws to shoot their children by mistake. Instead, it says
that it would be good if nobody else shot their children by mistake. So far,
so good. Notice, however, that this latest argument, (1**)–(3**), does not
have the same form as the original argument, (1)–(3), because (2**) and (3**)
are about what is good and what ought to be law, whereas (2) and (3) are
about what is bad and what ought not to be law.

The next question is whether this disanalogy is important. If not, the latest
bumper sticker still might refute the original one. The NRA, however, might
argue that this difference is important. The fact that a law has bad effects

395

Refutat ion by Parallel Reason ing

overall does show that the law should not be passed, whereas the fact that a
law would have good effects overall is not enough to show that the law
should be passed, since the law still might violate individual rights that can-
not be overridden by good effects on others. This claim is controversial, but,
if it can be defended, then this parallel argument, (1**)–(3**), fails to show
that the original argument, (1)–(3), is invalid. More generally, then, a refuta-
tion by parallel reasoning works only if the two arguments really do have
relevantly similar structures—that is, only if one argument really is just like
the other in relevant respects.

In sum, the method of refutation by parallel reasoning can be used to
show that an argument is invalid by presenting another argument with es-
sentially the same form in which the inference takes us from obvious truths
to an obvious falsehood. In response to such an attack, a defender of the
original argument has three main options. The defender might

1. deny that the conclusion of the parallel argument is false,

2. deny that the premises of the parallel argument are true, or

3. deny that the supposedly parallel argument really has essentially the
same form.

If any of these responses is justified, then the attempt to refute the original
argument by parallel reasoning fails.

This procedure is admittedly imprecise. There will sometimes be disputes
about whether the premises of the parallel argument really are true, or
clearly true, and whether the conclusion of the parallel argument really is
false, or clearly false. Moreover, we have given no general explanation of the
notion that two arguments have the same basic form. Some forms of argument
were discussed in previous chapters, but they are only part of the story. We
have not discussed and cannot discuss all possible forms of argument. Yet it
remains a fact that people can often see that two arguments have the same
essential form and, through seeing this, decide that an argument presented
to them is invalid. This ability is the basis of sound logical judgment. It is
also the basis of wit. It is at best mildly funny to say that if God had wanted
us to fly, He would have given us wings. You have to be fairly clever to re-
ply at once, “If God had wanted us to stay on the ground, He would have
given us roots.”

In each of the following examples, does the parallel argument succeed in refuting
the original argument? Why or why not? Consider the three possible responses
listed above. If the original argument is refuted, is there some simple way to fix it
so that it cannot be refuted by this parallel reasoning? If so, how? (You might try
to add a premise whose analogue would be false in the parallel argument.)

(continued)

EXERCISE VI

396

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

1. CHRIS: The United States is wealthy, so its citizens are wealthy as well.

PAT: That’s just like arguing that a building is expensive, so the nails in its
walls are expensive as well.

2. CHAUVINIST: Since women are the only people who can bear children, they
should bear children.

FEMINIST: That’s like arguing that, if I am the only person who can wiggle
my own ears, then I should wiggle my ears.

3. NEWT: Orphanages are fine places, as the movie Boys Town shows.

CRITIC: That’s just like saying that Oz is a fine place, as The Wizard of Oz
shows.

4. A YOUNG CHILD AT 6:00 AM: It’s morning. Morning is the time to wake up. So
it’s time to wake up.

THE CHILD’S SLEEPY PARENT: That’s just like arguing that it’s daytime, and
daytime is the time to eat lunch, so it’s time to eat lunch.

5. Mark: You shouldn’t walk on that grass, because if everybody did that,
the grass would die.

BOB: That’s just like arguing that I shouldn’t go to this movie right now,
because if everybody did that, the theater would be packed like a can of
sardines.

6. THOMAS: Everything in the world has a cause, so the world itself must have
a cause.

TONY: That’s just like arguing that every leg in the relay race was run by a
single runner, so the entire race itself must have been run by a single runner.

7. HAWK: Nuclear deterrence must work, because we have never had a
nuclear exchange as long as we have maintained nuclear deterrence.

DOVE: That’s just like arguing that hanging garlic by the front door must
keep thieves away, because I put garlic there and my house has never
been robbed.

8. LIBERAL: We ought to provide condoms for high school students, because
they are going to have sex anyway.

CONSERVATIVE: That’s just like arguing that we should provide high school
students with guns, because they are going to use guns anyway.

9. SCIENTIST: My initial steps toward human cloning, no matter how contro-
versial, are important because they bring the debate out into the public.

OPPONENT: That’s just like arguing that we should start a fire in a house
in order to bring the debate about getting a new fire engine out into the
public. (paraphrased from an actual interview on National Public Radio)

10. KING: “In your statement you asserted that our actions, even though
peaceful, must be condemned because they precipitate violence. But can
this assertion be logically made? Isn’t this like condemning the robbed
man because his possession of money precipitated the evil act of
robbery?” (from Martin Luther King’s “Letter from Birmingham Jail”)

397

Refutat ion by Parallel Reason ing

11. A: He owns a red car, so he owns a car.

B: That’s just like arguing that he owns a toy duck, so he owns a duck.

12. A: He is holding a baby girl, so he is holding a baby.

B: That’s just like arguing that he is driving a fire truck, so he is driving a fire.

For each of the following arguments, find another argument with the same basic
form in which the premise or premises are clearly true and the conclusion is
clearly false.

1. If tea is dangerous, so is coffee. Tea isn’t dangerous. So coffee isn’t either.

2. If it were about to rain, it would be cloudy. It is cloudy. So it’s about to rain.

3. Fred had either ice cream or cake for dessert. He had cake. So he must not
have had ice cream.

4. You cannot pass laws against dangerous drugs, because there is no way to
draw a sharp line between dangerous and nondangerous drugs.

5. If you have never written a novel, then you are in no position to make
judgments about novels. So don’t presume to criticize mine.

6. Since I have written several novels, I am in a position to know which nov-
els are good. So you ought to trust me when I say that this one is great.

7. There’s nothing wrong with smoking, since the longer you smoke, the
longer you live.

8. If one has nothing to hide, one should not be afraid of being investigated.
So no one should object to being investigated.

9. Radicals should not be granted freedom of speech, because they deny this
freedom to others.

10. In nature, a species is more likely to survive when its weak members die
out, so we should let the weak in our society die out.

11. Buses use more gas than cars, so the city cannot reduce gas consumption
by providing more buses.

12. Boxing can’t be very bad, since so many people like it.

13. This war is just, for to say otherwise in public would be to aid our enemies.

14. If you don’t buy the most expensive shoes, you buy cheap ones. You don’t
want cheap shoes. So you should buy the most expensive shoes.

15. I’d rather be smart than strong, so I am going to quit exercising and spend
all day in the library.

16. You don’t want to be this murderer’s next victim, so you had better
convict her and send her to prison where she can’t hurt you.

17. If it weren’t for America, these refugees would have nowhere to go; so
they should adopt the American way of life and give up their old culture.

18. You can’t be right, because, if the answer were that obvious, someone
would have thought of it before.

EXERCISE VII

398

CHAPTER 17 ■ Refutat ion

1. In Chapter 22 below, Searle tries to refute Turing by means of parallel rea-
soning about a Chinese room. Using the standards discussed above, assess
Searle’s attempted refutation.

2. In St. Anselm’s Proslogion with a Reply on Behalf of the Fool by Gaunilo and the
Author’s Reply to Gaunilo, trans. M. J. Charlesworth (Oxford: Clarendon
Press, 1965), St. Anselm gives an ontological argument (in the form of a
reductio ad absurdum) for the existence of God and then Gaunilo replies
with a refutation by parallel reasoning. Reconstruct and assess both of their
arguments, using the standards discussed above.

GOD TRULY EXISTS

by St. Anselm

Well then, Lord, You who give understanding to faith, grant me that I may
understand, as much as You see fit, that You exist as we believe You to exist,
and that You are what we believe You to be. Now we believe that You are
something than which nothing greater can be thought. Or can it be that a thing
of such a nature does not exist, since “the Fool has said in his heart, there is no
God” [Ps. xiii. I, lii. I]? But surely, when this same Fool hears what I am speak-
ing about, namely, “something-than-which-nothing-greater-can-be-thought,”
he understands what he hears, and what he understands is in his mind, even
if he does not understand that it actually exists. For it is one thing for an object
to exist in the mind, and another thing to understand that an object actually
exists. Thus, when a painter plans beforehand what he is going to execute, he
has [the picture] in his mind, but he does not yet think that it actually exists
because he has not yet executed it. However, when he has actually painted
it, then he both has it in his mind and understands that it exists because he
has now made it. Even the Fool, then, is forced to agree that something-
than-which-nothing-greater-can-be-thought exists in the mind, since he under-
stands this when he hears it, and whatever is understood is in the mind. And
surely that-than-which-a-greater-cannot-be-thought cannot exist in the mind
alone. For if it exists solely in the mind even, it can be thought to exist in
reality also, which is greater. If then that-than-which-a-greater-cannot-be-
thought exists in the mind alone, this same that-than-which-a-greater-cannot-
be-thought is that-than-which-a-greater-can-be-thought. But this is obviously
impossible. Therefore, there is absolutely no doubt that something-than-which-
a-greater-cannot-be-thought exists both in the mind and in reality.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

399

Refutat ion by Parallel Reason ing

A REPLY TO THE FOREGOING BY A CERTAIN
WRITER ON BEHALF OF THE FOOL

by Gaunilo

. . . they say that there is in the ocean somewhere an island which, because of
the difficulty (or rather the impossibility) of finding that which does not exist,
some have called the “Lost Island.” And the story goes that it is blessed with
all manner of priceless riches and delights in abundance, much more even
than the Happy Isles, and, having no owner or inhabitant, it is superior every-
where in abundance of riches to all those other lands that men inhabit. Now, if
anyone tell me that it is like this, I shall easily understand what is said, since
nothing is difficult about it. But if he should then go on to say, as though it
were a logical consequence of this: You cannot any more doubt that this island
that is more excellent than all other lands truly exists somewhere in reality
than you can doubt that it is in your mind; and since it is more excellent to
exist not only in the mind alone but also in reality, therefore it must needs be that
it exists. For if it did not exist, any other land existing in reality would be more
excellent than it, and so this island, already conceived by you to be more ex-
cellent than others, will not be more excellent. If, I say, someone wishes thus to
persuade me that this island really exists beyond all doubt, I should either
think that he was joking, or I should find it hard to decide which of us I ought
to judge the bigger fool—I, if I agreed with him, or he, if he thought that he
had proved the existence of this island with any certainty, unless he had first
convinced me that its very excellence exists in my mind precisely as a thing
existing truly and indubitably and not just as something unreal or doubtfully
real. . . .

NOTES
1 Plato, Theaetetus, trans. Francis M. Cornford, in Cornford’s Plato’s Theory of Knowledge
(New York: Liberal Arts Press, 1957), 141.

2 Stephen Colbert, I Am America (And So Can You!) (New York: Grand Central Publishing,
2007), 198.

This page intentionally left blank

Areas of
Argumentation

Particular subject matters often give rise to new kinds of arguments and special

standards for assessing arguments. One reason is that arguments in different areas

have different purposes. Much scientific reasoning is aimed at explaining observa-

tions, including findings in experiments, whereas the point of moral reasoning is

not to explain what happens but, rather, to evaluate and to determine which acts are

justified. The audience also varies from one area of argumentation to another. Some

religious reasoning is addressed only to people who already accept certain basic

claims of a religious tradition, such as that the Bible is inspired, whereas philoso-

phical reasoning typically prides itself in questioning common assumptions and

authorities. Similarly, arguments about different topics often take place within dif-

ferent institutional contexts with distinctive rules. Legal arguments, for example,

often assume specified burdens of proof, certain basic laws (such as in a constitu-

tion), and other fundamental features of the legal system in the jurisdiction; whereas

moral reasoning is sometimes used to overturn those very same features of legal

systems. Because these areas of argumentation differ in so many ways, we need to

look at each of them separately and carefully to see which standards are at play in

each area. That is one main goal of Part V. Another goal is to provide extensive

examples of arguments both as targets for criticism and as models of how to con-

struct a good argument. We can get better at arguing for our own views if we learn

to appreciate the strengths in arguments given by other people, including our oppo-

nents. Toward these ends, Part V will discuss and give illustrations of legal, moral,

scientific, religious, and philosophical reasoning in Chapters 18–22, respectively.

V

401

This page intentionally left blank

LEGAL REASONING

Law is a prime example of how institutional setting affects standards of argumen-

tation, for legal systems have their own procedures and authorities. Legal decisions

are often based on statutes, constitutions, and precedents that are peculiar to a par-

ticular legal system. These sources of law are often vague, and they can conflict, so

they need to be interpreted. This chapter will discuss legal interpretation and legal

reasoning in general. The general forms of legal arguments will then be illustrated

by looking in more detail at the law of discrimination and affirmative action.

Legal decisions have concrete effects on people’s lives. In criminal cases,
judges can deprive people of their freedom or even their lives. In civil cases,
judges often take away large sums of money, the custody of children, and so
on. Constitutional decisions can affect the basic rights of all citizens, even
those who have never been in a courtroom. These decisions are made be-
cause certain legal arguments are accepted and others are rejected.

Unfortunately, it is sometimes difficult to find any good reason for a legal
decision. Crucial facts might not be known, and the law is sometimes un-
clear or inconsistent. Some cases “fall between the cracks,” so no law seems
to apply. Human beings have a remarkable ability to produce weird cases
that would tax the wisdom of Solomon.

Even in the toughest cases, judges and juries must reach some decision.
Outside the law, we can often just let matters ride—we can postpone a deci-
sion until further facts are established, or even declare that the issues are too
vague to admit of any decision. This is rarely an option in a legal case. If A
sues B, either A or B must win. The judge cannot say, “This case is too tough
for me. I’m not going to rule on it.” Throwing the case out of court amounts
to ruling in favor of the defendant. A decision must be made, usually in a
relatively short period of time.

These pressures have led lawyers and judges to develop many ingenious
ways to argue. Lawyers cite statutes, precedents, and historical contexts.
They claim the authority of common sense and science, and they cite schol-
arly articles, even some by philosophers. They deploy metaphors and
rhetorical devices—almost anything to convince the judge or jury to decide
in favor of their clients. The variety of these arguments makes legal reason-
ing complex and also fascinating.

18

403

404

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

Despite this variety, some rough generalizations can be made: A decision in
a legal case usually depends on (1) questions of fact and (2) questions of law.

COMPONENTS OF LEGAL REASONING

QUESTIONS OF FACT

A criminal law prohibits a certain kind of behavior and assigns a punishment
to those who violate it. When a person is accused of violating this law, a trial
is held to determine whether in fact he or she has done so. The judge in-
structs the jury on the law bearing on the case. If the members of the jury
then decide that the accused has violated the law, they find him or her
guilty, and the judge usually hands down the punishment stated in the
statute.

In a civil suit, one party sues another, say, for breach of contract. Because
states have laws governing contracts, once more a trial is held to decide
whether in fact there was a contract (instead of some other speech act) and
whether in fact it was breached. If a breach of contract is found, the judge or
jury awards damages as the law specifies.

Although questions of fact arise in all cases, criminal and civil cases do
differ in the burden of proof—in who is required to establish the facts and to
what degree of certainty. In a criminal procedure, the prosecution must es-
tablish its case beyond a reasonable doubt. In a civil case, the burden of proof is
less. Generally, the case is won by the party who shows that the preponder-
ance of evidence favors his or her side of the case. Although this is a bit too
simple, it is sometimes said that if the scales tip ever so slightly in favor of A
rather than B, then A wins the case.

The only way to carry the burden of proof is to present evidence. This evi-
dence can contain conflicts and unclarities, which make it hard to prove the
facts. Sometimes the facts are so complex that they simply cannot be proved
one way or the other, and sometimes the distinction between facts and law
is not so clear.

These problems arise often in cases that raise larger social issues. For exam-
ple, in the famous case of Brown v. Board of Education (347 U.S. 483 [1954]),
which found segregated schools unconstitutional, the Supreme Court an-
swered the question of law at issue by saying “the opportunity of an education
. . . is a right which must be available to all on equal terms.” The Court next
asked: “Does segregation of children in public schools solely on the basis of
race . . . deprive the children of the minority group of equal educational oppor-
tunities?” This question was presented as a question of fact. The Court an-
swered in the affirmative and tried to justify its answer by citing various
psychological studies of the performance of minority children from segregated
schools. This answer would be accepted by most people today, but the studies
used as proof were controversial and inconclusive, so the Court had to decide

405

Components of Legal Reason ing

whether studies of this kind were reliable enough to serve as evidence in this
case. Moreover, the answer to the above question also depends on what counts
as “equal educational opportunities” for the purposes of the law. For example,
the studies cited by the Court found that segregated schools “affect the moti-
vation of a child to learn,” but these factual studies could not determine
whether lowered motivation to learn counts as lowered opportunity to learn. The
Court had to decide this issue because it in effect determines what the law is—
what it prohibits and what it allows. Thus, what was presented as a question
of fact turned out to be at least partly a question of law. In such cases, it is not
clear where law ends and facts begin.

QUESTIONS OF LAW

Even after the facts are determined, no decision can be reached without de-
termining what the law is. The law varies from place to place and from time
to time, so we have to know what the law is at the right time and place. This
is determined mainly by looking at the legal institutions that actually exist.
In our legal system, there are three main sources of the law: statutes, the
Constitution, and precedents.

STATUTES. Roughly, statutes are general rules of law passed by legisla-
tures. Statutes are made at various levels (federal, state, and local), and they
cover various subjects, including crimes as well as property, contracts, and
other areas of civil law. There are also statutes governing the procedures and
kinds of evidence that can be presented in court.

When a general statute is applied to a particular case, the legal argument is
often primarily deductive. For example, Sally drove ninety-five miles per hour
in front of Hanover High School at 4 PM on a school day. It is illegal to drive
over fifteen mph in front of any school at 4 PM on a school day. Therefore,
Sally’s driving was illegal. Of course, there are lots of suppressed premises,
such as that ninety-five mph is over fifteen mph. Other assumptions are trick-
ier: Sally might not be found guilty if she had an excuse or justification, such as
that a terrorist held a gun to her head. Still, it is often obvious that Sally had no
excuse or justification. If we add this claim as a premise, then, with a little fid-
dling, the legal argument against Sally can be made deductively sound.

Such simple cases are common, but they are also boring. Things get much
more difficult and interesting when a statute is vague, so that it is not clear
whether the statute applies to the case at issue. Then the statute must be in-
terpreted. We need some way to tell more precisely what the law prohibits
and what it allows.

The first step in interpreting a statute is to look carefully at the words in the
statute and their literal meanings. But the courts must often look beyond the
mere words of the statute. This need arises when the words are unclear and
when they lead to absurd results. For example, suppose a city council passes
an ordinance requiring zoos to provide clean, dry cages for all mammals. This
works fine until one zoo puts a whale in its aquarium. The whale would be in

406

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

trouble if the courts stuck to the words of the ordinance. Fortunately, the courts
can also consider the intentions of the legislators, which can be gleaned from
their debates about the law. Of course, the city council might not have thought
at all about whales, or they might have thought that whales are fish instead of
mammals. Thus, if their intentions are what the legislators consciously had in
mind, then we also need to consider the deeper, more general purpose of the
legislators—the goal they were trying to reach or the moral outlook they were
trying to express. This purpose is revealed by the wider historical context and
by other laws made by the same legislature. In our example, the purpose of the
statute was obviously to provide a healthy environment for mammals in zoos.
This purpose is best served by interpreting the ordinance so that it does not re-
quire dry cages for whales.

In addition to words, intentions, and purposes, moral beliefs are often used
to interpret statutes. Judges often argue that a statute should be interpreted
one way by claiming that any other interpretation would lead to some kind
of practical difficulty or moral unfairness. Such arguments are effective
when everyone agrees about what is immoral or unfair, but judges often de-
pend on more controversial moral beliefs. Critics claim that judges should
not use their own moral views in this way, but there is no doubt that many
or even all judges do in fact reason from such moral premises.

It should be clear that none of these methods of interpretation is mechan-
ical, and none guarantees a single best interpretation of every statute. Part
of the legal controversy is often over which factors can or should be used to
argue for an interpretation. When all is said and done, legal reasoning from
statutes is often far from the straightforward deduction that it appears to be
in simple cases.

THE CONSTITUTION. Even when a statute has been interpreted, it is some-
times not clear whether the statute is valid—whether it has any legal force.
This is determined by the Constitution. The Constitution occupies a special
place in the legal system of the United States. If any statute conflicts with the
Constitution, including its amendments, that statute has no legal force. Gen-
erally it is not the role of courts to enact laws, but the courts do have the
power to strike down laws if they conflict with provisions in our Constitution.

It is easy to imagine clear cases of laws that violate constitutional provi-
sions. If the state of Kansas began printing its own money, that would
plainly violate the constitutional provision that reserves this right to the fed-
eral government. But, typically, those constitutional questions that reach the
courts are not clear-cut. Even more so than statutes, provisions in the Con-
stitution are very general and sometimes vague. This vagueness serves a
purpose: The framers of the Constitution recognized that they could not
foresee every eventuality, so they wanted to allow future courts to interpret
the Constitution as cases arose. But the vagueness of the Constitution also
creates problems. Interpretations can often conflict and fuel controversy. As
with statutes, arguments for and against interpretations of the Constitution
usually refer to the words of the Constitution, the intentions and purposes

407

Components of Legal Reason ing

of the framers of the Constitution, the effects of adopting an interpretation,
moral beliefs, and so on. Such arguments are often inconclusive. The
Supreme Court is then the final arbiter on questions of constitutionality.

PRECEDENTS. The United States legal system is not only a constitutional sys-
tem; it is also partly a system of common law. This means that lawyers and
judges often cite precedents in arguments for present decisions. A precedent is
simply a past case or decision that is supposed to be similar to the present case.

The practice of citing precedents might seem strange at first sight. Why
should one case provide any reason for a decision in a different case? The
answer is that the cases resemble each other in important respects. Of course,
when there is an important enough difference between the cases, they should
be distinguished, and then the precedent provides no argument in the present
case. But, when there is no important enough difference, like cases should be
treated alike. If similar precedents were not followed, the legal system would
lack continuity, and this would make it unfair and ineffective. Of course, past
decisions that were mistaken or immoral should not be continued. That is
why precedents can be overturned. Nonetheless, our legal system assumes
that, if there is no adequate reason to overturn a precedent or to distinguish
the precedent from the present case, then the precedent provides some reason
to decide the present case in the same way as the precedent. This general doc-
trine of precedent is often called stare decisis—to adhere to previous decisions.

Precedents are used for many different purposes. When a statute is
vague, precedents are often used to argue for one interpretation over an-
other. When no statute applies directly, precedents are often used to argue
about what the law is. Precedents can also be used in arguments for general
questions of fact, or simply as sources of persuasive rhetoric.

The form of arguments from precedents also varies. Often a judge or
lawyer merely quotes part of the opinion in the precedent and treats that
quotation as an authoritative pronouncement of the law. Arguments from
precedents are then similar to arguments from legislative statutes, and there
often arises a similar need to interpret the judicial pronouncement in the
precedent. In other precedents, the judge chooses to make the decision with-
out explicitly formulating any general rule of law. The precedent can still be
used to argue for future decisions by emphasizing analogies and discount-
ing differences between the precedent and the present case.

One example occurs in the case of Plessy v. Ferguson, 163 U.S. 537 (1896).
Louisiana passed a statute that required blacks and whites to use “separate
but equal” cars in trains. Plessy refused to comply, and he claimed that the
Louisiana law violated the Fourteenth Amendment to the Constitution,
which forbids states to deprive anyone of “the equal protection of the laws.”

In his argument for this claim, Plessy cited the precedent of Yick Wo v.
Hopkins, 118 U.S. 356 (1886). That case was about an ordinance in San Fran-
cisco that required a permit from the Board of Supervisors for any public
laundry not operated in a brick or stone building. On its face, this ordinance
was supposed simply to prevent fires. In practice, however, the Board of

408

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

Supervisors granted permits to all but one of the non-Chinese applicants
and denied permits to all the Chinese applicants. Because of this practice,
Yick Wo claimed that the ordinance violated the equal protection clause. The
Supreme Court agreed and declared the ordinance unconstitutional, at least
insofar as it gave the city power to grant and refuse permits “without regard
to the competency of the persons applying, or the propriety of the places
selected for the carrying on of business.”

The argument from a precedent to a decision in a present case is often
presented as an argument from analogy. In this form, the argument empha-
sizes similarities between the cases, and then concludes that the decision in
the present case should be the same as in the precedent. Plessy’s argument
then appears to run something like this:

(1) The ordinance in Yick Wo was declared unconstitutional.
(2) The ordinance in Yick Wo is similar to the statute in Plessy in several

respects.

(3) The statute in Plessy also ought to be declared unconstitutional.

This argument is not very good as it stands, so we need to add some sup-
pressed premises.

The first step is to construct a list of the respects in which the cases are
similar. That is not always easy. When we are evaluating someone else’s ar-
gument, we can focus on the similarities that he or she mentions. But when
we are constructing our own legal arguments, we have to be more creative;
we have to formulate the respects in which the cases are supposed to be sim-
ilar. Some similarities do not matter: It is clearly irrelevant that the laws in
Yick Wo and Plessy both contain more than ten words or that both apply to
large cities. This much is assumed by both sides in the case, and legal rea-
soning would be impossible without assuming that many such similarities
are irrelevant. Likewise, not all differences matter: It is not important, even
if true, that Yick Wo was married and over fifty years old, but Plessy was
not. To discount or distinguish the precedent, one must show that some dif-
ference between Yick Wo and Plessy is important enough to justify reaching
different decisions in these cases. The central question, then, asks which fac-
tors—similarities and differences—do matter. In general, the answer is that a
factor is relevant when it is needed to justify the decision in the precedent.
These factors are often called the ratio decidendi—the reason for the decision.

Incorporating the doctrine of precedents as a suppressed premise, the
argument from Yick Wo to Plessy can now be reconstructed as follows:

(1) The ordinance in Yick Wo was declared unconstitutional.
(2) The ordinance in Yick Wo is similar to the statute in Plessy in several

respects (A, B, C, D, and so on).
(3) These are the features that justified declaring the ordinance in Yick Wo

unconstitutional.
(4) There are no important enough differences between Yick Wo and

Plessy to justify distinguishing the precedent.

409

Components of Legal Reason ing

(5) Yick Wo ought not to be overturned.
(6) If a precedent is similar to a present case in the respects that

justified the decision in the precedent, and if the precedent ought
not to be either overturned or distinguished, then the present case
ought to be decided in the same way as the precedent.

(7) The statute in Plessy ought to be declared unconstitutional.

This argument is now valid, but validity does not get us very far. We still
need to know whether its premises are true.

Clearly, the crucial question is this: How do we determine which features
of the precedent are needed to justify that decision? What we need to do is
to extract a general rule of law that provides the best justification for the
precedent decision.

The most obvious way to argue that a certain feature is important is to
look at the written opinion in the precedent and see what the Court said—
more specifically, what reasons it gave for its decision. In Yick Wo, the Court
wrote:

whatever may have been the intent of the ordinances as adopted, . . . though the
law itself be fair on its face and impartial in appearance, yet, if it is applied and
administered by public authority with an evil eye and an unequal hand, so as
practically to make unjust and illegal discriminations between persons in similar
circumstances, material to their rights, the denial of equal justice is still within
the prohibition of the Constitution.

Here the Court explicitly announces that the intent of the ordinance and its
appearance (for example, whether the ordinance explicitly mentions race or
ethnic background) did not matter to their decision. The Court also declares
that it did matter that the ordinance in practice creates inequalities in rights.
Such official pronouncements by a court have considerable force for future
courts in legal arguments.

Another way to determine which factors matter is to apply the necessary
condition test or the sufficient condition test from Chapter 9 to a group of
precedents. These tests had to be passed by each side in the Plessy case.
Plessy claimed that a sufficient condition of unconstitutionality is that a law
has a discriminatory effect on the rights of a particular racial or ethnic group.
This claim would fail the sufficient condition test if there were any prece-
dent still in force in which a law was found to have a discriminatory effect
but the law was not held unconstitutional. Because there was no such prece-
dent, the sufficient condition test does not exclude Plessy’s claim that dis-
criminatory effect is sufficient by itself to make a law unconstitutional.

On the other side, the Court claimed that discriminatory effect is not suf-
ficient, because discriminatory motive is a necessary condition for a law to
be unconstitutional under the equal protection clause. For this claim to pass
the necessary condition test, there must have been no precedent still in
force in which a law was held unconstitutional under the equal protection
clause but the Court did not find any discriminatory motive. Plessy claimed

410

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

that Yick Wo was such a case, but the Court responded that, even if those
who passed the ordinance had no discriminatory motive, the administra-
tion of the ordinance in Yick Wo “was held to be a covert attempt on the part
of the municipality to make an arbitrary and unjust discrimination against
the Chinese race.” If so, the necessary condition test does not rule out the
Court’s claim that discriminatory motive is necessary for unconstitutional-
ity in this case.

This disagreement reveals the limits on the tests of necessary conditions
and sufficient conditions. These tests are useful when there is a rich body of
coherent precedents. But when there are not enough precedents of the right
kinds, and when the precedents are not coherent, the necessary condition
test and the sufficient condition test cannot be used to rule out conflicting
interpretations of the precedents.

When the actual precedents are not enough, judges sometimes refer to hy-
pothetical cases. In Plessy, a judge might imagine a law with discriminatory
effect but no discriminatory motive. If the judge can show why this law
should be found unconstitutional, this would suggest that a discriminatory
motive is not really necessary for a violation of the equal protection clause.
This takes some imagination, and it also requires judges to apply their moral
beliefs about which laws should be allowed. Some critics deny that moral
arguments should have any legal force, because they are so controversial.
Nonetheless, there is no doubt that judges often do in fact assume such
moral beliefs in arguments from precedents.

A final point to remember is that arguments from precedents are usu-
ally defeasible, like other inductive arguments (see Chapter 8). One reason
is that more precedents might be found, and these new precedents might
conflict with the precedents in the original argument. Another reason is
that any precedent can be overturned. Precedents are not supposed to be
overturned unless they are very badly mistaken or immoral, but this is al-
ways a possibility. Nonetheless, even though arguments from precedents
always might be refuted in such ways, precedents can still provide reasons
for legal decisions.

So far we have looked at arguments from precedents as ways to deter-
mine what is necessary or sufficient to violate the law. Even after this is de-
termined, the law still must be applied to the facts in the present case. In
Plessy, the Court held that there was no intent to discriminate, because the
statute in Plessy was “reasonable” and “enacted in good faith for the promo-
tion of the public good and not for the annoyance or oppression of a partic-
ular class.” This claim is highly questionable. In his famous dissent, Justice
Harlan denies it when he writes:

Everyone knows that the statute in question had its origin in the purpose,
not so much to exclude white persons from railroad cars occupied by blacks,
as to exclude colored people from coaches occupied by or assigned to white
persons. . . . No one would be so wanting in candor as to assert the contrary.

411

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

If Harlan is right, the Court’s argument has a false premise, so the statute in
Plessy should have been found unconstitutional even if the Court was right
about what was necessary to find a law unconstitutional.

We can summarize this discussion by listing various ways in which argu-
ments from precedents can fail:

1. The precedent and the present case might not truly resemble each
other in the ways that the argument claims.

2. The respects in which the cases resemble each other might not be
important enough to justify the same decision in the present case.

3. The precedent and the present case might also differ from each other
in important respects that justify distinguishing the precedent.

4. The precedent might be mistaken or immoral enough to be overturned.

5. There might be other, stronger precedents that conflict with the
precedent in the argument.

Whenever you evaluate or present any argument from a precedent, you
need to ask whether the argument fails in any of these ways.

THE LAW OF DISCRIMINATION

These general methods of legal reasoning can be seen at work in a particular
area of constitutional law—the law of discrimination. To understand the
cases in this area, some background will be helpful.

THE EQUAL PROTECTION CLAUSE

The provision of the Constitution that governs discrimination is the equal
protection clause of the Fourteenth Amendment. It provides as follows:

No state shall make or enforce any law which shall . . . deny to any person within
its jurisdiction the equal protection of the laws.

The clearest thing about this clause is that it is not clear. Whatever it means,
it cannot mean that laws cannot ever treat people unequally. Criminal laws
treat those who commit crimes quite differently from those who do not. The
general idea behind the clause seems to be that like cases should be treated
in like ways. Put negatively, the clause prohibits unequal treatment when
there is no significant difference. This, however, is still both general and
vague, for we need principles that determine what sorts of likenesses matter
and what kinds of differences are significant.

Going back to the historical context in which the Fourteenth Amendment
was adopted, we know that it was intended to prohibit unequal treatment
on the basis of “race, color, or previous condition of servitude” (a phrase
that occurs in the companion Fifteenth Amendment on voting rights).

412

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

More specifically, it was one of those constitutional provisions intended
to protect the newly emancipated slaves. This was the primary purpose of
these provisions, but the language is more general, giving like protection to
all citizens of the United States.

APPLYING THE EQUAL PROTECTION CLAUSE

After the Fourteenth Amendment was adopted, many questions arose con-
cerning its interpretation and application. The amendment explicitly refers
only to state laws, but the state does many things besides pass laws, so the
courts had to determine what counts as a state action. In a series of cases, the
amendment was interpreted to mean that only positive actions of the state
fell under the amendment. Thus, when thugs broke up a black political rally,
with the police standing by doing nothing to protect the demonstrators, the
Supreme Court ruled that this was not a violation of the equal protection
clause because the state itself had not participated in the action (U.S. v.
Cruikshank, 1875). On this view, the state was forbidden to aid discrimina-
tion, but it was not required to protect anyone against it.

Another issue that arose concerned what the state has to do to justify treat-
ing people differently. Here the courts decided that it was not their business
to examine the details of legislation to make sure that the laws were as equi-
table as possible. The task of making laws, they held, falls to legislatures, and
the courts gave legislatures wide latitude in formulating these laws. Flagrant
violations of the equal protection clause could lead to the decision that the
law was unconstitutional, but only if the law failed what became known as
the rational-relation test. This test required only that the unequal treatment of
individuals be reasonably likely to achieve some legitimate end.

A final issue was whether the Fourteenth Amendment protected only the
civil rights of citizens or also rights of other kinds. In Strauder v. West Virginia
(1880), a law that made blacks ineligible for jury duty was struck down on
the grounds that the equal protection clause prohibits discrimination in ar-
eas of civil rights. In Yick Wo v. Hopkins (1886), the Court applied the equal
protection clause to discrimination in areas of economic rights. Yick Wo also
established that the equal protection clause protects not only blacks but also
other groups (such as Chinese) and that laws that do not explicitly mention
racial or ethnic groups can violate the equal protection clause if they are ap-
plied unequally in practice.

In 1896, the Supreme Court decided the case of Plessy v. Ferguson, which
was about a Louisiana statute enforcing racial segregation in public trans-
portation. This was clearly a state action, and the Court continued to apply
the rational-relation test. The main issues were whether the equal protection
clause extends to social rights, whether the segregation law served any
reasonable purpose, and whether the separate facilities were truly equal.
The Court held that the segregation statute did not violate the equal protec-
tion clause so long as the facilities were equal. This became known as the
separate-but-equal doctrine.

413

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

THE STRICT SCRUTINY TEST

As soon as Plessy was decided, Southern and some border states rapidly
passed a whole series of segregation laws. These were subsequently upheld
by the courts on the precedent of Plessy and its separate-but-equal doctrine.
The result was the introduction of a system of racial segregation throughout
much of the country.

The doctrine of the rational-relation test remained basically unchanged until
the 1940s. During World War II, the Supreme Court had to decide whether it
was constitutional to relocate Japanese Americans away from Pacific ports. In
Korematsu v. United States, 323 U.S. 214 at 216 (1944), the Court announced that

all legal restrictions which curtail the rights of a single racial group are immedi-
ately suspect. That is not to say that all such restrictions are unconstitutional.
It is to say that the courts must subject them to the most rigid scrutiny.

It is ironic that the Court did not strike down the Japanese relocation orders,
but these cases established a new interpretation of equal protection that
eventually greatly increased the power of the courts to strike down discrim-
inatory laws.

On this new interpretation of the equal protection clause, most laws still
need to pass only the rational-relation test, but there are two features of a law
that serve as triggers of strict scrutiny. A law must pass strict scrutiny if the law
either restricts a fundamental right or employs a suspect classification. Fundamen-
tal rights concern such things as the right to vote or the right to procreate. A
classification is suspect if it concerns race, religion, national origin, and so on.
Under the new interpretation of the equal protection clause, states could still
pass laws restricting fundamental rights, and these laws could still employ sus-
pect classifications, but, when they did so, a heavy burden of proof fell on
them. To justify such a law, the state had to show that (1) the legislation serves
a legitimate and compelling state interest, and that (2) it does so in the least intru-
sive way possible (or, as later courts put it, the legislation must be “narrowly
tailored” to fit the interest). This is the strict-scrutiny test.

It should be clear that the rational-relation test is easy to meet, whereas the
test of strict scrutiny is nearly impossible to satisfy. It is not hard to show that
a piece of legislation has some chance of serving some legitimate goal and,
thus, passes the rational relation test. It is difficult to show that the purpose
of a law is compelling—that is, of overwhelming importance; and it is even
more difficult to show that the stated purpose cannot be achieved by any less
intrusive means. Thus, in adopting this new test, the Court no longer showed
great deference to state legislatures, as it did in Plessy, when it applied the
rational-relation test. Instead, the heaviest burden was shifted to the states in
areas that involved what the Court declared to be suspect classifications or
fundamental rights.

This new test was crucial for the decision of Brown v. Board of Education
(1954), which declared segregation in public schools unconstitutional. The
Brown opinion does not directly mention strict scrutiny, but this test looms

414

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

in the background. Segregation clearly involves a suspect classification, but
the Court emphasizes, “the opportunity of an education . . . is a right which
must be available to all on equal terms” (emphasis added). The next step is
to argue that segregated schools violate this right by their very nature, even
if all “tangible” factors are equal. This violation of a fundamental right trig-
gers strict scrutiny, and the Brown opinion then simply assumes that segre-
gation in education will fail this test. Separate but equal is thus found
unconstitutional, at least in education, and Plessy is in effect overturned.

THE BAKKE CASE

After Brown, the Supreme Court struck down segregation in many other
areas—transportation, parks, libraries, and so on—as well as laws against
racial intermarriage (though not until 1967, after Barack Obama’s parents
were married). Another string of decisions required states to use busing as a
means to end segregation in school systems. The Court also required some
employers to hire or promote minimum percentages of minorities to over-
come the effects of illegal discrimination in employment.

In response to these court decisions, some schools and companies voluntar-
ily took steps to overcome what they saw as the effects of past discrimination.
These steps required them to use racial classifications, and that raised the issue
of reverse discrimination. Part of the issue was about what to call such pro-
grams. Their opponents label them “reverse discrimination,” but their defend-
ers refer to them as “affirmative action.” Both names clearly involve evaluation.
A more neutral description might be “preferential treatment.”

The classic case in this area is Regents of the University of California v. Bakke
(1978) (hereafter, Bakke). The basic situation was that the medical school of
the University of California at Davis had very few minority students, so
they created a special admissions program that set aside 16 seats for minori-
ties who were disadvantaged. Bakke, who was not a member of any of the
specified minorities, applied to the school but was rejected even though he
had higher scores on admissions tests than some minority members who
were admitted under the special admissions program.

Bakke claimed that Davis’s special admissions program violated the equal
protection clause of the U.S. Constitution, the California Constitution, and
Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, which provides:

No person in the United States shall, on the ground of race, color, or national origin,
be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to
discrimination under any program or activity receiving Federal financial assistance.

The Supreme Court was thus asked to rule on four main issues:

1. Did the Davis special admissions program violate the equal protection
clause of the Constitution?

2. Does reference to race without judicial findings of particular past
discrimination violate this constitutional guarantee?

415

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

3. Did the Davis special admissions program violate Title VI of the Civil
Rights Act?

4. Should Davis be required to admit Bakke into its medical school?

The decision of the Supreme Court on these issues is so complicated that it
takes a scorecard to follow it:

Brennan, Burger,
Question Marshall, Stewart,

Ruled Blackmun, Stevens,
On and White Powell and Rehnquist The majority

1 No Yes No decision No decision
2 No No No decision No
3 No Yes Yes Yes
4 No Yes Yes Yes

Because the justices split into two groups of four, the remaining justice,
Powell, determined the majority on most issues. Powell, however, was the
only justice who argued that the Davis program was unconstitutional. Four
others (Brennan, Marshall, Blackmun, and White) dissented. The remaining
four (Burger, Stevens, Stewart, and Rehnquist) chose not to address this
constitutional issue because they had already ruled out the Davis program
under Title VI. Since a majority did not join Powell in his opinion, the Court
did not explicitly declare the Davis program unconstitutional. But the Davis
program was held to violate Title VI, and Davis was ordered to admit Bakke,
because Burger, Stevens, Stewart, and Rehnquist did join Powell on these
issues. Despite Davis’s loss, the Court took the opposite position on the sec-
ond issue. Powell argued that it was not always unconstitutional for the state
to refer to race, and he created a majority when he was joined by Brennan,
Marshall, Blackmun, and White. Thus, each group of justices got part of
what it wanted.

The constitutional issues are raised most directly in the opinions of Powell
and Brennan (excerpted below). These opinions differ not only in their con-
clusions but also in their interpretations of the equal protection clause.
Powell argued that the Davis program and any consideration of race must be
subjected to the test of strict scrutiny. He held that the Davis program did not
meet the high standards of strict scrutiny, but some other consideration of
race might, such as in the Harvard College admissions program, which used
race as a “goal” rather than as a “quota” (much like the University of Michi-
gan Law School admissions program in the Grutter case below).

In contrast, Brennan argued for a new interpretation of the equal protec-
tion clause. On this new interpretation, strict scrutiny would still be applied
to most racial classifications, but strict scrutiny need not be passed when the
state uses a racial classification to serve a benign, remedial purpose. The pur-
pose of a racial classification is benign when it does not stigmatize anyone
and was not adopted out of any discriminatory motive, and it is remedial if

416

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

the state used the racial classification because the state found that, without
the racial classification, an underprivileged group would suffer harm or dif-
ferential impact because of past discrimination in society at large.

Powell criticized Brennan’s conditions on the grounds that the notion of
stigma is too vague and that it is not groups but individuals who are protected
by the equal protection clause. Brennan responded by distinguishing stigma
from other harms and by emphasizing the importance of groups. The heart of
the controversy was, thus, about the conditions under which to apply strict
scrutiny.

REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA V. BAKKE

(438 U.S. 268, 1978)

Excerpts from Justice Powell’s opinion:

Racial and ethnic classifications . . . are subject to stringent examination
without regard to . . . additional characteristics. We declared as much in the
first cases explicitly to recognize racial distinctions as suspect: “. . . [A]ll
legal restrictions which curtail the rights of a single racial group are imme-
diately suspect. That is not to say that all such restrictions are unconstitu-
tional. It is to say that courts must subject them to the most rigid scrutiny”
(Korematsu, 323 U.S. 214 at 216 [1944]). The Court has never questioned the
validity of those pronouncements. . . .

Petitioner urges us to adopt for the first time a more restrictive view of
the Equal Protection Clause and hold that discrimination against members
of the white “majority” cannot be suspect if its purpose can be characterized
as “benign.” The clock of our liberties, however, cannot be turned back to
1868. It is far too late to argue that the guarantee of equal protection to all
persons permits the recognition of special wards entitled to a degree of pro-
tection greater than that accorded others.

Moreover, there are serious problems of justice connected with the idea
of preference itself. First, it may not always be clear that a so-called prefer-
ence is in fact benign. Courts may be asked to validate burdens imposed
upon individual members of particular groups in order to advance the
group’s general interest. . . . Nothing in the Constitution supports the no-
tion that individuals may be asked to suffer otherwise impermissible bur-
dens in order to enhance the societal standing of their ethnic groups.
Second, preferential programs may only reinforce common stereotypes
holding that certain groups are unable to achieve success without special
protection based on a factor having no relationship to individual worth. . . .
Third, there is a measure of inequity in forcing innocent persons in respon-
dent’s position to bear the burdens of redressing grievances not of their
making.

417

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

Petitioner contends that on several occasions this Court has approved
preferential classifications without applying the most exacting scrutiny.
Most of the cases upon which petitioner relies are drawn from three areas:
school desegregation, employment discrimination, and sex discrimination.
Each of the cases cited presented a situation materially different from the
facts of this case. . . . [W]e have never approved preferential classifications
in the absence of proven constitutional or statutory violations. . . . When a
classification denies an individual opportunities or benefits enjoyed by oth-
ers solely because of his race or ethnic background, it must be regarded as
suspect. . . .

Excerpts from Justice Brennan’s opinion:

. . . Unquestionably we have held that a government practice or statute
which restricts “fundamental rights” or which contains “suspect classifica-
tions” is to be subjected to “strict scrutiny” and can be justified only if it
furthers a compelling government purpose and, even then, only if no less
restrictive alternative is available. . . . But no fundamental right is involved
here. . . . Nor do whites as a class have any of the “traditional indicia of sus-
pectness: the class is not saddled with such disabilities, or subjected to such
a history of purposeful unequal treatment, or relegated to such a position
of political powerlessness as to command extraordinary protection from the
majoritarian political process.” . . .

[The] fact that this case does not fit neatly into our prior analytic frame-
work for race cases does not mean that it should be analyzed by applying
the very loose rational-basis standard of review that is the very least that is
always applied in equal protection cases. . . .

[B]ecause of the significant risk that racial classifications established for
ostensibly benign purposes can be misused, causing effects not unlike those
created by invidious classifications, it is inappropriate to inquire only
whether there is any conceivable basis that might sustain such a classifica-
tion. Instead, to justify such a classification an important and articulated
purpose for its use must be shown. In addition, any statute must be stricken
that stigmatizes any group or that singles out those least well represented in
the political process to bear the brunt of a benign program. Thus our review
under the Fourteenth Amendment should be strict—not “‘strict’ in theory
and fatal in fact,” because it is stigma that causes fatality—but strict and
searching nonetheless. . . .

Do you agree with Powell or with Brennan in their debate about whether strict
scrutiny should be applied to affirmative actions programs in admissions?
Why?

DISCUSSION QUESTION

418

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

LEGAL DEVELOPMENTS SINCE BAKKE

The legal story of affirmative action gets very complicated after the Bakke de-
cision. Because of the split within the Court, it was not clear which parts, if
any, of Powell’s opinion had force as precedent. It was also not clear which
kinds of programs were close enough to the Harvard program that Powell
endorsed; and it was not clear how to extend Powell’s emphasis on diversity
in education to other areas, such as employment and government contracts.
As a result, some affirmative action programs were struck down and others
were upheld while commentators scrambled to explain the underlying pat-
tern and rationale for the Court’s decisions.

The year after Bakke, in United Steelworkers of America v. Weber, 445 U.S.
193 (1979), the Supreme Court upheld a preferential treatment quota in
employment. Later, in Richmond v. J. A. Croson Co., 488 U.S. 469 (1989), the
Court struck down a local program that set aside a specified percentage of
municipal contracts for minority-controlled firms. Then, in Metro Broad-
casting v. FCC, 497 U.S. 547 (1990), the Court allowed a Federal Communi-
cations Commission “distress sale” policy that permitted a broadcaster
whose license or renewal application has been designated for a revocation
hearing to sell the license to a buyer if, but only if, that buyer is at least
50 percent minority-owned. Of course, the majority opinions gave reasons
for each decision, but dissents were common and fierce, and it was hard to
see how the pieces of the puzzle fit together.

The law was somewhat clearer in college admissions. As Justice
O’Connor put it, “Since this Court’s splintered decision in Bakke, Justice
Powell’s opinion announcing the judgment of the Court has served as
the touchstone for constitutional analysis of race-conscious admissions
policies. Public and private universities across the nation have modelled
their own admissions programs on Justice Powell’s views on permissible
race-conscious policies.” Still, there was great uncertainty about exactly
which kinds of admissions programs were allowed by Powell’s reasoning
in Bakke. Some critics also held that the precedent of Bakke should be over-
turned or disregarded, and the Court should hold, instead, that all race-
conscious programs are unconstitutional.

This issue came to a head in 2003, when the Court considered two very
different kinds of admissions programs practiced at the University of
Michigan under its president, Lee Bollinger (hence the names of the cases
below). Michigan’s Law School admissions program was very much like
the Harvard program that Powell endorsed, so that program was upheld.
The admissions program at Michigan’s undergraduate College of Litera-
ture, Science, and the Arts, in contrast, gave a specific number of points to
all applicants in underrepresented minority groups. Critics claimed that
this program amounted to a “quota” more like the Davis Medical School
admissions program that Powell had struck down in Bakke, and the Court
struck it down. The differences between these programs thus define the line
between what is and is not permitted in college admissions today.

419

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

GRUTTER V. BOLLINGER

(539 U.S. 306, 2003)

Syllabus:

The University of Michigan Law School (Law School), one of the Nation’s top
law schools, follows an official admissions policy that seeks to achieve student
body diversity through compliance with Regents of Univ. of Cal. v. Bakke. Fo-
cusing on students’ academic ability coupled with a flexible assessment of
their talents, experiences, and potential, the policy requires admissions offi-
cials to evaluate each applicant based on all the information available in the
file, including a personal statement, letters of recommendation, an essay de-
scribing how the applicant will contribute to Law School life and diversity,
and the applicant’s undergraduate grade point average (GPA) and Law
School Admissions Test (LSAT) score. Additionally, officials must look beyond
grades and scores to so-called “soft variables,” such as recommenders’ enthu-
siasm, the quality of the undergraduate institution and the applicant’s essay,
and the areas and difficulty of undergraduate course selection. The policy
does not define diversity solely in terms of racial and ethnic status and does
not restrict the types of diversity contributions eligible for “substantial
weight,” but it does reaffirm the Law School’s commitment to diversity with
special reference to the inclusion of African-American, Hispanic, and Native-
American students, who otherwise might not be represented in the student
body in meaningful numbers. By enrolling a “critical mass” of underrepre-
sented minority students, the policy seeks to ensure their ability to contribute
to the Law School’s character and to the legal profession.

When the Law School denied admission to petitioner Grutter, a white
Michigan resident with a 3.8 GPA and 161 LSAT score, she filed this suit, al-
leging that respondents had discriminated against her on the basis of race in
violation of the Fourteenth Amendment, Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of
1964, and 42 U.S.C. § 1981; that she was rejected because the Law School
uses race as a “predominant” factor, giving applicants belonging to certain
minority groups a significantly greater chance of admission than students
with similar credentials from disfavored racial groups; and that respondents
had no compelling interest to justify that use of race. . . .

Justice O’Connor delivered the opinion of the Court, in which

Justices Stevens, Souter, Ginsburg, and Breyer joined:

. . . We have held that all racial classifications imposed by government “must
be analyzed by a reviewing court under strict scrutiny.” This means that
such classifications are constitutional only if they are narrowly tailored to
further compelling governmental interests. . . .

With these principles in mind, we turn to the question whether the Law
School’s use of race is justified by a compelling state interest. Before this
Court, as they have throughout this litigation, respondents assert only one

420

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

justification for their use of race in the admissions process: obtaining “the
educational benefits that flow from a diverse student body.” . . .

The Law School’s educational judgment that such diversity is essential to
its educational mission is one to which we defer. The Law School’s assess-
ment that diversity will, in fact, yield educational benefits is substantiated
by respondents and their amici. Our scrutiny of the interest asserted by the
Law School is no less strict for taking into account complex educational
judgments in an area that lies primarily within the expertise of the univer-
sity. Our holding today is in keeping with our tradition of giving a degree of
deference to a university’s academic decisions, within constitutionally pre-
scribed limits. . . .

As part of its goal of “assembling a class that is both exceptionally aca-
demically qualified and broadly diverse,” the Law School seeks to “enroll a
‘critical mass’ of minority students.” The Law School’s interest is not simply
“to assure within its student body some specified percentage of a particular
group merely because of its race or ethnic origin.” That would amount to
outright racial balancing, which is patently unconstitutional. Rather, the
Law School’s concept of critical mass is defined by reference to the educa-
tional benefits that diversity is designed to produce.

These benefits are substantial. As the District Court emphasized, the Law
School’s admissions policy promotes “cross-racial understanding,” helps to
break down racial stereotypes, and “enables [students] to better understand
persons of different races.” These benefits are “important and laudable,” be-
cause “classroom discussion is livelier, more spirited, and simply more en-
lightening and interesting” when the students have “the greatest possible
variety of backgrounds.” . . .

Moreover, universities, and in particular, law schools, represent the train-
ing ground for a large number of our Nation’s leaders. . . . In order to cultivate
a set of leaders with legitimacy in the eyes of the citizenry, it is necessary that
the path to leadership be visibly open to talented and qualified individuals of
every race and ethnicity. All members of our heterogeneous society must have
confidence in the openness and integrity of the educational institutions that
provide this training. . . .

Even in the limited circumstance when drawing racial distinctions is
permissible to further a compelling state interest, government is still “con-
strained in how it may pursue that end: [T]he means chosen to accomplish
the [government’s] asserted purpose must be specifically and narrowly
framed to accomplish that purpose.” The purpose of the narrow tailoring
requirement is to ensure that “the means chosen ‘fit’ . . . the compelling
goal so closely that there is little or no possibility that the motive for the
classification was illegitimate racial prejudice or stereotype.“. . .

To be narrowly tailored, a race-conscious admissions program cannot use
a quota system. . . . We are satisfied that the Law School’s admissions pro-
gram, like the Harvard plan described by Justice Powell, does not operate as
a quota. Properly understood, a “quota” is a program in which a certain
fixed number or proportion of opportunities are “reserved exclusively for

421

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

certain minority groups.“. . . The Law School’s goal of attaining a critical
mass of underrepresented minority students does not transform its program
into a quota. As the Harvard plan described by Justice Powell recognized,
there is of course “some relationship between numbers and achieving the
benefits to be derived from a diverse student body, and between numbers
and providing a reasonable environment for those students admitted.” . . .
Nor, as Justice Kennedy posits, does the Law School’s consultation of the
“daily reports,” which keep track of the racial and ethnic composition of the
class (as well as of residency and gender), “suggest[ ] there was no further
attempt at individual review save for race itself” during the final stages of
the admissions process. To the contrary, the Law School’s admissions offi-
cers testified without contradiction that they never gave race any more or
less weight based on the information contained in these reports. Moreover, .
. . the number of African-American, Latino, and Native-American students
in each class at the Law School varied from 13.5 to 20.1 percent, a range in-
consistent with a quota.

That a race-conscious admissions program does not operate as a quota
does not, by itself, satisfy the requirement of individualized consideration.
When using race as a “plus” factor in university admissions, a university’s
admissions program must remain flexible enough to ensure that each appli-
cant is evaluated as an individual and not in a way that makes an appli-
cant’s race or ethnicity the defining feature of his or her application. The
importance of this individualized consideration in the context of a race-
conscious admissions program is paramount. Here, the Law School engages
in a highly individualized, holistic review of each applicant’s file, giving
serious consideration to all the ways an applicant might contribute to a
diverse educational environment. The Law School affords this individual-
ized consideration to applicants of all races. There is no policy, either de jure
or de facto, of automatic acceptance or rejection based on any single “soft”
variable. Unlike the program at issue in Gratz v. Bollinger [see below], the
Law School awards no mechanical, predetermined diversity “bonuses”
based on race or ethnicity. . . .

What is more, the Law School actually gives substantial weight to diver-
sity factors besides race. The Law School frequently accepts nonminority ap-
plicants with grades and test scores lower than underrepresented minority
applicants (and other nonminority applicants) who are rejected. This shows
that the Law School seriously weighs many other diversity factors besides
race that can make a real and dispositive difference for nonminority appli-
cants as well. By this flexible approach, the Law School sufficiently takes
into account, in practice as well as in theory, a wide variety of characteristics
besides race and ethnicity that contribute to a diverse student body. . . .

Petitioner and the United States argue that the Law School’s plan is not
narrowly tailored because race-neutral means exist to obtain the educa-
tional benefits of student body diversity that the Law School seeks. We dis-
agree. Narrow tailoring does not require exhaustion of every conceivable
race-neutral alternative. Nor does it require a university to choose between

422

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

maintaining a reputation for excellence or fulfilling a commitment to pro-
vide educational opportunities to members of all racial groups. Narrow tai-
loring does, however, require serious, good faith consideration of workable
race-neutral alternatives that will achieve the diversity the university seeks.

We agree with the Court of Appeals that the Law School sufficiently con-
sidered workable race-neutral alternatives. The District Court took the Law
School to task for failing to consider race-neutral alternatives such as “using
a lottery system” or “decreasing the emphasis for all applicants on under-
graduate GPA and LSAT scores.” But these alternatives would require a dra-
matic sacrifice of diversity, the academic quality of all admitted students, or
both. . . . The United States advocates “percentage plans,” recently adopted
by public undergraduate institutions in Texas, Florida, and California to
guarantee admission to all students above a certain class-rank threshold in
every high school in the State. The United States does not, however, explain
how such plans could work for graduate and professional schools. More-
over, even assuming such plans are race-neutral, they may preclude the uni-
versity from conducting the individualized assessments necessary to
assemble a student body that is not just racially diverse, but diverse along
all the qualities valued by the university. We are satisfied that the Law
School adequately considered race-neutral alternatives currently capable of
producing a critical mass without forcing the Law School to abandon the ac-
ademic selectivity that is the cornerstone of its educational mission. . . .

We take the Law School at its word that it would “like nothing better
than to find a race-neutral admissions formula” and will terminate its race-
conscious admissions program as soon as practicable. It has been 25 years
since Justice Powell first approved the use of race to further an interest in
student body diversity in the context of public higher education. Since that
time, the number of minority applicants with high grades and test scores has
indeed increased. We expect that 25 years from now, the use of racial prefer-
ences will no longer be necessary to further the interest approved today.

In summary, the Equal Protection Clause does not prohibit the Law School’s
narrowly tailored use of race in admissions decisions to further a compelling
interest in obtaining the educational benefits that flow from a diverse student
body. Consequently, petitioner’s statutory claims based on Title VI and 42
U.S.C. § 1981 also fail.

Chief Justice Rehnquist, with whom

Justices Scalia, Kennedy, and Thomas join, dissenting:

I do not believe . . . that the University of Michigan Law School’s means are
narrowly tailored to the interest it asserts. The Law School claims it must take
the steps it does to achieve a “‘critical mass’” of underrepresented minority
students. But its actual program bears no relation to this asserted goal. . . .

From 1995 through 2000, the Law School admitted between 1,130
and 1,310 students. Of those, between 13 and 19 were Native American,

423

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

between 91 and 108 were African-Americans, and between 47 and 56 were
Hispanic. If the Law School is admitting between 91 and 108 African-
Americans in order to achieve “critical mass,” thereby preventing African-
American students from feeling “isolated or like spokespersons for their
race,” one would think that a number of the same order of magnitude
would be necessary to accomplish the same purpose for Hispanics and
Native Americans. . . .

Only when the “critical mass” label is discarded does a likely explana-
tion for these numbers emerge. . . . [F]rom 1995 through 2000 the percent-
age of admitted applicants who were members of these minority groups
closely tracked the percentage of individuals in the school’s applicant
pool who were from the same groups. . . . The tight correlation between
the percentage of applicants and admittees of a given race, therefore,
must result from careful race based planning by the Law School. . . . The
Law School has offered no explanation for its actual admissions practices
and, unexplained, we are bound to conclude that the Law School has
managed its admissions program, not to achieve a “critical mass,” but to
extend offers of admission to members of selected minority groups in pro-
portion to their statistical representation in the applicant pool. But this is
precisely the type of racial balancing that the Court itself calls “patently
unconstitutional.”

Justice Thomas, with whom

Justice Scalia joins . . . , concurring in part and dissenting in part:

The Law School adamantly disclaims any race-neutral alternative that
would reduce “academic selectivity,” which would in turn “require the Law
School to become a very different institution, and to sacrifice a core part of
its educational mission.” In other words, the Law School seeks to improve
marginally the education it offers without sacrificing too much of its exclu-
sivity and elite status.

The proffered interest that the majority vindicates today, then, is not sim-
ply “diversity.” Instead the Court upholds the use of racial discrimination as
a tool to advance the Law School’s interest in offering a marginally superior
education while maintaining an elite institution. Unless each constituent
part of this state interest is of pressing public necessity, the Law School’s
use of race is unconstitutional. I find each of them to fall far short of this
standard. . . .

Under the proper standard, there is no pressing public necessity in main-
taining a public law school at all and, it follows, certainly not an elite law
school. Likewise, marginal improvements in legal education do not qualify
as a compelling state interest. . . .

The absence of any articulated legal principle supporting the majority’s
principal holding suggests another rationale. I believe what lies beneath the
Court’s decision today are the benighted notions that one can tell when

424

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

racial discrimination benefits (rather than hurts) minority groups, and that
racial discrimination is necessary to remedy general societal ills. . . .

I must contest the notion that the Law School’s discrimination benefits
those admitted as a result of it. . . . [N]owhere in any of the filings in this
Court is any evidence that the purported “beneficiaries” of this racial dis-
crimination prove themselves by performing at (or even near) the same level
as those students who receive no preferences. . . . The Law School tantalizes
unprepared students with the promise of a University of Michigan degree
and all of the opportunities that it offers. These overmatched students take
the bait, only to find that they cannot succeed in the cauldron of competi-
tion. . . . While these students may graduate with law degrees, there is no ev-
idence that they have received a qualitatively better legal education (or
become better lawyers) than if they had gone to a less “elite” law school for
which they were better prepared. . . .

Beyond the harm the Law School’s racial discrimination visits upon its
test subjects, no social science has disproved the notion that this discrimina-
tion “engenders attitudes of superiority or, alternatively, provoke[s] resent-
ment among those who believe that they have been wronged by the
government’s use of race.” “These programs stamp minorities with a badge
of inferiority and may cause them to develop dependencies or to adopt an
attitude that they are ‘entitled’ to preferences.”

It is uncontested that each year, the Law School admits a handful of
blacks who would be admitted in the absence of racial discrimination.
Who can differentiate between those who belong and those who do not?
The majority of blacks are admitted to the Law School because of discrimi-
nation, and because of this policy all are tarred as undeserving. This prob-
lem of stigma does not depend on determinacy as to whether those
stigmatized are actually the “beneficiaries” of racial discrimination. When
blacks take positions in the highest places of government, industry, or aca-
demia, it is an open question today whether their skin color played a part
in their advancement. . . .

1. Reconstruct Justice O’Connor’s main argument in the selection from her
majority opinion in Grutter.

2. Reconstruct Chief Justice Rehnquist’s main arguments in the selection
from his dissenting opinion in Grutter. How could Justice O’Connor best
respond? Is this response adequate? Why or why not?

3. What are Justice Thomas’s main points in the selection from his dissenting
opinion in Grutter? How could Justice O’Connor best respond? Is this
response adequate? Why or why not?

4. How would you have decided the Grutter case? Why?

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

425

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

GRATZ V. BOLLINGER

(539 U.S. 244, 2003)

Syllabus:

Petitioners Gratz and Hamacher, both of whom are Michigan residents and
Caucasian, applied for admission to the University of Michigan’s (Univer-
sity) College of Literature, Science, and the Arts (LSA) in 1995 and 1997,
respectively. Although the LSA considered Gratz to be well qualified and
Hamacher to be within the qualified range, both were denied early admis-
sion and were ultimately denied admission. [The] University’s Office of Un-
dergraduate Admissions (OUA) . . . considers a number of factors in making
admissions decisions, including high school grades, standardized test
scores, high school quality, curriculum strength, geography, alumni relation-
ships, leadership, and race. During all relevant periods, the University has
considered African-Americans, Hispanics, and Native Americans to be “un-
derrepresented minorities,” and it is undisputed that the University admits
virtually every qualified applicant from these groups. The current guide-
lines use a selection method under which every applicant from an underrep-
resented racial or ethnic minority group is automatically awarded 20 points
of the 100 needed to guarantee admission. . . .

Chief Justice Rehnquist delivered the opinion of the Court, in which Justices O’Connor,

Scalia, Kennedy, and Thomas joined:

We granted certiorari in this case to decide whether “the University of
Michigan’s use of racial preferences in undergraduate admissions violates
the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment, Title VI of the
Civil Rights Act of 1964 . . ., or 42 U.S.C. § 1981. . . .” Because we find that the
manner in which the University considers the race of applicants in its under-
graduate admissions guidelines violates these constitutional and statutory
provisions, we reverse that portion of the District Court’s decision uphold-
ing the guidelines. . . .

It is by now well established that “all racial classifications reviewable
under the Equal Protection Clause must be strictly scrutinized.” . . . To with-
stand our strict scrutiny analysis, respondents must demonstrate that
the University’s use of race in its current admission program employs
“narrowly tailored measures that further compelling governmental inter-
ests.” . . . We find that the University’s policy, which automatically distrib-
utes 20 points, or one-fifth of the points needed to guarantee admission, to
every single “underrepresented minority” applicant solely because of race,
is not narrowly tailored to achieve the interest in educational diversity that
respondents claim justifies their program.

In Bakke, Justice Powell . . . explained . . . that in his view it would be per-
missible for a university to employ an admissions program in which “race
or ethnic background may be deemed a ‘plus’ in a particular applicant’s

426

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

file.” . . . Justice Powell’s opinion in Bakke emphasized the importance of
considering each particular applicant as an individual, assessing all of the
qualities that individual possesses, and in turn, evaluating that individual’s
ability to contribute to the unique setting of higher education. The admis-
sions program Justice Powell described, however, did not contemplate that
any single characteristic automatically ensured a specific and identifiable
contribution to a university’s diversity. . . . Instead, under the approach Jus-
tice Powell described, each characteristic of a particular applicant was to be
considered in assessing the applicant’s entire application.

The current LSA policy does not provide such individualized consideration.
The LSA’s policy automatically distributes 20 points to every single applicant
from an “underrepresented minority” group, as defined by the University. The
only consideration that accompanies this distribution of points is a factual re-
view of an application to determine whether an individual is a member of one
of these minority groups. Moreover, unlike Justice Powell’s example, where the
race of a “particular black applicant” could be considered without being deci-
sive, the LSA’s automatic distribution of 20 points has the effect of making “the
factor of race . . . decisive” for virtually every minimally qualified underrepre-
sented minority applicant.

Also instructive in our consideration of the LSA’s system is the example
provided in the description of the Harvard College Admissions Program,
which Justice Powell both discussed in, and attached to, his opinion in Bakke.
The example was included to “illustrate the kind of significance attached to
race” under the Harvard College program. It provided as follows:

The Admissions Committee, with only a few places left to fill, might find itself
forced to choose between A, the child of a successful black physician in an
academic community with promise of superior academic performance, and B,
a black who grew up in an inner-city ghetto of semi-literate parents whose
academic achievement was lower but who had demonstrated energy and leader-
ship as well as an apparently abiding interest in black power. If a good number of
black students much like A but few like B had already been admitted, the Com-
mittee might prefer B; and vice versa. If C, a white student with extraordinary
artistic talent, were also seeking one of the remaining places, his unique quality
might give him an edge over both A and B. Thus, the critical criteria are often in-
dividual qualities or experience not dependent upon race but sometimes associated
with it. (emphasis added)

This example further demonstrates the problematic nature of the LSA’s ad-
missions system. Even if student C’s “extraordinary artistic talent” rivaled
that of Monet or Picasso, the applicant would receive, at most, five points
under the LSA’s system. At the same time, every single underrepresented
minority applicant, including students A and B, would automatically receive
20 points for submitting an application. Clearly, the LSA’s system does not
offer applicants the individualized selection process described in Harvard’s
example. Instead of considering how the differing backgrounds, experi-
ences, and characteristics of students A, B, and C might benefit the Univer-
sity, admissions counselors reviewing LSA applications would simply

427

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

award both A and B 20 points because their applications indicate that they
are African-American, and student C would receive up to 5 points for his
“extraordinary talent.”

Respondents emphasize the fact that the LSA has created the possibility of
an applicant’s file being flagged for individualized consideration by the
ARC. We think that the flagging program only emphasizes the flaws of the
University’s system as a whole when compared to that described by Justice
Powell. Again, students A, B, and C illustrate the point. First, student A
would never be flagged. This is because, as the University has conceded, the
effect of automatically awarding 20 points is that virtually every qualified
underrepresented minority applicant is admitted. Student A, an applicant
“with promise of superior academic performance,” would certainly fit this
description. Thus, the result of the automatic distribution of 20 points is that
the University would never consider student A’s individual background, ex-
periences, and characteristics to assess his individual “potential contribution to
diversity.” Instead, every applicant like student A would simply be admitted.

It is possible that students B and C would be flagged and considered as in-
dividuals. This assumes that student B was not already admitted because of
the automatic 20-point distribution, and that student C could muster at least 70
additional points. But the fact that the “review committee can look at the appli-
cations individually and ignore the points,” once an application is flagged is of
little comfort under our strict scrutiny analysis. The record does not reveal pre-
cisely how many applications are flagged for this individualized consideration,
but it is undisputed that such consideration is the exception and not the rule in
the operation of the LSA’s admissions program. Additionally, this individual-
ized review is only provided after admissions counselors automatically distrib-
ute the University’s version of a “plus” that makes race a decisive factor for
virtually every minimally qualified underrepresented minority applicant.

Respondents contend that “the volume of applications and the presenta-
tion of applicant information make it impractical for [LSA] to use the . . . ad-
missions system” upheld by the Court today in Grutter. But the fact that the
implementation of a program capable of providing individualized consider-
ation might present administrative challenges does not render constitutional
an otherwise problematic system. Nothing in Justice Powell’s opinion in
Bakke signalled that a university may employ whatever means it desires to
achieve the stated goal of diversity without regard to the limits imposed by
our strict scrutiny analysis.

We conclude, therefore, that because the University’s use of race in its
current freshman admissions policy is not narrowly tailored to achieve re-
spondents’ asserted compelling interest in diversity, the admissions policy
violates the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment. . . .

Justice Souter, with whom Justice Ginsburg joins as to Part II, dissenting:

The record does not describe a system with a quota like the one struck down
in Bakke, which “insulated” all nonminority candidates from competition

428

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

from certain seats. . . . The plan here, in contrast, lets all applicants compete
for all places and values an applicant’s offering for any place not only on
grounds of race, but on grades, test scores, strength of high school, quality
of course of study, residence, alumni relationships, leadership, personal
character, socioeconomic disadvantage, athletic ability, and quality of a per-
sonal essay. A nonminority applicant who scores highly in these other cate-
gories can readily garner a selection index exceeding that of a minority
applicant who gets the 20-point bonus.

Subject to one qualification to be taken up below, this scheme of consid-
ering, through the selection index system, all of the characteristics that the
college thinks relevant to student diversity for every one of the student
places to be filled fits Justice Powell’s description of a constitutionally ac-
ceptable program: one that considers “all pertinent elements of diversity
in light of the particular qualifications of each applicant” and places each
element “on the same footing for consideration, although not necessarily
according them the same weight.” In the Court’s own words, “each char-
acteristic of a particular applicant [is] considered in assessing the appli-
cant’s entire application.” An unsuccessful nonminority applicant cannot
complain that he was rejected “simply because he was not the right color“;
an applicant who is rejected because “his combined qualifications . . . did
not outweigh those of the other applicant” has been given an opportunity
to compete with all other applicants.

The one qualification to this description of the admissions process is that
membership in an underrepresented minority is given a weight of 20 points
on the 150-point scale. On the face of things, however, this assignment
of specific points does not set race apart from all other weighted con-
siderations. Nonminority students may receive 20 points for athletic ability,
socioeconomic disadvantage, attendance at a socioeconomically disadvan-
taged or predominantly minority high school, or at the Provost’s discretion;
they may also receive 10 points for being residents of Michigan, 6 for
residence in an underrepresented Michigan county, 5 for leadership and
service, and so on.

The Court nonetheless finds fault with a scheme that “automatically”
distributes 20 points to minority applicants because “the only considera-
tion that accompanies this distribution of points is a factual review of an
application to determine whether an individual is a member of one of
these minority groups.” The objection goes to the use of points to quantify
and compare characteristics, or to the number of points awarded due to
race, but on either reading the objection is mistaken.

The very nature of a college’s permissible practice of awarding value to
racial diversity means that race must be considered in a way that increases
some applicants’ chances for admission. Since college admission is not left
entirely to inarticulate intuition, it is hard to see what is inappropriate in
assigning some stated value to a relevant characteristic, whether it be
reasoning ability, writing style, running speed, or minority race. Justice

429

The Law of D iscr im inat ion

Powell’s plus factors necessarily are assigned some values. The college
simply does by a numbered scale what the [Michigan] law school accom-
plishes in its “holistic review“; the distinction does not imply that applicants
to the undergraduate college are denied individualized consideration or
a fair chance to compete on the basis of all the various merits their applica-
tions may disclose.

Nor is it possible to say that the 20 points convert race into a decisive
factor comparable to reserving minority places as in Bakke. Of course we
can conceive of a point system in which the “plus” factor given to minor-
ity applicants would be so extreme as to guarantee every minority appli-
cant a higher rank than every nonminority applicant in the university’s
admissions system. But petitioners do not have a convincing argument
that the freshman admissions system operates this way. The present
record obviously shows that nonminority applicants may achieve higher
selection point totals than minority applicants owing to characteristics
other than race, and the fact that the university admits “virtually every
qualified underrepresented minority applicant,” may reflect nothing
more than the likelihood that very few qualified minority applicants ap-
ply, as well as the possibility that self-selection results in a strong minor-
ity applicant pool. It suffices for me, as it did for the District Court, that
there are no Bakke-like set-asides and that consideration of an applicant’s
whole spectrum of ability is no more ruled out by giving 20 points for
race than by giving the same points for athletic ability or socioeconomic
disadvantage. . . .

In contrast to the college’s forthrightness in saying just what plus factor it
gives for membership in an underrepresented minority, it is worth considering
the character of one alternative thrown up as preferable, because supposedly
not based on race. Drawing on admissions systems used at public universities
in California, Florida, and Texas, the United States contends that Michigan
could get student diversity in satisfaction of its compelling interest by guaran-
teeing admission to a fixed percentage of the top students from each high
school in Michigan.

While there is nothing unconstitutional about such a practice, it nonethe-
less suffers from a serious disadvantage.* It is the disadvantage of deliberate
obfuscation. The “percentage plans” are just as race conscious as the point
scheme (and fairly so), but they get their racially diverse results without
saying directly what they are doing or why they are doing it. In contrast,
Michigan states its purpose directly and, if this were a doubtful case for me,
I would be tempted to give Michigan an extra point of its own for its frank-
ness. Equal protection cannot become an exercise in which the winners are
the ones who hide the ball.

*Of course it might be pointless in the State of Michigan, where minorities are a much smaller
fraction of the population than in California, Florida, or Texas.

430

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

BURDEN OF PROOF

A remarkable feature of the line of cases from Plessy through Brown to Bakke,
Grutter, and Gratz is the extent to which interpretations of the equal protec-
tion clause turn on the matter of burden of proof. Under the rational-relation
test that governed Plessy, the state bears a light burden when it is asked to
show that its actions do not conflict with the equal protection clause. In con-
trast, the strict-scrutiny test that governed Brown, that Powell applied in
Bakke, and that the Court applies in Grutter and Gratz places a very heavy
burden on the state to justify any use of a suspect classification or any inter-
ference with fundamental rights.

It may seem peculiar that an important legal decision can turn on such a
technical and procedural matter as burden of proof. But the question of bur-
den of proof often plays a decisive role in a legal decision, so it is worth
knowing something about it.

The two basic questions concerning burden of proof are (1) who bears this
burden and (2) how heavy is the burden. In our system of criminal justice,
the rules governing burden of proof are fairly straightforward. The state has
the burden of establishing the guilt of the accused. The defendant has no

1. Describe the main differences among the following admissions programs.
Which of these differences are relevant to the constitutionality of these pro-
grams, in your opinion?

a. The admissions program at Michigan Law School

b. The admissions program at Michigan’s College of Literature, Science, and
the Arts

c. The percentage plan used in California, Florida, and Texas

d. A lottery among all qualified candidates

2. In your opinion, would the admissions program at Michigan’s College of
Literature, Science, and the Arts be unconstitutional if, instead of twenty
points, it awarded only five points to members of underrepresented minor-
ity groups? What if it awarded fifty points? Does the number of points
matter at all? Why or why not?

3. Much of the debate between Justices Rehnquist and Souter in Gratz
concerns whether applicants receive “individualized consideration.”
What exactly does this mean? Why is it important in this context?

4. What are the implications of Grutter and Gratz for admissions policies in
private colleges and universities? For preferential treatment in hiring? In
government contracts?

5. Find out what kinds of preferential treatment programs exist in your own
school or town, and then argue either that these programs are
constitutional or that they are not.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

431

Burden of Proof

obligation to establish his or her innocence. That is what is meant by saying
that the defendant is innocent until proven guilty. The burden of proof is also
very heavy on the state in criminal procedures, for it must show beyond a
reasonable doubt that the accused is guilty. If the prosecution shows only that
it is more likely than not that the accused has committed a crime, then the
jury should vote for acquittal.

Turning to civil law, there is no simple way to explain burden of proof.
Very roughly, the plaintiff (the one who brings the suit) has an initial burden
to establish a prima facie case—that is, a case that is strong enough that it
needs to be rebutted—on behalf of his or her complaint. The burden then
shifts to the respondent (the one against whom the suit is being brought) to
answer these claims. The burden may then shift back and forth depending
on the nature of the procedure. Provided that both sides have met their
legally required burdens of proof, the case is then decided on the basis of the
preponderance of evidence; that is, the judge or jury decides which side has
made the stronger case.

Burden of proof is primarily a legal notion, but it is sometimes used,
often loosely, outside the law. The notion of burden of proof is needed
within the law because law cases are adversarial and the court has to
come to a decision. Outside the law, people have a general burden to have
good reasons for what they say. That is the second part of Grice’s rule of
Quality (described in Chapter 2). More specifically, people have a burden
to be able to present some reasons when they make accusations or state-
ments that run counter to common opinion.

The important thing to see is that you cannot establish the truth of some-
thing through an appeal to the burden of proof. The following argument is
perfectly weird:

There is life in other parts of the universe, because you can’t prove
otherwise.

Of course, no one can prove that there is not life elsewhere in the uni-
verse, but this has no tendency to show that there is. Attempts to prove
the truth of something through appeals to burden of proof—often called
arguments from ignorance—are another example of a fallacy of relevance.
(See Chapter 15.)

Nonetheless, the importance of burden of proof in the law does give force
to another kind of argument. In a criminal case, the following argument
would be perfectly fine:

The defendant ought to be found not guilty, because the prosecution has
not proven beyond a reasonable doubt that she is guilty.

This argument would also be a fallacy of relevance if the burden of proof
were not so important. But the relevant burden of proof makes this argu-
ment strong in a court of law. Who bears the burden of proof and how
heavy the burden is determine which legal arguments work. Consider the
following argument:

432

CHAPTER 18 ■ Legal Reason ing

Try to formulate general rules governing who has the burden of proof when
people disagree. Be sure to consider a variety of areas, such as science, religion,
philosophy, morality, and personal life.

DISCUSSION QUESTION

This law uses a suspect classification, and the state has not shown that
it serves any compelling purpose, so the law is unconstitutional.

This argument is strong if the strict-scrutiny interpretation is accepted
(assuming the premises are true). But this argument fails if a weaker burden
of proof is required, as in the rational-relation test. When one chooses
between interpretations of the equal protection clause and between different
burdens of proof, one also chooses which arguments will have force in
courts of law. This is another example of a general phenomenon that has
been stressed throughout this book—that background assumptions can
determine whether an argument is any good.

Moral Reasoning

Many acts—such as lying to a friend—are not illegal, but they still seem immoral.

Thus, even if such an act is legally permitted, this does not show that it is morally

permitted. That is a separate issue, and it is one that many people care deeply about,

because they want to do what is moral and avoid doing what is immoral. But how can

we show that an act is moral or immoral? One kind of argument will not do. We can

often show that an act is illegal by citing official pronouncements by judges and leg-

islators, such as precedents and statutes. In contrast, morality is not decided by any

official. There are no authoritative books in which we can look up whether a certain

act is immoral without asking whether that book is correct. This affects the nature of

moral arguments and the criteria for evaluating them. We cannot appeal to any doc-

uments or officials to justify our moral beliefs, so moral beliefs must be based on

something else. The kinds of arguments that can be used to justify moral beliefs will

be the topic of this chapter.

MORAL DISAGREEMENTS

People often disagree on moral questions. When these disagreements arise,
it is often difficult—and sometimes impossible—to resolve them. At times
these disagreements turn on questions of fact. If one person thinks that an
action will have a particular consequence, and another thinks that it will not,
they might well disagree on the moral worth of that action. For example,
those who have defended the United States’ decision to drop atomic bombs
on Japan have often claimed that it was the only way to end the war quickly
without creating a great number of casualties on both sides. Many critics of
this decision have denied this factual claim.

Moral disagreements can also arise from disagreements about moral prin-
ciples. To many people, it is immoral to have sex outside marriage. To oth-
ers, it is immoral to interfere with such acts.

Despite such disagreements, it is surprising how much agreement there
is on general moral principles. In our society, most people accept a great
many moral principles as a matter of course. If a policy has no other conse-
quence but to produce widespread misery, it is rejected out of hand. We
share a conception of justice that includes, among other things, equality of

19

433

434

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

opportunity and equality before the law. Most people also have a conception
of human dignity: A human being is not a thing to be used and disposed of
for personal advantage.

With all this agreement, how does moral disagreement arise at all? One
answer is that in certain circumstances, our moral principles conflict with
one another, and people are inclined to resolve these conflicts in different
ways. People often agree on principles about welfare, justice, and human
dignity, and yet, by weighing these principles differently or seeing the situa-
tion in a different light, they arrive at opposing moral conclusions.

Another kind of moral disagreement concerns the range or scope of
moral principles. Even if everyone agrees that death and suffering are
bad, they often disagree about whose death and suffering count. With few
exceptions, it is thought to be wrong to inflict death and suffering on hu-
man beings. Most people have a similar attitude toward their pet dogs or
cats. Some, however, go further and claim that it is also immoral to kill
any animals—including cows, chickens, and fish—just to produce tasty
food for humans.

The hardest problems combine issues of range with conflicts of principles. It
is a disagreement of this complex kind that we will focus on in this chapter.
The problem is abortion. The main issues are (1) whether fetuses lie within
the range of a standard moral principle against killing, and (2) how to re-
solve conflicts between the principles that protect fetuses and other princi-
ples concerning, for example, human welfare and a woman’s control over
her body.

THE PROBLEM OF ABORTION

When faced with a moral problem, it often seems clear what the problem is,
but this assumption can be mistaken. Sometimes a problem is formulated so
vaguely that there is no way even to begin to solve it. People can argue for
hours or even years without realizing that they are really talking about dif-
ferent things.

To clarify a moral problem, the first step is to specify precisely what is
being judged—which action or kind of action is at issue. In the problem of
abortion, the first step is to specify exactly what counts as an abortion. It is
common to define abortion as the termination of a pregnancy. This in-
cludes spontaneous abortions or miscarriages, but these raise no moral
problems because they are not the result of human action. Furthermore,
the moral problem of abortion arises only when the death of the fetus is an
expected consequence of terminating the pregnancy. To focus on these
problematic cases, from now on we will take “abortion” to mean the inten-
tional termination of a pregnancy with the expected consequence that the
fetus dies as a result.

435

The Problem of Abort ion

After the class of actions is picked out, we need to determine what is be-
ing asked about this class of actions—what kind of moral judgment is at
stake. It is one thing to ask whether abortion is morally wrong, and another
thing to ask whether abortion should be illegal. These are both moral ques-
tions (because the second asks what the law should be and not what it is),
but they can be answered differently. It is not uncommon for people to claim
that abortion is morally wrong but should not be made illegal, because it is
a matter of personal, not public, morality. It is also important to distinguish
the question of whether abortion is or is not morally wrong from the sepa-
rate question of whether abortion is or is not good. People who deny that
abortion is morally wrong do not hold that abortion is a positive good. They
do not, for example, recommend that people get pregnant so that they can
have abortions. So, from now on, we will focus on the issue of the moral
wrongness of abortion.

THE “PRO-LIFE” ARGUMENT

We can begin to understand this problem if we reconstruct the main argu-
ment against abortion, using the method sketched in Chapter 5. Most oppo-
nents of abortion call themselves “pro-life” and base their position on an
appeal to a moral principle involving the “right to life.” Of course, most op-
ponents of abortion are not opposed to killing weeds, germs, or even fish.
What they have in mind, then, is probably a principle such as this:

It is always morally wrong to kill a human being.

This principle by itself does not rule out abortion. To reach this conclusion,
we need further premises of the following kind:

Abortion involves killing a human fetus.

A human fetus is a human being.

With these premises, the anti-abortion argument will have the following
form:

(1) It is always morally wrong to kill a human being.
(2) Abortion involves killing a human fetus.
(3) A human fetus is a human being.

(4) Abortion is always morally wrong.

This argument is valid and reasonably charitable, so we have completed the
first stage of reconstruction.

We next ask if the premises of this argument are true. The second premise
is not controversial, given our definition of abortion; but the third premise
raises many problems. Much of the debate concerning abortion turns on the
question of whether a fetus is a human being. We will examine this question

436

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

later on. For now, we will assume for the sake of argument that a fetus is a
human being. That leaves only the first premise.

Some people—for example, strong pacifists—accept premise (1), but most
people who adopt strong anti-abortion positions do not. This comes out in
the following way. Many of those who oppose abortion are in favor of the
death penalty for certain crimes. Therefore, they do not accept the general
principle that it is always wrong to take a human life. What they need, then,
is a principle that allows taking a human life in some instances but not in
others. In an effort to achieve this, those who oppose abortion could refor-
mulate the first premise in these words:

(1*) It is always morally wrong to kill an innocent human being.

Here the word “innocent” allows an exception for the death penalty being
imposed on those who are found guilty of certain crimes. Of course, if we
simply stick this premise into the previous argument, the result is invalid:

(1*) It is always morally wrong to kill an innocent human being.
(2) Abortion involves killing a human fetus.
(3) A human fetus is a human being.

(4) Abortion is always morally wrong.

To make it valid, we need to add a new premise, so that the whole argument
looks like this:

(1*) It is always morally wrong to kill an innocent human being.
(2) Abortion involves killing a human fetus.
(3) A human fetus is a human being.
(4*) A human fetus is innocent.

(5) Abortion is always morally wrong.

Even stated this way, however, the first premise seems to admit of coun-
terexamples. If someone’s life is threatened by a madman, it is generally
thought that the person has the right to use whatever means are necessary
against the madman to prevent being killed. This may include killing the
madman, even though the insane are usually thought to be morally innocent
of their deeds. If so, the moral principle must be modified again, and then
we get something like this:

(1**) It is always morally wrong to kill an innocent human being except
in self-defense.

It is still possible to find difficulties with this principle that will lead some to
add further modifications or clarifications. Children, for example, are often
the innocent victims of bombing raids, yet the raids are often thought to be
justified, because these deaths are not intended, even though they are fore-
seeable. At this point it is common to modify the principle again by includ-
ing a reference to intentions. We shall not, however, pursue this complex line
of reasoning here.1

437

The Problem of Abort ion

We have arrived, then, at a principle that seems to make sense out of a posi-
tion that is against abortion but in favor of the death penalty and self-defense.
With these modifications included, the argument now looks like this:

(1**) It is always morally wrong to kill an innocent human being
except in self-defense.

(2) Abortion involves killing a human fetus.
(3) A human fetus is a human being.
(4*) A human fetus is innocent.

(5) Abortion is always morally wrong.

Again, however, by making the premises more plausible, we created a new
problem: The argument is invalid as it stands, since the qualification “except
in self-defense” is missing from the conclusion. The proper conclusion of the
argument should be:

(5*) Abortion is always morally wrong except in self-defense.

Rewriting the conclusion in this way has an important consequence: The ar-
gument no longer leads to a conclusion that abortion is always wrong. This
qualified conclusion could permit abortion in those cases in which it is
needed to defend the life of the pregnant woman who bears the fetus. In
fact, this is the position that many people who are generally opposed to
abortion adopt: Abortion is wrong except in those cases in which it is neces-
sary to save the life of the mother. Although this does not lay down an ab-
solute prohibition, it is still a strong anti-abortion position, since it would
condone abortion in only a few exceptional cases.

“PRO-CHOICE” RESPONSES

We can now examine the way in which those who adopt the liberal or “pro-
choice” position will respond to the conservative or “pro-life” argument as
it has just been spelled out. The second premise should not be a subject for
controversy, given our definition of abortion. Nor does it seem likely that the
fourth premise will be attacked on the ground that the fetus is not innocent.
How could a fetus be guilty of anything?

This leaves three strategies for the liberal: (1) Further modify the moral
principle in the first premise to allow more exceptions. (2) Deny the third
premise—that the fetus is a human being. (3) Oppose this conservative ar-
gument with a different argument based on a different moral principle.

FURTHER MODIFICATIONS. Even if it is agreed that abortion is justified when
it saves the mother’s life, we still need to ask whether this is the only excep-
tion or whether abortion is justified in other cases as well. Many pro-life con-
servatives admit that abortion is also justified when the pregnancy results
from rape or incest. It is not easy to see how to modify the moral principle
against killing to allow an exception in cases of rape and incest, so this exception

438

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

is controversial. We will return to this issue later. But even if exceptions are
made both for life-threatening pregnancies and for pregnancies due to rape
and incest, the range of morally permissible abortions will still be very small.

Pro-choice liberals can, however, argue for a wider range of morally per-
missible abortions by extending the self-defense exception. It can be argued
that a woman has a right to defend not only her life but also her physical and
psychological well-being. Liberals can also argue that the exception of rape
shows that abortion is allowed when the woman is not responsible for her
pregnancy, and this might include cases in which the woman tried to prevent
pregnancy by using contraceptives. Granting exceptions of this kind does not
provide the basis for an absolute right to an abortion, but it does move things
away from a “pro-life” position in the direction of a “pro-choice” position.

THE STATUS OF THE FETUS. So far we have assumed for the sake of argu-
ment that a human fetus is a human being. But pro-choice liberals often
deny this premise. It may seem hard to deny that a human fetus is human.
After all, it is not an aardvark. Liberals, however, claim that the real issue is
not about biological species. The real issue is whether a human fetus is cov-
ered by the moral principle against killing, and whether it is protected to the
same extent as an adult human. Anything that is protected to this extent is
said to have a “right to life” and will be called a “person.” The issue, then, is
whether a human fetus is a person. If a fetus is a person, the burden of proof
is on those who defend abortion to show why the moral principle against
killing should be set aside or modified. If a fetus is not a person, this moral
principle cannot show that there is anything wrong with abortion for any
reason—with what is called “abortion on demand.”

Any argument that a fetus either is a person or is not a person must pro-
ceed from some idea of which properties make something a person—which
properties warrant the protection of moral principles. To argue that a fetus is
not a person, pro-choice liberals need to find some feature that fetuses lack
and that is necessary for personhood. In response, pro-life conservatives need
to find some feature that fetuses have and that is sufficient for personhood.

Many conditions of personhood have been suggested. This list is not
complete:

Genetic code (which determines biological species)

Ensoulment (when a soul enters the body)

Brain activity (first detected around eight weeks)

Sentience (capacity to feel pain and pleasure)

Viability (when the fetus can survive outside the womb)

Rationality (and other related capacities)

Pro-life conservatives usually emphasize tests such as genetic code (which
is formed at conception) or ensoulment (which is supposed to occur at or
shortly after conception). In contrast, pro-choice liberals usually employ

439

The Problem of Abort ion

tests such as viability (which is reached during the second trimester) or ra-
tionality (which comes sometime after birth, depending on what counts as
rationality—ability to choose and plan, self-consciousness, and so on). Thus,
the personhood of fetuses during the first trimester is usually asserted by
conservatives and denied by liberals on this issue.

How can we determine whether a feature is necessary or sufficient for per-
sonhood? We can start by rejecting any test of personhood that leads to implau-
sible results. Pro-life conservatives argue that rationality is not necessary for
personhood, because, whatever rationality is, newborn babies and severely re-
tarded adults are not rational, but it is still morally wrong to kill them. Other
tests of personhood are ruled out because they do not seem important enough.
Pro-choice liberals argue that a certain genetic code is not sufficient to make
something a person, because there is no reason to favor one genetic code over
another except that it later produces other important features, such as rational-
ity. It is also common to rule out a test of personhood if we cannot know when
the test is passed. For example, many people reject ensoulment as a criterion of
personhood, because they see no way to tell when, if ever, a fetus has a soul.
And tests of personhood are also often rejected if they depend on factors that
are extraneous. Conservatives often argue that viability cannot be a test of per-
sonhood, because the point when a fetus can survive outside the womb de-
pends on what technology happens to be available to doctors at the time.

In addition to features that fetuses have when they are fetuses, they also
seem to have the potential to develop many more, including rationality. Op-
ponents of abortion often use this premise to argue that fetuses are persons
and have a right to life. The first problem with this argument is that it seems
to assume that something has a right if it has the potential to come to have
that right. But this is clearly too strong. A three-year-old child does not have
the right to vote even though it has the potential to develop into someone
who will have the right to vote. Furthermore, the notion of potential is not
clear. If the fetus has the potential, why do the egg and sperm not have it?
This does not refute potentiality as a test of personhood, but much more
must be done to show what potentiality is and why it is sufficient to make
something a person even before the potential is realized.

All these positions on personhood are controversial, and many people
feel uncertain about which is the correct one. A major issue in many moral
problems is how to deal with uncertainties such as this. One reaction is a po-
sition called “gradualism.”2 We have assumed so far that the fetus either has
a full right to life or has no right to life at all, but rights sometimes come in
varying strengths. Gradualists claim that a fetus slowly develops a right to
life that is at first very weak. As pregnancy progresses, this right gets
stronger, so it takes more to justify abortion. Late abortions still might be
permitted, but only in extreme circumstances. This position is still vague,
but it is attractive to some people who want to avoid placing too much em-
phasis on any single point in fetal development.

Uncertainty is also exploited in other ways. We already discussed slippery-
slope arguments in Chapter 13. Another way to exploit uncertainty is to put

440

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

the burden on the other side to produce a reason for drawing a line at some
point. For example, Ronald Reagan said, “Anyone who doesn’t feel sure
whether we are talking about a second human life should clearly give life the
benefit of the doubt.” However, the same kind of argument is also available to
defenders of abortion: Since we are not sure whether the fetus is a person, but
we are sure that the pregnant woman has rights over her body, we should
give the benefit of the doubt to the pregnant woman. We should always sus-
pect that there is something wrong with an argument that can be used equally
well in opposing directions.

CONFLICTING PRINCIPLES. A third kind of pro-choice response is to invoke
another principle, which conflicts with the pro-life principle against killing.
Pro-choice liberals often emphasize two such principles: one about the
rights of the pregnant woman to control her own body and another about
overall human welfare. We will focus for now on human welfare.

Defenders of abortion often argue that abortion can sometimes be justified
in terms of the welfare of the woman who bears the fetus, or in terms of the
welfare of the family into which it will be born, or even in terms of the wel-
fare of the child itself (if it were to be born with a severe disability or into an
impoverished situation). This argument, when spelled out, looks like this:

(1) An action that best increases overall human welfare is not morally
wrong.

(2) Abortion is sometimes the best way of increasing overall human
welfare.

(3) Abortion is sometimes not morally wrong.

What are we to say about this argument? It seems valid in form, so we can
turn to the premises themselves and ask whether they are acceptable. The first
(and leading) premise of the argument is subject to two immediate criticisms.
First, it is vague. Probably what a person who uses this kind of argument has
in mind by speaking of human welfare is a certain level of material and psy-
chological well-being. Of course, this is still vague, but it is clear enough to
make the premise a target of the second, more important, criticism: Although
maximizing human welfare may, in general, be a good thing, it is not the only
relevant consideration in deciding how to act. For example, it might be true
that our society would be much more prosperous on the whole if 10 percent
of the population were designated slaves who would do all the menial work.
Yet even if a society could be made generally happy in this way, most people
would reject such a system on the grounds that it is unfair to the slave class.
(See the discussion of counterexamples in Chapter 17.) For reasons of this
kind, most people would modify premise (1) in the following way:

(1*) An action that best increases human welfare is not morally wrong,
provided that it is not unfair.

441

The Problem of Abort ion

But if the first premise is modified in this way, then the entire argument
must be restated to reflect this revision. It will now look like this:

(1*) An action that best increases human welfare is not morally wrong,
provided that it is not unfair.

(2*) Abortion is sometimes an action that best increases human welfare.

(3*) Abortion is sometimes not morally wrong, provided that it is not
unfair.

It should be obvious how opponents of abortion will reply to this argu-
ment. They will maintain that abortion almost always involves unfairness—
namely, to the fetus—so abortion is still wrong in almost all cases, as the
pro-life argument claimed. Once more we have encountered a standard
situation: Given a strong premise (premise 1), it is possible to derive a par-
ticular conclusion, but this strong premise is subject to criticism and there-
fore must be modified. When the premise is modified as in 1*, it no longer
supports the original conclusion that the person presenting the argument
wishes to establish.

The argument does not stop here. A defender of abortion might reply in
a number of ways. Some theory of fairness might be developed to argue
that many abortions are not unfair to the fetus, because the fetus has no
right to use the pregnant woman’s body. (See the reading from Thomson,
page 446.) The burden of the argument may shift to the question of whether
or not a human fetus is a person and therefore possessed of a right to fair
treatment. It might also be argued that questions of human welfare are
sometimes more important than issues of fairness. During war and some
emergencies, for example, members of a certain segment of the population
are called on to risk their lives for the good of the whole in ways that might
seem unfair to them.

When the argument is put on this new basis, the question becomes this:
Are there circumstances in which matters of welfare become so urgent
that the rights of the fetus (assuming the fetus has rights) are overridden?
The obvious case in which this might happen is when the life of the bearer
of the fetus is plainly threatened. For many conservatives on abortion,
abortion is permitted in such cases. Some who hold a pro-choice position
will maintain that severe psychological, financial, or personal losses to the
pregnant woman may also take precedence over the life of the fetus. Fur-
thermore, if not aborted, many fetuses would live in very deprived cir-
cumstances, and some would not develop very far or live very long,
because they have deadly diseases, such as Tay-Sachs. How severe must
these losses, deprivations, and diseases be? From our previous discussion
of slippery-slope arguments in Chapter 13, we know that we should not
expect any sharp lines here. Indeed, people will tend to be spread out in
their opinions along a continuum ranging from a belief in complete pro-
hibition to no prohibition.

442

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

ANALOGICAL REASONING IN ETHICS

Using the method for reconstructing arguments, we now have a fairly clear
idea of the main options on the abortion issue. But understanding the struc-
ture of the debate—though essential for dealing with it intelligently—does
not settle it. If the reasons on all sides are fully spelled out and disagreement
remains, what is to be done?

At this stage, those who do not simply turn to abuse often appeal to ana-
logical arguments. The point of an analogical argument is to reach a conclu-
sion in a controversial case by comparing it to a similar situation in which it
is clearer what is right or wrong. In fact, a great deal of ethical reasoning
uses such analogies. We have already seen one simple analogy between an
abortion to save the life of the mother and self-defense against an insane
person. To get a better idea of how analogical reasoning works in ethics, we
will concentrate on a more complex analogy, which raises the issue of
whether abortion is morally permissible in cases of pregnancy due to rape.

A classic analogical argument is given by Judith Jarvis Thomson in “A
Defense of Abortion” (reprinted page 446). Thomson grants for the sake of
argument that a fetus is a person. Then she tells the following story:

You wake up in the morning and find yourself back to back in bed with an
unconscious violinist. A famous unconscious violinist. He has been found to have a
fatal kidney ailment, and the Society of Music Lovers has canvassed all the available
medical records and found that you alone have the right blood type to help. They
have therefore kidnapped you, and last night the violinist’s circulatory system was
plugged into yours, so that your kidneys can be used to extract poisons from his
blood as well as your own. The director of the hospital now tells you, “Look, we’re
sorry the Society of Music Lovers did this to you—we would never have permitted it
if we had known. But still, they did it, and the violinist now is plugged into you. To
unplug you would be to kill him. But never mind, it’s only for nine months. By then
he will have recovered from his ailment, and can safely be unplugged from you.”

Thomson claims that it is not wrong for you to unplug yourself from the vi-
olinist in this situation, and most people seem to agree with this judgment.
By analogy, abortion after rape is not wrong either, or so she says.

The basic assumption of this analogical argument is that we should not
make different moral judgments in cases that do not differ. More positively:

(1) If two actions are similar in all morally relevant respects, and if one
of the acts is not morally wrong, then the other act is also not
morally wrong.

Now we can apply this principle to Thomson’s story:

(2) It is not morally wrong for you to unplug the violinist in
Thomson’s example.

(3) To unplug the violinist and to abort a pregnancy due to rape are
similar in all morally relevant respects.

(4) It is not morally wrong for a woman to abort a pregnancy due to rape.

443

Analog ical Reason ing in Eth ics

This argument is valid, so, following the normal procedure, we can ask whether
the premises are true. The first premise seems plausible, and it is accepted in
most moral theories. Most people also accept the second premise. Consequently,
the discussion usually focuses on the third premise—on the similarities and dif-
ferences between Thomson’s story and abortion in a pregnancy due to rape.

First, consider these similarities between Thomson’s story and abortion
after rape:

1. Both the fetus and the violinist are on or near the Earth.

2. Kidnapping is immoral and illegal, like rape.

3. The hospital stay lasts nine months, like pregnancy.

4. The violinist is innocent and a human being, like the fetus (given our
present assumption).

5. Unplugging the violinist is supposed to be killing, like an abortion.

Now here are some differences between the situations:

6. The fetus cannot play the violin, but the violinist can.

7. The person who is plugged into the violinist might not be female.

8. The person who is plugged into the violinist cannot leave the hospital
room, but pregnant women can still move around, even if they have
some difficulty.

9. Abortion involves killing, but unplugging the violinist is merely refus-
ing to save.

It is obvious that some of the similarities and differences are not relevant. It
does not matter whether killing occurs near the Earth. Killing is usually
wrong, even on the starship Enterprise. It is also accepted that differences in
musical talent and in sex cannot justify killing. The other similarities and
differences on our list do seem important. They each concern harm and re-
sponsibility, matters that must be considered in reaching a moral judgment
about these actions. The force of Thomson’s analogical argument is that the
very features that lead us to conclude that it would not be wrong to unplug
the violinist are also found in the case of pregnancy due to rape. Further-
more, there are no relevant differences that are important enough to over-
ride the significance of these similarities. These considerations, if correct,
provide a reason for treating the two cases in the same way. If we agree, as
Thomson thinks we will, that it is not wrong to unplug the violinist, then we
have a reason to conclude that abortion after rape is not wrong either.

Responses to Thomson’s argument have largely turned on emphasizing
the differences between the two situations. Many critics claim that Thom-
son’s argument fails because abortion involves killing, whereas unplugging
does not. If you stay plugged to the violinist, this will save the violinist, so
to unplug yourself is to fail to save the violinist. But critics deny that to un-
plug yourself from the violinist is the same as to kill the violinist, or to take
the violinist’s life. They argue that there is a crucial difference between

444

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

killing and failing to save, because a negative duty not to kill is much
stronger than any positive duty to save another person’s life.

To determine whether unplugging the violinist is more like acts of killing
or more like other acts of refusing to save, we might consider more analogies.
Thomson also introduces additional analogies that seem more like abortions
in which the pregnancy is not due to rape. In the end, our sense of which fea-
tures seem most important will determine how we evaluate all such analogi-
cal arguments. The analogies bring certain features to our attention, but we
have to decide which features are important, and how important they are.

WEIGHING FACTORS

Our discussion has brought us to the following point: Disagreements con-
cerning abortion in general cannot be reduced to a yes-no dispute. Most op-
ponents of abortion acknowledge that abortion is permissible in some
(though very few) cases. Most defenders of abortion admit that there are
some (though not restrictively many) limitations on when abortion is per-
missible. Where people place themselves on this continuum does not de-
pend on any simple acceptance of one argument over another, but instead
on the weight they give certain factors. To what extent does a fetus have
rights? The pro-life position we examined earlier grants the fetus a full (or
close to full) right to life. The pro-choice position usually grants few or no
rights to the fetus. In what areas do questions of welfare override certain in-
dividual rights? The conservative in this matter usually restricts this to those
cases in which the very life of the mother is plainly threatened. As the posi-
tion on abortion becomes more liberal, the more extensive becomes the
range of cases in which the rights, if any, of the fetus are set aside in favor of
the rights of the bearer of the fetus. Where a particular person strikes this
balance is not only a function of basic moral beliefs but also a function of dif-
ferent weights assigned to them.

How can one deal with such bedrock disagreements? The first thing to see
is that logic alone will not settle them. Starting from a certain conception of per-
sons, it is possible to argue coherently for a pro-choice view on abortion; start-
ing from another point of view, it is possible to argue coherently for a pro-life
view on abortion. The next important thing to see is that it is possible to under-
stand an opposing view—that is, get a genuine feeling for its inner workings—
even if you disagree with it completely. Logical analysis might show that
particular arguments are unsound or have unnoticed and unwanted implica-
tions. This might force clarification and modification. But the most important
service that logical analysis can perform is to lay bare the fundamental princi-
ples that lie beneath surface disagreements. Analysis will sometimes show that
these disagreements are fundamental and perhaps irreconcilable. Dealing with
such irreconcilable differences in a humane way is one of the fundamental
tasks of a society dedicated to freedom and a wide range of civil liberties.

445

Weigh ing Factors

1. Reconstruct and evaluate the arguments against abortion that are stated or
suggested in the following short passages from Ronald Reagan, Abortion
and the Conscience of the Nation (New York: Thomas Nelson, 1984). Be sure
to specify the exact conclusion and spell out important suppressed prem-
ises. How would an opponent best respond to each argument?

a. “We cannot diminish the value of one category of human life—the
unborn—without diminishing the value of all human life” (18).

b. “I have often said that when we talk about abortion, we are talking
about two lives—the life of the mother and the life of the unborn child.
Why else do we call a pregnant woman a mother?” (21).

c. “I have also said that anyone who doesn’t feel sure whether we are talk-
ing about a second human life should surely give life the benefit of the
doubt. If you don’t know whether a body is alive or dead, you would
never bury it. I think this consideration itself should be enough for all of
us to insist on protecting the unborn” (21).

d. “Medical practice confirms at every step the correctness of these moral
sensibilities. Modern medicine treats the unborn child as a patient. Med-
ical pioneers have made great breakthroughs in treating the unborn—for
genetic problems, vitamin deficiencies, irregular heart rhythms, and
other medical conditions” (21–22).

e. “I am convinced that Americans do not want to play God with the value
of human life. It is not for us to decide who is worthy to live and who is
not” (30).

f. “Malcolm Muggeridge, the English writer, goes right to the heart of the
matter: ‘Either life is always and in all circumstances sacred, or intrinsi-
cally of no account; it is inconceivable that it should be in some cases the
one and in some the other’” (34).

2. Reconstruct and evaluate the arguments in defense of abortion that are
stated or suggested in the following short passages from Mary Gordon, “A
Moral Choice,” Atlantic Monthly, April 1990, 78–84. Be sure to specify the
exact conclusion and spell out important suppressed premises. How
would an opponent best respond to each argument?

a. “Common sense, experience, and linguistic usage point clearly to the
fact that we habitually consider, for example, a seven-week-old fetus to
be different from a seven-month-old one. . . . We have different language
for the experience of the involuntary expulsion of the fetus from the
womb depending upon the point of gestation at which the expulsion oc-
curs. If it occurs early in the pregnancy, we call it a miscarriage; if late,
we call it a stillbirth” (80).

b. “Our ritual and religious practices underscore the fact that we make distinc-
tions among fetuses. If a woman took the bloody matter—indistinguishable
from a heavy period—of an early miscarriage and insisted upon putting it
in a tiny coffin and marking its grave, we would have serious concerns

Discussion Questions

(continued)

446

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

A DEFENSE OF ABORTION3, *

by Judith Jarvis Thomson

. . . Opponents of abortion commonly spend most of their time establishing
that the fetus is a person, and hardly any time explaining the step from there
to the impermissibility of abortion. Perhaps they think the step too simple and
obvious to require much comment. Or perhaps instead they are simply being

about her mental health. By the same token, we would feel squeamish
about flushing a seven-month-old fetus down the toilet—something we
would normally do with an early miscarriage. There are no prayers for the
matter of a miscarriage, nor do we feel there should be. Even a Catholic
priest would not baptize the issue of an early miscarriage” (80).

c. “We must make decisions on abortion based on an understanding of
how people really do live. We must be able to say that poverty is worse
than not being poor, that having dignified and meaningful work is bet-
ter than working in conditions of degradation, that raising a child one
loves and has desired is better than raising a child in resentment and
rage, that it is better for a twelve-year-old not to endure the trauma of
having a child when she is herself a child” (81–82).

d. “It is possible for a woman to have a sexual life unriddled by fear only if
she can be confident that she need not pay for a failure of technology or
judgment (and who among us has never once been swept away in the
heat of a sexual moment?) by taking upon herself the crushing burden
of unchosen motherhood” (82).

e. “There are some undeniable bad consequences of a woman’s being
forced to bear a child against her will. First is the trauma of going
through a pregnancy and giving birth to a child who is not desired, a
trauma more long-lasting than that experienced by some (only some)
women who experience an early abortion. The grief of giving up a child
at its birth—and at nine months it is a child one has felt move inside
one’s body—is underestimated both by anti-choice partisans and by
those for whom access to adoptable children is important. This grief
should not be forced on any woman—or, indeed, encouraged by public
policy” (84).

f. “We must be realistic about the impact on society of millions of un-
wanted children in an overpopulated world” (84).

g. “Making abortion illegal will result in the deaths of women, as it has al-
ways done. Is our historical memory so short that none of us remember
aunts, sisters, friends, or mothers who were killed or rendered sterile by
septic abortions? . . . Can anyone genuinely say that it would be a moral
good for us as a society to return to those conditions?” (84).

* I am very much indebted to James Thomson for discussion, criticism, and many helpful
suggestions.

447

Weigh ing Factors

economical in argument. Many of those who defend abortion rely on the
premise that the fetus is not a person, but only a bit of tissue that will become
a person at birth; and why pay out more arguments than you have to? What-
ever the explanation, I suggest that the step they take is neither easy nor obvi-
ous, that it calls for closer examination than it is commonly given, and that
when we do give it this closer examination we shall feel inclined to reject it.

I propose, then, that we grant that the fetus is a person from the moment
of conception. How does the argument go from here? Something like this, I
take it. Every person has a right to life. So the fetus has a right to life. No
doubt the mother has a right to decide what shall happen in and to her
body; everyone would grant that. But surely a person’s right to life is
stronger and more stringent than the mother’s right to decide what happens
in and to her body, and so outweighs it. So the fetus may not be killed; an
abortion may not be performed.

It sounds plausible. But now let me ask you to imagine this. You wake up
in the morning and find yourself back to back in bed with an unconscious
violinist. A famous unconscious violinist. He has been found to have a fatal
kidney ailment, and the Society of Music Lovers has canvassed all the avail-
able medical records and found that you alone have the right blood type to
help. They have therefore kidnapped you, and last night the violinist’s circu-
latory system was plugged into yours, so that your kidneys can be used to
extract poisons from his blood as well as your own. The director of the hospi-
tal now tells you, “Look, we’re sorry the Society of Music Lovers did this to
you—we would never have permitted it if we had known. But still, they did
it, and the violinist now is plugged into you. To unplug you would be to kill
him. But never mind, it’s only for nine months. By then he will have recov-
ered from his ailment, and can safely be unplugged from you.” Is it morally
incumbent on you to accede to this situation? No doubt it would be very nice
of you if you did, a great kindness. But do you have to accede to it? What if it
were not nine months, but nine years? Or longer still? What if the director of
the hospital says, “Tough luck, I agree, but you’ve now got to stay in bed,
with the violinist plugged into you, for the rest of your life. Because remem-
ber this. All persons have a right to life, and violinists are persons. Granted
you have a right to decide what happens in and to your body, but a person’s
right to life outweighs your right to decide what happens in and to your
body. So you cannot ever be unplugged from him.” I imagine you would
regard this as outrageous, which suggests that something really is wrong
with that plausible-sounding argument I mentioned a moment ago.

In this case, of course, you were kidnapped; you didn’t volunteer for the
operation that plugged the violinist into your kidneys. Can those who oppose
abortion on the ground I mentioned make an exception for a pregnancy due
to rape? Certainly. They can say that persons have a right to life only if they
didn’t come into existence because of rape; or they can say that all persons
have a right to life, but that some have less of a right to life than others, in par-
ticular, that those who came into existence because of rape have less. But these
statements have a rather unpleasant sound. Surely the question of whether
you have a right to life at all, or how much of it you have, shouldn’t turn on

448

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

the question of whether or not you are the product of a rape. And in fact the
people who oppose abortion on the ground I mentioned do not make this dis-
tinction, and hence do not make an exception in the case of rape.

Nor do they make an exception for a case in which the mother had to
spend the nine months of her pregnancy in bed. They would agree that
would be a great pity, and hard on the mother; but all the same all persons
have a right to life, the fetus is a person, and so on. I suspect, in fact, that they
would not make an exception for a case in which, miraculously enough, the
pregnancy went on for nine years or even the rest of the mother’s life.

Some won’t even make an exception for a case in which continuation of
the pregnancy is likely to shorten the mother’s life; they regard abortion as
impermissible even to save the mother’s life. Such cases are nowadays very
rare, and many opponents of abortion do not accept this extreme view. All
the same, it is a good place to begin: a number of points of interest come out
in respect to it.

1. Let us call the view that abortion is impermissible even to save the
mother’s life “the extreme view.” I want to suggest first that it does not is-
sue from the argument I mentioned earlier without the addition of some
fairly powerful premises. Suppose a woman has become pregnant, and now
learns that she has a cardiac condition such that she will die if she carries the
baby to term. What may be done for her? The fetus, being a person, has a
right to life, but as the mother is a person too, so has she a right to life. Pre-
sumably they have an equal right to life. How is it supposed to come out
that an abortion may not be performed? If mother and child have an equal
right to life, shouldn’t we perhaps flip a coin? Or should we add to the
mother’s right to life her right to decide what happens in and to her body
which everybody seems to be ready to grant—the sum of her rights now
outweighing the fetus’s right to life?

The most familiar argument here is the following. We are told that per-
forming the abortion would be directly killing* the child, whereas doing
nothing would not be killing the mother, but only letting her die. Moreover,
in killing the child, one would be killing an innocent person, for the child
has committed no crime, and is not aiming at his mother’s death. And then
there are a variety of ways in which this might be continued. (1) But as di-
rectly killing an innocent person is always and absolutely impermissible, an
abortion may not be performed. Or, (2) as directly killing an innocent person
is murder, and murder is always and absolutely impermissible, an abortion
may not be performed.** Or, (3) as one’s duty to refrain from directly killing

* The term “direct” in the arguments I refer to is a technical one. Roughly what is meant by “di-
rect killing” is either killing as an end by itself, or killing as a means to some end, for example,
the end of saving someone else’s life. See [the following] note for an example of its use.

** Cf. Encyclical Letter of Pope Pius XI on Christian Marriage, St. Paul Editions (Boston, n.d.), 32:
“[H]owever much we may pity the mother whose health and even life is gravely imperiled in the
performance of the duty allotted to her by nature, nevertheless what could ever be a sufficient
reason for excusing in any way the direct murder of the innocent? This is precisely what we are
dealing with here.” Noonan (The Morality of Abortion, p. 43) reads this as follows: “What cause can
ever avail to excuse in any way the direct killing of the innocent? For it is a question of that.”

449

Weigh ing Factors

an innocent person is more stringent than one’s duty to keep a person from
dying, an abortion may not be performed. Or, (4) if one’s only options are di-
rectly killing an innocent person or letting a person die, one must prefer let-
ting the person die, and thus an abortion may not be performed.*

Some people seem to have thought that these are not further premises
which must be added if the conclusion is to be reached; but that they follow
from the very fact that an innocent person has a right to life.** But this seems
to me to be a mistake, and perhaps the simplest way to show this is to bring
out that while we must certainly grant that innocent persons have a right to
life, the theses in (1) through (4) are all false. Take (2), for example. If directly
killing an innocent person is murder, and thus is impermissible, then the
mother’s directly killing the innocent person inside her is murder, and thus
is impermissible. But it cannot seriously be thought to be murder if the
mother performs an abortion on herself to save her life. It cannot seriously
be said that she must refrain, that she must sit passively by and wait for her
death. Let us look again at the case of you and the violinist. There you are,
in bed with the violinist, and the director of the hospital says to you, “It’s all
most distressing, and I deeply sympathize, but you see this is putting an ad-
ditional strain on your kidneys, and you’ll be dead within the month. But
you have to stay where you are all the same. Because unplugging you would
be directly killing an innocent violinist, and that’s murder, and that’s imper-
missible.” If anything in the world is true, it is that you do not commit mur-
der, you do not do what is impermissible, if you reach around to your back
and unplug yourself from that violinist to save your life.

The main focus of attention in writings on abortion has been on what a
third party may or may not do in answer to a request from a woman for an
abortion. This is in a way understandable. Things being as they are, there isn’t
much a woman can safely do to abort herself. So the question asked is what
a third party may do, and what the mother may do, if it is mentioned at all,
is deduced, almost as an afterthought, from what it is concluded that third
parties may do. But it seems to me that to treat the matter in this way is to
refuse to grant to the mother that very status of person which is so firmly in-
sisted on for the fetus. For we cannot simply read off what a person may do
from what a third party may do. Suppose you find yourself trapped in a tiny
house with a growing child. I mean a very tiny house, and a rapidly grow-
ing child—you are already up against the wall of the house and in a few

* The thesis in (4) is in an interesting way weaker than those in (1), (2), and (3): They rule out
abortion even in cases in which both mother and child will die if the abortion is not performed.
By contrast, one who held the view expressed in (4) could consistently say that one needn’t pre-
fer letting two persons die to killing one.

** Cf. the following passage from Pius XII, Address to the Italian Catholic Society of Midwives: “The
baby in the maternal breast has the right to life immediately from God—Hence there is no man,
no human authority, no science, no medical, eugenic, social, economic or moral ‘indication’ which
can establish or grant a valid juridical ground for a direct deliberate disposition of an innocent
human life, that is a disposition which looks to its destruction either as an end or as a means to
another end perhaps in itself not illicit. The baby, still not born, is a man in the same degree and
for the same reason as the mother” (quoted in Noonan, The Morality of Abortion, p. 45).

450

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

minutes you’ll be crushed to death. The child on the other hand won’t be
crushed to death; if nothing is done to stop him from growing he’ll be hurt,
but in the end he’ll simply burst open the house and walk out a free man.
Now I could well understand it if a bystander were to say, “There’s nothing
we can do for you. We cannot choose between your life and his, we cannot
be the ones to decide who is to live, we cannot intervene.” But it cannot be
concluded that you too can do nothing, that you cannot attack it to save
your life. However innocent the child may be, you do not have to wait pas-
sively while it crushes you to death. Perhaps a pregnant woman is vaguely
felt to have the status of house, to which we don’t allow the right of self-
defense. But if the woman houses the child, it should be remembered that
she is a person who houses it.

I should perhaps stop to say explicitly that I am not claiming that people
have a right to do anything whatever to save their lives. I think, rather, that
there are drastic limits to the right of self-defense. If someone threatens you
with death unless you torture someone else to death, I think you have not
the right, even to save your life, to do so. But the case under consideration
here is very different. In our case there are only two people involved, one
whose life is threatened, and one who threatens it. Both are innocent: the one
who is threatened is not threatened because of any fault, the one who threat-
ens does not threaten because of any fault. For this reason we may feel that
we bystanders cannot intervene. But the person threatened can.

In sum, a woman surely can defend her life against the threat to it posed
by the unborn child, even if doing so involves its death. And this shows not
merely that the theses in (1) through (4) are false; it shows also that the ex-
treme view of abortion is false, and so we need not canvass any other possi-
ble ways of arriving at it from the argument I mentioned at the outset.

2. The extreme view could of course be weakened to say that while abor-
tion is permissible to save the mother’s life, it may not be performed by a
third party, but only by the mother herself. But this cannot be right either.
For what we have to keep in mind is that the mother and the unborn child
are not like two tenants in a small house which has, by an unfortunate mis-
take, been rented to both: the mother owns the house. The fact that she does
adds to the offensiveness of deducing that the mother can do nothing from
the supposition that third parties can do nothing. But it does more than this:
it casts a bright light on the supposition that third parties can do nothing.
Certainly it lets us see that a third party who says “I cannot choose between
you” is fooling himself if he thinks this is impartiality. If Jones has found and
fastened on a certain coat, which he needs to keep him from freezing, but
which Smith also needs to keep him from freezing, then it is not impartiality
that says “I cannot choose between you” when Smith owns the coat. Women
have said again and again “This is my body!” and they have reason to feel
angry, reason to feel that it has been like shouting into the wind. Smith, after
all, is hardly likely to bless us if we say to him, “Of course it’s your coat; any-
body would grant that it is. But no one may choose between you and Jones
who is to have it.”

451

Weigh ing Factors

We should really ask what it is that says “no one may choose” in the face
of the fact that the body that houses the child is the mother’s body. It may be
simply a failure to appreciate this fact. But it may be something more inter-
esting, namely the sense that one has a right to refuse to lay hands on peo-
ple, even where it would be just and fair to do so, even where justice seems
to require that somebody do so. Thus justice might call for somebody to get
Smith’s coat back from Jones, and yet you have a right to refuse to be the one
to lay hands on Jones, a right to refuse to do physical violence to him. This, I
think, must be granted. But then what should be said is not “no one may
choose,” but only “I cannot choose,” and indeed not even this, but “I will
not act,” leaving it open that somebody else can or should, and in particular
that anyone in a position of authority, with the job of securing people’s
rights, both can and should. So this is no difficulty. I have not been arguing
that any given third party must accede to the mother’s request that he per-
form an abortion to save her life, but only that he may.

I suppose that in some views of human life the mother’s body is only on
loan to her, the loan not being one which gives her any prior claim to it. One
who held this view might well think it impartiality to say “I cannot choose.”
But I shall simply ignore this possibility. My own view is that if a human be-
ing has any just, prior claim to anything at all, he has a just, prior claim to
his own body. And perhaps this needn’t be argued for here anyway, since,
as I mentioned, the arguments against abortion we are looking at do grant
that the woman has a right to decide what happens in and to her body.

But although they do grant it, I have tried to show that they do not take
seriously what is done in granting it. I suggest the same thing will reappear
even more clearly when we turn away from cases in which the mother’s life
is at stake, and attend, as I propose we now do, to the vastly more common
cases in which a woman wants an abortion for some less weighty reason
than preserving her own life.

3. Where the mother’s life is not at stake, the argument I mentioned at the
outset seems to have a much stronger pull. “Everyone has a right to life, so
the unborn person has a right to life.” And isn’t the child’s right to life
weightier than anything other than the mother’s own right to life, which she
might put forward as grounds for an abortion?

This argument treats the right to life as if it were unproblematic. It is not,
and this seems to me to be precisely the source of the mistake.

For we should now, at long last, ask what it comes to, to have a right to
life. In some views having a right to life includes having a right to be given
at least the bare minimum one needs for continued life. But suppose that
what in fact is the bare minimum a man needs for continued life is some-
thing he has no right at all to be given? If I am sick unto death, and the only
thing that will save my life is the touch of Henry Fonda’s cool hand on my
fevered brow, then all the same, I have no right to be given the touch of
Henry Fonda’s cool hand on my fevered brow. It would be frightfully nice
of him to fly in from the West Coast to provide it. It would be less nice,
though no doubt well meant, if my friends flew out to the West Coast and

452

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

carried Henry Fonda back with them. But I have no right at all against any-
body that he should do this for me. Or again, to return to the story I told ear-
lier, the fact that for continued life that violinist needs the continued use of
your kidneys does not establish that he has a right to be given the continued
use of your kidneys. He certainly has no right against you that you should
give him continued use of your kidneys. For nobody has any right to use
your kidneys unless you give him such a right; and nobody has the right
against you that you shall give him this right—if you do allow him to go on
using your kidneys, this is a kindness on your part, and not something he
can claim from you as his due. Nor has he any right against anybody else
that they should give him continued use of your kidneys. Certainly he had
no right against the Society of Music Lovers that they should plug him into
you in the first place. And if you now start to unplug yourself, having
learned that you will otherwise have to spend nine years in bed with him,
there is nobody in the world who must try to prevent you, in order to see to
it that he is given something he has a right to be given.

Some people are rather stricter about the right to life. In their view, it does
not include the right to be given anything, but amounts to, and only to, the
right not to be killed by anybody. But here a related difficulty arises. If every-
body is to refrain from killing that violinist, then everybody must refrain
from doing a great many different sorts of things. Everybody must refrain
from slitting his throat, everybody must refrain from shooting him—and
everybody must refrain from unplugging you from him. But does he have a
right against everybody that they shall refrain from unplugging you from
him? To refrain from doing this is to allow him to continue to use your kid-
neys. It could be argued that he has a right against us that we should allow
him to continue to use your kidneys. That is, while he had no right against us
that we should give him the use of your kidneys, it might be argued that he
anyway has a right against us that we shall not now intervene and deprive
him of the use of your kidneys. I shall come back to third-party interventions
later. But certainly the violinist has no right against you that you shall allow
him to continue to use your kidneys. As I said, if you do allow him to use
them, it is a kindness on your part, and not something you owe him.

The difficulty I point to here is not peculiar to the right to life. It reappears
in connection with all the other natural rights; and it is something which an
adequate account of rights must deal with. For present purposes it is enough
just to draw attention to it. But I would stress that I am not arguing that peo-
ple do not have a right to life—quite to the contrary, it seems to me that the
primary control we must place on the acceptability of an account of rights is
that it should turn out in that account to be a truth that all persons have a
right to life. I am arguing only that having a right to life does not guarantee
having either a right to be given the use of or a right to be allowed contin-
ued use of another person’s body—even if one needs it for life itself. So the
right to life will not serve the opponents of abortion in the very simple and
clear way in which they seem to have thought it would.

453

Weigh ing Factors

4. There is another way to bring out the difficulty. In the most ordinary
sort of case, to deprive someone of what he has a right to is to treat him un-
justly. Suppose a boy and his small brother are jointly given a box of choco-
lates for Christmas. If the older boy takes the box and refuses to give his
brother any of the chocolates, he is unjust to him, for the brother has been
given a right to half of them. But suppose that, having learned that other-
wise it means nine years in bed with that violinist, you unplug yourself from
him. You surely are not being unjust to him, for you gave him no right to use
your kidneys, and no one else can have given him any such right. But we
have to notice that in unplugging yourself, you are killing him; and violin-
ists, like everybody else, have a right to life, and thus in the view we were
considering just now, the right not to be killed. So here you do what he sup-
posedly has a right you shall not do, but you do not act unjustly to him in
doing it.

The emendation which may be made at this point is this: the right to life
consists not in the right not to be killed, but rather in the right not to be
killed unjustly. This runs a risk of circularity, but never mind: it would en-
able us to square the fact that the violinist has a right to life with the fact that
you do not act unjustly toward him in unplugging yourself, thereby killing
him. For if you do not kill him unjustly, you do not violate his right to life,
and so it is no wonder you do him no injustice.

But if this emendation is accepted, the gap in the argument against abor-
tion stares us plainly in the face: it is by no means enough to show that the
fetus is a person, and to remind us that all persons have a right to life—we
need to be shown also that killing the fetus violates its right to life, i.e., that
abortion is unjust killing. And is it?

I suppose we may take it as a datum that in a case of pregnancy due to
rape the mother has not given the unborn person a right to the use of her
body for food and shelter. Indeed, in what pregnancy could it be supposed
that the mother has given the unborn person such a right? It is not as if there
were unborn persons drifting about the world, to whom a woman who
wants a child says, “I invite you in.”

But it might be argued that there are other ways one can have acquired a
right to the use of another person’s body than by having been invited to use
it by that person. Suppose a woman voluntarily indulges in intercourse,
knowing of the chance it will issue in pregnancy, and then she does become
pregnant; is she not in part responsible for the presence, in fact the very ex-
istence of the unborn person inside her? No doubt she did not invite it in.
But doesn’t her partial responsibility for its being there itself give it a right
to the use of her body?* If so, then her aborting it would be more like the
boy’s taking away the chocolates, and less like your unplugging yourself

* The need for a discussion of this argument was brought home to me by members of the Soci-
ety for Ethical and Legal Philosophy, to whom this paper was originally presented.

454

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

from the violinist—doing so would be depriving it of what it does have a
right to, and thus would be doing it an injustice.

And then, too, it might be asked whether or not she can kill it even to save
her own life: If she voluntarily called it into existence, how can she now kill
it, even in self-defense?

The first thing to be said about this is that it is something new. Opponents
of abortion have been so concerned to make out the independence of the fe-
tus, in order to establish that it has a right to life, just as the mother does,
that they have tended to overlook the possible support they might gain from
making out that the fetus is dependent on the mother, in order to establish
that she has a special kind of responsibility for it, a responsibility that gives
it rights against her which are not possessed by an independent person—
such as an ailing violinist who is a stranger to her.

On the other hand, this argument would give the unborn person a right
to its mother’s body only if her pregnancy resulted from a voluntary act, un-
dertaken in full knowledge of the chance a pregnancy might result from it.
It would leave out entirely the unborn person whose existence is due to
rape. Pending the availability of some further argument, then, we would be
left with the conclusion that unborn persons whose existence is due to rape
have no right to the use of their mothers’ bodies, and thus that aborting
them is not depriving them of anything they have a right to and hence is not
unjust killing.

And we should also notice that it is not at all plain that this argument re-
ally does go even as far as it purports to. For there are cases and cases, and
the details make a difference. If the room is stuffy, and I therefore open a
window to air it, and a burglar climbs in, it would be absurd to say, “Ah,
now he can stay, she’s given him a right to the use of her house—for she is
partially responsible for his presence there, having voluntarily done what
enabled him to get in, in full knowledge that there are such things as bur-
glars, and that burglars burgle.” It would be still more absurd to say this if I
had had bars installed outside my windows, precisely to prevent burglars
from getting in, and a burglar got in only because of a defect in the bars. It
remains equally absurd if we imagine it is not a burglar who climbs in, but
an innocent person who blunders or falls in. Again, suppose it were like this:
people-seeds drift about in the air like pollen, and if you open your win-
dows, one may drift in and take root in your carpets or upholstery. You
don’t want children, so you fix up your windows with fine mesh screens, the
very best you can buy. As can happen, however, and on very, very rare occa-
sions does happen, one of the screens is defective; and a seed drifts in and
takes root. Does the person-plant who now develops have a right to the use
of your house? Surely not—despite the fact that you voluntarily opened your
windows, you knowingly kept carpets and upholstered furniture, and you
knew that screens were sometimes defective. Someone may argue that you are
responsible for its rooting, that it does have a right to your house, because
after all you could have lived out your life with bare floors and furniture, or
with sealed windows and doors. But this won’t do—for by the same token

455

Weigh ing Factors

anyone can avoid a pregnancy due to rape by having a hysterectomy, or any-
way by never leaving home without a (reliable!) army.

It seems to me that the argument we are looking at can establish at most
that there are some cases in which the unborn person has a right to the use of
its mother’s body, and therefore some cases in which abortion is unjust
killing. There is room for much discussion and argument as to precisely
which, if any. But I think we should side-step this issue and leave it open,
for at any rate the argument certainly does not establish that all abortion is
unjust killing.

5. There is room for yet another argument here, however. We surely must
all grant that there may be cases in which it would be morally indecent to
detach a person from your body at the cost of his life. Suppose you learn that
what the violinist needs is not nine years of your life, but only one hour: all
you need do to save his life is to spend one hour in that bed with him. Sup-
pose also that letting him use your kidneys for that one hour would not
affect your health in the slightest. Admittedly you were kidnapped. Admittedly
you did not give anyone permission to plug him into you. Nevertheless it
seems to me plain you ought to allow him to use your kidneys for that
hour—it would be indecent to refuse.

Again, suppose pregnancy lasted only an hour, and constituted no threat
to life or health. And suppose that a woman becomes pregnant as a result of
rape. Admittedly she did not voluntarily do anything to bring about the ex-
istence of a child. Admittedly she did nothing at all which would give the
unborn person a right to the use of her body. All the same it might well be
said, as in the newly emended violinist story, that she ought to allow it to re-
main for that hour—that it would be indecent of her to refuse. . . .

So my own view is that even though you ought to let the violinist use
your kidneys for the one hour he needs, we should not conclude that he
has a right to do so—we should say that if you refuse, you are, like [a] boy
who owns all the chocolates and will give none away, self-centered and
callous, indecent in fact, but not unjust. And similarly, that even suppos-
ing a case in which a woman pregnant due to rape ought to allow the un-
born person to use her body for the hour he needs, we should not conclude
that he has a right to do so; we should conclude that she is self-centered,
callous, indecent, but not unjust, if she refuses. The complaints are no less
grave; they are just different. However, there is no need to insist on this
point. If anyone does wish to deduce “he has a right” from “you ought,”
then all the same he must surely grant that there are cases in which it is not
morally required of you that you allow that violinist to use your kidneys,
and in which he does not have a right to use them, and in which you do
not do him an injustice if you refuse. And so also for mother and unborn
child. Except in such cases as the unborn person has a right to demand it—
and we were leaving open the possibility that there may be such cases—
nobody is morally required to make large sacrifices, of health, of all other
interests and concerns, of all other duties and commitments, for nine
years, or even for nine months, in order to keep another person alive.

May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part.

456

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

6. We have in fact to distinguish between two kinds of Samaritan: the
Good Samaritan and what we might call the Minimally Decent Samaritan.
The story of the Good Samaritan, you will remember, goes like this:

A certain man went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among thieves,
which stripped him of his raiment, and wounded him, and departed, leaving
him half dead.

And by chance there came down a certain priest that way; and when he saw
him, he passed by on the other side.

And likewise a Levite, when he was at the place, came and looked on him,
and passed by on the other side.

But a certain Samaritan, as he journeyed, came where he was and when he
saw him he had compassion on him.

And went to him, and bound up his wounds, pouring in oil and wine, and set
him on his own beast, and brought him to an inn, and took care of him.

And on the morrow, when he departed, he took out two pence, and gave them
to the host, and said unto him, “Take care of him: and whatsoever thou spendest
more, when I come again, I will repay thee.” (Luke 10:30–35)

The Good Samaritan went out of his way, at some cost to himself, to help one
in need of it. We are not told what the options were, that is, whether or not
the priest and the Levite could have helped by doing less than the Good
Samaritan did, but assuming they could have, then the fact they did nothing
at all shows they were not even Minimally Decent Samaritans, not because
they were not Samaritans, but because they were not even minimally decent.

These things are a matter of degree, of course, but there is a difference,
and it comes out perhaps most clearly in the story of Kitty Genovese, who,
as you will remember, was murdered while thirty-eight people watched or
listened, and did nothing at all to help her. A Good Samaritan would have
rushed out to give direct assistance against the murderer. Or perhaps we
had better allow that it would have been a Splendid Samaritan who did this,
on the ground that it would have involved a risk of death for himself. But
the thirty-eight not only did not do this, they did not even trouble to pick up
a phone to call the police. Minimally Decent Samaritanism would call for
doing at least that, and their not having done it was monstrous.

After telling the story of the Good Samaritan, Jesus said “Go, and do thou
likewise.” Perhaps he meant that we are morally required to act as the Good
Samaritan did. Perhaps he was urging people to do more than is morally re-
quired of them. At all events it seems plain that it was not morally required
of any of the thirty-eight that he rush out to give direct assistance at the risk
of his own life, and that it is not morally required of anyone that he give
long stretches of his life—nine years or nine months—to sustaining the life
of a person who has no special right (we were leaving open the possibility
of this) to demand it.

Indeed, with one rather striking class of exceptions, no one in any coun-
try in the world is legally required to do anywhere near as much as this for
anyone else. The class of exceptions is obvious. My main concern here is not
the state of the law in respect to abortion, but it is worth drawing attention

457

Weigh ing Factors

to the fact that in no state in this country is any man compelled by law to be
even a Minimally Decent Samaritan to any person; there is no law under
which charges could be brought against the thirty-eight who stood by while
Kitty Genovese died. By contrast, in most states in this country women are
compelled by law to be not merely Minimally Decent Samaritans, but Good
Samaritans to unborn persons inside them. This doesn’t by itself settle
anything one way or the other, because it may well be argued that there
should be laws in this country—as there are in many European countries—
compelling at least Minimally Decent Samaritanism.* But it does show that
there is a gross injustice in the existing state of the law. And it shows also
that the groups currently working against liberalization of abortion laws, in
fact working toward having it declared unconstitutional for a state to permit
abortion, had better start working for the adoption of Good Samaritan laws
generally, or earn the charge that they are acting in bad faith.

I should think, myself, that Minimally Decent Samaritan laws would be
one thing, Good Samaritan laws quite another, and in fact highly improper.
But we are not here concerned with the law. What we should ask is not
whether anybody should be compelled by law to be a Good Samaritan, but
whether we must accede to a situation in which somebody is being
compelled—by nature, perhaps—to be a Good Samaritan. We have, in other
words, to look now at third-party interventions. I have been arguing that no
person is morally required to make large sacrifices to sustain the life of an-
other who has no right to demand them, and this even where the sacrifices
do not include life itself; we are not morally required to be Good Samaritans
or anyway Very Good Samaritans to one another. But what if a man cannot
extricate himself from such a situation? What if he appeals to us to extricate
him? It seems to me plain that there are cases in which we can, cases in
which a Good Samaritan would extricate him. There you are, you were kid-
napped, and nine years in bed with that violinist lie ahead of you. You have
your own life to lead. You are sorry, but you simply cannot see giving up so
much of your life to the sustaining of his. You cannot extricate yourself, and
ask us to do so. I should have thought that—in light of his having no right
to the use of your body—it was obvious that we do not have to accede to
your being forced to give up so much. We can do what you ask. There is no
injustice to the violinist in our doing so.

7. Following the lead of the opponents of abortion, I have throughout
been speaking of the fetus merely as a person, and what I have been asking
is whether or not the argument we began with, which proceeds only from
the fetus being a person, really does establish its conclusion. I have argued
that it does not.

But of course there are arguments and arguments, and it may be said that I
have simply fastened on the wrong one. It may be said that what is important

* For a discussion of the difficulties involved, and a survey of the European experience with
such laws, see The Good Samaritan and the Law, ed. James M. Ratcliffe (Garden City, NY: Double-
day Anchor, 1966).

458

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

is not merely the fact that the fetus is a person, but that it is a person for whom
the woman has a special kind of responsibility issuing from the fact that she is
its mother. And it might be argued that all my analogies are therefore irrele-
vant—for you do not have that special kind of responsibility for that violinist,
Henry Fonda does not have that special kind of responsibility for me. And our
attention might be drawn to the fact that men and women both are compelled
by law to provide support for their children.

I have in effect dealt (briefly) with this argument in section 4 above; but a
(still briefer) recapitulation now may be in order. Surely we do not have any
such “special responsibility” for a person unless we have assumed it, explic-
itly or implicitly. If a set of parents do not try to prevent pregnancy, do not
obtain an abortion, and then at the time of birth of the child do not put it out
for adoption, but rather take it home with them, then they have assumed re-
sponsibility for it, they have given it rights, and they cannot now withdraw
support from it at the cost of its life because they now find it difficult to go
on providing for it. But if they have taken all reasonable precautions against
having a child, they do not simply by virtue of their biological relationship
to the child who comes into existence have a special responsibility for it.
They may wish to assume responsibility for it, or they may not wish to. And
I am suggesting that if assuming responsibility for it would require large
sacrifices, then they may refuse. A Good Samaritan would not refuse—or
anyway, a Splendid Samaritan, if the sacrifices that had to be made were
enormous. But then so would a Good Samaritan assume responsibility for
that violinist; so would Henry Fonda, if he is a Good Samaritan, fly in from
the West Coast and assume responsibility for me.

8. My argument will be found unsatisfactory on two counts by many of
those who want to regard abortion as morally permissible. First, while I do
argue that abortion is not impermissible, I do not argue that it is always per-
missible. There may well be cases in which carrying the child to term re-
quires only Minimally Decent Samaritanism of the mother, and this is a
standard we must not fall below. I am inclined to think it a merit of my ac-
count precisely that it does not give a general yes or a general no. It allows
for and supports our sense that, for example, a sick and desperately fright-
ened fourteen-year-old schoolgirl, pregnant due to rape, may of course
choose abortion, and that any law which rules this out is an insane law. And
it also allows for and supports our sense that in other cases resort to abor-
tion is even positively indecent. It would be indecent in the woman to re-
quest an abortion, and indecent in a doctor to perform it, if she is in her
seventh month, and wants the abortion just to avoid the nuisance of post-
poning a trip abroad. The very fact that the arguments I have been drawing
attention to treat all cases of abortion, or even all cases of abortion in which
the mother’s life is not at stake, as morally on a par ought to have made
them suspect at the outset.

Secondly, while I am arguing for the permissibility of abortion in some
cases, I am not arguing for the right to secure the death of the unborn child. It
is easy to confuse these two things in that up to a certain point in the life of

459

Weigh ing Factors

the fetus it is not able to survive outside the mother’s body; hence removing
it from her body guarantees its death. But they are importantly different. I
have argued that you are not morally required to spend nine months in bed,
sustaining the life of that violinist; but to say this is by no means to say that
if, when you unplug yourself, there is a miracle and he survives, you then
have a right to turn around and slit his throat. You may detach yourself even
if this costs him his life; you have no right to be guaranteed his death by some
other means, if unplugging yourself does not kill him. There are some people
who will feel dissatisfied by this feature of my argument. A woman may be
utterly devastated by the thought of a child, a bit of herself, put out for adop-
tion and never seen or heard of again. She may therefore want not merely
that the child be detached from her, but more, that it die. Some opponents of
abortion are inclined to regard this as beneath contempt—thereby showing
insensitivity to what is surely a powerful source of despair. All the same,
I agree that the desire for the child’s death is not one which anybody may
gratify, should it turn out to be possible to detach the child alive.

At this place, however, it should be remembered that we have only been
pretending throughout that the fetus is a human being from the moment of
conception. A very early abortion is surely not the killing of a person, and so
is not dealt with by anything I have said here.

1. Exactly what is Thomson trying to show with her examples of the burglar
and the people-seeds? Reconstruct and evaluate these arguments from
analogy. Remember to say which similarities and differences are
important, and why.

2. Thomson distinguishes what is morally indecent from what is morally
wrong. Explain her distinction. Are any acts morally indecent but not
morally wrong? If so, give examples. If not, why not? Does Thomson deny
that abortion is morally indecent? If so, does she argue for this denial?

Discussion Questions

AN ARGUMENT THAT ABORTION IS WRONG4

by Don Marquis

The purpose of this essay is to set out an argument for the claim that abor-
tion, except perhaps in rare instances, is seriously wrong. One reason for
these exceptions is to eliminate from consideration cases whose ethical
analysis should be controversial and detailed for clear-headed opponents of
abortion. Such cases include abortion after rape and abortion during the first
fourteen days after conception when there is an argument that the fetus is
not definitely an individual. Another reason for making these exceptions is
to allow for those cases in which the permissibility of abortion is compatible

460

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

with the argument of this essay. Such cases include abortion when continua-
tion of a pregnancy endangers a woman’s life and abortion when the fetus
is anencephalic. When I speak of the wrongness of abortion in this essay, a
reader should presume the above qualifications. I mean by an abortion an
action intended to bring about the death of a fetus for the sake of the woman
who carries it. (Thus, as is standard on the literature on this subject, I elimi-
nate spontaneous abortions from consideration.) I mean by a fetus a devel-
oping human being from the time of conception to the time of birth. (Thus,
as is standard, I call embryos and zygotes, fetuses.)

The argument of this essay will establish that abortion is wrong for the
same reason as killing a reader of this essay is wrong. I shall just assume,
rather than establish, that killing you is seriously wrong. I shall make no at-
tempt to offer a complete ethics of killing. Finally, I shall make no attempt to
resolve some very fundamental and difficult general philosophical issues
into which this analysis of the ethics of abortion might lead.

Why the Debate Over Abortion Seems Intractable

Symmetries that emerge from the analysis of the major arguments on either
side of the abortion debate may explain why the abortion debate seems
intractable. Consider the following standard anti-abortion argument:
Fetuses are both human and alive. Humans have the right to life. Therefore,
fetuses have the right to life. Of course, women have the right to control their
own bodies, but the right to life overrides the right of a woman to control her
own body. Therefore, abortion is wrong.

Thomson’s View

Judith Thomson (1971) has argued that even if one grants (for the sake of ar-
gument only) that fetuses have the right to life, this argument fails. Thom-
son invites you to imagine that you have been connected while sleeping,
bloodstream to bloodstream, to a famous violinist. The violinist, who suffers
from a rare blood disease, will die if disconnected. Thomson argues that you
surely have the right to disconnect yourself. She appeals to our intuition that
having to lie in bed with a violinist for an indefinite period is too much for
morality to demand. She supports this claim by noting that the body being
used is your body, not the violinist’s body. She distinguishes the right to life,
which the violinist clearly has, from the right to use someone else’s body
when necessary to preserve one’s life, which it is not at all obvious the vio-
linist has. Because the case of pregnancy is like the case of the violinist, one
is no more morally obligated to remain attached to a fetus than to remain at-
tached to the violinist.

It is widely conceded that one can generate from Thomson’s vivid case
the conclusion that abortion is morally permissible when a pregnancy is due
to rape (Warren, 1973, p. 49; Steinbock, 1992, p. 79). But this is hardly a gen-
eral right to abortion. Do Thomson’s more general theses generate a more

461

Weigh ing Factors

general right to an abortion? Thomson draws our attention to the fact that in
a pregnancy, although a fetus uses a woman’s body as a life-support system,
a pregnant woman does not use a fetus’s body as a life-support system.
However, an opponent of abortion might draw our attention to the fact that
in an abortion the life that is lost is the fetus’s, not the woman’s. This sym-
metry seems to leave us with a stand-off.

Thomson points out that a fetus’s right to life does not entail its right to
use someone else’s body to preserve its life. However, an opponent of abor-
tion might point out that a woman’s right to use her own body does not en-
tail her right to end someone else’s life in order to do what she wants with
her body. In reply, one might argue that a pregnant woman’s right to control
her own body doesn’t come to much if it is wrong for her to take any action
that ends the life of the fetus within her. However, an opponent of abortion
can argue that the fetus’s right to life doesn’t come to much if a pregnant
woman can end it when she chooses. The consequence of all of these sym-
metries seems to be a stand-off. But if we have the stand-off, then one might
argue that we are left with a conflict of rights: a fetal right to life versus the
right of a woman to control her own body. One might then argue that the
right to life seems to be a stronger right than the right to control one’s own
body in the case of abortion because the loss of one’s life is a greater loss
than the loss of the right to control one’s own body in one respect for nine
months. Therefore, the right to life overrides the right to control one’s own
body and abortion is wrong. Considerations like these have suggested to
both opponents of abortion and supporters of choice that a Thomsonian
strategy for defending a general right to abortion will not succeed (Tooley,
1972; Warren, 1973; Steinbock, 1992). In fairness, one must note that Thom-
son did not intend her strategy to generate a general moral permissibility of
abortion.

Do Fetuses have the Right to Life?

The above considerations suggest that whether abortion is morally permis-
sible boils down to the question of whether fetuses have the right to life. An
argument that fetuses either have or lack the right to life must be based
upon some general criterion for having or lacking the right to life. Oppo-
nents of abortion, on the one hand, look around for the broadest possible
plausible criterion, so that fetuses will fall under it. This explains why clas-
sic arguments against abortion appeal to the criterion of being human
(Noonan, 1970; Beckwith, 1993). This criterion appears plausible: The claim
that all humans, whatever their race, gender, religion or age, have the right
to life seems evident enough. In addition, because the fetuses we are
concerned with do not, after all, belong to another species, they are clearly
human. Thus, the syllogism that generates the conclusion that fetuses have
the right to life is apparently sound.

On the other hand, those who believe abortion is morally permissible
wish to find a narrow, but plausible, criterion for possession of the right to

462

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

life so that fetuses will fall outside of it. This explains, in part, why the stan-
dard pro-choice arguments in the philosophical literature appeal to the cri-
terion of being a person (Feinberg, 1986; Tooley, 1972; Warren, 1973; Benn,
1973; Engelhardt, 1986). This criterion appears plausible: The claim that only
persons have the right to life seems evident enough. Furthermore, because
fetuses neither are rational nor possess the capacity to communicate in com-
plex ways nor possess a concept of self that continues through time, no fetus
is a person. Thus, the syllogism needed to generate the conclusion that no
fetus possesses the right to life is apparently sound. Given that no fetus pos-
sesses the right to life, a woman’s right to control her own body easily gen-
erates the general right to abortion. The existence of two apparently
defensible syllogisms which support contrary conclusions helps to explain
why partisans on both sides of the abortion dispute often regard their oppo-
nents as either morally depraved or mentally deficient.

Which syllogism should we reject? The anti-abortion syllogism is usually
attacked by attacking its major premise: the claim that whatever is biologi-
cally human has the right to life. This premise is subject to scope problems
because the class of the biologically human includes too much: human
cancer-cell cultures are biologically human, but they do not have the right to
life. Moreover, this premise also is subject to moral-relevance problems: the
connection between the biological and the moral is merely assumed. It is
hard to think of a good argument for such a connection. If one wishes to con-
sider the category of “human” a moral category, as some people find it plau-
sible to do in other contexts, then one is left with no way of showing that the
fetus is fully human without begging the question. Thus, the classic anti-
abortion argument appears subject to fatal difficulties.

These difficulties with the classic anti-abortion argument are well known
and thought by many to be conclusive. The symmetrical difficulties with the
classic pro-choice syllogism are not as well recognized. The pro-choice syllo-
gism can be attacked by attacking its major premise: Only persons have the
right to life. This premise is subject to scope problems because the class of
persons includes too little: infants, the severely retarded, and some of the
mentally ill seem to fall outside the class of persons as the supporter of
choice understands the concept. The premise is also subject to moral-relevance
problems: Being a person is understood by the pro-choicer as having certain
psychological attributes. If the pro-choicer questions the connection be-
tween the biological and the moral, the opponent of abortion can question
the connection between the psychological and the moral. If one wishes to
consider “person” a moral category, as is often done, then one is left with no
way of showing that the fetus is not a person without begging the question.

Pro-choicers appear to have resources for dealing with their difficulties
that opponents of abortion lack. Consider their moral-relevance problem. A
pro-choicer might argue that morality rests on contractual foundations and
that only those who have the psychological attributes of persons are capable
of entering into the moral contract and, as a consequence, being a member
of the moral community. (This is essentially Engelhardt’s [1986] view.) The

463

Weigh ing Factors

great advantage of this contractarian approach to morality is that it seems
far more plausible than any approach the anti-abortionist can provide. The
great disadvantage of this contractarian approach to morality is that it adds
to our earlier scope problems by leaving it unclear how we can have the
duty not to inflict pain and suffering on animals.

Contractarians have tried to deal with their scope problems by arguing that
duties to some individuals who are not persons can be justified even though
those individuals are not contracting members of the moral community. For
example, Kant argued that, although we do not have direct duties to animals,
we “must practice kindness towards animals, for he who is cruel to animals
becomes hard also in his dealings with men” (Kant, 1963, p. 240). Feinberg ar-
gues that infanticide is wrong, not because infants have the right to life, but
because our society’s protection of infants has social utility. If we do not treat
infants with tenderness and consideration, then when they are persons they
will be worse off and we will be worse off also (Feinberg, 1986, p. 271).

These moves only stave off the difficulties with the pro-choice view; they
do not resolve them. Consider Kant’s account of our obligations to animals.
Kantians certainly know the difference between persons and animals. There-
fore, no true Kantian would treat persons as she would treat animals. Thus,
Kant’s defense of our duties to animals fails to show that Kantians have a
duty not to be cruel to animals. Consider Feinberg’s attempt to show that in-
fanticide is wrong even though no infant is a person. All Feinberg really
shows is that it is a good idea to treat with care and consideration the infants
we intend to keep. That is quite compatible with killing the infants we in-
tend to discard. This point can he supported by an analogy with which any
pro-choicer will agree. There are plainly good reasons to treat with care and
consideration the fetuses we intend to keep. This is quite compatible with
aborting those fetuses we intend to discard. Thus, Feinberg’s account of the
wrongness of infanticide is inadequate.

Accordingly, we can see that a contractarian defense of the pro-choice
personhood syllogism fails. The problem arises because the contractarian
cannot account for our duties to individuals who are not persons, whether
these individuals are animals or infants. Because the pro-choicer wishes to
adopt a narrow criterion for the right to life so that fetuses will not be in-
cluded, the scope of her major premise is too narrow. Her problem is the op-
posite of the problem the classic opponent of abortion faces.

The argument of this section has attempted to establish, albeit briefly, that
the classic antiabortion argument and the pro-choice argument favored by
most philosophers both face problems that are mirror images of one another.
A stand-off results. The abortion debate requires a different strategy.

The “Future Like Ours” Account of the Wrongness of Killing

Why do the standard arguments in the abortion debate fail to resolve the
issue? The general principles to which partisans in the debate appeal are
either truisms most persons would affirm in the absence of much reflection,

464

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

or very general moral theories. All are subject to major problems. A different
approach is needed.

Opponents of abortion claim that abortion is wrong because abortion in-
volves killing someone like us, a human being who just happens to be very
young. Supporters of choice claim that ending the life of a fetus is not in the
same moral category as ending the life of an adult human being. Surely this
controversy cannot be resolved in the absence of an account of what it is
about killing us that makes killing us wrong. On the one hand, if we know
what property we possess that makes killing us wrong, then we can ask
whether fetuses have the same property. On the other hand, suppose that we
do not know what it is about us that makes killing us wrong. If this is so, we
do not understand even easy cases in which killing is wrong. Surely, we will
not understand the ethics of killing fetuses, for if we do not understand easy
cases, then we will not understand hard cases. Both pro-choicer and anti-
abortionist agree that it is obvious that it is wrong to kill us. Thus, a discus-
sion of what it is about us that makes killing us not only wrong, but seriously
wrong, seems to be the right place to begin a discussion of the abortion issue.

Who is primarily wronged by a killing? The wrong of killing is not primar-
ily explained in terms of the loss to the family and friends of the victim.
Perhaps the victim is a hermit. Perhaps one’s friends find it easy to make
new friends. The wrong of killing is not primarily explained in terms of the
brutalization of the killer. The great wrong to the victim explains the brutal-
ization, not the other way around. The wrongness of killing us is understood
in terms of what killing does to us. Killing us imposes on us the misfortune
of premature death. That misfortune underlies the wrongness.

Premature death is a misfortune because when one is dead, one has been
deprived of life. This misfortune can be more precisely specified. Premature
death cannot deprive me of my past life. That part of my life is already gone.
If I die tomorrow or if I live thirty more years my past life will be no differ-
ent. It has occurred on either alternative. Rather than my past, my death de-
prives me of my future, of the life that I would have lived if I had lived out
my natural life span.

The loss of a future biological life does not explain the misfortune of
death. Compare two scenarios: in the former I now fall into a coma from
which I do not recover until my death in thirty years. In the latter I die now.
The latter scenario does not seem to describe a greater misfortune than the
former.

The loss of our future conscious life is what underlies the misfortune of
premature death. Not any future conscious life qualifies, however. Suppose
that I am terminally ill with cancer. Suppose also that pain and suffering
would dominate my future conscious life. If so, then death would not be a
misfortune for me.

Thus, the misfortune of premature death consists of the loss to us of the
future goods of consciousness. What are these goods? Much can be said
about this issue, but a simple answer will do for the purposes of this essay.
The goods of life are whatever we get out of life. The goods of life are those
items toward which we take a “pro” attitude. They are completed projects

465

Weigh ing Factors

of which we are proud, the pursuit of our goals, aesthetic enjoyments,
friendships, intellectual pursuits, and physical pleasures of various sorts.
The goods of life are what makes life worth living. In general, what makes
life worth living for one person will not be the same as what makes life
worth living for another. Nevertheless, the list of goods in each of our lives
will overlap. The lists are usually different in different stages of our lives.

What makes the goods of my future good for me? One possible, but
wrong, answer is my desire for those goods now. This answer does not ac-
count for those aspects of my future life that I now believe I will later value,
but about which I am wrong. Neither does it account for those aspects of
my future that I will come to value, but which I don’t value now. What is
valuable to the young may not be valuable to the middle-aged. What
is valuable to the middle-aged may not be valuable to the old. Some of life’s
values for the elderly are best appreciated by the elderly. Thus it is wrong
to say that the value of my future to me is just what I value now. What
makes my future valuable to me are those aspects of my future that I will
(or would) value when I will (or would) experience them, whether I value
them now or not.

It follows that a person can believe that she will have a valuable future and
be wrong. Furthermore, a person can believe that he will not have a valuable
future and also be wrong. This is confirmed by our attitude toward many of
the suicidal. We attempt to save the lives of the suicidal and to convince them
that they have made an error in judgment. This does not mean that the future
of an individual obtains value from the value that others confer on it. It means
that, in some cases, others can make a clearer judgment of the value of a per-
son’s future to that person than the person herself. This often happens when
one’s judgment concerning the value of one’s own future is clouded by per-
sonal tragedy. (Compare the views of McInerney, 1990, and Shirley, 1995.)

Thus, what is sufficient to make killing us wrong, in general, is that it
causes premature death. Premature death is a misfortune. Premature death
is a misfortune, in general, because it deprives an individual of a future of
value. An individual’s future will be valuable to that individual if that indi-
vidual will come, or would come, to value it. We know that killing us is
wrong. What makes killing us wrong, in general, is that it deprives us of a
future of value. Thus, killing someone is wrong, in general, when it deprives
her of a future like ours. I shall call this “an FLO.”

Arguments in Favor of the FLO Theory

At least four arguments support this FLO account of the wrongness of
killing.

The Considered Judgment Argument

The FLO account of the wrongness of killing is correct because it fits with
our considered judgment concerning the nature of the misfortune of death.
The analysis of the previous section is an exposition of the nature of this

466

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

considered judgment. This judgment can be confirmed. If one were to ask
individuals with AIDS or with incurable cancer about the nature of their
misfortune, I believe that they would say or imply that their impending loss
of an FLO makes their premature death a misfortune. If they would not,
then the FLO account would plainly be wrong.

The Worst of Crimes Argument

The FLO account of the wrongness of killing is correct because it explains
why we believe that killing is one of the worst of crimes. My being killed de-
prives me of more than does my being robbed or beaten or harmed in some
other way because my being killed deprives me of all of the value of my fu-
ture, not merely part of it. This explains why we make the penalty for mur-
der greater than the penalty for other crimes.

As a corollary the FLO account of the wrongness of killing also explains
why killing an adult human being is justified only in the most extreme cir-
cumstances, only in circumstances in which the loss of life to an individual
is outweighed by a worse outcome if that life is not taken. Thus, we are will-
ing to justify killing in self-defense, killing in order to save one’s own life,
because one’s loss if one does not kill in that situation is so very great. We
justify killing in a just war for similar reasons. We believe that capital pun-
ishment would be justified if, by having such an institution, fewer prema-
ture deaths would occur. The FLO account of the wrongness of killing does
not entail that killing is always wrong. Nevertheless, the FLO account ex-
plains both why killing is one of the worst of crimes and, as a corollary, why
the exceptions to the wrongness of killing are so very rare. A correct theory
of the wrongness of killing should have these features.

The Appeal to Cases Argument

The FLO account of the wrongness of killing is correct because it yields the
correct answers in many life-and-death cases that arise in medicine and
have interested philosophers.

Consider medicine first. Most people believe that it is not wrong deliber-
ately to end the life of a person who is permanently unconscious. Thus we
believe that it is not wrong to remove a feeding tube or a ventilator from a
permanently comatose patient, knowing that such a removal will cause
death. The FLO account of the wrongness of killing explains why this is so.
A patient who is permanently unconscious cannot have a future that she
would come to value, whatever her values. Therefore, according to the FLO
theory of the wrongness of killing, death could not, ceteris paribus, be a mis-
fortune to her. Therefore, removing the feeding tube or ventilator does not
wrong her.

By contrast, almost all people believe that it is wrong, ceteris paribus, to
withdraw medical treatment from patients who are temporarily uncon-
scious. The FLO account of the wrongness of killing also explains why this

467

Weigh ing Factors

is so. Furthermore, these two unconsciousness cases explain why the FLO
account of the wrongness of killing does not include present consciousness
as a necessary condition for the wrongness of killing.

Consider now the issue of the morality of legalizing active euthanasia.
Proponents of active euthanasia argue that if a patient faces a future of in-
tractable pain and wants to die, then, ceteris paribus, it would not be wrong
for a physician to give him medicine that she knows would result in his
death. This view is so universally accepted that even the strongest opponents
of active euthanasia hold it. The official Vatican view (Sacred Congregation,
1980) is that it is permissible for a physician to administer to a patient mor-
phine sufficient (although no more than sufficient) to control his pain even if
she foresees that the morphine will result in his death. Notice how nicely the
FLO account of the wrongness of killing explains this unanimity of opinion.
A patient known to be in severe intractable pain is presumed to have a
future without positive value. Accordingly, death would not be a misfortune
for him and an action that would (foreseeably) end his life would not
be wrong.

Contrast this with the standard emergency medical treatment of the sui-
cidal. Even though the suicidal have indicated that they want to die, med-
ical personnel will act to save their lives. This supports the view that it is not
the mere desire to enjoy an FLO which is crucial to our understanding of the
wrongness of killing. Having an FLO is what is crucial to the account, al-
though one would, of course, want to make an exception in the case of fully
autonomous people who refuse life-saving medical treatment. Opponents of
abortion can, of course, be willing to make an exception for fully au-
tonomous fetuses who refuse life support.

The FLO theory of the wrongness of killing also deals correctly with is-
sues that have concerned philosophers. It implies that it would be wrong to
kill (peaceful) persons from outer space who come to visit our planet even
though they are biologically utterly unlike us. Presumably, if they are per-
sons, then they will have futures that are sufficiently like ours so that it
would be wrong to kill them. The FLO account of the wrongness of killing
shares this feature with the personhood views of the supporters of choice.
Classical opponents of abortion who locate the wrongness of abortion some-
how in the biological humanity of a fetus cannot explain this.

The FLO account does not entail that there is another species of animals
whose members ought not to be killed. Neither does it entail that it is per-
missible to kill any non-human animal. On the one hand, a supporter of ani-
mals’ rights might argue that since some non-human animals have a future
of value, it is wrong to kill them also, or at least it is wrong to kill them with-
out a far better reason than we usually have for killing non-human animals.
On the other hand, one might argue that the futures of non-human animals
are not sufficiently like ours for the FLO account to entail that it is wrong to
kill them. Since the FLO account does not specify which properties a future
of another individual must possess so that killing that individual is wrong,
the FLO account is indeterminate with respect to this issue. The fact that the

468

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

FLO account of the wrongness of killing does not give a determinate answer
to this question is not a flaw in the theory. A sound ethical account should
yield the right answers in the obvious cases; it should not be required to re-
solve every disputed question.

A major respect in which the FLO account is superior to accounts that ap-
peal to the concept of person is the explanation the FLO account provides of
the wrongness of killing infants. There was a class of infants who had fu-
tures that included a class of events that were identical to the futures of the
readers of this essay. Thus, reader, the FLO account explains why it was as
wrong to kill you when you were an infant as it is to kill you now. This ac-
count can be generalized to almost all infants. Notice that the wrongness of
killing infants can be explained in the absence of an account of what makes
the future of an individual sufficiently valuable so that it is wrong to kill that
individual. The absence of such an account explains why the FLO account is
indeterminate with respect to the wrongness of killing non-human animals.

If the FLO account is the correct theory of the wrongness of killing, then
because abortion involves killing fetuses and fetuses have FLOs for exactly
the same reasons that infants have FLOs, abortion is presumptively seri-
ously immoral. This inference lays the necessary groundwork for a fourth
argument in favor of the FLO account that shows that abortion is wrong.

The Analogy with Animals Argument

Why do we believe it is wrong to cause animals suffering? We believe that,
in our own case and in the case of other adults and children, suffering is a
misfortune. It would be as morally arbitrary to refuse to acknowledge that
animal suffering is wrong as it would be to refuse to acknowledge that the
suffering of persons of another race is wrong. It is, on reflection, suffering
that is a misfortune, not the suffering of white males or the suffering of hu-
mans. Therefore, infliction of suffering is presumptively wrong no matter on
whom it is inflicted and whether it is inflicted on persons or nonpersons. Ar-
bitrary restrictions on the wrongness of suffering count as racism or
speciesism. Not only is this argument convincing on its own, but it is the
only way of justifying the wrongness of animal cruelty. Cruelty toward ani-
mals is clearly wrong. (This famous argument is due to Singer, 1979.)

The FLO account of the wrongness of abortion is analogous. We believe
that, in our own case and the cases of other adults and children, the loss of a
future of value is a misfortune. It would be as morally arbitrary to refuse to
acknowledge that the loss of a future of value to a fetus is wrong as to refuse
to acknowledge that the loss of a future of value to Jews (to take a relevant
twentieth-century example) is wrong. It is, on reflection, the loss of a future
of value that is a misfortune; not the loss of a future of value to adults or loss
of a future of value to non-Jews. To deprive someone of a future of value is
wrong no matter on whom the deprivation is inflicted and no matter
whether the deprivation is inflicted on persons or nonpersons. Arbitrary re-
strictions on the wrongness of this deprivation count as racism, genocide or

469

Weigh ing Factors

ageism. Therefore, abortion is wrong. This argument that abortion is wrong
should be convincing because it has the same form as the argument for the
claim that causing pain and suffering to non-human animals is wrong. Since
the latter argument is convincing, the former argument should be also.
Thus, an analogy with animals supports the thesis that abortion is wrong.

Replies to Objections

The four arguments in the previous section establish that abortion is, except
in rare cases, seriously immoral. Not surprisingly, there are objections to this
view. There are replies to the four most important objections to the FLO
argument for the immorality of abortion.

The Potentiality Objection

The FLO account of the wrongness of abortion is a potentiality argument. To
claim that a fetus has an FLO is to claim that a fetus now has the potential to
be in a state of a certain kind in the future. It is not to claim that all ordinary
fetuses will have FLOs. Fetuses who are aborted, of course, will not. To say
that a standard fetus has an FLO is to say that a standard fetus either will
have or would have a life it will or would value. To say that a standard fetus
would have a life it would value is to say that it will have a life it will value
if it does not die prematurely. The truth of this conditional is based upon the
nature of fetuses (including the fact that they naturally age) and this nature
concerns their potential.

Some appeals to potentiality in the abortion debate rest on unsound in-
ferences. For example, one may try to generate an argument against abor-
tion by arguing that because persons have the right to life, potential persons
also have the right to life. Such an argument is plainly invalid as it stands.
The premise one needs to add to make it valid would have to be something
like: “If Xs have the right to Y, then potential Xs have the right to Y.” This
premise is plainly false. Potential presidents don’t have the rights of the
presidency; potential voters don’t have the right to vote.

In the FLO argument potentiality is not used in order to bridge the gap
between adults and fetuses as is done in the argument in the above para-
graph. The FLO theory of the wrongness of killing adults is based upon the
adult’s potentiality to have a future of value. Potentiality is in the argument
from the very beginning. Thus, the plainly false premise is not required. Ac-
cordingly, the use of potentiality in the FLO theory is not a sign of an illegit-
imate inference.

The Argument from Interests

A second objection to the FLO account of the immorality of abortion in-
volves arguing that even though fetuses have FLOs, nonsentient fetuses
do not meet the minimum conditions for having any moral standing at all

470

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

because they lack interests. Steinbock (1992, p. 5) has presented this argu-
ment clearly:

Beings that have moral status must be capable of caring about what is done to
them. They must be capable of being made, if only in a rudimentary sense,
happy or miserable, comfortable or distressed. Whatever reasons we may have
for preserving or protecting non-sentient beings, these reasons do not refer to
their own interests. For without conscious awareness, beings cannot have inter-
ests. Without interests, they cannot have a welfare of their own. Without a
welfare of their own, nothing can be done for their sake. Hence, they lack moral
standing or status.

Medical researchers have argued that fetuses do not become sentient un-
til after 22 weeks of gestation (Steinbock, 1992, p. 50). If they are correct, and
if Steinbock’s argument is sound, then we have both an objection to the FLO
account of the wrongness of abortion and a basis for a view on abortion min-
imally acceptable to most supporters of choice.

Steinbock’s conclusion conflicts with our settled moral beliefs. Temporar-
ily unconscious human beings are nonsentient, yet no one believes that they
lack either interests or moral standing. Accordingly, neither conscious
awareness nor the capacity for conscious awareness is a necessary condition
for having interests.

The counter-example of the temporarily unconscious human being shows
that there is something internally wrong with Steinbock’s argument. The
difficulty stems from an ambiguity. One cannot take an interest in something
without being capable of caring about what is done to it. However, some-
thing can be in someone’s interest without that individual being capable of
caring about it, or about anything. Thus, life support can be in the interests
of a temporarily unconscious patient even though the temporarily uncon-
scious patient is incapable of taking an interest in that life support. If this can
be so for the temporarily unconscious patient, then it is hard to see why it
cannot be so for the temporarily unconscious (that is, non-sentient) fetus
who requires placental life support. Thus the objection based on interests
fails.

The Problem of Equality

The FLO account of the wrongness of killing seems to imply that the degree
of wrongness associated with each killing varies inversely with the victim’s
age. Thus, the FLO account of the wrongness of killing seems to suggest that
it is far worse to kill a five-year-old than an 89-year-old because the former
is deprived of far more than the latter. However, we believe that all persons
have an equal right to life. Thus, it appears that the FLO account of the
wrongness of killing entails an obviously false view (Paske, 1994).

However, the FLO account of the wrongness of killing does not, strictly
speaking, imply that it is worse to kill younger people than older people.
The FLO account provides an explanation of the wrongness of killing that is

471

Weigh ing Factors

sufficient to account for the serious presumptive wrongness of killing. It
does not follow that killings cannot be wrong in other ways. For example,
one might hold, as does Feldman (1992, p. 184), that in addition to the
wrongness of killing that has its basis in the future life of which the victim is
deprived, killing an individual is also made wrong by the admirability of an
individual’s past behavior. Now the amount of admirability will presum-
ably vary directly with age, whereas the amount of deprivation will vary
inversely with age. This tends to equalize the wrongness of murder.

However, even if, ceteris paribus, it is worse to kill younger persons than
older persons, there are good reasons for adopting a doctrine of the legal
equality of murder. Suppose that we tried to estimate the seriousness of a
crime of murder by appraising the value of the FLO of which the victim had
been deprived. How would one go about doing this? In the first place, one
would be confronted by the old problem of interpersonal comparisons of
utility. In the second place, estimation of the value of a future would involve
putting oneself, not into the shoes of the victim at the time she was killed,
but rather into the shoes the victim would have worn had the victim sur-
vived, and then estimating from that perspective the worth of that person’s
future. This task seems difficult, if not impossible. Accordingly, there are rea-
sons to adopt a convention that murders are equally wrong.

Furthermore, the FLO theory, in a way, explains why we do adopt the
doctrine of the legal equality of murder. The FLO theory explains why we
regard murder as one of the worst of crimes, since depriving someone of a
future like ours deprives her of more than depriving her of anything else.
This gives us a reason for making the punishment for murder very harsh,
as harsh as is compatible with civilized society. One should not make the
punishment for younger victims harsher than that. Thus, the doctrine of
the equal legal right to life does not seem to be incompatible with the FLO
theory.

The Contraception Objection

The strongest objection to the FLO argument for the immorality of abortion
is based on the claim that, because contraception results in one less FLO, the
FLO argument entails that contraception, indeed, abstention from sex when
conception is possible, is immoral. Because neither contraception nor absten-
tion from sex when conception is possible is immoral, the FLO account is
flawed.

There is a cogent reply to this objection. If the argument of the early part
of this essay is correct, then the central issue concerning the morality of
abortion is the problem of whether fetuses are individuals who are members
of the class of individuals whom it is seriously presumptively wrong to kill.
The properties of being human and alive, of being a person, and of having
an FLO are criteria that participants in the abortion debate have offered to
mark off the relevant class of individuals. The central claim of this essay is

472

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

that having an FLO marks off the relevant class of individuals. A defender
of the FLO view could, therefore, reply that since, at the time of contracep-
tion, there is no individual to have an FLO, the FLO account does not entail
that contraception is wrong. The wrong of killing is primarily a wrong to the
individual who is killed; at the time of contraception there is no individual
to be wronged.

However, someone who presses the contraception objection might have
an answer to this reply. She might say that the sperm and egg are the indi-
viduals deprived of an FLO at the time of contraception. Thus, there are in-
dividuals whom contraception deprives of an FLO and if depriving an
individual of an FLO is what makes killing wrong, then the FLO theory
entails that contraception is wrong.

There is also a reply to this move. In the case of abortion, an objectively de-
terminate individual is the subject of harm caused by the loss of an FLO. This
individual is a fetus. In the case of contraception, there are far more candidates
(see Norcross, 1990). Let us consider some possible candidates in order of the
increasing number of individuals harmed: (1) The single harmed individual
might be the combination of the particular sperm and the particular egg that
would have united to form a zygote if contraception had not been used. (2) The
two harmed individuals might be the particular sperm itself, and, in addition,
the ovum itself that would have physically combined to form the zygote. (This
is modeled on the double homicide of two persons who would otherwise in
a short time fuse. (1) is modeled on harm to a single entity some of whose
parts are not physically contiguous, such as a university.) (3) The many harmed
individuals might be the millions of combinations of sperm and the released
ovum whose (small) chances of having an FLO were reduced by the successful
contraception. (4) The even larger class of harmed individuals (larger by one)
might be the class consisting of all of the individual sperm in an ejaculate and,
in addition, the individual ovum released at the time of the successful contra-
ception. (1) through (4) are all candidates for being the subject(s) of harm in the
case of successful contraception or abstinence from sex. Which should be cho-
sen? Should we hold a lottery? There seems to be no non-arbitrarily determi-
nate subject of harm in the case of successful contraception. But if there is no
such subject of harm, then no determinate thing was harmed. If no determinate
thing was harmed, then (in the case of contraception) no wrong has been done.
Thus, the FLO account of the wrongness of abortion does not entail that con-
traception is wrong.

Conclusion

This essay contains an argument for the view that, except in unusual cir-
cumstances, abortion is seriously wrong. Deprivation of an FLO explains
why killing adults and children is wrong. Abortion deprives fetuses of
FLOs. Therefore, abortion is wrong. This argument is based on an account
of the wrongness of killing that is a result of our considered judgment of
the nature of the misfortune of premature death. It accounts for why we

473

Weigh ing Factors

regard killing as one of the worst of crimes. It is superior to alternative ac-
counts of the wrongness of killing that are intended to provide insight
into the ethics of abortion. This account of the wrongness of killing is sup-
ported by the way it handles cases in which our moral judgments are set-
tled. This account has an analogue in the most plausible account of the
wrongness of causing animals to suffer. This account makes no appeal to
religion. Therefore, the FLO account shows that abortion, except in rare
instances, is seriously wrong.

References

Beckwith, F. J., Politically Correct Death: Answering Arguments for Abortion Rights (Grand Rapids,
Michigan: Baker Books, 1993).

Benn, S. I., “Abortion, Infanticide, and Respect for Persons,” The Problem of Abortion, ed. J. Fein-
berg (Belmont, California: Wadsworth, 1973), pp. 92–104.

Engelhardt, Jr [sic], H. T., The Foundations of Bioethics (New York: Oxford University Press, 1986).

Feinberg, J., “Abortion,” Matters of Life and Death: New Introductory Essays in Moral Philosophy,
ed. T. Regan (New York: Random House, 1986).

Feldman, F., Confrontations with the Reaper. A Philosophical Study of the Nature and Value of Death
(New York: Oxford University Press, 1992).

Kant, I., Lectures on Ethics, trans. L. Infeld (New York: Harper, 1963).

Marquis, D. B., “A Future like Ours and the Concept of Person: a Reply to McInerney and
Paske,” The Abortion Controversy: A Reader, ed. L. P. Pojman and F. J. Beckwith (Boston: Jones
and Bartlett, 1994), pp. 354–68.

–—,“Fetuses, Futures and Values: a Reply to Shirley,” Southwest Philosophy Review 11 (1995): 263–5.

–—,“Why Abortion Is Immoral,” Journal of Philosophy 86 (1989): 183–202.

McInerney, P., “Does a Fetus Already Have a Future like Ours?,” Journal of Philosophy 87 (1990):
264–8.

Noonan, J., “An Almost Absolute Value in History,” in The Morality of Abortion, ed. J. Noonan
(Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1970).

Norcross, A., “Killing, Abortion, and Contraception: a Reply to Marquis,” Journal of Philosophy
87 (1990): 268–77.

Paske, G., “Abortion and the Neo-natal Right to Life: a Critique of Marquis’s Futurist Argu-
ment,” The Abortion Controversy: A Reader, ed. L. P. Pojman and F. J. Beckwith (Boston: Jones and
Bartlett, 1994), pp. 343–53.

Sacred Congregation for the Propagation of the Faith, Declaration on Euthanasia (Vatican City,
1980).

Shirley, E. S., “Marquis’ Argument Against Abortion: a Critique,” Southwest Philosophy Review
11 (1995): 79–89.

Singer, P., “Not for Humans Only: the Place of Nonhumans in Environmental Issues,” Ethics and
Problems of the 21st Century, ed. K. E. Goodpaster and K. M. Sayre (South Bend: Notre Dame
University Press, 1979).

Steinbock, B., Life Before Birth: The Moral and Legal Status of Embryos and Fetuses (New York:
Oxford University Press, 1992).

Thomson, J. J., “A Defense of Abortion,” Philosophy and Public Affairs 1 (1971): 47–66.

Tooley, M., “Abortion and Infanticide,” Philosophy and Public Affairs 2 (1972): 37–65.

Warren, M. A., “On the Moral and Legal Status of Abortion,” Monist 57 (1973): 43–61.

474

CHAPTER 19 ■ Moral Reason ing

1. Explain and evaluate Marquis’s criticisms of Thomson’s argument.

2. Explain why Marquis thinks that the problem of abortion cannot be solved
by asking whether fetuses have a right to life.

3. Marquis’s argument against abortion can be seen as an inference to the
best explanation of why it is morally wrong to kill normal adult human be-
ings. What does Marquis take to be the best explanation of this? Why does
he think that it is better than the alternatives? Can you give an even better
explanation that accounts for the cases that Marquis discusses?

4. Is Marquis’s argument different in important ways from traditional argu-
ments based on the premise that a fetus is a person or a potential
person? If so, how? If not, why not?

5. Explain the contraception objection to Marquis’s argument and his
response. Is his response adequate? Why or why not?

6. How could Thomson respond to Marquis’s argument. Is her best response
good enough? Why or why not?

7. Determine whether you think abortion is morally wrong in the following
cases:

a. Where the mother is in danger of dying if she does not have an abortion.

b. Where the pregnancy is due to rape.

c. Where contraception was used, but it failed.

d. Where the fetus has a disease that usually causes death within a year or two.

e. Where the fetus has a disease that usually causes severe mental retardation.

f. Where the pregnant woman is mentally or physically unable to be a
good mother.

g. Where the mother will suffer severe personal losses if the pregnancy
continues.

Now try to formulate principles and analogies to justify your positions in
these controversial cases.

8. Which underlying principles, if any, could protect human lives with only a
few exceptions, yet allow us to take lives of:

a. Contract killers sentenced to capital punishment

b. Humans who are in irreversible comas

c. Ourselves in suicide

d. Children who live next to munitions factories that are bombed in a war

e. Animals for food, clothing, and entertainment

9. Describe a moral problem that you have faced in your personal life, and
apply the methods of moral reasoning that you have learned in this chapter.

Discussion Questions

475

Weigh ing Factors

NOTES
1 For a discussion of this approach, and for a model of how to argue about a moral principle,
see Philippa Foot, “The Problem of Abortion and the Doctrine of Double Effect,” in Foot, Virtues
and Vices and Other Essays in Moral Philosophy (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978),
19–32.

2 Gradualism is discussed in more detail in Joel Feinberg, “Abortion,” in Matters of Life and
Death, 2nd ed., ed. Tom Regan (New York: Random House, 1986), 256–93.

3 Philosophy and Public Affairs 1, no. 1 (Fall 1971), 47–66.

4 From Ethics in Practice: An Anthology, Second Edition, ed. Hugh LaFollette (Malden, Mass.;
Blackwell, 2002), pp. 83–93. This essay was originally published in the first edition of this anthol-
ogy. This is an updated version of a view that first appeared in the Journal of Philosophy (1989).
This essay incorporates attempts to deal with the objections of McInerney (1990), Norcross
(1990), Shirley (1995), Steinbock (1992), and Paske (1994) to the original version of the view.

This page intentionally left blank

Scientific Reasoning

The products of science are all around us. We depend on science when we drive cars,

listen to compact discs, and cook food in microwaves. Still, few people understand

how science operates. To some, the scientific enterprise seems to consist of nothing

more than amassing huge quantities of data to prove or disprove some hypothesis.

There is more to science than that. Scientists also seek theories that are profound and

far-reaching, or even elegant and beautiful, as is shown by how scientists themselves

speak about their theories. The goal of scientific theory is not just to list and describe

natural phenomena but to make sense of nature—that is, to explain it, make it more

intelligible. To choose among conflicting scientific theories, we have to decide which

theory makes the most sense and provides the best explanations. This chapter will

bring out this complex nature of science by discussing the scientific enterprise in

general and then focusing on a particular debate about biological evolution.

STANDARD SCIENCE

The beginning of science lies in observation. When we look at the world
around us, we see that many things happen. Apples fall off trees, the leaves of
some trees change color in the autumn, the tides come in and go out, chickens
lay eggs, and so on. One job of scientists is to describe and classify what hap-
pens and what exists. But scientists also wonder why some things happen
rather than others. Maple trees change color in the fall, and spruce trees do not,
but why? Chickens lay eggs, and monkeys do not, but why? A sphere of wood
floats in water, and a gold sphere does not, but why? And why does gold float
when pressed into the shape of a boat? These questions ask for explanations.

To provide an explanation, scientists often give arguments of the kind
discussed in Chapter 1. The event to be explained is derived from a general
principle plus a statement of initial conditions or particular facts. For exam-
ple, given the general principle that a solid sphere floats in water if and only
if it is less dense than water, and also given the particular facts that wood is
less dense than water, whereas gold is denser than water, we can explain
why a wooden sphere floats in water and a gold sphere does not.

Scientists often seek deeper explanations by asking why certain general
principles themselves are true. The principle that a sphere floats in water only

20

477

478

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

when it is less dense than water can be explained as an instance of the more
general principle that anything floats only when it displaces more than its own
weight in water. This broader principle not only explains why a wooden
sphere floats in water but also why a piece of gold will float when molded into
the form of a boat. This broader principle is in turn explained by deriving it
from even more basic principles about gravity and the mutual repulsion of
molecules. A larger scientific theory is thus used to explain not only why par-
ticular things happen but also why certain general principles hold.

Of course, scientists often put forward conflicting theories, so we need
some way to test which theory is correct. One simple method is to use the
theory to make predictions. Since an explanation depends on principles that
are general, these principles have implications beyond the particular phe-
nomenon that they were originally intended to explain. The theory thus pre-
dicts what will happen in circumstances that the scientist has not yet
observed. We can then test the theory by seeing whether these predictions
hold true. For example, we can make spheres out of a wide variety of mate-
rials, calculate their densities, and then see which ones float. If any sphere
floats that is denser than water, then we have to give up our principle that a
sphere floats in water only if it is less dense than water. (This is an applica-
tion of the necessary condition test, discussed in Chapter 9.) If we find a
sphere that is less dense than water but does not float, then we have to give
up the principle that a sphere floats if it is less dense than water. (This is an
application of the sufficient condition test, discussed in Chapter 9.)

These methods help us rule out certain scientific principles, but the fact
that a principle implies true predictions does not, by itself, prove that the
principle is true. That argument would commit something like the fallacy of
affirming the consequent (see Exercise XXI in Chapter 6). Nonetheless, we
can still say that a theory is confirmed if it yields true predictions, and it is
confirmed more strongly if it yields more, more varied, and more unex-
pected true predictions.

Scientific method is actually much more complex than this simple exam-
ple suggests. This becomes apparent when we encounter anomalies. Suppose
we have confirmed and explained the principle that a sphere floats in water
if and only if it is less dense than water. Suppose also that another principle
is well confirmed: A substance gets smaller and denser as it gets colder.
Taken together, these principles predict that a sphere of ice should sink in
water. Ice is colder than water, so, according to the second principle, ice
should be denser than water, and that, given the first principle, means that it
should not float in water. Of course, our prediction is wrong, since spheres
of ice do float in water. What do we do now? The obvious solution is to
modify the principle that a substance gets smaller and denser as it gets
colder. This holds for most substances, but not for water. Water expands and
thus gets less dense as it freezes.

We could have tried another solution. We could have denied the other
principle: that a sphere floats in water if and only if it is less dense than wa-
ter. Why do scientists not do this? One reason is that we have independent

479

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

evidence that water expands when it freezes. That is why jars of water burst
when they are left in a freezer. Another reason is that we could not give up
this principle alone, because it follows from more basic principles about grav-
ity and the mutual repulsion of molecules. Thus, many other areas of science
would be affected if we gave up the principle that a sphere floats in water if
and only if it is less dense than water. Scientific theories work together, so we
cannot throw out one without undermining the others. That all these other
scientific theories are not only well confirmed but useful is what makes sci-
entists give up one principle rather than another when an anomaly arises.

At this point we might seek an even deeper explanation and ask why wa-
ter expands when it freezes. In fact, to this day, nobody seems to have a fully
adequate explanation of this common phenomenon. There are various theo-
ries but no agreement about how to explain the expansion of water. It has
something to do with the way in which liquid water crystallizes to form ice,
but nobody is quite sure why water crystallizes in that way. Does this show
that certain phenomena are beyond scientific understanding? Probably not.
But it does suggest that science may never be complete. More questions arise
as science progresses, and there will always be questions that remain unan-
swered. As scientists discover and explain more and more phenomena and
see connections among principles in different areas, every new step gives
rise to more questions that need to be answered. That is one way in which
science makes progress.

SCIENTIFIC REVOLUTIONS

Another type of scientific development is more radical—knowledge is not
simply extended, but, instead, one scientific framework is replaced (or
largely replaced) by another. What changes is not just particular claims, but
large-scale ways of doing science. In biology, the germ theory of disease and
the theory of evolution through natural selection are examples of such revo-
lutionary developments. Einstein’s theory of relativity and the rise of quan-
tum mechanics were also revolutionary developments in physics. Indeed,
every branch of science has undergone at least one such revolutionary
change during the past few centuries.

There are some important differences between scientific progress within
a framework and the replacement of one framework by another.1 In the first
place, such changes in framework usually meet with strong resistance. A
new conceptual framework will be unfamiliar and hard to understand and
may even seem absurd or unintelligible. Even today, for example, the
thought that the Earth is spinning on its axis and revolving around the sun
seems completely counter to our commonsense view of the world. Also, ar-
guments on behalf of a new framework will be very different from argu-
ments that occur within a framework. Disputes over conceptual frameworks
cannot be settled by a straightforward appeal to facts. The long debate

480

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

between Albert Einstein and Niels Bohr concerning quantum theory did not
turn on matters of fact but on their interpretation. Einstein could not accept
the indeterminacy involved in the quantum theory’s interpretation of the
world, and he worked until the end of his life to find some alternative to it.
At present, few scientists share Einstein’s reservations.

One of the most important and fascinating revolutions in science was
Darwin’s theory of evolution through natural selection in biology. The Dar-
winian revolution challenged—and continues to challenge—many common
assumptions about the nature of science and also the nature of humankind.
As a result, Darwin’s views on evolution and natural selection encountered
vehement opposition right from the start.

These conflicts have attracted public attention when school boards have
tried either to prevent the teaching of evolution in public schools or to re-
quire or allow alternative views, such as so-called “intelligent design,” to be
taught alongside standard evolutionary biology. In one recent case, the
school board of Dover, Pennsylvania, passed a resolution requiring teachers
to read a statement about “intelligent design” aloud in ninth-grade science
classes whenever evolution was taught. Eleven parents of high-school stu-
dents challenged this requirement in the case of Kitzmiller v. Dover Area
School District, 400 F. Supp. 2d 707 (M.D. Pa. 2005). In his opinion, U.S. Dis-
trict Judge John E. Jones III ruled that intelligent design is not science, partly
because it depends on “its creationist, and thus religious, antecedents,” so
the school district’s requirement therefore violated the Establishment Clause
of the First Amendment to the U.S. Constitution.

This debate between natural selection and intelligent design, thus, has not
only scientific but also legal and religious dimensions. The following selec-
tions represent this debate at its best. Michael Behe (professor of biochem-
istry at Lehigh University in Pennsylvania) is one of the most prominent
proponents of intelligent design, and Philip Kitcher (professor of philosophy
at Columbia University) is one of his most profound critics. They focus on
simple examples that are supposed to cause problems for the Darwinian ap-
proach to evolution. These case studies raise more general issues about the
nature of religion, the nature of science, and the relation between religion and
science—issues that remain alive today in pulpits, classrooms, and courts.

To get simplistic objections out of the way first, explain what is wrong with
Stephen Colbert’s satirical refutation of Darwin’s theory of evolution in the
following passage:

Hey kids! Now you can disprove evolution in your own backyard. Here’s what you’ll
need: one fishbowl, one pitcher of water, one hamster, alive, and one hardbound copy,
Charles Darwin’s Origin of Species . . . and now here’s the experiment. . . .

Discussion Question

481

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

MOLECULAR MACHINES: EXPERIMENTAL
SUPPORT FOR THE DESIGN INFERENCE

by Michael J. Behe

from Cosmic Pursuit 1, no. 2 (1998), 27–35

Darwinism’s Prosperity

Within a short time after Charles Darwin published The Origin of Species the
explanatory power of the theory of evolution was recognized by the great
majority of biologists. The hypothesis readily resolved the problems of ho-
mologous resemblance, rudimentary organs, species abundance, extinction,
and biogeography. The rival theory of the time, which posited creation of
species by a supernatural being, appeared to most reasonable minds to be
much less plausible, since it would have a putative Creator attending to de-
tails that seemed to be beneath His dignity.

As time went on the theory of evolution obliterated the rival theory of
creation, and virtually all working scientists studied the biological world
from a Darwinian perspective. Most educated people now lived in a world
where the wonder and diversity of the biological kingdom were produced
by the simple, elegant principle of natural selection.

However, in science a successful theory is not necessarily a correct theory.
In the course of history there have also been other theories which achieved
the triumph that Darwinism achieved, which brought many experimental
and observational facts into a coherent framework, and which appealed to
people’s intuitions about how the world should work. Those theories also
promised to explain much of the universe with a few simple principles. But,
by and large, those other theories are now dead.

Step 1: Fill your fishbowl with the water. I don’t want to give anything
away, but soon it’s going to be a bowl for another kind of animal.

Step 2: Drop the hamster (you can call it “Skip”) into the fishbowl.

Step 3: Cover the fishbowl with Charles Darwin’s Origin of Species.

Step 4: Seems like a pretty desperate situation Skip has gotten himself
into. This would be an ideal time for evolution to kick in.

Step 5: Follow the scientific method—observe! Is the hamster “evolving”
gills? Has he “evolved” a jackhammer to drill through the fish-
bowl, or “adapted to his environment” with a tiny hamster
flamethrower to burn through Origin of Species? Don’t think so.

Step 6: Let the hamster go. Just because Darwin was a sick twist with a
God complex doesn’t mean we have to buy into his power trip.
(You could also call the hamster “Teddy.”)2

482

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

A good example of this is the replacement of Newton’s mechanical view
of the universe by Einstein’s relativistic universe. Although Newton’s model
accounted for the results of many experiments in his time, it failed to explain
aspects of gravitation. Einstein solved that problem and others by com-
pletely rethinking the structure of the universe.

Similarly, Darwin’s theory of evolution prospered by explaining much of
the data of his time and the first half of the 20th century, but my article will
show that Darwinism has been unable to account for phenomena uncovered
by the efforts of modern biochemistry during the second half of this century.
I will do this by emphasizing the fact that life at its most fundamental level
is irreducibly complex and that such complexity is incompatible with undi-
rected evolution.

A Series of Eyes

How do we see?
In the 19th century the anatomy of the eye was known in great detail and

the sophisticated mechanisms it employs to deliver an accurate picture of
the outside world astounded everyone who was familiar with them. Scien-
tists of the 19th century correctly observed that if a person were so unfortu-
nate as to be missing one of the eye’s many integrated features, such as the
lens, or iris, or ocular muscles, the inevitable result would be a severe loss of
vision or outright blindness. Thus it was concluded that the eye could only
function if it were nearly intact.

As Charles Darwin was considering possible objections to his theory of
evolution by natural selection in The Origin of Species he discussed the prob-
lem of the eye in a section of the book appropriately entitled “Organs of ex-
treme perfection and complication.” He realized that if in one generation an
organ of the complexity of the eye suddenly appeared, the event would be
tantamount to a miracle. Somehow, for Darwinian evolution to be believ-
able, the difficulty that the public had in envisioning the gradual formation
of complex organs had to be removed.

Darwin succeeded brilliantly, not by actually describing a real pathway
that evolution might have used in constructing the eye, but rather by point-
ing to a variety of animals that were known to have eyes of various con-
structions, ranging from a simple light sensitive spot to the complex
vertebrate camera eye, and suggesting that the evolution of the human eye
might have involved similar organs as intermediates.

But the question remains, how do we see? Although Darwin was able to
persuade much of the world that a modern eye could be produced gradu-
ally from a much simpler structure, he did not even attempt to explain how
the simple light sensitive spot that was his starting point actually worked.
When discussing the eye Darwin dismissed the question of its ultimate
mechanism by stating: “How a nerve comes to be sensitive to light hardly
concerns us more than how life itself originated.”

He had an excellent reason for declining to answer the question: 19th cen-
tury science had not progressed to the point where the matter could even be

483

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

approached. The question of how the eye works—that is, what happens
when a photon of light first impinges on the retina—simply could not be an-
swered at that time. As a matter of fact, no question about the underlying
mechanism of life could be answered at that time. How do animal muscles
cause movement? How does photosynthesis work? How is energy extracted
from food? How does the body fight infection? All such questions were
unanswerable.

The Calvin and Hobbes Approach

Now, it appears to be a characteristic of the human mind that when it lacks
understanding of a process, then it seems easy to imagine simple steps lead-
ing from nonfunction to function. A happy example of this is seen in the
popular comic strip Calvin and Hobbes. Little boy Calvin is always having ad-
ventures in the company of his tiger Hobbes by jumping in a box and travel-
ing back in time, or grabbing a toy ray gun and “transmogrifying” himself
into various animal shapes, or again using a box as a duplicator and making
copies of himself to deal with worldly powers such as his mom and his
teachers. A small child such as Calvin finds it easy to imagine that a box just
might be able to fly like an airplane (or something), because Calvin doesn’t
know how airplanes work.

A good example from the biological world of complex changes appearing
to be simple is the belief in spontaneous generation. One of the chief propo-
nents of the theory of spontaneous generation during the middle of the 19th
century was Ernst Haeckel, a great admirer of Darwin and an eager popu-
larizer of Darwin’s theory. From the limited view of cells that 19th century
microscopes provided, Haeckel believed that a cell was a “simple little lump
of albuminous combination of carbon,” not much different from a piece of
microscopic Jell-O®. Thus it seemed to Haeckel that such simple life could
easily be produced from inanimate material.

In 1859, the year of the publication of The Origin of Species, an exploratory
vessel, the H.M.S. Cyclops, dredged up some curious-looking mud from the
sea bottom. Eventually Haeckel came to observe the mud and thought that
it closely resembled some cells he had seen under a microscope. Excitedly
he brought this to the attention of no less a personage than Thomas Henry
Huxley, Darwin’s great friend and defender, who observed the mud for him-
self. Huxley, too, became convinced that it was Urschleim (that is, proto-
plasm), the progenitor of life itself, and Huxley named the mud Bathybius
haeckelii after the eminent proponent of abiogenesis.

The mud failed to grow. In later years, with the development of new bio-
chemical techniques and improved microscopes, the complexity of the cell
was revealed. The “simple lumps” were shown to contain thousands of dif-
ferent types of organic molecules, proteins, and nucleic acids, many discrete
subcellular structures, specialized compartments for specialized processes,
and an extremely complicated architecture. Looking back from the perspec-
tive of our time, the episode of Bathybius haeckelii seems silly or downright
embarrassing, but it shouldn’t. Haeckel and Huxley were behaving naturally,

484

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

like Calvin: since they were unaware of the complexity of cells, they found it
easy to believe that cells could originate from simple mud.

Throughout history there have been many other examples, similar to that
of Haeckel, Huxley, and the cell, where a key piece of a particular scientific
puzzle was beyond the understanding of the age. In science there is even a
whimsical term for a machine or structure or process that does something,
but the actual mechanism by which it accomplishes its task is unknown: it is
called a “black box.” In Darwin’s time all of biology was a black box: not
only the cell, or the eye, or digestion, or immunity, but every biological
structure and function because, ultimately, no one could explain how bio-
logical processes occurred.

Biology has progressed tremendously due to the model that Darwin put
forth. But the black boxes Darwin accepted are now being opened, and our
view of the world is again being shaken.

Take our modern understanding of proteins, for example.

Proteins

In order to understand the molecular basis of life it is necessary to understand
how things called “proteins” work. Proteins are the machinery of living tissue
that build the structures and carry out the chemical reactions necessary for
life. For example, the first of many steps necessary for the conversion of sugar
to biologically-usable forms of energy is carried out by a protein called hexo-
kinase. Skin is made in large measure of a protein called collagen. When light
impinges on your retina it interacts first with a protein called rhodopsin. A
typical cell contains thousands and thousands of different types of proteins to
perform the many tasks necessary for life, much like a carpenter’s workshop
might contain many different kinds of tools for various carpentry tasks.

What do these versatile tools look like? The basic structure of proteins is
quite simple: they are formed by hooking together in a chain discrete subunits
called amino acids. Although the protein chain can consist of anywhere from
about 50 to about 1,000 amino acid links, each position can only contain one
of 20 different amino acids. In this they are much like words: words can come
in various lengths but they are made up from a discrete set of 26 letters.

Now, a protein in a cell does not float around like a floppy chain; rather, it
folds up into a very precise structure which can be quite different for differ-
ent types of proteins. Two different amino acid sequences—two different
proteins—can be folded to structures as specific and different from each
other as a three-eighths inch wrench and a jigsaw. And like the household
tools, if the shape of the proteins is significantly warped then they fail to do
their jobs.

The Eyesight of Man

In general, biological processes on the molecular level are performed by net-
works of proteins, each member of which carries out a particular task in a chain.

485

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

Let us return to the question, how do we see? Although to Darwin the
primary event of vision was a black box, through the efforts of many bio-
chemists an answer to the question of sight is at hand. The answer involves
a long chain of steps that begin when light strikes the retina and a photon is
absorbed by an organic molecule called 11-cis-retinal, causing it to rearrange
itself within picoseconds. This causes a corresponding change to the protein,
rhodopsin, which is tightly bound to it, so that it can react with another pro-
tein called transducin, which in turn causes a molecule called GDP to be ex-
changed with a molecule called GTP.

To make a long story short, this exchange begins a long series of further
bindings between still more specialized molecular machinery, and scientists
now understand a great deal about the system of gateways, pumps, ion chan-
nels, critical concentrations, and attenuated signals that result in a current to
finally be transmitted down the optic nerve to the brain, interpreted as vision.
Biochemists also understand the many chemical reactions involved in restor-
ing all these changed or depleted parts to make a new cycle possible.

To Explain Life

Although space doesn’t permit me to give the details of the biochemistry of
vision here, I have given the steps in my talks. Biochemists know what it
means to “explain” vision. They know the level of explanation that biologi-
cal science eventually must aim for. In order to say that some function is un-
derstood, every relevant step in the process must be elucidated. The relevant
steps in biological processes occur ultimately at the molecular level, so a sat-
isfactory explanation of a biological phenomenon such as sight, or digestion,
or immunity, must include a molecular explanation.

It is no longer sufficient, now that the black box of vision has been
opened, for an “evolutionary explanation” of that power to invoke only the
anatomical structures of whole eyes, as Darwin did in the 19th century and
as most popularizers of evolution continue to do today. Anatomy is, quite
simply, irrelevant. So is the fossil record. It does not matter whether or not
the fossil record is consistent with evolutionary theory, any more than it
mattered in physics that Newton’s theory was consistent with everyday ex-
perience. The fossil record has nothing to tell us about, say, whether or how
the interactions of 11-cis-retinal with rhodopsin, transducin, and phospho-
diesterase could have developed, step by step.

“How a nerve comes to be sensitive to light hardly concerns us more than
how life itself originated,” said Darwin in the 19th century. But both phe-
nomena have attracted the interest of modern biochemistry in the past few
decades. The story of the slow paralysis of research on life’s origin is quite
interesting, but space precludes its retelling here. Suffice it to say that at
present the field of origin-of-life studies has dissolved into a cacophony of
conflicting models, each unconvincing, seriously incomplete, and incompat-
ible with competing models. In private even most evolutionary biologists
will admit that science has no explanation for the beginning of life.

486

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

The same problems which beset origin-of-life research also bedevil efforts to
show how virtually any complex biochemical system came about. Biochem-
istry has revealed a molecular world which stoutly resists explanation by the
same theory that has long been applied at the level of the whole organism. Nei-
ther of Darwin’s black boxes—the origin of life or the origin of vision (or other
complex biochemical systems)—has been accounted for by his theory.

Irreducible Complexity

In The Origin of Species Darwin stated:

If it could be demonstrated that any complex organ existed which could not pos-
sibly have been formed by numerous, successive, slight modifications, my theory
would absolutely break down.

A system which meets Darwin’s criterion is one which exhibits irre-
ducible complexity. By irreducible complexity I mean a single system which
is composed of several interacting parts that contribute to the basic function,
and where the removal of any one of the parts causes the system to effec-
tively cease functioning. An irreducibly complex system cannot be produced
directly by slight, successive modification of a precursor system, since any
precursor to an irreducibly complex system is by definition nonfunctional.

Since natural selection requires a function to select, an irreducibly com-
plex biological system, if there is such a thing, would have to arise as an in-
tegrated unit for natural selection to have anything to act on. It is almost
universally conceded that such a sudden event would be irreconcilable with
the gradualism Darwin envisioned. At this point, however, “irreducibly
complex” is just a term, whose power resides mostly in its definition. We
must now ask if any real thing is in fact irreducibly complex, and, if so, then
are any irreducibly complex things also biological systems?

Hammer Spring

Holding Bar

PlatformCatch

Figure 20.1 A household mousetrap. The working parts of the trap are labeled. If any of the
parts is missing, the trap does not function.

487

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

Consider the humble mousetrap (Figure 20.1). The mousetraps that my
family uses in our home to deal with unwelcome rodents consist of a num-
ber of parts. There are: (1) a flat wooden platform to act as a base; (2) a metal
hammer, which does the actual job of crushing the little mouse; (3) a wire
spring with extended ends to press against the platform and the hammer
when the trap is charged; (4) a sensitive catch which releases when slight
pressure is applied; and (5) a metal bar which holds the hammer back when
the trap is charged and connects to the catch. There are also assorted staples
and screws to hold the system together.

If any one of the components of the mousetrap (the base, hammer, spring,
catch, or holding bar) is removed, then the trap does not function. In other
words, the simple little mousetrap has no ability to trap a mouse until sev-
eral separate parts are all assembled.

Because the mousetrap is necessarily composed of several parts, it is irre-
ducibly complex. Thus, irreducibly complex systems exist.

Molecular Machines

Now, are any biochemical systems irreducibly complex? Yes, it turns out
that many are.

Earlier we discussed proteins. In many biological structures proteins are
simply components of larger molecular machines. Like the picture tube,
wires, metal bolts, and screws that comprise a television set, many proteins
are part of structures that only function when virtually all of the compo-
nents have been assembled.

A good example of this is a cilium. Cilia are hairlike organelles on the sur-
faces of many animal and lower plant cells that serve to move fluid over the
cell’s surface or to “row” single cells through a fluid. In humans, for exam-
ple, epithelial cells lining the respiratory tract each have about 200 cilia that
beat in synchrony to sweep mucus towards the throat for elimination.

A cilium consists of a membrane-coated bundle of fibers called an ax-
oneme. An axoneme contains a ring of 9 double microtubules surrounding
two central single microtubules. Each outer doublet consists of a ring of 13
filaments (subfiber A) fused to an assembly of 10 filaments (subfiber B). The
filaments of the microtubules are composed of two proteins called alpha and
beta tubulin. The 11 microtubules forming an axoneme are held together by
three types of connectors: subfibers A are joined to the central microtubules
by radial spokes; adjacent outer doublets are joined by linkers that consist of
a highly elastic protein called nexin; and the central microtubules are joined
by a connecting bridge. Finally, every subfiber A bears two arms, an inner
arm and an outer arm, both containing the protein dynein.

But how does a cilium work? Experiments have indicated that ciliary mo-
tion results from the chemically-powered “walking” of the dynein arms on one
microtubule up the neighboring subfiber B of a second microtubule so that the
two microtubules slide past each other (Figure 20.2). However, the protein
cross-links between microtubules in an intact cilium prevent neighboring mi-
crotubules from sliding past each other by more than a short distance. These

488

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

cross-links, therefore, convert the dynein-induced sliding motion to a bending
motion of the entire axoneme.

Now, let us sit back, review the workings of the cilium, and consider what
it implies. Cilia are composed of at least a half dozen proteins: alpha-tubulin,
beta-tubulin, dynein, nexin, spoke protein, and a central bridge protein.
These combine to perform one task, ciliary motion, and all of these proteins
must be present for the cilium to function. If the tubulins are absent, then
there are no filaments to slide; if the dynein is missing, then the cilium re-
mains rigid and motionless; if nexin or the other connecting proteins are
missing, then the axoneme falls apart when the filaments slide.

What we see in the cilium, then, is not just profound complexity, but it is
also irreducible complexity on the molecular scale. Recall that by “irre-
ducible complexity” we mean an apparatus that requires several distinct
components for the whole to work. My mousetrap must have a base, ham-
mer, spring, catch, and holding bar, all working together, in order to func-
tion. Similarly, the cilium, as it is constituted, must have the sliding
filaments, connecting proteins, and motor proteins for function to occur. In
the absence of any one of those components, the apparatus is useless.

The components of cilia are single molecules. This means that there are
no more black boxes to invoke; the complexity of the cilium is final, funda-
mental. And just as scientists, when they began to learn the complexities of
the cell, realized how silly it was to think that life arose spontaneously in a

Figure 20.2 Schematic drawing of part of a cilium. The power stroke of the motor protein
dynein, attached to one microtubule, against subfiber B of a neighboring microtubule causes
the fibers to slide past each other. The flexible linker protein, nexin, converts the sliding motion
to a bending motion.

Nexin

Nexin

Nexin

Nexin

Dynein
Dynein

Power

Stroke

B AB A B A

B A

489

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

single step or a few steps from ocean mud, so too we now realize that the
complex cilium cannot be reached in a single step or a few steps.

But since the complexity of the cilium is irreducible, then it cannot
have functional precursors. Since the irreducibly complex cilium cannot
have functional precursors, it cannot be produced by natural selection,
which requires a continuum of function to work. Natural selection is
powerless when there is no function to select. We can go further and say
that, if the cilium cannot be produced by natural selection, then the cilium
was designed.

A Non-Mechanical Example

A non-mechanical example of irreducible complexity can be seen in the sys-
tem that targets proteins for delivery to subcellular compartments. In order
to find their way to the compartments where they are needed to perform
specialized tasks, certain proteins contain a special amino acid sequence
near the beginning called a “signal sequence.”

As the proteins are being synthesized by ribosomes, a complex molecular
assemblage called the signal recognition particle or SRP, binds to the signal
sequence. This causes synthesis of the protein to halt temporarily. During
the pause in protein synthesis the SRP is bound by the transmembrane SRP
receptor, which causes protein synthesis to resume and which allows pas-
sage of the protein into the interior of the endoplasmic reticulum (ER). As
the protein passes into the ER the signal sequence is cut off.

For many proteins the ER is just a way station on their travels to their fi-
nal destinations (Figure 20.3). Proteins which will end up in a lysosome are
enzymatically “tagged” with a carbohydrate residue called mannose-6-
phosphate while still in the ER. An area of the ER membrane then begins to
concentrate several proteins; one protein, clathrin, forms a sort of geodesic
dome called a coated vesicle which buds off from the ER. In the dome there
is also a receptor protein which binds to both the clathrin and to the mannose-
6-phosphate group of the protein which is being transported. The coated
vesicle then leaves the ER, travels through the cytoplasm, and binds to the
lysosome through another specific receptor protein. Finally, in a maneuver
involving several more proteins, the vesicle fuses with the lysosome and the
protein arrives at its destination.

During its travels our protein interacted with dozens of macromolecules
to achieve one purpose: its arrival in the lysosome. Virtually all components
of the transport system are necessary for the system to operate, and there-
fore the system is irreducible. And since all of the components of the system
are comprised of single or several molecules, there are no black boxes to in-
voke. The consequences of even a single gap in the transport chain can be
seen in the hereditary defect known as I-cell disease. It results from a defi-
ciency of the enzyme that places the mannose-6-phosphate on proteins to be
targeted to the lysosomes. I-cell disease is characterized by progressive
retardation, skeletal deformities, and early death.

490

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

The Study of “Molecular Evolution”

Other examples of irreducible complexity abound, including aspects of pro-
tein transport, blood clotting, closed circular DNA, electron transport, the
bacterial flagellum, telomeres, photosynthesis, transcription regulation, and
much more. Examples of irreducible complexity can be found on virtually
every page of a biochemistry textbook. But if these things cannot be ex-
plained by Darwinian evolution, how has the scientific community regarded
these phenomena of the past forty years?

A good place to look for an answer to that question is in the Journal of
Molecular Evolution. JME is a journal that was begun specifically to deal
with the topic of how evolution occurs on the molecular level. It has high
scientific standards, and is edited by prominent figures in the field. In a re-
cent issue of JME there were published eleven articles; of these, all eleven
were concerned simply with the analysis of protein or DNA sequences.
None of the papers discussed detailed models for intermediates in the de-
velopment of complex biomolecular structures. In the past ten years JME
has published 886 papers. Of these, 95 discussed the chemical synthesis of
molecules thought to be necessary for the origin of life, 44 proposed mathe-
matical models to improve sequence analysis, 20 concerned the evolution-
ary implications of current structures and 719 were analyses of protein or
polynucleotide sequences. However, there weren’t any papers discussing
detailed models for intermediates in the development of complex biomole-
cular structures. This is not a peculiarity of JME. No papers are to be found
that discuss detailed models for intermediates in the development of com-
plex biomolecular structures in the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sci-
ence, Nature, Science, the Journal of Molecular Biology or, to my knowledge,
any journal whatsoever.

Sequence comparisons overwhelmingly dominate the literature of molec-
ular evolution. But sequence comparisons simply can’t account for the

Figure 20.3 Transport of a protein from the ER to the lysosome. Step I: A specific enzyme (gray
oval) places a marker on the protein (black sphere). This takes place within the ER, which is de-
limited by a barrier membrane (cross-hatched bar with ends curving to the left). Step II: The
marker is specifically recognized by a receptor protein and the clathrin vesicle (hexagonal
shape) begins to form. Step III: The clathrin vesicle is completed and buds off from the ER mem-
brane. Step IV: The clathrin vesicle crosses the cytoplasm and attaches through another specific
marker to a receptor protein (dark gray box) on the lysosomal membrane and releases its cargo.

Step I II III IV V

491

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

development of complex biochemical systems any more than Darwin’s com-
parison of simple and complex eyes told him how vision worked. Thus in
this area science is mute.

Detection of Design

What’s going on? Imagine a room in which a body lies crushed, flat as a pan-
cake. A dozen detectives crawl around, examining the floor with magnifying
glasses for any clue to the identity of the perpetrator. In the middle of the
room next to the body stands a large, gray elephant. The detectives carefully
avoid bumping into the pachyderm’s legs as they crawl, and never even
glance at it. Over time the detectives get frustrated with their lack of progress
but resolutely press on, looking even more closely at the floor. You see, text-
books say detectives must “get their man,” so they never consider elephants.

There is an elephant in the roomful of scientists who are trying to explain
the development of life. The elephant is labeled “intelligent design.” To a
person who does not feel obliged to restrict his search to unintelligent
causes, the straightforward conclusion is that many biochemical systems
were designed. They were designed not by the laws of nature, not by chance
and necessity. Rather, they were planned. The designer knew what the sys-
tems would look like when they were completed; the designer took steps to
bring the systems about. Life on earth at its most fundamental level, in its
most critical components, is the product of intelligent activity.

The conclusion of intelligent design flows naturally from the data
itself—not from sacred books or sectarian beliefs. Inferring that biochemi-
cal systems were designed by an intelligent agent is a humdrum process
that requires no new principles of logic or science. It comes simply from the
hard work that biochemistry has done over the past forty years, combined
with consideration of the way in which we reach conclusions of design
every day.

What is “design”? Design is simply the purposeful arrangement of parts.
The scientific question is how we detect design. This can be done in various
ways, but design can most easily be inferred for mechanical objects.

Systems made entirely from natural components can also evince design.
For example, suppose you are walking with a friend in the woods. All of a
sudden your friend is pulled high in the air and left dangling by his foot
from a vine attached to a tree branch.

After cutting him down you reconstruct the trap. You see that the vine
was wrapped around the tree branch, and the end pulled tightly down to
the ground. It was securely anchored to the ground by a forked branch. The
branch was attached to another vine—hidden by leaves—so that, when the
trigger-vine was disturbed, it would pull down the forked stick, releasing
the spring-vine. The end of the vine formed a loop with a slipknot to grab
an appendage and snap it up into the air. Even though the trap was made
completely of natural materials you would quickly conclude that it was the
product of intelligent design.

492

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

Intelligent design is a good explanation for a number of biochemical
systems, but I should insert a word of caution. Intelligent design theory
has to be seen in context: it does not try to explain everything. We live in a
complex world where lots of different things can happen. When deciding
how various rocks came to be shaped the way they are a geologist might
consider a whole range of factors: rain, wind, the movement of glaciers,
the activity of moss and lichens, volcanic action, nuclear explosions, aster-
oid impact, or the hand of a sculptor. The shape of one rock might have
been determined primarily by one mechanism, the shape of another rock
by another mechanism.

Similarly, evolutionary biologists have recognized that a number of fac-
tors might have affected the development of life: common descent, natural
selection, migration, population size, founder effects (effects that may be
due to the limited number of organisms that begin a new species), genetic
drift (spread of “neutral,” nonselective mutations), gene flow (the incorpo-
ration of genes into a population from a separate population), linkage
(occurrence of two genes on the same chromosome), and much more. The
fact that some biochemical systems were designed by an intelligent agent
does not mean that any of the other factors are not operative, common,
or important.

Conclusion

It is often said that science must avoid any conclusions which smack of the
supernatural. But this seems to me to be both bad logic and bad science. Sci-
ence is not a game in which arbitrary rules are used to decide what explana-
tions are to be permitted. Rather, it is an effort to make true statements about
physical reality. It was only about sixty years ago that the expansion of the
universe was first observed. This fact immediately suggested a singular
event—that at some time in the distant past the universe began expanding
from an extremely small size.

To many people this inference was loaded with overtones of a supernatu-
ral event—the creation, the beginning of the universe. The prominent physi-
cist A. S. Eddington probably spoke for many physicists in voicing his
disgust with such a notion:

Philosophically, the notion of an abrupt beginning to the present order of
Nature is repugnant to me, as I think it must be to most; and even those
who would welcome a proof of the intervention of a Creator will probably
consider that a single winding-up at some remote epoch is not really the
kind of relation between God and his world that brings satisfaction to
the mind.

Nonetheless, the big bang hypothesis was embraced by physics and over
the years has proven to be a very fruitful paradigm. The point here is that

493

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

physics followed the data where it seemed to lead, even though some
thought the model gave aid and comfort to religion. In the present day, as
biochemistry multiplies examples of fantastically complex molecular sys-
tems, systems which discourage even an attempt to explain how they may
have arisen, we should take a lesson from physics. The conclusion of design
flows naturally from the data; we should not shrink from it; we should em-
brace it and build on it.

In concluding, it is important to realize that we are not inferring design
from what we do not know, but from what we do know. We are not inferring
design to account for a black box, but to account for an open box. A man
from a primitive culture who sees an automobile might guess that it was
powered by the wind or by an antelope hidden under the car, but when he
opens up the hood and sees the engine he immediately realizes that it was
designed. In the same way biochemistry has opened up the cell to examine
what makes it run and we see that it, too, was designed.

It was a shock to the people of the 19th century when they discovered,
from observations science had made, that many features of the biological
world could be ascribed to the elegant principle of natural selection. It is a
shock to us in the twentieth century to discover, from observations science
has made, that the fundamental mechanisms of life cannot be ascribed to
natural selection, and therefore were designed. But we must deal with our
shock as best we can and go on. The theory of undirected evolution is al-
ready dead, but the work of science continues.

1. Explain what Behe means by “irreducible complexity.” Give examples of
what is and of what is not irreducibly complex, according to Behe, then ex-
plain why he takes the former to be and the latter not to be irreducibly
complex. Why is irreducible complexity supposed to be a problem for Dar-
win’s theory of evolution?

2. Behe cites the human eye as evidence against Darwin’s theory of evolution.
Explain Behe’s claims and arguments using this example. How could Dar-
win best respond? Do you think Darwin’s theory of evolution can explain
the eye? Why or why not?

3. Behe next cites cilia to argue against Darwin’s theory of evolution.
Answer the same questions as in Discussion Question 2 about this
example.

4. In addition to arguing against Darwin, Behe argues positively that “the
conclusion of intelligent design flows naturally from the data itself—not
from sacred books or sectarian beliefs.” Explain Behe’s conclusion here
and his argument for that conclusion. Do you agree with Behe? Why or
why not?

Discussion Questions

494

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

LIVING WITH DARWIN

by Philip Kitcher

(New York: Oxford University Press, 2007)

. . . Darwin’s own consideration of the concrete case argument focused on
some complex organs and structures that he rightly believed to be hard to
understand in terms of natural selection. Two examples are prominent in the
Origin, the eye and the electric organs found in some fish. The latter exam-
ple disconcerted Darwin because the fish with electric organs are of very dif-
ferent types, and have their organs in different parts of their bodies. Much
to his relief, research on electric fish carried out by a contemporary who was
not sympathetic to evolutionary ideas—”McDonnell of Dublin (a first-rate
man)”*—revealed that, for each type of fish with an electric organ, there is a
related fish with a similar organ (not functionally electric) in the same posi-
tion. What had initially appeared to be the challenge of understanding how
different electric organs had been built from scratch, became the much sim-
pler question of how a similar change had occurred in each instance.

Darwin himself offered a tentative proposal about the evolution of the
eye. He supposed that sensitivity to light might come in degrees, and that it
might be possible to find, among existing organisms, some with a crude
ability to respond to light, others with a more refined capacity and so on in
something like a series. Perhaps, he speculated, research on these creatures
might expose reasons why the different levels of sensitivity provided an ad-
vantage over rival organisms who had less, thus providing a way of answer-
ing (or sidestepping) the creationist quip, “What use is half an eye?”

It has taken more than a century of research on a wide variety of organisms
to demonstrate that Darwin’s hunch was basically right. Appearances to the
contrary, organs and structures sensitive to light can be assembled piecemeal,
with the intermediates enjoying some advantage over the competition. Biolo-
gists have studied organisms that respond to the light that impinges on their
surfaces, organisms with indentations of the superficial layer that are able to
acquire information about the direction of the light, organisms with deeper in-
dentations whose light detection is more fine grained, organisms that have a
structure resembling a pinhole camera, organisms that interpose a translucent
medium between the surface and the aperture through which the light
comes—and so on. By studying this sequence of organisms, they have been
able to explore the transitions through which relatively crude abilities to detect
light were successively refined.** One feature of the story deserves emphasis.
Darwin didn’t start with a comparison between the fully formed eye—in a hu-
man being or an octopus, say—and then think of the component parts as being

* Francis Darwin, ed., Life and Letters of Charles Darwin, vol. 2 (London: John Murray, 1888), 352.

** For a superbly accessible presentation of this research, see Richard Dawkins, Climbing Mount
Improbable (New York: Norton, 1996). Another lucid, and concise, account by one of the scientists
involved is Dan-Eric Nilsson, “Vision Optics and Evolution” in Bioscience, 39, 1989, 298–307.

495

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

introduced, one at a time. He resisted the challenge to explain first the advan-
tage of an eighth of an eye, then the advantage of a quarter of an eye, and so
on, and focused instead on a function, light sensitivity, that might have been
refined from an initial state of absence. To put it more bluntly, he didn’t allow
his envisaged challengers to define the sequence of “intermediates” for him.

Savvy champions of the concrete case argument know this story. They ap-
preciate Darwin’s ingenuity in responding to the challenge, and, although
they think the response ultimately fails, their reasons for this judgment de-
pend on a more general problem for evolution under natural selection. That
more general problem derives from the fine structure of the components of
complex organs (like eyes), the molecular mechanisms that have to be in
place for eyes to work. For all Darwin’s cleverness, he failed to appreciate
the full depth, and the full generality of the difficulty confronting him.

The principal exponent of the complex case argument is Michael Behe, a
professor of biochemistry, who argues at length in Darwin’s Black Box that
the real troubles of natural selection become visible when you appreciate the
molecular components of complex biological systems. Almost everywhere
you look in nature, there are complicated structures and processes, with
many molecular constituents, and all the constituents need to be present and
to fit together precisely for things to work as they should. Biochemical path-
ways require numerous enzymes to interact with one another, in appropri-
ate relative concentrations, so that some important process can occur. If you
imagine a mutation in one of the genes that directs the formation of some es-
sential protein, or if you suppose that the genetic material becomes shuffled
in a way that allows for differences in the rates at which proteins are formed,
it looks as though disaster will ensue. Crucial pieces will be missing, or
won’t be present in the right proportions, so that everything will break
down. How then could organisms with the pertinent structures or processes
have evolved from organisms that lacked them?

Behe offers numerous instances of molecular machines that, he claims,
could not have been built up in stages by natural selection. Among his most
influential examples is a discussion of devices that some bacteria use for mo-
tion, flagella. He contrasts the bacterial flagellum with a different motor,
used by other cells, the cilium. “In 1973 it was discovered that some bacteria
swim by rotating their flagella. So the bacterial flagellum acts as a rotary
propeller—in contrast to the cilium, which acts more like an oar.”* Both fla-
gella and cilia are intricate structures, and Behe describes the many molecu-
lar parts and systems that have to be present if they are to do their jobs. He
concludes that the complexity of the organization dooms any attempt to ex-
plain its emergence as the result of natural selection. “As biochemists have
begun to examine apparently simple structures like cilia and flagella, they
have discovered staggering complexity, with dozens or even hundreds of

* Behe, Darwin’s Black Box, 70. Behe uses the example of the bacterial flagellum as a parade case
in many of his writings and presentations. See, for example, “Design at the Foundation of Life”
in Science and Evidence for Design in the Universe (San Francisco: Ignatius Press, 2000), 120 ff.

496

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

precisely tailored parts. It is very likely that many of the parts we have not
considered here are required for any cilium to function in a cell. As the num-
ber of required parts increases, the difficulty of gradually putting the system
together skyrockets, and the likelihood of indirect scenarios plummets. Dar-
win looks more and more forlorn.”* Indeed, the most famous portraits of
Darwin hardly make him look exactly cheerful, but it’s worth asking why
examples like these should render him more forlorn.

Perhaps it seems obvious. Natural selection depends upon mutations that
are not produced in response to the organism’s needs. The bacteria are at the
mercy of chance, which will fling in this variant protein or that, with negli-
gible probability that the latest novelty will fit with what went before or will
contribute to the design project of building a flagellum. In essentials, how-
ever, this is precisely parallel to an old creationist strategy, just the one that
Darwin sidestepped in the case of the eye. Behe has specified how the inter-
mediates are to be formed, and it isn’t surprising that his preferred scenario
has the air of impossibility.

What exactly is known about the bacterial flagellum? During the past few
decades, careful molecular studies have identified the genes that direct the
assembly of the motor, and have explored the ways in which it is put to-
gether in the development of an individual bacterium. Some mutations in
these genes allow for bacteria to move, albeit less efficiently. What is cur-
rently missing, however, is that systematic study of the differences among
bacteria with flagella and bacteria without that would parallel the knowl-
edge attained in the case of vision. A sufficiently intensive study of the
genomes of bacteria that lack flagella would enable biologists to explore the
potential role of some of the crucial genes, and of the proteins they give rise
to, when others are absent, and thus enable them to make more progress
with Behe’s apparently formidable challenge.

Most sciences face unsolved problems—indeed the exciting unsolved
problems are the motivators for talented people to enter a field. Chemists
still struggle to understand how newly made proteins fold into their three-
dimensional shapes as they are synthesized. To take an instance closer to
hand, Behe’s own discussion acknowledges that there’s still a lot to learn
about the molecular structure and functions of cilia. Unsolved questions are
not typically written off as unsolvable—nobody proposes that there’s some
special force, unknown to current chemistry (an “intelligent force” per-
haps?) that guides the proteins to their proper forms, or some hand that as-
sembles the cilium in the development of an individual bacterium. Why,
then, should we believe that the problem of the bacterial flagellum is un-
solvable? Just because, in the absence of systematic molecular studies of
bacteria with and without flagella, we can’t currently give a satisfactory
scenario for the evolution of the bacterial flagellum under natural selection,
why should we conclude that further research couldn’t disclose how that
evolution occurred?

* Behe, Darwin’s Black Box, 73.

497

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

We are beguiled by the simple story line Behe rehearses. He invites us to
consider the situation by supposing that the flagellum requires the introduc-
tion of some number—20, say—of proteins that the ancestral bacterium
doesn’t originally have. So Darwinians have to produce a sequence of 21 or-
ganisms, the first having none of the proteins, and each subsequent organ-
ism having one more than its predecessor. Darwin is forlorn because
however he tries to imagine the possible pathway along which genetic
changes successively appeared, he appreciates the plight of numbers 2–20,
each of which is clogged with proteins that can’t serve any function, proteins
that interfere with important cellular processes. These organisms will be targets
of selection, and will wither in the struggle for existence. Only number 1, and
number 21, in which all the protein constituents come together to form
the flagellum, have what it takes. Because of the dreadful plight of the inter-
mediates, natural selection couldn’t have brought the bacterium from there
to here.

The story is fantasy, and Darwinians should disavow any commitment to
it. First, there is no good reason for supposing that the ancestral bacterium
lacked all, or even any, of the proteins needed to build the flagellum. It’s a
common theme of evolutionary biology that constituents of a cell, a tissue,
or an organism are put to new uses because of a modification of the genome.
Perhaps the immediate precursor of the bacterium with the flagellum is an
organism in which all the protein constituents are already present, but are
employed in different ways. Then, at the very last step there’s a change in
the genome that removes whatever chemical barrier previously prevented
the building of the flagellum. In this organism (the precursor), the function
of one of the proteins is to increase the efficiency of a particular energy-
transfer process. The precursor of the precursor lacked that protein, so that
the genetic change that led to the precursor improved a process that was
previously adequate. So it goes, back down a sequence of ancestors, all quite
capable of functioning in their environments but all at a selective disadvan-
tage to the bacteria that succeeded them.

Isn’t this all fantasy too? Of course*—but it is no more the product of
speculative imagination than Behe’s seemingly plausible assumption that
the components of the flagellum would have had to be added one by one,
and would have sat around idly (at best) until the culminating moment
when all were present. Moreover, we were supposed to be offered a proof of
impossibility, and that won’t be complete until Behe and his allies have
shown that all the conceivable scenarios through which bacteria might ac-
quire flagella are flawed. Really demonstrating impossibility—or even im-
probability—here and in kindred instances, is extremely difficult, precisely
because it would require a much more systematic survey of the molecular
differences among bacteria.

* Perhaps not complete fantasy. The account I offer here is concordant with a recent review of the
molecular details of the bacterial flagellum. See Howard C. Berg, “The Rotary Motor of Bacterial
Flagella,” Annual Review of Biochemistry, 72, 2003, 19–54. (For this reference, I’m indebted to Mel
Simon.)

498

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

The serious way forward is to amend our ignorance, by sequencing the
genomes of different bacteria, with and without flagella. Using our current
knowledge of the genetic basis of the flagellum, researchers would be able to
specify more clearly what the intermediate forms—those with some, but not
all, of the crucial genes—might have been like, and what functions the rele-
vant proteins might have served. Until we know these things, efforts to de-
scribe intermediates will be so much whistling in the dark. Behe’s examples
rely on guesses that simply anticipate what this hard work would reveal.

So we have the illusion of an impossibility proof. Allegedly there could be
no sequence of intermediates concluding with the fortunate, flagellum-bearing
bacterium, in which each member of the sequence enjoyed a selective advan-
tage over its predecessor. Behe’s story (quite charmingly told in Darwin’s Black
Box) offers his own preferred version of what the sequence would have to be
like. Since Darwinians have no commitment to simpleminded stories of
sequential addition of components, there is no reason to accept Behe’s descrip-
tion. Because the same rhetorical strategy pervades his entire book, showing
up in all the instances of the concrete case argument he provides, all the parade
of examples really shows is that there are some interesting problems for molec-
ularly minded evolutionists to work on, problems they might hope to solve in
the light of increased understanding from comparative studies of the genetics
and development of a wide variety of organisms.

The computational argument occurs in a variety of forms in current in-
telligent design literature, sometimes with relatively simple calculations of
infinitesimal probabilities, on other occasions with much more technical
specification of conditions under which we should make the “design infer-
ence” and conclude that some aspect of life has been intelligently de-
signed.* Whether or not intelligent designers attempt to be fully explicit
about the requirements for invoking design, all their versions require the
preliminary step of arguing that it is highly improbable that various as-
pects of life on earth could have emerged through natural selection. To use
an analogy much beloved by earlier creationists, Darwinian claims about
selection and the organization of life are equivalent to the idea that a hur-
ricane in a junkyard could assemble a functioning airplane.

Besides providing the concrete case argument, Behe offers several ver-
sions of its computational cousin. Here’s his attack on a scenario for the evo-
lution of a blood-clotting mechanism, tentatively proposed by the eminent
biochemist Russell Doolittle:

Let’s do our own quick calculation. Consider that animals with blood-clotting cas-
cades have roughly 10,000 genes, each of which is divided into an average of three
pieces. This gives a total of about 30,000 gene pieces. TPA [tissue plasminogen
activator] has four different types of domains. By “variously shuffling,” the odds

* For the full-dress treatment of the design inference, see William Dembski, The Design Inference
(Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998). For an incisive rebuttal, see Brandon Fitelson,
Christopher Stephens and Elliot Sober, “How Not to Detect Design” in Robert Pennock, ed.,
Intelligent Design Creationism and its Critics (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2001).

499

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

of getting those four domains together is 30,000 to the fourth power [presumably
Behe means that the chance is one-thirty-thousandth to the fourth power], which
is approximately one-tenth to the eighteenth power. Now, if the Irish Sweepstakes
had odds of winning of one-tenth to the eighteenth power, and if a million people
played the lottery each year, it would take about a thousand billion years before
anyone (not just a particular person) won the lottery. . . . Doolittle apparently needs
to shuffle and deal himself a number of perfect bridge hands to win the game.*

At first sight, this looks very powerful, since, given the time available for the
evolution of life on earth (four billion or so years), it seems extremely
improbable that the clotting mechanism could have evolved through natural
selection.

Yet we should think carefully about the ways in which the pertinent prob-
abilities are calculated. Behe is relying on two general ideas about probabil-
ity. One is the thought that, when events are independent of one another, the
probability that both will occur is the product of the individual probabili-
ties—if you toss a fair die twice, then the chance of getting two sixes is 1 in
36; for, on each toss, the probability is 1 in 6, and, since the tosses are inde-
pendent of one another, you multiply. The other idea is that, when you have
a range of alternatives and don’t have any reasons for thinking that one is
more likely to occur than another, each of the possibilities has an equal
chance. This idea, the notorious “principle of indifference,” is known to be
problematic, but, judiciously employed, it serves us well in some everyday
contexts—as, for example, when we conclude that each side of the die has
the same probability of falling uppermost.

Even in ordinary life, however, there are occasions on which applications of
these principles would lead us to obviously unacceptable conclusions, so that
we would rethink our computations. Consider a humdrum phenomenon sug-
gested by Behe’s analogy with bridge. You take a standard deck of cards and
deal 13 to yourself. What is the probability that you get exactly those cards in
exactly that order? The answer is 1 in 4 � 1021. Suppose you repeat the process
10 times. You’ll now have received 10 standard bridge hands, 10 sets of 13 cards,
each one delivered in a particular order. Scrupulously, you record just the
order in which all these cards were received, and calculate the chance that this
event occurs. The probability; you claim, is 1 in 410 � 10210, which is approxi-
mately 1 in 10216—notice that this denominator is enormously larger than
Behe’s 1018. It must be really improbable that you (or anyone else) would ever
receive just those cards in just that order in the entire history of the universe.
But you did, and you have witnesses to testify that your records are correct. Ex-
citedly, you contact Michael Behe to announce this quite miraculous event,
surely evidence of some kind of Intelligence at work in the universe.

Your report would not be well received. Like everyone else, Behe knows
how to understand this commonplace occurrence. Given the way in which
the cards were initially arranged, the first deal was bound to go as it did.
Given the shuffling that produced the ordering prior to the second deal, that

* Behe, Darwin’s Black Box, 94.

500

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

deal, too, was sure to give rise to just those cards in that order; and so on. So
there was a perspective, unknown to you, from which the probability of that
sequence of cards wasn’t some infinitesimally small number, but one (as high
as chances go). If you describe events that actually occur from a perspective
that lacks crucial items of knowledge, you can make them look improbable.
We know enough about card dealing and coin tossing to understand this,
and to see the calculation I attributed to you as perverse—for, although you
don’t know what the initial setup was, you should have recognized that there
was some initial setup that would determine the sequence. Hence you
should have known that application of the two general principles of proba-
bility in this context would provide a misleading view of the chance that this
particular sequence would result.

In the case of the evolution of blood clotting, our ignorance is deeper. Not
only do we not know what the initial molecular conditions—the prior state of
the organisms in the population in which blood clotting emerged—were, we
also don’t know whether that initial state favored certain sorts of molecular
changes rather than others. We have reason to think that Behe’s assumption
that there’s a precise chance of 1 in 30,000 that each gene piece will participate
in the “shuffling” process is incorrect. For, given what we know about mecha-
nisms within the genome, the idea of exactly equal chances is suspect. But we
don’t know whether, given the initial molecular state, the chance of the cas-
cade Doolittle hypothesizes remains infinitesimally small or whether it is
actually one. Any estimate of the probability here is an irresponsible guess.

My imagined experiment with the deck of cards suggests a different way
to think about the problem. Imagine that all the hands you were dealt were
mundane—fairly evenly distributed among the four suits, with a scattering
of high cards in each. If you calculated the probability of receiving ten mun-
dane hands in succession, it would naturally be a lot higher than the chance
of being dealt those very particular mundane hands, with the cards arriving
in precisely that sequence (although it wouldn’t be as high as you might ex-
pect). Blood clotting might also work in the same way, depending on how
many candidates there are among the 30,000 “gene pieces” to which Behe al-
ludes, that would yield a protein product able to play the necessary role.
Suppose that there are a thousand acceptable candidates for each of the four
positions in the molecule we need (TPA). The chance of success on any par-
ticular draw is now about 1 in 2.5 million. If there were 10,000 tries a year, it
would take, on average, two or three centuries to find an appropriate com-
bination, a flicker of an instant in evolutionary time.

My assumptions are no better—and no worse—than Behe’s, for neither of
us knows how tolerant the blood-clotting system is of the molecular combi-
nations that the animals in question (whatever they were) might have sup-
plied. We simply don’t know what the right way to look at this problem is.
But, given our ignorance, we shouldn’t make wild guesses and then declare
that the probabilities are so low that evolution under natural selection is
impossible. A better research strategy would be to try to assemble informa-
tion that will replace the guesses with serious estimates.

501

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

Moreover, even when the chance of a particular event turns out to be ex-
tremely small, it is important to resist the idea that that event could not have
occurred. Imagine that you own a ticket in a lottery with an extremely large
number of tickets—a million, say—and that the lottery is decided by a funda-
mentally random process, one that has no underlying causal basis by which
the outcome will be determined. (You might suppose that each ticket is asso-
ciated with a specific atomic nucleus of some radioactive element, and that the
prize will go to the person whose nucleus decays first.) On any perspective we
might justifiably adopt, there is a probability of one in a million that you will
win, and similarly for all the other ticket holders (nobody has more than one
ticket). Clearly, somebody will be lucky, and, after the fact, we’ll have to admit
that something very improbable has occurred. Moreover, this conclusion re-
mains valid even if the number of tickets is vastly expanded. However small
a probability we compute, it would be wrong to suppose that an outcome
with that probability would be impossible. Finally, even if some people had
massive numbers of tickets, it would still be possible for someone holding
only one to win. That shows that an extremely improbable outcome, one
much less probable than alternatives, is still possible.*

So there is another way to think about the allegedly minute probabilities
of life as we know it. Our galaxy has roughly 200 billion stars, and the total
number of galaxies, each with similar numbers of stars is—literally—
astronomical. Some fraction of these stars has planets that are potentially
suitable for sustaining life. Each such planet could be conceived as “buying
a ticket” in an enormous lottery, with the prize, or one of the prizes, consist-
ing in the emergence of life. For any of those planets, the probability of gain-
ing that prize is extremely small, but if there are enough of them, one will
win. That lucky planet may have been ours. . . .

So far I have focused on the negative doctrine of intelligent design, the
identification of unsolved evolutionary problems. We now have to consider
the positive thesis, the claim that the phenomena to which Darwin’s detrac-
tors point are produced by a process that deserves the label “intelligent.”
Two issues need to be considered. First, on what grounds should we apply
the label? Second, what help can intelligent design provide in understand-
ing the phenomena in question? . . .

Making any judgment about whether a mechanism is intelligent or not
appears rather difficult until we have been told considerably more about the
way in which that mechanism operates. Officially, of course, we aren’t sup-
posed to personify this mechanism, and it’s hard to understand just what
the attribution of Intelligence even means if we resist the personification. If
something counts as intelligent, wouldn’t it have psychological states and
engage in psychological processes—and wouldn’t anything like that be very
like a person? Intelligent design-ers do not address such questions. . . .

* For advice about these probabilistic considerations, I am grateful to Isaac Levi and Erick
Weinberg.

502

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

It’s simply a fallacy to suppose that because a particular structure or
mechanism appears complex, then the causal agent that brought it about
must be appropriately characterized as having “foreseen” or “planned” or
“designed” the outcome. Even if intelligent design-ers were right in sup-
posing that the phenomena they indicate couldn’t have evolved by natural
selection, only a more explicit identification of the causal mechanism that
was at work could justify the conclusion that that mechanism is intelligent.

So, turning to the second question posed above, what help can intelligent
design provide when we try to understand the difficulties it takes to beset
Darwinism? How does it deal with the bacterial flagellum, for example?

If we take Behe at his word when he declares that he finds “the idea of
common descent” to be “fairly convincing,” and that he has “no particular
reason to doubt it,”* then we should suppose that bacteria with flagella
emerged from ancestors who lacked flagella. In line with the simple addi-
tive story he uses to make a history of natural selection appear implausible,
he must suppose that the ancestors were missing a number of crucial pro-
teins that the lucky descendants acquired, proteins that, once present, fit
themselves together in the flagellum. If the intelligent design perspective is
to help settle the unsolved problems of evolution, it would be good to have
an alternative account that tells us how Intelligence facilitated the transition.

Unfortunately, the rest is silence. Neither in Behe’s writings, nor in those
of any other intelligent design-er, is there the slightest indication of how
Intelligence performs the magic that poor, limited, natural selection cannot.
On the face of it, there are just two basic possibilities. The first option is that
Intelligence arranges the environment so that the intermediates—the appar-
ently hapless organisms, cluttered with useless proteins—are protected
against elimination under natural selection. (If we were unofficially inclined,
we might say that the good Lord tempers the wind to the shorn bacterium.)
The second option is that Intelligence provides for coordinated mutations to
arise. If 20 genetic changes are needed, it brings about all of them at once. Or
we can mix elements of both options and suppose that Intelligence intro-
duces mutations in clumps—first ten, say, and then another ten, or first
seven, then another seven, then six—and arranges protective environments
for the intermediates. Of course, any story along these lines raises serious
doubts. Just how does the coordination of the genetic changes or the modifi-
cation of the environment work?

In presenting the possibilities in this way, I may seem to be forcing words
into the mouths of the intelligent design-ers. Their core position, after all, is
that at crucial moments in the history of life, descendants of some ancestors
who lacked some trait (or organ or structure) came to possess the pertinent
trait (organ, structure) by some causal process that is, unlike natural selec-
tion, intelligent. Why, then, do they have to talk about genes, mutations, and
the need for protection against natural selection? The answer is that the
traits in question are heritable—they are not introduced in each generation

* Behe, Darwin’s Black Box, 7.

503

Sc ient if ic Revolut ions

by some continued activity on the part of Intelligence, but emerge through
the interactions of genes and environments. As in the case of the bacterial
flagellum, there are underlying genes, and hence there have to be genetic
changes in the passages from the ancestors to the descendants. If these
changes occur over several generations, then, on the intelligent design-ers’
own principles, there has to be protection against the tendency of natural se-
lection to weed out the hapless intermediates. If they happen in one step,
then, again by the favored principles, there must be coordinated mutations.
Hence, even if the position would prefer to talk more vaguely of “novelties,”
it is committed to one of the options I have presented.

What intelligent design urgently needs if it’s going to make any progress
in understanding these transitions, in tackling the problems it claims to
raise, is a set of coherent principles that identify the ways in which Intelli-
gence is directed and what its powers and limitations are. If we lapse from
the official story for a moment, we have to have some idea about what In-
telligence “wants to achieve” and what kinds of things “it can do to work
toward what it wants.” What basis do we have to think that Intelligence
aims to remedy the plight of the flagellumless bacteria, who can’t evolve
into bacteria-with-a-flagellum under natural selection? What basis is there
to believe that Intelligence—or anything else, for that matter—can coordi-
nate genetic changes or modify environments?

In fact, we need two distinct kinds of principles. First, there have to be
principles that specify when Intelligence swings into action. Perhaps they
will tell us that Intelligence operates when there are potentially advanta-
geous complex traits that can’t evolve by natural selection. Second, there
must be principles that explain what Intelligence does when it acts. Perhaps
these will identify the sorts of genetic changes Intelligence can arrange, or
the ways in which it can inhibit the normal operation of selection.

It is already clear that these principles will be hard to state precisely. For,
if Intelligence has been waiting in the wings throughout the history of life,
seizing opportunities as they arise, we know that there are all sorts of
things it hasn’t done. Apparently Intelligence isn’t directed toward elimi-
nating the junk from genomes or removing vestigial structures like the
whale’s pelvis or generating radically new arrangements for mammalian
forelimbs. It’s possible, of course, that although directed toward these ends,
Intelligence is simply unable to bring them about. So any satisfactory prin-
ciples must differentiate between the bacterial flagellum, blood-clotting
cascade, and similar places where Intelligence shows its prowess, and the
accumulated junk, vestigial structures, and genetic blunders, where it re-
mains in abeyance. . . .

Why do intelligent design-ers ignore the basic problem of explaining the
power and direction of the mechanism they invoke, a problem that strikes at
the heart of their theory? Apparently, their preferred perspective faces a
multitude of currently unsolved puzzles about the scope and direction of In-
telligence. Yet, unlike their counterparts in other scientific ventures, they are
reluctant to suggest their strategies for seeking solutions. Their reticence

504

CHAPTER 20 ■ Sc ient if ic Reason ing

NOTES
1 Thomas Kuhn gives prominence to this difference in his important work, The Structure of Sci-
entific Revolutions, 2nd ed. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1970).

2 Stephen Colbert, I Am America (And So Can You!) (New York: Grand Central Publishing, 2007), 207.

1. How does Kitcher explain the evolution of the human eye? Is this explana-
tion adequate? Why or why not?

2. How does Kitcher explain the evolution of the bacterial flagellum? Is this
explanation adequate? Why or why not?

3. How does Kitcher explain the evolution of the blood-clotting mechanism?
Is this explanation adequate? Why or why not?

4. Are there other examples that Darwinian theory cannot explain?

5. Can intelligent design theory itself explain the examples that are supposed
to cause trouble for Darwinian theories of evolution?

6. Is “intelligent design” a scientific theory? Why or why not?

7. In your opinion, should “intelligent design” be required (or allowed) to be
taught in public high schools alongside evolution and natural selection as
part of the science curriculum? Why or why not? (It might help to read
Judge Jones’s opinion in Kitzmiller v. Dover Area School District.)

Discussion Questions

provokes the charge that what they are doing is not science, but perhaps
breaking their silence would be theologically unwise. Saying too much
might disrupt the harmony between the sanitized version of intelligent de-
sign elaborated in the classroom during the week and the richer account
delivered from the pulpit on Sunday. Moreover, saying anything that would
genuinely respond to the puzzles might be saying too much.

Yet, I suspect many people would simply reject the terms in which I have
posed the problem. Friends of intelligent design would prefer not to talk
about evolutionary transitions at all. So, they might say, the complex struc-
tures are built from scratch. Intelligence is a creative force that replaces older
types of organisms with new, individually designed species. Conceived in
this way, intelligent design disavows Behe’s acceptance of descent with
modification, drawing bars across the tree of life to mark the places of radi-
cal discontinuity, of events of special creation. . . .

The real situation is that intelligent design-ers oscillate. . . . Yet however
they wriggle, they find no satisfactory positive doctrine, no set of principles
about Intelligence that can adequately account for the phenomena. This is
why readers hunt through their literature seeking fragments of positive the-
ory in vain. They won’t find it. Because to advance any such theory would
expose the corpse of dead science.

Religious Reasoning

Religion is central to the lives of many people across the world. They attend religious

ceremonies and pray or meditate, sometimes several times a day. Even when they are

not engaged in explicitly religious practices, religion also affects believers’ views in

morality, politics, and even science. (See Chapter 20.) Critics of religion disdain these

influences and claim that religions depend on false or unjustified beliefs, especially

the belief that God exists. Both sides of this debate present ingenious arguments,

which will be explored in this chapter.

What is religion? That’s not an easy question to answer. Religions are varied
and complex. They include rituals, communities, institutions, texts, and be-
liefs. You cannot understand religion as a whole by looking merely at reli-
gious beliefs. Moreover, religious beliefs cover many topics, from the afterlife
and the meaning of life to creation and miracles. You also cannot understand
religion by considering only beliefs about God. Nonetheless, since belief in
God is so central to so many religions, it is crucial to ask whether God exists.

People who believe that God exists are called theists. People who deny the
existence of God (or any other god) are called atheists. Many people accept
neither belief and claim that we cannot know whether God exists. They are
called agnostics.

It is also important to realize, however, that people who believe in a tradi-
tional God within Christianity, say, usually deny the existence of other kinds
of gods. Their position is, thus, theism with respect to their own religion and
God but atheism regarding other religions and gods. Hence, when asking
whether someone is a theist or an atheist, it is crucial to specify the kind of
God at issue.

Who or what is God? Different religions include different beliefs about
God or gods. Nonetheless, the dominant traditions in the Western
world—Judaism, Christianity, and Islam—all derive from Abraham and
share certain central beliefs about God. In traditional views, God is a per-
son with the three “omnis“: omnipotent (or all-powerful), omniscient (or
all-knowing), and omnibenevolent (or all-good). Some theologians add
that God is omnipresent (or equally present at all spaces and times), but
many see God as eternal or existing outside of all time and space.

21

505

506

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

Nonetheless, God is supposed to be active in time, such as when He causes
miracles or answers prayers. Not all Jews, Christians, and Moslems share all
of these claims about God, but they are accepted by traditional theologians.

The readings in this chapter are about the traditional Christian God.
William Lane Craig argues for the existence of a traditional Christian God.
Edwin Curley then argues against the existence of such a God. These read-
ings are slightly revised transcripts of a live debate that occurred at the
University of Michigan in 1999, so they bear some marks of that setting.

FIVE REASONS TO BELIEVE IN GOD

by William Lane Craig

© 2007 Reasonable Faith. All rights reserved worldwide.

Good Evening! I want to begin by thanking [Michigan Christian Grads] for
inviting me to participate in tonight’s debate. And I want to say what a
privilege it is to be debating so eminent a scholar as Professor Curley. When
I was a doctoral student writing my dissertation on the cosmological argu-
ment for God’s existence, Dr. Curley’s work on the famous philosopher
Benedict de Spinoza was a valuable resource to me in trying to analyze
Spinoza’s own argument for God. So it’s a genuine honor to be sharing the
podium with Dr. Curley tonight.

Now in tonight’s debate it seems that there are two basic questions that
we need to ask ourselves:

I. Are there any good reasons to think that God does not exist?

And

II. Are there good reasons to think that God does exist?

Now with respect to the first question, I’ll leave it up to Dr. Curley to
present the reasons why he thinks that God does not exist. Atheist philoso-
phers have tried for centuries to disprove the existence of God. But no one
has ever been able to come up with a convincing argument. So rather than
attack straw men at this point, I’ll just wait to hear Professor Curley’s an-
swer to the following question: What good reasons are there to think that
God does not exist?

So let’s move on, then, to that second question: Are there good reasons to
think that God does exist? Tonight I’m going to present five reasons why I
think that God exists. Whole books have been written on each one of these,
so all I can present here is a brief sketch of each argument and then go into
more detail as Dr. Curley responds to them.* These reasons are independent

* For a popular presentation of these arguments and responses to typical objections, see my
booklet “God, Are You There?” (Atlanta: RZIM, 1999).

507

Rel ig ious Reason ing

of one another, so that if even one of them is sound, it furnishes good
grounds for believing that God exists. Taken together, they constitute a pow-
erful cumulative case that God exists.

1: God makes sense of the origin of the universe. Have you ever asked
yourself where the universe came from? Why everything exists instead of
just nothing? Typically atheists have said that the universe is eternal, and
that’s all. But surely this doesn’t make sense. Just think about it for a
minute. If the universe never began to exist, then that means that the
number of events in the past history of the universe is infinite. But mathe-
maticians recognize that the idea of an actually infinite number of things
leads to self-contradictions. For example, what is infinity minus infinity?
Well, mathematically, you get self-contradictory answers. This shows that
infinity is just an idea in your mind, not something that exists in reality.
David Hilbert, perhaps the greatest mathematician of this century states,
“The infinite is nowhere to be found in reality. It neither exists in nature
nor provides a legitimate basis for rational thought. The role that remains
for the infinite to play is solely that of an idea.“*

But that entails that since past events are not just ideas, but are real, the
number of past events must be finite. Therefore, the series of past events
can’t just go back forever. Rather the universe must have begun to exist.

This conclusion has been confirmed by remarkable discoveries in astron-
omy and astrophysics. The astrophysical evidence indicates that the universe
began to exist in a great explosion called the “Big Bang” about 15 billion years
ago. Physical space and time were created in that event, as well as all the mat-
ter and energy in the universe. Therefore, as Cambridge astronomer Fred
Hoyle points out, the Big Bang theory requires the creation of the universe
from nothing. This is because, as you go back in time, you reach a point in
time at which, in Hoyle’s words, the universe was “shrunk down to nothing
at all.“** Thus, what the Big Bang model requires is that the universe began to
exist and was created out of nothing.

Now this tends to be very awkward for the atheist. For as Anthony Kenny
of Oxford University urges, “A proponent of the Big Bang theory, at least if
he is an atheist, must believe that the universe came from nothing and by
nothing.Ҡ

But surely that doesn’t make sense! Out of nothing, nothing comes. So
why does the universe exist instead of just nothing? Where did it come
from? There must have been a cause which brought the universe into being.
And from the very nature of the case, this cause must be an uncaused,
changeless, timeless, and immaterial being which created the universe. It
must be uncaused because there cannot be an infinite regress of causes. It

* David Hilbert, “On the Infinite,” in Philosophy of Mathematics, ed. with an Introduction by Paul
Benacerraf and Hillary Putnam (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1964), 139, 141.

** Fred Hoyle, Astronomy and Cosmology (San Francisco: Freeman, 1975), 658.

† Anthony Kenny, The Five Ways: St. Thomas Aquinas’ Proofs of God’s Existence (New York:
Schocken Books, 1969), 66.

508

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

must be timeless and therefore changeless—at least without the universe—
because it created time. Because it also created space, it must transcend
space as well and therefore be immaterial, not physical.

Moreover, I would argue, it must also be personal. For how else could a
timeless cause give rise to a temporal effect like the universe? If the cause were
an impersonal set of sufficient conditions, then the cause could never exist
without the effect. If the sufficient conditions were timelessly present, then the
effect would be timelessly present as well. The only way for the cause to be
timeless but for the effect to begin in time is if the cause is a personal agent
who freely chooses to create an effect in time without any prior determining
conditions. And, thus, we are brought, not merely to the transcendent cause
of the universe, but to its personal Creator.

Isn’t it incredible that the Big Bang theory thus fits in with what the Chris-
tian theist has always believed: that in the beginning God created the uni-
verse? Now I put it to you, which do you think makes more sense: that the
Christian theist is right or that the universe just popped into being, uncaused,
out of nothing? I, at least, have no trouble assessing these alternatives.

2: God makes sense of the complex order in the universe. During the last
30 years, scientists have discovered that the existence of intelligent life de-
pends upon a delicate and complex balance of initial conditions simply
given in the Big Bang itself. We now know that life-prohibiting universes are
vastly more probable than any life-permitting universe like ours. How much
more probable?

Well, the answer is that the chances that the universe should be life-
permitting are so infinitesimal as to be incomprehensible and incalcula-
ble. For example, Stephen Hawking has estimated that if the rate of the
universe’s expansion one second after the Big Bang had been smaller by
even one part in a hundred thousand million million, the universe would
have recollapsed into a hot fireball.* P. C. W. Davies has calculated that the
odds against the initial conditions being suitable for star formation (with-
out which planets could not exist) is one followed by a thousand billion bil-
lion zeroes, at least.** [He also] estimates that a change in the strength of
gravity or of the weak force by only one part in 10 raised to the 100th power
would have prevented a life-permitting universe.† There are around 50
such constants and quantities present in the Big Bang which must be fine-
tuned in this way if the universe is to permit life. And it’s not just each
quantity which must be finely tuned; their ratios to each other must also be
exquisitely finely tuned. So improbability is multiplied by improbability by
improbability until our minds are reeling in incomprehensible numbers.

There is no physical reason why these constants and quantities should
posses the values they do. The onetime agnostic physicist P. C. W. Davies
comments, “Through my scientific work I have come to believe more and

* Stephen W. Hawking, A Brief History of Time (New York: Bantam Books, 1988), 123.

** P. C. W. Davies, Other Worlds (London: Dent, 1980), 160–61, 168–69.

† P. C. W. Davies, “The Anthropic Principle,” Particle and Nuclear Physics 10 (1983): 28.

509

Rel ig ious Reason ing

more strongly that the physical universe is put together with an ingenuity
so astonishing that I cannot accept it merely as a brute fact.“* Similarly,
Fred Hoyle remarks, “A common sense interpretation of the facts suggests
that a super-intellect has monkeyed with physics.“** Robert Jastrow, the
head of NASA’s Goddard Institute for Space Studies, calls this the most
powerful evidence for the existence of God ever to come out of science.†

So, once again, the view that Christian theists have always held, that
there is an intelligent Designer of the universe, seems to make much more
sense than the atheistic interpretation that the universe, when it popped into
being, uncaused, out of nothing, just happened to be, by chance, fine-tuned
for intelligent life with an incomprehensible precision and delicacy.

3: God makes sense of objective moral values in the world. If God does not
exist, then objective moral values do not exist. Many theists and atheists alike
concur on this point. For example, the late J. L. Mackie of Oxford University,
one of the most influential atheists of our time, admitted: “If . . . there are . . .
objective values, they make the existence of a god more probable than it would
have been without them. Thus, we have a defensible argument from morality
to the existence of God.“‡ But in order to avoid God’s existence, Mackie there-
fore denied that objective moral values exist. He wrote, “It is easy to explain
this moral sense as a natural product of biological and social evolution.Ҥ

Professor Michael Ruse, a philosopher of science at the University of
Guelph, agrees. He explains:

Morality is a biological adaptation no less than are hands and feet and teeth.
Considered as a rationally justifiable set of claims about an objective something,
ethics is illusory. I appreciate that when somebody says, “Love thy neighbor as
thyself,” they think they are referring above and beyond themselves. Neverthe-
less, such reference is truly without foundation. Morality is just an aid to survival
and reproduction . . . and any deeper meaning is illusory.§§

Friedrich Nietzsche, the great atheist of the last century who proclaimed the
death of God, understood that the death of God meant the destruction of all
meaning and value in life. I think that Friedrich Nietzsche was right.

But we’ve got to be very careful here. The question here is not: Must we
believe in God in order to live moral lives? I’m not claiming that we must.
Nor is the question: can we recognize objective moral values without believ-
ing in God? I think we can.

* Paul Davies, The Mind of God (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1992), 169.

** Fred Hoyle, “The Universe: Past and Present Reflections,” Engineering and Science (November
1981): 12.

† Robert Jastrow, “The Astronomer and God,” in The Intellectuals Speak Out About God, ed. Roy
Abraham Varghese (Chicago: Regenery Gateway, 1984), 22.

‡ J. L. Mackie, The Miracle of Theism (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1982), 115–16.

§ Ibid., 117–18.

§§ Michael Ruse, “Evolutionary Theory and Christian Ethics,” in Ruse, The Darwinian Paradigm
(London: Routledge, 1989), 262–69.

510

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

Rather the question is: If God does not exist, do objective moral values
exist? Like Mackie and Ruse, I just don’t see any reason to think that in
the absence of God, the morality evolved by homo sapiens is objective.
After all, if there is no God, then what’s so special about human beings?
They’re just accidental by-products of nature which have evolved rela-
tively recently on an infinitesimal speck of dust lost somewhere in a hos-
tile and mindless universe and which are doomed to perish individually
and collectively in a relatively short time. On the atheistic view, some ac-
tion, say, rape, may not be socially advantageous, and so in the course of
human development has become taboo. But that does absolutely nothing
to prove that rape is really wrong. On the atheistic view, there’s nothing
really wrong with your raping someone. Thus, without God there is no
absolute right and wrong which imposes itself on our conscience.

But the problem is that objective moral values do exist, and deep down we
all know it. There’s no more reason to deny the objective reality of moral val-
ues than the objective reality of the physical world. Actions like rape, torture,
and child abuse aren’t just socially unacceptable behavior; they’re moral
abominations. Some things, at least, are really wrong. Similarly, love, equality,
and self-sacrifice are really good. But if objective values cannot exist without
God, and objective values do exist, then it follows logically and inescapably
that God exists.

4: God makes sense of the historical facts concerning the life, death and
resurrection of Jesus. The historical person, Jesus of Nazareth, was a re-
markable individual. New Testament critics have reached something of a
consensus that the historical Jesus came on the scene with an unprece-
dented sense of divine authority, the authority to stand and speak in God’s
place. That’s why the Jewish leadership instigated his crucifixion for the
charge of blasphemy. He claimed that in himself the Kingdom of God had
come, and as visible demonstrations of this fact, he carried out a ministry
of miracle-working and exorcisms. But the supreme confirmation of his
claim was his resurrection from the dead. If Jesus did rise from the dead,
then it would seem that we have a divine miracle on our hands and, thus,
evidence for the existence of God.

Now most people would think that the resurrection of Jesus is just some-
thing you believe in by faith or not. But, in fact, there are three established
facts, recognized by the majority of New Testament historians today, which I
believe support the resurrection of Jesus: the empty tomb; Jesus’ postmortem
appearances; and the origin of the disciples’ belief in his resurrection. Let me
say a word about each one of these.

Fact # 1: On the Sunday following his crucifixion, Jesus’ tomb was found empty
by a group of his women followers. According to Jacob Kremer, an Austrian
scholar who has specialized in the study of the resurrection, “By far most scholars
hold firmly to the reliability of the Biblical statements about the empty tomb.“*

* Jacob Kremer, Die Osterevangelien Geschichten um Geschichte (Stuttgart: Katholisches Bibelwerk,
1977), 49–50.

511

Rel ig ious Reason ing

According to the New Testament critic, D. H. van Daalen, it is extremely difficult
to object to the empty tomb on historical grounds; those who deny it do so on the
basis of theological or philosophical assumptions.

Fact # 2: On separate occasions different individuals and groups saw appearances
of Jesus alive after his death. According to the prominent, skeptical German New
Testament critic Gerd Ludemann, “It may be taken as historically certain that . . .
the disciples had experiences after Jesus’ death in which Jesus appeared to them
as the risen Christ.“* These appearances were witnessed not only by believers, but
also by unbelievers, skeptics, and even enemies.

Fact # 3: The original disciples suddenly came to believe in the resurrection of Jesus
despite having every predisposition to the contrary. Jews had no belief in a dying,
much less a rising, Messiah, and Jewish beliefs about the afterlife precluded
anyone’s rising from the dead prior to the end of the world. Luke Johnson, a
New Testament scholar at Emory University, muses, “Some sort of powerful,
transformative experience is required to generate the sort of movement earliest
Christianity was . . .“** N. T. Wright, an eminent British scholar, concludes, “That is
why, as an historian, I cannot explain the rise of early Christianity unless Jesus rose
again, leaving an empty tomb behind him.Ҡ

Therefore, it seems to me, the Christian is amply justified in believing that
Jesus rose from the dead and was who he claimed to be. But that entails that
God exists.

5: God can be immediately known and experienced. This isn’t really an ar-
gument for God’s existence; rather it’s the claim that you can know God exists
wholly apart from arguments simply by immediately experiencing Him. This
was the way people in the Bible knew God, as Professor John Hick explains:

God was known to them as a dynamic will interacting with their own wills, a
sheer given reality, as inescapably to be reckoned with as a destructive storm and
life-giving sunshine . . . To them God was not . . . an idea adopted by the mind,
but an experiential reality which gave significance to their lives.‡

Now if this is so, then there’s a danger that proofs for God could actually
distract our attention from God Himself. If you’re sincerely seeking God, then
God will make His existence evident to you. The Bible promises, “Draw near
to God and He will draw near to you” (James 4. 8). We mustn’t so concentrate
on the proofs that we fail to hear the inner voice of God speaking to our own
heart. For those who listen, God becomes an immediate reality in their lives.

So, in conclusion, we’ve yet to see any arguments to show that God does
not exist, and we have seen five reasons to think that God does exist. And,
therefore, I think that theism is the more plausible worldview.

• Gerd Lüdemann, What Really Happened to Jesus?, trans. John Bowden (Louisville, KY: West-
minster John Knox Press, 1995), 8.

•• Luke Timothy Johnson, The Real Jesus (San Francisco: Harper San Francisco, 1996), 136.

† N. T. Wright, “The New Unimproved Jesus,” Christianity Today, September 13, 1993, 26.

‡ John Hick, Introduction, in The Existence of God, ed. with an Introduction by John Hick, Prob-
lems of Philosophy Series (New York: Macmillan, 1964), 13–14.

512

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

SEVEN DEADLY OBJECTIONS TO BELIEF
IN THE CHRISTIAN GOD

by Edwin Curley

Contrary to the impression Dr. Craig’s talk may have given you, I am not
here tonight to argue for an unqualified atheism. People use the term ‘God’
with many different meanings. Some of them use it to refer to a being whose
existence I might be able to accept. If by ‘God’ you mean what I think Spin-
oza meant by that term—an impersonal system of eternal and immutable
laws of nature, which explains everything that happens in the universe, but
does not itself require explanation—then I think it quite likely that there is a
God. What I’m here to argue against is just the God of Christianity.

I assume that by ‘God’ Christians generally mean an eternal, personal,
first cause of the universe, who has infinite perfections—omnipotence,
omniscience, perfect goodness, and so on—and who has revealed himself
to man in the Christian scriptures. The idea of God as an eternal, personal,
first cause of the universe, possessing all perfections, is common not only
in Christianity, but also in Judaism and Islam. I take it that the most impor-
tant thing which distinguishes Christian theism from these other forms of
theism is the acceptance of the Christian scriptures as the revealed word of
God.* And that’s what I shall be arguing against tonight. If the Christian
scriptures are supposed to be God’s revelation of himself to man, then he is
not the perfect being Christians claim he is.

When I was a child, I accepted the Christian religion in which my parents
raised me. But when I became a man, I put away the faith of my childhood.
For a while I called myself an agnostic, because I felt that I could neither

1. Reconstruct each of Craig’s five arguments in standard form.

2. For each of Craig’s arguments, what is the main objection that an opponent
could raise? What is the best way for Craig to respond to that objection? Is
his best response good enough? Why or why not?

3. Craig cites authorities at many points in his speech. Assess his appeals to
authorities using the standards in Chapter 15.

4. Is there any strong reason to believe in God that Craig left out? If so, present
that reason in argument form as forcefully as you can.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

* I thought, when I accepted the challenge to debate Dr. Craig, that we had agreed to debate
only the existence of the Christian God. This limitation was central to my argumentative
strategy here, which relies on the tension between the perfections Christian philosophers and
theologians typically ascribe to God and the beliefs they might form about him as a conse-
quence of accepting the Christian scriptures as revealed truth.

513

Rel ig ious Reason ing

affirm nor deny the existence of God as I then understood that term. I felt
that I had to suspend judgment about matters of religion. I thought perhaps
the truth about religion might be unknowable. But if it should turn out to be
knowable, I knew that I, at least, did not know it. This doubting spirit led
me, while I was in college, to study philosophy and its history. Many of the
philosophers I studied were Christians, for whom the rational defense of
their religion was very important. My reading of their works did not lessen
my doubts; it increased them. Eventually I came to think there is hardly any
chance the Christian religion might be true. “Agnostic” no longer seemed
the right label, not when we‘re talking about the Christian God.

Finding a good label for my position is not easy. Sometimes people who
have embraced Christianity and then rejected it are called heretics or apostates.
I have no objection to either of those labels, now that we‘ve agreed to abolish
the death penalty for these offenses.

What started me on this path to apostasy was reading the prayer book my
mother gave me when I was 16. At the back were printed the Thirty-nine Arti-
cles of Religion which members of my church, the Episcopal Church, were ex-
pected to accept. I had not read them carefully when I was preparing for
confirmation. Then I was only 13, and there was much I did not understand.
Our minister seemed to me a good man: highly intelligent, cultured, and hu-
mane. At 13, I was content to accept what he told me, simply on his authority.

Then, at 16, I read those Articles of Religion, carefully and critically for the
first time. I was disturbed that my church accepted predestination. Before the
foundation of the world, the Articles said, God had chosen some vessels for
honor and others for dishonor.* One of the first principles of my church was
that no one should be required to believe, as necessary for salvation, any doc-
trine which could not be proved from scripture.** So far as I could see, there
was as good scriptural foundation for the doctrine of predestination as there
was for any doctrine the church affirmed.†

* Article XVII: “Predestination to life is the everlasting purpose of God, whereby, before the foun-
dations of the world were laid, He hath constantly decreed by His counsel secret to us, to deliver
from curse and damnation those whom He hath chosen in Christ out of mankind, and to bring
them by Christ to everlasting salvation as vessels made to honour.” The complete text of the
Thirty-nine Articles is available at http://anglicansonline.org/basics/thirty-nine_articles.htm.

** See Article VI on the sufficiency of the Holy Scriptures for salvation: “Holy Scripture containeth
all things necessary to salvation: so that whatsoever is not read therein, nor may be proved thereby,
is not to be required of any man, that it should be believed as an article of the Faith, or be thought
requisite or necessary to salvation.”

† The authors of the Articles clearly had in mind Romans 9:10–33. In the debate Dr. Craig
replied by arguing that what I was rejecting was, not Christianity, but Calvin’s erroneous ver-
sion of Christianity. I’m told that this displeased the numerous Calvinist members of our
Michigan audience. However that may be, it should be realized that predestination is not only
a Calvinist doctrine. It will be found in any theologian who takes the letters of St. Paul seriously.
See, for example, St. Augustine, The Gift of Perseverance § 15 (citing Ephesians 1:4–11), § 34
(citing Philippians 2:12–13), § 47 (citing Romans 11:1–7), and St. Thomas Aquinas, Summa the-
ologiae, Part I, Qu. 23, (citing Romans 8:28–30).

http://anglicansonline.org/basics/thirty-nine_articles.htm

514

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

There also seemed to be strong philosophical reasons for accepting pre-
destination. If God is omniscient, if he knows everything, he must have fore-
knowledge of his creatures‘ fates. That suggests that there is a fact of the
matter about what my fate will be, which is knowable with certainty well in
advance of my birth. It doesn’t follow from this that God determined what
my fate will be. But it does seem to follow that my fate is not indeterminate.
Moreover, if God is omnipotent, and can do anything, or anything it is logi-
cally possible to do, then nothing happens except by his will. So if I wind up
in Hell, he will not only have known that from eternity, he will also have
willed it from eternity.

Predestination is not so widely accepted now as it was when my church
was founded in the 16th century. I find many Christians who reject it. And I
sympathize with them. Their hearts are in the right place, certainly. I cannot
believe that a just and loving God would create beings he knew, and had pre-
determined, would spend eternity in hell. But Christians can reject predesti-
nation only at the cost of ignoring the authority of their scriptures and the
implications of their theology. I would not insist that a good Christian must
be a fundamentalist, who thinks that everything Scripture says is literally true.
But it does seem to me that if someone calls himself a Christian, he ought at
least to believe that the Christian scriptures are not seriously misleading about
central matters, such as salvation and damnation.

Let us set predestination to one side. Even if the Christian scriptures did
not contain that commitment, there would still be a problem about Hell, to
which they are committed by an even wider range of texts.* The philosoph-
ical support for Hell, though, seems much weaker than the support for pre-
destination. I see no philosophical reason for believing in an eternal
punishment for sinners. Indeed, philosophy is against it. Philosophy teaches
that the punishment should be proportionate to the crime. Let‘s concede,
for the sake of argument, that we are all, in some sense, sinners. Which of
us, looking into his heart, can honestly say that he has never done anything
seriously wrong, at least once in his life? But the doctrine of Hell requires
that most of us sinners will suffer eternal torment.**

Perhaps in some cases that is just. Hitler was responsible for the horrify-
ing deaths of millions of Jews, not to mention gypsies, Slavs, and homo-
sexuals. Perhaps for crimes of that magnitude eternal punishment can

* So far as I can see, the strongest scriptural support for predestination comes from the letters of
St. Paul. There seems to be relatively little support for it in the gospels. This might suggest that
it was not part of the original teaching of Jesus. But texts supporting the idea of Hell are easy to
find in the gospels.

** The most explicit passage I know on the question of the proportion of the saved to the
damned is Matthew 22:14, “Many are called, but few are chosen.” But if salvation depends on
acceptance of Jesus as one’s savior, as Christian exclusivists hold, and if the great majority of
people have not accepted Jesus as their savior, the texts supporting exclusivism do imply that
comparatively few are chosen. I say more about exclusivism below.

515

Rel ig ious Reason ing

be justified.* But can it really be justified for those of us who are only sinners
in the sense I have just specified, people who have done something seriously
wrong, at least once in our lives?

I am, in that sense, a sinner. But, in all candor, I must say that to me my
sins seem pretty minor compared to those of Hitler. I haven‘t killed anyone,
or tortured anyone, or been responsible for anyone‘s torture or death, let
alone the torture and death of millions. Yet, if the doctrine of hell is correct, I
shall be keeping Hitler company in Hell. No doubt I‘m not an impartial
judge in this case, but that doesn‘t seem fair.

In spite of these difficulties, Hell was part of the teaching of my church,
and is part of the teaching of many Christian churches. This is no accident.
The doctrine has strong support in the Christian scriptures.**

Hell, too, is less widely believed in now than it was when my church was
founded. I find many Christians who reject Hell. Their hearts are in the
right place, certainly. I cannot believe that a just and loving God would
send the majority of his creatures to spend eternity in Hell. But Christians
who reject Hell can do so only at the cost of rejecting also the authority of
their scriptures.

I conceded, for the sake of argument, that we are all sinners. Now let me
qualify that. Very likely all of us, in this room, are sinners provided it‘s
enough, to be a sinner, that once in your life you did something seriously
wrong. But I don‘t concede that absolutely all humans are sinners, even in
that rather loose sense.

I have a granddaughter, whom I love. She‘s a sweet girl, but she‘s seven. By
now she must have committed quite a number of sins. I know that sometimes
she doesn‘t mind her mother very well. Sometimes she‘s mean to her baby
brother. I don‘t find any of this serious enough to deserve eternal punishment,
or even significant finite punishment. Perhaps she has committed more serious
sins which I don‘t know about. Perhaps she has even done something so wicked
as to steal pears from a neighbor’s orchard, not to eat, but to throw at pigs.†

* I concede this for the sake of argument. But in fact I am not sure that even Hitler deserved eter-
nal punishment. Mightn’t the demands of justice have been satisfied if God had tortured him
for, say, 1000 years for each of his victims? Eternal punishment looks like overkill, even for
someone like Hitler. What I principally object to, though, in the doctrine of hell, is the idea that
all sinners deserve eternal punishment, even those whose sins pale by comparison with those
of a monster like Hitler (or Stalin, or Pol Pot, or Idi Amin, etc.). The essential problem here is
that to make the doctrine of the universality of sin plausible we must define sin in a way which
makes sinners even of those whose offenses, though serious, are comparatively minor, whereas
the seriousness of the punishment they are to receive seems appropriate (if it is ever appro-
priate) only for those who are extremely wicked. I say more about the doctrine that sin is uni-
versal below.

** See, for example, Matthew 5:22, 29–30, 8:11–12, 13:36–50, 18:8–9, 23:29–33, 25:31–46, Mark
3:28–29, 9:42–48, Luke 16:19–31, 2 Thessalonians 1:5–10.

† Readers of Augustine’s Confessions will recall that he cites this incident from his childhood to
illustrate his wickedness. (Confessions II.iv.9)

516

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

In any case, I wouldn’t claim that she‘s completely innocent of serious wrong-
doing at this stage of her life. Probably no child that age is completely innocent.
And Jesus did say that we should be perfect, as our Father in heaven is perfect.*

That‘s a tough standard.
But when I think about my granddaughter at an earlier age, lying, say, in the

neonatal intensive care unit, where she spent the first three months of her life,
with an oxygen tube, and a feeding tube, and a heart monitor, all taped to her
tiny body—for she was born in the 29th week of my daughter‘s pregnancy,
and weighed less than 3lbs. at birth—I cannot think of her, at that stage of her
life, as a sinner, deserving of Hell. She did not even cry greedily for her
mother’s milk.**

In the Christian tradition it is normal to baptize infants at an early age
because it is believed that they come into the world tainted by the sin of
Adam and Eve.† This is the doctrine of original sin. I cannot believe in
original sin. My granddaughter may be a sinner now, but not when she
was in the intensive care unit.

Original sin is also less widely accepted now than when my church was
founded. I find many Christians who reject original sin. I sympathize with
them. Their hearts are in the right place, certainly. But, Christians can reject
original sin only at the cost of a substantial reinterpretation of their scriptures
and traditions.‡

* I was surprised to discover, from email I received after the debate, that not all of my Christian
critics recognized this allusion to Matthew 5:48.

** Another example from St. Augustine, who uses it to illustrate his sinfulness even as an infant.
See Confessions I.vii.11. An unhealthy sense of sin seems to be characteristic of a certain kind of
Christian. It is unfortunate that that kind of Christian has been so influential in the history of this
religion.

† This seems to have been the original justification for this practice, though like much else in early
Christianity it subsequently became controversial. Some abandoned the practice. Others found
other justifications for it. For a good brief account see Alister McGrath, Christian Theology, 2nd edi-
tion, Blackwell, 1997, pp. 514–518.

‡ As Article IX puts it: “Original sin standeth not in the following of Adam (as the Pelagians
do vainly talk), but it is the fault and corruption of the Nature of every man that naturally is
engendered of the offspring of Adam; whereby man is very far gone from original righteous-
ness, and is of his own nature inclined to evil, so that the flesh lusteth always contrary to the
Spirit; and therefore in every person born into this world, it deserveth God’s wrath and
damnation. And this infection of nature doth remain, yea in them that are regenerated;
whereby the lust of the flesh . . . is not subject to the Law of God. And although there is no
condemnation for them that believe and are baptized; yet the Apostle doth confess, that con-
cupiscence and lust hath of itself the nature of sin.” The principal scriptural authority for
this doctrine is found in the letters of St. Paul (the source of so much that is appalling in tra-
ditional Christian teaching), notably in Romans 3:9–20, 5:12–21, and 1 Corinthians 15:20–22.
I had thought from something Dr. Craig said later in our debate that this doctrine might be
rejected in the Wesleyan tradition to which he adheres. But the Articles of Religion of the
Methodist Church (available at http://archives.umc.org/interior.asp?ptid=1&mid=1649)
seem very similar.

http://archives.umc.org/interior.asp?ptid=1&mid=1649)

517

Rel ig ious Reason ing

Consistently with the doctrine of original sin, it is common among
Christians to believe that if we are justified, it is by faith in Jesus.* Since we
are all sinners, we cannot earn salvation by our works. But we can be for-
given and treated as if we were righteous. The mark of our having been
forgiven is that God, by an act of grace, gives us faith.

This doctrine has implications I find appalling. It implies that those among
us who lack faith in Jesus have not received grace, have not been forgiven, and
will, if we continue in that state, go to Hell. So the doctrine of justification by
faith, which has strong support in the Christian scriptures, leads inevitably to
exclusivism, to the idea that all who reject Christian doctrine must be damned,
no matter how good they may be in other respects.

If God chose the beneficiaries of his grace on the ground of some distinctive
merit they possessed, this might not be unfair to those he didn‘t choose, whom
we would presume to lack that merit. But that would be contrary to the idea of
grace, which implies a free gift, not something given to someone who deserves
it on account of merit.

So usually it is held that God has no reason for choosing some and not oth-
ers. He acts quite arbitrarily. It‘s a hard and ugly doctrine, this doctrine of
grace. Of course if you have already accepted Hell and original sin, you may
find this doctrine “full of comfort,” as my church put it. You may be grateful
for having this chance at salvation, even if it does seem to be a lottery in which
the odds are not on your side. And if you think you have faith, then you may
also think you have won the lottery. Still even the faithful may not be able to
entirely set aside thoughts about the unlucky losers. Sometimes they love non-
believers and then the doctrine of salvation by faith can cause them great grief.

* This was certainly the doctrine of my church. See Article XIII: “We are accounted righteous be-
fore God, only for the merit of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ by Faith, and not for our own
works or deservings. Wherefore, that we are justified by Faith only, is a most wholesome Doc-
trine, and very full of comfort . . . “ Scriptural support for this doctrine may be found in Mark
16:16; John 3:16–18, 5:24, 14:6–7; Acts 4.12; Romans 3:9–26, 5:12–21; Ephesians 2.12; I John
2.22–23; 4.3; II John 9. It should, however, be acknowledged that this doctrine seems to be much
more common in the works of Paul, and in the fourth gospel, than it is in the synoptic gospels,
which tend to suggest that obedience to the commandments, supplemented only by selling all
you have and giving it to the poor, is sufficient for salvation. See the story told (with some vari-
ations) in Matthew 19:16–22, Mark 10:17–22, Luke 18:18–23. The gospel of John is generally
dated late enough that its account of Jesus’s teaching might have been influenced by the letters
of Paul. (On the dating of Paul’s letters and John’s gospel, see Raymond Brown’s Introduction to
the New Testament, Yale University Press, 1997. ) We should concede also that the exceptional
passage from Mark comes from the ‘longer ending of Mark,’ which is not found in the earliest
manuscripts. (See The New Oxford Annotated Bible, ed. by Bruce Metzger and Roland Murphy,
Oxford University Press, 1991.) I would not, of course, be thought to suggest that any member
of the early Christian Church might have tampered with the text of Mark, to bring it into line
with Pauline theology. To do that would be to embrace the kind of radical skepticism for which
Bart Ehrman’s Misquoting Jesus (HarperOne, 2007) has been so widely and justly censured. Still,
these textual data are puzzling. A Christian who took his scriptures seriously might think they
require some explanation.

518

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

So far my objections have been mainly theological; they are objections to
teachings whose basis is primarily scriptural rather than philosophical. The
main exception to that generalization is the doctrine of predestination,
which has philosophical grounds as well as scriptural grounds. I know
many Christians here tonight will not feel that their understanding of
Christianity requires them to accept all these doctrines, either because they
do not think their scriptures clearly require these views, or because they do
not regard the Christian scriptures as absolutely authoritative in determin-
ing their beliefs and conduct. I‘ve said I think those Christians who adopt a
freer attitude toward scripture and do not feel that their acceptance of
Christianity commits them to predestination, or Hell, or original sin, or jus-
tification by faith, or exclusivism—those Christians have their hearts in the
right place. But I also think their feet may be planted on the slippery slope
to heresy, and that more conservative Christians, who would accord greater
authority to scripture, have a clearer right to consider themselves Chris-
tians. How much of traditional Christianity can you reject and still be enti-
tled to call yourself a Christian? This was a question I found extremely
difficult as I moved gradually from Christianity to apostasy.

Let‘s turn now to objections not so scripturally based. It is common
among Christians to believe that God is a personal being, who created the
universe, and who is omnipotent, omniscient, and perfectly good. Indeed, it
is commonly said that God must possess all perfections.

Yet we observe that the world this perfect being created has many imper-
fections: there is much joy in the world; but there is also much suffering, much
of it apparently undeserved; and there is sin. We call these things evil. How
can they exist in a world which owes its origin to a God with the attributes
Christians believe their God to possess?

The usual response now is to say that, though God could have created a
world without evil, it was better for him to have created the world he did, in
spite of the evils it contains. The occurrence of those evils was necessary for
goods which are even greater. If God had so created the world that it contained
no evil at all, that world would have been less good, all things considered, than
it is even with all the evil it contains. This is called the greater goods defense.

The Christian may say: we humans rightly do many things we expect to
cause avoidable harm. We build a bridge from San Francisco to Marin
County, knowing that in the construction some workmen will fall into the
water and die. We could avoid their deaths by not building the bridge. But
the bridge is a great good. Given our human limitations, we cannot build it
without some people dying a result. So we build it and accept their deaths
as part of the cost of bridging those waters. And God‘s permission of evil
may also be justified by the greater goods it leads to.

An omnipotent being, of course, does not face all the hard choices we do.
If he wants a bridge across those waters, he need only say, “Let there be a
bridge.” And there will be. This fact that God is supposed to be omnipotent
puts constraints on the kinds of good he might be able to use to justify his
acceptance of the evils he allows. What kind of good could be so intimately

519

Rel ig ious Reason ing

connected with evil that even an omnipotent being would have to accept the
evil, as the price of realizing that good? And what good could be so great
that it would justify such a being‘s accepting the amount of evil there is in
the world as the price of attaining that good?

The usual answer is: freedom. There must be freedom, if there is to be
moral goodness. And the price of giving humans freedom is that sometimes
they will misuse it. Even an omnipotent being can‘t cause a person to freely
do good. If he caused one of his creatures to behave well, that person would
no longer be acting freely. His ‘acts’ would no longer be his acts, and he
would not deserve moral credit for them. Freedom, with the moral goodness
which sometimes results from it, is a good sufficiently great that it makes the
evils which also result worth accepting. This is what is called the free will
defense.

There is a problem, of course, about appealing to human freedom to solve
the problem of evil when you also believe in divine foreknowledge and pre-
destination. This is a problem of long standing, which many philosophers
have wrestled with. No solution has gained general acceptance. If Dr. Craig
accepts the doctrines of predestination and divine foreknowledge and also
appeals to human freedom to solve the problem of evil, he will have worked
out a way of explaining how these things are consistent, and I will listen
with interest to that explanation.

In the meantime, though, there are other problems about the appeal to
freedom. There are evils whose occurrence has no discernible connection
with freedom. Theologians call them natural evils, meaning by that such
things as earthquakes, floods, tornadoes, diseases, and so on. If a deer dies
in a forest fire, suffering horribly as it does so, that is an evil. It is not only
human suffering we must take into account, when we are weighing good
against evil in this world.

Now, if you accept anything like the theory of evolution,* you will be-
lieve there were other animals on this planet long before humans appeared
on the scene. Many of them must have suffered horribly as their species
became extinct. None of that suffering can be justified as a necessary con-
sequence of permitting humans freedom. We weren‘t around then. So none
of it seems beyond the power of omnipotence to prevent without the loss
of that good.

Another objection: The greater goods defense can easily lead to a kind of
cost-benefit analysis which is deeply repugnant to our moral sense. Con-
sider the kind of case which troubled Ivan in Dostoevsky‘s great novel, The
Brothers Karamazov.** A little girl is treated quite brutally by her parents, who

* You don’t, of course, have to accept the full Darwinian explanation of evolution for this to be a
problem, so long as you accept what the evidence of geology and paleontology seems to make
as certain as anything in science can be: that the earth has been around for a very long time, and
that many, many different species of animals flourished and then became extinct before man
appeared on the scene.

** See Part II, Book V: Pro and Contra, Chapter 4: Rebellion. The text is available online at:
http://www.online-literature.com/booksearch.php.

http://www.online-literature.com/booksearch.php

520

CHAPTER 21 ■ Rel ig ious Reason ing

beat her because she has done something which made them angry. Perhaps
she wets the bed repeatedly, and they think she ought to be old enough to
control her bladder. Or perhaps the father is an alcoholic who abuses his
daughter sexually. The Brothers Karamazov is fiction, but to hear about real
cases like this, you need only listen regularly to the 11 o‘clock news.

The free will defense seems to say, in cases of this kind: well, it‘s all very
unfortunate, of course, but this is the price we must pay for having freedom.
For the father to have the opportunity to display moral goodness, God must
give him the opportunity to choose evil. You can‘t have the one opportunity
without the other. And the father‘s having the opportunity to display moral
goodness is such a great good that it outweighs the fact that he chooses evil.

But notice who gets the good here. It‘s the father. And notice who suffers the
evil. It‘s the little girl. Let us grant, for the sake of argument, that the benefit
outweighs the cost. Freedom is a very great good. Still it makes some difference
who pays the cost. Freedom may be a great good, even a good so great that it
would outweigh really horrendous suffering. But justice requires some atten-
tion, not only to the net amount of good, after you have subtracted the evil, but
also to the way the goods and evils are distributed. Some distributions just
aren‘t fair.*

The mention of Ivan Karamazov brings me to my final objection. Ivan
claims that if God does not exist, everything is permissible. Dr. Craig believes
the same thing. Dostoevsky, speaking through Ivan, may have stated the
problem of evil as powerfully as any atheist; but he was himself a Christian,
who believed that God must exist if we are to make sense of morality.

I think the opposite is true. I think Christian belief makes morality, as we
normally think of it, unintelligible. Consider the story of Abraham and Isaac.
One day God put Abraham to the test. He said to Abraham: “Take your only
son, Isaac, whom you love, and go to the land of Moriah, and offer him there
as a burnt offering.“** God gives no reason for this horrifying command. And
Abraham asks none. He simply sets out to obey the command. And he nearly
does obey. He has the knife raised to kill his son, when God sends down an
angel to stay his hand. God then says he is satisfied with Abraham: “Now I
know that you fear God, since you have not withheld your son, your only
son, from me.” (Gen. 22:12) In the end God does not actually require the sac-
rifice. But he does require that Abraham demonstrate his willingness to carry
out the sacrifice.

What‘s the moral of this story? I suggest it‘s this: as God‘s creatures, our
highest loyalty must be to God, even if this requires the sacrifice of our

* I first became aware of the importance of this by reading Michael Tooley’s “The Argument from
Evil” (in Philosophical Perspectives, 5 – Philosophy of Religion, 1991, ed. by James E. Tomberlin,
Ridgeview Publishing, 1991, 89–134). But I think acknowledgment of this point underlies
Marilyn Adams’ rejection of the free will defense in her Horrendous Evils and the Goodness of God
(Cornell University Press, 2000).

** Genesis 22:2, quoted in the New Revised Standard Version, as given in The New Oxford An-
notated Bible.

521

Rel ig ious Reason ing

deepest human loyalties; God is our Creator, our Lord, and we owe him ab-
solute obedience, no matter what he commands. And he might command
anything. There are no constraints on his will; so we might be required to do
anything. There is no predicting what he might require; and there is nothing
to say that his commands will not change from one moment to the next. At
the beginning of the story, God commands Abraham to kill Isaac; in the mid-
dle he commands Abraham not to kill Isaac.

If there is a God who is liable to command anything; and if our highest loy-
alty must be to this God, there is no act save disobedience to God which we can
safely say is out of bounds, no act of a kind which simply must not be done,
even rape, to use Dr. Craig‘s example. If this God exists, and we must obey him
unconditionally, then anything whatever might turn out to be permissible. This
view is destructive of morality as we normally think of it.

So there you have my opening argument. I have offered seven objections,
seven deadly objections, I would say, to Christian theism: it is committed to
predestination, to Hell, to original sin, to justification by faith, and to exclu-
sivism; it has no good solution to the problem of evil; and it is destructive of
morality as we understand it. These are only some of the objections which
make it impossible for me to believe in the Christian God. But they are
enough to make me wonder how anyone who has thought seriously about
the Christian faith can accept it.

1. The opening parts of Curley’s speech tell some of his life story. What is the
point of this opening? Does this narrative contribute to his argument?

2. Explain and evaluate each of Curley’s “seven deadly objections” to belief
in a Christian God. How could a traditional Christian best respond to each
objection? Is that response adequate? Why or why not?

3. Some of Curley’s arguments depend on specific doctrines of traditional
Christianity. Does this make his arguments weaker? Why or why not?

4. Is there any better reason to deny the existence of God that Curley
overlooked? If so, present it as forcefully as you can.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Philosophical Reasoning

It is not easy to explain the character of philosophical reasoning. Indeed, the na-

ture of philosophical reasoning is itself a philosophical problem. We can, however,

acquire some sense of it by comparing philosophical reasoning with reasoning as it

occurs in daily life. In the opening chapters of this book, we noticed that, in every-

day discussions, much is taken for granted and left unsaid. In general, there is no

need to state points that are already a matter of agreement. In contrast, philoso-

phers usually try to make underlying assumptions explicit and then subject them

to critical examination. Still, even for the philosopher, something must trigger an

interest in underlying assumptions. This usually arises when the advance of

knowledge creates fundamental conflicts within the system of hitherto accepted as-

sumptions. Thus, much that counts as modern philosophy is an attempt to come to

terms with the relationship between modern science and the traditional conception

of humankind’s place in the universe. This chapter explores one such conflict aris-

ing from advances in computer theory.

In recent years, the rise of computer technology has generated a conflict with
traditional concepts about human beings. Traditionally, humans have cited
the capacity to think as the feature that sets them apart from and, of course,
above all other creatures. Humans have been defined as rational animals. But
we now live in an age in which computers seem able to perform tasks that,
had a human being performed them, would certainly count as thinking. Not
only can computers perform complex calculations very rapidly, they can also
play an excellent game of chess. Do machines think? The question seems
forced on us, and it is more than a semantic quibble. In deciding it, we are
also reevaluating the status of an aspect of humanity that has long been con-
sidered its unique or distinctive feature. Once we decide whether machines
can think, the next question is whether human beings are not themselves
merely thinking machines.

The two essays presented in this chapter address such questions. The
writer of the first essay, Alan Turing, is one of the geniuses of the twenti-
eth century. He not only developed much of the mathematics that under-
lies modern computer theory but also helped give computers their first

22

523

524

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

remarkable application: the cracking of the German secret codes during
World War II. In this essay, Turing considers whether machines can or
cannot think. The brilliance of the essay does not depend on the answer
he gives to the question, but rather on his attempt to formulate it in a way
that would allow reasonable debate to take place concerning it. For this
reason, Turing’s essay has been considered a classic work on the subject
for more than fifty years. In the second essay, John Searle presents and de-
fends an analogy intended to refute not only Turing’s argument but also
any other claim that machines could ever think solely by virtue of having
the right formal program.

COMPUTING MACHINERY AND INTELLIGENCE1

by A. M. Turing

1. The Imitation Game

I propose to consider the question “Can machines think?” This should begin
with definitions of the meaning of the terms “machine” and “think.” The
definitions might be framed so as to reflect so far as possible the normal use
of the words, but this attitude is dangerous. If the meaning of the words
“machine” and “think” are to be found by examining how they are com-
monly used, it is difficult to escape the conclusion that the meaning and the
answer to the question, “Can machines think?” is to be sought in a statistical
survey such as a Gallup poll. But this is absurd. Instead of attempting such
a definition I shall replace the question by another, which is closely related
to it and is expressed in relatively unambiguous words.

The new form of the problem can be described in terms of a game which we
call the “imitation game.” It is played with three people, a man (A), a woman
(B), and an interrogator (C) who may be of either sex. The interrogator stays in
a room apart from the other two. The object of the game for the interrogator is
to determine which of the other two is the man and which is the woman. He
knows them by labels X and Y, and at the end of the game he says either “X is
A and Y is B” or “X is B and Y is A.” The interrogator is allowed to put ques-
tions to A and B thus:

C: Will X please tell me the length of his or her hair?

Now suppose X is actually A, then A must answer. It is A’s object in the
game to try to cause C to make the wrong identification. His answer might
therefore be

“My hair is shingled, and the longest strands are about nine inches long.”

In order that tones of voice may not help the interrogator the answers
should be written, or better still, typewritten. The ideal arrangement is to
have a teleprinter communicating between the two rooms. Alternatively the

525

Philosoph ical Reason ing

question and answers can be repeated by an intermediary. The object of the
game for the third player (B) is to help the interrogator. The best strategy for
her is probably to give truthful answers. She can add such things as “I am
the woman, don’t listen to him!” to her answers, but it will avail nothing as
the man can make similar remarks.

We now ask the question, “What will happen when a machine takes the
part of A in this game?” Will the interrogator decide wrongly as often when
the game is played like this as he does when the game is played between a
man and a woman? These questions replace our original, “Can machines
think?”

2. Critique of the New Problem

As well as asking, “What is the answer to this new form of the question,” one
may ask, “Is this new question a worthy one to investigate?” This latter ques-
tion we investigate without further ado, thereby cutting short an infinite
regress.

The new problem has the advantage of drawing a fairly sharp line be-
tween the physical and the intellectual capacities of a man. No engineer
or chemist claims to be able to produce a material which is indistinguish-
able from the human skin. It is possible that at some time this might be
done, but even supposing this invention available we should feel there
was little point in trying to make a “thinking machine” more human by
dressing it up in such artificial flesh. The form in which we have set the
problem reflects this fact in the condition which prevents the interrogator
from seeing or touching the other competitors, or hearing their voices.
Some other advantages of the proposed criterion may be shown up by
specimen questions and answers. Thus:

Q: Please write me a sonnet on the subject of the Forth Bridge.

A: Count me out on this one. I never could write poetry.

Q: Add 34957 to 70764.

A: (Pause about 30 seconds and then give as answer) 105621.

Q: Do you play chess?

A: Yes.

Q: I have K at my K1, and no other pieces. You have only K at K6 and R at
R1. It is your move. What do you play?

A: (After a pause of 15 seconds) R–R8 mate.

The question and answer method seems to be suitable for introducing al-
most any one of the fields of human endeavor that we wish to include. We
do not wish to penalize the machine for its inability to shine in beauty com-
petitions, nor to penalize a man for losing in a race against an airplane. The
conditions of our game make these disabilities irrelevant. The “witnesses”
can brag, if they consider it advisable, as much as they please about their

526

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

charms, strength or heroism, but the interrogator cannot demand practical
demonstrations.

The game may perhaps be criticized on the ground that the odds are
weighted too heavily against the machine. If the man were to try and pre-
tend to be the machine, he would clearly make a very poor showing. He
would be given away at once by slowness and inaccuracy in arithmetic.
May not machines carry out something which ought to be described as
thinking but which is very different from what a man does? This objection
is a very strong one, but at least we can say that if, nevertheless, a machine
can be constructed to play the imitation game satisfactorily, we need not be
troubled by this objection.

It might be urged that when playing the “imitation game” the best strat-
egy for the machine may possibly be something other than imitation of the
behavior of a man. This may be, but I think it is unlikely that there is any
great effect of this kind. In any case there is no intention to investigate here
the theory of the game, and it will be assumed that the best strategy is to try
to provide answers that would naturally be given by a man.

3. The Machines Concerned in the Game

The question which we put in § 1 will not be quite definite until we have spec-
ified what we mean by the word “machine.” It is natural that we should wish
to permit every kind of engineering technique to be used in our machines. We
also wish to allow the possibility that an engineer or team of engineers may
construct a machine which works, but whose manner of operation cannot be
satisfactorily described by its constructors because they have applied a
method which is largely experimental. Finally, we wish to exclude from the
machines men born in the usual manner. It is difficult to frame the definitions
so as to satisfy these three conditions. One might for instance insist that the
team of engineers should be all of one sex, but this would not really be satis-
factory, for it is probably possible to rear a complete individual from a single
cell of the skin (say) of a man. To do so would be a feat of biological technique
deserving of the very highest praise, but we would not be inclined to regard it
as a case of “constructing a thinking machine.” This prompts us to abandon
the requirement that every kind of technique should be permitted. We are the
more ready to do so in view of the fact that the present interest in “thinking
machines” has been aroused by a particular kind of machine, usually called
an “electronic computer” or “digital computer.” Following this suggestion we
only permit digital computers to take part in our game.

This restriction appears at first sight to be a very drastic one. I shall at-
tempt to show that it is not so in reality. . . . The digital computers considered
[here] are classified among the “discrete state machines.” These are the ma-
chines which move by sudden jumps or clicks from one quite definite state to
another. . . . [A] special property of digital computers [is] that they can mimic
any discrete state machine. [This property] is described by saying that they
are universal machines. The existence of machines with this property has the

527

Philosoph ical Reason ing

important consequence that, considerations of speed apart, it is unnecessary
to design various new machines to do various computing processes. They
can all be done with one digital computer, suitably programmed for each
case. It will be seen that as a consequence of this all digital computers are in a
sense equivalent. . . .

It was suggested tentatively that the question, “Can machines think?”
should be replaced by “Are there imaginable digital computers which
would do well in the imitation game?” If we wish we can make this superfi-
cially more general and ask “Are there discrete state machines which would
do well?” But in view of the universality property we see that either of these
questions is equivalent to this, “Let us fix our attention on one particular
digital computer C. Is it true that by modifying this computer to have an ad-
equate storage, suitably increasing its speed of action, and providing it with
an appropriate program, C can be made to play satisfactorily the part of A in
the imitation game, the part of B being taken by a man?” . . .

6. Contrary Views on the Main Question

We may now consider the ground to have been cleared and we are ready to
proceed to the debate on our question, “Can machines think?” and the variant
of it quoted at the end of the last section. We cannot altogether abandon the
original form of the problem, for opinions will differ as to the appropriateness
of the substitution and we must at least listen to what has to be said in this
connection.

It will simplify matters for the reader if I explain first my own beliefs in the
matter. Consider first the more accurate form of the question. I believe that in
about fifty years’ time it will be possible to program computers, with a storage
capacity of about 109, to make them play the imitation game so well that an av-
erage interrogator will not have more than 70 per cent chance of making the
right identification after five minutes of questioning. The original question,
“Can machines think?” I believe to be too meaningless to deserve discussion.
Nevertheless I believe that at the end of the century the use of words and gen-
eral educated opinion will have altered so much that one will be able to speak
of machines thinking without expecting to be contradicted. I believe further
that no useful purpose is served by concealing these beliefs. The popular view
that scientists proceed inexorably from well-established fact to well-established
fact, never being influenced by any unproved conjecture, is quite mistaken.
Provided it is made clear which are proved facts and which are conjectures, no
harm can result. Conjectures are of great importance since they suggest useful
lines of research.

I now proceed to consider opinions opposed to my own.
1. The Theological Objection. Thinking is a function of man’s immortal soul.

God has given an immortal soul to every man and woman, but not to any
other animal or to machines. Hence no animal or machine can think.

I am unable to accept any part of this, but will attempt to reply in theo-
logical terms. I should find the argument more convincing if animals were

528

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

classed with men, for there is a greater difference, to my mind, between the
typical animate and the inanimate than there is between man and the other
animals. The arbitrary character of the orthodox view becomes clearer if we
consider how it might appear to a member of some other religious commu-
nity. How do Christians regard the Moslem view that women have no souls?
But let us leave this point aside and return to the main argument. It appears
to me that the argument quoted above implies a serious restriction of the
omnipotence of the Almighty. It is admitted that there are certain things that
He cannot do such as making one equal to two, but should we not believe
that He has freedom to confer a soul on an elephant if He sees fit? We might
expect that He would only exercise this power in conjunction with a muta-
tion which provided the elephant with an appropriately improved brain to
minister to the needs of this soul. An argument of exactly similar form may
be made for the case of machines. It may seem different because it is more
difficult to “swallow.” But this really only means that we think it would be
less likely that He would consider the circumstances suitable for conferring
a soul. The circumstances in question are discussed in the rest of this paper.
In attempting to construct such machines we should not be irreverently
usurping His power of creating souls, any more than we are in the procre-
ation of children: rather we are, in either case, instruments of His will pro-
viding mansions for the souls that He creates.

However, this is mere speculation. I am not very impressed with theological
arguments whatever they may be used to support. Such arguments have often
been found unsatisfactory in the past. In the time of Galileo it was argued that
the texts, “And the sun stood still . . . and hasted not to go down about a whole
day” (Joshua x. 13) and “He laid the foundations of the earth, that it should not
move at any time” (Psalm cv. 5) were an adequate refutation of the Copernican
theory. With our present knowledge such an argument appears futile. When
that knowledge was not available it made a quite different impression.

2. The “Heads in the Sand” Objection. “The consequences of machines
thinking would be too dreadful. Let us hope and believe that they cannot
do so.”

This argument is seldom expressed quite so openly as in the form above.
But it affects most of us who think about it at all. We like to believe that Man
is in some subtle way superior to the rest of creation. It is best if he can be
shown to be necessarily superior, for then there is no danger of him losing his
commanding position. The popularity of the theological argument is clearly
connected with this feeling. It is likely to be quite strong in intellectual people,
since they value the power of thinking more highly than others, and are more
inclined to base their belief in the superiority of Man on this power.

I do not think that this argument is sufficiently substantial to require refu-
tation. Consolation would be more appropriate: perhaps this should be
sought in the transmigration of souls.

3. The Mathematical Objection. There are a number of results of mathemati-
cal logic which can be used to show that there are limitations to the powers
of discrete state machines. The best known of these results is known as

529

Philosoph ical Reason ing

Gödel’s theorem, and shows that in any sufficiently powerful logical system
statements can be formulated which can neither be proved nor disproved
within the system, unless possibly the system itself is inconsistent. . . . This
is the mathematical result: it is argued that it proves a disability of machines
to which the human intellect is not subject.

The short answer to this argument is that although it is established that
there are limitations to the powers of any particular machine, it has only been
stated, without any sort of proof, that no such limitations apply to the human
intellect. But I do not think this view can be dismissed quite so lightly. When-
ever one of these machines is asked the appropriate critical question, and
gives a definite answer, we know that this answer must be wrong, and this
gives us a certain feeling of superiority. Is this feeling illusory? It is no doubt
quite genuine, but I do not think too much importance should be attached to
it. We too often give wrong answers to questions ourselves to be justified in
being very pleased at such evidence of fallibility on the part of the machines.
Further, our superiority can only be felt on such an occasion in relation to the
one machine over which we have scored our petty triumph. There would be
no question of triumphing simultaneously over all machines. In short, then,
there might be men cleverer than any given machine, but then again there
might be other machines cleverer again, and so on.

Those who hold to the mathematical argument would, I think, mostly be
willing to accept the imitation game as a basis for discussion. Those who
believe in the two previous objections would probably not be interested in
any criteria.

4. The Argument from Consciousness. This argument is very well expressed
in Professor Jefferson’s Lister Oration for 1949, from which I quote, “Not
until a machine can write a sonnet or compose a concerto because of
thoughts and emotions felt, and not by the chance fall of symbols, could we
agree that machine equals brain—that is, not only write it but know that it
had written it. No mechanism could feel (and not merely artificially signal,
an easy contrivance) pleasure at its successes, grief when its values fuse, be
warmed by flattery, be made miserable by its mistakes, be charmed by sex,
be angry or depressed when it cannot get what it wants.”

This argument appears to be a denial of the validity of our test. According
to the most extreme form of this view the only way by which one could be
sure that a machine thinks is to be the machine and to feel oneself thinking.
One could then describe these feelings to the world, but of course no one
would be justified in taking any notice. Likewise according to this view the
only way to know that a man thinks is to be that particular man. It is in fact
the solipsist point of view [which claims that only oneself exists]. It may be
the most logical view to hold but it makes communication of ideas difficult.
A is liable to believe “A thinks but B does not” while B believes “B thinks but
A does not.” Instead of arguing continually over this point it is usual to have
the polite convention that everyone thinks.

I am sure that Professor Jefferson does not wish to adopt the extreme
and solipsist point of view. Probably he would be quite willing to accept

530

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

the imitation game as a test. The game (with the player B omitted) is fre-
quently used in practice under the name of viva voce to discover whether
someone really understands something or has “learned it parrot fashion.”
Let us listen in to a part of such a viva voce:

Interrogator: In the first line of your sonnet which reads “Shall I compare
thee to a summer’s day,” would not “a spring day” do as well or better?

Witness: It wouldn’t scan.

Interrogator: How about “a winter’s day.” That would scan all right.

Witness: Yes, but nobody wants to be compared to a winter’s day.

Interrogator: Would you say Mr. Pickwick reminded you of Christmas?

Witness: In a way.

Interrogator: Yet Christmas is a winter’s day, and I do not think Mr.
Pickwick would mind the comparison.

Witness: I don’t think you’re serious. By a winter’s day one means a typ-
ical winter’s day, rather than a special one like Christmas.

And so on. What would Professor Jefferson say if the sonnet-writing machine
was able to answer like this in the viva voce? I do not know whether he would
regard the machine as “merely artificially signaling” these answers, but if the
answers were as satisfactory and sustained as in the above passage I do not
think he would describe it as “an easy contrivance.” This phrase is, I think, in-
tended to cover such devices as the inclusion in the machine of a record of
someone reading a sonnet, with appropriate switching to turn it on from time
to time. In short then, I think that most of those who support the argument
from consciousness could be persuaded to abandon it rather than be forced
into the solipsist position. They will then probably be willing to accept our test.

I do not wish to give the impression that I think there is no mystery about
consciousness. There is, for instance, something of a paradox connected with
any attempt to localize it. But I do not think these mysteries necessarily need
to be solved before we can answer the question with which we are concerned
in this paper.

5. Arguments from Various Disabilities. These arguments take the form, “I
grant you that you can make machines do all the things you have mentioned
but you will never be able to make one to do X.” Numerous features X are
suggested in this connection. I offer a selection:

Be kind, resourceful, beautiful, friendly, have initiative, have a sense of humor,
tell right from wrong, make mistakes, fall in love, enjoy strawberries and cream,
make someone fall in love with it, learn from experience, use words properly, be
the subject of its own thought, have as much diversity of behavior as a man, do
something really new.

No support is usually offered for these statements. I believe they are mostly
founded on the principle of scientific induction. A man has seen thousands of

531

Philosoph ical Reason ing

machines in his lifetime. From what he sees of them he draws a number of gen-
eral conclusions. They are ugly, each is designed for a very limited purpose,
when required for a minutely different purpose they are useless, the variety of
behavior of any one of them is very small, etc., etc. Naturally he concludes that
these are necessary properties of machines in general. Many of these limita-
tions are associated with the very small storage capacity of most machines. (I
am assuming that the idea of storage capacity is extended in some way to cover
machines other than discrete state machines. The exact definition does not mat-
ter as no mathematical accuracy is claimed in the present discussion.) A few
years ago, when very little had been heard of digital computers, it was possible
to elicit much incredulity concerning them, if one mentioned their properties
without describing their construction. That was presumably due to a similar
application of the principle of scientific induction. These applications of the
principle are of course largely unconscious. When a burned child fears the fire
and shows that he fears it by avoiding it, I should say that he was applying sci-
entific induction. (I could of course also describe his behavior in many other
ways.) The works and customs of mankind do not seem to be very suitable ma-
terial to which to apply scientific induction. A very large part of space-time
must be investigated if reliable results are to be obtained. Otherwise we may
(as most English children do) decide that everybody speaks English, and that it
is silly to learn French.

There are, however, special remarks to be made about many of the dis-
abilities that have been mentioned. The inability to enjoy strawberries and
cream may have struck the reader as frivolous. Possibly a machine might be
made to enjoy this delicious dish, but any attempt to make one do so would
be idiotic. What is important about this disability is that it contributes to
some of the other disabilities, e.g., to the difficulty of the same kind of
friendliness occurring between man and machine as between white man
and white man, or between black man and black man.

The claim that “machines cannot make mistakes” seems a curious one. One
is tempted to retort, “Are they any the worse for that?” But let us adopt a more
sympathetic attitude, and try to see what is really meant. I think this criticism
can be explained in terms of the imitation game. It is claimed that the interroga-
tor could distinguish the machine from the man simply by setting them a num-
ber of problems in arithmetic. The machine would be unmasked because of its
deadly accuracy. The reply to this is simple. The machine (programmed for
playing the game) would not attempt to give the right answers to the arithmetic
problems. It would deliberately introduce mistakes in a manner calculated to
confuse the interrogator. . . .

The claim that a machine cannot be the subject of its own thought can of
course only be answered if it can be shown that the machine has some
thought with some subject matter. Nevertheless, “the subject matter of a ma-
chine’s operations” does seem to mean something, at least to the people who
deal with it. If, for instance, the machine was trying to find a solution of the
equation x2 � 40x � 11 � 0 one would be tempted to describe this equation
as part of the machine’s subject matter at that moment. In this sort of sense a

532

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

machine undoubtedly can be its own subject matter. It may be used to help
in making up its own programs, or to predict the effect of alterations in its
own structure. By observing the results of its own behavior it can modify its
own programs so as to achieve some purpose more effectively. These are
possibilities of the near future, rather than Utopian dreams.

The criticism that a machine cannot have much diversity of behavior is
just a way of saying that it cannot have much storage capacity. Until fairly
recently a storage capacity of even a thousand digits was very rare.

The criticisms that we are considering here are often disguised forms of
the argument from consciousness. Usually if one maintains that a machine
can do one of these things, and describes the kind of method that the ma-
chine could use, one will not make much of an impression. It is thought that
the method (whatever it may be, for it must be mechanical) is really rather
base. Compare the parenthesis in Jefferson’s statement quoted above.

6. Lady Lovelace’s Objection. Our most detailed information of Babbage’s
Analytical Engine [a digital computer planned in the 1830s] comes from a
memoir by Lady Lovelace. In it she states, “The Analytical Engine has no
pretensions to originate anything. It can do whatever we know how to order it to
perform” (her italics). This statement is quoted by Hartree who adds: “This
does not imply that it may not be possible to construct electronic equipment
which will ‘think for itself,’ or in which, in biological terms, one could set up
a conditioned reflex, which would serve as a basis for ‘learning.’ Whether
this is possible in principle or not is a stimulating and exciting question, sug-
gested by some of these recent developments. But it did not seem that the
machines constructed or projected at the time had this property.”

I am in thorough agreement with Hartree over this. It will be noticed that
he does not assert that the machines in question had not got the property,
but rather that the evidence available to Lady Lovelace did not encourage
her to believe that they had it. It is quite possible that the machines in ques-
tion had in a sense got this property. For suppose that some discrete state
machine has the property. The Analytical Engine was a universal digital
computer, so that, if its storage capacity and speed were adequate, it could
by suitable programming be made to mimic the machine in question. Proba-
bly this argument did not occur to the Countess or to Babbage. In any case
there was no obligation on them to claim all that could be claimed. . . .

A variant of Lady Lovelace’s objection states that a machine can “never do
anything really new.” This may be parried for a moment with the saw, “There
is nothing new under the sun.” Who can be certain that “original work” that
he has done was not simply the growth of the seed planted in him by teach-
ing, or the effect of following well-known general principles. A better variant
of the objection says that a machine can never “take us by surprise.” This
statement is a more direct challenge and can be met directly. Machines take
me by surprise with great frequency. This is largely because I do not do suffi-
cient calculation to decide what to expect them to do, or rather because, al-
though I do a calculation, I do it in a hurried, slipshod fashion, taking risks.
Perhaps I say to myself, “I suppose the voltage here ought to be the same as

533

Philosoph ical Reason ing

there: anyway let’s assume it is.” Naturally I am often wrong, and the result
is a surprise for me, for by the time the experiment is done these assumptions
have been forgotten. These admissions lay me open to lectures on the subject
of my vicious ways, but do not throw any doubt on my credibility when I tes-
tify to the surprises I experience.

I do not expect this reply to silence my critic. He will probably say that such
surprises are due to some creative mental act on my part, and reflect no credit
on the machine. This leads us back to the argument from consciousness, and
far from the idea of surprise. It is a line of argument we must consider closed,
but it is perhaps worth remarking that the appreciation of something as sur-
prising requires as much of a “creative mental act” whether the surprising
event originates from a man, a book, a machine or anything else.

The view that machines cannot give rise to surprises is due, I believe, to a
fallacy to which philosophers and mathematicians are particularly subject.
This is the assumption that as soon as a fact is presented to a mind all conse-
quences of that fact spring into the mind simultaneously with it. It is a very
useful assumption under many circumstances, but one too easily forgets
that it is false. A natural consequence of doing so is that one then assumes
that there is no virtue in the mere working out of consequences from data
and general principles.

7. Argument from Continuity in the Nervous System. The nervous system is
certainly not a discrete state machine. A small error in the information about
the size of a nervous impulse impinging on a neuron, may make a large dif-
ference to the size of the outgoing impulse. It may be argued that, this being
so, one cannot expect to be able to mimic the behavior of the nervous system
with a discrete state system.

It is true that a discrete state machine must be different from a continu-
ous machine. But if we adhere to the conditions of the imitation game, the
interrogator will not be able to take any advantage of this difference. The
situation can be made clearer if we consider some other simpler continuous
machine. A differential analyzer will do very well. (A differential analyzer
is a certain kind of machine not of the discrete state type used for some
kinds of calculation.) Some of these provide their answers in a typed form,
and so are suitable for taking part in the game. It would not be possible for
a digital computer to predict exactly what answers the differential analyzer
would give to a problem, but it would be quite capable of giving the right
sort of answer. For instance, if asked to give the value of pi (actually about
3.1416) it would be reasonable to choose at random between the values
3.12, 3.13, 3.14, 3.15, 3.16 with the probabilities of 0.05, 0.15, 0.55, 0.19, 0.06
(say). Under these circumstances it would be very difficult for the inter-
rogator to distinguish the differential analyzer from the digital computer.

8. The Argument from Informality of Behavior. It is not possible to produce a
set of rules purporting to describe what a man should do in every conceiv-
able set of circumstances. One might for instance have a rule that one is to
stop when one sees a red traffic light, and to go if one sees a green one, but
what if by some fault both appear together? One may perhaps decide that it

534

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

is safest to stop. But some further difficulty may well arise from this decision
later. To attempt to provide rules of conduct to cover every eventuality, even
those arising from traffic lights, appears to be impossible. With all this I
agree.

From this it is argued that we cannot be machines. I shall try to reproduce
the argument, but I fear I shall hardly do it justice. It seems to run something
like this. “If each man had a definite set of rules of conduct by which he reg-
ulated his life he would be no better than a machine. But there are no such
rules, so men cannot be machines.” The undistributed middle is glaring. I do
not think the argument is ever put quite like this, but I believe this is the ar-
gument used nevertheless. There may however be a certain confusion be-
tween “rules of conduct” and “laws of behavior” to cloud the issue. By
“rules of conduct” I mean precepts such as “Stop if you see red lights,” on
which one can act, and of which one can be conscious. By “laws of behav-
ior” I mean laws of nature as applied to a man’s body such as “if you pinch
him he will squeak.” If we substitute “laws of behavior which regulate his
life” for “laws of conduct by which he regulates his life” in the argument
quoted the undistributed middle is no longer insuperable. For we believe
that it is not only true that being regulated by laws of behavior implies be-
ing some sort of machine (though not necessarily a discrete state machine),
but that conversely being such a machine implies being regulated by such
laws. However, we cannot so easily convince ourselves of the absence of
complete laws of behavior as of complete rules of conduct. The only way we
know of for finding such laws is scientific observation, and we certainly
know of no circumstances under which we could say, “We have searched
enough. There are no such laws.” . . .

7. Learning Machines

The reader will have anticipated that I have no very convincing arguments
of a positive nature to support my views. If I had, I should not have taken
such pains to point out the fallacies in contrary views. Such evidence as I
have I shall now give. . . .

The only really satisfactory support that can be given for the view ex-
pressed at the beginning of § 6, will be that provided by waiting for the end
of the century and then doing the experiment described. But what can we
say in the meantime? What steps should be taken now if the experiment is
to be successful? . . .

Instead of trying to produce a programme to simulate the adult mind,
why not rather try to produce one which simulates the child’s? If this were
then subjected to an appropriate course of education, one would obtain the
adult brain. Presumably the child brain is something like a notebook as
one buys it from the stationer’s. Rather little mechanism and lots of blank
sheets. (Mechanism and writing are from our point of view almost synony-
mous.) Our hope is that there is so little mechanism in the child brain that
something like it can be easily programmed. The amount of work in the

535

Philosoph ical Reason ing

education we can assume, as a first approximation, to be much the same as
for the human child. . . .

We normally associate punishments and rewards with the teaching
process. Some simple child machines can be constructed or programmed on
this sort of principle. The machine has to be so constructed that the events
which shortly preceded the occurrence of a punishment signal are unlikely to
be repeated, whereas a reward signal increased the probability of repetition of
the events which led up to it. These definitions do not presuppose any feel-
ings on the part of the machine. . . .

We may hope that machines will eventually compete with men in all
purely intellectual fields. But which are the best ones to start with? Even this
is a difficult decision. Many people think that a very abstract activity, like
the playing of chess, would be best. It can also be maintained that it is best
to provide the machine with the best sense organs that money can buy, and
then teach it to understand and speak English. This process could follow the
normal teaching of a child. Things would be pointed out and named, etc.
Again I do not know what the right answer is, but I think both approaches
should be tried.

We can only see a short distance ahead, but we can see plenty there that
needs to be done.

1. Why does Turing replace the question “Can machines think?” with the
question “Can any machine ever win the imitation game?” Must anyone
who answers “Yes” to the first question also answer “Yes” to the second
question? Must anyone who answers “No” to the first question also
answer “No” to the second question? Is Turing’s replacement fair to his
opponents? Why or why not?

2. Turing predicted that by 2000, average interrogators would be fooled
70 percent of the time by machines after playing the imitation game for
five minutes. We are now beyond 2000, but no machine is even close to this
degree of success. Thus, Turing’s prediction seems false (and not even
close to true). Does this show that Turing’s main argument is fallacious?
Why or why not?

3. Turing claims that Jefferson’s argument from consciousness lands him in
solipsism. Reconstruct and evaluate this reductio ad absurdum refutation.
How could Jefferson best reply? Is this reply adequate? Why or why not?

4. One variant of Lady Lovelace’s objection claims that machines are
programmed, so they “never do anything really new.” Turing responds by
arguing that machines can “take us by surprise.” Is this response adequate?
Why or why not? What does it mean to do something “really new“? Is there
any sense in which humans do things that are really new but machines can-
not? How can you tell?

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

(continued)

536

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

THE MYTH OF THE COMPUTER2

by John R. Searle

[A] theory, which is fairly widely held in cognitive science, can be summa-
rized in three propositions.

1. Mind as Program. What we call minds are simply very complex digital
computer programs. Mental states are simply computer states and
mental processes are computational processes. Any system whatever
that had the right program, with the right input and output, would
have to have mental states and processes in the same literal sense that
you and I do, because that is all there is to mental states and processes,
that is all that you and I have. The programs in question are “self-
updating” or “self-designing” “systems of representations.”

2. The Irrelevance of the Neurophysiology of the Brain. In the study of the
mind actual biological facts about actual human and animal brains are
irrelevant because the mind is an “abstract sort of thing” and human
brains just happen to be among the indefinitely large number of kinds
of computers that can have minds. Our minds happen to be embodied
in our brains, but there is no essential connection between the mind
and the brain. Any other computer with the right program would also
have a mind. . . .

3. The Turing Test as the Criterion of the Mental. The conclusive proof of
the presence of mental states and capacities is the ability of a system
to pass the Turing test, the test devised by Alan Turing and described
in his article in this book. If a system can convince a computer expert
that it has mental states then it really has those mental states. If, for
example, a machine could “converse” with a native Chinese speaker
in such a way as to convince the speaker that it understood Chinese
then it would literally understand Chinese. . . .

We might call this collection of theses “strong artificial intelligence”
(strong AI).* These theses are certainly not obviously true and they are sel-
dom explicitly stated and defended.

5. Some MP3 players are of such high quality that it is sometimes impossible
to distinguish the sound of the MP3 player from the sound of a live
human voice. Would the Turing test show that such MP3 players can sing?
Why or why not?

*“Strong” to distinguish the position from “weak” or “cautious” AI, which holds that the
computer is simply a very useful tool in the study of the mind, not that the appropriately
programmed computer literally has a mind.

537

Philosoph ical Reason ing

Let us inquire first into how plausible it is to suppose that specific bio-
chemical powers of the brain are really irrelevant to the mind. . . . [I]f you
consider specific mental states and processes—being thirsty, wanting to go to
the bathroom, worrying about your income tax, trying to solve math puzzles,
feeling depressed, recalling the French word for “butterfly“—then it seems at
least a little odd to think that the brain is so irrelevant.

Take thirst, where we actually know a little about how it works. Kidney
secretions of renin synthesize a substance called angiotensin. This substance
goes into the hypothalamus and triggers a series of neuron firings. As far as
we know these neuron firings are a very large part of the cause of thirst.
Now obviously there is more to be said, for example, about the relations of
the hypothalamic responses to the rest of the brain, about other things going
on in the hypothalamus, and about the possible distinctions between the
feeling of thirst and the urge to drink. Let us suppose we have filled out the
story with the rest of the biochemical causal account of thirst.

Now the theses of the mind as program and the irrelevance of the brain
would tell us that what matters about this story is not the specific biochemi-
cal properties of the angiotensin or the hypothalamus but only the formal
computer programs that the whole sequence instantiates. Well, let’s try that
out as a hypothesis and see how it works. A computer can simulate the for-
mal properties of the sequence of chemical and electrical phenomena in the
production of thirst just as much as it can simulate the formal properties of
anything else—we can simulate thirst just as we can simulate hurricanes,
rainstorms, five-alarm fires, internal combustion engines, photosynthesis,
lactation, or the flow of currency in a depressed economy. But no one in his
right mind thinks that a computer simulation of a five-alarm fire will burn
down the neighborhood, or that a computer simulation of an internal com-
bustion engine will power a car or that computer simulations of lactation and
photosynthesis will produce milk and sugar. To my amazement, however, I
have found that a large number of people suppose that computer simulations
of mental phenomena, whether at the level of brain processes or not, literally
produce mental phenomena.

Again, let’s try it out. Let’s program our favorite PDP-10 computer with
the formal program that simulates thirst. We can even program it to point
out at the end “Boy, am I thirsty!” or “Won’t someone please give me a
drink?” etc. Now would anyone suppose that we thereby have even the
slightest reason to suppose that the computer is literally thirsty? Or that any
simulation of any other mental phenomena, such as understanding stories,
feeling depressed, or worrying about itemized deductions, must therefore
produce the real thing? The answer, alas, is that a large number of people are
committed to an ideology that requires them to believe just that. So let us
carry the story a step further.

The PDP-10 is powered by electricity and perhaps its electrical properties
can reproduce some of the actual causal powers of the electrochemical fea-
tures of the brain in producing mental states. We certainly couldn’t rule out
that eventuality a priori. But remember: the thesis of strong AI is that the

538

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

mind is “independent of any particular embodiment” because the mind is
just a program and the program can be run on a computer made of anything
whatever provided it is stable enough and complex enough to carry the pro-
gram. The actual physical computer could be an ant colony . . . , a collection
of beer cans, streams of toilet paper with small stones placed on the squares,
men sitting on high stools with green eye shades—anything you like.

So let us imagine our thirst-simulating program running on a computer
made entirely of old beer cans, millions (or billions) of old beer cans that are
rigged up to levers and powered by windmills. We can imagine that the
program simulates the neuron firings at the synapses by having beer cans
bang into each other, thus achieving a strict correspondence between neu-
ron firings and beer-can bangings. And at the end of the sequence a beer
can pops up on which is written “I am thirsty.” Now, to repeat the question,
does anyone suppose that this Rube Goldberg apparatus is literally thirsty
in the sense in which you and I are?

Notice that the thesis of [strong AI] is not that for all we know the collec-
tion of beer cans might be thirsty but rather that if it has the right program
with the right input and output it must be thirsty (or understand Proust or
worry about its income tax or have any other mental state) because that is
all the mind is, a certain kind of computer program, and any computer
made of anything at all running the right program would have to have the
appropriate mental states.

I believe that everything we have learned about human and animal biol-
ogy suggests that what we call “mental” phenomena are as much a part of
our biological natural history as any other biological phenomena, as much a
part of biology as digestion, lactation, or the secretion of bile. Much of the
implausibility of the strong AI thesis derives from its resolute opposition to
biology; the mind is not a concrete biological phenomenon but “an abstract
sort of thing.”

Still, in calling attention to the implausibility of supposing that the specific
causal powers of brains are irrelevant to minds I have not yet fully exposed
the preposterousness of the strong AI position, so let us press on and examine
a bit more closely the thesis of mind as program.

Digital computer programs by definition consist of sets of purely formal
operations on formally specified symbols. The ideal computer does such
things as print a 0 on the tape, move one square to the left, erase a 1, move
back to the right, etc. It is common to describe this as “symbol manipula-
tion” or . . . the whole system as a “self-updating representational system“;
but these terms are at least a bit misleading since as far as the computer is
concerned the symbols don’t symbolize anything or represent anything. They
are just formal counters.

The computer attaches no meaning, interpretation, or content to the for-
mal symbols; and qua computer it couldn’t, because if we tried to give the
computer an interpretation of its symbols we could only give it more unin-
terpreted symbols. The interpretation of the symbols is entirely up to the pro-
grammers and users of the computer. For example, on my pocket calculator

539

Philosoph ical Reason ing

if I print “3 � 3 �,” the calculator will print “9” but it has no idea that “3”
means 3 or that “9” means 9 or that anything means anything. We might put
this point by saying that the computer has a syntax but no semantics. The
computer manipulates formal symbols but attaches no meaning to them,
and this simple observation will enable us to refute the thesis of mind as
program.

Suppose that we write a computer program to simulate the understand-
ing of Chinese so that, for example, if the computer is asked questions in
Chinese the program enables it to give answers in Chinese; if asked to sum-
marize stories in Chinese it can give such summaries; if asked questions
about the stories it has been given it will answer such questions.

Now suppose that I, who understand no Chinese at all and can’t even dis-
tinguish Chinese symbols from some other kinds of symbols, am locked in a
room with a number of cardboard boxes full of Chinese symbols. Suppose
that I am given a book of rules in English that instruct me how to match
these Chinese symbols with each other. The rules say such things as that the
“squiggle-squiggle” sign is to be followed by the “squoggle-squoggle” sign.
Suppose that people outside the room pass in more Chinese symbols and
that following the instructions in the book I pass Chinese symbols back to
them. Suppose that unknown to me the people who pass me the symbols
call them “questions” and the book of instructions that I work from they call
“the program“; the symbols I give back to them they call “answers to the
questions” and me they call “the computer.” Suppose that after a while the
programmers get so good at writing the programs and I get so good at ma-
nipulating the symbols that my answers are indistinguishable from those of
native Chinese speakers. I can pass the Turing test for understanding Chi-
nese. But all the same I still don’t understand a word of Chinese and neither
does any other digital computer because all the computer has is what I have:
a formal program that attaches no meaning, interpretation, or content to any
of the symbols.

What this simple program shows is that no formal program by itself is
sufficient for understanding, because it would always be possible in princi-
ple for an agent to go through the steps in the program and still not have
the relevant understanding. And what works for Chinese would also work
for other mental phenomena. I could, for example, go through the steps of
the thirst-simulating program without feeling thirsty. The argument also,
en passant, refutes the Turing test because it shows that a system, namely
me, could pass the Turing test without having the appropriate mental
states.* . . .

The details of how the brain works are immensely complicated and
largely unknown, but some of the general principles of the relations

*The “Chinese room argument” is stated in detail in my article “Minds, Brains, and Programs,”
. . . [which] originally appeared in The Behavioral and Brain Sciences, Vol. 3 (Cambridge: Cam-
bridge University Press, 1980), along with twenty-seven responses and a reply to the responses.

540

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

between brain functioning and computer programs can be stated quite
simply. First, we know that brain processes cause mental phenomena.
Mental states are caused by and realized in the structure of the brain.
From this it follows that any system that produced mental states would
have to have powers equivalent to those of the brain. Such a system might
use a different chemistry, but whatever its chemistry it would have to be
able to cause what the brain causes. We know from the Chinese room ar-
gument that digital computer programs by themselves are never suffi-
cient to produce mental states. Now since brains do produce minds, and
since programs by themselves can’t produce minds, it follows that the
way the brain does it can’t be by simply instantiating a computer pro-
gram. (Everything, by the way, instantiates some program or other, and
brains are no exception. So in that trivial sense brains, like everything
else, are digital computers.) And it also follows that if you wanted to
build a machine to produce mental states, a thinking machine, you could-
n’t do it solely in virtue of the fact that your machine ran a certain kind of
computer program. The thinking machine couldn’t work solely in virtue
of being a digital computer but would have to duplicate the specific
causal powers of the brain.

A lot of the nonsense talked about computers nowadays stems from
their relative rarity and hence mystery. As computers and robots become
more common, as common as telephones, washing machines, and forklift
trucks, it seems likely that this aura will disappear and people will take
computers for what they are, namely useful machines. In the meantime
one has to try to avoid certain recurring mistakes that keep cropping up
in . . . current discussions.

The first is the idea that somehow computer achievements pose some sort
of threat or challenge to human beings. But the fact, for example, that a calcu-
lator can outperform even the best mathematician is no more significant or
threatening than the fact that a steam shovel can outperform the best human
digger. (An oddity of artificial intelligence, by the way, is the slowness of the
programmers in devising a program that can beat the very best chess players.
From the point of view of games theory, chess is a trivial game since each side
has perfect information about the other’s position and possible moves, and
one had to assume that computer programs will soon be able to outperform
any human chess player.)

A second fallacy is the idea that there might be some special human expe-
rience beyond computer simulation because of its special humanity. We are
sometimes told that computers couldn’t simulate feeling depressed or
falling in love or having a sense of humor. But as far as simulation is con-
cerned you can program your computer to print out “I am depressed,” “I love
Sally,” or “Ha, ha,” as easily as you can program it to print out “3 � 3 � 9.”
The real mistake is to suppose that simulation is duplication, and that
mistake is the same regardless of what mental states we are talking
about.

541

Philosoph ical Reason ing

1. Reconstruct and evaluate Searle’s Chinese room argument in the form of
an argument from analogy. Be sure to state his conclusion as precisely as
you can.

2. Is Searle’s analogy undermined by the fact that computers are much
faster than any person in a Chinese room? Why or why not?

3. Could any future developments of more sophisticated computers (such as
computers that can reprogram themselves) undermine Searle’s argument?
Why or why not?

4. Could any future discoveries about how the brain works (such as that
brains work just like computers) undermine Searle’s argument? Why or
why not?

5. Searle admits that, in a “trivial sense brains, like everything else, are
digital computers.” Does this admission weaken his argument? Why or
why not?

6. Some defenders of strong AI respond that, even if the person in the
Chinese room does not understand Chinese, the system consisting of
the person, room, and manual together does understand Chinese. Is
this “systems reply” plausible? Why or why not?

7. Some opponents reply that Searle’s Chinese room would have under-
standing if it had arms and legs so that it could move around as well
as a television camera so that it could perceive its environment. Is this
“robot reply” plausible? Why or why not?

8. Some critics charge that, given Searle’s requirements, we cannot know
whether other people have minds, because we cannot see whether they
mean anything by the symbols they put out. Is Searle really committed to
such a skeptical view? Why or why not?

9. Suppose that a friend of yours for many years is seriously injured in an
accident and the doctors discover that she is made from wires, transistors,
and so on. Would this be sufficient to show that your “friend” never
really thought or felt anything? Why or why not?

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

A third mistake, basic to all the others, is the idea that if a computer can
simulate having a certain mental state then we have the same grounds for
supposing it really has that mental state as we have for supposing that hu-
man beings have that state. But we know from the Chinese room argument
as well as from biology that this simple-minded behaviorism of the Turing
test is mistaken.

Until computers and robots become as common as cars and until people
are able to program and use them as easily as they now drive cars we are
likely to continue to suffer from a certain mythological conception of digital
computers. . . .

(continued)

542

CHAPTER 22 ■ Philosoph ical Reason ing

NOTES
1Mind LIX, no. 236 (1950): 433–60.

2The New York Review of Books, April 29, 1982, 3. Searle is here reviewing Hofstadter and Dennett,
The Mind’s I. We removed references to that particular book, since Searle’s argument is much
more general.

10. Suppose that you are seriously injured in an accident and the doctors dis-
cover that you are made from wires, transistors, and so on. Would this
convince you that you had never really thought or felt anything? If your
answer to this question is different from your answer to the previous
question, explain why.

11. Searle predicts that, “As computers and robots become more common, . . .
people will take computers for what they are, namely useful machines.”
Do you agree? Why or why not?

This page constitutes an extension of the copyright page. We have made every effort to trace the ownership

of all copyrighted material and to secure permission from copyright holders. In the event of any question

arising as to the use of any material, we will be pleased to make the necessary corrections in future printings.

Thanks are due to the following authors, publishers, and agents for permission to use the material indicated.

Chapter 1. 13: An Extraterrestrial Impact by Walter Alvarez and Frank Asaro from SCIENTIFIC AMERICAN,

October 1990. Reprinted with permission. Copyright ©1990 by Scientific American, Inc. All rights reserved.

Chapter 4. Credit line: From Equal Exchange. Advertisement. Copyright © 1997, 1998, 1999. Used by permis-

sion of Equal Exchange, Inc. 90: Dartmouth: Letter to the Editor. “Greeks Should be Co-Ed” by Andrew

Beebe, September 23, 1992. Used by permission of Andrew Beebe. 92: Robert Redford, “A Piece of ‘God‘s

Handiwork‘,” Washington Post, November 25, 1997, p. A19. Used by permission. 96: Beyond the Wasteland:

What American TV Can Learn from the BBC by Martin Esslin. 96: John Russell, “Is Eakins our Greatest

Painter?” New York Times, June 6, 1982, pp. 1, 31. Copyright © 1982 by The New York Times Co. Reprinted

by permission. 98: Paul Davies, “Life (and Death) on Mars,” New York Times, January 15, 2004, p. A33.

Copyright © 2004 by The New York Times Co. Reprinted by permission. 100: Charlie Buttrey, “Three Fallac-

ies about Gun Rights,” Valley News, August 29, 2001. Reprinted by permission of Charlie Buttrey. 101: Paul

Goodman, “A Proposal to Abolish Grading,” from Compulsory Miseducation and the Community of

Schools by Paul Goodman, copyright © 1962, 1964 by Paul Goodman. Used by permission of Random House,

Inc. 102: Make It 18 by Ben Selznick from THE DARTMOUTH, April 2007.

Chapter 5. 134: Stanley Smith, “A Mere Matter of Deduction,” from Five-Minute Whodunits. Copyright ©

1997 by Stanley Smith. Reprinted with permission of Sterling Publishing Co., Inc., NY, NY. 135: Stanley

Smith, “A Mere Matter of Deduction,” from Five-Minute Whodunits. Copyright © 1997 by Stanley Smith.

Reprinted with permission of Sterling Publishing Co., Inc., NY, NY. 136: Stanley Smith, “A Mere Matter of De-

duction,” from Five-Minute Whodunits. Copyright © 1997 by Stanley Smith. Reprinted with permission of

Sterling Publishing Co., Inc., NY, NY. 137: Stanley Smith, “A Mere Matter of Deduction,” from Five-Minute

Whodunits. Copyright © 1997 by Stanley Smith. Reprinted with permission of Sterling Publishing Co.,

Inc., NY, NY.

Chapter 10. 273: A Gnawing Question is Answered by Michael Downey as appeared in THE TORONTO

STAR, October 10, 1999.

Chapter 12. 312: Blaise Pascal, “The Wager” from Pensees and the Provincial Letters, trans. W.F. Trotter

(New York: Modern Library, 1941). Reprinted by permission of JM Dent, a division of The Orion Publishing

Group. 312: Playing Games with Infinity: The Devil‘s Offer by Edward J. Gracely from ANALYSIS, 1988,

Vol. 48, p. 113. Reprinted by permission.

Chapter 14. 341: Burton Leiser, “Homosexuality and Natural Law,” pp. 52–57 in Liberty, Justice, and Morals:

Contemporary Value Conflicts, 3rd ed. Copyright © 1986. Reprinted by permission of Pearson Education, Inc.,

Upper Saddle River, NJ.

Chapter 17. 398: St. Anselm, “God Truly Exists” and Guanilo, “A Reply to the Foregoing by a Certain Writer

on Behalf of the Fool,” from St. Anselm‘s Proslogion with a Reply on Behalf of the Fool by Guanilo and the

Author‘s Reply to Guanilo, trans. M.J. Charlesworth (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965). Reprinted by permis-

sion of Oxford University Press.

Chapter 19. 446: Judith Jarvis Thomson, “A Defense of Abortion,” Philosophy and Public Affairs 1, no. 1

(Fall 1971), pp. 47–66. Reproduced with permission of Blackwell Publishing Ltd. 459: Don Marquis,

“Why Abortion is Immoral,” The Journal of Philosophy, vol. 86, no. 4 (April 1989), pp. 183–202. Reprinted by

permission.

Chapter 20. 481: Molecular Machines: Experimental Support for the Design Inference by Michael J. Behe from

COSMIC PURSUIT, Vol. 1, No. 2, 1998, pp. 27–35. Reprinted by permission of the author. 494: From LIVING

CREDITS

543

544

cred its

WITH DARWIN by Philip Kitcher, pp. 83–96, 100–101, 103–106, 108–110. Copyright © 2007. Reprinted by

permission of Oxford University Press.

Chapter 21. 506: Five Reasons to Believe in God by William Lane Craig from The Craig-Curley Debate: The

Existence of the Christian God from Reasonable Faith, 2007. Reprinted by permission of William Lane Craig.

511: Seven Deadly Objections to Belief in the Christian God by Edwin Curley from The Craig-Curley Debate:

The Existence of the Christian God. Reprinted by permission of Edwin Curley.

Chapter 22. 524: A.M. Turing, “Computing Machinery and Intelligence,” Mind, Vol. LIX, No. 236 (1950),

pp. 433–460. Reprinted by permission of Oxford University Press. 536: John R. Searle, “The Myth of the

Computer,” New York Review of Books, April 29, 1982, p. 3. Reprinted with permission from The New York

Review of Books. Copyright © 1982 NYREV, Inc.

a priori probability, 232, 283–284
abduction, 276n1
abortion

analogical arguments, 442–444
begging the question, 372–373
conditions of personhood, 438–439
conflicting principles, 440–441
contraception objection, 471–472
fetus, status of, 435–436, 438–440,

442–444, 461–463
“future like ours,” 463–472
intractability of debate, 459–460
Marquis on, 459–474
moral reasoning and, 434–441
pro-choice argument, 437–441
pro-life argument, 435–437
rape and incest, 437–438, 442–444
Reagan on, 440, 445
Samaritan analogy, 456–458
self-defense exception, 436–438,

448–450
slippery slope arguments, 326, 439–441
syllogisms, 462
Thomson on, 442–443, 446–459,

460–461
violinist analogy, 442–444, 446–459

Abortion and the Conscience of the Nation,
445

Abraham and Isaac, story of, 520–521
absurdity, reduction to, 386–389
abusive assurances, 64–65
acceptance of premises, 220
acid rain, 251
ad hominem arguments

assessment of, 356–357
definition, 354–355
deniers, 355–356
dismissers, 355–356
genetic fallacy, 357–358, 360
inconsistency over time, 356–357
self-sealers, 375–380
silencers, 355–356

Adam, 516
adversarial situation, 86
advertisements, 95, 366

affirmative action, 340–341, 414–417
affirmative propositions, 183
affirmatives, universal, 183
affirming a disjunct, 154
affirming the consequent, 478
agnostics, 505
Ahmadinejad, Mahmoud, 105–106
al Qaeda, 366
“all”, 185
“although”, 67
Alvarez, Walter, 13–16
ambiguity, 109, 333–337. See also

fallacies of ambiguity
ampersand, 143
amphiboly, 334
analogical reasoning in ethics, 442–444
analogy, arguments from, 267–276, 408

abortion and, 442–444
cannibalism and, 273–274
conclusions, 269
explanations, 270
God and, 275–276
importance, 268
relevance, 268
relevant disanalogies, 269
in science, 267–268

analogy with animals argument, 468
analysis, speech act, 30–31
“and” in propositional logic, 142–145.

See also conjunction
animals argument, analogy with, 468
anomalies, 478
Anselm, St., 398
antecedents, 53, 163, 166, 172
Antony, Marc, 45, 389
appeal to cases argument, 466–468
appeals to authority, 10–11, 82, 360–364
appeals to emotion, 366–367
appeals to fear, 366
appeals to pity, 365–366
appeals to popular opinion, 365
appeals to tradition, 365
Aquinas, St. Thomas, 375
Archimedes, 8–9
“Argument Clinic,” 3

INDEX

545

Note: Page numbers followed by letter n indicate footnotes.

546

INDEX

argument form. See also standard form
of arguments

definition, 7–8
modus ponens, 58
process of elimination, 58, 153–154
in propositional logic, 147–148
testing for validity, 156–160, 171, 191

argument from interests, 469–470
argument from the heap, 320–322
argument markers, 51–53, 54, 80–81,

83, 88
argument reconstruction, 122–124
“An Argument that Abortion Is Wrong”

(Marquis), 459–474
argumentative devices, 80–81
argumentative performatives, 25, 53,

80–81
arguments, 3, 16

circular, 61
combinations of explanations and

justifications, 10–13
definition, 3–4
explanations, 7–10, 11–12, 258–263,

270
formal analysis of, 141–142
justifications, 4–7, 258–259
patterns in, 54
reasons in, 51, 56
soundness of, 60, 369
standards for evaluation, 57–62,

70–71, 216
standard form of, 55–56, 105–108, 123
subargument arrangement,

111–116, 123
suppressed premises, 116–125
validity of, 57–59
validity vs. soundness, 60

Aristotle, 317
arrow, in chain of reasoning, 112–114
Articles of Religion, 513
Asaro, Frank, 13–16
assumptions, 8, 11, 242–243, 244–249
assuring, 63–65, 80–83, 87, 88,

107–108
atheism, 389, 505
atom, splitting of, 362
audience, 89
Augustine, St., 513n, 515n, 516n
Austin, J. L., 23–24, 48n1, 49n4
authorities, citing, 64
authority, appeals to, 10–11, 82,

360–364
availability heuristic, 280–281

Babbage’s Analytical Engine, 532
Bakke case, 414–419, 425–426
bargain, 71
Bayes’s theorem, 291–302
Beebe, Andrew, 90–92
begging the question, 370–375
Behe, Michael J., 480, 481–493, 495,

497–501
benign, remedial purpose, 415–416
Bennett, William, 331
best explanation, inferences to, 257–267
beyond a reasonable doubt, 404, 431
“Beyond the Wasteland: What Ameri-

can TV Can Learn from the
BBC” (Esslin), 96–98

biased sampling, 222–223
biconditionals, 173–174
Big Bang theory, 507–508
Blackmun, Harry, 415
Bohr, Niels, 480
Bollinger, Lee, 418
borderline cases, 318, 321
brain activity, as condition of

personhood, 438
branching tree diagram, 113
Brennan, William, 415–416, 417, 432
Breyer, Stephen, 419
Bronston v. United States, 46–47
Brooks, David, 73
Brothers Karamazov, The (Dostoevsky),

517
Brown v. Board of Education, 404–405,

413–414
buoyancy, law of, 8
burden of proof, 404, 430–432
Bureau of Land Management, 92–94,

115–116
Burger, Warren, 46–47, 326, 415
Burt, Cyril, 362–363
Bush, George H.W., 98
Bush, George W., 73, 98, 226–227,

390–391
“but”, 67
Buttrey, Charlie, 100–101

California v. Carney, 325–326
Calvin and Hobbes, 483
cannibalism, 273–274
capital punishment

begging the question, 372
as cruel and unusual punishment,

127–134

n = footnote

547

INDEX

deep analysis of, 127–134
English parliamentary debate on,

386–387
slippery slope arguments, 326

Cargile, James, 313
Carroll, Lewis, 18
cases, appeal to, 466–468
categorical forms, 182–190
categorical immediate inferences,

192–194
categorical logic, 179–212

categorical propositions, 180–182, 183
classical theory, 203–212
contradictories, 187–188
existential commitment, 189–190
four basic forms, 182–190
immediate inferences, 192–194
vs. propositional logic, 179–180
syllogism, 194–202
translation into basic categorical

forms, 184–187
validity for categorical arguments,

190–202
categorical propositions, 180–182, 183
categorical syllogisms, 194–202
causal explanation, 232
causal factor, 249
causal generalizations, 232
causal prediction, 232
causal reasoning, 231–255

background, 231–233
background assumptions, 8, 11,

242–243, 244–249
calling things causes, 249–250
concomitant variation, 250–255
conditionals and, 232
joint test, 238–240
Legionnaires’ disease example,

245–250
necessary condition test, 233–235,

237–238
normality, 243–244
reaching positive conclusions,

240–242
rigorous testing, 240–242, 251
sufficient condition test, 233–235,

236–237
causal slippery slope arguments,

327–331
causally relevant factor, 249
certainty, 182
chain of reasoning, 112–114
chances. See probability

changing the subject, 36
Chicago Tribune, 223
Chinese language, 539
choices. See decisions
Christian moral beliefs, 360, 406
Churchill, Winston, 41
circular reasoning, 61, 370
circularity, 369–370
civil law, 404
claims, universal, 382
clarification of terms in argument

reconstruction, 109–111, 123
Clark, Sally, 299–302
classical theory

categorical logic, 203–212
contradictories in, 203–205
existential commitment, 189–190,

203–204
immediate inferences, 209
vs. modern logic, 203
square of opposition, 205–209
syllogisms, 210–212
Venn diagrams in, 203–212

clerk hire allowance, 77–90, 328
Clinton, Bill, 73, 92–94, 349–351, 381
close analysis, 77–104

argument markers, 51–54, 80–81,
83, 88

argument reconstruction, 123
argumentative performatives, 80–81
assuring, 80–83, 87, 88
audience, 89
discounting, 80–81, 83–84, 87, 88
evaluative language, 80, 86, 87, 88
guarding, 80, 83–85, 86, 88
labeling argumentative devices, 80–81
purpose, 89
rhetorical devices, 80–81, 86
standpoint, 89

cognitive psychology, 279–280
Colbert, Stephen, 73, 357, 366, 391
Columbia, 105–106
combinations, 288
commitment, level of, 65
common knowledge, 244–245
common law, 407
composition, fallacy of, 393
computers, 523–541. See also philosoph-

ical reasoning
“Computing Machinery and

Intelligence” (Turing), 524–536
conceptual slippery slope arguments,

322–324

n = footnote

548

INDEX

conclusion markers, 52–53
conclusions

argument markers, 51–53
argument reconstruction, 123
arguments from analogy, 267–270
arranging subarguments, 111–117
clarification of terms, 109
in deep analysis, 105–108
definition, 3
explanations and, 7, 10–11
fallacies of relevance, 353, 356–357
fallacies of vacuity, 369–372
fallacies of vagueness, 317, 321–324
false, 120, 147–148, 154, 156–158
guarding, 65–66
in inductive vs. deductive

arguments, 215–218, 221
inferences to the best explanation,

258–259, 261
justifications and, 4–6, 10–11
positive, 240–242
probability and, 277, 279, 283
refutation, 381–382, 386, 392–395
soundness and, 60
in standard form, 56
statistical applications, 225–227
suppressed premises and, 117–119
syllogisms and, 194–200, 210–211
truth and, 59
universal, 220
validity and, 57–59, 60, 171, 190–192

concomitant variation, 250–255
conditional probability, 285, 296, 301
conditionals, 53–55, 162–178

biconditionals, 173–174
causal reasoning and, 232
indicative conditionals, 54, 82, 163, 172
logical language and everyday

language, 169–175
probability and, 285, 296, 301
propositional conditionals, 53–55,

163, 165, 168, 172
subjunctive conditionals, 163
truth tables for, 163–169

Confidential Enquiry for Stillbirths and
Deaths in Infancy (CESDI), 300

conflicts of moral principles, 434,
440–441

conjunctions, 67, 142–149, 169, 285–286
connectives. See propositional

connectives
Conoco, Inc., 92–94, 115–116
consciousness, argument from, 529–530

consequents, 53, 163
conservative explanations, 261–262
considered judgment argument, 465
Constitution, 127–134, 406–407,

411–412, 480
Consumer Reports, 267
contextual definitions, 351n4
contingent facts, 117–119
continuity in the nervous system,

argument from, 533
continuum, 323
contraception objection, 471–472
contracts, law of, 31–32
contradictories, 187–188, 203–205,

206
contraries, 206–207
convention, and language, 17–19
conversational acts, 32–41

and evaluative language, 70
as a practical activity, 32
rule violations, 40–42
rules of, 34–37. See also

conversational rules
as a social activity, 32

conversational exchange, 32
conversational implications, 37–39, 40,

42, 54, 67
conversational rules, 49n7. See also

manner, rule of; quality, rule of;
quantity, rule of; relevance,
rule of

flouting of, 40
Grice on, 37, 42–43, 353
rhetorical devices and, 42–45
specific rules, 34–37
violations of, 40–42, 106, 150, 210

conversion, 192–194
conversion by limitation, 209
Cooperative Principle, 34–35, 40–41, 46,

49n8
correlations, 250–252
counterevidence, 263
counterexamples, 384–386
Craig, William Lane, 506–512,

516–517
creationism, 379–380. See also evolution,

theory of
crimes, worst of, argument, 465–466
criminal law, 404
criminal trials, 10–13
cruel and unusual punishment,

127–134
Curley, Edwin, 506, 512–521

n = footnote

549

INDEX

Daalen, D.H. van, 510
damning with faint praise, 40
Darwin, Charles, 379–380, 481–493,

494–503. See also evolution, theory
of; natural selection, theory of

Darwin’s Black Box (Behe), 495, 498
Davies, Paul, 98–99
Davies, P.C.W., 508
death penalty. See capital punishment
Deccan Traps, 14
deception, 46–47
decision procedure, 168
decisions under ignorance, 308–313
decisions under risk, 308
decisions under uncertainty, 308
deductive arguments

categorical logic, 179–212
definition, 59–60
vs. inductive arguments, 215–219
legal reasoning and, 405
propositional logic, 139–178
refutation by parallel reasoning,

392–399
sufficient and necessary conditions,

236–237, 243
deep analysis, 105–137

arrangement of subarguments, 111–116
of capital punishment, 127–134
chain of reasoning, 112–114
clarification of terms, 109
dissection of argument, 109–111
fundamental principles, 125–127
guarding, 107–108
linguistic principles, 119–120
reconstruction method, 122–124
standard form in, 105–108
suppressed premises, 116–125

deep counterexample, 383
defeasible, 217, 227, 260
“Defense of Abortion, A” (Thomson),

442–443, 446–459
Defense of Marriage Act, 106
definitions, 343–351

contextual, 351n4
dictionary, 343–344
disambiguating, 335, 344
precising, 345–346
stipulative, 344–345
systematic or theoretical, 346–347

degenerate cases, 212n1, 212n2
deniers, 355–356
denying the antecedent, 166
depth of explanation, 260

descriptive terms, 71–72
Dewey, Thomas, 223
diagnostic test, 297
dictionary definitions, 343–344
diminishing marginal utility, 307
diminishing marginal value, 307
dinosaurs, extinction of, 13–15
Dirksen, Everett, 323
disagreements, moral, 433–434
disambiguating definitions, 335, 344
disappearing guard, 66
disaster avoidance rule, 310–311
discounting, 63, 66–68, 80–81, 83–84,

87–88
discounting, universal, 377
discounting connectives, 67–68
discrimination, law of, 411–430

application of the Constitution,
412

Bakke case, 414–419, 425–426
Brown v. Board of Education, 404–405,

413–414
Equal Protection Clause, 411–412
Gratz v. Bollinger, 425–430
Grutter v. Bollinger, 419–424, 427
Korematsu v. United States, 413
Plessy v. Ferguson, 389, 407–411, 412
Richmond v. J.A. Croson Co., 418
Strauder v. West Virginia, 412
strict scrutiny test, 413–414, 430, 432
United Steelworkers of America

v. Weber, 418
U.S. v. Cruikshank, 412
Yick Wo v. Hopkins, 407–411, 412

discriminatory effect, 409–410
discriminatory motive, 409–410
disjunction, 54, 150, 154, 169
disjunction with exclusivity, 160–161,

286–288
disjunctive syllogism, 153
dismissers, 355–356
dissection of the argument, in deep

analysis, 109–111
distress sale policy, 418
dominance, rule of, 309
domino arguments, 328
Donne, John, 43
Doolittle, Russell, 498
Dostoevsky, Fyodor, 517
Downey, Michael, 273–274
Doyle, Arthur Conan, 259–260,

266–267
drinking age, 102–103

n = footnote

550

INDEX

Eakins, Thomas, 96–98
Eddington, A.S., 492
Edwards, John, 106
Ehrman, Bart, 517n
Einstein, Albert, 362, 480, 482
either-or sentences, 54, 150.

See also disjunction
elimination, process of, 58, 153–154
emotion, appeals to, 366–367
Enquiry Concerning Human Understand-

ing (Hume), 229
ensoulment, as condition of

personhood, 438
enthymeme, 117
Equal Exchange Coffee, 94
equal probabilities, 309–310
Equal Protection Clause, 411–412
equality, 433–434, 470–471
equivocation, fallacy of, 337–343, 344
Esslin, Martin, 96–98
Establishment Clause, 480
evaluative language, 69–75

in close analysis, 80, 86, 87, 88
vs. descriptive terms, 71–72
linguistic acts and, 70
standards in, 57–62, 70–71, 216
terms, 71
used to perform conversational acts,

70
used to perform speech acts, 69–70

“even if” in arguments, 67
“even though” in arguments, 67
everyday language, 169–175
evidence, 404
evolution, theory of, 387, 479, 481–493,

519, 519n. See also natural selec-
tion, theory of

exaggeration, 42
excess verbiage, trick of, 106
exclusive disjunction, 160–161, 286–288
excuses, 11–12, 87
existential commitment, 189–190,

203–204
expected monetary value, 303–306
expected overall value, 306–308
expected utility, 307
explanations, 7–10

in arguments from analogy, 270
causal, 232
conservative, 261–262
definition, 7
depth of, 260
example of, 10–13

excuses as, 11–12, 87
inferences to the best explanation,

258–263
vs. justification, 7
modesty of, 261
power of, 260
scientific reasoning and, 477
simplicity of, 261

explicit performatives, 24, 27
expressing emotion, 70
extent, 65
“Extraterrestrial Impact, An”

(Alvarez/Asaro), 13–16

factor, causal, 249
factors, weighing, 444
faint praise, damning with, 40
fairness, 441
fairness slippery slope arguments,

325–327
fallacies of ambiguity, 333–351

ambiguity, 109, 333–337
definitions, 343–351
disambiguating, 335, 344
equivocation, 337–343, 344
semantic ambiguity, 334
syntactic ambiguity, 334

fallacies of probability, 277–282. See also
probability

gambler’s fallacy, 277–278
heuristics, 279–282
improbable events, 278–279

fallacies of relevance, 353–367
ad hominem arguments, 354–360,

375–380
appeals to authority, 10–11, 82, 360–364
appeals to emotion, 366–367
appeals to fear, 366
appeals to pity, 365–366
appeals to popular opinion, 365
appeals to tradition, 365
red herring, 106, 354

fallacies of vacuity, 369–380
begging the question, 370–375
circularity, 369–370
self-sealers, 375–380

fallacies of vagueness, 317–331
heaps, 320–322
slippery slopes. See slippery slope

arguments
uses of unclarity, 317

fallacy of affirming the consequent, 478

n = footnote

551

INDEX

fallacy of composition, 393
fallacy of hasty generalization, 221
false alarms, 292, 296
false dichotomies, 390–391
false negatives, 296
false positives, 292, 296
falsifiable, 261
falsification of data, 362–363
fear, appeals to, 366
Federal Communications Commission,

418
Feinberg, J., 463
Feldman, F., 470
feminism, 380
fetus, status of, 435–436, 438–440,

442–444, 461–463. See also abortion
First Amendment, 480
Five Minute Whodunits (Smith), 134–137
“Five Reasons to Believe in God”

(Craig), 506–512
Flew, Antony, 379
FLO theory, 463–472

analogy with animals argument, 468
appeal to cases argument, 466–468
argument from interests, 469–470
considered judgment argument, 465
contraception objection, 471–472
future like ours, 463–465
potentiality objection, 468–469
problem of equality, 470–471
worst of crimes argument, 465–466

following from, 57, 60, 141. See also
validity

“for” in arguments, 52
formal analysis of arguments, 141–142
forms, argument. See argument form
forms, categorical, 182–190
Foundation for the Study of Infant

Death (FSID), 300
Fourteenth Amendment, 411–412
Franklin, Benjamin, 116–117
fraternities, 90–92
fraud, 363
free will, 519–520
freedom, 516–517
Freud, Sigmund, 357, 377
fundamental principles, 125–127
fundamental rights, 413
Furman v. Georgia, 128–129
“future like ours”. See FLO theory

Gallup poll, 223
gambler’s fallacy, 277–278

“garden path sentences,” 20
Gartner, Stefan, 14
Gaunilo, 399
Geller, Uri, 361
general conditional, 232
generalizations, 215–229

causal, 232
induction vs. deduction, 215–219
statistical, 219–225
statistical applications, 225–229

genetic code, as condition of
personhood, 438–439

genetic fallacy, 357–358, 360
Gillie, Oliver, 363
Ginsburg, Ruth Bader, 419, 427
“Gnawing Question Is Answered, A”

(Downey), 273–274
God. See also religious reasoning

Abraham and Isaac story, 517–518
agnostics on, 505
Aquinas on, 375
arguments from analogy, 275–276
atheists on, 389
belief in, 312–313
complex order of universe, 508
existence of, 398, 506–511
Flew on, 379
Job and, 359–360
as known and experienced, 511
objections to belief in, 511–518
objective moral values, 509
origin of the universe, 507–508
in philosophical reasoning, 527–528
predestination, 513–514, 513n,

518–521, 518n
resurrection of Jesus, 510

“God Truly Exists” (Anselm), 398
Gödel’s theorem, 529
going upstairs, 377
Good Samaritan analogy, 456–458
Goodman, Paul, 101–102
Gordon, Mary, 445–446
Gosse, Philip Henry, 379
Gould, Stephen Jay, 363
grace, doctrine of, 515
Gracely, Edward J., 312
grading, 101–102
gradualism, 439, 474n2
grammatical conventions, 21
grammatical rules, 20
Grand Staircase-Escalante National

Monument, 92, 115–116
Gratz v. Bollinger, 425–430

n = footnote

552

INDEX

“Greek Interpreter, The” (Doyle),
266–267

“Greeks Should Be Co-Ed” (Beebe), 90–92
Grice, Paul

on conversational rules, 37, 42–43, 353
on Cooperative Principle, 34–35,

40–41, 49n8
“Logic and Conversation,” 49n7
on validity, 171–172

Grutter v. Bollinger, 419–424, 427
guard, disappearing, 66
guarding, 63, 65–66

in close analysis, 80, 83–85, 86, 88
in deep analysis, 107–108

gun rights, 100–101, 393–395

Haeckel, Ernst, 483–484
Harlan, John, 410–411
Harman, Gilbert, 276n1
hasty generalization, fallacy of, 221
Hawking, Stephen, 508
Hawkins v. McGee, 31–32
head in the sand objection, 528
heaps, 320–322
hedging, 66
hell, 514–516, 515n
heuristics, 279–282
Hick, John, 511
hidden premises, 121
Hilbert, David, 507
Hill, Ray, 300
Hill, Tom Jr., 340
Hitler, Adolf, 384, 514, 520n25
Holmes, Sherlock, 259–260
homosexuality, 341–343
“Homosexuality and Natural Law”

(Leiser), 341–343
horrors, parade of, 85, 328
horseshoe, 164
House of Representatives, 77–90
“however” in arguments, 67
Hoyle, Fred, 507–509
Hume, David, 221, 224, 229
Hussein, Saddam, 15–16
Huxley, Henry, 483–484
Huxley, Thomas, 387
hyperbole, 42
hypothesis, 260
hypothetical cases, 410
hypothetical syllogism, 167

identical twins, 363
ideologies, as self-sealing, 377

“if and only if” sentences, 174
“if not” in arguments, 175
if-then statements, 53–55, 163. See also

conditionals
ignorance, decisions under, 308–313
illocutionary acts, 49n4
immediate inferences, 192–194, 209
impersonal normative justification, 5
importance, in arguments from

analogy, 268
imprecision, 318
improbable events, 278–279
incest, 437–438. See also abortion
inconsistency over time, 356–357
indefeasible, 217
independence, 288–289, 300
indicative conditionals, 54, 82, 163, 172
inductive arguments, 59, 216, 237
inductive generalizations, 215–219
inductive inference, 216, 227
inductive reasoning, 229
inductive standards

arguments from analogy, 267–276
causal reasoning, 231–255
choices, 303–314
vs. deductive arguments, 215–219
defeasibility, 227–228
induction vs. deduction, 215–219
inference to the best explanation,

257–267
legal reasoning and, 410
Legionnaires’ disease example,

248–249
opinion polls, 219–220
probability, 277–302
sampling, 221–224
statistical applications, 225–229
statistical generalizations, 219–225
strength as, 216–218
sufficient and necessary conditions,

236–238, 243
inferences

arguments from analogy, 267–276, 408
to the best explanation, 257–267

informality of behavior, argument from,
533–534

initial conditions, 8
innocent until proven guilty, 431
insinuations, 66
insufficient reason, rule of, 309
intelligence, inheritance of, 362–363
intelligent design, 480, 492. See also

creationism

n = footnote

553

INDEX

interests, argument from, 469–470
Iran, 105–106, 116
Iraq, 15–16
Iraq war, 73, 390
irony, 42, 87
“Is Eakins Our Greatest Painter?”

(Russell), 96
Isaac and Abraham, story of, 520–521

Japanese Americans, 413
Jastrow, Robert, 509
Jefferson, Professor, 529–530
Jefferson, Thomas, 384
Jesus Christ, 510
Job, 359–360
Johnson, Luke, 511
joint test, 238–240
Jones, John E. III, 480
Journal of Molecular Evolution, 490
Julius Caesar (Shakespeare), 45, 73
justifications, 4–7, 10–13, 258–259

Kahneman, Daniel, 221
Kamin, Leon, 363
Kant, Immanuel, 462
Kennedy, Anthony, 422, 425
Kenny, Anthony, 507
Kerry, John, 226–227, 390
Kitcher, Philip, 480, 494–504
Kitzmiller v. Dover Area School District, 480
knowledge, definition of, 383–384
Korematsu v. United States, 413
Kremer, Jacob, 510
Kucinich, Dennis, 75
Kyl, Representative, 77–90, 112–113, 328

Lady Lovelace’s objection, 532–533
Landon, Alf, 222–223
Land’s End advertisement, 95
language, 17–49, 51–75. See also

arguments; evaluative language
argument markers, 51–53, 54, 80–81, 88
assuring, 63–65, 80–83, 87–88,

107–108
convention and, 17–19
conversational acts, 32–41
discounting, 63, 66–68, 80–81, 83–84,

87–88
evaluative, 69–75
guarding, 63, 65–66, 80, 83–85, 86, 88,

107–108
if-then statements, 53–55, 163

linguistic acts, 17, 19–22, 26–27,
48n1, 70

logical vs. everyday, 169–175
of probability, 282
rhetorical devices, 42–45, 46–47, 86,

180–181
speech acts, 22–32
spin doctoring, 72–73

large numbers, law of, 278
legal reasoning, 403–432

burden of proof, 404, 430–432
components of, 404–411
law of discrimination, 411–430
questions of fact, 404–405, 433
questions of law, 405–411

Legionnaires’ disease example, 245–250
legislative intentions, 406
legitimate and compelling state

interest, 413
Leiser, Burton, 341–343
level of commitment, 65
Lieberman, Joe, 73
“Life (and Death) on Mars” (Davies),

98–99
Lincoln, Abraham, 19
linguistic acts, 17, 19–22, 26–27, 48n1, 70
linguistic principles, 119–120
Lister Oration, 529
Literary Digest, 222–223
“Living with Darwin” (Kitcher),

494–503
locutionary act, 48n1
logic. See categorical logic;

propositional logic
“Logic and Conversation” (Grice), 49n7
logical language, 169–172
logically equivalent, 193
London, 366
lotteries, 303–304, 306–307
Ludemann, Gerd, 511
lung cancer, 252

Mackie, J.L., 509
major premise, 195
major term, 195
“Make It 18” (Selznick), 102–103
manner, rule of

definition, 36, 38
violations of, 41, 106

marginal utility, 307
marginal value, 307
Marquis, Don, 459–474
Mars, life on, 98–99

n = footnote

554

INDEX

Marshall, Thurgood, 415
Marxism, 357, 377
material conditional, 165
mathematical objection, 528–529
mathematical relationship, 232
Matthews, Chris, 116
maximax rule, 310
maximin rule, 310–311
McCain, John, 116
Meditation XVII (Donne), 43
“Mere Matter of Deduction, A” (Smith),

134–135
metaphors, 42–43
Method of Concomitant Variation,

251–252
Metro Broadcasting v. FCC, 418
Mill, John Stuart, 232–233, 251, 338,

374–375
Miller, Zell, 366, 390
Mill’s methods, 232–233
Minimally Decent Samaritan, 455–458
minor premise, 195
minor term, 195
Misquoting Jesus (Ehrman), 521n32
misses, 296
modal logic, 171
modern logic, 189–190, 203–204
modesty of explanation, 261
modus ponens, 58
“Molecular Machines: Experimental

Support for the Design
Inference” (Behe), 481–493

monetary value, expected, 303–306
Monty Python, 3
moral beliefs, 360, 406, 509
“Moral Choice, A” (Gordon), 445–446
moral disagreements, 92–94, 433–434
moral principles, 433–434
moral reasoning, 433–475

abortion. See abortion
analogical reasoning in ethics,

442–444
moral disagreements, 433–434
problem clarification, 434–435
weighing factors, 444

moral relevance, 462
Morgenbesser retort, 384
“Murder in a London Flat” (Smith),

135–136
“must” in arguments, 82
mutually exclusive, 286
“The Myth of the Computer” (Searle),

536–541

narrative, 7
National Rifle Association (NRA),

393–395
natural law, 341–343
natural selection, theory of, 379–380,

480, 481–493. See also evolution,
theory of

Neanderthals, 273–274
necessary condition test (NCT),

232–233, 240–243
application of, 246–250
causal reasoning, 233–235, 237–238

necessary conditions, 232–235
negation, 150–153, 285
negative propositions, 183
negatives, universal, 183
“nevertheless” in arguments, 67
New Merriam-Webster Pocket Dictionary,

333
Newton, Isaac, 346, 482
Nietzsche, Friedrich, 254–255, 360,

367n3, 509
nonpropositional conjunction, 145
normality, 243–244
North Korea, 365
“not always” in arguments, 212n1
“not” in arguments, 151–152, 212n1
nuclear power, 362
nuclear weapons, 15–16, 105–106, 167

obfuscation, 317
objections, raising, 86
objective moral values, 509
Occam’s razor, 261
O’Connor, Sandra Day, 326, 418,

419, 425
oil drilling, 92–94
“only if” in arguments, 212n2
opinion polls, 219–220
“or” in arguments, 150, 160
Origin of Species, The (Darwin), 481–483,

486. See also natural selection,
theory of

original sin, 516
overall value, expected, 306–308
overstatement, 42
Oxford American Dictionary, 343–344

Paley, William, 275–276
parade of horrors, 85, 328
parallel reasoning, refutation by,

392–399
particular affirmatives, 183

n = footnote

555

INDEX

particular negatives, 183
particular propositions, 183
Pascal, Blaise, 312–313
patterns in arguments, 54
Paul, St., 514n, 517n
Peirce, Charles Sanders, 276n1
performative verbs, 27, 49n5
performatives, 23–27
perjury, 349–351
permutations, 288–289
personal justification, 5
personhood, conditions of, 438–439
petitio principii, 374
philosophical reasoning, 523–542

argument from consciousness,
529–530

argument from continuity in the
nervous system, 533

argument from informality of
behavior, 533–534

arguments from various disabilities,
530–532

computers’ ability to think, 523–541
“Computing Machinery and Intelli-

gence,” 524–536
God and, 527–528
heads in the sand objection, 528
Lady Lovelace’s objection, 532–533
mathematical objection, 528–529
“The Myth of the Computer,” 536–541
theological objection, 527–528

“Piece of ‘God’s Handiwork’, A”
(Redford), 92–94, 115–116

pity, appeals to, 365–366
Plato, 383–384
“Playing Games with Eternity: The

Devil’s Offer” (Gracely), 312
Plessy v. Ferguson, 389, 407–411, 412
plus sign, 114, 204
politics, and spin doctoring, 72–73
polls, opinion, 219–220
popular opinion, appeals to, 365
positive conclusions, 240–242
positive correlation, 251
potentiality objection, 468–469
Potter, Stewart, 128–129
Powell, Colin, 15
Powell, Lewis, 415–417, 418, 425–426, 429
power of explanation, 260
precedents, 407–411
precising definitions, 345–346
predestination, 513–514, 513n, 518–521,

518n

predicate nominative, 192
predicate term, 192, 195
prediction, 8, 232, 258, 478
preferential treatment quota, 418
prejudice, 223–225
premises

acceptance of, 220
arrangement of subarguments,

111–115
begging the question, 370–373
circularity and, 369–370
clarification of terms, 109–111
in close analysis, 82
in deep analysis, 106–107, 127–133
definition, 3–4
equivocation and, 267–269
false conclusions and, 147–148
guarding and, 65–66
hidden, 121
major, 195
minor, 195
reconstruction of arguments, 125–126
refutation, 381–382, 392–395
rejection of, 6–7
soundness and, 60
standard form and, 7–8, 56
suppressed, 116–125
validity and, 57–59, 60, 63, 142,

147–148, 156–159, 170–171
in Venn diagrams, 190–192

preponderance of evidence, 404, 431
prescribing action, 70
prima facie case, 431
probabilistic version of statistical

syllogism, 230n4
probability, 277–302, 303–313

a priori, 232, 283–284
Bayes’s theorem, 291–302
conditionals, 285, 296, 301
conjunction, 67, 142–149, 169, 285–286
in choices, 303–313
disjunction with exclusivity, 160–161,

286–288
equal probabilities, 309–310
gambler’s fallacy, 277–278
heuristics, 279–282
improbable events, 278–279
language of, 282
laws of, 285–291
negation, 150–153, 285
series with independence, 288–289

probability phrases, 65
probability scale, 282

n = footnote

556

INDEX

problem clarification, 434–435
problem of equality, 470–471
process of elimination, 58, 153–154
pro-choice argument, 437–441. See also

abortion
pro-life argument, 435–437. See also

abortion
“Proposal to Abolish Grading, A”

(Goodman), 101–102
propositional conditionals, 53–55, 163,

165, 168, 172
propositional conjunction, 145
propositional connectives, 142–162

conjunction, 67, 142–149, 169, 285–286
definition, 142
disjunction, 150, 154, 169
exclusive disjunction, 160–161,

286–288
negation, 150–153, 285
truth-functional connectives, 154–156
truth-functionally equivalent,

161–162
validity testing, 156–160, 171, 191

propositional form, 143–144
propositional logic, 141–178

argument form in, 147–148
vs. categorical logic, 179–180
conditionals, 53–55, 162–178
formal analysis of arguments,

141–142
validity and, 147–149

propositional variables, 179
propositions, 183
prosecutor’s fallacy, 301
psychic powers, 361, 376
psychoanalytic theory, 377
purpose, 89

quality, rule of
constraining rules of quantity, 40
contingent facts, 117–119
definition, 35
and rhetorical devices, 42, 43
violations of, 46

quantity, rule of
constrained by rule of quality, 40
contingent facts, 117
damning with faint praise, 40
definition, 35
in legal cases, 47
linguistic principles, 120
and rhetorical devices, 42–43
violations of, 46, 106, 150, 172, 174, 210

questions of fact, 404–405, 433
questions of law, 405–411
quotas, 418

racial segregation, 389
raising objections, 86
Randi, James, 361
range of moral principles, 434
rape, 437–438, 442–444. See also abortion;

violinist analogy, and abortion
ratio decidendi, 408
rationality, as condition of personhood,

438–439
rational-relation test, 412, 413, 430
Reagan, Ronald, 167, 440, 445
reason markers, 52–53
reasoning, chain of, 112–114
reasons. See premises
reconstruction method, 122–124
red herring, 106, 354
Redford, Robert, 92–94, 115–116
reductio ad absurdum, 386–389
reference class, 226, 227–228
refutation, 381–399

counterexamples, 384–386
definition, 381
false dichotomies, 390–391
forms of, 381
by parallel reasoning, 392–399
reductio ad absurdum, 386–389
straw man, 68, 82–83, 390–391

Regents of the University of California v.
Bakke, 414–419, 425–426

Rehnquist, William, 415, 422, 425
relevance, fallacies of. See fallacies of

relevance
relevance, in arguments from analogy,

268
relevance, rule of

contingent facts, 118
and conversational implications,

38–39
definition, 35–36
fallacies and, 353
and rhetorical devices, 43
violations of, 41, 106, 170, 172

relevant disanalogies, 269
relevant factor, causally, 249
religious reasoning, 505–521. See also God

Abraham and Isaac story, 517–518
agnosticism, 505
complex order of universe, 508
existence of God, 506–512

n = footnote

557

INDEX

God as known and experienced,
510–511

grace, 517
hell, 514–516, 515n
objections to belief in God, 511–518
objective moral values, 509
origin of the universe, 507–508
original sin, 514
predestination, 513–514, 513n,

518–521, 518n
resurrection of Jesus, 510
slippery slope arguments in, 515

repetition, 106–107
“Reply to the Foregoing by a Certain

Writer on Behalf of the Fool, A”
(Gaunilo), 399

representative heuristic, 280
resurrection of Jesus, 510
reverse discrimination, 414. See also

affirmative action
rhetorical devices

in close analysis, 80–81, 86
conversational rules, 42–45
deception, 46–47

Richmond v. J.A. Croson Co., 418
rigorous testing, 240–242, 251
risk, decisions under, 308
Romney, Mitt, 105–106
Roosevelt, Franklin, 222–223
rules, of conversational acts, 34–37, 40–42
Ruse, Michael, 509
Russell, John, 96
Russert, Tim, 75
Rutherford, Ernest Lord, 362

Salinger, J.D., 353
sample size, 220–222
sampling, biased, 222–223
sarcasm, 42
Satan, 359–360
Scalia, Antonin, 422, 423, 425
Schwarzenegger, Arnold, 118–119
science, falsification of data in, 362–363
scientific reasoning, 477–504. See also

creationism, evolution, theory of;
intelligent design, theory of;
natural selection, theory of

explanations and, 477
scientific revolutions, 479–481
standard science, 477–479

scientific revolutions, 479–481
scope of moral principles, 434
screening test, 297

search warrant, 325–326
Searle, John R., 524, 536–541
Sedgwick, John B., 367n5
“seem” in arguments, 83
segregation, 389, 413–414
self-defense exception, 436–438,

448–450. See also abortion
selfishness, 377–378
self-sealers, 375–380
Selznick, Ben, 102–103
semantic ambiguity, 334
semantic conventions, 21
semantic rules, 20
sentience, as condition of personhood,

438
separate-but-equal doctrine, 412, 413–414
September 11 terrorist attacks, 366
series with independence, 288–289
“Seven Deadly Objections to Belief in

the Christian God” (Curley),
511–518

sexual relations, 349–351
Shakespeare, William, 45, 73
shallow counterexample, 383
silencers, 355–356
“Silver Blaze” (Doyle), 259–260
similes, 42
simplicity of explanation, 261
sin, 71
“since” in arguments, 52, 112
slave morality, 360, 367n3
slippery slope arguments, 322–331, 346

abortion and, 326, 439–441
capital punishment and, 326
causal slippery slope arguments,

327–331
conceptual slippery slope arguments,

322–324
domino arguments, 328
fairness, 325–327
parade of horrors, 85, 328
religious reasoning and, 515

Smith, Stan, 134–137
smoking, 252
“so” in arguments, 54, 112
social activity, conversational acts as, 32
socialism, 110–111
Socrates, 383–384
Sommers, Christina Hoff, 380
sophistry, 85
sorites argument, 320
sororities, 90–92
soundness, 60, 369–370

n = footnote

558

INDEX

Souter, David, 419, 427
specialized knowledge, 245
speech acts, 22–32

analysis of, 30–31
completion of, 29
evaluative language and, 69–70
fail to come off, 28
feelings/desires/beliefs of speaker,

29–30
vs. linguistic acts, 26–27
performatives, 23–27
position/role of speaker/audience, 29
purpose of, 30
rules of, 28–32
special circumstances, 29
types of, 26–28
void, 28

spin doctoring, 72–73
Spinoza, Benedict de, 506
Squad Helps Dog Bite Victim and Other

Flubs from the Nation’s Press,
336–337

square of opposition, 205–209
contradictories, 206
contraries, 206–207
subalterns, 208–209
subcontraries, 207–208

standard form of arguments, 7–8,
55–56, 105–108, 122–124. See also
argument form

standard science, 477–479
standing features, 249
standpoint, 77, 89
stare decisis, 407
Starr, Kenneth, 349–351
state action, 412
state interest, 413
statistical applications, 225–229
statistical generalizations, 219–225

acceptance of premises, 220
biased sampling, 222–223
prejudice/stereotypes, 223–225
sample size, 220–222

statistical syllogism, 230n4. See also sta-
tistical applications

statutes, 405–406
stereotypes, 223–225
Stevens, John Paul, 415, 419
Stewart, John, 331
Stewart, Potter, 415
“still” in arguments, 67
stipulative definitions, 344–345
Stradonitz, Kekule von, 358

Strauder v. West Virginia, 412
straw men, 68, 82–83, 390–391
strength, as inductive standard,

216–218
strict scrutiny test, 413–414, 430, 432
Studies in the Way of Words (Grice),

49n7
subalterns, 208–209
subarguments, arrangement of,

111–116, 123
subcontraries, 207–208
subject, changing, 36
subject term, 192, 195
subjective conditionals, 163
substitution instance, 143–144
sufficient condition test (SCT),

241–242, 243
application of, 246–247, 249, 250
causal reasoning, 233–235,

236–237
as rigorous test, 251

sufficient conditions, 233–235
suppressed premises, 116–125. See also

premises
argument reconstruction, 123
and circularity, 370
contingent facts, 117–119
enthymeme, 117
evaluative, 120–121
reconstruction method, 122–124
uses and abuses of, 121–122

suspect classification, 413
syllogisms, 194–202

abortion and, 462
classical theory, 210–212
definition, 195
disjunctive, 153
probabilistic version of, 230n4
problems in applying theory of,

201–202
testing for validity, 197–201
Venn diagrams for, 196, 210–212

symbols
ampersand, 143
horseshoe, 164
therefore, 7–8, 56
tilde, 151
wedge, 150

syntactic ambiguity, 334
syntactic conventions, 21
syntactic rules, 20
A System of Logic (Mill), 374–375
systematic definitions, 346–347

n = footnote

559

INDEX

tangents, 105–106
target feature, 236
television, 96–98
term clarification, in deep analysis, 109
terrorist attacks, 366
The Catcher in the Rye (Salinger), 353
Theaetetus, 383–384
“Theft at the Art Museum, A” (Smith),

136
theists, 505
“then” in arguments, 52
theological objection, 527–528
theoretical definitions, 346–347
thereby test, 24
“therefore” in arguments, 51–52, 56
“therefore” symbol, 7–8, 56
Thomas, Clarence, 422, 423, 425
Thomson, James, 474n4
Thomson, Judith Jarvis, 442–443,

446–459, 460–461
“though” in arguments, 67
“Threat Down, The” (Colbert), 366
“Three Fallacies About Gun Rights”

(Buttrey), 100–101
Through the Looking Glass (Carroll), 18
tilde, 151
torture, 348–349
tradition, appeals to, 365
Treatise of Human Nature (Hume), 229
“trick” argument, 84
trick of abusive assurances, 64–65
trick of excess verbiage, 106
trick of the disappearing guard, 66
“Trivia and Significa” (Smith), 137
true positives, 292
Truman, Harry, 223
truth, 19, 35, 59, 123
truth conditions, 142–143
truth function, 154–156
truth tables

for conditionals, 163–169
logical connectives and, 161–162
testing for validity, 157–158
vs. Venn diagrams, 191

truth-functional connectives, 154–156
truth-functionally equivalent,

161–162
tu quoque, 357
Turing, Alan M., 523–536
Turing test, 539
Tversky, Amos, 221
Twilight of the Idols (Nietzsche),

254–255

uncertainty, decision under, 308
uncertainty, exploitation of, 439–440
unclarity, uses of, 317
understatement, 42
unfairness, 441
United Nations, 105–106
United Steelworkers of America v. Weber,

418
universal affirmatives, 183
universal claims, 382
universal conclusion, 220
universal discounting, 377
universal negatives, 183
universal propositions, 183
universe, origins of, 507–508
University of California at Davis, 414
University of Michigan, 418
“unless” in arguments, 175
unsoundness, 60
unstated premises, 121
U.S. v. Cruikshank, 412
Utilitarianism (Mill), 338
utility, expected, 307

vacuity, fallacies of. See fallacies of
vacuity

vagueness, 109, 318–320, 440. See also
fallacies of vagueness

vagueness, fallacies of. See fallacies of
vagueness

validity, 57–59
argument reconstruction, 123
for categorical arguments,

190–202
and circularity, 369–370
concept of, 141–142
as deductive standard, 216–218
vs. following from, 60
Grice on, 171–172
in propositional logic, 147–149
vs. soundness, 60
testing for, 156–160, 171, 191
testing syllogisms for, 197–201

various disabilities, argument from,
530–532

Venn, John, 181
Venn diagrams

basic categorical forms, 183–184
categorical propositions,

180–183
in classical theory, 203–212
contradictories, 187–188, 203–205,

206

n = footnote

560

INDEX

Venn diagrams (continued)
contraries, 206–207
definition, 181
immediate inferences, 192–194, 209
square of opposition, 205–209
subalterns, 208–209
subcontraries, 207–208
for syllogisms, 196, 210–212
testing syllogisms for validity,

197–201
vs. truth tables, 191
validity for categorical arguments,

190–202
viability, as condition of personhood,

438–439
Vietnam War, 328
violinist analogy, and abortion,

442–444, 446–459

“Wager, The” (Pascal), 312–313
“Watch and the Watchmaker, The”

(Paley), 275–276
water, 351n5
wedge, 150
“whereas” in arguments, 67
“while” in arguments, 67
White, Byron, 415
White, Tim, 273–274
Wilberforce, Bishop, 387
Wolf, Carl, 337
worldviews, as self-sealing, 377
worst of crimes argument,

465–466
Wright, N.T., 510

“yet” in arguments, 67
Yick Wo v. Hopkins, 407–411, 412

n = footnote

May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part.
Copyright 2010 Cengage Learning, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Front Cover

Title Page

Copyright

CONTENTS

PREFACE

PART I: HOW TO ANALYZE ARGUMENTS

CHAPTER 1 USES OF ARGUMENTS

What Arguments Are

Justifications

Explanations

Combinations: An Example

CHAPTER 2 THE WEB OF LANGUAGE

Language and Convention

Linguistic Acts

Speech Acts

Conversational Acts

Summary

CHAPTER 3 THE LANGUAGE OF ARGUMENT

Argument Markers

Arguments in Standard Form

Some Standards for Evaluating Arguments

A Problem and Some Solutions

Evaluative Language

CHAPTER 4 THE ART OF CLOSE ANALYSIS

An Extended Example

CHAPTER 5 DEEP ANALYSIS

Getting Down to Basics

Clarifying Crucial Terms

Dissecting the Argument

Arranging Subarguments

Suppressed Premises

The Method of Reconstruction

Digging Deeper

An Example of Deep Analysis: Capital Punishment

PART II: HOW TO EVALUATE ARGUMENTS: DEDUCTIVE STANDARDS

CHAPTER 6 PROPOSITIONAL LOGIC

The Formal Analysis of Arguments

Basic Propositional Connectives

Conditionals

CHAPTER 7 CATEGORICAL LOGIC

Beyond Propositional Logic

Categorical Propositions

Validity for Categorical Arguments

Appendix: The Classical Theory

PART III: HOW TO EVALUATE ARGUMENTS: INDUCTIVE STANDARDS

CHAPTER 8 ARGUMENTS TO AND FROM GENERALIZATIONS

Induction versus Deduction

Statistical Generalizations

Statistical Applications

CHAPTER 9 CAUSAL REASONING

Reasoning About Causes

Sufficient Conditions and Necessary Conditions

Applying These Methods to Find Causes

Concomitant Variation

CHAPTER 10 INFERENCE TO THE BEST EXPLANATION AND FROM ANALOGY

Inferences to the Best Explanation

Arguments from Analogy

CHAPTER 11 CHANCES

Some Fallacies of Probability

The Language of Probability

A Priori Probability

Some Rules of Probability

Bayes’s Theorem

CHAPTER 12 CHOICES

Expected Monetary Value

Expected Overall Value

Decisions Under Ignorance

PART IV: FALLACIES

CHAPTER 13 FALLACIES OF VAGUENESS

Uses of Unclarity

Vagueness

Heaps

Slippery Slopes

CHAPTER 14 FALLACIES OF AMBIGUITY

Ambiguity

Equivocation

Definitions

CHAPTER 15 FALLACIES OF RELEVANCE

Relevance

Ad Hominem Arguments

Appeals to Authority

More Fallacies of Relevance

CHAPTER 16 FALLACIES OF VACUITY

Circularity

Begging the Question

Self-Sealers

CHAPTER 17 REFUTATION

What Is Refutation?

Counterexamples

Reductio Ad Absurdum

Straw Men and False Dichotomies

Refutation by Parallel Reasoning

PART V: AREAS OF ARGUMENTATION

CHAPTER 18 LEGAL REASONING

Components of Legal Reasoning

The Law of Discrimination

Grutter v. Bollinger

Gratz v. Bollinger

Burden of Proof

CHAPTER 19 MORAL REASONING

Moral Disagreements

The Problem of Abortion

Analogical Reasoning in Ethics

Weighing Factors

CHAPTER 20 SCIENTIFIC REASONING

Standard Science

Scientific Revolutions

CHAPTER 21 RELIGIOUS REASONING

“Five Reasons to Believe in God”

“Seven Deadly Objections to Belief in the Christian God”

CHAPTER 22 PHILOSOPHICAL REASONING

“Computing Machinery and Intelligence”

“The Myth of the Computer”

CREDITS

INDEX

Expert paper writers are just a few clicks away

Place an order in 3 easy steps. Takes less than 5 mins.

Calculate the price of your order

You will get a personal manager and a discount.
We'll send you the first draft for approval by at
Total price:
$0.00